JP2021192817A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of improving amusement of players.SOLUTION: First dynamic display means dynamically displays first identification information in first display means in which the first identification information is displayed for indicating a determination result by first determination means capable of performing a first determination. If the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result is stop displayed in the first display means, a first privilege game is performed by privilege game performance means. It is so configured that game state setting means can set a first game state in which the first determination is easy to be performed and a second game state in which the first determination is more difficult to be performed than in the first game state. If a prescribed first termination condition is established, or a prescribed second termination condition is established, on the basis of a termination condition established earlier, the first game state is to be terminated by termination means. Accordingly, amusement of players can be improved.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some that perform advantageous privilege games.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-217766

However, there was a demand for further improvement in the interest of games.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 displays a first determination means capable of executing the first determination and a first identification information for showing a determination result by the first determination means. 1 Display means, a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information on the first display means, and the first identification information for showing a specific first determination result on the first display means. Is stopped and displayed, the privilege game execution means for executing the first privilege game, the first game state in which the first determination is easily executed, and the first determination are more difficult to execute than the first game state. It has a second gaming state and a game state setting means that can be set, and when a predetermined first ending condition is satisfied, or when a second ending condition different from the first ending condition is satisfied, The ending means has an ending means for terminating the first gaming state, and the ending means is the first gaming state based on the previously established ending condition of the first ending condition and the second ending condition. Is to terminate.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 displays a second determination means capable of executing a second determination and a second identification information for showing a determination result by the second determination means in the gaming machine according to claim 1. The second display means and the second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information for a predetermined second period are provided, and the privilege game execution means is the second display means. When the second identification information for showing a specific second determination result is displayed on the display means, the second privilege game is executed, and the first identification information is displayed by the first dynamic display means. The second identification information can be dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means while the dynamic display is being performed, and the first termination condition is executed by executing the first determination means. Is satisfied, and the second end condition is satisfied when the second determination means is executed.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the first execution number measuring means for measuring the number of executions of the first determination means and the second for measuring the execution number of the second determination means. A summing means for summing the execution number measuring means, the measurement result of the first execution number measuring means, and the measurement result of the second execution number measuring means, and the first gaming state are continuously set. As one period, the first period setting means for setting a predetermined number of times obtained by adding the number of executions of the first determination means and the number of executions of the second determination means, and the number of executions of the first determination means are the predetermined number of times. A state in which the execution determination means for determining whether the dynamic display is being executed is provided, and the state determination means is used to determine that the dynamic display is being executed. When the second determination is executed by the second determination means, the second end condition is satisfied before the second determination is executed.

The gaming machine according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the first end condition is that the dynamic display corresponding to the case where the number of times the first determination means is executed becomes the predetermined number of times is completed. After that, it is established at any time until the first determination corresponding to the case where the number of executions of the first determination means becomes larger than the predetermined number of executions is executed.

In the gaming machine according to claim 5, in the gaming machine according to claim 4, the third determination means capable of executing the third determination and the third identification information for showing the determination result by the third determination means are displayed. The third display means, the third dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the third identification information on the third display means, and the third display means for showing the specific third determination result to the third display means. The third privilege game execution means for executing the third privilege game when the identification information is stopped and displayed, and the third determination means has the first game state set by the game state setting means. In this case, it is easier to execute the third determination than in the case where the second gaming state is set.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the first determination means capable of executing the first determination, the first display means for displaying the first identification information for showing the determination result by the first determination means, and the first display means. The first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information on the first display means and the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result on the first display means are stopped and displayed. In this case, the privilege game execution means for executing the first privilege game, the first game state in which the first determination is easy to be executed, and the second game state in which the first determination is more difficult to be executed than the first game state. , And a game state setting means that can be set, and when a predetermined first end condition is satisfied, or when a second end condition different from the first end condition is satisfied, the first game state is satisfied. The ending means has an ending means for ending the first gaming state, based on the ending condition of the first ending condition and the second ending condition, which is satisfied earlier. be.

Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine according to claim 1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second determination means capable of executing the second determination, the second display means on which the second identification information for showing the determination result by the second determination means is displayed, and the second display means. The second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for a predetermined second period, and the privilege game execution means for showing the second display means a specific second determination result. When the identification information is displayed, the second privilege game is executed, and the second dynamic display means is performed while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. The second identification information can be dynamically displayed, the first termination condition is satisfied by executing the first determination means, and the second determination means is executed. The second termination condition is satisfied.

Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine according to claim 2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the measurement results of the first execution count measuring means for measuring the execution count of the first determination means, the second execution count measuring means for measuring the execution count of the second determination means, and the first execution count measuring means. And the measurement result of the second execution number measuring means, the summing means, and the execution number of the first determination means and the first as the first period in which the first gaming state is continuously set. (2) The first period setting means for setting a predetermined number of times including the number of executions of the determination means and the dynamic display corresponding to the case where the number of executions of the first determination means becomes the predetermined number of times are being executed. When the second determination means is executed by the second determination means in a state where the state determination means determines that the dynamic display is being executed. In addition, the second end condition is satisfied before the second determination is executed.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine according to claim 3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first end condition is that the number of executions of the first determination means is more than the predetermined number of times after the dynamic display corresponding to the case where the number of executions of the first determination means becomes the predetermined number of times is completed. It is established at any time until the first determination corresponding to the case where the number increases.

Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine according to claim 4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the third determination means capable of executing the third determination, the third display means on which the third identification information for showing the determination result by the third determination means is displayed, and the third display means. When the third dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information and the third identification information for showing the specific third determination result are stopped and displayed on the third display means, the third privilege game is executed. The third privilege game execution means is provided, and the third determination means is set when the first game state is set by the game state setting means, and the second game state is set. This makes it easier to execute the third determination.

Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the effect displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the ending of the jackpot game in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content during the probability change in the first embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the second special symbol is non-variable after the start of the hit fluctuation of the first special symbol in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents when the second special symbol is non-variable, and (b) is the first embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of a small hit by the 2nd special symbol in RUSH in a form. (A) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the second special symbol is changing after the start of the hit change of the first special symbol in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents when the second special symbol is changing. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content when the 2nd special symbol stopped the fluctuation during the hit variation of the 1st special symbol in a form. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a state in which the result of the variation display of the first special symbol is a jackpot A during RUSH in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a state in which the RUSH in the first embodiment is shown. It is a figure which showed an example of the state that the result of the variation display of the 1st special symbol became a jackpot C or a jackpot D. (A) is a diagram showing the card forgetting warning screen in the first embodiment, and (b) to (d) are timing charts showing the timing of displaying the card forgetting warning screen in the first embodiment. be. It is a schematic diagram which schematically showed the game flow of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the ROM of the main control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit random number table, and (c) is a schematic diagram. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the random number table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the big hit type selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of the variation pattern selection table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of a normal table schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving / probability variation table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the latent probability table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern table schematically. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the stop display mode selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the additional effect selection table. It is a block diagram of the electric structure of the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) to (c) are explanatory views explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surfaces B to D. (A) to (c) are explanatory views explaining the back surface E. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a drawing list schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol change start processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation execution process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation stop processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol change start processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 deviation variation process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in a main control unit. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation execution process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation stop processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 disengagement stop process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the through-gate passage processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit operation setting process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prize processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the stop type command reception process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the state command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the hit-related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot related processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the small hit-related processing which is executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the remaining number update process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the temporary stop-related processing executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the fluctuation resumption processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process for special figure 1 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process for special figure 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the various counter update processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. (A) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. .. It is a flowchart which showed the ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the rush inrush command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the additional effect command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. (A) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in the display control device. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the jackpot C is won in the probable change state in the second embodiment. FIG. 1 is a relationship diagram between the game content of the special figure 1 game and the grant privilege after the probability change state in the second embodiment is set. (A) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the second special symbol is changing when the hit symbol of the first special symbol in the second embodiment is stopped, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents when the second special symbol is stopped. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of the 2nd special symbol stop while the hit symbol stop of the 1st special symbol in a form. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the structure of the ROM of the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the jackpot type selection 2 table schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection 2 table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the loss type selection table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of 2 tables for time saving and probability change schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol change stop process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol determination period setting process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the fixed time executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol motion stop processing 2 executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol determination period setting process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 disengagement stop process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the remaining number update process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the temporary stop-related process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the resumption process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the symbol determination-related processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the various counter update process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 1 is a relationship diagram between the game content of the special figure 1 game and the grant privilege after the probability change state in the third embodiment is set. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the end of the jackpot in the third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the first variation after the jackpot. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the third variation after the jackpot in the third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the fourth variation after the jackpot in the third embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the third variation after the jackpot when the third variation after the jackpot in the third embodiment is a jackpot, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the third variation after the jackpot, and (b) is between 1 to 3 fluctuations after the jackpot. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content of the 2nd change after the big hit when the special figure 1 small hit is won. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the structure of the ROM of the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number 3 table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit random number 3 table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the big hit type selection 3 table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection 3 table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection 3 table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability variation 3 table, and (c) is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the probability variation A table schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probabilistic B table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probabilistic C table, and (c) is a probabilistic D table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of 3 tables for latent accuracy schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the third embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the probability change effect selection table schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the deviation processing of special figure 1 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows 1st special symbol change stop process 3 executed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a special figure 1 disengagement stop process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the prize information-related processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot related process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the big hit end processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process for probability variation executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the game flow of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the special figure 1 jackpot is won during the probability change state in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is the flow when the time is shortened during the probability change state. It is a timing chart shown. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the RUSH rush due to the arrival of the reduced number of times in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is the RUSH in the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation in the fourth embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content to notify. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents when the fall lottery is won during the latent state in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a special figure during the latent state in the fourth embodiment. It is a figure which showed the display screen at the time of winning a big hit in 2. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content in super RUSH in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the ROM of the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 4 table in the 4th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a fall lottery table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a latent mode selection table, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a fall lottery table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the notification selection table schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows 1st special symbol change stop processing 4 executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol change stop processing 4 executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the state command process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the latent mode setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the fall effect setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the small hit-related process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the fall notification processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 4 for special figure 1 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 4 for special figure 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the variable winning device for small hits. It is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device for small hits. It is an operation diagram which saw the variable winning device for small hits from the back side. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the special figure 1 jackpot is won during the probability change state in the fifth embodiment. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the game in the case of short-time digestion in the probable change state in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display content at the time of a small hit in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content during the small hit game. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents when the ball passes through the fall gate during the small hit game in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content when the ball passes through the fall gate during the small hit game. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content when it did not pass. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the end of the small hit, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content in the latent state (invincible mode). It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection 5 table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the operation scenario storage area. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit entrance passage processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fall gate passing process executed by MPU in the main control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the state command process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the hit | related process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the ball passing-related processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 87, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to perform a bullet game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 12) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as the opening / closing axis of the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses 16a is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 12) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach effect. Or it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the time when the prize ball is being paid out and the time when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending unit 40 is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening thereof is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 61, 62, and a general prize. It is configured by assembling a port 63, a first ball entry port 64, a second ball entry port 640, a variable winning device 65, an out port 66, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, etc., and the peripheral portion thereof is an inner frame 12 ( It is attached to the back side of (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of wood made by laminating thin plate materials, and is formed so that the player cannot see various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first entry opening 64, the second entry opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged in a game board. It is fixed from the front side of 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board 13, so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired) which is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails. This is the area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 12) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is attenuated and bounced back toward the center.

A first symbol display device 37 (37A, 37A,) provided with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display along the outer peripheral surface of the outer rail 62 on the upper right side of the front view of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 2). 37B) is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 (37A, 37B) displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 12), and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Will be. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 (37A, 37B) indicates whether the ball has entered the first ball entry port 64 (upper first ball entry port 64b1, lower first ball entry port 64b2). It is configured to be used properly according to whether or not the ball has entered the second entry port 640. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 2, but in the present embodiment, the upper first ball entry port 64b1 and the lower first ball entry port 64b2 are provided as a lottery opportunity for the first special symbol. In the following description, when both the upper first ball entry port 64b1 and the lower first ball entry port 64b2 are shown, the term of the first ball entry port 64 will be simply used for explanation.

Specifically, when the ball enters the first entry port 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated, while when the ball enters the second entry port 640, the ball enters the second entry port 640. The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic state, the time saving state, or the normal state by the lighting state, and indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the lighting state. Indicates whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable change jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, a missed symbol, or a small hit symbol by the lighting state, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state. , The 7-segment display device displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and the error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a ball is entered in either the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 15R time reduction jackpot, and 2R time reduction jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to (sets) a probability variation state in which the maximum number of rounds is a high probability state of a special symbol and a high probability state of a normal symbol after a jackpot of 15 rounds. There, "2R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a probability variation state in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 2 rounds. Further, in the "15R time saving jackpot", after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, the time saving state in which the special symbol is in the low probability state and the normal symbol is in the high probability state is changed for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 50 times). ) It is a jackpot to be set, and "2R time saving jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is set to a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 50 times) after the jackpot of 2 rounds. ..

Further, the "high probability state of the special symbol" is a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, in other words, a state of the game in which the transition to the special gaming state is easy. The "high probability state of the normal symbol" is a state in which the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is increased, in other words, a state of the game in which the electric accessory 64a is easily released.

In addition, in the gaming state (probability change state, time saving state) in which the "high probability state of the normal symbol" is set, not only the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) increases, but also the lower first entrance ball opening 64b2 As the time for opening the electric accessory 64a associated with the above, a longer time is set as compared with the gaming state (latent state, normal state) in which the "low probability state of the normal symbol" is set. When the electric accessory 64a is in the open state (open state), the ball is moved to the lower first entry port 64b2 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 64a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy to win a prize. Therefore, during the probable change state or the time saving state, the ball can easily win a prize in the lower first entry slot 64b2, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

It should be noted that, in the probable change state or the time saving state, the opening time of the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entry port 64b2 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, once. The change may be made so that the number of times that the electric accessory 64a is opened by hitting is increased from the normal state. In addition, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, and the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entry port 64b2 is opened for the time and one hit. At least one of the number of times the 64a is opened may be changed. In addition, the time during which the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entry port 64b2 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 64a is opened at one time are not changed during the probability change state or the time saving state. It may be changed so that only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased as compared with the normal state.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are triggered by the entry of a ball into either the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 (starting winning). A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as "display device") that displays a variable display of the third symbol (decorative symbol) while synchronizing with the variable display, and a sphere to the through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs that variablely display a normal symbol (second symbol) with a passage as a trigger is provided.

Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from the opening opened in the center of the center frame 86.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having a size of 9 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 12), for example, the upper, middle, and lower three. Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 12), whereas the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the decorative third symbol is dynamically displayed so as to correspond to the dynamic display of the first symbol (special symbol) displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and the third symbol is dynamically displayed. By configuring the display mode to notify the player, the display mode during the dynamic display period is unified with respect to the dynamic display of the first symbol (special symbol) whose operation is controlled by the main control device 110. For example, even if the processing load of the main control device 110 is reduced by repeatedly turning on and off in 0.1 second increments), the movement of the third symbol set by the voice lamp control device 113 By variably setting the target display mode based on, for example, the lottery result of the first symbol (special symbol), it is possible to suggest to the player that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit (first). The effect mode using the three symbols) can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device lights the "○" symbol and the "×" symbol as normal symbols (second symbol (not shown)) alternately for a predetermined time each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67. It is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entry port 64b2 is provided. It is configured to be in the operating state (operated to the open state) for a predetermined time.

The time required to display the fluctuation of the second symbol is shorter in the high probability state (probability change state, time saving state) of the normal symbol than in the low probability state (normal state, latent state) of the normal symbol as the game state. Is set to be. As a result, during the high-probability state of the normal symbol, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than in the low-probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entrance ball opening 64b2.

Therefore, during the probabilistic change state and the time saving state, it is possible to set the game state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the lower first entry slot 64b2. In this embodiment, the dynamic display mode of the third symbol and the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 are set depending on whether the probabilistic state is set as the gaming state or the time saving state is set. The same display mode is set as the background mode displayed on the screen, and it is configured to make it difficult for the player to grasp the current game state. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of guessing the current game situation.

Further, in the present embodiment, the dynamic display mode of the third symbol and the background mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 are the same in a plurality of gaming states in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. It is configured to set the display mode of. Therefore, when the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is unified, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping what the current gaming state is depending on the operating status of the electric accessory 64a. be able to.

It should be noted that, in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the hit probability is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 64a per hit are increased. 1 When the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the ball entry port 64b2, the time required for the variation display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is set shorter than in the normal state in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state. Further, the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 64a per hit may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board in the area on the right side (right area) of the variable display device unit 80. The through gate 67 is configured so that a part of the balls launched on the game board can pass through the balls flowing down the game board. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a hit, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery result is not correct. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol hold lamps are provided for the maximum number of hold lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be two or more. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Next, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment will be briefly described. In the first embodiment, a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol), a probabilistic state (a high probability state of a special symbol and a high probability state of a normal symbol), and a time saving state (special). Four gaming states are provided: a low-probability state of the symbol and a high-probability state of the normal symbol) and a latent state (a high-probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol). Then, the latent state is configured to be the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

That is, when the latent state is set, the variable time for showing the lottery of the second special symbol, which is more likely to be a lottery result more favorable to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol, is set in another game state. By stipulating that it be shorter than when it is done, the lottery that is advantageous to the player can be executed most efficiently.

In the first embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol. The first specific winning opening 65a of the winning device 65 is opened for a predetermined period (1.5 seconds × 1 time, 0.2 seconds × 6 times, or 0.06 seconds × 8 times). For this reason, in the lottery of the second special symbol, even if the jackpot is not won, there are many chances to get the ball into the first specific winning opening 65a and win the prize ball. It is more advantageous than the lottery. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplification of the explanation, the result of the out-of-lot lottery in which the first specific winning opening 65a is opened will be referred to as a "small hit".

In the lottery of the second special symbol, in addition to the big hit, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened even if it becomes a small hit, so that the prize ball is in a latent state where the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is short. Can continue to increase. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that it will be in a latent state. In a general gaming machine, the probabilistic state is the most advantageous gaming state, but in the present embodiment, the latent probabilistic state is more advantageous than the probabilistic state, so that a novel game property can be provided.

Further, in the first embodiment, the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous). A variable method is adopted). As a result, even if the variable display of one special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the other special symbol can be executed without waiting for the end of the variable display, so that the lottery of the special symbol can be executed more efficiently. can. In addition, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are fluctuating at the same time, if one of them stops fluctuating with a stop symbol of a big hit or a small hit, the other fluctuating display shows the remaining fluctuation time or lottery. Regardless of the result, the stop symbol is displayed as a stop. As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem that the other variable display is fixedly displayed as a hit or a small hit during the execution of the big hit or the small hit, and the big hit or the small hit is started in duplicate.

Here, with reference to FIG. 2, various configurations provided in the game area in the first embodiment and the flow of the ball launched toward the game area will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 of the present embodiment is configured to divide the game area into a left side area and a right side area by a variable display device unit 80 arranged in the center of the game area. ..

In the present embodiment, the launched ball does not pass through the foul ball prevention valve 68 until the operation handle 51 is rotated 20 degrees (clockwise) from the initial position (state in which the player is not rotating). The ball is fired with a degree of firing intensity. Therefore, the launched ball finally flows back in the launch path formed between the outer rail 62 and the inner rail 61 and becomes a foul ball. The foul ball that flows backward and flows down passes through the start position of the launch flow path (the lower left end of the outer rail 62 shown in FIG. 2) and communicates with the upper plate 17 (see FIG. 1). (Not shown) flows down and is recirculated to the upper plate 17. With this configuration, even if a foul ball is generated when the player operates the operation handle 51 to launch the ball with a desired firing intensity, the foul ball remains in the firing path and the game is played. It is possible to suppress the hindrance to.

Next, when the operation amount (rotation amount) of the operation handle 51 is in the range of 20 to 80 degrees from the initial position (the state in which the player is not rotating), the ball is launched with a firing intensity sufficient to flow down the left side region described above. In the range of 81 degrees to 120 degrees (81 degrees to 120 degrees, which is the maximum rotation amount of the operation handle 51), the ball is launched with a firing intensity sufficient to flow down the right side region described above.

That is, the present embodiment is configured so that the area where the ball flows down can be changed based on the operation amount of the operation handle 51, that is, based on the operation of the player. Further, although details will be described later, in the first embodiment, when a gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set as the gaming state, the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is set so that the ball flows down the left side region. Instead of playing a game that is adjusted (hereinafter referred to as a left-handed game), a game that is performed by adjusting the operation amount of the operation handle 51 so that the ball flows down the right area (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed game) is performed. It is configured as follows. With this configuration, the player may maintain the operation handle 51 rotated to the upper limit (rotated 120 degrees) while the gaming state advantageous to the player is set. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the player play an appropriate game.

Next, the left side region of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. Details will be described later, but in the first embodiment, the game state is a normal state (special symbol low probability state: normal symbol low probability state), a time saving state (special symbol low probability state: normal symbol high probability state), and a probabilistic state. It is configured to be set to either (special symbol high probability state: normal symbol high probability state) or latent state (special symbol high probability state: normal symbol low probability state). In addition, the big hit game state executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is won in the big hit and the small hit game state executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is won in the small hit are set. It is configured.

Among them, when the normal state, the time saving state, and the probable change state are set as the game state, the variable display device unit 80 is used to perform a left-handed game in which the ball is made to flow down to the left side area of the game board 13. A right-handed game in which the player is guided to the game method using the display screen of the provided third symbol display device 81, and when the latent state is set, the ball is made to flow down to the left area of the game board 13. Is configured to guide the player to the game method using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 so as to perform the above. Further, during the big hit game state or the small hit game state, the player's game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) is guided according to the game state before the winning.

As a guidance method for each game method (left-handed game, right-handed game), for example, a game method suitable for the current game state may be configured to be displayed at all times, or only when the game method is switched after switching. It may be configured to display the game method. Further, when a game method (left-handed game in this embodiment) that is easily set for a long period of time is regarded as a normal game among the left-handed game and the right-handed game, and a game method other than the normal game (right-handed game) is performed. The game method may be constantly guided and displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the guide display may not be performed when the left-handed game is to be performed.

When there are two types of game methods to be selected by the player as in the present embodiment, the other game method can be guided by not displaying the display mode for guiding one game method. That is, it is possible to guide a plurality of game methods depending on whether or not one display mode is displayed. In this embodiment, the display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is used to guide the player to the game method, but the present embodiment is not limited to this. As described above, by not displaying a specific display mode, a configuration for notifying the player of the game method may be used, or a configuration for notifying the player using voice or a lamp may be used.

A through gate 67 and a general winning opening 63 are arranged in the left side region of the game board 13. Further, at a lower position of the variable display device unit 80, an upper first ball entry port 64b1 is provided so that a ball flowing down the left side region can enter the ball. A lower first ball entry port 64b2 to which an electric accessory 64a is attached is provided at a position below the upper first ball entry port 64b1. In this electric accessory 64a, when the ball is won in the normal symbol (second symbol) lottery executed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the ball enters the lower first entrance slot 64b2. It is configured to variably move from a closed state (first state) where the ball is difficult (impossible) to an open state (second state) where the ball can easily (possibly) enter the lower first entry port 64b2. ing.

As described above, in the first embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) can be executed (the change of the special figure 1 is not executed, and the big hit game and the small hit game are executed. When a ball enters the upper first entry port 64b1 or the lower first entry opening 64b2 in a state where the ball has not been entered), the lottery shown in FIG. 1 is executed. That is, the entry of a ball into the upper first entry port 64b1 or the lower first entry opening 64b2 is an opportunity for executing the lottery of the first special symbol.

In addition, in a state in which the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) cannot be newly executed (a state in which the change in special figure 1 has already been executed, or a big hit game or a small hit game has been executed). When a ball enters the upper first entry port 64b1 or the lower first entry opening 64b2, it has a storage means for storing the right of the ball to enter, up to a predetermined number (4). ing.

Therefore, even while the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) is being executed, the player can be made to continue playing the game, so that the operation of the game can be improved. In this embodiment, only the storage means for storing the right of the ball to enter and the first special symbol are provided.

80% of the balls flowing down the left side area by the left-handed game pass through the through gate 67, and about 8% of the launched balls (8 balls out of 100 balls) enter the upper first entrance 64b1. A spherical flow path is formed by a plurality of structures such as nails and windmills so as to make a sphere. Further, when the electric accessory 64a is in the closed state, about 0% of the balls enter the lower first entry port 64b2, and when the electric accessory 64a is in the open state, the lower first entry port 64a. The ball flow path is formed so that the number of balls entering 64b2 is about 25%. That is, it is difficult for a ball to enter in the order of the lower first entry port 64b2 (electric accessory 64a open state), the upper first entry port 64b1, and the lower first entry port 64b2 (electric accessory 64a closed state). It is configured to be.

As described above, the upper first entry slot 64b1 and the lower first entry opening 64b2 are configured to give the player a privilege of paying out a prize ball in addition to the privilege of executing the lottery of the first special symbol. It is configured to pay out four prize balls to the player every time one ball is inserted. In this embodiment, the same number (4) prize balls are given regardless of whether the ball enters the upper first entry port 64b1 or the lower first entry opening 64b2. However, the prize balls may be set to different numbers for each of them.

On the other hand, in the right area of the game board 13, a second ball entry port 640 and a first variable winning device 65 are provided. The second entry port 640 is configured so that the lottery of the second special symbol is executed when the ball enters, and a plurality of balls are entered so that about 50% of the balls flowing down the right area enter. A spherical flow path is formed by nails. Here, the ball that did not enter the second entry port 640 flows down toward the first variable winning device 65 provided below the right side region.

Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in the present embodiment, in the state where the normal state is set as the gaming state, the time (variable time) from the execution of the lottery of the second special symbol to the display of the lottery result is long. In the state where the fluctuation time of the time (10 minutes) is set and the latent state is set, the short fluctuation time (1 second) is set.

That is, when the normal state is set as the game state, the right-handed game is performed rather than the ball being inserted into the first entrance 64 in order to perform the left-handed game and execute the lottery of the first special symbol. It is easier to put the ball into the second entrance 640 in order to execute the lottery of the second special symbol, but since the fluctuation time for a long time (10 minutes) is set, the game efficiency is improved. It gets very bad. Therefore, in the normal state, the player plays a left-handed game and executes a lottery for the first special symbol.

In addition, since the second entry port 640 is set with one prize ball, a right-handed game is performed in a state where the normal state is set, and a ball fired in a right-handed game at a rate of about 50%. Even if the ball is inserted into the second entry port 640, the number of balls does not increase.

Further, when the time saving state or the probabilistic change state is set as the gaming state, the normal symbol becomes a high probability state, and the electric accessory 64a is easily released. However, since the through gate 67, which triggers the lottery of the normal symbol for opening the electric accessory 64a, is provided only in the left side region, the lower first entry port 64b2 makes it easier for the ball to enter than in the normal state. It is configured to allow the player to perform a left-handed game in order to allow the ball to enter the ball.

On the other hand, in the state where the latent state is set as the game state, the normal symbol becomes a low probability state and the electric accessory 64a becomes difficult to open, and as described above, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is short. Since the fluctuation time of (1 second) is set, it is an appropriate game to perform a right-handed game and execute a lottery of the second special symbol. Here, in the first embodiment, only the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to win a small hit (winning probability of about 1/2). When a small hit is won, the first variable winning device 65 is opened for a predetermined period (for example, 1.5 seconds) as a small hit game, and 10 for one ball that has entered the first variable winning device 65. It is configured so that individual prize balls are awarded.

That is, when the latent state is set as the game state, the player continuously executes the right-handed game to draw a second special symbol aiming at winning a small hit, and a small hit game. Can be executed continuously.

As shown in FIG. 2, a second variable winning device 650 is arranged at the lowermost part of the game area. The second variable winning device 650 operates so that the rotary door 650f operates toward the front side when a big hit is won by a special symbol lottery, and the ball is in an open state in which a ball can win a prize in the second specific winning opening 650a. Is to be done. The second variable winning device 650 is configured so that a ball that has flowed down the left side region by a left-handed game and a ball that has flowed down the right side area by a right-handed game can be evenly entered. Therefore, when the jackpot game in which the second variable winning device 650 is opened is executed, the gaming method before the jackpot game is executed may be continuously executed, and the gaming method may be performed for the player. Can be suppressed from being complicatedly changed.

When a ball enters the above-mentioned first entry port 64 (upper first entry opening 64b1 and lower first entry opening 64b2), a first entry opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13. ) Is turned on, a big hit lottery is performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 12) due to the turning on of the first ball entrance switch, and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A. Is done.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the second entrance 640, the second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, which is caused by the on of the second entrance switch. A big hit lottery is made by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 12), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, the first entry port 64 is a winning opening in which four balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, and the second entry opening 640 is a winning opening in which one ball is paid out when a ball enters. It is one of the winning openings paid out as a prize ball. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the upper first entry port 64b1 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the first entry port 64. Was made the same (both 4) and different from the number of prize balls (1) paid out when the ball entered the 2nd entry port 640, but the ball entered the upper 1st entry opening 64b1. The number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the lower first entry port 64b2 may be different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the lower first entry port 64b2.

In this case, for example, the number of prize balls in the upper first entry port 64b1 is set to four, and the number of prize balls in the lower first entry opening 64b2 is set to two, so that a normal state in which it is difficult for a ball to enter is set. In this case, the privilege for the ball entering the upper first entry port 64b1 is increased, and the ball is more likely to enter when a specific game state (probability change state, time saving state) is set. Even if a ball frequently enters the 1 entry slot 64b2, the player may not be allowed to acquire an excessive prize ball, and the number of prize balls in the upper 1st entry slot 64b1 is 4 and the lower 1st. The number of prize balls in the entry port 64b2 may be set to 5, and when a specific game state (probability change state, time saving state) is set, a large privilege may be given to the player.

Further, the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the second entry port 640 (for example, both are 5). It may be configured as (pieces).

An electric accessory 64a is attached to the lower first ball entry port 64b2. The electric accessory 64a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 64a is in a closed state (regulated state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the lower first entry port 64b2. There is. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display (normal symbol lottery) of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory The 64a is in the open state (allowable state), and the ball can easily enter the lower first entry port 64b2.

As described above, in the probabilistic state and the time-saving state, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than in the normal state, and the time required to display the variation of the second symbol is shorter, so that the variation display of the second symbol is performed. In, the symbol "○" is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 64a is in the open state (allowable state) increases. Further, during the probable change state or the time saving state, the time for opening the electric accessory 64a is also longer than that in the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball can easily enter the lower first entry port 64b2 in the probable change state or the time saving state as compared with the normal state.

As described above, the lower first entry port 64b2, that is, the entry port to which the electric accessory 64a is attached, is in a state where the ball can easily enter according to the set gaming state (first state). It is possible to set a state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter (second state). That is, from the viewpoint of the ease of entering the ball, the first state is an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the second state is a disadvantageous gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player (more disadvantageous than the first state). It becomes.

Here, when the ball enters the first entry port 64 (when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed) and when the ball enters the second entry opening 640 (the lottery of the second special symbol). The probability of winning a jackpot is the same, and if a low probability state of a special symbol is set, a lottery that wins a jackpot is executed with a predetermined low probability (for example, 1/280). When the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the lottery that becomes a big hit is executed with a predetermined high probability (for example, 1/30) that is easier to win than the low probability state. However, the type of jackpot selected (set) in the case of a jackpot is set to be different between the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment sets the method of launching the ball (game method) to the player as "left-handed (left-handed game)" and "right" according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. It can be changed to "hit (right-handed game)". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the ball is hit for the player, so that the game can be enjoyed.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win (win) in any of the winning openings (entrance openings) 63, 64b1, 64b 2, 65a, 640, 650a is shown through the out opening 66. You will be guided to a ball discharge channel that does not. The out port 66 is arranged below the lower first ball entry port 64b2. In the first embodiment, the game area has one out port 66, but other configurations may be used, and two or more out ports 66 may be provided.

By providing a plurality of out ports 66 in this way, it is necessary to form a ball flow path for finally consolidating the balls launched in the game area to one place (the place where the out ports 66 are arranged). Since it is eliminated, the degree of freedom in arranging various devices constituting the game area can be increased. Specifically, for example, it is preferable to provide an out port dedicated to the ball flowing down the left side region and an out port dedicated to the ball flowing down the right side region. Further, when a plurality of out ports are provided, it is preferable to provide a notification means for notifying the player that the ball entry port is an out port. As a result, a situation occurs in which no privilege is given even though the ball enters the ball entry port (actually the out port) provided in the game area, which suppresses the player from being uncomfortable. be able to.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the board boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is provided with a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 to pay out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 12). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 12). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol (decorative symbol dynamically displayed corresponding to the dynamic display of the first symbol) is composed of nine types of main symbols with numbers "1" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of numbers "1" to "9" on the rear symbols that imitate various animals. Specifically, for example, the number "1" is attached to the rear design imitating an elephant, and the number "2" is attached to the rear design imitating a lion. By making the display mode in which the third symbol is combined with the rear symbol and the number in association with each other in this way, the display mode of the rear symbol is displayed to the player even during the dynamic display of the third symbol (the rear symbol is displayed. The type of the 3rd symbol can be roughly grasped by the color, outline, size, etc.), and when the 3rd symbol is stopped and displayed, the number attached to the rear symbol can be identified to ensure the type of the 3rd symbol. Can be grasped.

In the first embodiment, the combination of the rear symbol and the number forming the third symbol is not changed, but the combination of the rear symbol, the display mode, and the number may be changed. good. With this configuration, it is possible to display a lottery result different from the lottery result (type of the third symbol) predicted by the player while the third symbol is dynamically displayed, and the player can be displayed. On the other hand, it is possible to provide a game that does not get tired. Further, by setting the combination pattern of the rear symbol and the number as the third symbol to be regularly changed according to, for example, the lottery result of the special symbol or the set gaming state, the third symbol can be used. It is possible to improve the prediction accuracy of the game content based on the display mode (combination of the rear symbol and the number) that is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of making the prediction.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed, and the variable display is completed. It is configured to generate a jackpot later. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned. Further, in the present embodiment, a small hit is won as a lottery result of a special symbol, and when the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, the main symbol is a specific combination (for example, "341"). Is stopped and displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, the lottery result is made easy for the player to understand by making the combination of the main symbols to be stopped and displayed different according to the lottery result of the special symbol, but the present invention is limited to this. Without this, for example, the same main symbol may be stopped and displayed depending on whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit or a small hit.

As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, and about 3/4 of the upper side is the main display area Dm for variable display of the third symbol, and the rest. Approximately 1/4 of the lower side is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

In the main display area Dm, three symbol rows L1, L2, and L3, which are upper, middle, and lower, are displayed. In each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in each symbol row L1 to L3, and each symbol row L1 to L3 is periodically scrolled in the left-right direction (usually from right to left) to display a variable display. Is done. In particular, in the upper symbol row L1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row L2 and the lower symbol row L3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the three columns of left, middle, and right for each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. The vertical line on the left side of the main display area Dm, the vertical line in the middle stage, and the vertical line on the right side are set as effective lines V1 to V3, respectively. In addition, the downward-sloping diagonal line and the upward-sloping diagonal line in the main display area Dm are set as effective lines V4 and V5, respectively. In each game, the third symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) on the effective lines V1 to V5 in the order of the upper symbol row L1 → the lower symbol row L3 → the middle symbol row L2. This stop display state is held for at least 1 second. In this way, by displaying the stopped 3rd symbol for a certain period (1 second or more), whether or not the player is a combination of the 3rd symbols corresponding to the jackpot (the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot). It is possible to prevent overlooking (whether or not there is). Further, if a combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, the same combination of main symbols) is aligned on the effective lines V1 to V5 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot moving image (opening effect) is displayed as a jackpot.

In addition, if the combination of the third symbols displayed as stopped is a combination corresponding to the disconnection and there is a reserved ball, after the stop display (confirmed display) for 1 second, the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is displayed. Is started. If there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved balls corresponding to the oldest incoming balls in time.

On the other hand, if the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the deviation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) for 1 second in the state where the reserved ball does not exist, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. .. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters either the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed (confirmed display), a demo effect (customer waiting demo screen) indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. ..

It is rare that the player does not enter the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 even though the player has continuously fired the ball for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). In most cases, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) because the player has quit the game, and the pachinko machine 10 has not played the game at all. to cause. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the stop display of the third symbol, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on the presence or absence of the display of the demonstration effect. On the other hand, if a new ball enters the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 640 before the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the new ball enters the ball. The variable display of the third symbol is executed.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm. The sub-display area Ds is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) whose fluctuation has not been executed among the balls entered in the first entry port 64. In the present embodiment, the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 while the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol is performed by the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37). In this case, the number of balls entered is held up to 4 times, and the number of held balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. The number of reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is currently suspended. In this embodiment, only the variable display of the first special symbol can be held, and the variable display of the second special symbol is not stored on hold. Therefore, in the sub-display area Ds, only the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed.

In the display screen shown using FIG. 4A, the sub-display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm, and the third symbol is dynamically displayed (variable display) in the main display area Dm. The effect (variable effect) including the above is executed, and the advance notice effect, the display of the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like are executed in the sub-display area Ds. It is not necessary to form each area shown in 1. For example, when the player is watching the effect for suggesting whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the display area of the sub display area Ds is used. It may be configured to perform a powerful effect by reducing (erasing) and enlarging the display area of the main display area Dm. On the other hand, when the effect of changing the display mode of the reserved symbol or the game guidance explaining the future game contents is emphasized and executed in the sub display area Ds, the display area of the main display area Dm is reduced and the sub By enlarging the display area of the display area Ds, it may be configured to perform an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

Further, depending on the set gaming state and the effect mode being executed, an area for displaying the number of reserved symbols in the main display area Dm and an area for executing the advance notice effect may be formed, or a sub-area may be formed. The display area Ds may be provided with an area for executing the variable display of the third symbol.

Next, an example of the display content actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 4 (b). On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols and sub-symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. Further, on the right side and the left side of the display area Dm, three parts of the main symbol and three parts of the sub symbol are displayed. These show the lottery result of the first special symbol in the normal state. Further, in the upper central portion of the main display area Dm, a small area Dm1 for displaying the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed. In this small area Dm1, variation display of three third symbols having a simple aspect composed of only the numbers "1" to "9" is executed. Even in this small area Dm1, the big hit is started by stopping and displaying the three third symbols composed of the same numbers. It should be noted that the display of the third symbol showing the lottery result of the second special symbol in a simpler manner than the third symbol showing the lottery result of the first special symbol is basically displayed in the normal state and the probable change state. This is because the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, and the lottery for the second special symbol is rarely executed.

Therefore, the game result is displayed more clearly by configuring the variable display of the first special symbol, which is mainly executed, to be displayed in a larger display area. In the following description, the variable display of the special symbol mainly executed in each game state (in the normal state and the probabilistic state, the variable display of the first special symbol is applicable) is referred to as a main variation, and in each game state. The variable display of the special symbol that is rarely executed when the regular game method is performed (in the normal state or the probabilistic state, the variable display of the second special symbol is applicable) is called a sub-variation.

Further, as will be described in detail later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the state where the probability variation state is set, it is a long period (up to 10 minutes). The variable display (dynamic display) is executed, and the gaming state is configured to shift from the probable change state to the latent state at the timing when the variable display is started. Then, during the period in which the latent state is set (the period from the execution of the variable display that becomes the jackpot to the end of the variable display and the start of the jackpot game), the second special symbol is drawn. It is configured to execute a game aiming at a small hit. Therefore, when the latent state is set as the gaming state, the variation display of the second special symbol becomes the main variation, and the variation display of the first special symbol becomes the sub-variation.

In the small area Ds1 in the sub-display area Ds, the same number of reserved symbols imitating the face of a bird are displayed as the number of reserved balls of the first symbol. At the start of the variation display based on the holding ball corresponding to each of the reserved symbols, the effect of entering the inside of the house displayed on the right side in the small area Ds1 is executed. As a result, the player can easily understand that the variable display corresponding to the reserved ball has started. Further, in the small area Ds1, a notice effect is sometimes performed such that the reserved symbol performs a special operation or another character appears.

In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of held balls is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times. It may be set to the following or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the ball entering the second ball entry port 640 may be configured to be holdable. Further, instead of displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1, the reserved ball number is different by a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 5, the flow of the variable display effect of the third symbol in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 5 is a timing chart schematically showing the game state of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment and the content of the variation display effect executed in response to the variation status of each special symbol. Here, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be briefly described. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a variable display (dynamic display) for showing the lottery result of the first special symbol and a variable display (dynamic display) for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol. ) And can be executed at the same time (in parallel).

Then, when the probability variation state (high probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol) is set and the variation display corresponding to the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed, the high probability state of the normal symbol is executed. Is configured to shift to a low-probability state, and the gaming state shifts from a probabilistic state to a latent state. While this latent state is set, the variable display (dynamic display) period for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol is set short, so that many lottery of the second special symbol can be executed. It will be a period that can be done (Special Figure 2 Fluctuation Advantageous Period).

In the present embodiment, since the small hit is configured to be won with a probability of about 1/2 in the lottery of the second special symbol, the small hit is set during the period when the latent state is set as the game state. The small hit game that is executed when the player wins the game is frequently executed, and the game state is advantageous to the player who can win many prize balls (special figure 2 advantageous state).

As described above, the period in which the latent probability state is set in the present embodiment (special figure 2 variable advantageous period) is during the variable display period (dynamic display period) of the first special symbol won by the jackpot in the probable change state. Since (special figure 1 big hit is changing), the big hit game is executed when the special figure 2 advantageous state ends. In this way, since a plurality of states (special figure 2 advantageous state, jackpot game state) that are advantageous to the player are continuously set, the player is continuously given various benefits. Can be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a small hit is won by one special symbol (special figure 2) and the small hit game is executed, the fluctuation of the other special symbol (special figure 1) is interrupted (variation display period). The measurement is interrupted), and when the small hit game is completed, the measurement of the interrupted fluctuation display period is restarted. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the special figure 2 variable advantage period from being subtracted during the small hit game, and therefore, regardless of the number of small hit games executed during the special figure 2 variable advantageous period. It is possible to provide the player with a certain special figure 2 variable advantageous period.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result of one special symbol (special figure 1), the other special symbol (special figure 2) that is changing is stopped and displayed. It is configured to be forcibly stopped with. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a small hit game is executed during a big hit game.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control content for the change of the other special symbol is different depending on the lottery result of one special symbol. Specifically, if the lottery result of one special symbol is a big hit (a lottery result that can give the player the first privilege), the change of the other special symbol means that the lottery result is out of order. If it is stopped and displayed in the display mode shown and the lottery result of one special symbol is a small hit (a lottery result that can give the player a second privilege different from the first privilege), the other special symbol changes. Is stopped until the grant of the second privilege is completed (until the small hit game is completed), and is restarted after the grant of the second privilege is completed. In addition, if the lottery result of one special symbol is out of order, the change of the other special symbol is executed as it is.

With this configuration, the lottery content (lottery result, period until the lottery result is displayed) of the other special symbol can be changed based on the lottery result of one special symbol, and the player's It is possible to provide various playability.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a lottery result that can give a privilege to the player, the control content for the change of the other special symbol is changed according to the content of the privilege. Therefore, for example, in the case of a lottery result that gives the player the most advantageous privilege (big hit game), the lottery result corresponding to the change of the other special symbol being executed is the lottery result that gives the privilege. Even so, the fluctuation is forcibly stopped so that the lottery result is out of order, the player is suppressed from being given excessive benefits, and the lottery result (small hit) with less benefits given than the big hit game. In the case of, in order to prevent the privilege based on the lottery of the other special symbol from being given during the small hit game without changing the lottery result corresponding to the change of the other special symbol being executed, the variable display is performed. It is possible to interrupt only the measurement of the period.

Therefore, in a state where a plurality of special symbols (Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2) are fluctuating at the same time, the player is given the least advantageous privilege, and thus the most advantageous privilege to be given later is given. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the player is not able to do so, and it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player feels uncomfortable.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the latent state is set as the gaming state, a short-term (0.5 second) variable display period is set as the variable display period of the second special symbol (special figure 2). It is configured so that small hit games can be performed frequently. Then, the condition for setting the latent state as the gaming state is the condition where the latent state is set, and the condition for ending the latent state is the condition for winning the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol while the probability changing state is set. Is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot, and the jackpot game is executed. Therefore, the jackpot game is executed after the end of the first advantageous period, which is advantageous to the player who frequently executes the small hit game. The second game period will be set. Therefore, since the first advantageous period and the second advantageous period that are advantageous to the player can be continuously set, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game so that the first advantageous period is set.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 5 to 9, the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in each gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, when the jackpot gaming state is set as the gaming state, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 displays, for example, a round of the jackpot game currently being executed as the content of the jackpot game. A mode for displaying the number of rounds to indicate the number, a mode for displaying the amount of acquired balls to indicate the number of acquired balls, and a type for suggesting the type of the jackpot game being executed (the number of rounds, the game state set after the jackpot game is completed). The number of jackpots won in the period in which the non-normal state (probability change state, latent state, time saving state) is continuously set without setting the normal state as the suggestion display mode and the game state (so-called continuous chan number). ) Etc. are displayed. The jackpot game display mode is displayed.

Then, at the timing when the jackpot game ends (see FIG. 5A), when the jackpot type this time is the jackpot type (for example, jackpot A) in which the probability change state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot game ends, the figure. As shown in 6 (a), an effect mode (chance zone mode) aiming at setting a latent probability state advantageous to the player is displayed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 6A, the display contents of the end screen (ending screen) of the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 6A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the end screen (ending screen) of the jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 6A, on the ending screen of the jackpot game, a comment "Entering the chance zone !!" indicating that the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. Then, in the main display area Dm, the character 811 displayed during the period in which the probability change state or the latent probability state is set is displayed. This character 811 is configured so as not to appear (not displayed) during the period in which the normal state is set, and the player is in the period in which the character 811 is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is designed to be in a game state that is advantageous to the player (a game state that is more advantageous than the normal state).

With this configuration, the player can grasp the outline of the currently set gaming state by grasping whether or not the character 811 is displayed on the display screen, so that the game is easy to understand. Can be provided.

In addition, the comment "Aim for RUSH !!" is displayed to aim at setting the latent state in the main display area Dm. Further, in the guidance display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, the character "left-handed" is displayed as a guidance display mode for causing the player to perform a left-handed game. As a result, it is possible to easily make the player know that the left side game aiming at the left side area is performed when the probability change state is set. In the present embodiment, the second variable winning device 650, which is opened during the jackpot game, has both a ball fired by the left-handed game (a ball flowing down the left side region) and a ball fired by the right-handed game. , Characters (“left-handed”, “right-handed”) displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 during the jackpot game, which are arranged at positions where prizes can be won (downstream position of the game area (see FIG. 2)), that is, , The game method to be guided during the jackpot game is configured to be variable according to the game state before the jackpot game is executed.

Specifically, when the game state when the jackpot is won is determined and it is determined that the game state is the game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state) in which the left-handed game is guided, it is displayed as a guidance display during the jackpot. When "left-handed" is displayed and it is determined that the right-handed game is in the guided game state (latent state), "right-handed" is displayed as the guidance display during the jackpot. As a result, when the jackpot game is executed, it is possible to save the time and effort for the player to change the game method.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the special figure 1 display area Dm1 for displaying the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol and the special figure 2 display area for displaying the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol are displayed. Dm2 is formed, and according to the example shown in FIG. 6A, "777" is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 as a display mode corresponding to the jackpot game currently being executed (during the ending screen display). It is displayed. In the special figure 2 display area Dm2, "-" is displayed as a non-variable display mode indicating that the second special symbol is not variablely displayed.

In the present embodiment, if the special symbol has never been variablely displayed after the power is turned on, the above-mentioned non-variable display mode is displayed. By displaying this non-variable display mode, it is possible for the player to predict the past game history (variation history of the special symbol).

Although the present embodiment is configured to display the non-variable display mode described above, the present embodiment is not limited to this, and is configured to display a predetermined display mode (initial display mode) indicating deviation. It is also good, or when it is determined that the elapsed period since the last variable display was executed exceeds a predetermined period (for example, 30 minutes), the display displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 and the special figure 2 display area Dm2. The mode may be configured to be variably displayed in the initial display mode or the non-variable display mode.

Returning to FIG. 5, the explanation will be continued. In the state in which the probability variation state is set as the game state (see FIG. 5B), the game state is such that the lottery of the first special symbol can be easily executed by the left-handed game. That is, in the probabilistic state, since the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the electric accessory 64a is easily opened, and the ball is easily entered into the lower first entry port 64b2.

The contents of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in this probabilistic state will be described with reference to FIG. 6 (b). FIG. 6B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the display screen in the probable change state. As shown in FIG. 6B, the comment "in the chance zone" indicating that the current gaming state is in the probable changing state is displayed so as to scroll horizontally (from right to left) in the sub-display area Ds. Scroll.

Then, in the main display area Dm, an effect that the character 811 moves (runs) in the horizontal direction (from left to right) is displayed. Then, "left-handed" is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3, and a changing display indicating that the first special symbol is changing is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. Even at this point, the second special symbol is not newly changed from the state shown in FIG. 6 (a) (because the ball is not entered into the second entrance 640 by the right-handed game). , The non-variable display mode "-" is continuously displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a plurality of operation display patterns of the character 811 are stored in the probabilistic state, and the lottery result (hit / fail determination result) of the first special symbol in the probabilistic state is stored. The operation display pattern of the character 811 is set differently according to the situation. This makes it possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol will win the jackpot in the probable change state.

After the display screen shown in FIG. 6 (b) is displayed, when the variable display for showing that the lottery result of the first special symbol has won the big hit is executed, the display shown in FIG. 7 (a) is executed. The screen is displayed. FIG. 7A is a schematic diagram showing the display contents displayed when the variable display in which the jackpot is won is started in the probable change state. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the gaming state shifts from the probabilistic state to the latent state at the timing when the variation display indicating that the first special symbol has won the jackpot is started during the probable change state. It is configured as follows.

Therefore, in order to shift the gaming state to a state advantageous for the player (latent state) at the timing when the change of the first special symbol starts, the change of the first special symbol in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 of the display screen. While the variable display mode indicating that the display is being executed is displayed, the display mode of the effect symbol 813 (display mode of "333") for indicating that the game state has changed to the player is stopped. Will be done. As a result, the player can be made to think that the gaming state has changed from the probabilistic state to the latent state because the effect symbol 813 is stopped and displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, since the display mode similar to the display mode of the third symbol is used as the effect symbol display mode, the stop-displayed effect symbol display mode is a display for showing the lottery result of the special symbol. It can be thought of as an aspect.

This embodiment is configured so that a large number of small hit games can be executed by frequently executing the variable display of the second special symbol during the period in which the latent probability state is set. Therefore, at least during the period in which the latent probability state is set, "right-handed" for indicating the right-handed game to the player is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3. Then, the comment "RUSH rush !! Right-handed" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds to indicate that the latent state is set as the game state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect symbol displayed in the main display area Dm is stopped and displayed without changing the effect mode of the special figure 1 display area Dm1 at the start of the change of the first special symbol won by the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that the game state has changed according to the lottery result of the effect symbol.

Then, while the right-handed game is continuously executed in the latent state (during the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol), when the small hit is won by the lottery of the second special symbol, it is shown in FIG. 7 (b). As you can see, the effect mode for showing that the small hit was won is displayed. Here, the display contents when the latent probability state is set will be described with reference to FIG. 7 (b). FIG. 7B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the display screen in the latent state.

According to FIG. 7B, if a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol while the latent state is set (in RUSH), the first special symbol is in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. A variation display mode for suggesting that is in fluctuation (big hit fluctuation) is displayed, and a display mode "341" indicating that a small hit has been won is displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2. ..

Then, the treasure box 812 displayed as the effect mode in RUSH is opened, and "V" for indicating a small hit is displayed as the effect symbol 813 for indicating the game result from the inside. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the small hit is won by the second special symbol during the latent state (RUSH) and the small hit game is executed.

In this embodiment, the first variable winning device 65, which is rotated when a small hit is won, is provided in the right side region, and the game can be played by the same game method (right-handed) as in the latent state. It is configured as follows. With this configuration, even if the small hit game is frequently executed during the latent state, the player only has to continue the right-handed game, so that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand game. can.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the probability variation state, the latent probability state is set from the start of the jackpot fluctuation, and the latent probability state is set. Is set so that the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be efficiently performed.

Therefore, at the same time as the latent state is set, the player is notified of the period during which the latent state is set (based on the setting of the latent state) (FIG. 7 (a)). ))reference.

However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be changed at the same time, the first special symbol is also the second in the state where the probabilistic state is set. Both special symbols may fluctuate.

In such a case, even if the display mode indicating that the latent state (RUSH) is set at the timing when the latent state is set is displayed (see FIG. 7A), the second is currently changing. Until the special symbol stops fluctuating, the lottery for the second special symbol cannot be executed in the latent state, and there is a problem that the small hit game is not executed forever even in the RUSH state. There was a risk.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the condition for transition to the latent probability state is satisfied (when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol during the probability change state), the change status of the second special symbol (whether or not there is a change, (Fluctuating remaining period) is determined, and the timing for notifying that the RUSH state has been set is different based on the determination result.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 5 and 8, when the transition condition to the latent probability state is satisfied (when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol during the probability change state), the second special symbol ( The contents of the production when the special figure 2) is fluctuating will be explained. As shown in FIG. 5, if the second special symbol is changing at the time when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started in the state where the probability change state is set (see (c) of FIG. 5), the probability change A "super chance zone" with a higher expectation that the RUSH state is set is displayed rather than a "chance zone" for indicating the state.

Here, the display contents of the display screen in the "super chance zone" will be described with reference to FIG. 8A. FIG. 8A is a diagram when the change in which the jackpot is won in the first special symbol is executed during the second special symbol change in the probabilistic state. In other words, this "super chance zone" is a state in which the latent state is set as the game state, but the variation display of the second special symbol executed before the latent state is set is displayed. It is a display mode which shows the state which is not finished.

When the "super chance zone" is set, a comment indicating that the sub-display area Ds is "in the super chance zone" is displayed. Then, in the main display area Dm, the character 811 is displayed in a mode in which the character 811 is moving at a higher speed than in FIG. 6B, and the character 811 moving at a high speed is configured to easily find the treasure box 812.

Then, a "variable display mode" for indicating that the first special symbol is changing is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, and a latent state is set in the special figure 2 display area Dm2. The "variation display mode" that has been changing since the previous time is displayed.

Returning to FIG. 5, the explanation will be continued. The display screen of the "super chance zone" shown in FIG. 8A is displayed until the timing at which the special figure 2 fluctuation executed over the timing of shifting the gaming state from the probable change state to the latent probable state ends. When the special figure 2 fluctuation is completed (see FIG. 5 (d)), the “RUSH” rush screen for notifying the player that the “RUSH” has been rushed is displayed (see FIG. 8 (b)).

Here, with reference to FIG. 8B, the contents of the screen that has entered the “RUSH” via the “super chance zone” will be described. FIG. 8B is a schematic diagram schematically showing a screen that has entered the “RUSH” via the “super chance zone”. As shown in FIG. 8B, in the main display area Dm, the effect symbol 813 is displayed from the treasure box 812, and a display mode for notifying the player that the player has entered "RUSH" is displayed. Then, "right-handed" that guides the game method during the rush game is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3. At this point, the special figure 1 display area Dm1 displays a variation display mode for suggesting that the first special symbol is changing (big hit fluctuation), and the special figure 2 display area Dm2 shows an deviation. The display mode "346" is stopped and displayed.

Returning to FIG. 5, the explanation will be continued. During the rush game (during RUSH), that is, during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, a game in which a lottery of the second special symbol in which a variation pattern with a short variation time is set by performing a right-handed game is frequently performed. Is executed. Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in the present embodiment, in a state where one special symbol wins a big hit (including during a big hit change), the other special symbol can be won by lottery. It is configured so that there is no such thing. Therefore, in the lottery of the second special symbol during the rush game, the lottery result is either a small hit or a miss. Then, in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is configured to win a small hit with a high probability (about 1/2).

Therefore, during the rush game, the game of winning the small hit with a probability of 1/2 and acquiring the prize ball by the small hit game will continue until the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol is completed. That is, even if the lottery of the second special symbol is frequently executed during the rush game, the jackpot is not won by the lottery of the second special symbol, so the jackpot fluctuation period of the first special symbol is fully used. Rush games can be provided.

Then, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is completed (see FIG. 5 (f)), a screen corresponding to the jackpot type won this time is displayed (see FIGS. 9 (a) and 9 (b)). Here, the display screen at the end of the rush game (when the big hit fluctuation is stopped in Special Figure 1) will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 (a) and 9 (b).

9 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the display contents when a big hit (big hit A (see FIG. 16 (a))) which is advantageous for the player is set, and is a diagram schematically showing FIG. 9 (b). Is a diagram schematically showing the display contents when a jackpot (big hit D (see FIG. 16A)), which is disadvantageous to the player, is won.

As shown in FIG. 9 (a), at the timing when the third symbol (“777”) for indicating that the jackpot A (see FIG. 16 (a)) was won is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. In the special figure 2 display area Dm2, the third symbol of "346" indicating the deviation is forcibly stopped and displayed. Then, the effect symbol 813 (“super V”) indicating that the jackpot advantageous to the player has been won is displayed from the treasure box 812, and the comment “Congratulations” is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. In this case, the character "right-handed", which is the same game method as in the latent state, is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3.

On the other hand, in FIG. 9 (b), at the timing when the third symbol (“666”) for indicating that the jackpot D (see FIG. 16 (a)) was won is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. In the special figure 2 display area Dm2, the third symbol of "346" indicating the deviation is forcibly stopped and displayed. Then, a production symbol 813 (“end?”) Showing that the player has won a big hit that is disadvantageous to the player is displayed from the treasure box 812, and a comment “Please return to left-handed” is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. Will be done. In this case, in order to indicate to the player that the rush game has ended, the character "left-handed", which is the same game method as in the normal state, is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3.

In addition, in FIG. 9B, the display screen when the jackpot D (see FIG. 16A) is won is shown, but when the jackpot C (see FIG. 16A) is won, that is, the jackpot D. The same jackpot game is executed, but if the game state set after the jackpot ends wins a jackpot that is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot D, the same display screen is displayed and revived at the end of the jackpot game. As a production, it is configured to execute a production that causes a right-handed game to be performed. As a result, it is possible to provide a player with an unexpected effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 10, a card forgotten warning screen to be displayed to the player will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is necessary to insert a card (valuable medium) into a card unit installed along with the pachinko machine 10 in order to borrow a ball used for a game. In such a pachinko machine 10, when a player wins many prize balls by a game, he / she forgets to insert the card into the card unit and forgets to take the card at the end of the game. I had something to do.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the card forgetting warning screen (see FIG. 10A) is configured to be displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time of a big hit game in which a prize ball can be won). This can prevent the player from forgetting to take the card. Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to set a jackpot that makes it easy to win a prize ball and a jackpot that is difficult to win a prize as a jackpot game, and further, it is possible to set a game state in which a small hit game can be frequently executed in a short period of time. The timing for displaying the card forgotten warning screen can be set according to the game result (cumulative number of prize balls in a predetermined period).

Here, with reference to FIG. 10A, the display contents of the card forgotten warning screen will be described. FIG. 10A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the card forgetting warning screen. In this way, the operation when removing the card from the card unit is displayed using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10, and the comment "Please be careful not to forget to remove the card" is displayed. ..

Next, the display timing of the card forgotten warning screen will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 (b) to 10 (d). FIG. 10 (b) shows the case where the first jackpot is "big hit A (see FIG. 16 (a))", that is, the jackpot that can give a lot of prize balls to the player in one jackpot game is won. It is a timing chart showing the display timing of the card display (card forgotten warning display), and in FIGS. 10 (c) and 10 (d), the first big hit is "big hit A (see FIG. 16 (a))". That is, it is a timing chart showing the display timing of the card display (card forgetting caution display) when a big hit that can give a lot of prize balls to a player in one big hit game is won.

As shown in FIG. 10B, if the first jackpot (the jackpot won when the normal state is set as the gaming state) is jackpot A, a sufficient number of prize balls is given during the jackpot. Since it will be granted, the card display will be executed during the ending period (ED) of the jackpot.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10 (c) and 10 (d), when the first big hit is the big hit C, a sufficient number of prize balls cannot be given to the big hit, and the player cannot give a sufficient number of prize balls. Since there is a possibility of borrowing a ball using a card, the card display is not displayed on the end screen of the first big hit (big hit C).

In such a state, in the present embodiment, the period from the first big hit to the setting of the normal state again is set as the advantageous continuation period, and the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period is accumulated, and the accumulated result is It is configured to execute the card display on the condition that the predetermined amount (for example, 250 shots) is reached as the card display execution condition.

That is, if small hit games occur continuously after the end of big hit C and the number of prize balls during the advantageous continuation period exceeds a predetermined amount, the card is displayed on the ending screen of the small hit game. (See FIG. 10 (c)), when the number of prize balls during the advantageous continuation period exceeds a predetermined amount due to repeated execution of the jackpot C, the card is displayed on the ending screen of the jackpot game. (See FIG. 10 (d)).

<Regarding the transition of the gaming state in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 11, the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a method of shifting from one gaming state to another gaming state for four types of gaming states set in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment.

First, a method of shifting the gaming state when staying in the normal state will be described. As described above, in the normal state, the lottery frequency of the special symbol tends to be higher when the game is played by left-handed than when the game is played by right-handed, so that left-handed is more advantageous for the player. This is because when a left-handed player is hit, it becomes easier to enter the upper first ball entry port 64b1. As described above, in the lottery of the first special symbol executed based on the ball entering the first ball entry port 64, the small hit is not drawn, so the ball is held endlessly unless it becomes a big hit. It will be in a disadvantageous state that continues to decrease. In this normal state, there is a possibility of shifting to another gaming state only when a big hit occurs. As the jackpot types that can be won in the lottery of the first special symbol, four types of jackpots A to D are provided. Details of these jackpot types will be described later with reference to FIG. 16 (a).

As shown on the left side of FIG. 11, when the jackpots A and C are determined at a total rate of 65% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state ST1, after the jackpot ends, the center of FIG. 11 It shifts to the probability change state ST2 shown in. Further, when the jackpot D is determined at a rate of 10% when the jackpot is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state ST1, the time saving state ST3 shown on the right side of FIG. 11 is entered after the jackpot ends. .. On the other hand, when the jackpot B is determined at a rate of 25% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the normal state is set again as the game state after the jackpot ends (the normal state is looped). do).

In the normal state, it is normal to play a game aiming at the upper first entrance 64b1 by hitting left, but the player intentionally hits right and the ball enters the second entrance 640. As a result of a part of the ball hitting to the left entering the second entrance 640, there is a possibility that a big hit will be obtained in the second special symbol lottery. In this embodiment, there are three types of jackpots (big hits EG) as the jackpot types set when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol, and the jackpot of the second special symbol is won in the normal state. When the jackpots E and F are determined at a total rate of 65%, the probability change state ST2 is entered after the jackpot ends, and when the jackpot G is determined at a rate of 35%, the normal state is the game state after the jackpot ends. Is set again (loops the normal state).

In this way, if a big hit is achieved by the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state, there is a possibility that the time saving state will be more advantageous than the normal state at a rate of 10% (big hit D). If a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state, the possibility of shifting to the time saving state becomes zero. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the demerit when the irregular game method of executing the lottery of the second special symbol is performed by right-handing in the normal state, it is possible to suppress the irregular game. Further, in the lottery of the second special symbol executed in the normal state, since the fluctuation pattern having the fluctuation time for a long time (10 minutes) is set, the game efficiency is the case where the left-handed game is performed. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the demerit when the irregular game method of executing the lottery of the second special symbol is performed by right-handing in the normal state.

Next, a method of shifting the gaming state when staying in the probabilistic state will be described. As mentioned above, in the probabilistic state, the lottery frequency of the special symbol tends to be higher when the game is played with the left-handed than when the game is played with the right-handed as in the normal state, so the left-handed is more advantageous for the player. Will be. In the probabilistic state, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is higher than in the normal state, so that it is advantageous compared to the normal state, but disadvantageous compared to the latent state. When the probability change state ST2 is set, the process shifts to the latent state SP1 when the jackpot of the first special symbol is won (the change in the jackpot of the special figure 1 starts).

In the probabilistic state, the game is aimed at the lower first ball opening 64b2 provided below the upper first ball opening 64b1 while aiming at the upper first ball opening 64b1 by hitting left as in the normal state. Will do. That is, since the high probability state of the normal symbol is set during the probability change state, the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entry port 64b2 can be easily opened. Therefore, it becomes a gaming state in which the lottery of the first special symbol is easier to be executed than in the normal state.

In the probabilistic state configured in this way, a left-handed game is usually performed to execute a lottery for the first special symbol, but a ball enters the second entrance 640 and the second special symbol is used. There is a possibility that it will be a big hit by lottery. In this case, when the jackpots E and F are determined at a total rate of 65% when the jackpot of the second special symbol is won, the probability change state ST2 is set again after the jackpot ends and is determined at a rate of 35%. When the jackpot G is reached, the time saving state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot ends.

That is, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed in the probabilistic state, it is possible to shift to the latent probable state which is most advantageous to the player, while the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. If this is the case, the possibility of shifting to the latent state becomes zero. Therefore, it is possible to increase the demerit when the irregular game method of executing the lottery of the second special symbol is performed by right-handing in the probabilistic state, and it is possible to suppress the irregular game.

Next, a method of shifting the gaming state when staying in the latent state will be described. As described above, in the latent probability state, unlike the normal state and the probability change state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shortened, so that the lottery of the second special symbol can be efficiently performed by playing the game by hitting right. .. Therefore, right-handed is more advantageous for the player than left-handed.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is won in the state where the probability change state is set (first transition condition), and when the jackpot C is won in the state where the probability change state and the time saving state are set. It has two transition conditions (second transition condition), and when the first transition condition is satisfied, the latent state is set before the jackpot game is started, that is, during the jackpot fluctuation of the special symbol. When the setting is made and the second transition condition is satisfied, the latent state is set after the jackpot game is completed.

With this configuration, the timing at which the game state (latent state) that is most advantageous to the player is set can be set before or after the jackpot game, so that the player can play a variety of games. Can provide sex.

Further, when the first transition condition is satisfied, the period in which the latent probability state is set becomes the jackpot fluctuation period of the first special symbol, so that the period in which the latent probability state is set can be determined in advance. Therefore, it is possible to easily create an effect to be executed during the latent state in advance (at the time of setting the latent state) according to the period in which the latent state is set.

In addition, if the jackpot C is won by the lottery of the first special symbol in the state where the probability variation state is set, the latent probability state can be set before or after the jackpot game, so that the player can be set. It is possible to provide unexpected playability.

Next, with reference to FIG. 12, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used for main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interruption process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is provided with a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37A, 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and a lower side of an opening / closing plate 65f of a variable winning device 65. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing to the right side as a shaft and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 issues various commands to these via the input / output port 205. Send a control signal.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a slide position detection sensor S, a sensor group including a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 420, 530, 630.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. Notify the display control device 114 by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are combined. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a period sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 13 to 21, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment will be described. First, the details of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 12) provided in the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

In the main control device 110, main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device (not shown). To execute. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 13) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 13, a counter or the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform a jackpot lottery, setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and drawing the display result of the second symbol display device. used.

For the setting of the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot (and small hit) lottery and the jackpot type (big hit symbol) are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for the above, the fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting the fluctuation pattern, and the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1 are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Further, the small hit type counter C5 is used for selecting the small hit type. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 52). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although the details will be described later, in the RAM 203, each counter for the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the second entry port 640, in which the counter values for the entry to the first entry port 64 are stored, are stored. A second special symbol execution area 203b in which the value is stored is provided. In the present embodiment, the first ball entry port 64 is provided with up to four reserved balls. Therefore, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 during the period when the special symbol can be drawn, such as when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner or when the special symbol is not in the jackpot game, each counter value is changed. It is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, and when a ball enters the second entry port 640, each counter value is stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b. After that, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is moved to the execution area provided in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, and the first special symbol is variablely displayed (dynamic). Various settings and control processes for displaying) are executed. Further, each counter value stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b is used as it is for various settings and control processing for displaying the second special symbol in a variable manner.

On the other hand, during the period when the lottery of the first special symbol is impossible, such as during the variable display of the first special symbol or during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the ball wins the first entry slot 64. When the number of reserved balls in the first ball entry port 64 is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment), each counter value is acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Will be done. Further, when the number of reserved balls for the first ball entry port 64 is the upper limit value (4 pieces in this embodiment) or more, each counter value or the like is not acquired and the prize ball (4 pieces in this embodiment) is not acquired. Only the prize ball) is treated as an invalid ball paid out to the player. In addition, the ball entered the second entrance 640 during the period when the lottery of the second special symbol is impossible, such as during the variable display of the second special symbol or during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In this case, only the prize balls (two prize balls in this embodiment) are treated as invalid balls to be paid out to the player without acquiring each counter value or the like.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of reserved balls is set to 4 with respect to the first ball entry port 64, but the number is not limited to this, and may be less than 4 (for example, 3). It may be more than 4 (for example, 8). Further, a configuration in which an upper limit value is not provided may be used. Further, in the present embodiment, the ball entering the second ball opening 640 (variation display based on the lottery of the second special symbol) is not held, but the holding storage is possible as in the case of the first ball opening 64. It may be configured.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 479) and reaches the maximum value (for example, 479 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 479) and then 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 479, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 479. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 52).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. It is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing. The value of the random number that becomes the big hit of the special symbol is defined in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 15A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the first random number counter C1. When the value matches the value of the random number that is the big hit specified in the first random number table 202a, it is determined to be the big hit of the special symbol. Further, the value of the random number that becomes the small hit of the special symbol is defined in the small hit random number table 202b (see FIG. 15B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

Here, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 15A. The first hit random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a hit in each game state is set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15A, when the game state is a low probability state (normal state, time saving state) of the special symbol, in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. , It is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is any of "7, 8", and if it is any of "7, 8", it is determined to be a big hit.

Further, when the game state is a high probability state (probability change state, latent state) of the special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is It is determined whether it is within the range of "0 to 5", and if it is within the range of "0 to 5", it is determined to be a big hit. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, out of the random number counters having a total number of 480, two values are defined as values for discriminating as a jackpot in the low probability state of the special symbol, so that the low probability state of the special symbol is defined. The jackpot probability at the time is 1/240. On the other hand, the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbol is 1/80.

Next, the small hit random number table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 15 (b). The small hit random number table 202b is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a small hit is set in a special symbol lottery. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15B, the lottery for the first special symbol does not specify a random number value as a small hit. That is, the lottery for the first special symbol does not result in a small hit. On the other hand, in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is within the range of "212 to 432" regardless of the gaming state, and the range of "212 to 432" is determined. If it is inside, it is determined that it is a small hit.

Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b is a random number that is a small hit, the first symbol. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the display device 37 is the one at the time of a small hit of the special symbol.

On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first random number. 1 The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one at the time of a big hit of a special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 479. As described above, in the low probability state of the special symbol, there are two values of the random number counter C1 per first, which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number values "7, 8" are the first hits as described above. It is stored in the random number table 202a. In this way, while the total number of random numbers is 480, the total number of random numbers that become big hits is 2, so the probability of becoming a big hit of a special symbol is "1/240". On the other hand, in the high probability state of the special symbol, there are four values of the first random number counter C1 which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number values "0 to 5" are the first random number table as described above. It is stored in 202a. In this way, while the total number of random numbers is 480, the total number of random numbers that become big hits is 6, so the probability of becoming a big hit of a special symbol is "1/80".

Further, as described above, there are 221 values of the first random number counter C1 which is a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, and the random number values "212 to 432" are stored in the small hit random number table 202b. ing. Since the total number of random numbers that are small hits is 221 while the total number of random numbers is 480, the probability of being a small hit of a special symbol is "221/480" (about 46%).

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. The value of the first type counter C2 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a big hit, the big hit type is selected based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16A). It becomes. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG. 16 (a).

The small hit type counter C5 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, the small hit type (small hit A) is based on the value of the small hit type counter and the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16B). ~ C) will be selected. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG. 16 (b).

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines the variation pattern of 1 from the set variation pattern selection table. A fluctuation time (dynamic display period) is set in this fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is also a counter for determining the fluctuation time. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time the main process (see FIG. 52) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202f (see FIGS. 17 to 19) storing a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided inside.

The variation pattern selection table 202f defines a plurality of data tables for selecting variation patterns (see FIGS. 17 to 19). A plurality of variation pattern selection tables according to the gaming state are set in the variation pattern selection table 202f, and a variation pattern selection table is set for each of the variation pattern selection tables according to the winning / failing determination result. Details of each variation pattern selection table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 17 to 19.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 232, reaches the maximum value (that is, 232), and then returns to 0. Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start port (through gate) 67. At that time, it is acquired and stored in the second symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that is a hit of the normal symbol is defined in the second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 15C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and is the value of the second hit random number counter C4. However, when it matches the value of the random number that is the hit specified in the second hit random number table 202c, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol (second symbol). The details of the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 15 (c).

FIG. 15C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number table 202c. In this second hit random number table 202c, there are 11 random number values that can be hit by the normal symbol in the low probability state (in the normal state, in the latent state) of the normal symbol as the game state, and the range is "0 to 10". ". Since the total number of random numbers that can be hit by the second random number counter C4 is 233, the total number of random numbers that can be hit is 11, so the probability of hitting a normal symbol is "11/233".

On the other hand, in the high probability state (probability change state, time saving state) of the normal symbol, there are 232 random value values that can be hit by the normal symbol, and the range is "0 to 231". Since the total number of random numbers that can be hit by the second random number counter C4 is 233, the total number of hit random numbers is 232, so the probability of hitting a normal symbol is "232/233". As described above, in the present embodiment, the random value that is the hit of the normal symbol is configured to have a difference of about 20 times between the low probability state of the normal symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol. There is. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entry port 64b2 when the normal symbol hits are also higher than the low probability state of the normal symbol. The probability state is configured to be more advantageous (it is easier for the ball to enter the lower first entry port 64b2).

When the sphere passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed for 3 seconds in the second symbol display device. Then, in the low probability state of the normal symbol, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is within the range of "0 to 10", it is determined to be a hit, and the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed. Later, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the lower first ball entry port 64b2 is opened only "1 second x 2 times". On the other hand, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 231", it is determined to be a hit, and the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed. Later, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the lower first ball entry port 64b2 is opened only "1 second x 2 times". In this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the normal electric accessory, and the number of times of opening may be appropriately changed as long as the playability is not impaired.

The normal figure variation type counter CS2 is configured as a loop counter in which 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 198, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198), the counter returns to 0. When the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol variation pattern table 202g (see FIG. 20) for selecting the variation pattern of the normal symbol based on the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2. ) Is specified in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. The details of the normal map fluctuation pattern table 202g will be described later with reference to FIG. 20.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 198), and is updated once for each timer interruption process (see FIG. 31). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 52).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device.

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 20. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the present embodiment. In the ROM 202, in addition to the first hit random number table 202a, the small hit random number table 202b, and the second hit random number table 202c already described above, the big hit type selection table 202d, the small hit type selection table 202e, and the variation pattern selection At least a table 202f and a normal map variation pattern table 202g are provided.

First, the details of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 16A. The jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16A) is a data table in which determination values for determining the jackpot type are stored for each type of special symbol, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is , It is specified in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning prize is compared with the big hit type selection table 202d, and the first hit. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the type counter C2 is selected.

As shown in FIG. 16A, "big hit A" is associated with the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 24". Is stipulated. This "big hit A" has 15 rounds, and a big hit game for opening the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is set. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 25 counter values are "big hit A", so if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit A" is determined. The ratio is 25% (25/100).

When "Big hit A" is selected, the probability change state is set at the end of the big hit (the probability change flag 203g is set to ON) regardless of the game state when the big hit is won, and the number of time reductions of 10,000 times is set. It is set (a value of 10000 is set in the time saving counter 203f). That is, after the end of "big hit A", the probability change state is set until the next big hit is won.

"Big hit A" is one of the big hit types with the largest number of rounds, so it is advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. Further, since the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the hit probability of the normal symbol are set to be higher than those in the normal state, the gaming state is such that the game can be played more advantageous than the normal state. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the latent state is configured so as to be easier to give a privilege advantageous to the player than the probable change state, and among a plurality of gaming states, the latent state is next to the latent state. It becomes a favorable game state.

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "25 to 49", "big hit B" is associated and defined. This "big hit B" is a game in which the same big hit game as the above-mentioned "big hit A" is executed, the number of rounds is 15, and the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is opened. The game is set. After the end of the "big hit B", the probability variation flag 203g is set to off, and the time saving counter 203f is configured to have a different value depending on the gaming state at the time of winning.

When the game state at the time of winning the big hit is the normal state, the value of "0" is set in the time saving counter 203f, and when the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit is the time saving state or the probable change state, the time saving counter 203f is set. A value of "100" is set. In other words, if the "big hit B" is won while the normal state is set, the normal state is set after the big hit ends, whereas if the "big hit B" is won during the time saving state, the normal state is set. , The time saving state (100 times) is set after the big hit ends. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 25 counter values are "big hit B", so if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit B" is determined. The ratio is 25% (25/100).

"Big hit B" is one of the big hit types with the largest number of rounds like "Big hit A", so it is advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained, but the high probability state of the special symbol is not set after the big hit is over. , It is a big hit type that is more disadvantageous than "Big hit A".

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 89", "big hit C" is associated and defined. This "big hit C" has two rounds, and a big hit game for opening the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is opened even in the small hit game executed when the small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. It is configured so that it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the case where the "big hit C" is won and the case where the "small hit" is won.

With such a configuration, when the hit game in which the first attacker is opened is executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the big hit game is executed or the small hit game is executed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the player is configured to be in a latent state (RUSH state) in which the small hit game can be frequently executed during the big hit fluctuation period of the first special symbol. 1 The game is played while expecting that the hit game in which the attacker is released is a small hit game. That is, it is possible to provide a novel game property by providing a game period in which the player does not normally execute the jackpot game most desired by the player.

After the end of the "big hit C", the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON, and the time saving counter 203f is configured to have a different value depending on the gaming state at the time of winning. When the game state at the time of winning the big hit is the normal state, the value of "10000" is set in the time saving counter 203f, and when the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit is the time saving state or the probable change state, the time saving counter 203f is set. A value of "0" is set. That is, when the "big hit C" is won in the state where the normal state is set, the probable change state is set after the end of the big hit, whereas the "big hit C" is won during the probable change state or the time saving state. If so, the latent state is set after the jackpot ends.

In this way, in the game state when the jackpot is won, even if the jackpot is of the same type, the game state set after the jackpot ends is configured to be different, so that the player simply aims to win the jackpot. Not only that, it is possible to pay attention to the set game state, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the latent probability state is set as the gaming state, the gaming state is configured to be the most advantageous to the player, and the probability changing state is set as a condition for setting this latent probability state. There are two setting conditions: the first setting condition where the jackpot fluctuation of the special symbol is started when is set, and the second setting condition where the jackpot C is won when the probability variation state and the time saving state are set. is doing. That is, it is configured so that the degree of expectation (probability) in which the latent state is set differs depending on the game state when the jackpot is won. By configuring in this way, it is possible to gradually increase the expectation of the player to set a game state that is advantageous to the player according to the progress of the game (according to the set game state). It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the counter value that becomes "big hit C" is 40, so if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit C" is determined. The ratio is 40% (40/100). "Big hit C" is one of the big hit types with a smaller number of rounds and a shorter opening operation period than the above-mentioned "Big hit A" and "Big hit B", so it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. However, depending on the game state at the time of winning the big hit, it is set after the big hit because it is the only type of big hit that can set the latent state that is most advantageous to the player as the game state set after the big hit ends. In terms of the game state, it is a jackpot type that is more advantageous than "big hit A" and "big hit B".

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "90 to 99", "big hit D" is associated and defined. This "big hit D" has two rounds, and a big hit game (same as "big hit C") for opening the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set.

After the end of the "big hit D", the probability change flag 203g is set to off, and the value of "0" is set to the time saving counter 203f. That is, when the "big hit C" is won, the normal state is set after the big hit ends. Since this "big hit D" has the same big hit game content as the above-mentioned "big hit C", the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is configured to operate in the same open operation as the small hit game. ing.

After the end of "Big hit D", since the normal state is set as described above, the fluctuation display (big hit fluctuation) that won "Big hit D" in the state where the probability change state is set is displayed. When executed, the jackpot game is executed after the small hit game is frequently performed during the jackpot fluctuation, and then the normal state is set.

That is, in the latent state (RUSH state) when the "big hit D" is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the normal state after the "big hit D" in which the same opening operation as the small hit game is set is completed. Is set, it is possible to make the player think that the latent state in which the jackpot game is executed has ended.

Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the counter value that becomes "big hit D" is 10, so if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit D" is determined. The ratio is 10% (10/100). "Big hit D" is one of the big hit types with a smaller number of rounds and a shorter opening operation period than the above-mentioned "Big hit A" and "Big hit B", so it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. Will be. Further, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the normal state is set after the jackpot ends, which is disadvantageous in terms of the gaming state set after the jackpot. That is, it is the most disadvantageous jackpot type.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment has four jackpot types (“big hit A” to “big hit D”) as jackpot types of the first special symbol (special figure 1). There is. Among them, in two jackpot types (“big hit A” and “big hit B”), a jackpot game is executed in which the second attacker (second variable winning device 650), which is opened only during the jackpot game, is targeted for opening. In the other two jackpot types (“big hit C” and “big hit D”), the jackpot game that targets the first attacker (first variable winning device 65), which is the same as the small hit game, is executed.

That is, in the first embodiment, as a big hit of a special symbol, a main big hit game (“big hit A”, “big hit B”) for the purpose of getting a player to win a prize ball, and a variable game state. ("Big hit C", a sub-big hit game for the purpose of making it difficult for a player to know whether or not a big hit has been won (making it difficult to determine whether a small hit game is a big hit game). "Big hit D") and is configured to be feasible.

Further, in the present embodiment, since it is not a big hit game but a game in which a player can get a prize ball by a small hit game, it is difficult to obtain a large amount of prize balls during the big hit game. Even so (even if a jackpot game in which only a small amount of prize balls can be obtained is executed depending on the jackpot type), a jackpot game aimed at changing the game state while suppressing discomfort to the player is performed. Can be set.

On the other hand, as the type of jackpot by the lottery of the second special symbol, "big hit E" is defined in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 4". This "big hit E" has 15 rounds, and a big hit game for opening the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is set. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, five counter values are "big hit E", so if a big hit is achieved in the second special symbol lottery, "big hit E" is determined. The ratio is 5% (5/100).

When "Big hit E" is selected, the probability change state is set at the end of the big hit (the probability change flag 203g is set to ON) regardless of the game state when the big hit is won, and the number of time reductions of 10,000 times is set. It is set (a value of 10000 is set in the time saving counter 203f). That is, after the end of "big hit E", the probability change state is set until the next big hit is won.

"Big hit E" is one of the big hit types with the largest number of rounds, so it is advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. Further, since the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the hit probability of the normal symbol are set to be higher than those in the normal state, the gaming state is such that the game can be played more advantageous than the normal state. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the latent state is configured so as to be easier to give a privilege advantageous to the player than the probable change state, and among a plurality of gaming states, the latent state is next to the latent state. It becomes a favorable game state.

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "5 to 64", "big hit F" is associated and defined. This "big hit F" has two rounds, and a big hit game for opening the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the counter value that becomes "big hit F" is 60, so if a big hit is obtained in the second special symbol lottery, "big hit F" is determined. The ratio is 60% (60/100).

When "Big hit F" is selected, the probability change state is set at the end of the big hit (the probability change flag 203g is set to ON) regardless of the game state when the big hit is won, and the number of time reductions of 10,000 times is set. It is set (a value of 10000 is set in the time saving counter 203f). That is, after the end of "big hit F", the probability change state is set until the next big hit is won.

Since "big hit F" is one of the big hit types with the smallest number of rounds, it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. Further, since the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the hit probability of the normal symbol are set to be higher than those in the normal state, the gaming state is such that the game can be played more advantageous than the normal state. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the latent state is configured so as to be easier to give a privilege advantageous to the player than the probable change state, and among a plurality of gaming states, the latent state is next to the latent state. It becomes a favorable game state.

A "big hit G" is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "65-99". This "big hit G" has two rounds, and a big hit game for opening the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the counter value that becomes the "big hit G" is 35, so if a big hit is achieved in the second special symbol lottery, the "big hit G" is determined. The ratio is 35% (35/100).

When "Big hit G" is selected, the normal state is set at the end of the big hit (the probability variation flag 203g is set to off) regardless of the game state when the big hit is won, and the number of time reductions of 0 times is set. It is set (a value of 0 is set in the time saving counter 203f).

Since "big hit G" is one of the big hit types with the smallest number of rounds, it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. Further, since the game state set after the big hit is the normal state, it is disadvantageous in terms of the game state set after the big hit. That is, it is the most disadvantageous jackpot type.

As described above, in the first embodiment, the case where the big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the case where the big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2). The points that the probability change flag 203g is set to ON after the big hit is 65% (65/100) are the same, but the ratio that 15 rounds are set as the big hit game (50% in Special Figure 1). , Special figure 2 is 5%), Ratio at which the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is selected as the opening target (Special figure 1 is 50%, Special figure 2 is 5%), Game state at the time of big hit winning The rate at which a value of 10000 is set in the time saving counter 203f after the end of the jackpot when is in the time saving state or the probabilistic state (that is, the high probability state of the normal symbol) (special figure 1 is 25%, special figure 2 is 65%). Is configured to be different.

In this way, by making the contents of the big hit game and the game state after the big hit different according to the type of the special symbol won by the big hit, it is possible to provide various game characteristics to the player, and the game can be played. It is possible to improve the interest.

In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned contents are configured to be different depending on the type of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only a part of the above-mentioned contents may be configured to be different. It is good, and other than the above-mentioned contents, for example, by setting the number of rounds of the jackpot game that can be set only for the jackpot type corresponding to the special figure 1 (for example, 7 rounds), the set number of rounds may be different. , The ratio of setting the probability variation flag 203g to ON may be different.

Further, on condition that the ball has passed through a specific area (for example, an area where the ball winning in the second variable winning device 650 can pass) during the big hit game, the probability change flag 203g is set to ON after the big hit is completed. In the gaming machine configured in the above, the probability that the ball passes through the specific area may be different between the jackpot type corresponding to the special figure 1 and the jackpot type corresponding to the special figure 2. Further, the data table for selecting the variation pattern for showing the lottery result in each game state set after the big hit may be configured to be different depending on the big hit type.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16A, in the present embodiment, both the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) and the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) can win a prize in one round game. Although the upper limit value is set to "10", the upper limit value may be different between the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) and the second attacker (second variable winning device 650). In addition, the upper limit of the opening operation in the round game may be different depending on the winning jackpot type (or the type of the special symbol won in the jackpot).

Next, the details of the small hit type selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 16 (b). The small hit type selection table 202e is a data table referred to for determining the type of small hit when a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2). In the small hit type selection table 202e, the corresponding small hit type is defined for each range of values of the small hit type counter C5.

As shown in FIG. 16B, "small hit A" is defined in association with the range in which the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "0 to 93". This "small hit A" is a small hit type in which the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set to the open state only once for 1.5 seconds during the small hit game.

Of the 100 random values that the small hit type counter C5 can take, 94 are random values that become "small hit A", so if a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, "small hit A" Is determined at 94% (94/100).

Further, in the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "94 to 98", "small hit B" is defined in association with it. This "small hit B" is a small hit type that sets an open state for 0.2 seconds x 6 times during a small hit game. Of the 100 random values that the small hit type counter C5 can take, 5 are random values that become "small hit B", so if a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, "small hit B" Is determined at 5% (5/100).

Further, the value "99" of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with "small hit C". This "small hit C" is a small hit type that sets an open state of 0.06 seconds x 8 times during a small hit game. Of the 100 random values that the small hit type counter C5 can take, one random value is "small hit C", so if a small hit is obtained by a special symbol lottery, it will be "small hit C". The ratio is 1% (1/100).

Next, the details of the variation pattern selection table 202f will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 19. As described above, in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f, a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the fluctuation display is defined from the value (random value value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

As shown in FIG. 17, the variation pattern selection table 202f is a normal table 202f1 for determining a variation pattern (variation time) in a normal state, and a time reduction / probability variation for determining a variation pattern in a time reduction state and a probability variation state. At least a table 202f2 and a latent table 202f3 for determining a variation pattern in the latent state are included. The specific contents of these tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19. In each of the tables shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the fluctuation time is expressed in milliseconds, but in the following description, the fluctuation time is expressed in seconds for easy understanding.

First, the normal table 202f1 will be described with reference to FIG. The normal table 202f1 is a table that is referred to when the gaming state is in the normal state. FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal table 202f1. As shown in FIG. 18, the normal table 202f1 has a random number value (variation type) for determining the type (variation time) of the fluctuation pattern for each type of the special symbol and the stop type (win / fail determination result) of the special symbol. Counter value (counter value of CS1) is specified.

Specifically, as a fluctuation pattern determined when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, a normal reach (20 seconds) is associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 50". Super reach A (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "51 to 100", super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "101 to 150", and super reach is associated with the range of "151 to 198". C (30 seconds) is associated.

On the other hand, when the first special symbol is lost in the lottery and the normal table 202f1 is referred to, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (value set in the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d). The correspondence between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the selected variation pattern changes according to the above. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 18, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is within the range of 0 or 1, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is long in the range of "0 to 70". The deviation pattern (12 seconds) is associated with the deviation pattern, and the deviation normal reach (20 seconds) is associated with the range of "71 to 150". Further, as the value of the variation type counter CS1, the out-of-range super reach A (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "151-170", and the out-of-range super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "171-198". Has been done.

On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 2 or 3, the fluctuation pattern of short deviation (8 seconds) corresponds to the range of "0 to 70" as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. As the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation pattern of long deviation (12 seconds) is associated with the range of "71 to 130", and the deviation pattern of normal reach (20 seconds) is associated with the range of "131 to 170". ing. Further, as the value of the variation type counter CS1, the out-of-range super reach A (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "171 to 185", and the out-of-range super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "185 to 198". Has been done.

The process of selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol with reference to the normal table 202f1 (see S505 of FIG. 35) is from the process of subtracting the reserved ball of the first special symbol (see S303 of FIG. 33). Is also executed later. Therefore, the normal table 202f1 is not referred to when there are four reserved balls.

As described above, when the number of reserved balls is small (0 or 1), it becomes easier to select a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time as compared with the case where the number of reserved balls is large (2 or 3). With this configuration, when the number of reserved balls is small, it is possible to secure time for storing the reserved balls and make the variable display less likely to be interrupted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from getting tired of the game. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is large, it becomes difficult to accumulate the reserved balls because the fluctuation time is shortened. Can be prevented (suppressed) from entering the ball. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel that he / she has lost.

On the other hand, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed and the normal table 202f1 is referred to, 600 seconds (10 minutes) is set as the fluctuation time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the long variation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value in the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the variation type counter CS1. When the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, the small hit long variation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value in the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the variation type counter CS1. When the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of order, the out-of-order long variation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value in the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the variation type counter CS1. As a result, when the right-handed hit is performed in the normal state and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the fluctuation time of 600 seconds is set each time, so that the game efficiency is significantly worse than the left-handed hit. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which a right-handed hit is normally performed.

Next, the details of the time saving / probability variation table 202f2 will be described with reference to FIG. 19A. The time saving / probability change table 202f2 is a table referred to when a variation pattern is selected when a high probability state (that is, a time saving state or a probability change state) of a normal symbol is set as a game state.

As shown in FIG. 19 (a), the time reduction / probability variation table 202f2 is used to determine the type (variation time) of the fluctuation pattern for each type of the special symbol and the stop type (win / fail determination result) of the special symbol. A random value (counter value of variable type counter value CS1) is specified. The time saving / probability variation table 202f2 is different from the normal table 202f1 described above with reference to FIG. 18 so that different fluctuation patterns are not selected according to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. is doing.

That is, when the normal state is set as the game state, it is difficult to always secure the reserved ball of the first special symbol because the game is performed aiming at the upper first entrance ball opening 64b1 while performing the left-handed game. There is a possibility that there will be a period in which the lottery for the first special symbol is not executed (the first special symbol has not changed). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 18, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is small, the normal table 202f1 is configured so that the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time can be easily selected. As a result, in the normal state, the state in which the variation display of the first special symbol is not executed continues for a long time, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired of the game.

On the other hand, the time-saving / probability-changing table 202f2 shown in FIG. 19A is in a time-saving state or a probability-changing state in which a left-handed game is performed and a game in which a ball is inserted into the lower first entry port 64b2 is performed. The data table to be referenced. During this time-saving state and the probable change state, the electric accessory 64a is frequently released, so that the game state is such that the reserved ball of the first special symbol can be easily stored.

In this way, when the gaming state in which the reserved balls of the first special symbol can be easily stored is set, it varies when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is small as in the above-mentioned normal table 202f1. If a configuration is added that makes it easier to select a variation pattern with a long time, the first special symbol (special symbol 1) variation that is executed when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is reduced by taking a break from the game. The fluctuation time of the game becomes long, and it becomes difficult to play the game efficiently during the time saving state and the probable change state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the variable pattern table (time saving / Probability variation table 202f2) so that the fluctuation pattern selected by the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol does not differ (the fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time is not selected when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is small). ) It is configured. As a result, it is possible to efficiently execute the game in the time-saving state and the probable change state.

Further, as will be described in detail later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won in a state where the probability change state is set, the probability change state is changed to the latent state at the timing when the jackpot fluctuation starts. It is configured to move to. Specifically, when the first special symbol (special figure 1) is drawn in a state where the probability change state is set and the lottery result (win / fail judgment result) is a big hit, the time saving / probability change table 202f2 is displayed. With reference, when the hit special fluctuation (600 seconds) is selected, the gaming state becomes the latent state while the hit special fluctuation (600 seconds) is being executed, and when the hit special fluctuation ends, the special figure 1 The special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with a combination indicating that the lottery result is a big hit, and the big hit game is started.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to be capable of executing lottery and variation display at the same time, while the latent state is set (special variation per special figure 1). (While is being executed), the lottery of the second special symbol can be performed. In addition, in the present embodiment, the variation display period (variation time) for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol is defined as a short period (1 second) only in the latent state, and only the second special symbol. It is configured to win a small hit. With this configuration, the player is allowed to frequently draw the second special symbol while the latent state is set (while the special variation of the special figure 1 is being executed). Can win many prize balls.

As described above in FIG. 19A, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot of the special figure 1 is won in the state where the probability variation state is set, 60 seconds to 600 depending on the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. It is configured so that the fluctuation time of seconds is set, and this fluctuation time directly becomes the duration of the latent state. Therefore, as a lottery result of the special symbol, the player can pay attention not only to the result of whether or not the jackpot is won (win / fail judgment result) but also to the selected fluctuation pattern (variation time). It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

On the other hand, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed and the time saving / probability variation table 202f2 is referred to, 60 seconds (1 minute) is set as the variation time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, a long variation (60 seconds) is associated with the value in the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the variation type counter CS1. 2 When the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, the small hit long fluctuation (60 seconds) is associated with the value in the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the variation type counter CS1, and the second When the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the out-of-order long variation (60 seconds) is associated with the value in the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the variation type counter CS1. As a result, when a right-handed hit is performed in a time-saving state or a probable change state and a lottery for the second special symbol is executed, a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is set each time, so that the game efficiency is extremely higher than that of a left-handed hit. Getting worse. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which a right-handed player is hit in a time-saving state or a probable change state.

Next, the details of the latency table 202f3 will be described with reference to FIG. 19 (b). The latent probability table 202f3 is a table referred to when selecting a variation pattern when a latent probability state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is set as a gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 19 (b), the latent probability table 202f3 is a disorder for determining the type (variation time) of the fluctuation pattern for each type of the special symbol and the stop type (win / fail determination result) of the special symbol. Numerical values (counter value of fluctuation type counter value CS1) are specified. It should be noted that the latent probability table 202f3 is configured so that different fluctuation patterns are not selected according to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, similarly to the time saving / probability variation table 202f2 described above.

The latent probability table 202f3 is used when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol (special figure 2) during the period during which the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 1 is executed during the probability change state, or during the time saving state or the probability change state. When winning a jackpot, which is a jackpot type of "big hit C", and selecting a variation pattern of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) to be executed after the jackpot game is completed. Referenced.

The latent probability table 202f3 is selected when a big hit is obtained in the first special symbol lottery with respect to the contents specified in the time saving / probability variation table 202f2 described above with reference to FIG. 19 (a). The difference is that the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 specified for each fluctuation pattern is different and the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern selected in the lottery of the second special symbol is different. Everything else is the same. Detailed description of the same element will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 19B, as the fluctuation pattern determined when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 39" and the normal fluctuation (60). Seconds) are associated, super fluctuations (180 seconds) are associated with the range of "40 to 119", and special fluctuations (600 seconds) are associated with the range of "120 to 198".

On the other hand, when the lottery of the first special symbol is missed and the latent probability table 202f3 is referred to, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (value set in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d). ) And the out-of-middle fluctuation (30 seconds) are associated with each other regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

When the lottery of the second special symbol is executed and the latent probability table 202f3 is referred to, 1 second is set as the fluctuation time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the hit short variation (1 second) is associated with the value in the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the variation type counter CS1. 2 When the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, the small hit short variation (1 second) is associated with the value in the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the variation type counter CS1, and the second When the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the out-of-order short variation (1 second) is associated with the value in the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the variation type counter CS1. As a result, a large number of lottery (variation) of the second special symbol can be executed in the latent state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the details of the normal map fluctuation pattern table 202g will be described. As described above, the normal symbol variation pattern table 202g is a table referred to for selecting a normal symbol variation pattern when a lottery for ordinary symbols is executed. As shown in FIG. 20, in the normal map fluctuation pattern table 202g, the range of the value of the normal map fluctuation type counter CS2 and the fluctuation pattern (variation time) are displayed for each game state at the time when the lottery of the normal symbols is executed. Is specified in association with.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 20, when the gaming state is a normal state, a latent state, that is, a low probability state of a normal symbol, the entire range of possible values of the normal figure variation type counter CS2 ( A fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is associated with 0 to 198). Further, even when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is associated with the entire range (0 to 198) of possible values of the normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2.

On the other hand, when the gaming state is a time saving state or a probabilistic state, that is, a high probability state of a normal symbol, the value of the normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 fluctuates within the range of "0 to 198" for a fluctuation time of 3 seconds. Patterns are associated.

In the first embodiment, a plurality of variations of the fluctuation pattern are provided only in the latent state, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even in the normal state or the probabilistic state, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol may have a variation, and when the lottery of the normal symbol is executed in the latent state, the fluctuation time is 2 of 1 second or 3 seconds. Any of the types may be set, and the fluctuation time is not limited to two types, and a larger fluctuation time may be selectably configured. The more variation there is in the fluctuation time, the more difficult it is for the player to predict the fluctuation time, so that it is possible to make the player make a continuous right-handed strike more reliably during the latent state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set based on the game state and the value of the acquired normal symbol fluctuation type counter CS2, but in addition to that, it is based on the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol. You may use a configuration in which the fluctuation time is changed, a configuration in which the fluctuation time is changed based on the number of lottery of special symbols, or a configuration in which the fluctuation time of a normal symbol is set by a method in which the above-mentioned various configurations are combined. Specifically, 1 second is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol from the transition of the gaming state to the latent state until the lottery of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), and thereafter (for example, 50 times). , 51 times to 100 times) may be configured so that 3 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol.

In this way, the number of special symbol fluctuations (first special symbol, second special symbol) since the end of the previous jackpot is measured, and the variation time corresponding to the measurement result is selected and executed. , It is possible to make the player play the game with a sense of expectation so that a more advantageous fluctuation time (for example, a short fluctuation time) is executed more during the period when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. can.

In addition, while the lottery for the even number of special symbols is being executed after the game state shifts to the latent state, 1 second is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and other than that (odd number), It may be configured so that 3 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of a normal symbol. In this way, by configuring to change the fluctuation time of the normal symbol based on the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to predict the fluctuation time, so that it is more reliable during the latent state. It is possible to make a continuous right-handed hit. In this case, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is longer (longer than the case where the lottery of the special symbol is executed) when the lottery of the special symbol is not executed, or the special symbol is configured to be longer. It may be configured so that the smaller the number of lottery pending and stored, the longer the fluctuation time of the normal symbol.

Further, when setting the fluctuation time of the normal symbol based on the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol, it is preferable to configure so that the longer the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is, the easier it is to select. With this configuration, the pachinko machine 10 is adjusted so that the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is hard to be accumulated, and the pachinko machine 10 is adjusted so that the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is easy to be accumulated. It is possible to make the number of ordinary symbol lottery uniform.

Next, the details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing a configuration of RAM 203 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 21, the RAM 203 includes a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol execution area 203b, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d, and a normal symbol holding ball. Number counter 203e, time reduction counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, special figure 1 big hit flag 203h, special figure 1 big hit flag 203i, winning state storage area 203j, small hit flag 203k, special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m, special figure 2 fluctuation Time counter 203n, big hit medium flag 203o, small hit medium flag 203p, special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203r, special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s, normal figure short fluctuation flag 203t, winning counter 203u, special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v, It also has at least a memory area 203z.

The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area (first special symbol execution area) and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these is held. Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the small hit type counter C5, and the variable type counter CS1 is stored in the area.

More specifically, the value of each counter is acquired at the timing when the ball enters the first entry port 64 (starting prize), and the acquired data is obtained in four holding areas (holding first area ~. Among the vacant areas of the reserved 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is the execution area. It is shifted (moved) to, and a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is performed based on each value of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) having a smaller area number. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data shift is performed only for the holding area (holding second area to holding fourth area) in which the winning data is stored.

The second special symbol execution area 203b stores a determination value (counter value) for executing a special symbol lottery, similarly to the first special symbol execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. In the second special symbol execution area 203b, each counter value acquired at the timing when the start winning to the second entry port 640 is detected is stored.

Similar to the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area (ordinary symbol holding ball execution area) and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). ) And. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, at the timing when the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is the four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area). ) Is stored in order from the smallest area number (1st to 4th) in the vacant area. That is, similarly to the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the winning order is maintained and the data corresponding to the winning is stored. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty, so that it is stored in another hold area as in the case of the 1st special symbol hold ball storage area 203a. A shift process is performed in which the winning data is packed into a holding area that is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d displays the variation of the special symbol (first symbol display device 37,) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first entry port 64 (starting prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the third symbol display device 81 (variation display performed by the symbol display device 81) up to four times. The initial value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. Is added by 1 (see S1704 in FIG. 47). On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S303 in FIG. 33).

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of reserved balls N1 of the variation display in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S304 in FIG. 33, FIG. 47). See S1705). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 displays the variation held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of reserved balls itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is reserved in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number of balls deviates from the number of balls, the deviation can be corrected by the next received hold ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e sets the number of reserved balls (waiting number) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 up to four times. It is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is set to zero, and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases as the ball passes through the through gate 67. Each time, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 (see S1904 in FIG. 49). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S1805 in FIG. 48).

When the sphere passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e (the number of holding times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. , The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (see S1905 in FIG. 49). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the 2 through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S1903: FIG. 49: See No).

The time saving counter 203f is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the time saving state. At this time reduction counter 203f, a value corresponding to the winning jackpot type is set after the jackpot ends. Then, the time reduction counter 203f is subtracted by 1 in the game state update process executed immediately after setting the start of the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (see S308 in FIG. 36). When the lottery of the normal symbol is performed, if the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 or more, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time reduction state, and the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol is executed with reference to the table for high probability time. .. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the normal state, and the hit / fail determination of the normal symbol is executed with reference to the table for low probability time.

The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the high probability state of the special symbol is set, and when it is set to ON, it indicates that the special symbol is in the high probability state. That is, when the probability variation flag 203g is set to on, the game state is a probability variation state (special symbol: high probability state, normal symbol: high probability state) or a latent probability state (special symbol: high probability state, It means that one of (normal symbol: low probability state) is set.

This probability variation flag 203g is set to ON at the end of the jackpot when the winning jackpot type is a jackpot for setting the probability variation state or the latent probability state after the jackpot ends (S2402: Yes in FIG. 54). 54 S2403). Then, when the symbol indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit is stopped and displayed, it is set to off (see S806 in FIG. 38).

In this embodiment, as described above, the high-probability state of the special symbol is set based on the jackpot winning of the special symbol, and the high-probability state of the special symbol is continued until the next jackpot is won. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the special symbol after the high probability state of the special symbol (special symbol high probability state) is set as the special symbol high probability end condition for terminating the high probability state of the special symbol. When the number of fluctuations (number of fluctuations in the special figure) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), the probability variation flag 203g may be set to off. In this case, in order to set the timing to turn off the probability change flag 203g, a storage means for storing the number of special figure fluctuations as the special figure high probability end condition in advance and a storage means after the special figure high probability state is set are set. End determination to determine whether the number of special figure fluctuations measured by the measuring means and the special figure fluctuation number measured by the measuring means satisfy the special figure fluctuation number (special figure high probability end condition) stored in the storage means. Means and means may be provided.

Further, a plurality of special figure high-accuracy end conditions are prepared, for example, the special figure 1 high-accuracy end condition and the variation of the second special symbol that can be satisfied based only on the number of changes of the first special symbol in the special figure high-accuracy state. Various special figure 2 high probability end conditions that can be established based only on the number of times, and lottery end conditions that can be established when the lottery result of the special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (for example, a lottery result of winning a small hit). The special figure high probability end condition may be facilitated, and the probability change flag 203 g may be set to off when any of the special figure high probability end conditions is satisfied.

The special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired based on entering the first ball entry port 64 matches the jackpot determination value at the start of fluctuation. It is a flag set to (see S407 in FIG. 34). This special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to off when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (S806 in FIG. 38).

When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol ends while the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is on, the process of forcibly stopping the second special symbol with the off symbol is executed (see S804 in FIG. 38). .. As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem in which one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit while the other is being executed.

The special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired based on the entry into the second entry port 640 matches the jackpot determination value at the start of fluctuation. It is a flag set to (see S1007 in FIG. 40). The special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to off when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (S1506 in FIG. 45).

When the fluctuation time of the variation display of the second special symbol ends while the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is on, the process of forcibly stopping the first special symbol with the symbol is executed (see S1004 in FIG. 40). .. As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem in which one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit while the other is being executed.

The winning state storage area 203j is a storage area for storing information indicating the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Specifically, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state (if the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 and the probability variation flag 203g is off), the normal state is set in the winning state storage area 203j. "00H" is stored as information indicating. On the other hand, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a probability change state (if the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 or more and the probability change flag 203g is on), the probability change state is shown in the winning state storage area 203j. "01H" is stored as information. Further, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the latent state (if the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 and the probability change flag 203g is on), the latent state is set in the winning state storage area 203j. "02H" is stored as the information to be shown.

The information stored in the winning state storage area 203j is retained until the end of the jackpot, and is referred to when setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends (see S2404 in FIG. 54).

The small hit flag 203k is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on the entry into the second entry port 640 matches the small hit determination value at the start of fluctuation. This is a flag to be set (see S1102 in FIG. 41). This small hit flag 203k is set to off when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the small hit (see S1605 in FIG. 46). When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol ends with the small hit flag 203k turned on, the fluctuation of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (the counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the special symbol is subtracted). The process of stopping) is executed (see S1603 in FIG. 46). As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a problem that a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol and the big hit is started during the small hit while the small hit of the second special symbol is being executed. can.

The special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m and the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n are counters for measuring the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, and are the first special symbol and the second special symbol. When the fluctuation pattern of the symbol is selected, the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern is set. Whether or not the fluctuation time of each special symbol has ended is determined by the timing results of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m and the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n.

The jackpot flag 203o is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot is being hit. If the jackpot middle flag 203o is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot, and if it is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot. This jackpot middle flag 203o is set to on when the start of the jackpot is set. On the other hand, it is set to off in the jackpot end processing executed at the end of the jackpot.

The small hit middle flag 203p is a flag indicating whether or not the small hit is in progress. If the small hit medium flag 203p is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a small hit, and if it is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is not in a small hit. This small hit medium flag 203p is set to on when the start of the small hit is set (see S1406 in FIG. 221). On the other hand, it is set to off at the end of the small hit (see S2512 in FIG. 232).

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to win a small hit only for the second special symbol, and when the small hit is won (when the small hit medium flag 203p is set to ON), the second special symbol is won. 1 It is configured to interrupt the variable display of special symbols. That is, among the multiple types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), one special symbol (second special symbol) is selected by lottery to win a small hit, and the small hit medium flag 203p is set to ON. In this state, the variation display of the other special symbol (first special symbol) does not end, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the small hit game and play the game. Further, during the small hit game, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from ending and the big hit game from starting.

The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is a flag indicating that the fluctuation of the first special symbol is the period from the stop display (confirmed display) of the jackpot stop symbol to the start of the jackpot. When this special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to on, the execution of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is avoided even when a new ball is entered into the second entry port 640. (See S901: Yes in FIG. 39). This special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to on when the second special symbol is forcibly stopped by a missed symbol (see S802 in FIG. 38), and the process for executing the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is avoided. If this is the case, it is set to off (S902 in FIG. 39).

The normal symbol short fluctuation flag 203t is a flag for indicating that the fluctuation of the normal symbol (second symbol) was a short fluctuation (variation for 3 seconds), and is set to on to indicate the normal symbol (second symbol). It shows that the short change of the symbol) has been executed. The normal symbol short fluctuation flag 203t determines that the timing for setting the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the normal symbol fluctuation processing (see S106 in FIG. 48) is in the time reduction state (time reduction) (S1811: Yes in FIG. 48). ), It is set to on when the fluctuation time (short fluctuation) of 3 seconds is set (S1814 in FIG. 48), and it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) has elapsed (S1816 in FIG. 48: Yes), it is referred to when it is determined that the lottery result of the current normal symbol (second symbol) is a hit (S1818: Yes in FIG. 48) (S1819 in FIG. 48).

Here, when it is determined that the normal figure short fluctuation flag 203t is set to ON (S1819: Yes in FIG. 48), it is determined whether the current state is in the time saving state (time saving in progress) (S1821 in FIG. 48). ), When it is determined that the working hours are being reduced (S1821: Yes in FIG. 48), an opening operation (long opening) advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a (FIG. 48 S1822). It should be noted that the normal symbol variation flag 203t is set to off after being determined to be set to on in the normal symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 48) (S1820 in FIG. 48).

In this way, when the game state at the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol (second symbol) (when the fluctuation time is set) and when the electric accessory 64a opening operation is set after the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) has elapsed. Since the opening operation (long opening) that is advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a only when both the gaming state and the time saving state are set, a plurality of gaming states (normal state) are set. By changing the normal symbol (lottery) that is executed across the time saving state, it is possible to surely prevent the electric accessory 64a from opening for a long time, which is an advantageous privilege for the player (long of the electric accessory 64a). It is possible to prevent the player from being excessively provided with the opening).

The winning counter 203u is a counter that counts the number of balls that have won (winned) into the first specific winning opening 65a in the round of the small hit game. When the value of the winning counter 203u becomes 10, which is the upper limit value, it is determined that the end condition of the round is satisfied, and the round is ended (see S2706 in FIG. 57). In each round of big hits, even if the value of the winning counter 203u is less than 10, the round is ended when the round period set for the round is reached. The value of the winning counter 203u is incremented by 1 each time a ball is detected in the first specific winning opening 65a during the round validity period of the small hit. Also, the value is reset to 0 at the end of each round.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, the above-mentioned winning counter 203u is not limited to the small hit game, but also counts the number of balls that have won the second specific winning opening 650a in each round during the big hit game. It is also used for.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the period for opening the first specific winning opening 65a is set to 1.5 seconds as the game content of the small hit game, and the end condition of the round established by the number of winnings is set to 10. is doing. That is, the valid period (1.5 seconds) of the round game elapses by the time 10 balls are won in the first specific winning opening 65a during the small hit game (until the round end condition for the number of winnings is satisfied). It will be. Therefore, since the period of the small hit game can be fixed, the effect straddling the small hit game (the period from the start of the change of one special symbol to the end of the change of the other special symbol via the small hit game). It is possible to predetermine the production period of a series of productions to be performed. Therefore, the fluctuation timing of the special symbol and the execution timing of the effect can be easily synchronized, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is a flag indicating a period for stopping the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time of the special figure 1, and when it is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time is stopped. When the state set to on is set to off, the update (subtraction) of the stopped fluctuation time is restarted.

This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to be turned on when the change of the second special symbol (special figure 2) whose lottery result is a small hit is stopped (S1602 in FIG. 46), and the special symbol change processing (FIG. 32) (see S202 in FIG. 32). As a result of reference, when it is set to ON, the process of updating the display of the first symbol display device corresponding to the special figure 1 is executed in the same manner as during the change (S203 in FIG. 32). That is, while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time is stopped, but the fluctuation display is continuously executed in the first symbol display device. Become. As a result, it is possible to notify that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is not forcibly stopped by setting the temporary stop flag 203v of the special figure 1 to ON. Then, when it is determined that the first special symbol variation is being executed (see FIG. 37), it is set to on (S701: Yes in FIG. 37), it is set to off (S703 in FIG. 37).

In addition, in this embodiment, since only the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to be able to win the small hit, the special symbol whose variation display is temporarily stopped based on the winning of the small hit is the first special. Only symbols are available, but if the lottery for the first special symbol is configured so that a small hit can be won, even if the special figure 2 temporary stop flag is provided to temporarily stop the variation display of the second special symbol. good.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a big hit, it is based on the fact that one special symbol is stopped in the combination indicating the big hit (based on the execution of the big hit game). ), The process of forcibly stopping the variable display of the other special symbol, and if the lottery result of one special symbol is a small hit, one special symbol is stopped by the combination indicating the small hit. Based on this, the variable display of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (stopped until the small hit game is completed).

That is, it is configured so that the variable display of the other special symbol can be processed in various modes according to the lottery result of one special symbol. With this configuration, the lottery result of one special symbol becomes the most advantageous game result (for example, big hit) for the player, and while the variable display for showing the game result is being executed, the other The special symbol (the lottery result is a small hit) is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to prevent the big hit from being erased by the small hit.

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is provided with various flags, counters, and the like. Based on the various tables provided in the ROM 202 and the flags, counters, and the like provided in the RAM 203, the basic functions of the pachinko machine 10 and the novel state transition shown in FIG. 11 can be realized.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23, details of the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 22A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 22A, the ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a, a stop display mode selection table 222b, and an additional effect selection table 222c.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, the voice lamp control device 113 is based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110, and the rough variation content (variation time, variation type (reach, deviation, etc.) indicated by the variation pattern command) is shown. ), It is used to determine the content of the detailed variable display to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This makes it possible to determine a wider variety of variation modes. Here, one of a plurality of types of variation mode is determined by lottery with respect to the rough variation content instructed by the main control device 110.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 19A, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol in the state where the probability variation state is set, the fluctuation time is 60 seconds per normal fluctuation and fluctuation. A fluctuation pattern command corresponding to either a super fluctuation when the time is 180 seconds or a special fluctuation when the fluctuation time is 600 seconds is output from the main control device 110, and the fluctuation pattern command (variation time) received by the voice lamp control device 113. The variable effect corresponding to the information indicating) will be set.

Here, as a fluctuation effect corresponding to the special variation (600 seconds), the first 60 seconds is the first stage effect mode (for example, the effect of defeating the first enemy), and the second period is 60 seconds to 180 seconds. A variable effect is set to execute the stage effect mode (for example, the effect of defeating the second enemy) and execute the third stage effect mode (effect of defeating the third enemy) in a period of 180 seconds to 600 seconds. As a variation effect corresponding to the variation (180 seconds), the first stage effect mode (for example, the effect of defeating the first enemy) is executed for the first 60 seconds, and the second stage effect mode is executed for a period of 60 seconds to 180 seconds. A variable effect that executes (for example, an effect of being defeated by a second enemy) is set, and as a variable effect corresponding to the normal variation (60 seconds), the first 60 seconds is the first stage effect mode (for example, the first enemy). A variable effect is set to execute the effect).

In this way, by setting the effect mode so as to divide the variation effect to be executed corresponding to the stage of the variation time that can be set as the lottery result of the special symbol, the variation pattern set this time for the player. It is possible to entertain the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while predicting which type the is, and it is possible to enhance the effect.

In addition, in the case of executing the above-mentioned variable effect, the remaining time display mode for allowing the player to grasp the remaining time for the effect period set as each stage (for example, the timing at which the effect mode can shift to the next stage). It may be configured to display the effect mode) in which the remaining time until is displayed as a countdown. As a result, the player can be made to know in advance at least the period during which the variable effect is continuously executed (the period during which the latent state is continuously set), so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. can.

In addition, multiple types of enemies that appear during the variable effect are provided, and the degree of expectation that the variable effect will shift to the next stage according to the type of enemy that appears (the rate at which the effect mode that wins the enemy is selected) and , It is preferable to configure it so that it is possible to suggest the content of the jackpot game executed after the end of the current fluctuation display and the game state set after the end of the jackpot game.

In addition, in this case, for example, when enemy A is displayed as the enemy type, if the fluctuation pattern set this time is a hit super fluctuation (180 seconds), the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player is If it indicates that it is selected and the fluctuation pattern is a hit special fluctuation (600 seconds), it may be configured to indicate that a jackpot type other than the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player is selected. With this configuration, it is possible to determine the effect mode (type of enemy) of the variable effect by combining a plurality of elements that determine whether or not to give a privilege advantageous to the player. The effect can be further enhanced.

In the stop display mode selection table 222b, the latent state is set as the game state, and the period during which the small hit game can be frequently executed (hereinafter referred to as the rush period) is set by the lottery of the second special symbol. It is a data table referred to when selecting the stop display mode (see FIGS. 7A and 8B) of the effect symbol for notifying a person. The stop display mode selection table 222b is configured to select different stop display modes according to the jackpot type won in the lottery of the first special symbol and the length of the rush period to be executed.

Here, the contents of the stop display mode selection table 222b will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 23 (a). FIG. 23A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the stop display mode selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 23A, the stop display mode selection table 222b predicts the degree of advantage of each jackpot type (number of rounds, gaming state set after the jackpot game) and the length of the rush period. It is stipulated that the stop display mode of the effect symbol is set so as to be possible.

Specifically, among the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the jackpot type "big hit A", which is the most advantageous to the player, is won, and the remaining time storage area 223p (the length of the rush period) is set. When the information stored in the area for storing the indicated information) is "0 to 60 seconds", that is, the rush period is within 60 seconds, the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 39". , The stop display mode "111" is defined, the stop display mode "111" is defined in the range of "40 to 79", and the stop display mode "666" is defined in the range of "80 to 99". ..

In addition, the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (the area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) that won the "big hit A" is "61 seconds to 300 seconds", that is, the rush period is 61. If it is within ~ 300 seconds, the stop display mode "111" is defined in the range of "0 to 39" for the value of the acquired effect counter 223h, and the stop display mode "333" is defined in the range of "40 to 79". Is specified, the stop display mode "333" is specified in the range of "80 to 99", and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) is specified. When "301 seconds to", that is, when the rush period is 301 seconds or more, the stop display mode "777" is defined in the range where the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is "0 to 39", and "40 to 79". The stop display mode "777" is defined in the range of "80 to 99", and the stop display mode "VVV" is defined in the range of "80 to 99".

Then, among the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the jackpot type "big hit B", which is disadvantageous to the player, is won, and the remaining time storage area 223p (information indicating the length of the rush period is stored). When the information stored in the area) is "0 to 60 seconds", that is, the rush period is within 60 seconds, the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 39", and the stop display mode is "222" is defined, the stop display mode "444" is defined in the range of "40 to 79", and the stop display mode "666" is defined in the range of "80 to 99".

Further, the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (the area for storing the information indicating the length of the rush period) that won the "big hit B" is "61 seconds to 300 seconds", that is, the rush period is 61. If it is within ~ 300 seconds, the stop display mode "444" is defined in the range of "0 to 39" for the value of the acquired effect counter 223h, and the stop display mode "666" is defined in the range of "40 to 79". Is specified, the stop display mode "111" is specified in the range of "80 to 99", and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) is specified. When "301 seconds to", that is, when the rush period is 301 seconds or more, the stop display mode "111" is defined in the range where the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is "0 to 39", and "40 to 79". The stop display mode "333" is defined in the range of "80 to 99", and the stop display mode "333" is defined in the range of "80 to 99".

Finally, among the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the second most advantageous jackpot type "big hit C" or the most unfavorable jackpot type "big hit D" is won and the rest. When the information stored in the time storage area 223p (the area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) is "0 to 60 seconds", that is, when the rush period is within 60 seconds, the acquired effect counter 223h The stop display mode "444" is defined in the range of "0 to 39", the stop display mode "666" is defined in the range of "40 to 79", and the stop display mode "666" is defined in the range of "80 to 99". The stop display mode "444" is specified.

In addition, the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (the area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) that is won in "Big hit C" and "Big hit D" is "61 seconds to 300 seconds", that is, When the rush period is within 61 to 300 seconds, the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is defined in the range of "0 to 39", the stop display mode "666" is defined, and the value is in the range of "40 to 79". The stop display mode "111" is defined, and the stop display mode "111" is defined in the range of "80 to 99", and is stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period). When the information provided is "301 seconds to", that is, the rush period is 301 seconds or more, the stop display mode "333" is defined in the range where the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is "0 to 39". , The stop display mode "777" is defined in the range of "40 to 99".

As described above, in the present embodiment, the length of the rush period and after the end of the rush period are determined by the stop display mode of the effect symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing when the rush period is started. It is configured to suggest the content of the jackpot to be executed (big hit type) to the player. As a result, it is possible to make the player predict the future game content by grasping the stop display mode of the effect symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is stipulated that the stop display mode of the effect symbol has a predetermined rule, and specifically, the stop display mode of the effect symbol is "even symbol", "odd symbol", and the like. It is stipulated that the benefits given to the player increase in the order of "777" and "VVV" (the rush period becomes longer, and the jackpot type becomes more advantageous). By giving a predetermined rule to the stop display mode of the effect symbol in this way, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

Further, since the jackpot type and the length of the rush period are combined to select the stop display mode of the effect symbol, for example, the stop display mode "111" of the effect symbol is most advantageous to the player. Only when the jackpot type "big hit A" is set, it is stipulated that it is selected even if the rush period is within 60 seconds, so if "111" is displayed, the player In contrast to the novel gameplay that wants the rush period to end in 60 seconds, that is, the playability that normally wants a longer rush period, the jackpot type and the length of the rush period are combined. By displaying the stop display mode, it is possible to add a game property that is opposite to the normal game result (short rush period).

In addition, when "VVV" is displayed as the stop display mode of the effect symbol, it means that the player has selected the most advantageous one for both the jackpot type and the length of the rush period. On the other hand, you can play the game with confidence.

In the present embodiment, the timing for selecting the stop display mode of the effect symbol by referring to the stop display mode selection table 222b according to the game state (timing for stopping and displaying the effect symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81) is set. It is configured to be different. Specifically, whether or not the second special symbol is changing at the time when the latent probability state is set (when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol starts in the state where the probability change state is set). If it is determined that the second special symbol has not changed, that is, if the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed immediately after the latent probability state is set, the jackpot change of the first special symbol occurs. It is configured to stop and display the effect symbol based on the start.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special symbol is fluctuating at the time when the latent probability state is set (when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started while the probability variation state is set), That is, unless the variable display of the second special symbol currently being executed is completed, if the lottery of the second special symbol cannot be executed in the state where the latent state is set, the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is displayed. It is configured to stop and display the effect symbol based on the timing when is finished.

With this configuration, the effect symbol can be stopped and displayed, and the second special symbol lottery can be executed with the latent state set immediately after the rush period starts, which makes the player feel uncomfortable. It is possible to play a game in a latent state without giving it.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is said that the second special symbol is changed at the time when the latent probability state is set (when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started in the state where the probability change state is set). In the case of determination, the length of the rush period from the timing when the variation display of the second special symbol being executed ends is determined, and if the determination result is within a predetermined time, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed. It is configured not to execute (the effect indicating that the rush period has started). As a result, the rush period ends if the small hit game is executed even though the effect symbol is stopped and displayed to notify that the rush period has started (the rush game has started). Can be suppressed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, since the start of the rush period (rush game) is configured to be displayed by a production symbol similar to the third symbol, it is as if the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol is displayed. It is possible to make it seem as if the rush game was executed based on the fact that the symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, even if the length of the rush period is within a predetermined time and the effect symbol is not stopped and displayed, it is possible to suppress giving a great sense of discomfort to the player.

In the present embodiment, as described above, as the timing for stopping and displaying the effect symbol, the second special being executed at the timing when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started or the timing when the latent state is set. Although the timing at which the variation display of the symbol is stopped is used, the effect symbol may be configured to be stopped and displayed at a timing other than this, and is stored in, for example, the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. If the winning information command indicating the winning information is analyzed and it is determined in advance that the jackpot fluctuation will be executed in the next fluctuation, immediately before the jackpot fluctuation is executed (the third symbol in the pre-variation of the jackpot fluctuation). May be configured to stop and display the effect symbol at the timing when is stopped and displayed). With this configuration, the lottery for the second special symbol can be executed immediately after the latent state is set.

In this way, when using a configuration in which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed before the jackpot fluctuation is executed and the notification that the rush game is started is used, the second input is performed from the timing when the effect symbol is stopped and displayed. When a game aiming at the ball mouth 640 (right-handed game) is performed, it is preferable to configure so that the lottery of the second special symbol is not executed before the next jackpot fluctuation is started. As a result, as a result of performing a right-handed game based on the fact that the effect symbol is stopped and displayed, the second is before the latent probability state is set (before the jackpot fluctuation is started), that is, during the probability change state. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a lottery of special symbols is executed and the period during which the rush game is executed is shortened.

The additional effect selection table 222c is used when selecting an effect mode (additional effect mode) for resuming the variable display of the first special symbol that has been temporarily stopped due to winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery. The data table to be referred to is configured so that a different additional effect mode (treasure box (see FIG. 7B)) is selected according to the residual fluctuation time of the first special symbol after resumption. Here, the contents specified in the additional effect selection table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. 23 (b).

FIG. 23B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the additional effect selection table 222c. As shown in FIG. 23B, in the additional effect selection table 222c, different additional effect types are selected based on the period information stored in the residual variation time information storage area 223o and the additional effect counter 223i. The data content is defined as such, and the player predicts the remaining variation time (remaining period of the rush period) of the first special symbol by executing the additional effect mode corresponding to the selected additional effect type. It is configured to get.

Specifically, when the remaining fluctuation time (period information stored in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o) is the period A (less than 5 seconds), the value of the acquired additional effect counter 223i is "0 to 99". "None" is specified in the range of "100 to 198", and "Additional effect A" is specified in the range of "100 to 198". Further, when the remaining fluctuation time (period information stored in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o) is the period B (5 seconds to 60 seconds), the value of the acquired additional effect counter 223i is "0 to 99". The additional effect type "additional effect A" is defined in the range of "100 to 198", and the "additional effect B" is defined in the range of "100 to 198". When the remaining fluctuation time (period information stored in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o) is the period C (60 seconds or more), the value of the acquired additional effect counter 223i is in the range of "0 to 99". The additional effect type "additional effect B" is defined, and "additional effect C" is specified in the range of "100 to 198".

Here, when the "additional effect A" is set, the display mode of the treasure box 812 (see FIG. 7B) displayed during the rush period is changed to a tattered display mode. By grasping the tattered display mode, the player can predict that the rush period is short. Further, when "additional effect B" is set, the treasure box 812 (see FIG. 7B) in the normal display mode is displayed, and when "additional effect C" is set, the treasure box 812 in the normal display mode is displayed. A gorgeous display mode is set. If "None" is selected, the effect of not displaying the treasure chest 812 is set during the remaining rush period.

In the additional effect selection table 222c (FIG. 23 (b)) shown in the present embodiment, an example in which the remaining fluctuation time of the rush period and the additional effect type are completely associated with each other is shown, but the present invention is limited to this. With a small probability, for example, "additional effect C" is set when the period B is set, and "additional effect A" or "none" is set when the period C is set. Is also good. As a result, it is possible to perform an unexpected effect on the player.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the combined game information in which the rush period and the jackpot type are combined is played in the stop display mode of the effect symbol displayed at the timing when the rush game is started in the latent state. It is configured to provide the player with game information indicating the remaining period of the rush period by providing additional effects during the rush period. As a result, the player can comprehensively discriminate between the stop display mode of the effect symbol executed as the compound game information and the effect mode of the additional effect, so that more detailed game contents can be predicted.

Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 22 (b). FIG. 22B is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d, a special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e, and a special figure 1 stop. Type selection flag 223f, special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g, effect counter 223h, additional effect counter 223i, state setting area 223j, remaining time reduction number area 223k, special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m, special figure. 2 Fluctuation time counter 223n, remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o, remaining time storage area 223p, card notification flag 223q, card notification possible flag 223s, rush display flag 223t, prize ball counter 223u, power supply. At least the disconnection flag 223y and the other memory area 223z are provided.

The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until the processing for the command is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read / written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 60) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination process performs the command determination process. , The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The winning information storage area 223b has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas stores prize information. In the pachinko machine 10, when the starting prize for the first ball opening 64 is detected in the main control device 110, the first winning random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter C2 acquired in response to the starting winning. From each value of the small hit type counter C5 and the variable type counter CS1, various information (win / fail, big hit type in case of big hit, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the starting prize is drawn is obtained. It is predicted (estimated) by the main control device 110, and various predicted information is notified from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts various information (win / fail, big hit type in case of big hit, fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, and the winning information. Is stored in the winning information storage area 223b. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 areas (1st to 4th areas). Will be done. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is a variation effect (variation display) of the first special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is reserved by the main control device 110. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol up to four times for each type of special symbol.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c sets the number of reserved balls as a special symbol. It is designed to be managed for each type of.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added by entering the ball into the first ball entry port 64, or in the main control device 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command. , Stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (see S4212 in FIG. 60). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the first special symbol of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203d.

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the hold ball number indicated by the command in the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223c, and holds the first special symbol after the storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the ball number counter 223c, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, it holds the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the ball number symbol is displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is changed while synchronizing with the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 may also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. can. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

The special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d and the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e receive the fluctuation pattern command of the first special symbol and the fluctuation pattern command of the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110, respectively. It is turned on (see S4206 and S4209 in FIG. 60) and turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S5102 and S5108 in FIG. 69). When the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d and the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e are turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

When the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g receive the stop type command of the first special symbol and the stop type command of the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110. (See S4301 in FIG. 61), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S5112 in FIG. 69). When the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is turned on, the stop type is changed based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type). It is determined.

The effect counter 223h is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The effect counter 223h is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198. For example, each time the main process (see FIG. 59) is executed, the value is incremented by 1 and updated. Will be done.

The additional effect counter 223i is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The additional effect counter 223i is composed of a 1-byte loop counter updated in the range of 0 to 198. For example, the value is incremented by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 59) is executed. Will be updated.

The state setting area 223j is a storage area in which information corresponding to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is stored. In this state setting area 223j, every time a state command output from the main control device 110 is received, information corresponding to the state of the pachinko machine 10 indicated by the state command is stored (see S4405 in FIG. 62). .. More specifically, the state setting area 223j is allocated with a 2-bit storage area, and whether or not it is a high-probability state of a special symbol or whether or not it is a high-probability state of a normal symbol in order from the high-order bit. A value indicating whether or not is stored. For example, if the value of the state setting area 223j is "11B", it means that it is a probabilistic state (high probability state of special symbol and high probability state of normal symbol), and if it is "10B", it means latent. It means that it is a probable state (a high-probability state of a special symbol and a low-probability state of a normal symbol). On the other hand, if it is "00H", it means that it is a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol and a low probability state of a normal symbol).

By updating the state setting area 223j in response to the state command output from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 can accurately grasp the state of the pachinko machine 10.

The remaining time reduction area 223k is a storage area for storing the remaining number of times in the high probability state of the normal symbol. The remaining time reduction number area 223k is updated to the number of times notified by the remaining time reduction number command output every time the value of the time reduction counter 203f is updated in the main control device 110 (see S4802 in FIG. 66). As a result, the value stored in the remaining time reduction number area 223k can be updated in synchronization with the value of the time reduction counter 203f of the main control device 110, so that the remaining time reduction number grasped by the voice lamp control device 113 can be determined. It can be matched with the actual number of time reductions updated by the main controller 110.

The special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m and the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n indicate the corresponding fluctuation time when each fluctuation display is set (executed) in the fluctuation display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 69). Each time a value is set and various counter update processes (see S4111 in FIG. 72) are executed, each value is decremented by 1 (see S5402 and S5404 in FIG. 72). The period from the reception of the special figure 1 temporary stop command to the reception of the special figure 1 restart command is when various counter update processes (see S4111 in FIG. 72) are executed. Also, the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is configured so as not to be subtracted by 1.

Then, when calculating the remaining fluctuation time in the temporary stop-related processing (see S4220 in FIG. 67) that is executed when it is determined that the temporary stop-related command has been received in the command determination processing (see S4112 in FIG. 60). It is referenced (see S4903 in FIG. 67).

The remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o is a storage area for storing information indicating the remaining period of the rush period, that is, the remaining time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol. Remaining period information (period A to period C) for indicating the remaining fluctuation time of the temporarily stopped first special symbol variation display is set in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o, and the temporarily stopped first special symbol is set. The remaining period information stored when setting the additional effect when resuming the variable display of the symbol is referred to.

The card notification flag 223q is a flag for indicating whether or not the card forgetting warning screen (see FIG. 10A) is displayed (notified), and is turned on when the card forgetting warning screen is displayed. Set.

The card notification possible flag 223s is a flag for indicating whether or not the card forgetting warning screen (see FIG. 10A) can be displayed (notified), and the card forgetting warning screen can be displayed. It is set to on when the above conditions are met.

The rush displayed flag 223t is a flag for indicating whether or not the rush game has started in the state where the latent state is set, and is a rush entry screen (FIG. 7) indicating that the rush game has started. (A), see FIG. 8 (b)) is set to on.

The prize ball number counter 223u is a counter for continuously measuring the number of prize balls after the jackpot game is started, and is a prize ball during a period in which a game state advantageous to the player is continuously set. The numbers are configured to be cumulative. Specifically, in the hit-related processing (S4216 in FIG. 63), when it is determined that the prize ball command has been received (S4505: Yes in FIG. 63), the value corresponding to the received prize ball command is added (S). S4506 in FIG. 63).

As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to acquire a large amount of prize balls not only in the big hit game but also in the small hit game, the pachinko machine 10 is small according to the value of the prize ball counter 223u. It is configured so that the card forgotten warning display can be executed after the end of the winning game or after the end of the big hit game in which a small number of rounds is set.

The power cutoff flag 223y is a flag used for determining whether or not there is a momentary power failure. The power cutoff flag 223y is set to be turned on before the power cutoff process is executed after receiving the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S4117 in FIG. 59). After that, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all the information in the RAM 223 disappears after a certain period of time (100 milliseconds). Therefore, when the power cutoff flag 223y is on (see 4008: Yes in FIG. 58) in the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 58), it is constant after the power cutoff flag 223y is set to on. This is the case where the voice lamp control device 113 is started up before the lapse of time (100 milliseconds), that is, when there is a momentary power failure. In this case, all the information in the RAM 223 has not disappeared, and unnecessary information (or information that has become incomplete due to the disappearance of only a part of the information) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. In some cases, the information in the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared (see S4009 in FIG. 58). As a result, the processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so that each processing of the voice lamp control device 113 can be operated normally.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and the number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches it, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset is applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by 1. When the MPU 231 executes the instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory generally has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data that is continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, high-speed reading is possible for the data on the second and subsequent pages, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-consecutive data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 described later of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the second program storage area 234a1. As described above, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and is, for example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) are generated when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to read and write data to and from the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b has one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) containing the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in one bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. The process of transferring one page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a in the NOR type ROM 234d, specifically, the first program stored in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be executed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) worth of instructions) are stored from the instructions. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and also specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (command code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (command code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after the address "0000H" is specified, and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The program storage area of the work RAM 233 for each fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is programmed so that the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 73) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM configured by a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 30) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. By expanding the image drawn in the buffer and outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 74 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes an image drawing process for the next frame, and also executes a process of displaying the image previously developed by drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 draws and displays an image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, since the image controller 237 does not receive the drawing instruction of the next image at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started during the drawing of the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The image is drawn using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, in general, the NAND flash memory facilitates a large capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 by the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display a third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is held without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to the 235e and the error message image area 235f, at least the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and the third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area for storing the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the game is started by the player while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the upper first entry port 64b1 or the lower first. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a variable image at power-on, which displays the result of a lottery performed by the main control device 110 by a variable effect when a ball entering the ball entry port 64b2 is detected.

When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 73).

Here, a variation image when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. 25. In FIG. 25, immediately after the power is turned on by the display control device 114, the power is turned on by the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234. It is explanatory drawing explaining the time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the main image area 235a at power-on, and the main image at power-on shown in FIG. 25 (a). The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is the instruction command for starting the variation, is received, the display control device 114 displays FIG. 25 (b). On the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, the image of the "x" symbol that fluctuates when the power is turned on is displayed alternately and repeatedly during the fluctuation period. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the image shown in FIG. 25 (b) is displayed for a certain period after the variation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", it is shown in FIG. 25 (c). The displayed image is displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation effect is stopped.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball is detected in the upper first ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first ball entry port 64b2. If this is the case, the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 25 (b) and 25 (c) are drawn. Is instructed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 so as to be alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If a ball is detected in the upper first ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first ball entry port 64b2 while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is set to the third. It can be immediately displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 24, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 26, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images will be described. FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a range of four types of rear images and a rear image stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image, and FIG. 26 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing " FIG. 26B shows the back side A corresponding to the "city stage", and the back sides B to D corresponding to the "forest stage", the "river stage", and the "sky stage", respectively. .. Further, FIG. 27 is shown with respect to the back surface E corresponding to the “island stage”.

As shown in FIG. 26, as the rear image corresponding to each of the rear surfaces A to D, an image horizontally longer than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared on the back surfaces A to D (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured so that the back image is continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a'are composed of an image corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The rear image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

When the change of the back type is decided based on the back type selection table (not shown) and the stage is changed to "city stage", "forest stage", "river stage", or "empty stage", MPU231 First, the area between the position a and the position a'of the corresponding rear image is set as the initial position of the display area, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image of the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and further displayed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a'. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the positions a and c so as to flow toward the left with a smooth connection.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27, the rear image on the back surface E has a third symbol in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) → ... In FIG. 27 with the passage of time. It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, on the back surface E, the image of the mountain towering over the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed in a fixed position. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color tone of the sky image spreading on the mountain changes with the passage of time.

When the stage is changed to the "island stage", the rear image shown in FIG. 27 (a) is displayed as the initial rear image of the rear surface E. In the rear image shown in FIG. 27 (a), an orange sky indicating a morning glow is displayed. Then, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to bright blue, and after a predetermined time elapses, the back image shown in FIG. 27B is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 27 (b), a bright blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black with the lapse of time, and after a lapse of a predetermined time, the back image shown in FIG. 27 (c) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 27 (c), a black sky indicating the night is displayed. After that, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually begins to turn white from black and then changes to orange. Then, after the lapse of a predetermined time, the back image shown in FIG. 27 (a) is returned, and the back images of FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (c) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 again.

Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 26A, the back surface A corresponding to the city stage, which is the initial stage, is the back surface of the resident video RAM 235 in which all the image data corresponding to the entire range of the back surface A, that is, the position a to the position d is displayed. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is played without changing the stage while the initial stage "city stage" is displayed, so the image data on the back A corresponding to the frequently displayed "city stage" is displayed. By making all of them resident in the rear image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, the back surface B corresponding to the "forest stage", the back surface C corresponding to the "river stage", and the back surface D corresponding to the "empty stage" are a part of the back surface as shown in FIG. 26 (b). That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Further, the back surface E corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 27 (a), and the image data corresponding to the back image between FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (b) excluding FIG. 27 (b) is obtained after the power is turned on. It is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and is resident in the start-up process.

Here, in order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to make the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all the rear images, but if this is done, the resident video RAM 235 will be resident. As a result, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image first displayed when the stage is changed is the range from the position a to the position a'(or the range of FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (b)). ), And the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. 27 (a) and 27 (b)) is transferred to the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Since the character ROM 234 is configured to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, when the stage change is decided by the lottery at the start of the fluctuation, the back surface of the resident video RAM 235. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial positions of the back surfaces B to D can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the scroll display or the color tone changes with the passage of time. It can be displayed while making it. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a part of the range of images is stored in the back surfaces B to D, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 and suppress an increase in cost.

Further, on the rear surfaces B to D, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is directed from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. While scrolling, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b'to the image at the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b'to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b'to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Similarly, on the back surface E, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the images of FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (b) are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. 27 (a), so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 27 (b) to 27 (c) and 27 (c) to (a) can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. The range of ~ (b) is set. As a result, while displaying the images of FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (b), the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 27 (b) to (c) and 27 (c) to (a) are normally used. Since it can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the images of FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (b) are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Using the image data corresponding to the rear image, the images of FIGS. 27 (b) to (c) and 27 (c) to (a) are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time. be able to.

In the backs B to E, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 24) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

Further, in the rear surfaces B to D, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to the images between the positions b'and b. Image data to be stored is duplicated. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b'on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image controller 237 is controlled. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so that the image between the positions a and c flows toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 24, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, is resident. As a result, when performing variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37 after the ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 640, the third symbol display device In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variation effect is not immediately started.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9", the main symbol consisting of the rear symbol such as a wooden box, the rear symbol and the character such as the furoshiki, the helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the above is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. Will be. As a result, when the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy", "old man", and "girl" are displayed according to various productions, and the data corresponding to these are displayed in the character design area 235e. By being resident, when the display control device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but is resident. By reading the image data resident in advance in the character symbol area 235e of the video RAM 235, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. Notify the display control device 114 by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 has an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the process of displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used to draw the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a storage image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a rear image change flag 233w, a rear image discrimination flag 233x, a demo display flag 233y, and a definite display flag 233z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and an opening effect. , Display data tables corresponding to round production, ending production, and demo production are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A or jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

The opening production is a production for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state and the large opening that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round production will start from now on. It is a production to inform the player of the number of rounds to be played. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special gaming state.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the game is not performed on the pachinko machine 10.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be enlarged and displayed, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing a superposition process with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is specified for each address. It should be noted that one or a plurality of information regarding the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are obtained with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type is the back A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of "city stage", "forest stage", "river stage", "sky stage", and "island stage"). Information is described that specifies whether to display either one or to display a rear image different from the rear images A to E. Further, as the back surface type, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to E, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to E is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back surfaces A to E as a drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to E, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In this embodiment, a case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not the display should be performed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the rear image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating that) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. The offset information is specified instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the lapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the third symbol can be the variation symbol in the previous variation effect or the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110. By managing by the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, it is possible to easily specify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variablely displayed at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 29). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 30) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, it is resident among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to start the transfer at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 29). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data for which the transfer should be started does not exist at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, the transfer target image data for which the transfer should be started does not exist corresponding to the address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 29).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 29, in the example of FIG. 29). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table is the display data table. If a transfer data table corresponding to the above exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 30) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 29, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Bull data is specified in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c determines whether or not to display the power-on images (main image at power-on and variable image at power-on) shown in FIGS. 25 (a) to 25 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , MPU 231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 73) (see S6005 in FIG. 73). Then, at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed in order to display an image other than the image at the time of turning on the power. It is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 85 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 75 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 75 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 75 (b)) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. See S6309 in 75 (b)). On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 85 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 85 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 30), which will be described later, is generated, which describes the content of the image drawing instruction for the user. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 30) described later that describes drawing instructions is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to the later drawing list (see FIG. 30) that describes the instruction content for image drawing to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 moves the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 75 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S7205 in FIG. 84) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list to be described later. (See FIG. 30) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 30, a back image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Design 2, ..., Error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as a pattern). In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and the image controller 237 includes various types. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. Processing is performed, synthesis processing with other sprites is performed according to the α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to the color information, and filtering processing is performed by the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processing on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 has a drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and other contents of an image to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image, warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) are set to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can be used according to the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., Hold ball number symbol 1, hold ball number symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 has the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored) when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f. The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list contains this transfer data information, the image controller 237 prepares an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 75 (b). ) Is executed, the time counting counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7207 in FIG. 82). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes to be performed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 74) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 231. Will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "Off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 86). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 86). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as "drawing target buffer") that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 87).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and together with the drive signal, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when the value is "1", it is set to "0". It is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see S6306 in FIG. 75 (b)) is executed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The rear image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the rear image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of the rear image is changed, and if it is off, it means that the change is not performed. The rear image change flag 233w is set to on when the rear image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 81 (a)). Further, the rear image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 86), and is set to off when the rear image change process is executed (see S7710 in FIG. 86). As a result, it is possible to display the rear image corresponding to the rear image change command and the effect mode change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

The rear image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set rear image type. This flag is composed of, for example, 1 byte, and each back type is associated with each bit. If any bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current back type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the rear surface A is set. When the rear image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to on for the rear image discrimination flag 233x (FIG. 81 (a). ) S7002). At this time, all other bits are set to off. With this back image discrimination flag 233x, the currently set back type can be easily specified.

The demo display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not the demo is being produced. If the demo display flag 233y is on, it means that the demo is being produced, and if it is off, it means that the demo is not being produced. This demo display flag 233y is set to on when the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (see S7221 in FIG. 82), and the demo display data table is set. It is set to off when other display data tables other than are set for the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 77 (a), S6705 in FIG. 78 (a), S6805 in FIG. 78 (b). , See S6905 in FIG. 79). With this demo display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demo is currently being produced.

The confirmation display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the confirmation display effect is being executed. Here, the definite display effect indicates an effect in which the stop symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the fluctuation pattern. If the definite display flag 233z is on, it means that the definite display effect is in progress, and if it is off, it means that the definite display effect is not in progress. The confirmation display flag 233z is set to on when the confirmation display data table is set to the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (S7214 in FIG. 82), and is other than the confirmation display data table. Set off when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 77 (a), S6705 in FIG. 78 (a), S6805 in FIG. 78 (b), FIG. See S6905 in 79). With this confirmation display flag 233z, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the current confirmation display effect is in progress.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 31 to 57. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt processing, first, the reading processing of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). When it reaches 479,99,232,99, respectively, it clears to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C4, and C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, the special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, the start winning process associated with winning the first ball opening 64 (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 32 to 47.

After the start winning process (S105) is executed, a process for displaying on the second symbol display device (not shown) and a process for passing the ball at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 are performed normally. The symbol variation process is executed (S106). The details of the normal symbol variation processing (S106) will be described later with reference to FIG. 48. After the normal symbol variation process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. The launch control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and launches the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

First, with reference to FIG. 32, the contents of the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation processing (S104). When the special symbol variation process (S104) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current is a big hit or a small hit (S201), and if it is determined that the current is a big hit or a small hit (S201: Yes). Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S202). In the process of S202, it is determined whether the subtraction of the variable time of the other special figure during the change is interrupted by the stop display of one special figure with the symbol indicating the hit. If it is determined in the process of S202 that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S202: Yes), the display of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the temporarily stopped special figure is updated. (S203), that is, the process of continuing the variable display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed for the special figure in which the subtraction of the variable time is interrupted, and this process is terminated. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the special figure fluctuation has not been forcibly stopped.

On the other hand, in the processing of S201, if it is determined that the current is a big hit or a small hit (S201: No), is the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m larger than 0 (that is, the special figure 1 changes)? (S204), and if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is not larger than 0 (0) (S204: No), the first special symbol fluctuation start processing is performed. (S208) is executed, and then the process proceeds to S209, which executes the variation processing related to the special figure 2. The details of the first special symbol change start processing (S208) will be described later with reference to FIG. 33.

In the process of S204, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203 m is larger than 0 (S204: Yes), the first special symbol variation executing process (S205) is executed. The first special symbol variation in-execution process (S205) executes the process in the special figure 1 variation, and a detailed description thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 37.

After finishing the first special symbol variation executing process (S205), it is next determined whether the variation time ends (whether the variation time counter 203m is 0 in the special figure 1 variation time counter 203m) (S206), and the variation time is determined. If it is determined that the end timing is reached (S206: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S207) is executed, and then the process proceeds to S209. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S206 that it is not the end timing of the fluctuation time (S206: No), the processing of S207 is skipped and the process proceeds to S209.

In the processes of S209 to S213, the same processes as those of S204 to S207 executed for the special figure 1 are executed. When the processing of S209 is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n is larger than 0 (that is, whether the special figure 2 is changing) (S209), and the special figure 2 change. If it is determined that the value of the time counter 203n is not larger than 0 (0) (S209: No), the second special symbol variation start process (S210) is executed, and then this process ends. The details of the second special symbol change start processing (S210) will be described later with reference to FIG. 39.

On the other hand, in the process of S209, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n is larger than 0 (S209: Yes), the second special symbol variation executing process (S211) is executed. This second special symbol variation executing process (S211) executes the process during the special figure 2 variation, and will be described later with reference to FIG. 44.

After finishing the second special symbol variation executing process (S211), it is next determined whether the variation time end timing (special figure 2 variation time counter 203n is 0) (S212), and the variation time is determined. If it is determined that the end timing is reached (S212: Yes), the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S213) is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S212, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the fluctuation time (S212: No), the process of S213 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the first special symbol variation start processing (S208), which is one of the special symbol variation processing (S104 in FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change start processing (S208).

In the first special symbol change start processing (S208), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is acquired (S301), and the value of the acquired first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d (N1). ) Is greater than 0 (S302). In the process of S302, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is used. After subtracting 1 (S303), a hold ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the hold ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d after the subtraction is set (S304). ..

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the first special symbol hold ball number counter of the RAM 223. Store in 223c. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the first special symbol of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203d.

When the processing of S304 is completed, the data of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is then shifted to the previous data (S305). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3.

When the process of S305 is completed, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is then executed (S306). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 34, but the value of the first random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. This is a process for executing a jackpot determination as to whether or not a jackpot is a jackpot based on the set gaming state.

When the processing of S306 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing is next executed (see FIG. 35). Although the details will be described later, this first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) is a variation type counter stored in the execution area of the first special symbol winning / failing determination result and the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. This is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern based on the value of CS1.

When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) is completed, the game state update process is then executed (S308). The details of this game state update process (S308 in FIG. 36) will be described later, but the state of the pachinko machine 10 is indicated by updating the state of the probability change flag 203 g and the value of the time saving counter 203f, which indicate the state of the pachinko machine 10. It is a process for updating. When the process of S308 is completed, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S302 that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S302: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, regarding the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), which is one process of the first special symbol change start process (S204 in FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. explain. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, whether or not the jackpot is won in the other special symbol lottery during the period during which the fluctuation display (big hit fluctuation) in which the jackpot is won in one of the special symbols is executed. It is configured so that no discrimination is made.

In other words, in a state where it is confirmed that the jackpot game will be executed after a predetermined period (after the fluctuation time has elapsed) by one special symbol lottery, the jackpot will be won by the other special symbol lottery, and multiple times in a short period of time. It is configured to prevent the jackpot from being won and giving excessive benefits.

In this way, the process of acquiring various counter values is performed in the same manner as in the normal special symbol lottery, the determination based on the various counter values acquired in the process is skipped, and the outlier symbol is set. It is possible to respond quickly to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery.

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), first, each counter value stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired (S401). Next, it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S402). That is, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in a high probability state (probability change state, latent probability state). When it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is on (that is, the probability variation state of the special symbol) (S402: Yes), the random number value that becomes the jackpot specified in the first random number table 202a for high probability time. And whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer matches, and the determination result (lottery result) is acquired (S403). On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S402 that the probability variation flag 203g is off (that is, it is a low probability state of the special symbol) (S402: No), the first random number table 202a for the low probability time is displayed. It is determined whether or not the specified random number value that becomes a big hit and the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer match, and the lottery result is acquired (S404).

Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot flag is on (S405). If it is determined that it is not on (that is, it is off) (S405: No), it is determined whether the lottery result acquired in S403 or S404 is a big hit (S406), and if the lottery result is a big hit (S406). S406: Yes), the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON for the first special symbol (S407), and the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to the jackpot (S408). Then, based on the acquired value of the hit type counter, the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S409), and the value corresponding to the current gaming state is set in the winning state storage area. It is stored in 203j (S410), 1 is set in the time saving counter 203f (S411), and this processing is terminated.

Here, by setting the value of the time reduction counter 203f to 1 in the processing of S411, the first special symbol jackpot determination processing (see S306 in FIG. 34) in the first special symbol fluctuation start processing (see S208 in FIG. 33). In the game state update process (S308) executed later than the above, the high probability state of the normal symbol can be shifted to the low probability state. As a result, when a jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol, it is possible to set a low probability state of the normal symbol at the timing when the jackpot fluctuation starts. Therefore, it is possible to shift the probabilistic state to the latent probable state by winning the jackpot of the first special symbol while the probabilistic state is set.

also. By performing the process of setting the value of the time reduction counter 203f to 1 in the process of S411, the process of shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state and the change of the special symbol on condition that the jackpot is won. Both the process of shifting the high-probability state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state and the process of shifting the high-probability state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state on condition that the number of times reaches a predetermined number of times can be executed by using the game state update process (S308). As a result, even when a plurality of conditions for terminating the high-probability state of the normal symbol are provided, it is possible to prevent the processing of the main control device 110 from becoming complicated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S405, when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203h is on (S405: Yes), or in the processing of S406, when it is determined that the lottery result is out of order (S406: No), the out-of-order symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S412), and then this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S208 in FIG. 33), will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 35), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 34), the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot, that is, the first. 1 It is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is set (S501). Here, the determination as to whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is on. The special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to be turned on in the process of S407 in the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34).

When it is determined in the process of S501 that the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S501: Yes), the first obtained in the process of S401 in the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34). Based on the value of the hit type counter C2, the jackpot type is determined from the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16A) (S502), and the process proceeds to S503.

On the other hand, in the process of S501, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of order (that is, the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is off) (S501: No), the process of S502 is skipped. Then, the process proceeds to S503.

In the process of S503, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a (S503). Next, the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 17 to 19) according to the gaming state is read out (S504), and the process proceeds to S505. The gaming state is determined based on the state of the probability change flag 203g and the value of the time reduction counter 203f. In the process of S505, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S505), and then the special figure 1 variation pattern command is set based on the selected variation pattern (S505). S506).

When the processing of S506 is completed, the special figure 1 stop type command indicating the stop symbol is set (S507), then the change start of the first special symbol is set by the first symbol display device 37 (S508), and the processing of S505 is completed. A value indicating the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in 1 is set in the fluctuation time counter 203m in Special Figure 1, and the present process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, a game state update process (S308), which is one process of the first special symbol change start process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this game state update process (S308). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the state of the probability change flag 203g, which is a condition for setting the gaming state, and the value of the time saving counter 203f, only the value of the time saving counter 203f is updated at the start of the change of the special symbol. In the game state update process (see FIG. 36), which is one of the first special symbol change start processes (see FIG. 33), the process of updating the value of the time saving counter 203f is configured to be executed.

The probability variation flag 203g, which will be described in detail later, is set to off when the jackpot fluctuation ends and the special symbol indicating the jackpot is stopped and displayed (when the jackpot game is executed). It is configured as follows.

That is, one of the two conditional elements (the state of the probability change flag 203g and the value of the time reduction counter 203f) referred to when setting the game state is updated at the start of the change of the special symbol, and the other conditional elements. By making it possible to update when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, it is possible to easily diversify the gaming state set by combining the two conditional elements. In addition, since it is possible to set a specific gaming state (for example, latent state) only during the period from the start to the end of the change of the special symbol, it is advantageous for the player only during the predetermined period. It is possible to set the game state.

When the game state update process (see FIG. 36) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203f is larger than 0 (S601). If it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 0 (S601: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203f is larger than 0 (S601: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S602), and the remaining time saving number command indicating the value of the time saving counter 203f is set. (S603). Next, it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 0 (S604), if it is determined to be 0 (S604: Yes), and then it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S605). ). Here, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S605: No), it is a probability variation state (that is, a latent probability state) to which the time saving game is not given, so that the latent probability state is indicated. A status command is set (S606), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S605, when it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is not set to ON (S605: No), since it is a normal state, a state command indicating the normal state is set (S607), and this process is performed. To finish.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S604 that the value of the time reduction counter 203f is not 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is.

In this embodiment, the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set until the next big hit of the special symbol is won (until the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination indicating the big hit). In addition to this, for example, a probability change counter is provided in place of the probability change flag 203 g, and the value of the probability change counter is subtracted each time a change of a special symbol is executed, and the value of the probability change counter becomes 0. In some cases, it may be configured to shift the high-probability state of the special symbol to the low-probability state.

When such a configuration is used, the game state update process (S308) shown with reference to FIG. 36 is set as the game state update process at the start of the special figure change, and separately at the timing when the change display of the special symbol ends. By providing the game state update process when the special symbol fluctuation is stopped to update the value of the probability change counter, the process of determining whether to end the high probability state of the special symbol and whether to end the high probability state of the normal symbol It is possible to execute the process of determining whether or not at a different timing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the content of the first special symbol variation executing process (S205) executed in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. I will explain. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol change execution processing (S205). In the first special symbol variation executing process (S205), when the subtraction of the variation time of the special figure 1 is interrupted, the process of restarting the subtraction and the process of subtracting the variation time are executed.

When the first special symbol change execution processing (S205) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S701). Here, a case where this process is executed with the temporary stop flag 203v of Special Figure 1 set to ON will be briefly described. As described above, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to on when the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a hit (small hit) while the special figure 1 is changing. Then, when the temporary stop flag 203v of Special Figure 1 is set to ON, the jackpot middle flag 203o is set to ON in the process, so that the timer interrupt executed every 2 milliseconds by the main controller 110 is performed. When the process loops and the next special symbol variation process (FIG. 32) is executed (after 2 milliseconds when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON), the process of S201 is a big hit. Therefore, the first special symbol variation executing process (S205) is not executed. Then, when the big hit game (or small hit game) is completed and it is determined in the process of S201 that the game is not during the big hit (or during the small hit), the first special symbol variation executing process (S205) is executed. It will be. With this configuration, the big hit (or small hit) game is in the state where the first special symbol change executing process (S205) is executed while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON. It is configured so that it is the timing to restart the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation, which has been completed and the subtraction of the fluctuation time has been suspended.

Returning to FIG. 37, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S701, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S701: Yes), then the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command is set (S702), and the special figure 1 provisional stop flag 203v is set. The stop flag 203v is set to off (S703), and the process proceeds to S704. On the other hand, in the processing of S701, if it is determined that the temporary stop flag 203v in FIG. 1 is not set to on (set to off) (S701: No), the processing of S702 and S703 is skipped and S704 is performed. Move to the processing of.

In the process of S704, the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203 m is decremented by 1 and updated (S704), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S705), and the present process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207), which is one of the special symbol variation processing (S104 in FIG. 32), will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207).

In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON for the first special symbol (special figure 1) (S801). When it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to on for the first special symbol (S801: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to on (S802), and the special figure is set. 2 A special figure 2 indicating that the fluctuation stop flag 203s is turned on is set (S803). Next, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed with a detached symbol (S804).

When the processing of S804 is completed, the jackpot scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S805), and the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h and the probability variation flag 203g are reset (S806). Next, the jackpot middle flag 203o is set to ON (S807), and the process proceeds to S808.

On the other hand, in the process of S801, if the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to off for the first special symbol (S801: No), the process of S802 to S807 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S808.

In the process of S808, a special figure 1 confirmation command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the first special symbol is confirmed and stopped is set (S808). After that, a process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is variablely displayed by the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S809), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the first special symbol stop process (S207), the process (S802 to S809) of stopping the variation display with the symbol showing the determination result of the first lottery game is executed. Further, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a big hit (S801: Yes), the process of forcibly stopping the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner (S803, S804) is executed.

In the first embodiment, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed by the jackpot symbol, the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is forcibly stopped and displayed by the off symbol. It is not limited to. For example, at the time when the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol may be interrupted (temporarily stopped). Then, after the jackpot of the first special symbol is completed, the variable display of the second special symbol may be restarted. As a result, it is possible to produce a natural aspect as compared with the case where the forced stop is caused by the detachment. Further, in the present embodiment, the jackpot scenario is set in the process of S806 based on the game state stored in the winning state storage area 203j in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34). For example, a jackpot scenario is set in the process of S706 based on the game state stored in the winning state storage area 203j in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) using the opening period of the jackpot game. You may try to do it.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the contents of the second special symbol change start process (S210) executed in the special symbol change process (FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol change start processing (S210). In the second special symbol change start processing (S210), a process for starting the change of the special figure 2 is executed. It should be noted that, in response to the above-mentioned processing related to the change of the first special symbol with reference to FIGS. 39 to 46, the object of the change is simply changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol. The detailed description of the element will be omitted.

In the second special symbol change start processing (S209), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 change stop flag 203s is set to ON (S901). When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to on (S901: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to off (S902), and this process is terminated. As described above, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is a flag that is set to be turned on while displaying the stop of the second special symbol with the stop symbol corresponding to the deviation when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol ends. .. That is, if the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is on, it means that the jackpot is started, so that the fluctuation start of the second special symbol should not be set. Therefore, when the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is turned on in the processing of S901, the main processing is terminated as it is without executing each processing of S902 to S907 for setting the fluctuation start.

On the other hand, in the process of S901, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to off (that is, not set to on) (S901: No), the second special symbol execution area 203b Data (various counter values) are acquired (S903). Next, based on the data acquired in the process of S903, it is determined whether or not there is the acquired data (S904). That is, when it is determined that there is no data in the second special symbol execution area (S904: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S903, when it is determined that there is data (S904: Yes), the second special symbol jackpot determination process for executing the jackpot determination of the second special symbol based on each stored counter value is performed. Execute (S905). The details of the second special symbol jackpot determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 40.

After the processing of S905 is completed, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process for selecting the variation pattern is executed based on the lottery result of the second special symbol and the data acquired in the process of S903 (S906). .. The details of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906) will be described later with reference to FIG. 42. After the process of S906 is completed, the above-mentioned game state update process (see FIG. 36) is executed (S907), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, regarding the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905), which is one process of the second special symbol change start process (S210 in FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. explain. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905).

In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905), the same process as the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) is executed, so that the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) is performed. The differences between the above will be mainly explained.

When the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905) is executed, each counter value stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b is acquired (S1001). Then, the processing of S1002 to S1004 for acquiring the lottery result of whether or not it is a big hit is executed based on each acquired counter value and the state of the probability variation flag 203g. Each of these processes differs from the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) except that the counter value used for the lottery (determination) is acquired from the second special symbol execution area 203b. Control is executed.

When the processing of S1003 or S1004 is completed, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S1005). When it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is not set to ON (S1005: No), it is determined whether or not the acquired lottery result is a jackpot (S1006), and when it is determined to be a jackpot. (S1006: Yes) executes the processes of S1007 to S1010 for setting the lottery result of the second special symbol as a big hit, and ends this process. In each of these processes S1007 to S1010, the same process as each process of S407 to S410 for setting the lottery result of the first special symbol to the jackpot is executed in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34), respectively. Will be done.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to ON in the processing of S1005 (S1005: Yes), or if the lottery result of the second special symbol acquired in the processing of S1006 is not a jackpot. If it is determined (S1006: No), the special figure 2 deviation variation process for setting the small hit of the second special symbol or the stop symbol corresponding to the deviation is executed (S1011), and this process is terminated. The details of the special figure 2 deviation variation processing (S1011) will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this special drawing 2 deviation processing (S1011).

In the special figure 2 deviation variation processing (S1011), first, it is determined whether the lottery result acquired in the processing of S1003 or S1004 of FIG. 40 is a small hit of the second special symbol (S1101), and the lottery result is a small hit. (S1101: Yes), the small hit flag 203k is set to ON (S1102), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to the small hit (S1103). Then, the small hit symbol indicating the small hit type corresponding to the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is set as the stop symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S1104), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1101 that the lottery result is out of order (S1101: No), the out-of-order symbol of the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1105), and then. This process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906), which is one of the second special symbol variation start processes (S210 in FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Will be explained. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906).

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906 in FIG. 42), first, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area 203b (S1201). Next, in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905 in FIG. 40), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the jackpot of the second special symbol is set. (S1202). Here, the determination as to whether or not the jackpot is a big hit is determined by whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is turned on for the second special symbol. The special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to be turned on in the process of S1007 in the above-mentioned second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 40).

In the process of S1202, when it is determined that the jackpot of the second special symbol is set (S1202: Yes), the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 17 and 19) corresponding to the current gaming state is read out. (S1203). Then, based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S1001 in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 40) described above, the jackpot from the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16A). The type is determined (S1204).

When the processing of S1204 is completed, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S1205), and then the special figure 2 variation pattern command is set based on the selected variation pattern. (S1206). Then, the process proceeds to S1208.

On the other hand, in the process of S1202, when it is determined that the jackpot of the second special symbol is not set (S1202: No), the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (S1207) is executed, and the process proceeds to S1208. Transition.

In the process of S1208, a special figure 2 stop type command indicating a stop symbol is set (S1208). Next, the first symbol display device 37 sets the variation start of the second special symbol (S1209), and the value indicating the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the processing of S1205 is set in the special figure 2 variation time counter 203n (S1209). S1210), this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, this special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (S1207) will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 deviation pattern selection process (S1207).

In the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (S1207 in FIG. 43), first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit (S1301). Here, it is determined whether the small hit flag 203k is set to ON (S1301). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203k is on (S1301: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area (S1302). Then, the small hit type is selected based on the acquired value of the small hit type counter C5 and the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16B) (S1303).

Next, the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 17 to 19) corresponding to the current gaming state is read (S1304), and the variation pattern of small hits corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is read from the read variation pattern selection table. Is selected (S1305). After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command indicating the selected small hit fluctuation pattern is set (S1306), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1301, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a small hit (that is, it is out of order) (S1301: No), the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the current gaming state (FIG. 17 and FIG. 19) are read (S1307), and an outlier variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S1308). After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is set (S1309) based on the selected deviation pattern, and the present process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the second special symbol variation executing process (S211), which is one of the processes in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Explain the contents. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol change execution processing (S211). In the second special symbol variation executing process (S211), when the subtraction of the variation time of the special figure 2 is interrupted, the process of restarting the subtraction and the process of subtracting the variation time are executed.

When the second special symbol change execution processing (S211) is executed, first, the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n is subtracted by 1 and updated (S1401), and the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. Is updated (S1402), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the contents of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S213). The second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S213) executes the processing for stopping the fluctuation of the special figure 2.

When the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S213) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S1501), and the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to ON. (S1501: Yes), a special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating the stop of the special figure 1 fluctuation is set (S1503). Next, when the processing of S1503 is completed, the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed with a detached symbol (S1504). Next, a jackpot scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S1505), and the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i, the probability variation flag 203g, and the time saving counter 203f are reset (S1506). Next, the jackpot middle flag 203o is set to ON (S1507), and the process proceeds to S1509.

In the process of S1509, a special figure 2 confirmation command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the second special symbol is confirmed and stopped is set (S1509). After that, a process of stopping the variable display of the second special symbol that is variablely displayed by the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1510), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1501, when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is not set to ON (S1501: No), the special figure 2 disengagement stop process is executed (S1508), and the above-mentioned S1509 and S1510 are executed. Is executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the special figure 2 out-of-order stop process (S1508), which is one process of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S213 in FIG. 45), will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the special drawing 2 disengagement stop process (S1508). In this special figure 2 loss stop process (S1508), when the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is other than a big hit (small hit, miss), the special figure 2 indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a small hit, the process for temporarily stopping the change of the special figure 1 being executed is executed.

In the special figure 2 disengagement stop process (S1508), first, it is determined whether the small hit flag 203k is set to ON (S1601). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203k is set to ON (S1601: Yes), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S1602). Next, a special figure 1 temporary stop command indicating that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is turned on is set (S1603).

When the processing of S1603 is completed, a small hit scenario based on the selected small hit type is set (S1604). After that, the small hit flag 203k is set to off (S1605), and the small hit medium flag 203p is set to on (S1606).

When the processing of S1606 is completed, a special figure 2 confirmation command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the second special symbol is set (S1607). After that, the second special symbol, which is variablely displayed by the first symbol display device 37, is stopped to change at the small hit symbol (S1608), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1601 that the small hit flag 203k is off (that is, the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of order) (S1601: No), the second special symbol is fixedly stopped. A special figure 2 confirmation command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to do so is set (S1609). After that, the second special symbol that is variablely displayed by the first symbol display device 37 is deviated and stops variable at the symbol (S1610), and this process is terminated.

As described above, since the control of the variation display between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is independently and can be executed in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are varied at the same time. It can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to execute a lottery game with more special symbols within a predetermined time, and it is possible to increase the probability that the player will be given a big hit within the predetermined time. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

In this embodiment, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the other special symbol may be configured to be variablely displayed in a state where the temporary stop or the measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted. In such a case, the temporarily stopped special symbol is stopped in a display mode or a notification mode in which the player can know that the temporary stop is in progress, so that the player loses the lottery game that was in the middle of the variable display. You can know that you haven't done so, and you can play big hit games with confidence.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, a start winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105 in FIG. 47) determines whether or not a game ball has entered (winned) in the first entry opening (first starting opening) 64, and if it has entered (winning), it is suspended. This is a process of storing each of the acquired counter values in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a up to the upper limit number (up to four in the first ball entry port 64). Further, when each counter value acquired based on the reserved ball is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, it is based on each counter value stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. , A process of predicting a hit / fail judgment result, a selected fluctuation pattern, or the like is executed in advance. Hereinafter, the start winning process (S105) will be described.

In the start winning process (S105), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the first entry port 64 (starting winning), which is the first starting opening (S1701). Here, the determination is made using the detection result of the first ball entry switch (not shown) that detects the ball entry into the first ball entry port 64. When it is determined that the ball has entered the first ball entry port 64 (there was a start prize) (S1701: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S1702). ). It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703). It is determined whether this is less than four, which is the upper limit of the number of reserved balls for the first ball entry port 64 (that is, whether the number of reserved balls is stored up to the upper limit). If it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (S1704). A hold ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the number of hold balls is set (S1705). Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 which are various counter values is read (acquired) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 is read. Each is reserved (stored) in the storage area of the corresponding number of reserved balls (S1706).

Next, based on each stored counter value, the hit / fail determination result of the first special symbol, the determined hit type, and the fluctuation pattern are predicted (S1707). Then, a winning information command including the predicted winning / failing determination result of the first special symbol, the winning type, and the fluctuation pattern is set (S1708), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins a prize in the first start opening (first entry opening) 64 and is newly reserved and stored, the winning / failing determination result is based on the reserved storage information. Is determined before the start of fluctuation and notified to the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, the display mode of the reserved sphere can be changed (for example, the color of the reserved sphere can be changed to a different color from the usual one) based on the hold-stored hit / fail determination result, or before the fluctuation starts. It is possible to display a notice symbol or the like and perform an effect of suggesting a winning / failing determination result to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and the variation display and variation time of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83, the lower first ball entry port 64b2. This is a process for controlling the opening operation, opening time, and the like of the electric accessory 64a accompanying the above.

In this normal symbol variation processing (S106 in FIG. 48), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S1801). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entry port 64b2 is performed while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. Includes what is being done. As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S1801: Yes), a new normal symbol change (lottery) cannot be started (executed), so that it is as it is. This process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S1801: No), then whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (normal symbol is changing). When it is determined (S1802) and it is determined that the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is not changing (normal symbol changing) (S1802: No), that is, even if the normal symbol is currently hit, the normal symbol changes. If it is determined that there is no such state, that is, it is possible to start (execute) a new normal symbol change (lottery), the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203e (hold of change display in the normal symbol). The number of times M) is acquired (S1803).

Next, when it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S1804), and it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0. (S1804: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S1804: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S1805). The data stored in the symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S1806).

In the process of S1806, the data stored in the normal symbol hold first to fourth areas of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, normal symbol hold 1st area → execution area, normal symbol hold 2nd area → normal symbol hold 1st area, normal symbol hold 3rd area → normal symbol hold 2nd area, normal symbol hold 4th area → Shift the data in each area, such as the 3rd area for holding normal symbols. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S1807).

Then, based on the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S1807 and the random number table 202c per ordinary symbol (second), the lottery result of whether or not the ordinary symbol is a hit is acquired (S1808). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c. As described above, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 10", it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit, and the normal symbol is hit. When the high probability state is set, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 231", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "232", it is determined to be a hit. It is determined that the design is out of the ordinary pattern.

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S1808 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S1809), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (S1809: Yes), it is a hit. (S1810), and the process proceeds to S1811. In the process of S1810, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "○" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

On the other hand, in the process of S1809, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S1809: No), the display mode at the time of out of alignment is set (S1812), and the process proceeds to S1811. In the process of S1812, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S1811.

When the processing of S1810 or S1812 is completed, in the processing of S1811, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol (S1811), and the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol. When it is determined that the condition is (S1811: Yes), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device is set to 3 seconds (S1813), and then the normal symbol short fluctuation flag 203t is set to ON. (S1814), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol (it is the low probability state of the normal symbol) (S1811: No), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device. Is set to 10 seconds (S1815), and this process is terminated.

The short fluctuation flag 203t of the normal symbol set to be turned on in the process of S1814 is a configuration for temporarily storing the gaming state at the timing when the lottery of the normal symbol is executed, and the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped. It is displayed and referred to when setting the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a. Thereby, the opening operation content of the electric accessory 64a can be changed according to which gaming state the normal symbol change (lottery) start timing and the opening operation timing of the electric accessory 64a are.

In the present embodiment, the game state at the start (execution) timing of the fluctuation (lottery) of the normal symbol is configured to be temporarily stored by using a dedicated flag, but other configurations may be used. For example, when it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol is a hit in the game state storage means that can always store the currently set game state, the game state when the lottery of the normal symbol is executed is determined. It may be configured to provide a storage area for temporary storage. Furthermore, a means for always storing the period in which the normal state is set is provided, and the period stored in the means (the period in which the normal state is set) is compared with the timing when the lottery of the normal symbol is performed. By doing so, it may be configured so that the gaming state at the timing when the lottery of ordinary symbols is performed can be determined. That is, the configuration may be such that a storage means capable of storing the currently set gaming state and a storage means capable of storing at least the gaming state set at a predetermined timing in the past are provided.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1802 that the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S1802: Yes), the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S1816). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S1810 or the process of S1812 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device 83.

If it is determined in the process of S1813 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S1816: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1816, if it is determined that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S1816: Yes), then the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S1817). In the processing of S1817, the lottery of ordinary symbols is a hit, and if the display mode is set by the processing of S1810, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighting display) in the second symbol display device. ) Is set to be done. On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is out of order and the display mode is set by the process of S1812, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device. Is set. The period during which the second symbol is stopped and displayed is longer than the period during which one part of the blinking display (alternate display of "○" and "×") indicating that the second symbol is changing is turned on. It is configured to be (confirmed display). As a result, it is possible to easily make the player know that the second symbol has been stopped and displayed.

When the stop display is set by the process of S1817, and then the second symbol display update process (S2208 of FIG. 52) of the main process (see FIG. 52) is executed, the variable display in the second symbol display device is executed. Is completed, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S1810 or the process of S1812.

After finishing the processing of S1817, next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, the lottery result of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation processing (S106) (this lottery result). However, it is determined whether or not it is a hit of a normal symbol (S1818). If it is determined that the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S1818: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S1818: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the short fluctuation flag 203t of the normal figure is set to ON (S1819).

In the process of S1819, when it is determined that the normal figure short fluctuation flag 203t is not set on (set to off), that is, the gaming state at the timing when the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol this time is started is When it is determined that the state is normal (S1819: No), the opening time of the electric accessory 64a is set to 0.2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S1821), and the process proceeds to S1820. do.

On the other hand, in the process of S1819, when it is determined that the normal figure short fluctuation flag 203t is set to ON, that is, it is determined that the gaming state at the timing when the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol this time is started is the time saving state. If so (S1816: Yes), the normal figure short fluctuation flag 203t is set to off (S1820), and then it is determined whether the current gaming state is the time saving state (time saving) (S1821).

In the process of S1821, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the time saving state (S1821: No), the gaming state at the timing when the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol this time is started is the normal state, and the current gaming state (S1821: No). Since the timing for setting the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a) is in the normal state, the opening period of the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entry port 64b2 is set to 0.2 seconds, and the number of times of opening is set. It is set to once (S1824), and the process proceeds to S1823.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the shortened working hours (S1821: Yes), the timing at which the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol this time is started, and the current gaming state (opening operation of the electric accessory 64a). (Timing to set) is both in a short time state, so the opening period of the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entry port 64b2 is set to 2 seconds, and the number of times of opening is set to 2 (electric accessory). The long opening operation of 64a is set) (S1822), and the process proceeds to S1823.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the lottery (variation) of the ordinary symbol is executed, the timing at which the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a executed based on the winning of the ordinary symbol is set, and the timing are set. Only when both of them are in the time saving state, the opening operation (long opening) which is advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a.

With this configuration, it is possible to strictly set the conditions for setting the opening operation that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, for example, a lottery of ordinary symbols is performed in a state where the normal state is set as the game state (for example). Even if the time reduction state is set before the fluctuation time (10 seconds) of the normal symbol is set after the execution of the fluctuation) is executed and the winning is won, the long opening is set as the operation of the electric accessory 64a. There is no such thing. Similarly, in the change of the normal symbol (lottery) executed in the state where the time saving state is set, the normal state is set as the game state until the change of the normal symbol is stopped. Even in this case, the long opening of the electric accessory 64a is not set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively advantageous privilege (long opening of the electric accessory 64a).

Further, since it is possible to prevent the electric accessory 64a from being long-opened in a state where the normal state is set as the game state, it is easy to execute a lottery of a special symbol (second special symbol) advantageous to the player. The period can be limited to the time saving state. In this embodiment, the game state is determined between the timing when the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol is started and the timing when the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a is set, and the game state is set at each timing. The above-mentioned configuration is used as the configuration for setting the opening operation content of the electric accessory 64a based on the above, but other configurations may be used.

For example, the opening operation that is disadvantageous to the player only when both the timing at which the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol is started and the timing at which the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a is set are in the normal state (S1824 in FIG. 48). (Opening operation set in S1822) may be set (short opening is set), and long opening (opening operation set in S1822 in FIG. 48) may be set in other states. With this configuration, a privilege (long opening) that is advantageous to the player is provided even for normal symbol fluctuations that are executed during the period before and after the time saving state, which is the gaming state that is advantageous to the player, is set. Therefore, it is possible to make the time saving state more advantageous to the player.

In this way, while the time saving state is set as the game state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is very short, "10 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case where the normal state is set, and further. Since the opening period of the lower first entry port 64b2 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 2 seconds x 2 times", it is easy for the ball to enter the lower first entry port 64b2. Become. In this embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed, the time saving state is configured to end, so that the normal state is reached during the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the small hit game is executed, the time reduction state is continuously set unless the time reduction end condition is satisfied, so that the small hit state is executed while the time reduction state is set. During the winning game, the first variable winning device 65 is opened and the electric accessory 64a is opened for a long time in the small hit game, and a plurality of winning openings (first specific winning opening 65a, lower first winning opening) are opened. It will be a specific period during which it will be easier for the ball to enter 64b2).

By using such a configuration, for example, instead of the configuration of the game board 13 shown in FIG. 2, an electric accessory 64a and a lower first ball entry port 64b2 are arranged above the first variable winning device 65. , It is preferable to configure the ball to enter two winning openings (V winning device 65a, lower first entry opening 64b2) during the small hit game, whereby the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the small hit game. Can be increased, and it becomes possible to give more advantageous benefits to the player.

Returning to FIG. 48, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S1820, the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entry port 64b2 is set (S1823), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64a is set by the process of S1823, and then the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S2206) of the main process (see FIG. 52) is executed, the opening / closing of the electric accessory is performed. The control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S1824 or the process of S1822 are completed.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67, and the game ball has passed. If there is, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through-gate passing process (S107 in FIG. 49), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S1901). Here, the passage of the game ball at the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S1901: Yes), the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203e (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S1902). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S1903).

Whether the game ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S1901: No), or even if the game ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol reserved ball count counter If the value (M) of 203e is not less than 4 (S1903: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the game ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S1901: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than 4 (S1903: Yes), it is normal. The value (M) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is added by 1 (S1904).

When the processing of S1904 is completed, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) described above is set to the empty holding area (holding first) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. It is stored in the first area (S1905) of the area (4th area on hold), and this process is terminated. In the process of S1905, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is referred to, and if the value is 1, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the lottery based on the second special symbol is set to be more advantageous to the player than the lottery based on the first special symbol. Therefore, the state in which the ball can enter the lower first entry slot 64b2 provided by winning the lottery result of the normal symbol (second symbol) is an advantageous gaming state as compared with the normal gaming state. ..

By indicating the timing at which such a gaming state is provided based on the preliminary determination result of the normal drawing, the player can play the game without overlooking the gaming state which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. In addition, when the effect is performed using the pre-judgment result of the normal figure, not only the effect based on the result of the hit / miss judgment of the normal figure but also the electric accessory 64a when the normal figure is judged to be a hit is opened. It is good to perform a production that suggests the timing. By doing so, in the normal game state, the game is performed aiming at the game area on the left side of the game board 13, and the lower first entry slot 64b2 (the entry slot to which the electric accessory 64a is attached) is the game board 13. Even if it is arranged on the right side of the game, it is possible to switch to a game aiming at the right side of the game board 13 (so-called right-handed) before the electric accessory 64a opens, which is a normal game state. However, there is an effect that the possibility that the ball enters the lower first entry port 64b2 can be increased.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S2001), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111, and the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this start-up process.

This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 51), first, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed (S2101). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S2102). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S2103).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch (see FIG. 12) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S2104), and if it is turned on (S2104: Yes), the process shifts to S2110. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch (see FIG. 12) is not turned on (S2104: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2105), and if it is not stored (S2105). S2105: No) Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S2110 in this case as well.

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2105: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S2106), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S2107: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and even in such a case, the process is transferred to S2110. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S2110, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S2110). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S2111, S2112) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch (FIG. 12). Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (FIG. 12) is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM 203 initialization process (S2111, S2112) is executed.

Further, the initialization process (S2111, S2112) of the RAM 203 is also executed when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (S2111, S2112), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S2111), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S2112). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S2113.

On the other hand, the RAM erase switch (FIG. 12) is not turned on (S2104: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S2105: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. If there is (S2107: Yes), the power cutoff occurrence information is cleared while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S2108). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff is transmitted (S2109), and the process proceeds to S2110. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the voice lamp control device 113 (S2113). After that, the state of the probability change flag 203g and each value of the time saving counter 203f are read (S2114), and a state command is set based on the read counter value (S2115). When the processing of S2115 is completed, the interrupt is permitted (S2116), and the process proceeds to the main processing described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the counter update process and the power cutoff process are roughly classified.

In the main processing, first, in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 is input to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side. ) Is executed (S2201).

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S2202). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S2203) and executed. The jackpot control process is executed (S2204). The jackpot control process (S2204) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 53, but a process of setting the operation of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 in the jackpot game is executed.

After the big hit game process (S2204) is executed, the small hit control process (S2205) is executed. This small hit control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 55. After that, the electric accessory opening / closing process is executed (S2206). In this electric accessory opening / closing process (S2206), the opening / closing process of the electric accessory 64a is executed. After that, the display control process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S2207).

Next, the display control process of the second symbol (for example, the symbol of “◯” or “×”) by the second symbol display device is executed (S2208). Briefly, on condition that the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device is used. The variable display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is carried out. Then, the lottery of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is carried out by the value of the second random number counter C4, and when the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is in the winning state, the electric accessory 64a is released for a predetermined time.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2209), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S2209: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S2210). If a predetermined time (4 ms) has already passed (S2210: Yes), the process is shifted to S2201 and each process after S2201 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if a predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S2210: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S2211).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S2211). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479, 232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S2202 (S2212).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S2201 to S2208 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and is displayed variable. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the process of S2209, if the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2209: Yes), the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing shown in FIG. 50 has been executed, the processing at the time of power cutoff after S2213 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S2213), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S2214). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S2215), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S2216), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S2209 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S2201 to S2208, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S2211 and S2212 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power cutoff occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cutoff state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S2201. That is, the process can be started from the process of S2201 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S2201). By setting a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S2201. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S2204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S2204). This jackpot control process (S2204) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 52), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and the first specific prize is won. This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a.

In the jackpot control process (S2204), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot scenario is set (S2301). If it is determined that the jackpot scenario has not been set (S2301: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2301 that the jackpot scenario is set (S2301: Yes), the jackpot scenario is updated (S2302), and it is determined whether it is the timing to start the opening of the jackpot scenario (S2303). .. More specifically, in the processing of S2302, 1 is added to the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown), and in the processing of S2303, the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown) starts the opening of the jackpot scenario. Determine if the value corresponds to.

In the process of S2303, if it is determined that it is the timing of the opening start (big hit start) of the jackpot scenario (S2303: Yes), the jackpot opening command is set (S2304), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the opening start timing of the jackpot scenario (S2303: No), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2305).

In the process of S2305, if it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2305: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process for setting the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 650a during the jackpot is executed (S2305: Yes). S2306), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2305 that it is not the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2305: No), then it is determined whether the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied (S2305: No). S2307). Here, in the present embodiment, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are won in total while the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is open, or the first. When the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a has elapsed for a predetermined time (30 seconds), it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied (S2307: Yes), the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a currently open in the process of S2308 is set to be closed. This process ends. The above-mentioned discrimination process from S2305 to S2307 is repeatedly executed for the number of rounds of the jackpot set in the jackpot scenario.

On the other hand, in the process of S2307, when it is determined that the round end condition of the currently executed round is not satisfied (S2307: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S2309), and the ending effect is produced. If it is the start timing of (S2309: Yes), the ending command for big hit is set (S2310), and this process is terminated. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot.

On the other hand, in the process of S2309, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S2309: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (S2311). Here, the end timing of the jackpot indicates a case where the execution period of the ending effect has elapsed. If it is determined in the process of S2311 that it is the end timing of the jackpot (S2311: Yes), the jackpot end process for setting the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is executed (S2312), and this process is terminated. The details of this jackpot end processing (S2312) will be described later with reference to FIG. 54. On the other hand, if it is not the end timing of the jackpot (S2311: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the jackpot end process (S2312), which is one of the jackpot control processes (S2204 in FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. As described above, this jackpot end process (S2312) is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end processing (S2312).

In the jackpot end process (S2312), first, the game state at the time of winning is specified based on the state storage area 203j at the time of winning (S2401). Next, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a probability variation jackpot (a jackpot type in which the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON after the jackpot game ends) (S2402). Here, in the process of S2402, the determination is performed based on the jackpot type set this time. In the process of S2402, if it is determined that the current jackpot is a probability variation jackpot (S2402: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S2403), and the process proceeds to S2404. On the other hand, in the process of S2402, if it is determined that the current jackpot is not a probabilistic jackpot (S2402: No), the process of S2403 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S2404. As a result, a low probability state of the special symbol is set as the game state after the big hit.

Next, the value corresponding to the game state at the time of winning read by the process of S2401 and the jackpot type is set in the time saving counter 203f (S2404). Specifically, when "big hit A" is set as the big hit type, "10000" is set to the value of the time reduction counter 203f in order to continue the high probability state of the normal symbol until the next big hit, and "big hit B". Is set, "100" is set in the value of the time reduction counter 203f in order to continue the high probability state of the normal symbol until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 100 times.

After finishing the processing of S2404, the jackpot middle flag 203o is set to off, and the winning state storage area 203j is cleared (S2405). After that, a state command corresponding to the set game state is set (S2406), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, the jackpot type of the jackpot won this time and the gaming state at the time of winning are determined, and two conditional elements for setting the gaming state after the jackpot game ends. It is configured to set the contents of (probability change flag 203g, time reduction counter 203f). Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay close attention to both the jackpot type of the winning jackpot and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot.

Next, with reference to FIG. 55, a small hit control process (S2205), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the contents of this small hit control process (S2205).

In the small hit control process (S2205), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit scenario is set (S2501). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the process of S1604 of the special figure 2 out-of-order stop process (see FIG. 46) is executed and the small hit scenario is set. If the small hit scenario is not set in the process of S2501 (S2501: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if the small hit scenario is set in the process of S2501 (S2501: Yes), the small hit scenario is updated (S2502), and it is determined whether it is the timing to start the opening of the small hit scenario (S2503). More specifically, in the processing of S2502, 1 is added to the counter value of the small hit scenario counter (not shown), and in the processing of S2503, the counter value of the small hit scenario counter (not shown) is the small hit scenario. Determine if the value corresponds to the opening start of.

In the process of S2503, if it is determined that it is the timing to start the opening of the small hit scenario (S2503: Yes), the opening command for the small hit is set (S2504), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing of the opening start of the small hit scenario (S2503: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing of the round start of the small hit scenario (S2505).

If it is determined in the process of S2505 that it is the timing to start the round of the small hit scenario (S2505: Yes), the small hit operation setting process is executed (S2506), and this process ends. The details of the small hit operation setting process (S2506) will be described later with reference to FIG. 56. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing of the round start of the small hit scenario (S2505: No), then it is determined whether the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied (S2507). Here, in the present embodiment, when a predetermined number (for example, 5) of balls are won in total while the specific winning opening 65a is open, or when the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a elapses for a predetermined time. If so, it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied.

If it is determined in the process of S2507 that the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied (S2507: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed in the process of S2508, and this process is performed. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round end condition of the specific winning opening 65a is not satisfied (S2507: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to start the ending effect (S2509).

If it is determined in the process of S2509 that it is the timing to start the ending effect (S2509: Yes), the ending command for small hits is set (S2510), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot.

On the other hand, in the process of S2509, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S2509: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the small hit (S2511). Here, the end timing of the small hit indicates the case where the execution period of the ending effect has elapsed.

If it is determined in the process of S2511 that it is the end timing of the small hit (S2511: Yes), the small hit medium flag 203p is set to off (S2512), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is not the end timing of the small hit (S2511: No), the second winning process is executed (S2513), and this process is terminated. The details of this second winning process (S2513) will be described later with reference to FIG. 57.

Next, with reference to FIG. 56, a small hit operation setting process (S2506), which is one process in the small hit control process (S2506 in FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the contents of this small hit operation setting process (S2506).

In the small hit operation setting process (S2506), first, the opening scenario in which the opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the small hit to be started is set is read (S2601). The opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a is set by the data read in the process of S2601 (S2602), and this process is terminated.

In this way, since each operation of the variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game ends in the middle. Problems can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the details of the second winning process (S2513), which is one of the small hit control processes (S2506 in FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the second winning process (S2513). This second winning process (S2513) is executed in the small hit control process (see FIG. 55), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to the winning of the specific winning opening 65a.

In this second prize processing (S2513), first, it is determined whether or not the present is the round valid period (S2701). Here, the round valid period is a period in which the round game is set, that is, a period from the setting of the specific winning opening 65a to the end of the interval period (5 seconds). In the process of S2701, if the round is not valid (S2701: No), the winning counter 203u is reset (S2702), and this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S2701, if it is determined that the current round is valid (S2701: Yes), then it is determined whether or not a prize has been detected in the specific winning opening 65a (S2703), and the specific winning opening 65a is reached. If no winning is detected (S2703: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if the winning of the specific winning opening 65a is detected in the process of S2703 (S2703: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning counter 203u to update (S2704). Then, it is determined whether the value of the winning counter 203u is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (5 in the present embodiment) (S2705), and if the value of the winning counter 203u is equal to or lower than the upper limit value (5 in the present embodiment) ( S2705: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the value of the winning counter 203u is the upper limit value (5 in this embodiment) or more (S2705: Yes), the closing of the specific winning opening 65a (opening / closing plate 65f1 attached to the special winning opening 65f1) is set (S2706). Next, the small hit scenario is updated to the end of the round (S2707), and this process ends.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 58 to 72, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power cutoff processing flag is turned on, the power cutoff process of S4117 (see FIG. 59) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "momentary power failure") in this start-up process. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 59, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff occurrence information from the main control device 110 (see S4114 in FIG. 59), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S4117. The power cutoff processing flag is turned on before the power cutoff process is executed, and the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off after the power cutoff process is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power cutoff process of S4117 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power cutoff process in progress flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S4002: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S4117 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power cutoff process of S4116 was completed after the momentary power failure occurred, or it was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the data is transferred to S4008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S4002: Yes), the start-up processing this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and the voice lamp control device 113 is being executed during the power-off processing of S4117. MPU221 was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power cutoff process is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S4004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, it is confirmed whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S4006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data corruption. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4117 is executed (see S4116 in FIG. 59). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S4117 is executed, the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S4117 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), after clearing the work area of the RAM in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S4009) and setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010), the state The status setting area is updated based on the command (S4011). Next, interrupt permission is set (S4012), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the processing of S4008 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, so that the processing of S4004 to S4006 is performed via the processing of S4008. This is the case when the process is reached or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset (without receiving the power cutoff command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S4010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010).

It should be noted that the reason for skipping the clearing process of S4009 is that when the processing of S4008 is reached from S4004 via the processing of S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S4004. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S4101 was executed (S4101), 1 millisecond. If the above time has not passed (S4101: No), the process of S4102 to S4110 is not performed and the process proceeds to the process of S4111. In the process of S4101, it is the process related to the display (effect) that S4102-S4110 determines whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed, whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S4111 and the variation display setting process of S4112 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S4111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception omission of the command transmitted from the main controller 110, and by executing the processing of S4111 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process. Based on this, the settings related to the variable display effect can be made without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S4103 to S4113 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S4101: Yes). S4102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S4108 described later (S4103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4104). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not at the time of turning on the power, the process shifts to the process of S4105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S4105, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is a display control device as a command. It is transmitted to 114.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process to set to perform the production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

After the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S4108), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S4109, the liquid crystal display effect execution management process is executed (S4110). After that, the process proceeds to S4111. In the liquid crystal display execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S4108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal display effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

After the processing of S4110, various counter update processings are executed (S4111), and the process proceeds to the processing of S4112. Details of the various counter update processes will be described later with reference to FIG. 72.

After that, the command determination process (S4112) that performs the process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S4113. The details of this command determination process (S4112) will be described later with reference to FIG. 60.

In the process of S4113, in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is displayed by the display control device 114. Executes the variable display setting process, which is the process set to send to. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 69.

When the processing of S4113 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4114). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S4113 (S4114: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S4116), and the power-off process is executed (S4117). After the power cutoff process is executed, the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off (S4118), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. It also erases the memory of information on the occurrence of power failure.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4114 (S4114: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4115), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4115: No), the process returns to the process of S4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4115: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S4112). This command determination process (S4112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. .. Hereinafter, the details of the command determination process (S4112) will be described.

In the command determination process (S4112), first, from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, the first command received from the main control device 110 among the unprocessed commands is read and analyzed, and a special figure is drawn from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4201). If it is determined that either the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4201: Yes), the stop type command reception process is executed (S4202), and this process is terminated. The details of this stop type command reception process (S4202) will be described later with reference to FIG. 61.

On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the special figure 1 stop type command nor the special figure 2 stop type command has been received in the processing of S4201 (S4201: No), whether or not the state command has been received from the main control device 110. (S4203). If it is determined that the status command has been received (S4203: Yes), the status command process is executed (S4204), and this process is terminated. The details of this state command processing (S4204) will be described later with reference to FIG. 62, but the gaming state (normal state, probable change state, latent probability) of the pachinko machine 10 based on the state command output from the main control device 110. The process of setting the state) to the state setting area 223j is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S4203, when it is determined that the state command has not been received (S4203: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation pattern command has been received (S4205). Here, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is a command for notifying the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol.

In the process of S4205, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4205: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4206) and received. Special Figure 1 The variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command (S4207), and this process is terminated. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that can be identified as the variation pattern type of the first special symbol, and is stored in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 69) described later. , When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the first special symbol and the display mode of the variation display effect of the first special symbol (setting the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol). If you do).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has not been received (S4205: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation pattern command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4208). The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is a command for notifying the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol.

When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has been received in the processing of S4208 (S4208: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4209) and the received special figure 2 is received. FIG. 2 The variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command (S4210), and this process is terminated. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that can be identified as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and is stored in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 69) described later. , When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the second special symbol and the display mode of the variation display effect of the second special symbol (setting the variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol). If you do).

In the process of S4208, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S4208: No), it is determined whether or not the reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4211). When it is determined that the hold ball number command has been received (S4211: Yes), the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 included in the received hold ball number command (that is, the first). The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is updated according to the extracted counter value (the number of reserved balls in the variable display of the special symbol) ( S4212), this process is terminated. Since the present embodiment does not have a configuration for holding and storing the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the reserved ball number counter 223c of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is set in the processing of S4212. Only the update process is executed.

Here, since the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64, every time there is a starting winning, the process of S4212 , The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 can be matched with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. Therefore, even if the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the start is started. If the hold ball number command is notified based on the winning, the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected, and the first special symbol hold ball number of the main control device 110 is corrected. It can be adjusted to the value of the counter 203d.

Further, in the process of S4211 when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received (S4211: No), it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4213). When it is determined that the winning information command has been received in the processing of S4213 (S4213: Yes), the information of the received winning information command (whether or not the special symbol lottery is successful, the winning type, and the variation pattern) is the corresponding winning information. It is set in the storage area 223b (S4214), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4213, when it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S4211: No), it is determined whether or not the winning related command has been received from the main control device (S4216). If it is determined that the hit-related command has been received in the process of S4215 (S4216: Yes), the hit-related process is executed (S4216), and this process is terminated. The details of the hit-related process (S4216) will be described later with reference to FIG. 63, but as a result of the lottery of the special symbol, the production corresponding to the big hit game or the small hit game executed when the big hit or the small hit is won. This is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute the display.

On the other hand, in the process of S4215, when it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S4215: No), it is determined whether or not the remaining time reduction command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4217). If it is determined in the process of S4217 that the command for the number of remaining time reductions has been received (S4217: Yes), the remaining number of times update process (S4218) is executed. The details of this remaining number update process (S4218) will be described with reference to FIG. 66, but for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 based on the remaining time reduction command output from the main control device 110. The process of setting the contents of the effect display is executed.

In the process of S4217, when it is determined that the command for the number of remaining time reductions has not been received (S4217: No), it is determined whether or not the temporary stop related command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4219). If it is determined in the process of S4219 that a temporary stop-related command has been received (S4219: Yes), the temporary stop-related process is executed (S4220), and this process ends. The details of the temporary stop-related processing (S4220) will be described later with reference to FIG. 67, but the processing for determining the remaining time of the special figure fluctuation time when the special figure 1 temporary stop command or the special figure 2 temporary stop command is received. And, when the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command or the special figure 2 fluctuation restart command is received, the process of setting the effect (additional effect) to be executed by the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S4219, if it is determined that the temporary stop related command has not been received (S4219: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S4221), and this process is terminated. In the processing of S4221, if the other command is a command used in the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is performed. Is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114.

As described above, in the command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 60) executed by the voice lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment, the process of determining whether a state command has been received (see S4203 in FIG. 60) is performed. , It is configured before the process of determining whether the variation pattern command of each special symbol has been received (see S4205 and S4208 in FIG. 60).

With this configuration, when the fluctuation pattern command and the status command are output from the main controller 110 at the same time, that is, in the first special symbol variation start processing of the main controller 110 (see S208 in FIG. 33). Then, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 33) is executed, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is set, and in the game state update process (see S308 in FIG. 33) executed thereafter, the game is played. Even when a state command indicating that the state has changed is set, the game state currently set on the voice lamp control device 113 side can be determined before the special figure 1 variation pattern command.

Therefore, when the jackpot in Special Figure 1 is won with the probability variation state set and the latency state is set during the jackpot fluctuation, the voice lamp control device 113 side is said to have set the latency state. A variation effect (see FIG. 7A) corresponding to a variation pattern command that causes a jackpot variation in the determined state can be easily set.

In addition, unlike the configuration of the present embodiment, when the processing according to the fluctuation pattern command is executed before the discrimination processing of the state command, the probability change is different from the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the jackpot fluctuation described above. Only the information indicating that the jackpot has been won by the first special symbol lottery in the state is received first, and the variable display according to the received content is set. Therefore, it becomes difficult to execute the fluctuation display indicating that the latent probability state is set at the same time as the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started. Since the fluctuation display indicating that the latent state is set is delayed in this way, the timing of notifying the player to perform the right-handed game is delayed, which makes the player uncomfortable. The problem of giving is raised.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, on the main control device 110 side, the process of changing the game state after the jackpot hit / fail determination (see S306 in FIG. 33) and the variation pattern setting (S307 in FIG. 33). (Game state update process (S308 in FIG. 33)) is executed, whereas the voice lamp control device 113 first executes a process for determining the current game state (S4204 in FIG. 60), and then executes the process. It is configured to set the fluctuation display corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Therefore, even though the latent state is set, it is possible to reliably prevent the variable display corresponding to the previous gaming state from being set and executed.

Further, it is necessary to specify the output order of various commands on the main control device 110 side by configuring the voice lamp control device 113 side to specify the reception order of various commands output from the main control device 110. Can be reduced. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

Next, the stop type command reception process (S4202) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing this stop type command reception process (S4202). This stop type command reception process (S4202) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. Hereinafter, the details of the stop type command reception process (S4202) will be described.

In the stop type command reception process (S4202), first, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received in response to the received command, the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f is set to ON, and the special figure 2 is set. When the stop type command is received, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON (S4301). Next, the stop type (big hit A to big hit G, small hit A to small hit C, missed, missed reach, etc.) is extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command (S4302). End the process.

The stop type extracted in S4302 is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command is the second special symbol. It is identifiable that it is a stop type. As a result, even if the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) start to change at the same time, it is possible to manage the stop types respectively, and to execute an appropriate change display. Can be done.

Next, the state command process (S4204) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this state command processing (S4204). This state command process (S4204) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. Hereinafter, the details of the state command processing (S4204) will be described.

In this state command process (S4204), when the process of setting the current game state to the state setting area 223j is executed based on the state command output from the main control unit 110, and the game state shifts to the latent state. In addition, the process for setting the effect for notifying the player that the latent state is set (chance zone effect (see FIG. 6B)) and the game state have shifted to the normal state. In this case, processing for clearing various flags and counters used to display the card forgotten warning screen (see FIG. 10A) is executed.

In the state command processing (S4204), first, the gaming state before receiving the state command is determined from the value of the state setting area 223j provided in the RAM 223 (S4401). That is, it is determined in which game state the state command was received. Next, it is determined whether the gaming state before receiving the state command is the latent state (S4402). When it is determined that the gaming state before receiving the state command is not the latent state (S4402: No), it is determined whether the received command is a state command indicating the transition to the latent state (S4403). In the process of S4403, when the received command is a state command indicating the transition to the latent state (S4403: Yes), the latent notification effect for notifying the entry of the latent state is set (S4404). Then, the value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the received state command is stored in the state setting area 223j (S4405), and the process proceeds to S4406.

On the other hand, in the processing of 4402, when it is determined that the gaming state before receiving the state command is the latent state (S4402: Yes), or in the processing of S4403, the received command shifts to the latent state. If it is not the status command shown (S4403: No), the process proceeds to S4406.

Next, it is determined whether the received command is a state command indicating the transition to the normal state (S4406). If it is determined that the received command is not a state command indicating the transition to the normal state (S4406: No), the processing of S4407 to S4410 is skipped, the processing of S4411 described later is executed, and this processing is terminated. .. On the other hand, when it is determined that the received command is a state command indicating the transition to the normal state (S4406: Yes), it is determined whether the card notification completed flag 223q is set to ON (S4407). When it is determined that the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4407: Yes), the value of the prize ball counter 223u is cleared to 0 (S4408), the card notification flag 223q, and the card notification possible flag. 223s, the rush displayed flag 223t is set to off (S4409). Next, the contents of the remaining variable time information storage area 223o and the remaining time storage area 223p are cleared (S4410), and the values corresponding to the game states notified by the other state commands are stored in the state setting area 223j (S4411). This process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S4407, if it is determined that the card notification flag 223q is set to off (S4407: No), the processing of S4408 and S4409 is skipped, the processing of S4410 and S4411 is executed, and the present invention is performed. End the process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 63, a hit-related process (S4216), which is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit-related process (S4216). In this hit-related process, a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to a big hit game or a small hit game, which is executed when a big hit or a small hit is won as a result of a special symbol lottery. This is to be performed, and processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 when a big hit or a small hit is won is executed.

In addition, when a prize ball number command for indicating the number of prize balls acquired during a winning game (big hit game, small hit game) is received, the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number command is accumulated and accumulated. Based on the result, a process for displaying the card forgotten warning screen (see FIG. 10A) is executed.

In the hit-related process (S4216), first, it is determined whether the command received by the command determination process (see FIG. 60) has received the jackpot-related command (S4501). If it is determined that the received command is a jackpot-related command (S4501: Yes), the jackpot-related process is executed (S4502), and this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 64, the jackpot-related process (S4502), which is one of the hit-related processes (S4216 in FIG. 63) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot related process (S4502). In the jackpot-related processing, processing is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won, and when the jackpot is won, the main control device is used. Processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from 110 is executed.

In the jackpot-related process (S4502), first, it is determined whether or not the hit-related command received by the hit-related process (S4216) has received the jackpot start command (S4601). When the jackpot start command is received (S4601: Yes), the jackpot start command for display is set (S4602), and this process is terminated. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S4601, when it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S4601: No), it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S4603). When the round number command is received (S4603: Yes), the display round number command is set based on the round number (S4604), and this process is terminated. In the present embodiment, since the information indicating the number of rounds is transmitted from the main control unit 110 as the number of rounds command, the number of rounds command for display is set based on the received number of rounds command. In order to reduce the amount of command data transmitted from the control unit 110, the voice lamp control unit is configured to transmit information indicating that a new round has started from the main control unit 110 as a round update command. When a round update command is received in the RAM 223 of 113, a round number accumulation counter for accumulating the number of received round update commands is provided, and the current round is performed on the voice lamp control device 113 side based on the value of the round number accumulation counter. It may be configured to calculate the number and set the display round number command.

On the other hand, in the process of S4603, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S4603: No), it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S4605). If it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S4605: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ending command has been received (S4605: Yes), the display ending command is set (S4606), and it is determined whether the card notified flag 223q is set to ON (S4607). When it is determined that the card notification completed flag 223q is set to ON (S4607: Yes), a display ending command that does not include the card notification is set (S4608). That is, a process for preventing the display mode of FIG. 10A from being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4607, when it is determined that the card notified flag 223q is not set to on (that is, it is off) (S4607: No), the jackpot type this time is jackpot A or jackpot B. (S4609). When it is determined that the jackpot type this time is jackpot A or jackpot B (S4609: Yes), a display ending command including card notification is set (S4610), and the card notification completed flag 223q is set to ON. (S4611). That is, a process for displaying the display mode of FIG. 10A on the third symbol display device 81 is executed, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot type this time is not jackpot A or jackpot B (S4609: No), it is determined whether the card notification enable flag 223s is set to ON (S4612). When it is determined that the card notification possible flag 223s is set to on (S4612: Yes), the card notification possible flag 223s is set to off (S4613), the above-mentioned processing of S461 to S4611 is executed, and the present invention is performed. End the process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4612 that the card notification enable flag 223s is not set to ON (S4612: No), the process of S4608 described above is executed, and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the jackpot-related processing (S4502 in FIG. 64), as various display modes to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game, the game information (opening, opening, In addition to the process of setting the display contents of the ending and the number of rounds), the process of displaying or not displaying the card forgotten warning screen (see FIG. 10A) is configured to be executed.

This card forgetting warning screen is a card (borrowing a ball) to the player when the player wins a predetermined amount (for example, 250 shots) of prize balls in a winning game (big hit game, small hit game). This is a notification mode for calling attention not to forget the valuable medium used at the time. In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned card is used when the number of prize balls acquired in the period from the normal state to the jackpot and the transition to the normal state again (continuation advantageous period) satisfies the condition that the predetermined amount can be reached. It is configured to display the forgetfulness alert screen.

Specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. 64, the jackpot (big hit A,) that can easily obtain a prize ball exceeding a predetermined amount (for example, 250 shots) in the jackpot (first hit) won in the normal state. If the jackpot B) is won, the card notification that displays the card forgotten warning screen is executed at the end of the jackpot game, and if the other jackpots (big hit C, jackpot D) are won, the card notification is executed. It is configured not to.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a player who has not won a predetermined amount of prize balls from displaying a card forgotten warning screen, and can continue to borrow balls while playing a game. It is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable.

Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the big hit game, a game state (latent state) in which the small hit game can be easily executed can be set. Therefore, the player can repeat the small hit game by repeating the small hit game. A predetermined amount (for example, 250 shots) of prize balls may be obtained. Therefore, the number of prize balls acquired by the player during the advantageous continuation period (the number of prize balls paid out during the advantageous period) is accumulated, and if the cumulative result exceeds a predetermined amount (250 shots), the execution is performed at that time. The card forgetting warning screen is displayed on the ending screen of the big hit game or the small hit game. As a result, it is possible to display the card forgotten warning screen for the player at an appropriate timing.

Further, in the present embodiment, the card forgetting warning screen is notified only once during one advantageous continuation period. As a result, the card forgetting warning screen is frequently displayed, and it is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable. The method of displaying the card forgotten warning screen is not limited to the content of the present embodiment. For example, a measuring means for measuring the advantageous continuation period is provided, and the elapsed period since the previous card forgetting warning screen is displayed. If the number exceeds a predetermined period (for example, 10 minutes), the card forgotten warning screen may be displayed again. In this case, since the card forgotten warning screen is displayed once (because the display conditions for displaying the card forgetting warning screen are already satisfied), during the special symbol change period (for example, during the advantageous continuation period). When a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds or more is selected), it is preferable to display the card forgetting warning screen.

With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the current game situation by using the fixed concept of the player that the card forgetting warning screen is displayed after the big hit game is completed. Further, as a method of achieving the same effect, the big hit game may display the card forgetting warning screen by using the opening period of the small hit game.

Returning to FIG. 63, the description will be continued. In the process of S4501, when it is determined that the received command is not a jackpot-related command (S4501), it is determined whether the received command has received the small hit-related command (S4503). If it is determined that the received command is a small hit related command (S4503: Yes), the small hit related process (S4504) is executed, and this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 65, a small hit-related process (S4504), which is one process in the hit-related process (S4216 in FIG. 63) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit related process (S4504). In the small hit-related processing, processing is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the small hit game executed when the small hit is won, and when the small hit is won. , Processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 is executed.

In the small hit-related process (S4504), first, it is determined whether or not the hit-related command received by the hit-related process (S4216) has received the small hit start command (S4701). When the small hit start command is received (S4701: Yes), the small hit start command for display is set (S4702), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4701 when it is determined that the received command is not the small hit start command (S4701: No), it is determined whether the ending command has been received (S4703). If it is determined that the received command is not the ending command (S4703: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the received command is the ending command (S4703: Yes), the display ending command is set (S4704), and it is determined whether the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4705). .. If it is determined that the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4705: Yes), a display ending command that does not include card notification is set (S4706), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4705, when it is determined that the card notification completed flag 223q is not set to ON (S4705: Yes), it is determined whether the card notification enable flag 223s is set to ON (S4707). When it is determined that the card notification possible flag 223s is set to on (S4707: Yes), the card notification possible flag 223s is set to off (S4708), and the display ending command including the card notification is set (S4707: Yes). S4709), the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4710), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4707, the card notification enable flag 223s is not set to ON (S4707: No), the process of S4706 described above is executed, and the present process is terminated.

As described above, in this embodiment, even in a small hit game that does not meet the display conditions for displaying the card forgetting warning screen in one game, after winning the big hit in the normal state, If the cumulative value of the number of prize balls acquired during the game period (advantageous continuation period) until the normal state is set again satisfies the display condition (for example, the number of acquired prize balls reaches 250), a small hit It is configured to display the card forgotten warning screen even after the game is over. As a result, it is possible to display the card forgotten warning screen for the player at an appropriate timing.

Returning to FIG. 63, the description will be continued. In the process of S4503, when it is determined that the received command is not a small hit related command (S4503: No), it is determined whether or not the prize ball command has been received (S4505). If it is determined that the received command is not a prize ball command (S4505: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is a prize ball command (S4505: Yes), the value corresponding to the received command is added to the value of the prize ball counter 223u (S4506), and then the card. It is determined whether the notified flag 223q is set to ON (S4507). When it is determined that the card notification flag 223q is not set to ON (S4507: No), it is determined whether the value of the prize ball number counter 223u added in the processing of S4506 is 250 or more (S4508). When it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter 223u after addition is 250 or more (S4508), the card notification possible flag is set to ON (S4509), and the display prize ball number command is set (S4510). , End this process. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S4507 that the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4507: Yes), or in the processing of S4508, the prize ball number counter 223u after addition is less than 250. If it is determined (S4508: No), the process of S4509 described above is skipped, the process of S4510 is executed, and the present process is terminated.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is determined that the normal state is set by the state command processing (see S4204 in FIG. 62), and the value of the prize ball counter 223u is cleared. The number of prize balls corresponding to the prize ball number command received during the period up to (advantageous continuation period) is configured to be accumulated by the prize ball number counter 223u. Then, at the end of the winning game (big hit game, small hit game), the card forgetting warning screen is displayed according to the value of the prize ball counter 223u (at the ending screen display timing).

As a result, for example, when the jackpot (first hit) that triggers the setting of the advantageous continuation period is jackpot C (a jackpot in which it is difficult to obtain a predetermined amount (250 shots) of prize balls in one jackpot game). Can display a card forgotten warning screen when a small hit game is won during the advantageous continuation period, or when a big hit C is won again.

Next, the remaining number of times update process (S4218) will be described with reference to FIG. 66. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the contents of the remaining number update process (S4218). This remaining number update process (S4218) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the remaining time reduction command is executed from the main control device 110. Is received, a process of updating the contents set in the remaining time reduction frequency area 223k, the remaining variable time information storage area 223o, and the remaining time storage area 223p is executed.

In the remaining number update process (S4218), first, it is determined whether or not the remaining time reduction command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4801). If it is determined that the command for the number of remaining hours has not been received (S4801: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S4801, when it is determined that the remaining time reduction command has been received (S4801: Yes), the display time reduction command corresponding to the received command is set (S4802), and this processing is terminated.

Next, the contents of the temporary stop-related processing (S4220) will be described with reference to FIG. 67. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the contents of the temporary stop-related process (S4220). In this temporary stop-related process (S4220), a process of determining the remaining time of the special figure fluctuation time when the special figure 1 temporary stop command is received, and a third symbol display device when the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command is received. The process of setting the effect (additional effect) to be executed in 81 is executed.

When the temporary stop-related process (S4220) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 temporary stop command has been received (S4901), and if it is determined that the command has not been received (S4901: No), the variable restart process is performed. (S4902) is executed. The details of the fluctuation resumption processing (S4902) will be described later with reference to FIG. 68. On the other hand, in the process of S4901 when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop command has been received (S4901: Yes), the remaining fluctuation time of the currently set fluctuation pattern is calculated (S4903). Then, it is determined whether the residual variation time calculated by the process of S4903 is less than 2 seconds (S4904), and if it is determined to be less than 2 seconds (S4904: Yes), the residual variation is in the residual variation time information storage area 223o. A period A indicating that the time is short is set (S4905), and the process proceeds to S4902.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4904, when it is determined that the residual fluctuation time is not less than 2 seconds (2 seconds or more) (S4904: No), then the residual fluctuation period is 2 seconds or more and more than 15 seconds. If it is determined whether the time is short (S4906), and if it is 2 seconds or more and less than 15 seconds (S4906: Yes), the period B indicating that the residual fluctuation time information storage area 223o is the normal residual fluctuation time. Is set (S4907), and the process proceeds to S4902.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S4906 that the remaining variation time is not less than 15 seconds (exceeding 15 seconds) (S4906: No), it indicates that the residual variation time is long in the residual variation time information storage area 223o. The period C is set (S4908), and the process proceeds to S4902. In this way, the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation period) executed when the special map fluctuation resumes is calculated at the timing when the special map fluctuation is interrupted (the subtraction of the special map fluctuation time is interrupted), and the period corresponds to that period. By setting the information to be performed, it is possible to execute an effect (additional effect) suitable for the remaining variation time without delay at the timing of restarting the special figure variation.

In the present embodiment, if the period information (period A to period C) set in the residual fluctuation time information storage area 223o corresponding to the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation period) executed when the special figure fluctuation resumes is different. However, the selection of each period information is not limited to this, and for example, the shorter the remaining time, the easier it is to select the period A, and the longer the remaining time, the easier it is to select the period C. The ratio may be configured to be different according to the remaining time, or the remaining period may be divided at predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) intervals, and the periods A to C may be distributed in order for each division. It may be configured.

With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the relationship between the additional effect executed based on the period information set in the residual variation time information storage area 223o and the residual variation time. It can provide the enjoyment of predicting fluctuation time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the contents of the fluctuation resumption processing (S4902) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fluctuation restart process (S4902). This variation resumption process (S4902) executes a process of setting an additional effect to be executed when the special figure 1 variation resumption command is received.

When the variation restart process (S4902) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation restart command has been received (S5001), and if it is determined that the command has not been received (S5001: No), this process is terminated. .. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5001 that the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command has been received (S5001: Yes), then the remaining fluctuation time information stored in the residual fluctuation time information storage area 223o is read out (S5002). ), The additional effect type is determined from the additional effect selection table 222c based on the read-out residual fluctuation time information and the additional effect counter 223i (S5003). Next, a display additional effect command corresponding to the read additional effect type is set (S5004), the information set in the residual variation time information storage area o is cleared (S5005), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the special figure change is interrupted, the special figure change is restarted after the normal effect (the effect display executed when the special figure change is started) is completed. A shaking effect that swings and displays the third symbol is executed during the period until the pattern is changed, and when the special figure change is restarted, an additional effect corresponding to the special figure change period (remaining change period) after the restart is executed. However, other configurations may be used.

For example, an effect period determining means for determining a normal effect period in which a normal effect is executed is provided, and when it is determined by the effect period determination means that the normal effect period has ended, an additional effect is executed. May be good. With such a configuration, since the normal effect and the additional effect can be continuously executed, it is possible to provide an effect display more suitable for the player. Further, in this case, an error may occur between the end timing of the additional effect period in which the additional effect is executed and the special figure fluctuation period after the restart, but the additional effect is continuously executed during the error period. Alternatively, a shaking effect for displaying the third symbol in a swinging manner may be executed. Further, an error period discriminating means for discriminating the length of the error period is provided, and when the error period discriminating means determines that the error period is a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) or more, the additional effect is executed again. It may be configured as follows.

Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the variation display setting process (S4113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S4113). This variation display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 69) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. As described above, the variation display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 69) is performed on the first or special figure 2 variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Based on this, a variable pattern command for display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set, and a process of transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, based on the extracted stop types (big hit A to big hit G), a process of setting a display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

In the variation display setting process (S4112), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5101). When it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is off (S5101: No), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110. Therefore, the process of S5105 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S5101: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is set to off (S5102). Next, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the latent state (S5103). When it is determined that the current gaming state is the latent state (S5103: Yes), the variation display setting process for special figure 1 (S5104) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 70, the details of the variation display setting process (S5104) for the special figure 1, which is one process in the variation display setting process (S4113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. do. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation display setting process (S5104) for the special figure 1. In this special figure 1 variation display setting (S5104), when the current gaming state is the latent state, the first special symbol is displayed based on the special figure 1 variation pattern command received from the main control device 110. A process of setting a latent fluctuation pattern command and transmitting it to the display control device 114 is executed.

In the variation display setting process for special figure 1 (S5104), first, the variation time corresponding to the extracted variation pattern is read (S5201), and the value corresponding to the variation time read out in the process of S5201 is sub-special figure 1. The fluctuation time counter is set to 223 m (S5202). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is larger than 0 (S5203). When it is determined that the value of the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is 0 (S5203: No), the display rush inrush command is set (S5204), and the rush displayed flag 223t is set to ON (S5205). ). On the other hand, in the process of S5203, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation counter in FIG. 2 is larger than 0 (S5203: Yes), the process of S5204 and S5205 described above is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S5206. Next, based on the extracted variation pattern, a latent variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol is set (S5206), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 69, the description will be continued. When it was determined in the process of S5103 that the current gaming state is not the latent state (S5103: No), it was extracted from the special figure 1 variation pattern command in the process of S4205 of the command determination process (see FIG. 60). The variation pattern in the variation display effect of the first special symbol is acquired from the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223, and the variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol is generated (S5105). The display variation pattern command of the first special symbol is configured to be able to identify whether it is a display variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol or a variation pattern command of the second special symbol. Specifically, if the upper 2 bits of the upper byte of the display variation pattern command having a 2-byte configuration is "10", it indicates that it corresponds to the first special symbol, and if it is "01", it indicates that it corresponds to the second special symbol. It is configured to indicate that it corresponds to.

The variable pattern command for display of the first special symbol set in the process of S5104 or S5105 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process of the main process (see FIG. 59) (see FIG. 59). It is transmitted to the display control device 114 by S4102). By receiving the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the display control device 114 corresponds to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the first special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbol is performed.

With the setting of the variable pattern command for display of the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set variable pattern command for display is consumed (that is, the variable corresponding to the reserved ball of the first special symbol). The data corresponding to the first special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted in accordance with the setting of the display) (S5106).

Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5107). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is not on (that is, off) (S5107: No), the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110. Therefore, the process of S5111 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S5107: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to off (S5108). Next, the process of the variable display setting process for special figure 2 (S5109) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 71, a variation display setting process (S5109) for special figure 2, which is one process in the variation display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 69), will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 variation display setting process (S5109).

In the variation display setting process for special figure 2 (S5109), first, in the process of S4210 of the command determination process (see FIG. 60), the variation time corresponding to the extracted variation pattern is read out (S5301), and the read variation is performed. The value corresponding to the time is set in the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n (S5302). Next, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the latent state (S5303). When it is determined that the state is latent (S5303: Yes), it is determined whether the rush displayed flag 223t is on (S5304). When it is determined that the rush displayed flag 223t is not on (S5304: No), the remaining time stored in the remaining time storage area 223p is read out (S5305). Next, it is determined whether the remaining time read in the process of S5305 is less than 1 second (S5306). If it is determined that the remaining time is less than 1 second (S5306: Yes), the process of S5307 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5308.

On the other hand, in the process of S5306, when it is determined that the remaining time read out is 1 second or more (S5306: No), the display rush rush command is set (S5307), and the rush displayed flag 223t is set to ON. (S5308). Next, based on the extracted variation pattern, the latent probability variation pattern command for displaying the second special symbol is set (S5309), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5303, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the latent state (S5303: No), or in the process of S5304, when it is determined that the rush displayed flag 223t is set to ON. (S5304: Yes), the process of S5305 to S5308 described above is skipped, the process of S5309 is executed, and the present process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the state where the latent state is set in the state setting area 223j, when the variable display of the first special symbol is set, that is, during the jackpot fluctuation period, the latent state is set. When it is determined whether the second special symbol (special figure 2) is changing and it is determined that the special figure 2 is not changing when the fluctuation display corresponding to the first special symbol change is set. Is configured to set a rush rush command as an effect mode of variable display. That is, it is configured to display a screen (see FIG. 7A) for notifying the player that the rush has entered the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing when the target special figure 1 change is executed. is doing.

On the other hand, when setting the fluctuation display corresponding to the first special symbol fluctuation in which the jackpot fluctuation period is in a latent state, it is determined whether the second special symbol (special figure 2) is changing, and the special symbol is used. When it is determined that 2 is in a fluctuating state, as an effect mode of the fluctuating display, a screen showing that the state is in a latent state (see FIG. 6B) without setting the display rush inrush command is displayed. It is configured to be displayed.

As a result, if a right-handed game is performed when a screen (see FIG. 7 (a)) for setting a display rush rush command and notifying the player that the rush has been rushed is displayed, the game is immediately performed. It is possible to execute the lottery of the second special symbol in the latent state, and it is possible to provide the player with a comfortable game.

In addition, when setting the fluctuation display corresponding to the first special symbol fluctuation that is in the latent state during the jackpot fluctuation period, it is determined whether the second special symbol (special figure 2) is changing, and the special figure 2 If it is determined that the fluctuation is in progress, the fluctuation of the special figure 2 during the fluctuation may be forcibly terminated so that a new fluctuation of the special figure 2 can be executed.

It should be noted that the setting timing of the display rush rush command when the game state shifts to the latent state during the fluctuation of Special Figure 2 is not limited to the content of the present embodiment, and the player is provided with a game that does not feel uncomfortable. It suffices if the configuration is such that For example, when it is determined that the fluctuation of the special figure 2 that is changing has ended at the timing when the latent state is set, the display rush inrush command may be set, or the change may be made at the timing when the latent state is set. It may be configured to discriminate the remaining time until the end of the special figure 2 fluctuation in the figure 2 and set the display rush rush command when the discriminant result becomes a predetermined time (1 second). In this case, the predetermined time to be set is required from the time when the player operates the operation handle 51 to the time when the right-handed game is started until the ball launched by the right-handed game enters the second entrance 640. The time may be shorter than the period, and may be appropriately set according to the configuration of the game board 13.

Returning to FIG. 69, the explanation will be continued. The variable pattern command for display of the second special symbol set in the process of S5109 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed by the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 59). It is transmitted to the control device 114. By receiving the display variation pattern command of the second special symbol, the display control device 114 corresponds to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the second special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbol is performed. Then, in the winning information storage area 223b, the data corresponding to the second special symbol is shifted (S5110).

Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON (S5111). If it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is not set to on (that is, it is off) (S5111: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is on (S5111: Yes), the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f is on. Sets the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f to off, and sets the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g to off when the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is on (S5112).

In the process of S4201 of the command determination process (see FIG. 60), the stop type extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command is set (S5113), and this process is terminated. When the extracted stop type is the stop type of the first special symbol, a display special figure 1 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set based on the stop type. If the extracted stop type is the stop type of the second special symbol, a display special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set based on the stop type. .. The special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command notified from the main control device 110 notifies the big hit type when a big hit occurs, and notifies even when the determination result is wrong. Will be done. When the determination result is out of order, the out-of-order symbol is set without referring to the stop type.

Next, with reference to FIG. 72, various counter update processes (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the various counter update processes (S4111). The various counter update processes (S4111 in FIG. 72) are one of the main processes (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and are the values of the various counters provided in the RAM 223. This is the process to execute the update.

In the various counter update processes (S4111), first, it is determined whether the value of the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is larger than 0 (S5401). When it is determined that the value of the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is larger than 0 (S5401: Yes), the value of the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is subtracted by 1 (S5402). On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5401 that the value of the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is not larger than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S5401: No), the processing of S5402 is skipped and S5403 is skipped. Move to the processing of. Next, it is determined whether the value of the sub-special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is larger than 0 (S5403). When it is determined that the value of the sub-special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is larger than 0 (S5403: Yes), the value of the sub-special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is subtracted by 1 (S5404).

Next, the value of the sub-special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m and the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n are read out (S5405), and the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is read from the value of the sub-special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m. The remaining time is calculated by subtracting the value of (S5406). The remaining time calculated in the process of S5406 is stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (S5407), the values of other various counters are subtracted by 1 (S5408), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5403, when it is determined that the value of the sub-special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is not larger than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S5403: No), the above-mentioned S5404 to S5407 are skipped. , S5408 process is executed, and this process is terminated.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 73 to 87, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 73, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is set in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs initially processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM has a high speed. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls on the third symbol display device 81. To start.

Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. 74. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it can sufficiently store not only image data but also a control program and the like, while controlling. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to the predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S6001 in FIG. 73) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is completed and the boot process is terminated.

By executing the boot process (S6001) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM configured by a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, in the display control device 114. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 74, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S6102. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. It may execute the process set in 231a. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S6101. And S6102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. 1 It may be stored in the program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231, which is possible after the boot process, earlier.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 73. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct to execute the display process. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes a start address and a final address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, transfer destination information (here, resident video RAM 235), and a transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of this register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6003, then the power-on variable image A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S6004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 85 (a)) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S7502 in FIG. 85 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75 (b)), the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) (not shown) is simply drawn. The command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 75 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 75 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, since the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. By using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, so that the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, there was a ball entry (starting prize) into the first entry slot 64 or the second entry slot 640, and the start instruction of the variable effect was given. When the main control device 110 passes through the voice lamp control device 113, that is, when the display fluctuation pattern command is received, the fluctuation image at power-on is immediately displayed during the fluctuation effect period, and a simple fluctuation is performed. You can produce. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, and it takes time to transfer the flash memory. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery is possible. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S6005, the interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 75 (a). FIG. 75A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the command interrupt process is executed by the MPU 231.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 75 (b). FIG. 75B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, since the image controller 237 does not receive the drawing instruction of the next image at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started during the drawing of the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V-interruption process, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. A command determination process (S6302) is executed so that the display device 81 can display the image, and then a display setting process (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. If the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81.

In the display setting process (S6303), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), which are determined by the task process (S6304), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 29 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list (S6306). The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 87.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, non-front / rear out reach, complete out) is set. The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed to shift to the process of S6304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S6302), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 76, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402), and then the command. For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). Then, if there is a variation pattern command for display (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed (S6405), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. 77 (a). FIG. 77A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing (S6405). This fluctuation pattern command processing (S6405) executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed in the main control device 110 at a distance of several seconds or more, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly for display. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer. Initialize 233f to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S6505), the fluctuation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S6505, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501. , The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S6502e. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 from the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is timed by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6503, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 76. In the processing of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a stop type command for display (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 77 (b). FIG. 77B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (either big hit A to G, small hit A to C, reach off, or complete off) indicated by the display stop type command. (S6601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is used. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on 81 is finally set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is set. Set it on (S6603) and return to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S6603, and the specified stop symbol is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S6601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is completely out of order. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete deviation is set by the process of S6602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit of the special symbol" is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually has a "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is off". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", and may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 is completely disengaged. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408), and the display is performed. If there is an opening command for (S6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the opening command processing (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. 78 (a). FIG. 78 (a) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. This opening command process executes the process corresponding to the opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the opening command processing, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). After that, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and the time data is set in the timekeeping counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6410), and the display is performed. If there is a round number command (S6410: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 78 (b). FIG. 78B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes the process corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is displayed. Set to the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6805), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6410, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S6412), and the display is performed. If there is an ending command for (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the ending command processing (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. 79. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command process executes the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6903). S6904). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6905), the ending command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display rush inrush command among the unprocessed commands (S6414), and the display is performed. If there is a rush rush command (S6414: Yes), the rush rush command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, the details of the rush inrush command process (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 80 (a). FIG. 80A is a flowchart showing the rush inrush command process. This rush rush command process executes a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rush rush command processing, first, a rush rush display data table corresponding to the display mode of the rush rush effect indicated by the display rush rush command is determined, and the determined rush rush display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. Then, it is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6931). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6932).

Next, based on the rush inrush display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6931, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6934). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6935), the rush inrush command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display rush rush command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an additional effect command among the unprocessed commands (S6416), and the additional effect is added. If there is a command (S6416: Yes), the additional effect command process is executed (S6417), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the additional effect command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 80 (b). FIG. 80B is a flowchart showing additional effect command processing. This additional effect command process executes the process corresponding to the additional effect command for display received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the additional effect command processing, first, an additional effect display data table corresponding to the display mode of the additional effect indicated by the additional effect command for display is determined, and the determined additional effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. , Set to the display data table buffer 233d (S6951). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6952).

Next, based on the additional effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6951, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6954). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6955), the additional effect command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6416, if it is determined that there is no additional display effect command (S6416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6418), and the rear surface is determined. If there is an image change command (S6418: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S6419), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S6419) will be described with reference to FIG. 81. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rear image change command process, first, the rear image change flag 233w for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S7503) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the on state is set to on (S7001). ). Then, among the bits of the rear image discrimination flag 233x provided for each rear image type (rear surface A, B), the bit corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is set to ON, and other bits are set. The bit corresponding to the rear image type of is set to off (S7002), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag 233w set by the process of S7001 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is changed from the rear image discrimination flag 233x set by the process of S7002. Identify.

Further, in the task processing, when it is specified to display either the back surface A or B according to the back surface type of the rear image specified in the display data table, the rear image discrimination flag 233x set by S7002 is used. The type of back image to be displayed at that time is specified, and the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored ( (Whether it is a resident video RAM 235 or a normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7002, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted and the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 76. In the processing of S6418, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S6418: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6420), and there is an error command. If (S6420: Yes), error command processing is executed (S6421), and the process returns to S6401 processing.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S6421) will be described with reference to FIG. 81 (b). FIG. 81B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S7102), and the error command is used. Ends the process and returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S7102 is determined and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the error discrimination flag corresponding to all the error types indicated by each error command is set to ON in the process in S7102. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 76. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S6416 (S6420: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S6422), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

In the processing of S6401 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes). ), The processing of S6402 to S6422 is executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6422 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S6401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75B) is also processed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment processing, only the commands required to display the power-on image, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are used from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extract and execute the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 77 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 77 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and for other commands, Performs the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 77 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S6501. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, the process of writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S6303), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 82, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7201: No). ), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, the processes of S7202 to S7204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S7202), S7203 to S7204 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S7203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S7203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S7204).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error discrimination flag is referred to and all the error discrimination set to ON is performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S7301).

In the task processing (S6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 82. After the warning image setting process (S7204) or in the process of S7203, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is turned off (S7203: No), the process proceeds to the process of S7205.

In S7205, the pointer update process is executed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 84. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so that the respective values are sequentially started from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the process of S7401, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S7403), and if it is a demo display data table (S7403: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7405), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demo effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S7403: No). S7406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawing contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image specified in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7402: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the process returns to FIG. 82 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task process (S6304), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents expanded in the process of S7206 together with the warning image expanded earlier, and each sprite is specified. , Display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and other parameters required for drawing are determined.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed display flag is on. (S7209).

As a result, if the definite display flag is off (S7209: No), the definite display effect has not been performed yet, and it is time to perform the definite display effect. Therefore, first, the definite display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S7210), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the definite display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S7214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final symbol display effect of the stopped symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing content can be set as such. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the confirmed display data table. Further, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S6304), from the start of the fluctuation until the predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S7215, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7209, if the definite display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S7216). If the demo display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the timekeeping counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that a certain period of time has elapsed from the end of the final display effect. Later, a process for displaying the demo effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents are cleared by writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing contents can be set to.

In the process of S7216, if the demo display flag is on (S7216: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75 (b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, one of the variation images at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the stop type command for display for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table that specifies that the image of the above is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 85A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 85 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, off as a result of the processing of S7501 (S7501: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 86.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 85 (b). FIG. 85B is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S7601), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S7601: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S7602). In the process of S7602, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S7602 that the transfer process has not been completed (S7602: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S7603. Further, as a result of the processing of S7601, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S7603.

In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S7603), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S7603: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 describes the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S7603 (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S7605), and this process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 75 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 75 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) (see S7501: No in FIG. 85 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 86, a normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the display setting process (S6303) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702), and if it is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is stored from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source final address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S7703) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to S7705.

Further, in the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S7702: No), the processes of S7703 and S7704 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S7706).

In the process of S7706, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S7706 that the transfer process has not been completed (S7706: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S7707. Further, as a result of the processing of S7705, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S7705: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S7707.

In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707), and if the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag 233w is on (S7709). If the rear image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag 233w is set to off (S7710), it is provided for each rear image type. Among the rear image discrimination flags 233x, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag 233x in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S7711). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag 233x in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (transfer destination). The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The discrimination in the processing of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the stored state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the stored state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is a normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

If, as a result of the processing of S7713, the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7713 (S7713: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S7714). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 includes the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the given address. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the processing of S7714, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and this normal transfer setting processing is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that became the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S6306), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined by the task process (S6304) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and a drawing list (FIG. 29) is generated from the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305) (S7801). That is, in the processing of S7801, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304). Then, the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to obtain the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address is read out from the character ROM 234 in order and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. Then, in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the image expanded in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed in parallel at the same time. be able to.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j after the processing of S7802 (S7803). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when the value is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 75 (b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

In the first embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, regardless of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, in the state where the variation display of 1 is executed, the other variation display may be configured to be infeasible. Then, if there is a reserved ball, the start winning prize may be changed in order from the oldest reserved ball. With this configuration, control can be simplified and the processing load can be reduced.

As described above, in the first embodiment, the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol) and the probabilistic state (high probability state of the special symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol). Four gaming states are provided: a time-saving state (low probability state of special symbol and high probability state of normal symbol) and latent state (high probability state of special symbol and normal state of normal symbol). There is. Then, the latent state is configured to be the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

That is, when the latent state is set, the variable time for showing the lottery of the second special symbol, which is more likely to be a lottery result more favorable to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol, is set in another game state. By stipulating that it be shorter than when it is done, the lottery that is advantageous to the player can be executed most efficiently. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel playability in which the player is expected to set the latent state.

Specifically, in the lottery of the second special symbol, in addition to the big hit, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened even if the prize is small, so that the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is short. In the state, the prize balls can be continuously increased. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that it will be in a latent state. In a general gaming machine, the probabilistic state is the most advantageous gaming state, but in the present embodiment, the latent probabilistic state is more advantageous than the probabilistic state, so that a novel game property can be provided.

Further, in the first embodiment, the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous). A variable method is adopted). As a result, even if the variable display of one special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the other special symbol can be executed without waiting for the end of the variable display, so that the lottery of the special symbol can be executed more efficiently. can. In addition, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are fluctuating at the same time, if one of them stops fluctuating with a stop symbol of a big hit or a small hit, the other fluctuating display shows the remaining fluctuation time or lottery. Regardless of the result, the stop symbol is displayed as a stop. As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem that the other variable display is fixedly displayed as a hit or a small hit during the execution of the big hit or the small hit, and the big hit or the small hit is started in duplicate.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set, the variable display corresponding to the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed. , The high-probability state of the normal symbol shifts to the low-probability state, and the gaming state shifts from the probabilistic state to the latent state. While this latent state is set, the variable display (dynamic display) period for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol is set short, so that many lottery of the second special symbol can be executed. It will be a period that can be done (Special Figure 2 Fluctuation Advantageous Period).

In the present embodiment, since the small hit is configured to be won with a probability of about 1/2 in the lottery of the second special symbol, the small hit is set during the period when the latent state is set as the game state. The small hit game that is executed when the player wins the game is frequently executed, and the game state is advantageous to the player who can win many prize balls (special figure 2 advantageous state).

As described above, the period in which the latent probability state is set in the present embodiment (special figure 2 variable advantageous period) is during the variable display period (dynamic display period) of the first special symbol won by the jackpot in the probable change state. Since (special figure 1 big hit is changing), the big hit game is executed when the special figure 2 advantageous state ends. In this way, since a plurality of states (special figure 2 advantageous state, jackpot game state) that are advantageous to the player are continuously set, the player is continuously given various benefits. Can be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a small hit is won by one special symbol (special figure 2) and the small hit game is executed, the fluctuation of the other special symbol (special figure 1) is interrupted (variation display period). The measurement is interrupted), and when the small hit game is completed, the measurement of the interrupted fluctuation display period is restarted. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the special figure 2 variable advantage period from being subtracted during the small hit game, and therefore, regardless of the number of small hit games executed during the special figure 2 variable advantageous period. It is possible to provide the player with a certain special figure 2 variable advantageous period.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result of one special symbol (special figure 1), the other special symbol (special figure 2) that is changing is stopped and displayed. It is configured to be forcibly stopped with. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a small hit game is executed during a big hit game.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control content for the change of the other special symbol is different depending on the lottery result of one special symbol. Specifically, if the lottery result of one special symbol is a big hit (a lottery result that can give the player the first privilege), the change of the other special symbol means that the lottery result is out of order. If it is stopped and displayed in the display mode shown and the lottery result of one special symbol is a small hit (a lottery result that can give the player a second privilege different from the first privilege), the other special symbol changes. Is stopped until the grant of the second privilege is completed (until the small hit game is completed), and is restarted after the grant of the second privilege is completed. In addition, if the lottery result of one special symbol is out of order, the change of the other special symbol is executed as it is.

With this configuration, the lottery content (lottery result, period until the lottery result is displayed) of the other special symbol can be changed based on the lottery result of one special symbol, and the player's It is possible to provide various playability.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a lottery result that can give a privilege to the player, the control content for the change of the other special symbol is changed according to the content of the privilege. Therefore, for example, in the case of a lottery result that gives the player the most advantageous privilege (big hit game), the lottery result corresponding to the change of the other special symbol being executed is the lottery result that gives the privilege. Even so, the fluctuation is forcibly stopped so that the lottery result is out of order, the player is suppressed from being given excessive benefits, and the lottery result (small hit) with less benefits given than the big hit game. In the case of, in order to prevent the privilege based on the lottery of the other special symbol from being given during the small hit game without changing the lottery result corresponding to the change of the other special symbol being executed, the variable display is performed. It is possible to interrupt only the measurement of the period.

Therefore, in a state where a plurality of special symbols (Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2) are fluctuating at the same time, the player is given the least advantageous privilege, and thus the most advantageous privilege to be given later is given. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the player is not able to do so, and it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player feels uncomfortable.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the latent state is set as the gaming state, a short-term (0.5 second) variable display period is set as the variable display period of the second special symbol (special figure 2). It is configured so that small hit games can be performed frequently. Then, the condition for setting the latent state as the gaming state is the condition where the latent state is set, and the condition for ending the latent state is the condition for winning the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol while the probability changing state is set. Is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot, and the jackpot game is executed. Therefore, the jackpot game is executed after the end of the first advantageous period, which is advantageous to the player who frequently executes the small hit game. The second game period will be set. Therefore, since the first advantageous period and the second advantageous period that are advantageous to the player can be continuously set, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game so that the first advantageous period is set.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the probability variation state, the latent probability state is set from the start of the jackpot fluctuation, and the latent probability state is set. Is set so that the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be efficiently performed.

Therefore, at the same time as the latent state is set, the player is notified of the period during which the latent state is set (based on the setting of the latent state) (FIG. 7 (a)). ))reference.

However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be changed at the same time, the first special symbol is also the second in the state where the probabilistic state is set. Both special symbols may fluctuate.

In such a case, even if the display mode indicating that the latent state (RUSH) is set at the timing when the latent state is set is displayed (see FIG. 7A), the second is currently changing. Until the special symbol stops fluctuating, the lottery for the second special symbol cannot be executed in the latent state, and there is a problem that the small hit game is not executed forever even in the RUSH state. There was a risk.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the condition for transition to the latent probability state is satisfied (when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol during the probability change state), the change status of the second special symbol (whether or not there is a change, (Fluctuating remaining period) is determined, and the timing for notifying that the RUSH state has been set is different based on the determination result.

Specifically, when the condition for transition to the latent state is satisfied, the RUSH state is set when it is determined that the new second special symbol change is feasible. It is configured. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the change of the new second special symbol is not started and the small hit game is not executed even though the notification that the RUSH state has been set is notified.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the condition for transition to the latent state is satisfied, the period from the state in which the new change of the second special symbol can be executed to the end of the latent state is determined. If the determined period is less than the predetermined period, the RUSH state is not notified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the big hit game from being started without the small hit game being executed even though the notification that the RUSH state has been set is notified.

In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the probabilistic state, the high probability state of the normal symbol is changed to the low probability state at the time when the jackpot fluctuation starts, so that the game state is set. If the probability state is set and the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the high probability state of the normal symbol does not shift to the low probability state at the start of the jackpot fluctuation. , It is configured to continue the probabilistic state even during the jackpot fluctuation. With this configuration, it is possible to provide different playability depending on the type of special symbol.

Not limited to the configuration of this embodiment, even if a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery in the probabilistic state, the high probability state of the normal symbol is changed to the low probability state at the time when the jackpot fluctuation starts. It may be configured to set the latent probability state as the game state by shifting to, or only when a specific jackpot type is set among a plurality of jackpot types, it is normal at the time when the jackpot fluctuation starts. It may be configured to set the latent state as the game state by shifting the high probability state of the symbol to the low probability state.

Furthermore, the number of jackpots won during the advantageous continuation period is measured, and when the measurement result reaches a predetermined number of times, the high-probability state of the normal symbol is shifted to the low-probability state at the time when the jackpot fluctuation starts. It may be configured to set the latent probability state as the game state.

In the present embodiment, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the probable change state, the latent state is set at the time when the big hit change starts and the period until the big hit change ends. However, the jackpot fluctuation corresponding to the predicted winning information is completed based on the prediction that the jackpot will be won in the start winning process (see FIG. 47). It may be configured to set the latent state for the period (multiple fluctuation periods) until the operation.

In the present embodiment, when the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is selected in the state where the latent probability state is set, the fluctuation pattern table is always constant regardless of the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol during the latent probability state setting. (See FIG. 19B) is used, but the configuration is not limited to this, and for example, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the latent probability state is set reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times). It is also possible to provide a discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the discriminating means have been performed, and to make the data table for selecting the variation pattern different based on the discriminating result of the discriminating means.

Specifically, when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol has not reached a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), the fluctuation of the second special symbol is performed by referring to the data table in which the average fluctuation time is about 2 seconds. When the number of times reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), it is preferable to refer to a data table in which the average fluctuation time is about 1 second. As a result, more small hit games can be provided to the player when a fluctuation pattern in which a long fluctuation time is set is selected as the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, the latent probability state is set during the jackpot fluctuation in the probability change state, but in addition to this, the lottery result of the special symbol is a specific deviation or a small hit. The latent probability state may be set during the fluctuation display in the case, or the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol is out of a specific range or becomes a small hit reaches a predetermined number of times during the probability change state. If this is the case, the latent state may be set.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 111. In the above-mentioned first embodiment, when the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is set, the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1). In addition, the gaming state during the jackpot fluctuation is set as the latent probability state, and the small hit game is easily executed when the latent probability state is set. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the first embodiment described above, the gaming state can be changed during the symbol determination period (the period during which the first symbol is stopped and displayed) for displaying the lottery result of the special symbol. It is configured to let you. That is, when a big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the state where the probability variation state is set, the start timing of the symbol confirmation period (the first symbol indicating the big hit) in which the lottery result is displayed is displayed. Is configured to set the latent state as the game state at the timing when is stopped and displayed).

Further, the second embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that a different symbol determination period is set based on the lottery result of the special symbol. With this configuration, the length of the period in which the latent state that is advantageous to the player is set can be made different according to the length of the set symbol determination period. Further, as compared with the configuration in which the latent state is set corresponding to the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the period during which the special symbol is fluctuating) as in the first embodiment described above, the symbol confirmation period (special) of the special symbol is obtained. Since the configuration in which the latent probability state is set corresponding to the period in which the symbol is stopped) is used, it is possible to simplify the display mode corresponding to the special symbol in the state in which the latent probability state is set. , The control of the pachinko machine 10 can be simplified.

Further, in the first embodiment described above, once the probabilistic state is set, the probabilistic state is maintained until the next big hit is won, but in the second embodiment, the special symbol jackpot is used. Even if the player is not elected, the probability change state is terminated when the predetermined end condition (the number of special symbol fluctuations after the probability change state is set reaches the predetermined number of times (50 times)) is satisfied. It differs in that it is configured in. With such a configuration, it is possible to enthusiastically play a game for a player for shifting to a latent state during a period in which a probable change state is set.

Here, the flow of the game in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 88. FIG. 88 is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of the game when a specific jackpot (big hit C) is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in a state where the probability variation state is set. .. As shown in FIG. 88, in the second embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the state where the probability variation state is set, the jackpot game starts from the timing when the jackpot fluctuation stops (see FIG. 88 (c)). The latent state is set in the period until it is executed (symbol confirmation period).

Then, in the state where the latent probability state is set, the game for drawing the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed as in the first embodiment described above. Further, if the small hit of the special figure 2 is won during the symbol confirmation period of the special figure 1, the measurement (subtraction) of the symbol confirmation period of the special figure 1 is interrupted during the period in which the small hit game is executed. ing. In addition, in the second embodiment, even if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order or a small hit, a different symbol determination period is set according to the lottery result. As a result, the player desires that a long period be set as the symbol determination period as the lottery result (lottery result of winning the jackpot) of the special figure 1 corresponding to the period in which the latent state is set. In the state where the latent state is set, it is desired that a short period is set as the symbol determination period in order to execute more lottery of the special figure 2.

That is, in the second embodiment in which the symbol confirmation period is different according to the lottery result, a long symbol confirmation period is desired and a short symbol confirmation period is desired according to the game state and the type of special symbol. Can be provided to the player. Further, in the second embodiment, different symbol determination periods are set for the same fluctuation pattern in which the same fluctuation display can be executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from predicting the symbol confirmation period in advance due to the variable display content of the special symbol, and which symbol confirmation period is set for this special symbol lottery. It is possible to make it difficult to understand until the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed. In addition, since it has the above-mentioned configuration, it has a variation effect (an effect mode executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81) that is executed corresponding to one variation time (variation pattern). Since it is configured to set multiple types of symbol confirmation periods, the time required for one special symbol lottery (after the special symbol lottery is performed, the next special symbol lottery can be performed. Even when the time until) is set in a complicated manner, it is possible to unify the variable production.

In the example described with reference to FIG. 88, the flow of the game when the jackpot of Special FIG. 1 is won when the probability variation state is set, that is, when the number of remaining time reductions is 47 times is shown. It is configured so that the latent state is set from the time when the jackpot fluctuation stops. In addition to this, when the jackpot of Special Figure 1 is won at the timing when the probability change state ends (the value of the probability change counter 203aa becomes 0) (for example, the 50th special figure lottery after the probability change state is set). Is configured so that the latent state is set from the timing when the jackpot fluctuation starts.

With this configuration, in the state where the probability variation state is set, the advantageous period of different length is set based on the timing of winning the jackpot of the special figure 1. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while requesting that the player win the jackpot at the timing when a long advantageous period is set, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, the gaming state set for the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) executed when the probability change state is set will be described with reference to FIG. 89. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing the relationship between the content of the special figure 1 game and the given score after the probability change state is set.

As shown in FIG. 89, in the second embodiment, the game state is variably set based on the lottery result of the special symbol lottery executed in the state where the probability variation state is set and the number of lottery (number of special figure fluctuations). It is configured to do. Specifically, in the second embodiment, the probability change state is continuously set until the number of lottery (variation number) of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (50 times) without winning the jackpot. If the jackpot is won while the number of lottery (number of fluctuations) of the special symbol is 1 to 49, the symbol showing the probability change state and the jackpot is stopped and displayed during the jackpot fluctuation. The latent state is set during the confirmation period. As a result, the player is given a latent state game (RUSH game) during the symbol determination period and a jackpot game after the latent state ends as a privilege.

Next, when the number of lottery (number of fluctuations) of the special symbol is the 50th jackpot, the latent state is set during the jackpot fluctuation and during the symbol determination period. As a result, the player is given a privilege of the latent state game (RUSH game) from the jackpot fluctuation to the end of the symbol confirmation period and the jackpot game after the end of the latent state. That is, in the second embodiment, in the state where the probability change state is set, the transition condition (big hit winning) to the latent state is set in the state where the specific condition (specific lottery number (50th)) is satisfied. When it is satisfied, the player is configured to be given a privilege which is more advantageous than the case where the transition condition to the latent state is satisfied when the specific condition is not satisfied.

Then, when the number of lottery of the special symbol exceeds 50 times, the predetermined probability variation number is reached, and the normal state is set as the game state. If a jackpot is won during this normal state, the normal state continues during the fluctuation of the special symbol and during the symbol confirmation period, and the jackpot game is executed.

On the other hand, if the number of lottery (number of fluctuations) of the special symbol is out of the range from the 1st to the 49th after the probability variation state is set, the probability variation state is changed during the change of the special symbol and during the symbol confirmation period. If it continues and it is off at the 50th time, the latent state is set during the change of the special symbol and during the symbol confirmation period, so the latent state from the special symbol change to the end of the symbol confirmation period. The game (RUSH game) becomes feasible.

Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in the second embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit with respect to the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the probable change state and the symbol confirmation period, it is not a big hit (missing). , Small hit), it is configured so that a long time is easier to select. For example, when the lottery result of a special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation time is "60 seconds to 180 seconds". The fluctuation time of "" is selected, and the symbol confirmation period of "5 seconds to 150 seconds" is selected as the symbol confirmation period. The fluctuation time of "5 seconds to 150 seconds" is selected as the fluctuation time, and the symbol confirmation period of "0.2 seconds to 1.5 seconds" is selected as the symbol confirmation period.

With this configuration, the lottery result of the special symbol and the latent state game (RUSH game) can be played for a maximum of 330 seconds (when a big hit is won with the 50th special figure change number) according to the number of lottery, and the minimum. It can be provided to the player with a range of 5 seconds (when the jackpot is won in the 1st to 49th special figure fluctuations). Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting how long the latent state of this time will continue.

Further, in the present embodiment, regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol, when the number of times of special symbol lottery (number of fluctuations) after the probability change state is set becomes the 50th time, the special symbol is being changed and the special symbol is changing. , Since the latent state is set during the symbol confirmation period, even if the jackpot is not won during the probable change state, the latent state game (RUSH game) is played against the player. Can be provided. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to experience the latent state game (RUSH game) than the configuration of the first embodiment in which the latent state game (RUSH game) is provided only when the jackpot is won. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player gets tired of the game because he / she cannot experience the latent state game (RUSH game) even though he / she has played the game for a long time.

Further, in the present embodiment, the latent state is set when the latent state is set based on the winning of the jackpot during the probable change state, and the latent state is set longer than the latent state is set without winning the jackpot. It is configured to be easy. As a result, the longer the period during which the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed, the easier it is to execute the jackpot game after the latent state game (RUSH game) is completed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player in the latent state game (RUSH game) play the game while expecting the jackpot game to be executed.

In addition, unlike the configuration of the present embodiment described above, in a part of the case where the latent state is set without winning the big hit, it is equivalent to the case where the latent state is set based on the winning of the big hit. Or, set the fluctuation time and the symbol confirmation period corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol other than the big hit (missing, small hit) so that the latent state game (RUSH game) of a longer length is executed. Is also good. As a result, it is possible to provide a player with a situation in which it may be advantageous not to win a big hit in a special symbol lottery, and it is possible to provide a surprising game.

In the present embodiment, as described above, it is easy to set a long latent state when a big hit is won during the probable change state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the latent probability is not limited to this, and the big hit is not won during the probable change state. When the state is set, it may be configured so that a long latent state is set. In this case, for example, the probability of change (the number of lottery of special symbols whose probability change state is continuously set (number of fluctuations)) is 50, and the probability of big hit in the probability change state, that is, the high probability state of the special symbol is 1/20. It is preferable to set to, so that a long latent state is set when the result of the lottery of the special symbol is missed 50 times in a row (about 7%).

Next, among the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the display contents different from the above-described first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 90. In the second embodiment, unlike the first embodiment described above, the latent probability state is set during the symbol determination period. Therefore, a special figure 1 for the effect content displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The display mode of the display area Dm1 or the special figure 2 display area Dm2 is different from the above-described first embodiment. FIG. 90A is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display contents in the latent state. As shown in FIG. 90 (a), in the second embodiment, since the latent state is set during the period when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), the latent state is set. The display of the effect mode (super chance zone display) indicating the state in which the change of the second special symbol is executed across the timing is displayed, and the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. It differs from the display screen of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 8A) in that it is executed during the period when the second symbol for showing is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). Since the other display elements are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the example shown in FIG. 90 (a), the display mode (“777”) of the third symbol for indicating that the first special symbol (special figure 1) has won the big hit is stopped and displayed. It shows that the latent probability state is set based on the fact that the jackpot is won in the first special symbol during the probability change state. In the example shown in FIG. 90 (a), since the special figure 1 display area Dm1 in which the third symbol is displayed in a display mode that can be visually recognized by the player is formed, the player can see the special figure 1 display area. By grasping the display mode of the third symbol displayed on Dm1 and the effect mode indicating that the latent state displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 has been set, the flow of the game in the future will be related. The game can be performed in a state in which information (information on whether or not the jackpot game is executed after the latent state game is completed) is acquired in advance.

Further, in the second embodiment, when the latent probability state is set based on the jackpot winning of the first special symbol, the fall lottery (special symbol) is performed when the special symbol is drawn during the latent probability state. The lottery for shifting the high-probability state to the low-probability state) is not performed. Therefore, by identifying the display mode of the third symbol displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, it is possible to grasp whether or not the current latent state is an advantageous latent state that is advantageous to the player. You can play the game with confidence.

In the second embodiment, the configuration in which the third symbol is displayed so that the player can easily identify the lottery result of the special symbol is used, but the lottery result of the special symbol is not limited to this. In order to make it difficult for the player to identify, the display area may be reduced, or the display area other than the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (for example, a light emitting body attached to the game board 13 or a light emitting body other than the third symbol display device 81) may be provided. A configuration such as a liquid crystal display device) may be used for display. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand what triggered the latent state to be set, so that the jackpot game is executed after the latent state game (RUSH game) is completed. It is possible to play the game while predicting whether or not the fall lottery is being executed during the latent state game (RUSH game).

Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the third symbol is displayed from the time when the third symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 until the final display period (symbol confirmation period) elapses. It is configured to stop completely without changing it, but it is not limited to this as long as it notifies the player that the special symbol is currently in the final display period (symbol finalization period), for example. During the final display period, the variable display of the third symbol is stopped, but the display mode (color) of the third symbol may be gradually changed, or the third symbol may be configured to be indistinguishable by the player. The design may be configured to swing.

In addition, for the player, a new lottery (variation) of the special symbol is made because the right of the special symbol lottery to be newly executed has not been acquired, whether the player is currently in the confirmed display period (design confirmation period). ) May not be executed, it may be configured to set a display mode for allowing the player to identify, for example, "confirmed display" or "waiting" in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. The command of "" may be displayed, or the display mode (color, design) of the third symbol may be changed between "confirmed display" and "waiting". With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent erroneous recognition that a new lottery is not started even in the state of having the reserved memory during the definite display period.

Next, with reference to FIG. 90 (b), the display contents at the time of entering the latent state game (RUSH game) in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 90B is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display content displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the latent state game (RUSH game) is entered. As shown in FIG. 90 (b), in the present embodiment, since the latent state is set during the period when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), the latent state game (RUSH game) is performed. The effect mode indicating rushing is executed during the period in which the second symbol for showing the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. In that respect, it differs from the display screen of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 8B). Since the other display elements are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 96. In the second embodiment, the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are changed from the first embodiment described above, and the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed. It differs in that it is done. Other points are the same as those in the first embodiment, the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 91 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 91, in the ROM 202 of the second embodiment, the big hit type selection table 202aa is replaced with the big hit type selection table 202d, and the small hit type selection table 202a is replaced with the small hit type selection table 202ab. Is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the variation pattern selection table 202ac is provided instead of the variation pattern selection table 202f, and the deviation type selection table 202ad is provided.

The jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa is different from the jackpot type selection table 202d of the first embodiment described above in that the type of the jackpot type is changed, and various counters (time reduction counter 203f, probability variation counter 203aa) set after the jackpot ends. , The fixed time counters 203ad and 203ae) are different from each other in that the value of the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type is changed. Here, the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 92.

FIG. 92 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 92, the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa is defined by the same jackpot operation content as the jackpot type defined in the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16A) of the first embodiment described above. For each jackpot type, the values of the time reduction counter 203f, the probability variation counter 203aa, the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad, and the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae are specified.

Specifically, when the jackpot type (big hit A1 to jackpot A3) in which the same jackpot operation content as that of the jackpot A in the jackpot type selection table 202d of the first embodiment described above is executed is selected (winning the jackpot). When the game state is the normal state or the latent state, the value of "100" is set in the time saving counter 203f, and the value of "50" is set in the time saving state and the probable change state. Therefore, it is specified that the value of "50" is set in the probability variation counter 203aa.

Furthermore, as the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol, it is stipulated that the jackpot A1 is set to "5 seconds", the jackpot A2 is set to "60 seconds", and the jackpot A3 is set to "150 seconds". The jackpot A1 is defined in the range where the value of the counter C2 (0 to 99) is "0 to 19", the jackpot A2 is defined in the range of "20 to 23", and the jackpot A3 is defined in the range "24". That is, in the second embodiment, the jackpot operation corresponding to the jackpot A (big hits A1 to A3) is executed in 25% of the cases where the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and 80% (20 / 20 /) of them. It is stipulated that 25) is the jackpot D, 16% (4/25) is the jackpot A2, and 4% (1/25) is the jackpot A3.

That is, in the present embodiment, even if the jackpot in which the most advantageous jackpot game is executed for the player is won, the symbol confirmation period is short as the period (symbol confirmation period) for stopping and displaying the lottery result to the player. If selected, the period during which the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed will be shortened. Therefore, in the lottery of special symbols, it is possible to make the player pay attention not only to whether or not a big hit is won, but also to the length of the symbol determination period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the second embodiment, a configuration is used in which the symbol determination period is associated with the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a lottery for selecting the jackpot operation content (big hit type) and a lottery. The lottery for selecting the symbol fixing period and the lottery may be configured to be executed independently. In this case, since a plurality of symbol determination periods can be combined for a plurality of jackpot types, it is possible to provide game playability that is difficult for the player to predict.

Next, similarly to the above-mentioned jackpots A1 to A3, jackpots B1 to B3, jackpots C1 to C3, and jackpots D1 to D3 are defined, respectively.

Specifically, when the jackpot type (big hit B1 to jackpot B3) in which the same jackpot operation content as that of the jackpot B in the jackpot type selection table 202d of the first embodiment described above is executed is selected (winning the jackpot). When the game state is the normal state or the latent state, the value of "0" is set in the time saving counter 203f, and the value of "100" is set in the time saving state and the probable change state. Therefore, it is specified that the value of "0" is set in the probability variation counter 203aa.

Furthermore, it is stipulated that the jackpot B1 is set to "5 seconds", the jackpot B2 is set to "60 seconds", and the jackpot B3 is set to "150 seconds" as the symbol determination period of the special symbol. The jackpot B1 is defined in the range of the value of the counter C2 (0 to 99) in the range of "25 to 29", the jackpot A2 is defined in the range of "20 to 23", and the jackpot A3 is defined in the range of "24". That is, in A2 of the second embodiment, the jackpot operation corresponding to the jackpot A (big hits A1 to A3) is executed in 25% of the cases where the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and 80% of them ( It is stipulated that 20/25) is the jackpot D, 16% (4/25) is the jackpot A2, and 4% (1/25) is the jackpot A3.

Next, the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab will be described with reference to FIG. 93 (a). FIG. 93A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 93 (a), the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab has each small hit type (small) with respect to the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16 (b)) of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the hit A to the small hit C) are further subdivided and defined. Other than that, it is the same as the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16B). The detailed description of the same element will be omitted.

Specifically, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is in the range of "0 to 9" as the small hit type in which the small hit operation (opening operation) corresponding to the small hit A of the first embodiment described above is executed. , "Small hit A1" with a symbol confirmation time of "0.2 seconds" is in the range of "10 to 89", and "Small hit A2" with a symbol confirmation time of "0.5 seconds" is "90 to 93". "Small hit A3" with a symbol confirmation time of "1.5 seconds" is specified in the range of ".

Then, as the small hit type in which the small hit operation (opening operation) corresponding to the small hit B of the first embodiment described above is executed, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is determined in the range of "94 to 95". "Small hit B1" with a time of "0.2 seconds" is in the range of "96 to 97", and "Small hit B2" with a symbol confirmation time of "0.5 seconds" is in the value of "98". A "small hit B3" with a fixed time of "1.5 seconds" is specified. Further, as the small hit type in which the small hit operation (opening operation) corresponding to the small hit C of the first embodiment described above is executed, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is set to "99" and the symbol determination time is "1. A small hit operation (opening operation) of "5 seconds" is specified.

Next, the contents of the deviation type selection table 202ad will be described with reference to FIG. 93 (b). This out-of-order type selection table 202ad is referred to for selecting the out-of-order type when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, and is different in correspondence with the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5. The fixed time is specified.

In the present embodiment, the same counter value (value of the small hit type counter C5) is used depending on whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit or a miss because the lottery result of the special symbol cannot be duplicated. ) To select the type. As a result, the number of counters included in the main control device 110 can be reduced. The configuration is not limited to the above-mentioned configuration, and different counters may be used depending on whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit or a miss.

FIG. 93B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the deviation type selection table 202ad. As shown in FIG. 93 (b), the symbol type (off type) having a symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds to 1.5 seconds corresponding to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a small hit. It is specified corresponding to the value of the type counter C5.

As described above, in the second embodiment, it is possible to set the lottery results of big hit, small hit, and miss as the lottery result of the special symbol, and further, it is possible to set a different symbol confirmation time for each lottery result. It is configured in. Thereby, even if the lottery results of the special symbols are the same, different symbol confirmation times can be set.

Here, for example, when the lottery result of a special symbol is a big hit and the latent probability state is set during the symbol confirmation period, a long time (for example, 150 seconds) is selected as the symbol confirmation time. , Since the period in which the latent state is set can be lengthened, it can be advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the longer the symbol confirmation time is selected, the smaller the number of games per unit time (the number of special symbol lottery), which is disadvantageous to the player.

Further, of the second special symbol (special diagram 2) when the latent state is set during the period in which the special symbol indicating that the lottery result of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) is a big hit is stopped and displayed. In the latent state game (RUSH game) in which the lottery is executed, when the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a small hit or a miss, a long symbol confirmation time is selected, and a predetermined latent state is selected. Since the number of special figure 2 lottery that can be executed during the period (the symbol confirmation period of special figure 1) is reduced, it is disadvantageous to the player.

In this way, since the degree of advantage of the set symbol determination period can be changed according to the lottery result of the special symbol, it is possible to provide the player with a novel playability.

In the present embodiment, by changing the symbol determination period of the special symbol, the period in which the latent state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is set is changed, and the game is executed during the latent state. By varying the number of special symbol lottery, the degree of advantage provided to the player is different, but other configurations may be used, for example, a big hit in a special symbol lottery. Only when the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol indicating that the player has won is longer than the predetermined period, the player may be configured to be given a privilege to display a preferable image, or the music played during the jackpot game may be given. The selection operation may be configured to be feasible during the symbol determination period.

Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the contents of the time saving / probability variation 2 table 202ac2 will be described. FIG. 94 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving / probability variation 2 table 202ac2 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 94, the time reduction / probability variation 2 table 202ac2 has a variation pattern corresponding to the special figure 1 with respect to the time reduction / probability variation table 202f2 (see FIG. 19A) of the first embodiment described above. They differ in that they have different lengths. Other than that, it is the same as the time saving / probability variation table 202f2 (see FIG. 19A). The detailed description of the same element will be omitted.

That is, in the present embodiment, the latent probability state is set during the stop display period (symbol confirmation period) of the special symbol when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery (lottery of special figure 1) during the probability change state. Therefore, the variation display period of the special figure 1 in the probabilistic state is configured to be shorter than that of the first embodiment.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 95. FIG. 95 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 95, in the second embodiment, the probability variation counter 203aa is provided in place of the probability variation flag 203g, the special figure 1 symbol determination flag 203ab, and the special figure 2 The difference is that the symbol 203ac, the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad, and the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae are added. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

The probability variation counter 203aa is a counter for continuing the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed in the high probability state (latent state, probability variation state) of the special symbol, and is a period during which the special symbol lottery is executed with high probability. It is for showing.

The probability variation counter 203aa is a value defined according to the winning jackpot type at the timing when the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON in the jackpot end processing (see S2312 in FIG. 54) of the first embodiment described above. 92) is set, the value is referred to in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98) (S451 in FIG. 98), and the jackpot lottery according to the value set in the probability variation counter 203aa is performed. It is executed (see S403 and S404 in FIG. 98). It is also referred to when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the same manner (see S953 in FIG. 102).

Then, the value is decremented by 1 at the timing when the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol (Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2) has elapsed, and is reset to 0 at the timing when the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol won by the jackpot has elapsed. ..

The special figure 1 symbol confirmation flag 203ab is a flag for indicating that the first special symbol (special figure 1) is stopped and displayed, and when it is set to on, the stop display of the special figure 1 is displayed. It indicates that it is during the period (during the symbol confirmation period). This special symbol 1 symbol confirmation flag 203ab is set to on (see S2802 in FIG. 100) in the first special symbol determination period setting process (see S852 in FIG. 100), and the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (see FIG. 99). See S257). Then, when it is determined that the symbol determination period has elapsed (S853: Yes in FIG. 99), it is set to off.

The special figure 2 symbol confirmation flag 203ac is a flag for indicating that the second special symbol (special figure 2) is stopped and displayed, and when it is set to on, the stop display of the special figure 2 is displayed. It indicates that it is during the period (during the symbol confirmation period). This special figure 2 symbol fixing flag 203ac sets the type of the target special symbol from the first special symbol (special figure 1) to the second special symbol (special figure) with respect to the above-mentioned special figure 1 symbol fixing flag 203ab. The only difference is that it has been changed to 2), and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad and the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ac are counters for measuring the symbol fixing period of the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special figure 2). , When the first special symbol (special diagram 1) or the second special symbol (special diagram 2) 1 is stopped and displayed, a value indicating the current symbol determination period is set in the corresponding counter. Then, in the process during the fixed time (see S860 in FIG. 101) that is periodically executed, the values of the counters are subtracted, and the values of the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad and the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ac become 0. In this case, the process of ending the symbol determination period of the special symbol is executed.

In the second embodiment, different symbol determination periods are set according to the type for showing the lottery result of the special symbol (see FIGS. 92 and 93). Then, the latent state is set as the game state during this symbol determination period.

Next, the information stored in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 96, in the RAM 223 of the second embodiment, in addition to the electrical configuration of the first embodiment described above, the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa, the special figure 2 confirmation counter 223ab, and the remaining confirmation time information storage area The difference is that 223ac and the confirmation flag 223ad are added.

The special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa is a counter for measuring a period (symbol confirmation period) for stopping and displaying the first special symbol, and is a symbol confirmation period of the first special symbol (special figure 1) from the main control device 110. When a confirmation command including information for indicating the above is received, the value corresponding to the symbol confirmation period of the special figure 1 is set.

The value set in the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa is periodically subtracted by various counter update processes 2 (see FIG. 111) executed every 1 millisecond. In the second embodiment, the latent state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is configured to be set during the symbol determination period of the special symbol (first special symbol). 1 By managing the value of the confirmation counter 223aa, it is possible to set the remaining period information indicating the remaining period in which the latent probability state is continuously set.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the small hit of the second special symbol is won during the symbol confirmation period of the special figure 1 (during the latent state game), the value of the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa during the small hit game. Is configured to interrupt the process of subtracting. Therefore, since the symbol determination period of the special figure 1 is not subtracted while the small hit game is being executed, the lottery of the second special symbol can be appropriately executed during the symbol determination period.

In addition to the configuration of the second embodiment described above, a process of accumulating the period during which the subtraction process of the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa is suspended may be provided. Specifically, a small hit game counter is provided to measure the period during which the small hit game is being executed, and the small hit game counter is used to continuously set the small hit game during the latent state. It may be configured to calculate the cumulative period of It may be configured to calculate the cumulative period during the small hit game in the latent state continuously set by using the medium counter.

In this way, by calculating the cumulative interruption information accumulating the period during which the subtraction process of the symbol determination period of Special Figure 1 is interrupted, the result of the current latent state game (RUSH game) is notified to the player. Can be done. Further, as a detailed game result of the latent state game (RUSH game), the cumulative number of acquired balls acquired during the latent state game (RUSH game), the cumulative number of small hits won, and the above-mentioned interruption accumulation Based on the information and the game result indicating whether or not there are more benefits acquired than the design value (or more than the past history), and whether or not the number of balls acquired is large for the number of small hits won. It may be configured to notify the player of the game result shown and the game result indicating whether or not the interruption cumulative information is long with respect to the number of winning small hits. Further, it may be configured to simply notify the cumulative number of acquired balls, the cumulative number of small hits, and the cumulative interruption information.

The special figure 2 confirmation counter 223ab is a counter for measuring a period (symbol confirmation period) for stopping and displaying the second special symbol, and is a symbol confirmation period of the second special symbol (special figure 2) from the main control device 110. When a confirmation command including information for indicating the above is received, the value corresponding to the symbol confirmation period of the special figure 2 is set. The specific contents are the same as those of the above-mentioned special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa, except that the measurement target is changed to the symbol confirmation period of special figure 1 and the symbol confirmation period of special figure 2 is set. The explanation is omitted.

The remaining fixed time information storage area 223ac determines the remaining time (remaining fixed time) of the symbol fixed period at the time when the subtraction process of the symbol fixed period of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is interrupted (temporary stop of special figure 1). It is a data area for storing the remaining fixed time information to be shown. In the second embodiment, an effect mode for restarting the subtraction process of the symbol confirmation period is set based on the remaining confirmation time information stored in the remaining confirmation time information storage area 223ac. As a result, it is possible to predict the period until the latent state ends by grasping the effect mode executed when the small hit game ends and the subtraction process of the symbol determination period is restarted.

When it is determined that the temporary stop related command has been received in the command determination process 2 (see S4162 in FIG. 106) of the voice lamp control device 113 in the remaining fixed time information storage area 223ac (S4219: Yes in FIG. 106). The remaining fixed time information (period A to period C) set in the temporary stop-related process 2 (see S4253 in FIG. 108) to be executed is stored (see S4956, S4958, and S4959 in FIG. 108). Then, it is read when setting the effect mode for resuming the subtraction process of the symbol determination period in the restart process (see S4952 in FIG. 109) executed in the temporary stop-related process 2 (see S4253 in FIG. 108). It is issued (see S5002 and S5052 in FIG. 109) and is referred to when determining an additional effect type (see S5003 and S5053 in FIG. 109).

Since the information for indicating the remaining period of the latent state game is notified when various notification conditions are satisfied in this way, the remaining period of the symbol determination period, that is, the latent state game is It is possible to acquire information indicating the remaining period that can be executed by grasping the production mode of various effects executed during the latent state. Therefore, the player can be made to pay close attention to the effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the second embodiment, the remaining period of the symbol determination period, that is, the remaining period during which the latent state game can be executed is divided into predetermined ranges, and the remaining period information for indicating the divided ranges is provided by the player. By configuring to notify the player, the player is configured to roughly grasp the remaining period of the latent state game and to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting the specific remaining period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the player may be configured to notify the player of the specific remaining period in seconds.

The confirmation flag 223ad is a flag for indicating that the special symbol is in the stop display period (symbol confirmation period), and is set to ON when the special symbol is in the stop display period (symbol confirmation period). The flag. The confirmation flag 223ad is configured to be set to ON even if any of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) is in the symbol confirmation period. There is.

The confirmation flag 223ad is executed when it is determined that the symbol confirmation related command has been received in the command determination process 2 (see S4152 in FIG. 106) of the voice lamp control device 113 (S4254: Yes in FIG. 106). It is set to on in related processing (see S4255 in FIG. 110) (see S5077 in FIG. 110). Then, when it is determined in the temporary stop-related process 2 (see S4253 in FIG. 108) that the special figure 1 temporary stop command has been received (see S4951 in FIG. 108), the fluctuation state of the special figure 1 is during the symbol determination period. It is referred to to determine whether or not it is (see S4953 in FIG. 108). Further, when it is determined that the special figure 1 restart command has been received in the restart process (S4952 in FIG. 109) executed in the temporary stop-related process 2 (see S4253 in FIG. 108), it is also determined (S5001: Yes in FIG. 109). , It is referred to in order to determine whether or not the fluctuation state of the special figure 1 is in the symbol fixing period (see S5051 in FIG. 109).

As described above, in the second embodiment, at the time when the small hit is won by the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) (when the small hit game is executed) or at the time when the small hit game is completed. It is determined whether the fluctuation state of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is in the fluctuation display period or the symbol confirmation period, and based on the determination result, the special figure 1 is temporarily stopped (variation display period, It is configured to set the processing when the subtraction of the symbol fixing period is interrupted) and the effect mode when restarting the special figure 1 (restarting the subtraction of the variable display period and the symbol fixing period).

With this configuration, processing is appropriately executed regardless of the fluctuation state of the first special symbol (special figure 1) at the timing when the small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2). can do.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the second embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 to 105. The control process of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment replaces the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 32) with respect to the control process of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment described above. (See FIG. 97), instead of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34), the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see FIG. 98), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 38). The second special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see FIG. 102) and the second special symbol variation stop process instead of the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (see FIG. 99) and the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 40). The second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (see FIG. 103) is replaced with (see FIG. 45), and the special figure 2 disengagement stop process 2 (see FIG. 105) is executed instead of the special figure 2 disengagement stop process (see FIG. 46). The difference is that the first special symbol fixing period setting process (see FIG. 100) and the second special symbol fixing period setting process (see FIG. 104) are newly added. Other than that, the same processing is executed. The same processing is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, among the contents of the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the second embodiment, the points that are significantly different from the first embodiment described above will be briefly described. In the first embodiment described above, the latent state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is configured to be set during the variable display period of one of the special symbols (special figure 1). More specifically, in the state where the probabilistic state is set, the latent state is set during the variable display period of the special symbol won by the jackpot, and the latent state game (RUSH game) is played until the variable display period ends. It was configured to execute and execute the jackpot game immediately after the variable display period ended. As a result, it is possible for the player to continuously perform two different privilege games (a game in which a small hit occurs frequently in a latent state and a big hit game), and the player can play many games in a short period of time. It was possible to give the privilege of.

Further, since the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed in the state before the jackpot game is executed, the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed with peace of mind. In other words, even if the game result on the first half side is not good, by setting the big hit game, which generally gives the player a larger privilege than the small hit game, on the second half side of two consecutive privilege games. , It was possible to enthusiastically acquire benefits in the game (big hit game) executed on the latter half side.

In addition, since the latent state game (RUSH game) is configured to be performed during the execution of the jackpot fluctuation, it is possible to set in advance the period during which the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed. can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed for an unexpectedly long time and the privilege is excessively given to the player.

In addition, the period during which the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed varies according to the fluctuation pattern selected when the jackpot is won. In other words, since it is configured to determine whether or not the jackpot game is executed and the length of the game period of the latent state game (RUSH game) by one lottery of the special symbol, the latent state game ( The processing load of the main control device 110 can be reduced as compared with the case where the processing using the dedicated selection table is executed in order to preset the length of the game period of the RUSH game).

However, in the configuration of the first embodiment described above, since the gaming period of the latent state game (RUSH game) is determined only by the fluctuation pattern (variable time) of the special symbol, the latent state game In order to prepare a plurality of game periods of (RUSH game), it is necessary to prepare a plurality of fluctuation patterns (variation times) in advance, which may put pressure on the data area for storing the fluctuation patterns.

Therefore, in the second embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the first embodiment described above, the period during which the special symbol is stopped and displayed (symbol confirmation period) is also the period during which the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed. In addition, the length of the symbol determination period is different depending on the symbol type based on the lottery result of the special symbol.

With this configuration, the game period of the latent state game (RUSH game) can be set by adding (combining) the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the symbol confirmation period, so that the latent state can be set. It is possible to set a plurality of patterns for the game period of the game (RUSH game) with a small amount of data.

Further, even in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) during the latent state game (RUSH game), a different symbol confirmation period is set according to the lottery result, so that it is set. Depending on the symbol determination period, the number of lottery of the special figure 2 executed during the predetermined latent state game (RUSH game) period (variable display time of the special figure 1) can be made different.

That is, in the lottery of the first special symbol that sets the game period of the latent state game (RUSH game), it is desired that a longer symbol confirmation period is set, and the latent state game (RUSH game). In the second special symbol lottery that is repeatedly executed during the game, it is a game that requires a shorter symbol determination period to be set, and the novelty is that different lottery results are desired depending on the special symbol type that is the target of the lottery. It is possible to provide a player with a certain playability.

Further, in the second embodiment, a process for shifting the high-probability state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state (subtraction process of the time reduction counter 203f) is executed at the start of the change of the special symbol, and the high-probability state of the special symbol is executed. Is configured to be executed at the end of the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol (subtraction process of the probability variation counter 203aa) for shifting to the low probability state, and the high probability state of the special symbol is set. When the number of fluctuations (lottery) of the special symbol reaches the predetermined number of times (50 times), the high probability state of the special symbol is shifted to the low probability state, and the special symbol is set in the high probability state. When the number of fluctuations (number of lottery) of the symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (50 times), the high-probability state of the normal symbol can be changed to the low-probability state.

That is, when the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set and the number of fluctuations (lottery count) of the special symbol reaches 50 times, the fluctuation (50th variation). ) Is started, the gaming state shifts to the latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), and the timing when the fluctuation (50th fluctuation) ends (end of symbol confirmation period). At times), the gaming state can be changed to the normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol).

With this configuration, even if the jackpot is not won, the latent state can be set only for a predetermined specific period (50th fluctuation period (including the symbol confirmation period)). , It is possible to make it easier for the player to experience the latent state game (RUSH game).

First, with reference to FIG. 97, the special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S154) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation processing 2 (S154). The special symbol variation stop process 2 (S154) adds the processes of S251 and S252 to the special symbol variation process (S154) in the above-described first embodiment, and adds the processes of S251 and S252 to the first special symbol variation stop process (S207). The difference is that the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S263) is executed instead of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257) and the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S213).

In the special symbol variation processing 2 (S154), when it is determined that the value of the special diagram 1 variation time counter 203m is 0 in the processing of S204 (S204: No), the special symbol 1 symbol determination in progress flag 203ab is turned on. It is determined whether it is set (S251). When it is determined that the special figure 1 symbol determination in progress flag 203ab is set to ON (S251: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257) is executed, and the process proceeds to S209. The details of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S257) will be described later with reference to FIG. 99. On the other hand, in the process of S251, when it is determined that the special figure 1 symbol determination in progress flag 203ab is set to off (S251: No), the first special symbol change start process (S208) is executed, and S209 Move to processing.

When it is determined in the above-mentioned processing of S206 that the value of the fluctuation time counter 203m in FIG. 1 is not 0 (greater than 0) (S206: No), or when the processing of S208 and S257 is executed, the special feature is next. FIG. 2 It is determined whether the value of the fluctuation time counter 203n is larger than 0 (S209). When it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n is not larger than 0 (0) (S209: No), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 symbol fixing flag 203ac is set to ON. (S252).

In the processing of S252, when it is determined that the special figure 2 symbol fixing flag 203ac is not set to ON (S252; No), that is, by the processing of S209 and S252, the present is the second special symbol (special drawing 2). If it is determined that neither the variation display nor the symbol confirmation period is in effect, the second special symbol variation start process is executed in order to newly start the variation of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) (S210), and then the book. End the process. Since the processing content of the second special symbol change start processing (S210) is the same as that of the first embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, in the process of S252, when it is determined that the special figure 2 symbol fixing flag 203ac is set to ON (S252: Yes), that is, the present is during the symbol fixing period of the second special symbol (special figure 2). If it is determined that the above is the case, the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S263) is executed, and this process is terminated. The details of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S263) will be described later with reference to FIG. 103.

Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S356) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S356). In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S356), the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is larger than 0 in place of the process of S402 with respect to the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) in the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the process (S451) for determining whether or not the product is executed is executed.

That is, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, when the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the high probability state of the special symbol is continued until the jackpot of the special symbol is won. The probability variation flag 203g was used to indicate that it is in a high probability state, but in the second embodiment, as a condition for ending the high probability state of the special symbol, the jackpot winning of the special symbol (first end condition) is used. In addition, it has a second end condition that is satisfied when the number of fluctuations (number of lottery) of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times). Therefore, the probability variation counter 203aa is used to measure the number of fluctuations (number of lottery) of the special symbol during the period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set. This probability variation counter 203aa is for measuring the number of fluctuations (number of lottery) of the special symbol until the above-mentioned second end condition is satisfied, and the value is updated based on the execution of the special symbol lottery. It is configured to be.

Even if the configuration is other than the present embodiment, it may be any configuration as long as it can determine whether or not the above-mentioned second end condition is satisfied. For example, the probability variation flag 203 g used in the first embodiment and the second embodiment are used. The probability variation counter 203aa used in the embodiment may be used, or a variation count counter for always measuring the variation count (lottery count) of the special symbol regardless of the gaming state is provided, and the setting status of the probability variation flag 203g and the setting status of the probability variation flag 203g are provided. It may be configured to determine the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the probabilistic state based on the number of updates of the fluctuation count counter.

Further, in the second embodiment, the number of changes of the special symbol, that is, the number of changes of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the number of changes of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are added to the total number of times. The end condition (second end condition) for ending the probabilistic state is set, but it is not limited to this, and only the number of changes (number of lottery) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is measured. FIG. 1 A fluctuation count counter and a special figure 2 fluctuation counter that measures only the fluctuation count (lottery count) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are provided, and the fluctuation count (lottery count) of each special symbol is provided. It may be configured to set each end condition (end condition for ending the probability change state).

Further, in the second embodiment, as the end condition for ending the high probability state (for example, the probabilistic state) of the special symbol, in addition to the first end condition based on the jackpot winning of the special symbol, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol The second end condition is set based on (number of lottery times), but other end conditions may be set. For example, the lottery result of the special symbol is a specific lottery result other than the big hit (for example, a small hit). A third end condition that is satisfied when the number of times the game has reached a predetermined number of times may be set, and further, the third end condition is determined by the lottery result of the first special symbol, the lottery result of the second special symbol, and the lottery result. May be set for each.

In addition, a timekeeping counter is provided to measure the time when the high probability state of the special symbol is set, and the fourth end condition that is satisfied when the timekeeping counter clocks the predetermined time and the high probability state of the special symbol are set. A fifth end condition that can be established based on the lottery result of the ordinary symbol executed in the state of being executed and the number of lottery may be provided.

Further, when any of the plurality of termination conditions described above is satisfied, the timing for shifting the high-probability state of the special symbol to the low-probability state is set to a timing other than the timing used in the second embodiment. It is also good, for example, immediately before starting the lottery of the special symbol, immediately after the lottery of the special symbol is executed, the timing of starting the fluctuation of the special symbol, or the predetermined time after the fluctuation of the special symbol is started (for example,). The timing when 5 seconds have passed, the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol has stopped, the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 second) has elapsed since the special symbol was stopped and displayed, and the stop display period of the special symbol (design confirmed). It may be configured to shift at any timing of the end timing of the period).

By providing a plurality of end conditions for ending the high-probability state of the special symbol and a timing for ending the high-probability state of the special symbol when the end condition is satisfied, it is special for the player. Since it is possible to make it difficult to understand how long the high-probability state of the symbol will continue and at what timing (at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, at the stop of fluctuation, at the end of the symbol confirmation period), the player is nervous. It is possible to play a game while giving a feeling.

Since the other processes of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S356) are the same as those of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257), which is one of the processes in the special symbol variation process 2 (S154) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. Will be explained. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S257). The first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S257) is a process (S851 to S858) executed during the symbol determination period of the special symbol with respect to the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S207) in the above-described first embodiment. , S860) is different from the point that the content of the reset process when the first special symbol (special figure 1) won by the jackpot is stopped and displayed is different. Since other processes are the same as the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S207), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, returning to FIG. 97, the conditions under which the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257 in FIG. 99) is executed will be described. In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S257 in FIG. 99), a process of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol, a process of setting a period for stopping and displaying the special symbol (symbol confirmation period), and a process of setting the set symbol confirmation. The process of measuring the period and various execution processes corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol after the symbol determination period has elapsed are configured to be executed.

Therefore, in the process of S206 of FIG. 97, that is, the timing of stopping the change of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the process of determining whether or not it is the timing to end the change of the first special symbol (special figure 1). (The value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is 0) (S206: Yes in FIG. 97), and the processing of S251, that is, the present is the first special symbol (special figure 1). When it is determined that the stop display of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is being performed (the special figure 1 symbol confirmation flag 203ab is set to on) in the process of determining whether or not the stop display is in progress. (S251: Yes in FIG. 97) is executed.

Returning to FIG. 99, the explanation will be continued. In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S257), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 finalizing flag 203ab is set to ON (S851). Here, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 has elapsed and the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257) is executed in order to stop and display the special figure 1, that is, in the process of S206 of FIG. 97. When the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S257) is executed because the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter is determined to be 0, the special figure 1 confirmation flag 203ab is not set to ON. , It is determined in the process of S851 that the special figure 1 symbol fixing flag 203ab is not set to on (set to off) (S8511: No), and the first special symbol fixing period setting process is executed (S852). ).

In the first special symbol confirmation period setting process (S852), the process is executed to set the period (symbol confirmation period) for stopping and displaying the special symbol. Here, with reference to FIG. 100, the first special symbol determination period setting process, which is one of the processes in the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. (S852) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol determination period setting process (S852). In the first special symbol confirmation period setting process (S852), the process of setting the confirmation time (symbol confirmation period) and setting the command to be transmitted to the first symbol display device 37, and the first special symbol (special symbol) of this time. When the lottery result of 1) is a big hit, the process for shifting the high-probability state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state is executed.

In the second embodiment, as a condition for shifting the high-probability state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state (time-saving end condition), when the jackpot of the special symbol is won (first time-saving end condition), the normal symbol is used. When the number of changes in the special symbol (number of lottery) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) in the state where the high probability state of is continuously set (second time reduction end condition), two time reduction ends. If the condition is satisfied and the above-mentioned first time reduction end condition is satisfied, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set at the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed (the start timing of the symbol confirmation period), and the second When the two-time reduction end condition is satisfied, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol is started (the timing when the lottery of the special symbol is executed). ..

In this way, multiple conditions (time-saving end conditions) that trigger the transition of the high-probability state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state are provided, and the transition timing to the low-probability state is different depending on the established time-saving end condition. By configuring to, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set at what timing for the player playing the game in the game state (time saving state, probability change state) in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. Since it is possible to make it difficult to predict whether or not the game will shift to the game state (normal state, latent state), it is possible to always pay attention to the game content and provide a game that does not get tired.

In the second embodiment, the state of the normal symbol is changed according to the above-mentioned contents, but other configurations may be used, for example, immediately before starting the lottery of the special symbol or the special symbol. Immediately after the lottery is executed, the timing to start the fluctuation of the special symbol, the timing to elapse a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, the timing to stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, etc. , It is configured to shift at any timing of the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 second) has elapsed from the stop display of the special symbol or the end timing of the stop display period (symbol confirmation period) of the special symbol. May be.

In the first special symbol confirmation period setting process (S852), first, a value indicating the confirmation time (symbol confirmation time) corresponding to the stopped symbol is set in the special figure 1 confirmation time counter 203ad (S2801). In the second embodiment, the fixed time corresponds to each type selected in various tables (big hit type selection 2 table 202aa, small hit type selection 2 table 202ab, loss type selection table ad) used in the special symbol lottery. Since (symbol confirmation period) is specified, a value indicating the confirmation time (symbol confirmation period) corresponding to the type stopped and displayed this time is set in the special figure 1 confirmation time counter 203ad. Specifically, for example, if the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot and the jackpot type selected using the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa (see FIG. 92) is the jackpot A3, it is confirmed. Since 150 seconds is specified as the time (design confirmation period), a value indicating 150 seconds is set in the special figure 1 confirmation time counter 203ad.

Next, the special figure 1 symbol determination flag 203ab is set to on (S2802), and it is determined whether the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to on (S2803). When it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON (S2803: Yes), that is, it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol for which the confirmation time (symbol confirmation time) is set is a jackpot. If so, the value of the time saving counter 203f is reset in order to shift the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state (S2804). On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is not set to ON (S2803: No), the processing of S2804 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2805. As a result, only when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the low probability state of the normal symbol can be set at the timing of stopping and displaying the special symbol.

In addition, for example, when the jackpot of the special symbol is won (first time reduction end condition), the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (number of lottery) is a predetermined number of times (the number of lottery) in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is continuously set. For example, when the time (50 times) is reached (second time reduction end condition) and when the two time reduction end conditions are satisfied based on the same special symbol lottery, it is determined whether or not the first time reduction end condition is satisfied. Since the process of determining whether or not the second time-saving end condition is satisfied is prioritized over the process of performing, the special symbol jackpot is won when setting the symbol determination period of the special symbol. Even in this case, the processing of S2804 will be skipped.

After executing the process of S2803 or S2804, it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is larger than 0 in the process of S2805 (S2805). When it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203aa is larger than 0 (S2805: Yes), a state command indicating the latent probability state is set (S2806), and the process proceeds to S2808. On the other hand, in the process of S2805, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is 0 (S2805: No), a state command indicating a normal state is set (S2807), and the process proceeds to the process of S2808. After executing the process of S2806 or S2807, the special figure 1 confirmation command is set (S2808). Next, the fluctuation of the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S2809), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 99, the explanation will be continued. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S851 that the special figure 1 symbol fixing flag 203ab is set to ON (S851: Yes), that is, the present is during the symbol fixing period of the first special symbol (special figure 1). If it is determined that there is, the process of S852 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S853. In the special symbol variation process 2 (see S154 in FIG. 97), it is determined that the special figure 1 confirming flag 203ab is set to ON (S251: Yes in FIG. 97), and the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (see S154 in FIG. 97). When (see S257 in FIG. 99) is executed, it is determined that the special figure 1 symbol determination in progress flag 203ab is set to ON in the process of S851.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad is 0 (S853). That is, it is determined whether or not the present is the timing when the symbol determination period of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) has elapsed. Here, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 confirmation time counter 203ad is not 0 (1 or more), that is, it is determined that the present is in the symbol confirmation period of the first special symbol (special figure 1). In the case (S853: No), the process during the fixed time (S860) is executed, and the present process is terminated. This fixed time processing (S860) executes a process of updating the elapsed time of the symbol fixed period, or updates the elapsed time of the symbol fixed period that has been temporarily stopped based on the execution of the small hit game. The process for resuming the process is executed, and the detailed contents thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 101.

On the other hand, in the process of S853, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad is 0 (S853: Yes), that is, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the fixed time (design fixed period). , Special figure 1 symbol fixing flag 203ab is set to off (S854). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is larger than 0 (S855). When it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is larger than 0 (S855: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is subtracted by 1 (S856). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is 0 (S855: Yes), the processing of S856 is skipped and the process proceeds to S857. In the process of S857, a state command corresponding to the values of the time saving counter 203f and the probability variation counter 203aa is set (S857).

By executing the process of S856 described above, in the present embodiment, after the stop display period of the special symbol has elapsed (after the symbol determination period has elapsed), the process of subtracting the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is executed and subtracted. When the value of the subsequent probability variation counter 203aa becomes 0, the high probability state of the special symbol is configured to shift to the low probability state. As a result, the probability variation end condition (condition for shifting the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state) that is satisfied when the number of fluctuations (lottery number) of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times) is satisfied. In this case, the low probability state of the special symbol is set after the stop display period of the special symbol has elapsed, so that the special symbol is high during the variable display period of the target special symbol and during the symbol confirmation period. It can be a stochastic state. Therefore, for example, even if the above-mentioned probability change end condition is satisfied due to the change (lottery) of the first special symbol, the probability state of the special symbol is high during the change display period of the first special symbol and the symbol confirmation period. The second special symbol change (lottery) can be executed in the state where is set.

To specifically explain the content of the state command set in the process of S857 described above, when the value of the time saving counter 203f is larger than 0 (when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set), the probability variation counter When the value of 203aa is larger than 0, a state command indicating that the gaming state is in the probabilistic state is set, and when the value of the probabilistic counter 203aa is 0, it indicates that the gaming state is in the time saving state. The status command is set. Further, when the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 (when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set) and the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is larger than 0, the gaming state is the latent state. When the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is 0, the state command indicating that the gaming state is the normal state is set.

Further, in the process of S857, when the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is larger than 0 (1 or more), the value of the probability variation counter 203aa, that is, the residual probability variation count command is set as information indicating the residual probability variation count. The state command and the residual probability variation number command set in the process of S857 are output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (see S2201 of FIG. 52) of the main process (see FIG. 52) of the main control device 110. Will be done. The voice lamp control device 113 receives various commands output from the main control device 110, and executes a process corresponding to the command received in the command determination process 2 (see S4162 in FIG. 106). As a result, the current gaming situation can be appropriately determined on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

As described above, in the second embodiment, when the first time saving end condition (condition that is satisfied when a big hit is won) is satisfied, the high probability state of the normal symbol is low-probability at the stop display timing of the special symbol. If the second time reduction end condition (condition that is satisfied according to the number of changes in the special symbol (number of lottery)) is satisfied after shifting to the state, the high probability state of the normal symbol is lowered at the start timing of the change of the special symbol. When the probability state is entered and the probability change end condition (the first probability change end condition that is satisfied when a big hit is won, the second probability change end condition that is satisfied according to the number of changes of the special symbol (lottery number)) is satisfied. Is configured to shift the high-probability state of the special symbol to the low-probability state at the end timing of the stop display period (symbol confirmation period) of the special symbol.

With this configuration, the period in which the latent state that is advantageous to the player as the game state is set can be different depending on the time-saving end condition that is established. As a result of the lottery of special symbols, it is possible not only to expect a big hit or not, but also to expect that the length of the period in which an advantageous gaming state is set becomes longer.

Next, the special figure 1 fixed period end command is set (S858), and the same processing as the processing of S801 to S805 in the above-described first embodiment is executed. Next, the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h and the probability variation counter 203aa are reset (S859), the jackpot middle flag 203o is set to ON (S807), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 101, a process during a fixed time (S257 in FIG. 99), which is one process in the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257 in FIG. 99) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. S860) will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the contents of the processing (S860) during the fixed time.

In the process during the fixed time (S860), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S2901). This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to be turned on when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol and the lottery result is stopped and displayed (see S1602 in FIG. 46). Then, during the period during which the small hit game is being executed, the first special symbol variation stop process 2 is not executed in the process of S201 of the special symbol variation process 2 (see S154 of FIG. 97). That is, in the process of S2901 of the process during the fixed time (see S860 of FIG. 101), it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON only after the small hit game is completed. Only when the variation processing 2 (see S154 in FIG. 97) is executed.

Therefore, if it is determined in the processing of S2901 that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S2901: Yes), the special figure 1 restart command is set (S2902), and the special figure 1 temporary stop flag is set. Set 203v to off (S2903) and shift to S2904. That is, in the process of S2901 when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S2901: Yes), the small hit game is executed because the small hit game is finished. The process of S2902 and S2903 is executed in order to restart the update process of the symbol determination period that has been temporarily stopped.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2901 that the temporary stop flag 203v in FIG. 1 is not set to on (set to off) (S2901: No), the processing of S2902 and S2903 is skipped and S2904 is performed. Move to the processing of.

In the process of S2904, the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad is decremented by 1 and updated (S2904), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S2905), and the present process is terminated.

Next, the second special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S953) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 102. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S953). In the second special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S953), the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is changed to the process of S1002 with respect to the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905 in FIG. 40) in the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the process (S1051) for determining whether the value is larger than 0 is executed. Since other processes are the same as the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S903), detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, the content of the process executed in S1051 described above is the same as the content executed in S451 of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98) described above, and thus the details thereof. The explanation is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 103, regarding the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S263), which is one of the processes in the special symbol variation process (S154) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. explain. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S263). The second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S263) adds the processes of S1551 to S1563 to the second special symbol variation stop process (see S213 in FIG. 45) in the first embodiment described above, and S1506. The difference is that the process of S1560 is provided instead of the process of S1509 and the process of S1509 and S1510 is deleted. Since other processes are the same as the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S213 in FIG. 45), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S263), the symbol determination period elapses after the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, similarly to the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (see S257 in FIG. 99) described above. The process up to this is executed, and the difference is that the control target is changed from the first special symbol (special figure 1) to the second special symbol (special figure 2). Of the various processes executed in the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S263), the control target is simply the various processes of the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (see S257 in FIG. 99) described above. The detailed description will be omitted for the processing in which the symbol types are different.

In the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S263), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol 2 symbol confirming flag 203ac is set to ON (S1551). If it is determined that the special figure 2 symbol fixing flag 203ac is set to ON (S1551: Yes), the processing of S1552 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1553. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1551 that the special figure 2 symbol fixing flag 203ab is set to off (S1551: No), the second special symbol fixing period setting process (S1552) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 104, the second special symbol which is one of the processes in the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (see S263 in FIG. 103) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. The fixed period setting process (S1552) will be described. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol determination period setting process (S1552). In the second special symbol confirmation period setting process (S1552), the symbol type targeted for the process executed in the above-mentioned first special symbol determination period setting process (see S852 in FIG. 100) is set to the first special symbol. To the second special symbol, the command to be set is the special symbol 2 confirmation command corresponding to the second special symbol, and the symbol type to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the second special symbol. Only the differences are made, and the other processing contents are the same. Therefore, the content of the first special symbol determination period setting process (see S852 in FIG. 100) described above will be referred to, and a detailed description of this process will be omitted.

Returning to FIG. 103, the description will be continued. After executing the process of S1551 or S1552, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae is 0 (S1553), and the value of the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae is not 0 (that is,). When it is determined (S1553: No), the value of the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae is updated (S1562), and the display of the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S1563). ), End this process.

The process of S1563 updates the display of the second special symbol that has already been stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, the symbol is lit and displayed (including a display that blinks at a high speed to the extent that the player recognizes that the symbol is lit) in order to indicate that the special symbol is stopped by the first symbol display device 37. Therefore, in the process of S1563, an instruction for lighting the second special symbol is output to the first symbol display device 37.

In the case of using the configuration in which the special symbol is continuously lit during the symbol determination period as in the present embodiment, for example, the second special symbol determination period setting process (see S1552 in FIG. 104). In the process of S3009, an instruction for stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol (stop display) is output, and at the same time, information indicating a period for stopping and displaying (design confirmation period) is also output, and a predetermined period (symbol confirmation) is output. During the period), the second special symbol may be configured to be lit and displayed in advance. With this configuration, it is not necessary to execute the process for updating the display content of the first symbol display device 37 each time in the process executed in a short cycle, so that the processing load of the main control device 110 Can be reduced.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae is 0 (S1553: Yes), the special figure 2 symbol fixing flag 203ac is set to off (S1554). Next, when it is determined whether the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to on (S1555) and when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to off (S1555: No), the probability variation counter 203aa It is determined whether or not the value of is greater than 0 (S1556).

When it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is larger than 0 (S1556: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is subtracted by 1 (S1557), and the process proceeds to the processing of the SW effective time counter 223h1558. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1555 that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON (S1555: Yes), or when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is 0 in the processing of S1556. (S1556: No) skips the process of S1557 and shifts to the process of S1558.

In the process of S1558, a state command corresponding to the values of the time reduction counter 203f and the probability change counter 203aa is set (S1558), then the special figure 2 fixed period end command is set (S1559), and then the first embodiment described above is performed. The same process of S1501 to S1505 is executed. Here, in the process of S1501, when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is not set to on (set to off) (S1501: No), the special figure 2 off stop process 2 (S1561) is determined. ) Is executed to end this process.

Further, when the processing of S1505 is completed, next, the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to off, the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is reset (S1560), and the same processing of S1507 as that of the first embodiment described above is executed. Then, this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 105, the special figure 2 disengagement stop process 2 (S) which is one of the processes in the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S263) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment ( S1561) will be described. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 disengagement stop process 2 (S1561). The special figure 2 disengagement stop process 2 (S1561) in the second embodiment is different from the special figure 2 disengagement stop process (S1508) in the first embodiment in that the processes S1607 to S1610 are not executed. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 106 to 111, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. The control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment is a command determination process 2 instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 59) for the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment described above. (See FIG. 106), the various counter update processes 2 (see FIG. 111) are executed instead of the various counter update processes (see FIG. 71), and the other processes are the same. Specifically, the processing executed when various commands output by changing the control content executed by the main control device 110 from the first embodiment and the various additions from the second embodiment are performed. A process to update the value of the counter has been added.

First, the command determination process 2 (S4162) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 106. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 2 (S4162). The command determination process 2 (S4162) differs from the command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 60) in the above-described first embodiment in that the processes of S4251 to S4255 are added. Since other processes are the same as the command determination process (S4112) in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the command determination process 2 (S4162) is executed, first, the same processes as S4201 to S4216, which are the same as the command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 60) in the first embodiment described above, are executed. Then, in the process of S4215, when it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S4215: No), then it is determined whether or not the remaining number-related command has been received (S4251). ).

Here, as the command related to the remaining number of times, the remaining time reduction command (set by the process of S603 in FIG. 36) indicating the remaining number of times (the number of remaining fluctuations of the special symbol) in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is continuously set is set. There is a residual probability variation number command (command set by the process of S857 in FIG. 99) indicating the remaining number of times (the number of remaining fluctuations of the special symbol) in which the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set. If it is determined that the command related to the remaining number of times has been received (S4251: Yes), the remaining number of times update process 2 (S4252) is executed, and this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 107, the remaining number update process 2 (S4252), which is one process in the command determination process 2 (S4162) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described. .. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the contents of the remaining number update process 2 (S4252). The remaining number update process 2 (S4252) differs from the remaining number update process (S4218) in the first embodiment described above in that the processes S4851 to S4852 are added. Specifically, it differs in that a process for transmitting a command for displaying the residual probability variation number to the display control device 114 is added.

In the remaining number update process 2 (S4252), first, it is determined whether or not the remaining time reduction command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4801). When it is determined that the remaining time reduction command has been received (S4801: Yes), the display remaining time reduction command corresponding to the command is set (S4802). On the other hand, if it is determined that the command for the number of remaining time reductions has not been received (S4801: No), the process of S4802 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S4851. Next, it is determined whether or not the residual probability variation number command has been received (S4851). When it is determined that the residual probability variation count command has been received (S4851: Yes), the display residual probability variation count command corresponding to the command is set (S4852), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the residual probability variation number command has not been received (S4851: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Returning to FIG. 106, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4251 that the remaining number-related command has not been received (S4251: No), it is determined whether or not the temporary stop-related command has been received (S4219). Here, the temporary stop-related command includes the special figure 1 temporary stop command (see S1603 in FIG. 46) that is set when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v for temporarily stopping the first special symbol is set to ON. And the variable display of the first special symbol that has been temporarily stopped, or the special figure 1 restart command (see S2902 in FIG. 101) that is set when the stop display is restarted. If it is determined that the temporary stop-related command has been received (S4219: Yes), the temporary stop-related process 2 (S4253) is executed, and this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 108, a temporary stop-related process 2 (S4253), which is one process in the command determination process 2 (S4162) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described. .. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the contents of the temporary stop-related process 2 (S4253). The temporary stop-related process 2 (S4253) is different from the temporary stop-related process (S4203) in the first embodiment described above in that a process for calculating the remaining fixed time is added.

In this temporary stop-related process 2 (S4253), when the variation display of the first special symbol or the elapsed time of the stop display is temporarily interrupted (temporary stop), the temporarily stopped first special symbol is displayed. Processing is performed for the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variable display mode or the effect mode corresponding to the stop display mode. In the temporary stop-related process 2 (S4253), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 temporary stop command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4951). If it is determined that the temporary stop command has not been received (S4951: No), the restart process (S4952) is executed and the present process is terminated. The details of the restart process (S4952) will be described later with reference to FIG. 109. On the other hand, in the process of S4951, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop command has been received (S4951: Yes), that is, the variation display of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is performed with the execution of the small hit game, or If it is determined that it is the timing to temporarily stop the stop display, then it is determined whether the confirmation flag 223ad is set to ON (S4953). Here, when it is determined that the confirmation flag 203ab is set to ON (S4953: Yes), the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (during the symbol confirmation period), so that the set symbol confirmation time is set. The remaining time of (the symbol confirmation time of the first special symbol) is calculated (S4954), and the process proceeds to S4955.

In the process of S4954, the value of the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa, that is, the value indicating the remaining time of the symbol confirmation time of the first special symbol is read to calculate the remaining time of the set symbol confirmation time. Next, it is determined whether the remaining time of the symbol determination time calculated in the process of S4954 is less than 2 seconds (S4955). If it is determined that the remaining time is less than 2 seconds (S4955: Yes), a period A indicating that the remaining fixed time is short is set in the remaining fixed time information storage area 223ac (S4956), and the process of S4952 is executed. Then, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4955, when it is determined that the remaining time is not less than 2 seconds (2 seconds or more) (S4955: No), then the remaining time is 2 seconds or more and less than 60 seconds. (S4957). In the process of S4957, when it is determined that the remaining time is 2 seconds or more and less than 60 seconds (S4957: Yes), it is determined that the remaining fixed time information storage area 223ac has a normal remaining fixed time. The indicated period B is set (S4958), the process of S4952 is executed, and the present process is terminated.

When it is determined in the process of S4957 that the remaining time is not less than 60 seconds (60 seconds or more) (S4957: No), it indicates that the remaining fixed time information storage area 223ac has a long remaining fixed time. The period C is set (S4959), the process of S4952 is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4953, when it is determined that the confirmation flag 223ad is set to off (S4953: No), that is, when it is determined that the present is in the variable display period of the first special symbol, The process for calculating the residual fluctuation time of the first special symbol (see S4903 to S4908) executed in the temporary stop-related process of the first embodiment described above (see S4220 in FIG. 67) is executed, and the process of S4952 is executed. Move to. Since the process for calculating the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol (see S4903 to S4908) is the same as that of the first embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 109, a restart process (S4952), which is a process in the temporary stop-related process 2 (S4253) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the contents of the restart process (S4952).

In the second embodiment, in addition to the variable display of the first special symbol (during the variable display period), the second special symbol can be changed (lottery) even during the stop display (during the symbol confirmation period). Since it is configured, when the small hit game is executed based on the lottery result of the second special symbol, the stop display of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped (subtraction of the symbol confirmation period is temporarily suspended). It is configured as follows. Further, at the timing when the small hit game is completed, the stop display of the first special symbol is restarted (the subtraction of the symbol confirmation period is restarted). Therefore, in the second embodiment, the situation of the first special symbol when the variable display or the stop display of the first special symbol is restarted is determined, and the effect mode after the restart is set based on the determination result. It is configured to do.

In the restart process (S4952), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 restart command has been received (S5001). If it is determined that the special figure 1 restart command has not been received (S5001: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 restart command has been received (S5001: Yes), it is determined whether or not the confirmation flag 223ad is set to ON (S5051). When it is determined that the confirmation flag 223ad is set to ON (S5051: Yes), that is, when the timing of receiving the special figure 1 restart command is during the stop display of the first special symbol, the remaining confirmation Based on the reading of the remaining fixed time information stored in the time information storage area 223ac (S5052), the read remaining fixed time information and the additional effect counter 223i, the additional effect type is determined from the additional effect selection 2 table 222aa (). S5053), an additional display effect command corresponding to the additional effect type determined in the process of S5053 is set (S5054), and the information set in the remaining fixed time information storage area 223ac is cleared (S5055). Then, the finalizing flag 223ad is set to off (S5056), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5051, when it is determined that the confirmation flag 223ad is set to off (S5051: No), that is, the timing at which the special figure 1 restart command is received is in the variation display of the first special symbol. In some cases, the same process of S5002 to S5005 as the variable resumption process of the first embodiment described above (S4902 in FIG. 68) is executed, and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 106, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4219 that the temporary stop-related command has not been received (S4219: No), it is determined whether or not the symbol determination-related command has been received (S4254). If it is determined that the symbol confirmation-related command has been received (S4254: Yes), the symbol confirmation-related process (S4255) is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the symbol confirmation related command has not been received (S4254: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S4221), and this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 110, a symbol determination-related process (S4255), which is one process in the command determination process 2 (S4162) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the contents of the symbol determination related process (S4255).

In the symbol confirmation-related processing (S4255), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 confirmation command has been received from the main control device 110 (S5071). When it is determined that the special figure 1 confirmation command has been received (S5071: Yes), the display special figure 1 confirmation command corresponding to the received command is set (S5072). Next, the value corresponding to the received command is set in the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa (S5073), and the process proceeds to S5074. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5071 that the special figure 1 confirmation command has not been received (S5071: No), the processes of S5072 and S5073 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S5074.

In the process of S5074, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 confirmation command has been received (S5074). When it is determined that the special figure 2 confirmation command has been received (S5074: Yes), the special figure 2 confirmation command for display corresponding to the received command is set (S5075), and the value corresponding to the received command is specified. 2 Set to the confirmation counter 223ab (S5076), set the confirmation flag 223ad to ON (S5077), and end this process. On the other hand, in the process of S5074, if it is determined that the special figure 2 confirmation command has not been received (S5074: No), the process of S5075 and S5076 is skipped as it is, the process of S5077 is executed, and this process is terminated. do.

Next, various counter update processes 2 (S4161) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 111. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the contents of various counter update processes 2 (S4161).

In the various counter update processes 2 (S4161), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa is larger than 0 (S5451). When it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa is larger than 0 (S5451: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa is subtracted by 1 (S5452). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa is 0 (S5451: No), the processing of S5452 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S5453. In the process of S5453, it is determined whether or not the value of the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is larger than 0 (S5453). When it is determined that the value of the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is larger than 0 (S5453: Yes), the value of the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is subtracted by 1 (S5454), and the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa And the value of the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is read out (S5455). Next, the value of the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is subtracted from the value of the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa read in the process of S5455 to calculate the remaining time (S5456). Next, the processes of S5407 and S5408 are executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5453, when it is determined that the value of the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is 0 (S5453: No), the processes of S5454 to S5456 and S5407 are skipped, and the process of S5408 is executed. , End this process.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 135. The second embodiment described above is configured so that the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) fluctuate at the same time as in the first embodiment described above (so-called). , Simultaneous fluctuation type), so that a large number of small hit games (RUSH games) can be executed by executing the lottery (variation) of Special Figure 2 during the period when the latent state is set as the game state. Was configured in.

Further, as a condition for setting the latent probability state (a condition for enabling the RUSH game to be executed), the first probability change end that is established when the jackpot is won in the lottery of Special Figure 1 in the state where the probability change state is set. A condition and a second probability change end condition that is satisfied when the number of changes (lottery number) of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (50 times) are set, and if the first probability change end condition is satisfied, a big hit is won. When the period (symbol confirmation period) in which the special symbol (special diagram 1) indicating that the special symbol has been stopped is displayed is in the latent state and the second probability change end condition is satisfied, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be in a latent state during the period (variable display period) and the symbol confirmation period.

In addition, the length of the symbol confirmation period is different depending on the lottery result of the special symbol, and the symbol confirmation period is set longer when the jackpot is won than when the jackpot is not won. It was configured as follows.

In addition, if a big hit is won in the lottery of one special symbol (special figure 1), an invalid lottery that does not win the big hit in the lottery of the other symbol (special figure 2) is executed. It was configured so that the value related to the condition for changing the game state was not updated by this invalid lottery. Specifically, during the period when the jackpot is won in the lottery of special figure 1 (during the variable display period of the special symbol winning the jackpot and during the symbol confirmation period), the lottery of special figure 2 is executed. Even if this is done, the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is configured so as not to be updated (subtracted).

In the second embodiment configured in this way, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the special figure 1 in the state where the probability variation state is set, the period during which the jackpot game for the jackpot winning is executed (variable display). Until the period (period, symbol confirmation period) ends, the value of the probability change counter 203aa will not be updated (subtracted) no matter how many times the fluctuation (lottery) of special figure 2 is executed, so special figure 2 can be relieved. Was able to carry out the fluctuations of.

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the types of probability change end conditions are increased as compared with the above-mentioned second embodiment, and the period in which the latent probability state is set is longer than that of the above-mentioned second embodiment. is doing. Specifically, as the probability change end condition, the probability change end condition (third probability change end condition) is satisfied when a small hit is won in the special figure 1 in the state where the probability change state is set, and the third probability change end condition is satisfied. When the probability change end condition is satisfied, the game state is configured to shift from the probability change state to the latent state when the small hit game is started.

Further, the period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set (value of the probability variation counter 203aa) and the period in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set (value of the time reduction counter 203f) are made the same (for example, "4". ”), When the probability change state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set and the jackpot is not won, the game state shifts from the probability change state to the normal state. It is configured in.

That is, in the third embodiment, while the probabilistic state (high probability state for both special symbol and normal symbol) is set, a small hit is won by the lottery of special figure 1, and the normal symbol is moved to the low probability state. By shifting, the period from the start timing of the small hit game to the setting of the low probability state of the special symbol can be set as the latent state.

With this configuration, it is possible to change the period during which the latent state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is continuously set according to the timing of winning a small hit in the lottery of Special Figure 1. .. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more interested in the lottery result of the special symbol, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not get tired of.

Further, in the third embodiment, when a big hit is won in the final variation in which the probability variation state ends, a variation pattern having a long variation time is easily selected. As a result, even if the final fluctuation of the probabilistic state is reached without winning a small hit, the latent probable state can be set for a long time, so that the player can play the game with expectations until the end. Can be made.

Here, with reference to FIG. 112, the types of benefits given based on the game content of the special figure 1 in the probable change state in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 112 is a schematic diagram summarizing the relationship between the game content and the grant privilege of the special figure 1 game after the probability change state is set. As shown in FIG. 112, in the present embodiment, the probability change state is set in a predetermined period (4 fluctuations of the special symbol) after the end of the jackpot, and the number of fluctuations during the probability change state (after the jackpot). The content of the privilege given to the player is made different according to the number of changes in the special figure) and the lottery result of the special figure.

Specifically, in the first and second special figure 1 fluctuations (special figure 1 lottery) after the probability change state is set, if the lottery result (lottery result of special figure 1) is a big hit, there are many players. In addition to the jackpot game in which the prize ball can be obtained, the period during which the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating that the special figure 1 is a jackpot (symbol confirmation period). ) Is set. In addition, when the lottery result (lottery result of special figure 1) is a small hit, the small hit game is executed based on the lottery result of special figure 1 as the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed. After that, it is stipulated that the period (symbol confirmation period) until the number of special symbol changes after the big hit reaches 4 times is set.

That is, when a small hit is won in the first special figure 1 lottery after the end of the big hit, the timing at which the small hit game is started (the timing at which the first special symbol change is stopped and the small hit game is executed). ) To the end of the fourth special figure change after the end of the jackpot, the latent state game (RUSH game) is set. Therefore, as the period in which the latent state (RUSH state) is set, the longest period can be set, which is the "ultra-long". In addition, if the lottery result (lottery result of special figure 1) is out of the first and second special figure 1 fluctuation (special figure 1 lottery) after the probability change state is set, no privilege is given to the player. Is not given.

In the third special figure 1 fluctuation (special figure 1 lottery) after the probability change state is set, the latent probability state is set under the same conditions as the first and second times after the probability change state is set as described above. It is composed. Here, if the small hit is won, in addition to the small hit game, the period until the end of the fourth special figure change is set as the latent state, so after the above-mentioned probability change state is set. Compared to the case where a small hit is won in the 1st and 2nd special figure 1 fluctuation (special figure 1 lottery), the period in which the latent state is set is shorter.

Further, in the third embodiment, as the number of special figure 1 fluctuations (special figure 1 lottery) after the probabilistic change state is set increases during the probabilistic change state, the fluctuation having a longer fluctuation time when the jackpot is won. It is configured so that the pattern can be easily selected. Therefore, it is easier to lengthen the period in which the latent probability state is set as compared with the case where the jackpot is won in the first and second special figure 1 fluctuations (special figure 1 lottery) after the above-mentioned probability change state is set. be able to.

Next, in the fourth special figure change (special figure lottery) after the probability change state is set, that is, in the special figure final change in the probability change state, the special figure change is started regardless of the result of the special figure lottery. The period from to the end (until after the symbol confirmation period has elapsed) is set as the latent state. In the third embodiment, it is easy to set a long fluctuation time when a big hit is won in the final fluctuation of the special map in the probabilistic state (the fourth special map fluctuation after the probabilistic change state is set). The length of the period in which the latent state is set is "long".

Then, if the jackpot is not won due to the final change of the special figure in the probable change state, the normal state is set after the symbol confirmation period elapses, and the fifth and subsequent special figure lottery is executed.

<Regarding the production display content in the third embodiment>
In the third embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 112, the period in which the latent state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is set differs depending on the transition condition (probability change end condition) that is satisfied. In the probable change state, the possibility that the latent state is set and the suggestion effect (bingo game) for suggesting the timing when the latent state is set to the player are executed. It is composed.

Therefore, with reference to FIGS. 113 to 115, the display contents of the suggestion effect (bingo game) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment will be described. Among the elements displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the same elements as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 113 (a), the display contents of the end screen (ending screen) of the jackpot game in which the probability change state is set will be described. FIG. 113A is a schematic diagram schematically showing a display screen at the end of a big hit. As shown in FIG. 113A, in the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the main display area Dm has the same special figure 1 display area Dm1 and special figure 2 display area as the second embodiment described above. Dm2 and a guide display area Dm3 are formed, and in addition, a special figure 1 hold number display area Dm4 showing the number of reserved balls in special figure 1 and a special figure 2 hold number display area Dm5 showing the number of hold balls in special figure 2. , Are formed.

FIG. 113A shows the end screen of the jackpot game executed based on the special figure 1 jackpot, and shows that the lottery result of the special figure 1 is a jackpot in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. The stop display mode “777” of the third symbol is displayed, and “−” indicating that the special figure 2 variation is not executed is displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2. Further, in the guidance display area Dm3, the character "left-handed" is displayed to indicate that the jackpot game was performed in the left-handed game.

In the third embodiment, the game content (right-handed or left-handed) displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 during the jackpot game is the same as the game content at the time of winning the jackpot, as in the second embodiment described above. It is configured to be. That is, the state shown in FIG. 113 (a) is a big hit won during the left-handed game.

Further, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, a bingo card 820 used in a probabilistic state set after the end of the jackpot game is displayed. Here, the suggestion effect (bingo game) executed in the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, Bingo is used as a suggestion effect to suggest to the player whether or not the latent probability state is set or whether or not the jackpot is won during the period when the probability change state is set. The game is configured to run.

In this bingo game, a bingo card 820 (see FIG. 113 (a)) in which arbitrary numbers are arranged for nine squares (vertical 3 x horizontal 3) is displayed on the jackpot end screen (ending screen). , Numbers are announced based on the lottery of Special Figure 1 executed in the state where the probability change state is set, and the number is announced to the player based on the announced number and the arrangement of the numbers described on the Bingo card 820. An effect suggesting a game result (lottery result of special figure 1) is executed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 113 (b) to 115, display contents (effect contents) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during execution of the bingo game will be described. When the bingo game is started (when the special figure 1 fluctuation in the probability change state is started), the display shown in FIG. 113 (b) is executed. FIG. 113 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents displayed when the special figure 1 variation (first time) is executed after the end of the big hit.

As shown in FIG. 113 (b), when the special figure 1 change (first time) is executed, a display mode indicating that the special figure 1 is changing is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. .. Then, "3" is displayed in the special figure 1 reserved number display area Dm4, and it is subtracted (updated) from the value ("4") shown in FIG. 113 (a) due to the fluctuation of the special figure 1. Shows.

Further, in the lower left area of the main display area Dm, the number "1" is displayed as the lottery result 821 of the bingo game based on the lottery result of this time (special figure 1 fluctuation (first time)), and the lower right area. Displays the remaining number display 822 indicating the remaining number "last 3" of the bingo game. Here, for example, an example of the effect in the case where the special figure 1 fluctuation (fourth time) in the probable change state is a big hit will be described with reference to FIG. 114.

FIG. 114 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the bingo game during the fluctuation of the special figure 1 fluctuation (third time) when the special figure 1 fluctuation (fourth time) in the probability change state is a big hit. , FIG. 114 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents during the change of the special figure 1 change (fourth time). In the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 112, in the final variation of the probabilistic state (special figure 1 variation (fourth time)), the latent state is set at the timing when the variation display of the special figure 1 is started. During the latent state, the latent state game (RUSH game) in which the lottery of the special figure 2 is executed by the right-handed game is executed.

Therefore, in order to have the player immediately perform a right-handed game immediately after the final change of the probability change state is executed (after the symbol confirmation period of the special figure 1 change (third time) has elapsed), the latent state is changed. The effect result (displaying two rows of bingo) for notifying that it is set is before the special figure 1 change (4th time) in which the latent state is set (during the special figure 1 change (3rd time)). It is configured to be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to set the latent probability state in a state in which the player fully understands that the latent probability state is set.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, in the third embodiment, if the big hit or the small hit is not won in the lottery of the special figure 1 in the final change of the probable change state (when it is out of order), it is short. The fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time (1 second) is selected, and the effect result (bingo two-row alignment display) for notifying that the latent state is set in the bingo game is not displayed. .. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the notification to the player that the latent state is actually set for a short time, and to execute the failure effect of the bingo game. Further, when the latent state for a short period of time is set, the guide display area Dm3 does not display that the player is to perform the right-handed game, so that the annoyance to the game can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 114 (a), the description will be continued. In FIG. 114 (a), the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 fluctuation (third time) is performed, and the lottery result “1” of the special figure 1 fluctuation (first time) and the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation (second time) are performed. "8" is displayed on the left side of the main display area Dm as the past history 823, and "5" is displayed as the lottery result 821 this time. Then, in the Bingo card 820, the squares corresponding to "1", "8", and "5" displayed in this bingo game are changed to "cross marks", and two rows of lines are formed and displayed. ..

Further, "double bingo" is displayed as a situation display mode 821 indicating the current situation, and a comment of "super lucky" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. In this way, by notifying the player that the bingo game was successful during the change before the special figure 1 change (4th time) that actually wins the jackpot, the player can be directed. It is possible to provide a period of successful satisfaction and to notify in advance that it is necessary to perform a right-handed game from the next fluctuation.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a comment notifying that the right-handed game is performed from the next fluctuation (a comment notifying that the right-handed game condition is satisfied (the condition for setting the latent state is satisfied)). "It's about to be a right-handed game" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds, but the player is notified in advance of the timing when the latent state is set, that is, the timing when the right-handed game is performed. For example, the remaining period until the end of the special figure 1 fluctuation (third time) (the remaining period obtained by adding the remaining fluctuation display period of the special figure 1 fluctuation (third time) and the symbol fixing period) is calculated. A calculation means may be provided, and information based on the calculation result of the calculation means (information for indicating the residual fluctuation period of the special figure 1 variation (third time)) may be notified to the player.

In the third embodiment, when the ball is entered into the second entry port 640 in a state where the probability variation state is set as the gaming state (when the start condition of FIG. 2 is satisfied), the ball is entered into the second entry opening 640. It is configured so that a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time (0.5 seconds to 1 second) is set regardless of the lottery result. As a result, if the right-handed game is performed in the state where the probability change state is set and the fluctuation (lottery) of the special figure 2 is executed, the probability change state is set for the period during which the latent probability state can be set. Since the left-handed game is extremely short compared to the case where the left-handed game is performed in the state and the fluctuation (lottery) is executed in the special figure 2, the right-handed game in the probable change state can be regarded as a disadvantageous game for the player. .. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an act of intentionally performing an irregular game different from the displayed content in the probabilistic state in which "left-handed" is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 of the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the ball is entered into the second entry port 640 in a state where the probability change state is set as the gaming state (when the start condition of FIG. 2 is satisfied). ) Is configured to set a variation pattern with a short variation time (0.5 seconds to 1 second) regardless of the lottery result, but the variation is not limited to this, and the variation in Special Figure 2 during the probability variation state is not limited to this. The time may be configured as a fluctuation time (for example, 120 seconds) extremely longer than the fluctuation time in FIG. 1.

With this configuration, for example, when the right-handed game is performed in a state where the probability change state is set while ignoring the progress content of the suggestion effect (bingo game) executed by the third symbol display device 81. In addition, since the special figure 2 fluctuation for a long time (for example, 120 seconds) is executed, even if the latent state is set after that (for example, the fluctuation of the special figure 1 fluctuation (fourth time) in which the jackpot is won). Even if the display is started), since the special figure 2 change is being executed, a new latent state game (a game that executes the special figure 2 change while the latent state is set) is newly performed. It can be difficult to execute.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the latent probability state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is set based on the fluctuation period of the special symbol (special figure 1) and the symbol determination period, the latent probability state is set. The longer the period from when is set (the predetermined special figure 1 fluctuation starts) to the end of the executing special figure 2 fluctuation, the longer the period during which the special figure 2 fluctuation in the latent state can be executed (latent probability). The state game period) becomes shorter. Further, when a sufficient time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the setting of the latent probability state in order to surely prevent the special figure 2 fluctuation from being executed in the state where the probability change state is set. Similarly, when the right-handed game is started from, the latent state game period is shortened. Therefore, in order to grasp the timing of executing the right-handed game, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed to the player. You can watch the contents displayed on the screen.

Then, when the right-handed game is performed during the latent state and the special figure 2 variation is executed, the effect display during the RUSH game (latent state game) shown in FIG. 114 (b) is displayed by the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed on the display screen of. FIG. 114 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when the fourth special figure change is a big hit after the end of the big hit (after setting the probability change state). In the present embodiment, as in the second embodiment described above, when the latent state is set, the latent state game (RUSH game) in which the variation (lottery) of the special figure 2 is executed by the right-handed game is performed. That is, in the latent state, the right-handed game is an advantageous game, and the left-handed game is a disadvantageous game.

In the display screen shown in FIG. 114 (b), in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, the guidance display area Dm3 is “right-handed”, and the special figure 1 display area Dm1 is changed to the special figure 1 (4). The display mode indicating that the change of the special figure 2) is in progress, and the display mode indicating that the special figure 2 change is being executed are displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2, and the special figure 1 reserved number display area Dm4 displays the display mode. Is displayed with "0" indicating that there is no reserved number of special figure 1, and "0" indicating that there is no reserved number of special figure 2 is displayed in the special figure 2 reserved ball number display area Dm5.

During the period when this RUSH game is being executed, the character 811 imitating a rabbit runs from the left to the right and opens the treasure chest 812 found on the way (the same effect as the first embodiment). Is displayed in the main display area Dm, and in the sub display area Ds, the character "RUSH in progress" indicating that the latent state game (RUSH game) is in progress is displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the current latent state game (RUSH game) is in progress.

In FIGS. 113 to 114 described above, when the second probability change end condition that is satisfied based on the number of changes of the special symbol is satisfied as the probability change end condition for ending the probability change state, that is, the final change of the probability change state (4). An example of the display screen when the latent state is set by the special figure change) was explained. In the third embodiment, as a probability change end condition (a condition for shifting a high probability state of a normal symbol to a low probability state) for ending the probability change state (shifting the probability change state to the latent probability state), the first Probability change end condition (probability change end condition established based on big hit winning), second probability change end condition (probability change end condition established based on the number of changes of special symbol), third probability change end condition (established based on small hit winning) It has a probability change end condition), and is configured to shift the gaming state from the probability change state to the latent state when any of the end conditions is satisfied.

Next, with reference to FIG. 115 (a), the display displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the first probability variation end condition is satisfied before the above-mentioned second probability variation end condition is satisfied. Explain the contents. FIG. 115A is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display contents executed during the third special figure change in the case where the third special figure change is a big hit after the big hit (after the probability change state is set). It is a figure.

In the third embodiment, when the first probability change end condition (winning the jackpot of the special symbol) is satisfied, the special symbol for indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot is stopped and displayed. It is configured so that the latent state is set during the period until the stop display ends (the symbol confirmation period). Therefore, since the probability variation state is continuously set during the variation display period of the special figure 1 (during the variation of the special figure), in the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 115 (a), the special figure 1 display area Dm1 is special. A display mode indicating that FIG. 1 is in variable display is displayed, and "left-handed" is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3. Then, "4" is displayed on the lottery result 821, and the bingo card 820 is displayed in a display mode indicating that a line has been established.

Further, although detailed description is omitted, in the third embodiment, when the above-mentioned first probability variation end condition is satisfied and the latent probability state is set during the symbol determination period of the special symbol, it becomes a target. It is configured so that different numbers can be displayed multiple times as the lottery result 821 of the bingo game during the variable display period of the special symbol, and the information for showing the final result of this bingo game is notified to the player step by step. It is configured to do.

That is, in the example shown in FIG. 115 (a), the special figure 1 shows a state in which a single row of lines is established during the variable display. For example, the type of the jackpot won this time is a long symbol confirmed. In the case of a jackpot type (for example, jackpot C) in which a period (for example, 300 seconds) is set, a different number as the lottery result 821 of the bingo game during the remaining period until the variable display of the special figure 1 ends. (For example, "5") is newly displayed, and the effect that the result of the bingo game is "establishment of two rows of lines" is executed.

In this way, the result of the bingo game (the number of established lines) is configured to be variable a plurality of times during the variable display of the special symbol. As a result, the content of the privilege (RUSH game, jackpot game) given to the player at the end of this special symbol change can be grasped with the passage of the change display period of the special symbol. 3 The effect content displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 81 can be continuously watched.

In addition, if the type of jackpot won this time is a jackpot type (for example, jackpot A) in which a short symbol confirmation period (for example, 5 seconds) is set, the result of the bingo game (number of established lines) does not change. A number (for example, "3") may be displayed, and the result of the bingo game may be configured to be "a row of lines established".

By configuring in this way, while unifying the number of lottery results 821 displayed by the bingo game (the number of numbers displayed in the past history 823), the result of the bingo game (number of established lines) and the special symbol It is possible to associate the content of the privilege (amount of privilege) given after the end of the variable display of. Therefore, since the player can pay attention to the content and the result of the bingo game, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the third embodiment, the number of lottery results 821 displayed during the bingo game (the number displayed in the past history 823) is unified regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol, and the result of the bingo game. We have shown an effect that makes the player excited about whether or not (the number of established lines) will increase, but it is not limited to this, for example, the content of the privilege (amount of privilege) given after the variable display of the special symbol ends. , The number of lottery results 821 displayed during the bingo game (the number of numbers displayed in the past history 823) may be associated with each other. As a result, it is possible to give a privilege that is advantageous to the player when a large number is displayed as the lottery result 821 during the bingo game, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 115 (b), the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the third probability variation end condition is satisfied will be described. FIG. 115B schematically shows an example of the display content executed during the second special figure change when the second special figure change is a small hit after the big hit (after setting the probability change state). It is a schematic diagram.

The third embodiment is configured so that the timing at which the latent probability state is set differs depending on the type of the probability change end condition that has been established. Specifically, when the first probability change end condition is satisfied, the period (target symbol) from the time when the stop display of the corresponding special symbol is started to the end of the stop display (until the jackpot game is started). When the symbol confirmation period) is set as the latent state and the second probability change end condition is satisfied, from the time when the variation display of the corresponding special symbol is started to the end of the stop display of the corresponding special symbol. The period (variation display period of the target symbol and the symbol confirmation period) is set as the latent state. That is, regardless of which of the above-mentioned first probability change end condition and second probability change end condition is satisfied, the latent probability state is set within the period of the special symbol 1 change.

On the other hand, when the third probability change end condition is satisfied, a small hit is won in any of the multiple (4 times) special figure 1 fluctuations that can be executed within the period in which the probability change state is set. In addition, the latent state is set in the period from the time when the stop display of the special symbol indicating that the lottery result is a small hit is started to the end of the stop display of the special symbol which is the final change of the probability change state. .. That is, if a small hit is won in the special figure lottery (first special figure lottery) executed immediately after the probability change state is set, the special symbol indicating the result (small hit) of the first special lottery is stopped. After being displayed, after the 2nd to 4th special symbol lottery period (variable display period and symbol confirmation period), until the stop display of the special symbol indicating the result of the 4th special symbol lottery is completed (multiple times). The latent state will be set during the special figure fluctuation period).

As shown in FIG. 115 (b), when the third probability change end condition is satisfied, "ALL" for all numbers is displayed in the lottery result 821, and 8 lines (all lines) are satisfied. The Bingo card 820 is displayed in the display mode indicating. Then, "341" indicating that a small hit has been won is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, and "right" is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 to indicate that the latent state game (RUSH game) has started. Hitting "is displayed.

Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in the third embodiment, whether or not the first probability change end condition or the second probability change end condition is satisfied is a special figure variation (special figure lottery) in which each probability change end condition is satisfied. ) Is determined before the execution (preliminary determination), whereas the third probability change end condition is configured not to perform the preliminary determination.

By configuring in this way, the progress content of the suggestion effect (bingo game) displayed over the fluctuations of multiple special symbols executed during the period in which the probability change state is set is the end of the first probability change. Since it can be set according to the condition or whether or not the second probability change end condition is satisfied, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect that does not give a sense of discomfort to the player, and when the third end condition is satisfied. Since the suggestive effect shown in FIG. 115 (b) is executed, it is possible to provide an unexpected effect.

In the third embodiment, the presence or absence of the first probability change end condition and the second probability change end condition is determined in advance, and the presence or absence of the third probability change end condition is not determined in advance. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, only the second probability variation end condition that is satisfied based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol may be configured to be preliminarily determined.

Further, as the above-mentioned pre-determination, at the end of the jackpot (during the ending period of the jackpot game), the pre-determination is performed for the special figure 1 stored on hold, and the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 stored on hold. It is configured to determine whether or not the information corresponding to the lottery result is included, and to change the combination of numbers displayed on the Bingo card 820 based on the determination result.

With this configuration, there is no sense of discomfort with respect to the number of special figure fluctuations executed before winning the jackpot and the amount of benefits given to the player by winning the jackpot (Bingo). The game) can be run. In addition, by allowing the player to grasp the numbers displayed on the Bingo card 820, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting the future game results in advance.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 116 to 121, the electrical configuration of the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are changed from the second embodiment described above, and the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed. It differs in that it is done. Other points are the same as those in the second embodiment, the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 116 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 116, the first random number 3 table 202ba is replaced with the first random number table 202a, the small hit random number 3 table 202bb is replaced with the small hit random number table 202b, and the small hit random number 3 table 202bb is replaced with the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa. The above-mentioned first is that the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bc is replaced with the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab, the small hit type selection 3 table 202b is replaced with the variation pattern selection 2 table 202ac, and the variation pattern selection 3 table 202be is provided. 2 It is different from the embodiment.

The first random number 3 table 202ba is a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol with respect to the first random number table 202a (similar to the first embodiment and see FIG. 15A) of the second embodiment described above. The difference is that the range of the value of the first random number counter C1 determined to be the above and the range of the value of the first random number counter C1 determined to be a big hit in the high probability state of the special symbol are changed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 117 (a), the contents specified in the first random number 3 table 202ba will be described. FIG. 117A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number 3 table 202ba. As shown in FIG. 117 (a), when the game state is a low probability state (normal state, time saving state) of the special symbol, the first obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is determined whether the value of the hit random number counter C1 is any of "0 to 9", and if it is any of "0 to 9", it is determined to be a big hit.

Further, when the game state is a high probability state (probability change state, latent state) of the special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is It is determined whether it is within the range of "0 to 99", and if it is within the range of "0 to 99", it is determined to be a big hit. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, out of the random number counters having a total number of 480, 10 values are defined as values for discriminating as a jackpot in the low probability state of the special symbol. The jackpot probability in the low probability state is 1/48. On the other hand, the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbol is 1 / 4.8.

The small hit random number 3 table 202bb is the first special symbol (special figure 1) with respect to the small hit random number table 202b of the second embodiment described above (similar to the first embodiment and see FIG. 15B). The difference is that the lottery has also been changed to win a small hit. Here, with reference to FIG. 117 (b), the contents specified in the small hit random number 3 table 202bb will be described. FIG. 117 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit random number 3 table 202bb. As shown in FIG. 117 (b), in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), it is determined whether the value of the acquired random number counter C1 per first is any of "10 to 14". If it is any of "10 to 14", it is determined that it is a small hit.

In the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the same contents as the above-mentioned small hit random number table 202b (see FIG. 15 (b)) are defined, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. That is, the third embodiment is different from the above-mentioned second embodiment in that it is configured so that a small hit can be won even in the lottery of the first special symbol. Then, in the third embodiment, when a small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in a state where the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set, it is normal. It is configured to execute a process of shifting the high-probability state of the symbol to the low-probability state, that is, a process of shifting the gaming state from the probabilistic state to the latent probabilistic state.

With this configuration, it is possible to increase the opportunity to shift the game state to the latent state during the probabilistic state, so that the player who is executing the game during the probable change state is enthusiastically playing the game. Can be done.

As shown in FIG. 117 (b), in the third embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the special symbol (1/48 (see FIG. 117 (a))). , The probability of winning a small hit of the first special symbol (1/32 (see FIG. 117 ((b)))) is higher. As a result, the latent probability state is set based on the small hit winning with a higher probability than the case where the latent probability state is set based on winning the big hit in the special figure 1 during the probability changing state. , Both the latent state game (RUSH game) and the jackpot game are executed for the player who is executing the game in the probabilistic state, but the game aiming at the jackpot winning which is difficult to win and the latent state Only the game (RUSH game) is executed, and both the game aiming at the small hit winning, which is easier to win than the big hit winning, can be performed.

In the third embodiment, the probability of winning the small hit of the special figure 1 is configured to be higher than the probability of winning the big hit of the special figure 1 in the high probability state of the special symbol, but the present invention is limited to this. It may be configured to be lower than the jackpot winning probability of the special figure 1 in the high probability state. For example, the probability of winning the small hit of the special figure 1 may be set to a low probability of 1/480. good. With this configuration, in the state where the probability change state is set, if the small hit is won before the big hit, the big hit game is not executed and the latent state game (RUSH game) is performed. Since it can be executed, it is possible to provide a player with a surprising game.

The jackpot type selection 3 table 202bc is different from the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa of the second embodiment described above in that the type of the jackpot type is changed, and various counters (time reduction counter 203f, probability variation counter) set after the jackpot is completed. The difference is that the contents of the fixed time counters 203ad and 203ae) are changed and the value of the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type is changed. Here, the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bc in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 118.

FIG. 118A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bc in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 118 (a), the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bc is the jackpot operation content of each jackpot type defined in the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16 (a)) of the first embodiment described above. The jackpot operation contents that differ only in the number of rounds executed for each jackpot are specified, and for each jackpot type, the time reduction counter 203f, the probability variation counter 203aa, the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad, and the special figure 2 fixed time are specified. The value of the counter 203ae is specified.

Specifically, in the jackpot A whose symbol type is set corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 (0 to 99) is "0 to 49". It is defined in the range, and the jackpot operation content in which the round game for opening the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is executed for two rounds (2R) and the value of "4" in the time saving counter 203f are set. It is specified that the value of "4" is set in the probability variation counter 203aa and the value indicating "5 seconds" is set in the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad.

In the jackpot B whose symbol type is set corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 (0 to 99) is defined in the range of "50 to 96". The jackpot operation content in which the round game for opening the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is executed for two rounds (2R), the value of "4" in the time saving counter 203f, and the value of "4" in the probability variation counter 203aa are ". It is specified that the value of "4" is set to the value indicating "100 seconds" in the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad.

The jackpot C whose symbol type is set corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1) is defined by the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 (0 to 99) in the range of "96 to 99". The jackpot operation content in which the round game for opening the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is executed for two rounds (2R), the value of "4" in the time saving counter 203f, and the value of "4" in the probability variation counter 203aa are ". It is specified that the value of "4" is set to the value indicating "300 seconds" in the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad.

Further, the jackpot D whose symbol type is set corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2) is defined in the range where the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 (0 to 99) is "0 to 64". The jackpot operation content in which the round game for opening the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is executed for two rounds (2R) and the value of "4" in the time saving counter 203f are the probability variation counter 203aa. The value of "4" is specified in the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad so that a value indicating "0.5 seconds" is set.

The jackpot E whose symbol type is set corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2) is defined by the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 (0 to 99) in the range of "65 to 99". The jackpot operation content in which the round game for opening the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is executed for two rounds (2R), the value of "4" in the time saving counter 203f, and the value of "4" in the probability variation counter 203aa are ". It is specified that the value of "4" is set to the value indicating "1 second" in the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad.

As described above, in the third embodiment, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set higher than that in the second embodiment described above, making it easier to win the jackpot, and a privilege given to the player in the jackpot game ( It is configured so that the number of prize balls) is reduced. With this configuration, the amount of benefits given to the player (prize ball) depending on the result of whether or not the latent state is set and the length of the period in which the latent state is continuously set. Since the number) can be greatly varied, it is possible to provide a player with a novel playability.

The small hit type selection 3 table 202bd is the content of the small hit type set when the special figure 1 is won with respect to the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16B) described above. It differs in that it is specified by adding. Here, the small hit type selection 3 table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 118 (b).

FIG. 118B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection 3 table 202b in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 118 (b), the small hit type selection 3 table 202b has a symbol type “Special Figure 1” with respect to the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16 (b)) of the first embodiment described above. It differs from the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16 (b)) in that the small hit D is added as the small hit type corresponding to the above, and other than that, the small hit type selection table 202e (FIG. 16 (b)). The detailed description of the same element will be omitted.

In the small hit type selection 3 table 202b, when a small hit is won in the first special symbol (special figure 1), the first attacker (first variable prize) is used regardless of the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5. A small hit game in which the opening operation of opening the device 65) for 0.02 seconds is executed once is specified. That is, when a small hit is won in the lottery of Special Figure 1, a small hit game is executed in which it is difficult for the player to obtain a prize ball in the small hit game.

That is, in the third embodiment, the small hit winning of the special figure 1 is not the purpose of giving a privilege (prize ball) to the player by the small hit game, but is an opportunity to set the latent state as the game state. It is an object. As a result, if the small hit in Special Figure 1 is won in the state where the probability change state is set, the right-handed game is executed immediately after the effect of notifying that fact (see FIG. 115 (b)) is executed. Even if it does, the small hit game has already ended (because it takes longer for the ball launched by the right-handed game to reach the right area than the small hit game period), so the latent state is smooth. A game (RUSH game) can be executed.

Further, when the small hit of the special figure 1 is won in the normal state, the small hit game can be executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort. In this embodiment, since the opening time of the first variable winning device 65 by the small hit game is set as short as 0.02 seconds, if the small hit of Special Figure 1 is won in the normal state, the player wins. Even if the game method is changed from the left-handed game to the right-handed game (when the special symbol indicating the small hit winning is stopped and displayed), the ball is changed to the first variable winning device 65 during the small hit game. Since it is difficult to win a prize, when the small hit of the special figure 1 is won in the normal state, the effect and guidance to emphasize that the small hit is won on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is configured so that the display of "right-handed" that guides the right-handed game is not executed in the display area Dm3.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from performing annoying game operations. It should be noted that a notification means may be provided to notify that the small hit of Special Figure 1 has been won in the normal state, or right-handed display even when the small hit game based on the special figure 1 small hit winning in the normal state is in progress. May be configured to execute.

The variation pattern selection 3 table 202be replaces the time saving / probability variation table 202f2 referred to when the probability variation state is set with respect to the variation pattern selection table 202f of the first embodiment described above, and the variation pattern selection 3 table 202be1 is used. Is different in that the latent probability 3 table 203be2 is provided in place of the latent probability table 202f3 that is referred to when the latent probability state is set.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection 3 table 202be will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 to 121. FIG. 119 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the variation pattern selection 3 table 202be. As shown in FIG. 119 (a), in the third embodiment, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the same normal table 202f1 as the first embodiment described above is referred to, and the probability change state is changed. If it is set, the probability variation 3 table 202be1 is referred to, and if the latency state is set, the latency 3 table 202be2 is referred to.

In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 118 (a), the value of the time reduction counter 203f and the value of the probability variation counter 203aa are configured to be the same after the end of the jackpot, so that the probability variation Since the gaming state (that is, the time saving state) in which the value of the counter 203aa becomes 0 and the value of the time saving counter 203f becomes a value larger than 0 is not set, it is referred to when the time saving state is set. It does not have a variation pattern selection table.

Next, the contents of the probability variation 3 table 202be1 will be described with reference to FIG. 119 (b). FIG. 119 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability variation 3 table 202be1. As described above with reference to FIG. 118 (a), the third embodiment is configured so that the probabilistic state is always set for the special symbol 4 fluctuations when the jackpot is won. Then, in the state where the probability variation state is set, the variation pattern (variation pattern) is referred to according to the number of special symbol fluctuations (number of special symbol fluctuations) after the end of the jackpot and the lottery result of the special symbol. Fluctuation time) is configured to be selected.

With this configuration, the latent state is determined according to the timing (number of times the special figure changes) when the condition for setting the latent state as the game state (big hit winning or small hit winning in Special Figure 1) is established. It is possible to make the period (special figure fluctuation time) to be set different. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention not only to the lottery result of the special symbol but also to the number of fluctuations in the special symbol, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Specifically, when the symbol type of the special symbol is special diagram 1 and the lottery result is "big hit", when the number of special symbol fluctuations after the end of the big hit is "1 to 2 times". , "Probability change A table 202bea (probability change A)" is referred to, "probability change B table 202be (probability change B)" is referred to in the case of "3 times", and "probability change C" is referred to in the case of "4 times". It is specified that "Table 202 bec (probability variation C)" is referred to. If the lottery result is "small hit, miss", and if the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the big hit is "1 to 3 times", refer to "Probability change A table 202bea (probability change A)". In the case of "4 times", it is stipulated that "probability change C table 202 bec (probability change C)" is referred to.

Further, when the symbol type of the special symbol is special diagram 2, the "probability variation D table 202bed (probability variation D)" is referred to regardless of the lottery result and the number of special symbol fluctuations after the end of the big hit. It is stipulated in.

Next, the contents specified in the various probability variation tables (probability variation A table 202be to probability variation D table 202bed) referred to in the probability variation 3 table 202be1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 (c) to 120. .. FIG. 119 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the probability variation A table 202bea, and FIG. 120 (a) schematically shows the contents specified in the probability variation B table 202bea. FIG. 120 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the probability variation C table 202be, and FIG. 120 (c) is a schematic diagram illustrating the contents specified in the probability variation D table 202bed. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents schematically.

As shown in FIG. 119 (c), in the probability variation A table 202bea, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0" as the variation pattern determined when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1). The jackpot variation 1 (1 second) is associated with the range of "~ 99", the jackpot variation 2 (2 seconds) is associated with the range of "100 to 197", and the jackpot variation 3 (300 seconds) is associated with the value of "198". ) Is associated. In addition, when a small hit or a loss is won in the lottery of Special Figure 1, the small hit variation 1 (1 second) or the loss variation 1 (1 second) is associated regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. Has been done.

As shown in FIG. 120 (a), in the probability variation B table 202be, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0" as the variation pattern determined when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1). The jackpot variation 1 (1 second) is associated with the range of "~ 99", the jackpot variation 2 (2 seconds) is associated with the range of "100 to 149", and the jackpot variation 3 (1 second) is associated with the range of "150 to 198". 300 seconds) is associated.

As shown in FIG. 120 (b), in the probability variation C table 202be, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0" as the variation pattern determined when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1). The value of "1" is associated with the jackpot fluctuation 1 (1 second), the value of "1" is associated with the jackpot fluctuation 2 (2 seconds), and the jackpot fluctuation 3 (300 seconds) is associated with the range of "2 to 198". It is associated. In addition, when a small hit is won in the lottery of Special Figure 1, the small hit fluctuation 2 (240 seconds) is associated regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and when the lottery is won, the fluctuation type counter is associated. The deviation variation 1 (1 second) is associated with the value of CS1 regardless of the value.

As shown in FIG. 120 (c), in the probability variation D table 202bed, as a variation pattern determined when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. The big hit fluctuation 1 (1 second) is associated, and if the small hit is won, the small hit fluctuation 4 (0.5 seconds) is associated regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. , The deviation variation 4 (0.5 seconds) is associated with the variation type counter CS1 regardless of the value.

Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the contents specified in the latent probability 3 table 202be2 will be described. FIG. 121 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the latent probability 3 table 202be2. As shown in FIG. 121, in the third embodiment, a fluctuation pattern in which a long fluctuation time is set when the lottery of the special figure 1 is executed is selected in a state where the latency state is set. It is configured to be.

Here, in the third embodiment, in the state where the probability change state is set, the latent probability state is set when a small hit is won in the special figure 1 lottery, so that the latent probability is set. In order for the fluctuation pattern to be selected with reference to the table 202be2, it is necessary to win a small hit by the lottery of the special figure 1 during the probability change state.

As described above, in the third embodiment, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is selected by referring to different tables according to the number of special symbol fluctuations in the state where the probability variation state is set. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay close attention to both the lottery result of the special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (the number of fluctuations after the probability variation state is set) that is the result of the lottery.

Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 122 shows the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown schematically. As shown in FIG. 122, the RAM 203 of the third embodiment adds a special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba and a special figure 1 small hit medium flag 203bb to the RAM 203 of the second embodiment described above. It differs in that. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is a flag for indicating that a small hit has been won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and is set to on to draw the special figure 1. It shows that you won a small hit. This special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is set to be on for a period from when the small hit is won in the lottery of special figure 1 until the small hit game is executed.

The special figure 1 small hit medium flag 203bb is a flag for indicating that the small hit game is executed based on the small hit winning of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and is set to ON. , It is shown that the small hit game based on the small hit winning of the special figure 1 is executed. In the third embodiment, when the small hit game based on the small hit winning of the special figure 1 is started in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the high probability state of the normal symbol is changed to the low probability state. It is configured to execute the process of migrating to.

The special figure 1 small hit medium flag 203bb is determined when it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is set to ON in the special figure 1 disengagement stop process (see S871 in FIG. 128) (S3201 in FIG. 128). : Yes), set to on (S3207 in FIG. 128), and when it is determined in the small hit control process 3 (see S2255 in FIG. 129) that it is the timing to start the small hit (see S2503 in FIG. 129), refer to. (S2551 in FIG. 129).

Next, when it is determined in the process of S2551 of FIG. 129 that it is set to ON (S2551: Yes in FIG. 129), that is, the small hit game this time is won in the lottery of Special Figure 1. When it is determined that the small hit is executed based on the above, the value of the time saving counter 203f is set to 0. Then, when it is determined by the small hit control process 3 (see S2255 in FIG. 129) that it is the end timing of the small hit (S2511: Yes in FIG. 129), it is set to off.

Next, with reference to FIG. 123 (a), the contents of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 123 (a) shows the voice lamp control device according to the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of ROM 222 of 113 schematically. As shown in FIG. 123 (a), the ROM 222 of the third embodiment replaces the additional effect selection table 222c with respect to the ROM 222 of the second embodiment (first embodiment) described above, and is a probability variation effect selection table 222ba. It is different in that it is provided. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the probability variation effect selection table 222ba will be described with reference to FIG. 124. FIG. 124 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the probability variation effect selection table 222ba. This probability variation effect selection table 222ba is a data table for selecting the final aspect of the suggestion effect (bingo game) described with reference to FIGS. 113 (b) to 115 (a), and is a big hit. The final mode is defined based on the number of fluctuations (the number of fluctuations in the special figure after the end of the jackpot) and the types of jackpots that can be won.

Specifically, when the number of jackpot winning fluctuations is "2", that is, when the jackpot is won again in the second special symbol change after the jackpot ends, the winning jackpot types are "big hit A" and "big hit B". If it is, the effect mode in which one row (line) is established in Bingo is set, and if it is "Big hit C", the effect mode in which three rows (lines) are established in Bingo is set.

If the number of jackpot winning fluctuations is "3", that is, if the jackpot is won in the third special symbol change after the jackpot ends, if the winning jackpot types are "big hit A" and "big hit B". , It is stipulated that an effect mode in which two rows (lines) are established in Bingo is set, and in the case of "big hit C", an effect mode in which three rows (lines) are established in Bingo is set.

Finally, if the number of jackpot winning fluctuations is "4", that is, if the jackpot is won in the fourth special symbol change (the final fluctuation of the special symbol in which the probability change state is set) after the jackpot ends, the winning jackpot type If is "Big hit A", a production mode in which two rows (lines) are established in Bingo is set, and if "Big hit B", a production mode in which three rows (lines) are established in Bingo is set, and "Big hit C". If so, it is stipulated that the production mode in which all rows (lines) are established in Bingo is set.

Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in the third embodiment, when the jackpot is won by the first special symbol change after the jackpot ends, the display screen at the end of the jackpot (normally, a bingo card). On the screen on which 820 is displayed (see FIG. 113), a special display screen for informing that the latent state is set after the end of the big hit is displayed.

On this special display screen, an image congratulating the player is displayed in the main display area Dm, and "right-handed" for guiding the right-handed game is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3. As a result, at the end of the big hit game, it is possible to perform a game (right-handed game) suitable for the game state (latent state) after the big hit game ends, so that the period in which the latent state is set is fully set. It can be utilized to execute a lottery game of the second special symbol (special figure 2).

In the third embodiment, the display screen at the end of the big hit is configured to display the special display screen when the big hit is won by the first special symbol change after the end of the big hit. The timing of displaying the special display screen may be any timing as long as it is during the jackpot game, it may be the timing when the jackpot game is started, or it may be the timing when a predetermined round game in the jackpot game is executed. In this case, when the jackpot is won in the normal state, it corresponds to the special symbol change executed next among the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b by the time the round game of the jackpot game is started. A pre-determination means for preliminarily determining whether or not the winning information (winning information corresponding to the first special symbol change after the end of the jackpot) includes information indicating that the jackpot is won is provided, and the pre-determination by the pre-determination means is provided. As a result, when the information indicating that the jackpot is won is included, "right-handed" is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 and the right-handed game is performed in order to perform the jackpot game in the right-handed game. When the effect mode for making the display is configured to be executed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 and the information indicating that the jackpot is won is not included, the guidance display area Dm3 is set to "left". It is good to configure it to display "hit".

With this configuration, when a big hit is won in a normal state (a game state in which a left-handed game is performed), the big hit game is determined by the display mode of the guidance display area Dm3 that guides the game method during the big hit game. It is possible to predict the content of the game after the end. Since the same configuration of the game board 13 as in the first embodiment is used in the present embodiment, the left-handed game is performed when the jackpot game for opening the second variable winning device 650 is executed. It is configured so that the ratio of the ball winning the second variable winning device 650 does not change between the case and the case where the right-handed game is performed. Therefore, even if a configuration is used in which the game method (right-handed, left-handed) during the jackpot game is changed based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b, it is disadvantageous to the player during the jackpot game. Does not provide a situation.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the ending command has been received in the jackpot-related process 3 (see S4552 in FIG. 132) (S4605: Yes in FIG. 132), the jackpot end process (see S4651 in FIG. 133) is executed. By determining whether or not there is winning information for winning a jackpot in the winning information (winning information in Special Figure 1) stored in the winning information storage area 223b (see S5605 in FIG. 133), the jackpot game is in progress. The newly generated winning information is also targeted for discrimination, and is configured so that more winning information can be discriminated. However, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b (winning information in Special Figure 1) A timing other than this embodiment may be set as a timing for determining whether or not there is winning information for winning a jackpot. For example, a timing at which a jackpot game is started or a specific number of rounds (for example, 2 rounds) may be set. The timing at which the game is reached or the timing at which a specific round game (the first round game) is completed may be set as the timing for executing the determination.

Next, with reference to FIG. 123 (b), the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 123 (b) shows the voice lamp control device of the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of RAM 223 of 113 schematically. As shown in FIG. 123 (b), the RAM 223 of the third embodiment is provided with the residual probability variation number area 223ba, the look-ahead per-read flag 223bb, and the residual variation number counter 223bc with respect to the ROM 222 of the second embodiment described above. It differs in that. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The remaining probability variation number area 223ba is a storage area for storing the variation number in which new winning information can be set as a special symbol variation that can be executed during the probability variation state. In this residual probability variation number area 223ba, a value obtained by subtracting the number of winning information already stored in the winning information storage area 223b in the jackpot end processing (see S4651 in FIG. 133) is set (S5604 in FIG. 133). .. Then, in the prize information related processing (see S4271 in FIG. 131), the set value is referred to (see S5504 in FIG. 131), and when the set value is larger than 0, that is, during the probability change state. When the winning information corresponding to the executeable special symbol change can be newly received (S5504; Yes in FIG. 131), the look-ahead process (the information hits the winning information) is executed as the special symbol change executed during the probabilistic change state. (Process for determining whether or not it is included) is executed (S5505 in FIG. 131), and then the set value is subtracted by 1 (S5507 in FIG. 131).

In this way, the probability change state is set by using the residual probability change number area 223ba to determine whether or not it is possible to set new winning information as a special symbol variation that can be executed during the probability change state. It is possible to determine whether or not the newly received winning information in the state corresponds to the special symbol change executed during the probability change state. Therefore, since the probabilistic effect executed in the probabilistic state can be set only based on the winning information corresponding to the special symbol variation executed in the probabilistic state, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The look-ahead hit flag 223bb is a flag for indicating that there is winning information that has been won in the big hit of the special symbol, and by being set to on, the big hit is the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b. It indicates that there is prize information indicating that the player has won.

This look-ahead hit flag 223bb determines that in the jackpot end processing (see S4651 in FIG. 133), there is winning information indicating that the jackpot has been won in the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b. If this is the case (S5605: Yes in FIG. 133), it is set to ON (S5606 in FIG. 133). Further, in the prize information-related processing (see S4271 in FIG. 131), it is determined that the prize information received this time corresponds to the special symbol change executed during the probability change state (S5504: Yes in FIG. 131). It is also set to ON (see S5506 in FIG. 131) even when it is determined that the winning information includes winning information indicating that the jackpot is won (S5505: Yes in FIG. 131).

Then, it is referred to in the probability variation variation display setting process (see S5151 in FIG. 135), and when the look-ahead hit flag 223bb is not set to ON (S5702: No in FIG. 135) and when it is set to ON (S5702: No in FIG. 135). The process is executed so that a different effect mode can be set in S5702: Yes) in FIG. 135.

The remaining fluctuation number counter 223bc is for counting the number of remaining special figure fluctuations until the jackpot is won, and is stored in the winning information storage area 223b in the jackpot end processing (see S4651 in FIG. 133). When the winning information includes the winning information for winning the jackpot (S5605: Yes in FIG. 133), the value corresponding to the number of times the special symbol changes until the special symbol corresponding to the winning information for winning the jackpot changes. Is set (see S5607 in FIG. 133). Then, when it is determined in the variation display setting process 3 (see S4173 in FIG. 134) that the variation display in the probability variation state is set (see S5103 in FIG. 134), the probability variation variation display setting process (see S5151 in FIG. 135) is executed. In (see), when it is determined that the special symbol for which the variation display is set this time is the pre-variation of the special symbol corresponding to the winning information for winning the jackpot (the next time is the jackpot variation) (S5703: Yes in FIG. 135). ), The effect mode using the probability variation effect selection table 222ba is set.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 125 to 129, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. The control process of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment is different from the control process of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment described above, in place of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see FIG. 98). 1 Special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (see S376 in FIG. 125), first special symbol fluctuation stop process 3 (see S277 in FIG. 127) instead of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (see FIG. 99), small hit control The difference is that the small hit control process 3 (see FIG. 129) is executed instead of the process (see FIG. 55). Other than that, the same processing is executed. In addition, in the above-mentioned second embodiment, since the same processing as that of the first embodiment is executed, the part where the detailed description is omitted will be described with reference to the figure used for the description of the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, the parts where the same processing as that of the second embodiment described above is executed are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 125, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (S376) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (S376). Since the third embodiment is configured to win a small hit by the lottery of the special figure 1, the first special symbol big hit determination process 3 (S376) is the first special in the above-mentioned second embodiment. The difference is that the content of the process to be executed when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is not a big hit is different from the symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98). is doing. Other than that, they are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (S376) is executed, the same process as the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see FIG. 98) is executed, and in the process of S406, this fluctuation is a jackpot. If it is determined that this is not the case (S406: No), the special figure 1 deviation processing (S471) is executed, and this processing is terminated. This special figure 1 deviation variation processing (S471) is executed when it is determined that the lottery result of special figure 1 is other than a big hit, and it is determined whether or not a small hit is won, and the determination is made. It executes the process corresponding to the result.

Next, with reference to FIG. 126, the special figure 1 deviation processing (S471), which is one of the processes in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (S376) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment. ) Will be explained. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 deviation processing (S471). This special figure 1 deviation variation processing (S471) executes a process for displaying a small hit symbol or an deviation symbol on the first symbol display device 37, and targets the second special symbol (special diagram 2). The difference is that the target special symbol is changed from the special figure 2 to the special figure 1 with respect to the processing content of the special figure 2 deviation change processing (S1011 of FIG. 41) to be executed.

In the special figure 1 deviation variation processing (S471), first, it is determined whether or not the execution data acquired from the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is a small hit (S3101). When it is determined that the execution data is a small hit (S3101: Yes), the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is set to ON (S3102), and the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to the small hit (S3103). ). Next, the small hit symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S3104), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S3101, when it is determined that the execution data is not a small hit (out of order) (S3101: No), the out-of-order symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set. (S3105), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 127, the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 3 (S277) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 3 (S277). In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 3 (S277), when the lottery result of the first special symbol is not a big hit with respect to the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S257 in FIG. 99) in the second embodiment described above. That is, in the process of S801, when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is off (S801: No), the special figure 1 disengagement stop process (S871) is executed. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 128, it is executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment. The special figure 1 deviating stop process (S871), which is one of the processes in the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 3 (S277), will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 disengagement stop process (S871). In the special figure 1 out-of-order stop process (S871), when the lottery result of the special figure 1 is a small hit, a process for starting the small hit game is executed.

In the special figure 1 disengagement stop process (see S871 in FIG. 128), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is set to ON (S3201). When it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is set to on (S3201: Yes), the change of the special figure 2 during the change is stopped and displayed by the lottery result indicating the forcible deviation. Special figure 2 The fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to ON (S3202).

Then, a special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is turned on is set (S3203), and the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed as a deviated symbol (S3204). Next, a small hit scenario based on the selected small hit type is set (S3205), the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is set to off (S3206), and the special figure 1 small hit medium flag 203bb is turned on. Set (S3207) and end this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S3201, when it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is not set to on (that is, the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of order) (S3201: No), the book is as it is. End the process.

With this configuration, when a small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the change in special figure 2 that is changing can be forcibly stopped, so that the small hit game can be performed. It is possible to facilitate the execution of the new special figure 2 fluctuation during the latent state set at the start timing. In the third embodiment, when the small hit of the special figure 1 is won, the process of forcibly stopping the change of the special figure 2 being executed in the display mode indicating that the lottery result is out of order is used. Not limited to this, for example, it is configured to interrupt the measurement of the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation so that the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation during the execution is not progressed during the period in which the small hit game is being executed. You may.

Next, with reference to FIG. 129, it is executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment. The small hit control process 3 (S2255) will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit control process 3 (S2255). The small hit control process 3 (S2255) differs from the small hit control process (S2205) in the first embodiment described above in that the processes S2551 and S2552 are added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the small hit control process 3 (S2255), when it is determined in the process of S2503 that it is the timing to start the small hit (S2503: Yes), that is, the small hit scenario updated by the process of S2502 starts the small hit. If the content indicates, an opening command is set (S2504), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 small hit medium flag 203bb is set to ON (S2551). When it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit medium flag 203bb is set to ON (S2551: Yes), the time saving counter 203f is set to 0 (S2552), and this processing is terminated.

The third embodiment is configured so that both the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) can win a small hit, of which the small hit of special figure 1 can be won. The value of the time saving counter 203f is set (cleared) to 0 only when the winning is won.

That is, as a condition for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol (the state where the value of the time reduction counter 203f is larger than 0), the small hit winning of the special figure 1 (the start of the small hit game based on the small hit winning of the special figure 1). Is set. With this configuration, it is possible to terminate the high-probability state of a normal symbol under conditions other than the case where the special symbol is changed for a predetermined number of times. Therefore, in the state where the probabilistic state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set, the latent probabilistic state (high probability state of any special symbol) is advantageous to the player at any timing (any special symbol lottery). Since it is possible to shift to a high-probability state of a special symbol and a low-probability state of a normal symbol, it is possible to make the player always enthusiastically play the game.

Further, in the third embodiment, the period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set is configured to be until the lottery (variation) of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (4 times). Therefore, the shorter the period from the setting of the probability change state to the winning of the small hit in the lottery of the special figure 1, the more the number of lottery of the special symbol that can be executed during the probability change state can be increased. Therefore, the player can be made to play the game more enthusiastically.

In addition, in the third embodiment, when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special diagram 2), the high probability state of the normal symbol is not terminated. As a result, even if the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of Special Figure 2 is set higher than the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of Special Figure 1, in the state where the probability variation state is set, Special Figure 2 It is possible to suppress a situation in which a right-handed game is performed in order to execute the lottery.

On the other hand, in the process of S2551, if it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit medium flag 203bb is not set to ON (S2551: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

As described above, in the third embodiment, when a big hit is won by lottery of a special symbol, the probability change state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is always after the end of the big hit game. Is configured to be set for a predetermined period (4 special symbol fluctuations), and various transition conditions (latent state transition state) that shift the high-probability latent state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state during the probabilistic state. Is configured to set the latent probability state, which is a game state advantageous to the player.

Then, in the third embodiment, as the latent probability transition condition, the first latent probability transition condition that is satisfied when a big hit is won during the probability change state, and a predetermined period (special symbol variation 4) in which the probability change state is set. When the second latent probability transition condition that is established when the final change of (times) is executed and the small hit is won in the lottery of the specific special symbol (first special symbol (special figure 1)) in the probability change state. It has a third latent transition condition that is satisfied. In this way, by configuring the latent state to be set under various conditions, it is possible to provide the player with a playability that does not get tired of.

Further, the plurality of latent probability transition conditions described above are configured so that the period in which the latent probability state is set after being satisfied is different, and when the first latent probability transition condition is satisfied, the jackpot is indicated. If the latent state is set during the symbol confirmation period when the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the second latent transition condition is satisfied, the latent symbol is latent during the fluctuation period of the target special symbol fluctuation and during the symbol confirmation period. When the probability state is set and the third latent probability transition condition is satisfied, the probability change state is started from the timing when the target small hit game is executed (the timing when the first variable winning device 65 is opened as the small hit game). It is configured to be set until the timing when the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol corresponding to the final fluctuation of is completed.

With this configuration, in order to perform a game to set the latent state during the probable change state, it is not just aiming at the latent state, but also a game for the opportunity to set the latent state. Since the person can be watched, the game can be played more enthusiastically.

Further, in the third embodiment, the symbol determination period of the special symbol is configured to be different according to the lottery result of the special symbol. Further, the variation display period (variation time) for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is configured to be different according to the number of times the special symbol is changed after the probability variation state is set.

Specifically, the lottery result of the special symbol that satisfies the first latent probability transition condition, that is, when the big hit is won in the special symbol lottery, the symbol confirmation period is 5 seconds to 300 seconds depending on the lottery result. It is configured to be set within the range of. With this configuration, even if the player determines that the first latent probability transition condition is satisfied (even if the special symbol indicating the jackpot is stopped and displayed), the symbol determination period set after that is set. Since it is not possible to easily determine the length of the game, it is possible to play the game while expecting that a long period is set as the period in which the latent state is continuously set.

In addition, when the above-mentioned second latent transition condition is satisfied, the latent state is set by the lottery result of the special symbol variation (final variation in the probabilistic state) corresponding to the establishment of the second latent transition condition. The length of the period to be set is greatly different. For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of the final fluctuation in the probabilistic state, the length of the period set as the latent state is set. It is configured so that it is less than or equal to the fluctuation time (including the same) of the special figure 2 fluctuation executed during the latent state. With this configuration, if the final fluctuation of the probabilistic state is out of the range, the latent probability state is temporarily set internally, but the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed during the latent probability state, and it is small. It is possible to set a disadvantageous latent state that is disadvantageous to a player who makes it impossible (difficult) to acquire a winning game.

When the above-mentioned disadvantageous latent state is set, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 does not execute the effect mode for notifying that the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed. It is preferable not to notify the player that the latent state is set.

In the present embodiment, as described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of the final fluctuation of the probability change state, the disadvantageous latent probability state is set. For example, the lottery result of the special symbol is set. In some cases where is out of order, a long symbol determination period (for example, 100 seconds that can be set when the lottery result is a big hit) is set, or the lottery result of a special symbol is out of order. As the fluctuation pattern (variation time) selected for, 300 seconds, which can be set when the lottery result is a big hit, may be set to be configurable.

With this configuration, even if a big hit or a small hit is not won during the probabilistic state, it is possible to set a latent probable state that is advantageous to the player, so expectation is given until the end of the probable change state. You can play games while playing. In addition, by making the set symbol confirmation period and fluctuation pattern the same as the period (time) that can be set when the jackpot is won, it is expected that the jackpot game will be executed after the latent state ends. be able to.

In the above-mentioned example, when the latent state game (RUSH game) is performed by setting the length of the symbol determination period to the same length as when the jackpot is won, the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed. It is preferable to stop and display the special symbol (third symbol) in a display mode that is difficult for the player to grasp. As a result, the lottery result of the special symbol this time is determined at the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the motivation to play during the latent state game.

Further, in the third embodiment, the length of the period in which the latent probability state is set differs depending on the timing when the first latent probability transition condition is satisfied. Specifically, it is configured so that the latent probability state becomes longer and easier to be set as the number of special symbol fluctuations in the probability change state increases. As a result, as the number of special symbol fluctuations in the probabilistic state increases, that is, as the number of special symbol fluctuations that can be executed during the probabilistic change state decreases, it becomes easier to set a latent state that is advantageous to the player. It is possible to make the player want to win the jackpot as soon as possible (to establish the first latent probability transition condition), or to win the jackpot just before the end of the probability change state, which improves the interest of the game. Can be made to. In addition, when a big hit is won in the final change of the probability change state, that is, when both the first latent probability transition condition and the second latent probability transition condition are satisfied in one special symbol change (lottery). Since the latent state is set from the period when the jackpot fluctuation starts, it is possible to provide the latent state for a longer period.

In the present embodiment, the longer the establishment of the first latent transition condition is delayed, the easier it is to set the latent state for a long period of time. However, in addition to this, a specific number of fluctuations (for example, for example). It may be configured so that the longest latent state period is set when the number of fluctuations is an even number or when the jackpot is won in the third), or the first latent transition condition is satisfied as soon as possible. It may be configured so that the latent state can be easily set for a long period of time.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 130 to 135, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described. The control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment is the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 105) with respect to the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above. The difference is that the command judgment process 3 (see FIG. 105) and the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 134) are executed instead of the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 68), and the other processes are the same. To. The same processing is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the command determination process 3 (S4172) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 130. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 3 (S4172). The command determination process 3 (S4172) is different from the command determination process 2 (S4162) in the second embodiment described above in that the process of S4271 is executed instead of the process of S4214. Since other processes are the same as the command determination process (S4162) in the second embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, a winning information-related process (S4271), which is one process in the command determination process 3 (S4172) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment, will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning information-related processing (S4271).

In the winning information-related processing (S4271), first, the information indicating the gaming state stored in the state setting area 223j is read out (S5501). Next, in the process of S5501, it is determined whether or not the read gaming state (that is, the current gaming state) is in the probable change (S5502). When it is determined that the read game state is in the probable change (S5502: Yes), the value of the residual probability change number area 223ba is read out (S5503). Next, in the process of S5503, it is determined whether the value of the read residual probability variation number area 223ba is larger than 0 (S5504). When it is determined that the value of the residual probability variation number area 223ba is larger than 0 (S5504: Yes), it is determined whether or not there is information in the winning information received this time (S5505). When it is determined that there is hit information in the winning information (S5505: Yes), the look-ahead hit flag 223bb is set to ON (S5506). On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no hit information in the winning information (S5505: No), the processing of S5506 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5507.

Next, the value of the residual probability variation number area 223ba is subtracted by 1 (S5507), the information of the received winning information command is stored in the corresponding winning information storage area 223b (S5508), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5502, when it is determined that the read game state is not in the probable change (S5502: No), or in the process of S5504, when it is determined that the value of the residual probability variation number area 223ba is 0. (S5504: No), a display winning command corresponding to the received winning information is set (S5509), the above-mentioned processing of S5508 is executed, and this processing is terminated.

Next, the jackpot-related process 3 (S4552) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 132. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot related process 3 (S4552). The jackpot-related process 3 (S4552) differs from the jackpot-related process (S4502) in the first embodiment described above in that a jackpot end process (S4651) is added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the jackpot end processing (S4651), which is one of the jackpot-related processes 3 (S4552) executed by the MPU221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment, will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end processing (S4651).

In the jackpot end processing (S4651), first, all the information stored in the winning information storage area 223b is read out (S5601). Next, it is determined whether or not there is winning information (S5602). If it is determined that there is no winning information (S5602: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is winning information (S5602: Yes), the number of winning information determined in the process of S5602 is subtracted from the probability variation setting number (n = 4) (S5603). Next, in the process of S5603, the subtracted value is set in the residual probability variation number area 223ba (S5604).

Next, it is determined whether or not the read information has hit information (S5605). If it is determined that the read information has winning information (S5605: Yes), is the winning information included in the winning information corresponding to the next variation (that is, the first variation executed after the jackpot game ends)? Is determined (S5606). In the process of S5606, when it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the next fluctuation contains the winning information (S5606: Yes), the player is notified that the latent state is set immediately after the big hit is completed. A special effect mode for this is set (S5607), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the next fluctuation does not include the winning information (S5605: No), the look-ahead hit flag 223bb is set to ON (S5608), and the winning information including the winning information changes. The number of special figure fluctuations up to this point is set in the remaining fluctuation number counter 223bc (S5609), the ending command for display including the bingo game display mode is set (S5611), and this process is terminated.

Further, in the process of S5605, when it is determined that there is no information in the read state (S5605: No), the probability variation setting number (n = 4) is set in the residual fluctuation number counter 223bc (S5610), and the above-mentioned S5611 Is executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 134, the variation display setting process 3 (S4173) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 3 (S4173). The variation display setting process 3 (S4173) differs from the variation display setting process (S4113) in the first embodiment described above in that a probability variation variation display setting process (S5151) is added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 135, the probability variation variation display setting process (S5151), which is one process in the variation display setting process 3 (S4173) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. explain. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the contents of the probability variation variation display setting process (S5151). In the probabilistic variation display setting process (S5151), when the current gaming state is the probabilistic variation state, the variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol is based on the special figure 1 variation pattern command received from the main control unit 110. Is set, and the process of transmitting to the display control device 114 is executed.

In the probability variation variation display setting process (S5151), first, it is determined whether or not the current variation is a small hit (S5701). When it is determined that the fluctuation this time is a small hit (S5701: Yes), an effect mode such that it becomes all bingo, that is, an effect mode as shown in FIG. 114 (b) is set (S5709), and S5710. Move to processing. On the other hand, in the process of S5701 when it is determined that the current fluctuation is not a small hit (S5701: No), it is determined whether the look-ahead hit flag 223bb is set to ON (S5702). When it is determined that the look-ahead flag 223bb is set to ON (S5702: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the remaining fluctuation number counter 223bc is 1 (S5703). When it is determined that the value of the remaining fluctuation number counter 223bc is 1 (S5703: Yes), the winning information corresponding to the next fluctuation is read from the winning information storage area 223b (S5704).

Next, based on the winning information read in the process of S5704 and the number of fluctuations, the effect mode is set from the probability variation effect selection table 222ba (S5705). Next, the look-ahead flag 223bb is set to off (S5706), the residual probability variation number area 223ba and the residual variation number counter 223bc are reset (S5707), and the process proceeds to S5710. On the other hand, in the processing of S5702, when it is determined that the look-ahead hit flag 223bb is not set to ON (S5702: No), or in the processing of S5703, when it is determined that the value of the remaining fluctuation number counter 223bc is not 1. (S5703: No), an effect mode in which Bingo cannot be established is set (S5708), the value of the remaining fluctuation number counter 223 bc is subtracted by 1 (S5711), and the process proceeds to S5710.

Next, the extracted variation pattern command and the display variation pattern command corresponding to the effect mode set in any of S5705, S5708, and S5709 are set (S5710), and this process is terminated.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 160. Each of the above-described embodiments is configured so that the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) fluctuate at the same time (so-called simultaneous fluctuation type), and the game state is latent. A large number of small hit games (RUSH games) are executed by executing the lottery (variation) of the special figure 2 during the period when the state (high probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) is set. It was configured to be possible.

Then, the latent probability state once set is the first latent probability end condition established based on the start of the jackpot game, or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. It was configured to end when any of the second latent probability end conditions that are satisfied based on the above is satisfied.

In the above-described first to third embodiments configured in this way, for example, when the first latent probability end condition is satisfied, the latent probability gaming state (as the first advantageous game that is advantageous to the player) ( Since the RUSH game) is executed until just before the big hit game, which is the second advantageous game, is started, it is possible for the player to continuously execute a plurality of different advantageous games, and the player can play the game. Was able to give a feeling of satisfaction.

However, in each of the above-described embodiments, after the probabilistic state (high probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol) is set, the latent probability state (high probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) is set. The probability change end condition to be shifted to is configured so that multiple types can be set, but since only the above two types are used for the probability probability end condition to end the latent probability state, the player is latent. There was a problem that the duration of the probability state could be easily predicted.

In response to such a problem, in the fourth embodiment, every time a special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) is executed, a lottery is performed to shift (fall) the high-probability state of the special symbol to the low-probability state. (Hereinafter referred to as a fall lottery) is configured to be executed, and a low probability state of a special symbol is set when the fall lottery is won.

With this configuration, it is possible to solve the problem that the player can easily predict the period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set, which is an advantageous game that is advantageous to the player. It is possible to play the game while expecting that the latent state game (RUSH game) will continue for a long time.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, during the period (special figure variation display period) in which the variation display (special figure variation display) for displaying that the jackpot is won in one special symbol is executed, the other Even if the lottery of the special symbol is executed, the lottery result of the fall lottery is invalidated.

As a result, if the latent state is set by satisfying the first probability change end condition (probability change end condition that is established based on the jackpot winning), the latent state game (RUSH) executed during the latent state is set. In the game), since the fall lottery can be invalidated, the latent probability state game (RUSH game) can be made into an advantageous latent state game (super RUSH game) that can be executed for a long period of time.

On the other hand, if the latent state is set by satisfying the second probability change end condition (the probability change end condition that is satisfied based on the number of changes of the special symbol), the fall lottery is executed during the latent state. Therefore, since there is a risk that the latent state will end early based on winning the fall lottery, the period during which the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed is the above-mentioned advantageous latent probability. It can be a normal latent state game that tends to be shorter than a state game.

Here, with reference to FIG. 136, the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 during the probable change state in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 136 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a transition method of four types of gaming states set in the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, the transition content of the gaming state when the fall lottery is won is added to the method of transitioning the gaming state in the pachinko machine 10 used in the first embodiment described above, and each transition. The difference is that the elements until the condition (predetermined condition) is satisfied and the transition ratio that shifts at the time of winning the jackpot are changed, and other than that, they are the same. Detailed description of the same element will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 136, in the fourth embodiment, the fall lottery for shifting the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state is executed, and the fall lottery is performed during the probability change state. If you win, you will move to the time saving state, and if you win the fall lottery during the latent state, you will move to the normal state.

With this configuration, in order to set the latent probability state, which is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, the probability variation state (high probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol) is set. In the state, the condition for shifting the high-probability state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state (for example, time-saving number of times digestion) is higher than the condition for shifting the high-probability state of the special symbol to the low-probability state (winning of the fall lottery). It needs to be established first.

Therefore, whether or not the latent state is set is determined according to the timing at which the transition condition of each symbol (special symbol, normal symbol) is satisfied, so that the player can pay attention to the game content and the game. It is possible to improve the interest of. Further, although details will be described later, in the fourth embodiment, the game method to be executed is the same (left-handed game) in the probability change state and the time saving state, and the effect content displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is configured to be the same. Therefore, even if the fall lottery is won before the transition condition of the normal symbol (the condition of shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state) is satisfied, it is difficult for the player to grasp that fact. be able to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 137, the flow in which the latent probability state is set and the flow of the game in the latent probability state will be described. FIG. 137 (a) is a timing chart schematically showing the flow when the special figure 1 jackpot is won (when the first probability change end condition is satisfied) during the probability change state, and FIG. 137 (b) is a timing chart. It is a timing chart schematically showing the flow when the number of time reductions becomes 0 during the probability change state (when the second probability change end condition is satisfied).

As shown in FIG. 137 (a), in the fourth embodiment, in the state where the high probability state (probability variation state or latent probability state) of the special symbol is set, the high probability state of the special symbol is changed to the low probability state. The lottery (falling lottery) for shifting to is configured to be performed every time the lottery (variation) of the special symbol is executed, and when the jackpot is won during the probability change state (first probability change end condition). Is set to), it is configured to be set as a fall lottery invalid period in which the fall lottery is not executed.

On the other hand, when the latent probability state is set based on the satisfaction of the second probability change end condition, the fall lottery is valid even during the latent probability state game (RUSH game) as shown in FIG. 137 (b). Since it is executed, the latent state is shifted to the normal state based on the fact that the fall lottery is won before the special figure 1 change is completed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the first probability change end condition is satisfied, the latent probability state game (RUSH game) which is more advantageous than the case where the second probability change end condition is satisfied can be executed.

<Regarding the effect display content in the fourth embodiment>
In the fourth embodiment, in addition to the effect content executed in the first embodiment described above as the effect content executed during the probability change state, the player is suggested (notified) the opportunity to set the latent probability state. The difference is that a production for suggesting (notifying) that the fall lottery has been won during the latent state game (RUSH game) has been added.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 138 to 140, the contents of the effect added by the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 138 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the effect for suggesting that the latent probability state game (RUSH game) is set by satisfying the second probability change end condition (reaching the number of time reductions). FIG. 138 (b) schematically shows the content of the effect for suggesting that the latent probability state game (RUSH game) is set by satisfying the first probability change end condition (big hit winning). It is a schematic diagram.

As shown in FIGS. 138 (a) and 138 (b), in the present embodiment, the player has an opportunity to set the latent state according to the display mode of the effect symbol 813 displayed when the treasure box 812 is opened. When the display mode of "444" is displayed as the effect symbol 813, it is notified that the second probability change end condition (reaching the number of time reductions) has been satisfied, and " When the display mode of "Super RUSH" is displayed, it is configured to notify that the first probability change end condition (big hit winning) has been satisfied.

In the fourth embodiment, the player is notified of the trigger for setting the latent probability state by the display mode of the effect symbol 813 displayed as the effect result during the probability change state. A configuration other than the above may be used. For example, a plurality of display modes having different selection ratios may be provided according to the type of probability variation end condition established as the display mode of the displayed effect symbol 813. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting which probabilistic end condition is satisfied.

Here, with reference to FIG. 139 (a), the display contents when the fall lottery is won during the latent state game (RUSH game) will be described. FIG. 139 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents when the fall lottery is won during the latent state game (RUSH game). In the fourth embodiment, the fall lottery is executed every time the special figure lottery start condition for executing the special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) is satisfied, and the special figure lottery start condition is satisfied. It is configured to execute the fall lottery during the period from the time when the big hit lottery is executed, that is, before the big hit lottery is executed.

Therefore, when the fall lottery is won, as shown in FIG. 139 (a), the latent state game (RUSH game) is displayed while the special symbol (special figure 1) corresponding to the fall lottery is variablely displayed. Is notified to indicate that the game has ended, and it is suppressed that a new special figure 2 change is executed after the fall lottery is won (after the game state shifts from the latent state to the normal state). In addition, the display mode of the guidance display area Dm3 is variably displayed from "right-handed" to "left-handed" while the special symbol (special figure 1) corresponding to the winning of the fall lottery is variablely displayed. After the fall lottery is won (after the gaming state shifts from the latent state to the normal state), it is suppressed that the new special figure 2 fluctuation is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 139 (b), the content of the effect executed when the jackpot is won during the latent state game (RUSH game) will be described. FIG. 139 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the effect content executed when a big hit is won during the latent state game (RUSH game).

Next, with reference to FIG. 140, the contents of the effect during the advantageous latent state game (super RUSH game), which is advantageous to the player among the latent state games (RUSH game), will be described. As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when the latent probability state is set based on the satisfaction of the first probability change end condition, the fall lottery is invalidated during the setting period of the latent probability state. The treasure box 812 is configured so that the lottery invalid period is set, and the fact that the game is in the advantageous latent state game (super RUSH game) is displayed in the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The number of displays is increased, and the comment "in super RUSH" indicating that the sub-display area Ds is in the advantageous latent state game is displayed.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 to 146. First, with reference to FIG. 141, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like use the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform a jackpot lottery, setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, drawing the display result of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. The difference is that the fall lottery counter C6, which is used when determining the lottery result of the fall lottery, is added to each of the above-described embodiments.

The fall lottery counter C6 is a loop counter whose value is updated in the range of "0 to 239", and is, for example, updated at 2 millisecond intervals, which is an execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31). Some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 52), and the updated values are stored in a counter buffer (fall lottery counter buffer) set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203.

The value of the fall lottery counter C6 is referred to in the fall lottery executed when the high probability state of the special symbol is set (when the probability variation flag 203g is set to on), and is acquired. When it is determined that the value of the fall lottery counter C6 is a determination value predetermined in the fall lottery table 202ca, the high probability state of the special symbol shifts to the low probability state (falls).

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 142. FIG. 142 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 142, the ROM 202 of the fourth embodiment is provided with the jackpot type selection 4 table 202ca instead of the jackpot type selection table 202d for the ROM 202 of the first embodiment described above, and a fall lottery. The difference is that the table 202ca is provided. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection 4 table 202ca will be described with reference to FIG. 143. FIG. 143 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the jackpot type selection 4 table 202ca. As shown in FIG. 143, in the fourth embodiment, when the jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed, the operation content (operation scenario) for always opening the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is It differs from the above-mentioned first embodiment in that it is set. Further, as the number of rounds of the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won, the operation content (operation scenario) is set so that the jackpot game of at least 5 rounds or more is executed, which is the same as the first embodiment described above. Is different.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, the operation content executed during the small hit game is to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether the special symbol has won the big hit or the small hit. A jackpot game in which the same movement content as the (motion scenario) (a concept including a difference that is difficult for the player to discriminate) is executed, and a latent state is set, which is a game state in which the player has an advantage. While it was difficult to understand the timing and the timing of the end, in the fourth embodiment, the player can easily determine whether the jackpot is won or the small hit is won (in the jackpot game). By making the movement content different from the movement content of the small hit game, the player can easily distinguish it).

In this way, by making the player easily determine whether the big hit game is executed or the small hit game is executed, the number of small hit games executed during the latent state game (RUSH game) can be easily determined. Can be grasped by.

Next, the fall lottery table 202cc will be described with reference to FIG. 146 (a). FIG. 146 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the fall lottery table 202cc. The fall lottery table 202cc is a data table in which the determination value of the above-mentioned fall lottery counter C6 is stored. The value of the fall lottery counter C6 acquired when the ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 (at the time of the start winning) is any of the values specified in the fall lottery table 202cc. When it matches the judgment value of, it is set to shift to the low probability state of the special symbol (to fall).

More specifically, four determination values of "43,107,195,222" are defined as determination values for determining a fall in a high probability state of a special symbol. Here, the fall lottery counter C6 is a loop counter whose value is updated in the range of "0 to 239". Of the 240 possible values of the fall lottery counter C6, there are four judgment values that are determined to fall, so the probability of falling (shifting to the low probability state of the special symbol) in the probabilistic state of the special symbol. Is 1/60 (4/240).

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the probability of winning a big hit in a high probability state of a special symbol is set to be 6/480 (see FIG. 15A), and a small hit is won in the lottery of the special figure 2. The probability of this is 221/480 (see FIG. 15B). That is, the probability of winning the fall lottery is slightly higher than the probability of winning the jackpot. That is, in the fourth embodiment, in the state where the latent probability state is set, it is configured so that it is easy to win in the order of small hit, fall, and big hit.

The winning rates of the big hit, the small hit, and the fall in the high probability state of the special symbol are not limited to those shown in the present embodiment, and the ease of winning may be different. For example, the fall probability (probability of winning the fall lottery) is set to be lower than the jackpot probability, and the jackpot game and the small hit game are repeatedly enjoyed until the fall is won in the latent state. Alternatively, the small hit probability and the fall probability are set to be almost the same (for example, the small hit probability 1/3, the fall probability 1/4), and a special symbol lottery is performed during the latent state. It may be a playability that makes the player excited every time it is played. Also, even if the fall probability is set high (for example, 1/2) and the special symbol lottery can be executed with the latent probability set only when the fall is not made in the first fall lottery. good.

In the fall lottery table 202cc in the present embodiment, only the determination value for determining whether or not the special symbol has fallen in the high probability state is specified, and the determination value for the low probability state of the special symbol is specified. It has not been. This is because it is a waste of processing to determine whether or not to shift to the low-probability state of the special symbol when the special symbol is already in the low-probability state.

In the fourth embodiment, the fall lottery table 202cc and the regularly updated fall lottery counter C6 are compared to shift from the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol (fall). ) Whether or not is determined. That is, the timing of transition from the latent state (high probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) to the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) can be randomized. .. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the timing at which the latent state ends during the latent state game (RUSH game) performed during the period in which the latent state is set.

In the present embodiment, a lottery (determination) is made as to whether or not to shift (fall) from the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol, but it is a lottery (determination) to shift to another state. ) May. For example, whether or not to shift from the high-probability state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state of the normal symbol may be determined by a lottery (special symbol lottery) executed for each change of the special symbol. As a result, it is possible to randomly determine how long the high-probability state of the normal symbol lasts, so that the probabilistic state (high-probability state of the special symbol, high-probability state of the normal symbol) is changed to the latent state (high-probability state of the special symbol). , It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing of shifting to the low probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, during the period in which the probabilistic state is set, the game can always be played while expecting that the latent probable state is set. Further, for example, it may be configured so that whether or not to shift from the low probability state of the special symbol to the high probability state of the special symbol can be drawn.

Next, with reference to FIG. 144, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 144 shows the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown schematically. As shown in FIG. 144, the RAM 203 of the fourth embodiment is different from the RAM 203 of the first embodiment described above in that the state update restriction flag 203ca is provided. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The state update restriction flag 203ca is a flag for indicating that the update of various parameters corresponding to various conditions for shifting the game state is restricted, and is various when it is set to ON. It indicates that the parameter update is restricted. In the fourth embodiment, when the state update limit flag 203ca is set to ON, the process of updating the value of the time saving counter 203f is skipped.

This state update restriction flag 203ca is when it is determined in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (see S386 in FIG. 147) that the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) (S406 in FIG. 147). : Yes), or when it is determined in the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (see S975 in FIG. 150) that the jackpot is won by the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) (S1006: Yes in FIG. 150). ) Is set to on (S487 in FIG. 147, S1077 in FIG. 150).

Further, when it is referred to in the game state update process 4 (see S388 in FIG. 149) (see S651 in FIG. 149) and it is determined that it is set to ON (S6511: Yes in FIG. 149), the time saving counter 203f The process of updating (subtracting) the value, that is, the process of updating the parameter (number of time reductions) corresponding to the condition for shifting the gaming state is skipped. Then, when it is determined in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 (see S287 in FIG. 148) that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to on (S801: Yes in FIG. 148), it is set to off. (See S871 in FIG. 148). Similarly, when it is determined in the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 (see S293 in FIG. 151) that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S1501: Yes in FIG. 151), it is also turned off. Set.

That is, in the fourth embodiment, when a jackpot is won by any of a plurality of special symbols (special figure 1 and special figure 2), the state update restriction flag 203ca is set to on, and the special symbol won by the jackpot is set. It is configured so that the game state is not changed during the period when the fluctuation display of is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 145 (a), the contents of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 145 (a) shows the voice lamp control device according to the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of ROM 222 of MPU 221 of 113 schematically. As shown in FIG. 145 (a), the ROM 222 of the fourth embodiment is different from the ROM 222 of the first embodiment described above in that the latent mode selection table 222ca and the fall notification selection table 222cc are provided. is doing. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The latent mode selection table 222ca is a data table referred to when selecting an effect mode (latent mode) of an effect (latent effect) for notifying the player that the latent state has been set. .. In this latent mode selection table 222ca, a plurality of production modes (a trigger for setting a latent probability state (a trigger for winning a big hit, a trigger for reaching the number of time reductions (time reduction omission)) and a mode setting effect counter 223ca to be described later are associated with each other. The effect mode) is defined, and it is possible to suggest to the player an opportunity to set the latent probability state depending on the effect mode of the selected latent probability effect.

Next, the detailed contents defined in the latent mode selection table 222ca will be described with reference to FIG. 146 (b). FIG. 146 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the latent mode selection table 222ca. As shown in FIG. 146 (b), when the information included in the state command received from the main control device 110 is the jackpot latent state, the value of the mode setting effect counter 223ca acquired. "Invincible mode" is defined in the range of "0 to 49", "normal mode B" is defined in the range of "50 to 89", and "normal mode A" is defined in the range of "90 to 99". ing.

When the information included in the state command received from the main control device 110 indicates that the latent state of this time is the time-saving latent probability state, the value of the acquired mode setting effect counter 223ca is "0 to 49". "Normal mode A" is defined in the range, "normal mode B" is defined in the range of "50 to 89", and "normal mode B" is defined in the range of "90 to 99".

The fall notification selection table 222cc is a data table for selecting a notification mode for notifying (suggesting) the player that the fall lottery has been won, and the time saving state (high probability state of the normal symbol) continues. The notification mode is selected based on the value of the remaining time reduction area 223k indicating the remaining period set and the value of the fall notification effect counter 223cf.

The fourth embodiment is executed by the game method (left-handed game) and the third symbol display device 81 depending on whether the probabilistic state is set as the game state or the time saving state is set. It is configured so that the various display modes are the same. With this configuration, the player cannot easily determine whether the current state is a probable change state or a time saving state. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, since the fall lottery is executed, the time is shortened at random timing in the state where the probabilistic state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set. The state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is configured to be set.

Then, when the high probability state of the normal symbol shifts to the low probability state while the probability change state is set, the gaming state shifts from the probability change state to the latent state, which is advantageous to the player. While the probability state game (RUSH game) is executed, when the high probability state of the normal symbol shifts to the low probability state in the state where the time reduction state is set, the game state changes from the time reduction state to the normal state. Move to the state.

Here, the specific contents of the fall notification selection table 222cc will be described with reference to FIG. 146 (c). FIG. 146 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fall notification selection table 222cc. As shown in FIG. 146 (c), the fall notification selection table 222cc is associated with the number of remaining time reductions (information on the remaining time reduction number area 223k) at the time of winning the fall and the value of the fall notification effect counter 223cf. The notification mode is specified.

Specifically, when the fall winning timing is 0 for the remaining time reduction number (when the information stored in the remaining time reduction number area 223k indicates 0 remaining time reduction number), that is, the high probability of the normal symbol. When the fall lottery is won due to the fluctuation that the state ends, "confirmed notification" is defined regardless of the value of the acquired fall notification effect counter 223cf. Then, when the fall winning timing is 1 to 49 in the number of remaining time reductions, that is, when the period in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set has passed more than half, the acquired fall notification effect counter 223cf "Suggestion notification" is defined in the range of "0 to 49" or "90 to 99", and "confirmed notification" is defined in the range of "50 to 89". When the number of remaining time reductions is 50 to 98, that is, when the period in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set remains more than half, the value of the acquired fall notification effect counter 223cf is "0 to 89". "Suggestion notification" is specified in the range of "90 to 99", and "confirmed notification" is specified in the range of "90 to 99".

Here, when "confirmed notification" is selected as the notification mode, the player has fallen to a notification mode in which the player can easily grasp that the fall lottery has been won, for example, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. A notification mode is set such as displaying to that effect (for example, displaying "sorry") or notifying that the fall lottery has been won by voice or the emission color of the decorative member.

Further, when "suggestion notification" is selected as the notification mode, a notification mode (for example, display of "pinch") for notifying the player that there is a possibility of winning the fall lottery is set. .. Although detailed description is omitted, this "suggestion notification" is configured to be set when the notification condition is satisfied even when the fall lottery is not won. With this configuration, the "suggestion notification" is executed regardless of whether the fall lottery is actually won or not.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the remaining period (remaining time reduction) in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is continuously set as the mode of the notification (suggestion) effect of whether or not the fall lottery has been won. It is configured to be set based on the period), and it is configured so that the longer the remaining time is, the more difficult it is to set the "confirmed notification". Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player knows that he / she has won the fall lottery with a long remaining working hours and the motivation for playing during the short working hours is reduced.

Further, the setting frequency of "suggestion notification" set when the fall lottery is not won may be configured to be variable based on the length of the remaining short period. For example, the longer the remaining time is, the more the fall is made. It is preferable to configure it so that "suggestion notification" can be easily set when the lottery has not been won. This makes it possible to change the possibility of actually winning the fall lottery when the "suggestion notification" is executed, based on the length of the remaining short period, so that the "suggestion notification" is executed. It is possible to make the player predict whether or not the fall lottery will be won while discriminating between the frequency (number of times) to be played and the number of times the remaining working hours are shortened, and to improve the interest of the game. can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 145 (b), the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 145 (b) shows the voice lamp control device of the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of RAM 223 of MPU 221 of 113 schematically. As shown in FIG. 145 (b), the RAM 223 of the fourth embodiment has the mode setting effect counter 223ca, the latent mode storage area 223cc, and the number of small hits with respect to the RAM 223 of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that a counter 223cc, a fall flag 223cd, a time saving notification flag 223ce, and a fall notification effect counter 223cf are provided. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The mode setting effect counter 223ca is a counter used when selecting the latent mode using the latent mode selection table 222ca. It is updated repeatedly in the range of 0 to 99. Although not shown, it is updated by 1 each time the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed.

The latent mode storage area 223cc is a storage area for storing the currently set latent mode, and the latent mode determined in the latent mode setting process (see S4451 in FIG. 154) is stored (set). (See S5804 in FIG. 154). Then, it is referred to in the variation display setting process 4 for special figure 1 (see S5171 in FIG. 159) (see S5251 in FIG. 159), and the variation pattern command for display is set (see S5252 in FIG. 159). Similarly, it is referred to in the variation display setting process 4 for special figure 2 (see S5175 in FIG. 160) (S5351 in FIG. 160), and the variation pattern command for display is set (S5352 in FIG. 160). The information (latent mode information) stored (set) in the latent mode storage area 223cc is when it is determined by the state command process 4 (see S4281 in FIG. 153) that the gaming state has shifted to the normal state. (See S4454 in FIG. 153).

The small hit count counter 223cc is a counter for measuring the number of small hits won during the latent state, and the small hit start command is issued in the small hit related process 4 (see S4574 in FIG. 156) during the latent state. Upon reception, the value is incremented by 1 (see S4752 in FIG. 156). Then, it is referred to when determining the number of small hits won during the latent state (S4753 in FIG. 156). In the present embodiment, the small hit count display 825 is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 based on the value of the small hit count counter 223 cc, and the small hit is displayed during the period when the latent state is set. When the number of winnings reaches a predetermined number of times (a multiple of 10), the remaining time in the latent state is displayed.

The fall flag 223cd is a flag for indicating that the fall lottery has been won during the probability change state, and is set to ON to indicate that the fall lottery has been won.

The time saving notification flag 223ce wins the fall lottery during the probabilistic state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol), and goes to the time saving state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol). It is a flag for indicating that a fall notification effect (an effect executed when a definite notification is selected in the fall notification selection table 222cc) for notifying the player of the transition has been executed. By setting it to ON, the fall notification effect is set.

The fall notification effect counter 223cf is a counter used when selecting the notification mode of the fall lottery using the fall notification selection table 222cc. It is updated repeatedly in the range of 0 to 99. Although not shown, it is updated by 1 each time the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 147 to 151. The control process of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment is different from the control process of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment described above, in place of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34). Special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (see FIG. 147), first special symbol fluctuation stop process 4 (see FIG. 148) instead of the first special symbol change stop process (see FIG. 38), game state update process (see FIG. 36). Instead of the game state update process 4 (see FIG. 149), the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 40) is replaced by the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (see FIG. 150), and the second special symbol change stop process. The difference is that the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 (see FIG. 151) is executed instead of (see FIG. 45). Other than that, the same processing is executed. The same processing is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 147. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386). The first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386) shifts from the probability variation state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol with respect to the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) in the first embodiment described above (S306). The difference is that a process for executing a lottery for whether or not to make the player fall is added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386), first, the data of the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired (S401). Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is on (S481). When it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is on (S481: Yes), since the jackpot of the second special symbol is being executed, the process proceeds to S412.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is off (S481: No), it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203g is on, that is, whether or not the probability variation is in progress (S482). When it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is off, that is, the probability change is not in progress (S482: No), the process proceeds to S404.

On the other hand, in the process of S482, when it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is on, that is, when it is determined that the probability change is in progress (S482: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the fall lottery table 202m. (S483). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the fall lottery counter C5 matches any determination value (random value) defined in the fall lottery table 202m (that is, a value corresponding to the fall) (S484). ), If it is determined that the value does not correspond to the fall (S484: No), the process proceeds to S403.

On the other hand, in the process of S484, when it is determined that the value of the fall lottery counter C5 matches any of the determination values (random value) specified in the fall lottery table 202m (value corresponding to the fall) ( S484: Yes), by setting the probability variation flag 203g to off, the probabilistic variation state of the special symbol is shifted (falls) to the low probability state of the special symbol (S485). Then, a fall command is set to notify the voice lamp control device 113 that the special symbol has transitioned (falls) from the probabilistic state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol (S486), and the process proceeds to S404. Transition. Further, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the data in the execution area this time is a big hit in the processing of S406 (S406: Yes), after the processing of S407 to S411 is executed, the state update restriction flag 203ca is executed. Is set to on (S487), and this process ends.

By executing the special symbol change start process 4 (S386), a lottery for whether or not to shift (fall) to the low probability state of the special symbol and a lottery for whether or not the special symbol is a big hit are easily executed. be able to. In this embodiment, as the order of processing in the probabilistic state of the special symbol, a lottery (falling lottery) is first executed to determine whether or not to shift to the low probability state of the special symbol, and then the special symbol is a big hit. It was configured to execute a lottery as to whether or not it would be, but the processing order is not limited to this. The big hit lottery may be executed first, and then the fall lottery may be performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 148, the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 (S287) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 (S287). The first special symbol change stop process 4 (S287) adds a process (S871) for setting the state update restriction flag 203ca to off to the first special symbol change stop process (S207) in the first embodiment described above. It differs in that it does. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the game state update process 4 (S388) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 149. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the contents of the game state update process 4 (S388). The game state update process 4 (S388) adds a process (S651) for determining whether or not the state update limit flag 203ca is on to the game state update process (S308) in the first embodiment described above. It's different. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the game state update process 4 (S388), first, it is determined whether or not the state update limit flag 203ca is on (S651). If it is determined that the state update restriction flag 203ca is on (S6511: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S651 that the state update restriction flag 203ca is not on (S6511: No), the process proceeds to the process of S601.

Next, the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S975) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 150. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S975). The second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S975) shifts from the probability variation state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol with respect to the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905) in the first embodiment described above. The difference is that a process for executing a lottery for whether or not to make the player fall is added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, with reference to FIG. 147, in contrast to the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386), a process in which the object of change is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol is performed. Since it is only executed, the detailed explanation is omitted.

Next, the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 (S293) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 151. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 (S293). The second special symbol change stop process 4 (S293) adds a process (S1571) for setting the state update restriction flag 203ca to off to the first special symbol change stop process (S213) in the first embodiment described above. It differs in that it does. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 152 to 160, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. The control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment is a command determination process 4 instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 60) with respect to the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment described above. (See FIG. 152), the variable display setting process 4 (see FIG. 157) is executed instead of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 69), and the other processes are the same. The same processing is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the command determination process 4 (S4182) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 152. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 4 (S4182). The command determination process 4 (S4182) differs from the command determination process (S4112) in the first embodiment described above in that the state command process 4 (S4281) is executed instead of the state command process (S4204). Since other processes are the same as the command determination process (S4112) in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 153, the state command process 4 (S4281), which is one of the command determination processes 4 (S4182) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the contents of the state command process 4 (S4281). The state command process 4 (S4281) determines that the latent mode setting process (S4451) is added to the state command process (S4112) in the first embodiment described above, and whether or not a command related to a fall has been received. The difference is that processing is added. Since other processes are the same as the state command process (S4112) in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the state command process 4 (S4281), if it is determined that the command received this time is a state command indicating the transition to the latent state (S4403: Yes), the latent mode setting process (S4451) is executed. The details of the latent mode setting process (S4451) will be described later with reference to FIG. 154. Next, the value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the state command is stored in the state setting area (S4405), and the process proceeds to S4452. On the other hand, in the process of S4403, when it is determined that the command received from the main control device 110 this time is not a state command indicating the transition to the latent state (S4403: No), a fall command is issued from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not the command has been received (S4452). If it is determined that the fall command has been received (S4452: Yes), the fall effect setting process is executed (S4453). The details of the fall effect setting process (S4453) will be described later with reference to FIG. 155. On the other hand, in the process of S4452, if it is determined that the fall command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S4452: No), the process of S4453 is skipped and the process of S4406 is executed. Next, after executing the processes of S4406 to S4411, the latent mode storage area bc, the small hit count counter 223 cc, the fall flag 223 cd, and the time saving notified flag 223ce are cleared (S4454), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 154, the latent mode setting process (S4451), which is one process in the state command process 4 (S4281) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment, will be described. .. FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the contents of the latent mode setting process (S4451).

In the latent mode setting process (S4451), first, the type of the state command received from the main control unit 110 this time is read out (S5801). Next, the latent mode is determined using the latent mode selection table 222ca (see FIG. 146 (b)) based on the received state command and the value of the mode setting effect counter 223ca (S5802). Next, in the process of S5802, the display latent mode command corresponding to the determined latent mode is set (S5803), and the determined latent mode is set in the latent mode storage area 223cc (S5804). Next, the latent probability notification effect for notifying the entry of the latent probability state is set (S5805), the value corresponding to the game state notified by the state command is stored in the state setting area 223j (S5806), and this process is terminated. do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 155, a fall effect setting process (S4453), which is one process in the state command process 4 (S4281) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fall effect setting process (S4453).

In the fall effect setting process (S4453), first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the latent state (S5901). When it is determined that the current gaming state is the latent state (S5901: Yes), the latent probability notification effect for notifying the end of the latent state is set (S5902), and the state command received from the main control device 110 is set. The value corresponding to the game state notified by is stored in the state setting area 223j (S5903), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5901 when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the latent state (S5901: No), then the remaining time reduction number is 99 or more, that is, the remaining time reduction area 223k. It is determined whether or not the value stored in is 99 or more (S5904). When it is determined that the number of remaining time reductions is 99 or more (S5904: Yes), the time reduction notification effect for notifying the entry of the time reduction state is set (S5905), and the time reduction notification flag 223ce is set to ON (S5908). .. On the other hand, in the process of S5904, when it is determined that the number of remaining time reductions is not 99 or more (S5904: No), the process of S5905 and S5906 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5908. Next, the fall flag 223cd is set to ON (S5907), the value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the state command received from the main control device 110 is stored in the state setting area 223j (S5908), and this processing is terminated. do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 156, the small hit related process 4 (S4574) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit related process 4 (S4574). The small hit-related process 4 (S4574) differs from the small hit-related process (S4504) in the first embodiment described above in that a process for displaying the remaining time information is added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the small hit-related process 4 (S4574), first, when it is determined that the small hit start command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4701: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is in the latent state. (S4751). When it is determined that the current gaming state is the latent state (S4751: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the small hit count counter 223cc (S4752). Next, it is determined whether the value of the small hit count counter 223cc is a multiple of 10 (S4753). When it is determined that the value of the small hit count counter 223cc is a multiple of 10 (S4753: Yes), the information stored in the remaining variation time information storage area 223o is read out (S4754). A display time information command indicating the remaining time information is set (S4755), then a display small hit start command is set (S4702), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S4751 when it is determined that the player is not in the latent state (S4751: No), or in the processing of S4753, when it is determined that the value of the small hit count counter 223cc is not a multiple of 10 (S4751: No). S4753: No), S4702 processing is executed, and this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 157, the variation display setting process 4 (S4183) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 4 (S4183). The variation display setting process 4 (S4183) replaces the variation display setting process (S5104) for the special figure 1 with respect to the variation display setting process (S4113) in the first embodiment described above, and is a variation display setting process for the special figure 1. 4 (S5171), the variation display setting process 4 (S5175) for the special figure 2 is executed instead of the variation display setting process (S5109) for the special figure 2, and the fall notification process (S5173) is added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the variation display setting process 4 (S4183), first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d in FIG. 1 is ON (S5101). When it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S5101: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is set to off (S5102). Next, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the latent state (S5103). When it is determined that the current gaming state is the latent state (S5103: Yes), the variation display setting process 4 (S5711) for special figure 1 is executed, and the first special symbol in the prize information storage area 223b is executed. The corresponding data is shifted (S5106). The details of the variation display setting process 4 (S5711) for the special figure 1 will be described later with reference to FIG. 159.

On the other hand, in the process of S5103, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the latent state (S5103: No), it is determined whether or not the fall flag 223cd is on (S5172). If it is determined that the fall flag 223cd is on (S5172: Yes), the fall notification process (S5173) is executed. The details of the fall notification process (S5173) will be described later with reference to FIG. 158. Next, based on the extracted variation pattern, the variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol is set (S5105), and the process proceeds to the process of S5106 described above. Next, the process executed for the special figure 1 of S5171 to S5173 is executed by changing the target to the special figure 2.

Here, with reference to FIG. 158, a fall notification process (S5173), which is a process in the variable display setting process 4 (S4183) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fall notification process (S5173).

In the fall notification process (S5173), first, it is determined whether or not the time saving notification flag 223ce is on (S8001). When it is determined that the time reduction notified flag 223ce is on (S8001: Yes), a latent variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol is set based on the extracted variation pattern (S8009), and this processing is performed. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time reduction notification flag 223ce is off (S8001: No), the information of the remaining time reduction frequency area 223k is read out (S8002). Next, the fall notification mode is determined using the fall notification selection table 222cc based on the number of remaining time reductions read in the processing of S8002 and the value of the fall notification effect counter 223ca (S8003). Next, in the process of S8003, it is determined whether the determined notification mode is the definite notification mode (S8004). When it is determined that the mode is the definite notification mode (S8004: Yes), the time saving notification flag is set to off (S8005), and the fall flag 223cd is set to off (S8006). Next, a time saving notification effect for notifying the entry of the time saving state is set (S8007), the above-mentioned processing of S8009 is executed, and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S8004 that the determined notification mode is not the definite notification mode (S8004: No), a display fall notification command corresponding to the fall notification mode determined in the processing of S8003 is set (S8004: No). S8008), the process of S8009 described above is executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 159, the variation display setting process 4 (for special figure 1), which is one of the processes in the variation display setting process 4 (S4183) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment ( S5171) will be described. FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation display setting process 4 (S5711) for the special figure 1. The variation display setting process 4 (S5711) for the special figure 1 replaces the process of S5206 with the variation display setting process (S5104) for the special figure 1 in the above-described first embodiment in the latent mode storage area 223cc. The stored latent mode is read out (S5251), and the process of setting the latent variable pattern command for displaying the first special symbol (S5252) is executed based on the extracted variation pattern and the latent mode. It differs in that. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 160, the variation display setting process 4 (for special figure 2), which is one of the processes in the variation display setting process 4 (S4183) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment ( S5175) will be described. FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation display setting process 4 (S5175) for the special figure 2. The variation display setting process 4 (S5109) for the special figure 2 replaces the process of S5206 with the variation display setting process (S5109) for the special figure 2 in the above-described first embodiment in the latent mode storage area 223cc. The stored latent mode is read out (S5351), and the process of setting the latent variable pattern command for displaying the first special symbol (S5352) is executed based on the extracted variation pattern and the latent mode. It differs in that. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, the fourth embodiment has a configuration in which a fall lottery is performed for each of the above-mentioned first embodiments to shift the high-probability state of the special symbol to the low-probability state based on the lottery result. Therefore, in the state where the probabilistic state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set, at what timing the time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) It can be difficult for the player to predict whether or not the transition will occur.

In addition, if the player wins the fall lottery during the probability change state and shifts to the time saving state, the player will enter the latent probability state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), which is a game state advantageous to the player. Since it becomes difficult to shift (it is harder to shift than the probability change state), once the probability change state is set, the latent probability state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is set. You can play the game while being thrilled not to win the fall lottery before.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the same game method (left-handed game) is performed in the case where the probability change state is set and the case where the time saving state is set, the current game method is performed. It is possible to make it more difficult to grasp whether the game state is a probable change state or a time saving state.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, if the fall lottery is won immediately after the probability change state is set (for example, the first special symbol change), the player is notified that the probability change state is set. There is another possibility that the latent state will be set because it is configured to execute the effect mode (time saving notification effect) that makes it appear as if the time saving state was set from the beginning (after the end of the big hit). It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable that the probability change state higher than that of the game state has ended in a short period of time.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, a production that suggests to the player the possibility of winning the fall lottery during the probable change state (suggestion notification) and a production that notifies the player that the fall lottery has been won (confirmed notification). ) And, are made feasible, and the selection ratio between the suggestion notification and the definite notification is configured to be different based on the number of residual fluctuations of the special symbol that can be continuously set in the probabilistic state. Specifically, the larger the number of residual fluctuations in the probabilistic state, the more difficult it is to execute the definite notification. As a result, it is possible to recognize that the transition from the probabilistic change state to the time saving state is performed in the state where the remaining number of fluctuations remains large, and it is possible to suppress the player's motivation to play. In addition, the effect of notifying the suggestion is configured to be executed even when the fall lottery has not been won.

In this embodiment, the above-mentioned suggestion notification or definite notification is configured to cause the player to determine whether the current gaming state is a probabilistic state or a time-saving state. Other configurations may be used, for example, a fluctuation pattern of a special symbol (variation time) that can be selected only during the probabilistic change state, or a special symbol fluctuation pattern (variation time) that can be selected only during the time saving state. It may be configured so that the player predicts the current gaming state by the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol to be provided and executed. In this case, the contents of the fluctuation pattern dedicated to the probabilistic change state and the fluctuation pattern dedicated to the time saving state do not differ greatly, but it is preferable to provide the fluctuation pattern with an error of about 1 second, for example. As a result, the current gaming state can be notified to the player by an error of the variation display time of a slight sense of incongruity, so that the variation display of the special symbol to be executed can be strongly consciously watched. Further, in this case, one second of the error may be used, for example, in the period until the fluctuation of the third symbol is started on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, whereby the fluctuation start timing of the third symbol may be used. However, the current gaming state can be notified to the player due to a slight sense of incongruity that the game is slower or faster than usual, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the fourth embodiment, the lottery result of the fall lottery due to the other special symbol change (lottery) is invalidated during the period when the jackpot change is executed in one special symbol. .. As a result, for example, due to the establishment of the first latent probability transition condition that is established based on the jackpot winning of Special Figure 1, the second special without winning the fall lottery during the period when the latent probability state is set. It will be possible to continue receiving the lottery for the design (Special Figure 2). Therefore, it is possible to set a latent state that is more advantageous (easily continued for a long time) than the latent state set by the establishment of other latent transition conditions.

In the fourth embodiment, when the special symbol change (lottery) is executed, the fall lottery is also executed. That is, it is configured to execute the fall lottery when the execution condition of the special symbol change (lottery) is satisfied. The ball has entered the ball opening 64, the second entry opening 640, and the general winning opening 63), the ball has passed through the through gate 67, and the execution conditions for normal symbol fluctuation (lottery) have been satisfied. , The special symbol, or the normal symbol stop display timing, or the elapsed timing of the symbol confirmation period may be the trigger for executing the fall lottery, and when the execution condition of the special symbol change (lottery) is satisfied, the fall lottery is performed. It may be configured to determine whether or not to execute and execute the fall lottery based on the determination result. This makes it difficult for the player to understand when the fall lottery is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from easily detecting the timing of winning the fall lottery.

In the fourth embodiment, each time a fall lottery is executed, the presence or absence of a fall is determined with the same probability, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is easy to fall in a fall lottery (winning). It may be configured to provide a high-probability state (easy) and a low-probability state (difficult to win). In this case, for example, based on the jackpot type, a high probability variation state and a low probability variation state are provided as probability variation states set after the jackpot is completed, and in the high probability variation state, a low probability state of the fall lottery is set and the probability variation is low. In the state, a high probability state of the fall lottery may be set. Further, the state of the fall lottery (high probability state, low probability state) may be changed based on the number of special symbol fluctuations (lottery) executed after the probability change state is set. For example, the probability change state may be changed. The predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 10 times) after the state is set is configured so that the high probability state of the fall lottery that is easy to win the fall lottery is set, and then the low probability state of the fall lottery is set. May be.

With such a configuration, it is possible to set a period in which the player is likely to fall from the probable change state and a period in which the player is difficult to fall, so that it is possible to provide the player with a sharp playability. Further, in the present embodiment, when the fall lottery is won, the process of shifting the high-probability state of the special symbol to the low-probability state is executed. A process of shifting the high-probability state to the low-probability state may be executed. Further, in the fourth embodiment, when the fall lottery is won, the high probability state of the special symbol is shifted to the low probability state. For example, the high probability state of the special symbol is changed to the medium probability state (the jackpot probability is high). It may be configured to shift to a state (lower than the probability state and higher than the low probability state), and may not shift to the medium probability state unless the fall lottery is won.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the contents of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 161 to 179. In the fourth embodiment described above, the fall lottery for shifting the high-probability state of the special symbol to the low-probability state (to make it fall) is executed. With this configuration, the period during which the high-probability state of the special symbol continues can be different depending on the lottery result of the fall lottery, so that the player can have the high-probability state of the special symbol for a long period of time. It was possible to play the game while expecting it to continue.

However, in the configuration of the fourth embodiment described above, since the fall lottery is executed every time the special symbol lottery (variation) is executed, the player decides whether or not the fall lottery is executed by his / her own intention. It was not possible to make a selection, which could lead to a decrease in motivation for playing. Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, a winning device (variable winning for small hits) in which a ball can be won during a small hit game executed when the lottery result of a special symbol becomes a predetermined lottery result (small hit). Device) 2650 is provided, and when it is detected that a ball has passed in the area (flow path) through which the ball won in the small hit variable winning device 2650 can pass, the high probability state of the special symbol is changed to the low probability state. The fall gate 2650e3 (see FIG. 164) is configured to be provided.

With this configuration, as in each of the above-described embodiments, the latent state in which the small hit game is frequently executed based on the special figure 2 lottery (high probability state of special symbol, low probability of normal symbol). In the state), it is possible to select whether or not the high probability state of the special symbol falls depending on whether or not the player fires during the small hit game.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the operation content (opening operation pattern) of the small hit game to be executed is configured to be different depending on the type (small hit type) when the small hit is won. Depending on the opening operation pattern to be performed, the rate at which the ball winning the small hit variable winning device 2650 passes through the fall gate 2650e3 during the small hit game is configured to be different.

By configuring in this way, the content of the small hit game to be executed is predicted in order to prevent the high probability state of the special symbol from falling and to perform the game aiming at the acquisition of the privilege (prize ball) by the small hit game. It is possible to let the player select a game while letting the player select a game.

In addition, as in the fourth embodiment described above, in the latent state set during the period when one special symbol is executing the jackpot fluctuation, a small hit is won in the other special symbol fluctuation (lottery). Even if the ball passes through the fall gate 2650e3, the high-probability state of the special symbol does not shift to the low-probability state.

As a result, in the state where the latent probability state is set, the advantageous latent probability state in which the high probability state of the special symbol does not fall (difficult) and the high probability state of the special symbol are more likely to fall than the advantageous latent probability state. It is possible to set the unfavorable probability state.

<Regarding the configuration of the game board in the fifth embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 161 to 164. In the fifth embodiment, the configuration of the right side region of the game board 13 is different from the configuration of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 2), and the configuration is replaced with the first variable winning device 65. The point that the variable winning device for small hits 2650 is provided and the point that the winning device (variable winning device for small hits 2650) that is opened during the small hit game is provided on the upstream side of the second entrance 640. Is different.

Here, the configuration of the game board 13 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 161. A variable winning device for small hits 2650 is provided in the right area of the game board 13. This variable winning device for small hits 2650 has a plurality of flow paths through which the winning sphere flows (a flow path for causing the high probability state of the special symbol to fall into the low probability state, and a high probability state of the special symbol in the low probability state). (A flow path that does not fall to) is provided, and the variable winning device for small hits 2650 is configured so that the winning ball flows down a different flow path according to the timing at which the ball wins.

The internal structure of the variable winning device for small hits 2650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 162 to 164. Next, the structure of the variable winning device for small hits 2650 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 162. FIG. 162 is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning device for small hits 2650.

As shown in FIG. 162, the small hit variable winning device 2650 is combined with the opening forming member 2650b arranged so as to project toward the front side of the game board 13 and the back side of the opening forming member 2650b, and is combined with the small hit. The base member 2650c for screwing the variable winning device 2650 to the game board 13 and the LED are lit from the back side of the base member 2650c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 arranged on the back side of the base member 2650c. An LED board 2650d in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged, a back cover body 2650e that sandwiches the LED board 2650d with a base member 2650c, and a small hit winning opening (small hit) formed in the opening forming member 2650b. Winning port) An opening / closing unit 2650f having an opening / closing door 2650f1 for opening / closing 2650a, a flow path cover body 2650g that is combined on the back side of the back cover body 2650e to form a flow path, and a back cover body 2650e and a flow path. A switching member 2650h that protrudes into the flow path formed by the cover body 2650g and switches the flow path of the game ball, a link member 2650i that is locked to the switching member 2650h, and a flow path cover body 2650g are arranged on the back surface side. The back cover body 2650j, the flow path solenoid 2650k fixed to the back side of the back cover body 2650j to operate the link member 2650i, and the flow path solenoid 2650k are covered from the back side and attached to the back cover body 2650j with screws. It is composed of a fixing cover body 2650 m for fixing.

FIG. 163 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device for small hits 2650. FIG. 163 (c) is a top view of the variable winning device for small hits 2650, and FIG. 163 (b) is a sectional view taken along line Lb-Lb of the variable winning device for small hits 2650. As shown in FIG. 163 (b), the small hit variable winning device 2650 is formed with a small hit winning opening (small hit winning opening) 2650a, which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The small hit winning opening (small hit winning opening) 2650a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, and a game ball passing through the opening is guided to the left in FIG. 163 (b). The bottom surface is formed so as to be inclined to the lower left. At the left end of the bottom surface, a detection port 2650a1 composed of a magnetic sensor (ball detection switch) 2650c1 for detecting a winning of a game ball is arranged. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 2650a1 is guided to the distribution flow path formed on the back surface side of the back cover body 2650e shown in FIG. 163 (b).

As shown in FIG. 163 (b), the opening of the small hit winning opening (small hit winning opening) 2650a can be opened by the opening / closing door 2650f1 having a shutter mechanism that can appear and disappear from the game board 13 side. It is variable to an open state and a closed state where it is impossible to enter the ball (difficult to enter the ball). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening / closing door 2650f1 so that the ball can roll over the upper part of the opening / closing door. Further, in the open state, the opening / closing door 2650f1 is configured to be retracted from the inside of the small hit winning opening (small hit winning opening) 2650a by being retracted to the inside of the base member 2650c (inside the game board 13). ing.

With this configuration, when the opening of the small hit variable winning device 2650 is closed, the ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 2650f1 of the small hit variable winning device 2650 to enter the second ball. It is configured to be guided to the mouth 640 side, and during the right-handed game (during the latent state), the ball can be entered into the second entrance 640 while the right-handed game is being performed. This makes it possible to reduce the time and effort required to change the game method to a left-handed game during a latent state in which a small hit game is frequently executed. Therefore, the game can be played more easily.

Further, in the open state, the surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball flows down can be configured as the opening of the small hit variable winning device 2650, so that more game balls can be efficiently used as the small hit winning opening (small). Winning prize opening) It is possible to win a prize within 2650a. Therefore, the ball can be reliably won by the variable winning device for small hits 2650 during the small hit game, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

FIG. 163 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line La-La shown in FIG. 163 (b). As shown in FIG. 163 (a), the magnetic sensor 2650c1 having the detection port 2650a1 is fixed to the base member 2650c so that the detection port 2650a1 is tilted toward the distribution flow path side of the back cover body 2650e.

Next, with reference to FIG. 164, a configuration will be described in which the sphere guided to the distribution flow path of the back cover body 2650e is distributed to the normal discharge flow path 2650e1 and the special discharge flow path 2650e2, which will be described later.

FIG. 164A is a rear view of the back cover body 2650e showing a state in which the switching member 2650h is operated so that the ball is distributed to the special exhaust flow path 2650e2. As shown in FIG. 164 (a), the switching member 2650h has a locking hole 2650h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 2650i is inserted and a guide piece 2650h2 for guiding the ball, and is provided in the flow path cover body 2650g. It is rotatably supported from the back side. Here, the flow path cover body 2650 g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 2650 h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 2650 h is rotated into the distribution flow path from the back surface side of the flow path cover body 2650 g. It is configured so that it can be placed as possible.

As shown in FIG. 164 (a), the sphere guided into the distribution flow path from the detection port 2650a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 2650h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge flow path 2650e2. .. The special discharge flow path 2650e2 flows down the fall route through which the inflowing ball passes through the fall gate (fall switch) 2650e3 and the second normal discharge flow path 2650e5 branched from the special discharge flow path 2650e2, and flows down the second normal discharge flow path 2650e5. 2 Normal switch) A fall switch 2650e3 or a second normal switch 2650e6 that is configured to have a second normal route that passes through 2650e6 and can detect the passage of a ball that has flowed into the special discharge flow path 2650e2. After being detected, it is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball.

Here, the details will be described later, but in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, when the above-mentioned fall switch 2650e3 detects a ball during the small hit game, that is, when the ball passes through the fall route, a special symbol is provided. The high-probability state of is configured to shift (fall) to the low-probability state. That is, the fall gate (fall switch) 2650e3 is configured as a trigger for shifting the special symbol from the high probability state to the low probability state. Further, the switching member 2650h is a flow path (special discharge flow path 2650e2) that can pass through the fall gate (fall switch) 2650e3 as a flow path of the ball that has won the small hit variable winning device 2650 during the small hit. It is for setting any flow path (normal discharge flow path 2650e1) that cannot (difficultly) pass through the gate (fall switch) 2650e3, and by setting the flow path solenoid 2650k to ON. The ball that has won the small hit variable winning device 2650 is configured to switch the flow path so as to flow down the special discharge flow path 2650e2 (see FIG. 164 (a)).

In the pachinko machine 10 used in the present embodiment, the flow path solenoid 2650k is set to off during normal game play, and the ball winning the small hit variable winning device 2650 has a special discharge flow path 2650e2. It is configured to flow down. Therefore, when an illegal state such as the opening / closing door 2650f1 of the variable winning device for small hits 2650 is opened to win a ball even though the small hit game is not being executed, the illegally won ball is a fall switch. It is configured to pass through 2650e3.

In this way, the state in which the flow path solenoid 2650k is set to off is set to a state in which the pachinko machine 10 is maintained for a long period of time, and further, the flow path configuration (variable winning device for small hits 2650) that is disadvantageous to the player By adopting a flow path configuration in which the winning ball can pass through the fall switch 2650e3), the power consumption of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed, and a penalty can be imposed on the game in which the illegal game is performed.

In this way, since it is determined whether or not the high probability state of the special symbol ends depending on the flow route in which the ball that has won the small hit variable winning device 2650 flows down during the small hit game, the game is also played during the small hit game. It is possible to improve the interest of the person. It should be noted that the small hit winning opening (small hit winning opening) 2650a of the small hit variable winning device 2650 passes through the entrance of the special discharge flow path 2650e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 2650h2 of the switching member 2650h). The required time consists of at least 1 second.

Further, at the end of the normal discharge flow path 2650e1, a discharge confirmation switch (normal switch) 2650e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a sphere is provided. As a result, it can be determined from the total number of ball detections of the normal switch 2650e4, the second fall switch 2650e6, and the fall switch 2650e3 whether or not all the winning balls have been ejected in the small hit variable winning device 2650. That is, the number of balls detected by the ball winning switch 2650c1 (the number of balls won in the variable winning device for small hits 2650) and various switches (normal switch 2650e4, second falling switch 2650e6, falling switch) provided in the three discharge areas. By comparing the number of balls detected by each of the 2650e3) (the number of balls ejected from the variable winning device for small hits 2650), it is determined whether or not the balls remain in the variable winning device for small hits 2650. can do.

The end timing of the small hit game (the end condition of the small hit game (when a predetermined number (10 pieces) of prizes are given to the small hit variable winning device 2650, or the opening scenario of the small hit variable winning device 2650) If all the game balls that have entered the variable winning device for small hits 2650 have not been ejected at the timing when the small hit ending period that is executed after) is established), the variable for small hits It is preferable to determine that the abnormality is inside the winning device 2650, notify the abnormality to the outside, or stop the game so that the big hit game or the normal game is not started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from progressing in a state where an abnormality has occurred in a part of the pachinko machine 10 and a secondary abnormality from occurring.

In this way, the ball that has won the small hit winning opening (small hit winning opening) 2650a of the small hit variable winning device 2650 is detected by the ball winning switch 2650c1, and based on this, the prize ball (book) is given to the player as a privilege. In the embodiment, 10 prize balls are paid out for one ball prize, and whether the ball passes through the fall switch 2650e3 by using the detected ball (passed through the ball prize switch 2650c1). By configuring it so that it can be sorted, it is possible to determine whether or not the high probability state of the special symbol ends during the small hit game. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated area for shifting the high-probability state of the special symbol to the low-probability state separately from the variable winning device for small hits 2650, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

Next, the flow of the game in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 165 and 166. First, with reference to FIG. 165, the flow of the game when the jackpot of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is won in the state where the probabilistic state is set as the game state will be described. FIG. 165 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the special figure 1 jackpot is won during the probability change state.

As shown in FIG. 165, in the fifth embodiment, if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the special figure 1 in a state where the probability variation state is set as in the above-mentioned fourth embodiment, the jackpot is latent during the jackpot fluctuation. The state is configured to be set (see FIG. 165 (a)). Then, during the period when the latent probability state is set (during special figure 1 big hit fluctuation), the small hit game is performed by performing a right-handed game in order to execute the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2). It is configured to execute a latent state game (RUSH game) that is frequently executed.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result after winning the jackpot in the lottery of the special symbol during the jackpot fluctuation period of one special symbol (for example, special figure 1). The period up to) is configured so that the jackpot will not be won in the lottery of the other special symbol (for example, special figure 2). As a result, during the jackpot fluctuation period of one special symbol (for example, special figure 1), the jackpot is won by lottery of the other special symbol (for example, special figure 2), and based on the jackpot winning of the other special symbol. By starting the jackpot game, it is possible to prevent the period in which the latent probability state is set from being shortened. That is, in the fifth embodiment, the latent state game (RUSH game) is surely performed during the latent state setting period (for example, the jackpot fluctuation time of the special figure 1) set in advance when the latent state is set. ) Can be executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in a state where the high probability state of the special symbol is set, during the jackpot fluctuation period of one special symbol (for example, special symbol 1) (after winning the jackpot by lottery of the special symbol). , The period until the big hit game is executed based on the lottery result), even if the ball passes through the fall switch 2650e3 in the variable winning device for small hits 2650, the high probability state of the special symbol becomes the low probability state. It is configured to be a period during which there is no transition (fall invalid period).

Therefore, if the latent probability state is set during the special figure 1 fluctuation that is won by the jackpot, the special figure 1 fluctuation period becomes the fall invalid period, so that the high probability state of the special symbol ends. It is possible to execute a latent state game (RUSH game) without worrying about it. Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in the present embodiment, the latent state is set based on the jackpot winning in Special Figure 1 (the latent state is set based on the establishment of the first latent transition condition). It is configured to determine whether or not to execute an invincible effect (see FIG. 169) that notifies the player of what has been done.

By configuring to execute this invincible effect (see FIG. 169), it is possible to easily make the player know that the fall invalid period is set in the currently set latent state, so that the player can be informed. It is possible to play a latent state game (RUSH game) with peace of mind. Further, in the fifth embodiment, even in the latent state in which the fall invalid period is set, the above-mentioned invincible effect may not be executed. With this configuration, in the latent state game in which the invincible effect (see FIG. 169) is not executed, the fall invalid period may actually be set, so that the ball is made small during the small hit game. When the winning variable winning device 2650 is won, the rate of falling can be reduced.

Then, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation elapses (see FIG. 165 (b)), the high-probability state of the special symbol shifts to the low-probability state. If the small hit game is not executed at this timing, the big hit game is started. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 165, when the small hit game is executed at the timing when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation has elapsed, the start of the big hit game is postponed until the small hit game is completed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with a game that is difficult to understand because the big hit game is started during the execution of the small hit game.

The same gaming state (normal state) as during the jackpot game is set for the interruption period from the lapse of the fluctuation time of the special hit 1 jackpot fluctuation shown in FIG. 165 to the start of the jackpot game. In the fifth embodiment, if the small hit game is executed at the timing when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation has elapsed, the start of the big hit game is suspended (postponed) until the small hit game is completed. ), But it is sufficient to control so that the small hit game and the big hit game are not executed at the same time. For example, the small hit game is executed at the timing when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation has elapsed. If so, it may be configured to forcibly end the running small hit game.

Further, although detailed description is omitted, in this embodiment as well as in each of the above-described embodiments, a small hit is won with one special symbol (special figure 2), and the small hit game is executed. During the period, the measurement of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol (special figure 1) is interrupted.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the latent probability state (advantageous latent probability state) set based on the jackpot winning of Special Figure 1 is set as the fall invalid period, so that a special symbol is given to the player. It is possible to entertain the latent state game (RUSH game) without worrying about the end of the high probability state of. Further, the small hit game started during the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed to the end.

Next, with reference to FIG. 166, the flow of the game when the predetermined number of time reductions is exhausted in the state where the probability change state is set as the game state will be described. FIG. 166 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when all the time reduction times are exhausted during the probability change state.

As shown in FIG. 166, in the fifth embodiment, since the subtraction of the time reduction number is performed at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, the value of the counter (time reduction counter 203f) for continuously setting the time reduction state is set. When it becomes 0, the latent probability state is set from the execution special figure 1 fluctuation (see FIG. 166 (a)). As shown in FIG. 166, the latent state set by digesting a predetermined number of time reductions is configured so that the fall lottery during the latent state period is effectively determined. Therefore, in the small hit game executed during the latent state game (RUSH), there is a possibility that the high probability state of the special symbol will be terminated by the ball that has been won by the variable winning device (variable winning device for small hit 2650). There is a disadvantageous probability state.

<Regarding the content of the production performed in the fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 167 to 169, the characteristic effect contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fifth embodiment will be described. It should be noted that the mode of the effect executed during the probability change state in order to suggest whether or not the latent probability state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is set is the effect described in each of the above-described embodiments. Since it is the same as the embodiment, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 167 (a), the effect content displayed when a small hit is won in a state where the latent probability state is set will be described. FIG. 167 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents when a small hit is won in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 167 (a), the special figure 1 display area Dm1 displays a display mode indicating that the first special symbol (special figure 1) is variablely displayed, and the special figure 2 display area Dm2 displays a display mode. Displays a display mode (“341”) indicating that the second special symbol (special figure 2) has won a small hit. Then, in the guidance display area Dm3, "right-handed" for guiding the game method in the latent state is displayed.

Then, in the main display area Dm, the character 811 is displayed in a display mode for notifying that the small hit has been won, and the character "GET" is displayed. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "The small hit game will start" indicating that the small hit game is started is displayed.

When the small hit game is started, the display screen of FIG. 167 (b) is displayed. FIG. 167 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display contents during the small hit game. According to the figure shown in FIG. 167 (b), the display mode shown in FIG. 167 (a) described above, that is, the display showing that the special figure 1 is variablely displayed, is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. Although the aspect is displayed, in reality, the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is interrupted during the small hit game. In addition, unlike the display mode shown in FIG. 167 (b), the state in which the special figure 1 is appropriately variable-displayed (the state in which the variable time is subtracted) and the variable display in the special figure 1 are interrupted. It may be configured so that the display mode displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 is different from that in the state (the state in which the fluctuation time is not subtracted).

Then, in the main display area Dm, the effect mode in which the character 811 runs from the left direction to the right direction and the treasure box 812 appears from the traveling direction is displayed. In the present embodiment, the effect of opening the treasure box 812 displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is executed during the small hit game, and the effect of this time is determined by the display mode of the effect symbol 813 appearing from the treasure box 812. It is configured to notify the player of the result of the winning game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 168 (a) and 168 (b), display contents for showing the game result of the small hit game in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 168 (a) shows the display content when the ball is won by the variable winning device for small hit 2650 during the small hit game, the fall switch 2650e3 detects the ball, and the high probability state of the special symbol ends. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example, and FIG. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example.

In FIG. 168 (a), the effect symbol 813 indicating the “cross mark” is displayed from the treasure box 812, and the character 811 shifts from the high-probability state of the special symbol to the low-probability state during the small hit game. It is displayed in the failure display mode shown. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment indicating that the latent state game (RUSH game) ends and the game method returns to the left-handed game is displayed. That is, the game state is latent by shifting the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state during the latent state (high probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) in which the RUSH game is performed. In order to shift from the state to the normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), a comment for executing the left-handed game is displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

On the other hand, in FIG. 168 (b), an effect symbol 813 indicating “V” is displayed from the treasure box 812, and a display mode for notifying the player that the RUSH game is continuously executed (that is, left). The character 811 is displayed in the display mode) running from to the right.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect corresponding to the game result during the small hit game executed during the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed by the third symbol display device 81. The player can easily grasp the progress of the latent state game (RUSH game) only by grasping the effect content executed by the third symbol display device 81.

In the present embodiment, the ball winning the small hit variable winning device 2650 during the small hit game is the probability change switch 2650e3 according to the type of the small hit game executed during the latent state game (RUSH game). The ratio (possibility) of flowing down the special discharge flow path 2650e2 provided with the above is different.

Therefore, for example, on the display screen at the time of winning the small hit shown using FIG. 167 (a), the player selects whether or not to make the variable winning device for small hit 2650 win the ball in the small hit game this time. It is configured to display comments (for example, "RUSH ends if you are unlucky with a small hit", "Stop launching if you are uneasy"), and the character displayed when you win a small hit. The display mode of 811 may be configured to be variable depending on whether or not the small hit type won this time is a small hit that makes it easy to end the latent state game (RUSH game).

With this configuration, the player can select whether or not to make the small hit variable winning device 2650 win the ball during the small hit game. Further, in the fifth embodiment in which the latent probability state is set only for a predetermined period (special figure 1 fluctuation time), the number of small hit games that can be executed during the latent probability state is limited, so that the player On the other hand, it is possible to play a game while thinking about whether to acquire a privilege (prize ball) during a small hit game or to avoid the end of a latent state game (RUSH game), which is a novel game. Can provide sex.

Further, even if it is configured to notify the player of the type of the small hit game being executed by the display mode of the treasure box 812 displayed on the display screen during the small hit game shown with reference to FIG. 167 (b). Well, for example, the smaller the type of small hit that is being executed is the type of small hit that makes it easier to end the latent state game (RUSH game), the better it is configured so that the old and tattered treasure chest 812 is displayed. It is preferable to display comments according to the display mode of the treasure box 812. Further, the display mode displayed during the small hit game is more specific than the content suggesting the small hit type (RUSH game continuation expectation degree) won this time to the player when the small hit is won. It is advisable to configure the player to be notified of such (highly reliable) content.

With this configuration, for the player who has selected whether or not to make the small hit variable winning device 2650 win the ball in this small hit game based on the display screen displayed at the time of winning the small hit. Since it is possible to show a more specific RUSH continuation expectation degree, it is possible for the player to predict whether or not the selected game content is correct.

In this case, in particular, it was emphasized that the RUSH game was a small hit type in which it was difficult for the player who chose not to win the ball in the variable winning device for small hits 2650 to finish the RUSH game even if the ball was won. It is good to configure it so that it can be notified. Specifically, the small hit type determining means for determining the type of the small hit game this time, and whether or not the ball has won the small hit variable winning device 2650 within a predetermined period from the start of the small hit game. (Or a means for determining that the right-handed game has been executed after the small hit winning) is provided, and the determination result by the small hit type determination means is the small hit type in which the RUSH game is difficult to end. In this case, if it is determined that the ball has not won the small hit variable winning device 2650 within a predetermined period from the start of the small hit game, it is better to fire the ball in this small hit game. It is advisable to provide a display means to display a fanning comment (for example, "I should have fired a ball", "Weakling") indicating that it was acquired.

As a result, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the ball was not won by the variable winning device for small hits 2650, so that the player can be positively notified of the loss during the small hits game. It is possible to urge the variable winning device 2650 to win a ball. In other words, when the RUSH game is completed by having the variable winning device for small hits 2650 win a ball, the game shows that the selection was unsuccessful based on the game result, even if the fanning by the production was not executed. Although the player can be aware of it, the player who chooses not to win the ball in the small hit variable winning device 2650 cannot be aware of whether or not the selection result of this time is advantageous, so the selection result is selected by the display means. By displaying the evaluation of, the player can easily grasp whether or not this selection is successful.

Further, a display mode for notifying the player who has selected not to win the ball in the variable winning device for small hits 2650 that the small hit type this time is the small hit type in which the RUSH game is likely to end. (For example, "Stop firing and get a great answer", "I feel good") may be displayed, and even if the small hit type this time is a small hit type where the RUSH game is easy to end, this time. In the small hit game, you may display a fan comment (for example, "I should have fired the ball", "Weakling") indicating that you could get the privilege by firing the ball.

Next, with reference to FIG. 169, the display content of the effect of notifying that the fall invalid period is set in the latent probability state (advantageous latent probability state) will be described. FIG. 169 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display content displayed at the end of the small hit in the advantageous latent probability state. As shown in FIG. 169, when the currently set latent state is the advantageous latent state in which the fall invalid period is set, the same latent mode setting process as in the above-described fourth embodiment (FIG. 154). When the invincible mode is set as the current latent mode in (see S4451), the effect mode (“invincible mode”) indicating that the latent state currently set for the player is the advantageous latent state. Is displayed.

When the character 811 enters the invincible mode, the display mode of the character 811 becomes a display mode dedicated to the invincible mode (a display mode in which an aura is wrapped around the display mode). Then, "lucky point x 0" is displayed as the cumulative display mode 819 of the number of balls that have passed through the fall gate 2650e3 during the invincible mode. This cumulative display mode 819 corresponds to a command indicating the number of balls detected by the fall switch 2650e3 output from the main control device 110 (a command indicating the number of falls if the fall invalid period is not set). The numbers are displayed. As a result, it is possible to easily inform the player of the situation in which the invincible mode has worked in favor of the player.

Although not shown in the figure of FIG. 169, the small hit number display 825 displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 may be displayed in the above-described fourth embodiment, and the small hit number display 825 may be displayed. And the cumulative display mode 819 may be displayed together. In addition, the non-game number measuring means for measuring the number of small hit games in which the player did not make the ball win in the small hit variable winning device 2650 and the number of times measured by the non-game number measuring means are displayed on the display means. It may be configured to do so.

With this configuration, for example, for all the small hit games executed during the latent state game (RUSH game), the number of small hit games in which the player has executed the game and the player can play the game. Since it is possible to easily grasp the number of small hit games that have not been executed, it can be used as a reference for future RUSH games.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the fifth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 170 to 173. First, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 170. FIG. 170 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 170, the ROM 202 of the fifth embodiment is provided with the small hit type selection table 202da instead of the small hit type selection table 202e for the ROM 202 of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the operation scenario storage area 202db is added. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the small hit type selection 5 table 202da will be described with reference to FIG. 171. FIG. 171 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the small hit type selection 5 table 202da. The fifth embodiment is configured to win a small hit only for the second special symbol (special figure 2), and when the small hit is won in the lottery of the special figure 2, the small hit type selection 5 table The small hit type is selected with reference to 202da.

In the small hit type selection 5 table 202da, the corresponding small hit type is defined for each range of the value of the small hit type counter C5, and as shown in FIG. 171 (a), the value of the small hit type counter C5. However, in the range of "0 to 14", "small hit A" is defined in association with each other. This "small hit A" is a small hit type in which the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set to the open state for 1.5 seconds after the opening period of 1.5 seconds has elapsed during the small hit game. After the opening state of 1.5 seconds has elapsed, an ending period of 0.5 seconds is set, but since this ending period is the same for all small hit types, FIG. 171 (a) shows. Omit.

Further, in the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "15 to 59", "small hit B" is defined in association with it. This "small hit B" is performed after the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set to the open state (first open setting) for 0.1 seconds after the opening period of 0.5 seconds has elapsed during the small hit game. It is a small hit type that sets the open state for 1.4 seconds (second open setting) after an interval period of 1 second. After the second opening setting, an ending period of 0.5 seconds is set, but since this ending period is the same for all small hit types, it is omitted in FIG. 171 (a).

In the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "60 to 79", "small hit C" is defined in association with it. This "small hit C" is obtained after the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set to the open state (first open setting) for 0.5 seconds after the opening period of 0.1 seconds has elapsed during the small hit game. It is a small hit type that sets an open state for 0.1 seconds (second open setting) after an interval period of 1 second. After the second opening setting, an ending period of 0.5 seconds is set, but since this ending period is the same for all small hit types, it is omitted in FIG. 171 (a).

In the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "80 to 99", "small hit D" is defined in association with each other. This "small hit D" is performed after the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set to the open state (first open setting) for 0.5 seconds after the opening period of 0.1 seconds has elapsed during the small hit game. , It is a small hit type that sets the open state for 1 second (second open setting) after an interval period of 0.3 seconds. After the second opening setting, an ending period of 0.5 seconds is set, but since this ending period is the same for all small hit types, it is omitted in FIG. 171 (a).

The operation scenario storage area 202db is a data area in which the operation scenario of the flow path solenoid 2650h during the small hit game is stored in advance, and the flow path solenoid 2650h performs the same operation regardless of the type of small hit to be executed. One motion scenario is set to execute.

Here, the contents of the operation scenario stored in the operation scenario storage area 202db will be described with reference to FIG. 171 (b). FIG. 171 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the operation scenario defined in the operation scenario storage area 202db. As shown in FIG. 171 (b), the operation scenario storage area 202db defines an operation scenario set according to the start timing of the small hit game.

Specifically, it is stipulated that the flow path solenoid 2650h is set to off until 1.4 seconds have passed from the start timing of the small hit, and from 1.4 seconds after the start of the small hit to the end of the small hit. It is specified that the flow path solenoid 2650h is set to ON during the period of. The operation scenario in which the operation content of the flow path solenoid 2650h is defined is a scenario in which a value is incremented by 1 each time the main processing of the main control device 110 executed every 4 milliseconds is executed. It is managed by a counter (not shown).

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the small hit type selected and the flow path solenoid determine whether or not the ball winning the small hit variable winning device 2650 flows down the special discharge flow path 2650e2. It is configured to be variably set according to the operation scenario of 2650h. Further, the ball flowing down the special discharge flow path 2650e2 is branched into a ball passing through the fall gate 2650e3 and a ball not passing through (second normal switch 2650e6) by the internal structure of the variable winning device for small hits 2650. It is configured in.

Specifically, in the small hit game in which "small hit A" is set as the small hit type, the opening period (1.5 seconds) is the period in which the flow path solenoid 2650h is set to off (1 from the start of the small hit). Since it is set longer than (4 seconds), the ball does not pass through the fall route, and the small hit game that is most advantageous to the player who is set to have a long opening period is executed.

In the small hit game in which "small hit B" to "small hit D" are set as the small hit types, the first opening period is the timing at which the winning ball can pass through the fall route. Further, "small hit C" and "small hit D" have a short opening period of 0.1 seconds (shorter than "small hit B"), and. Since the first opening period is as long as 0.5 seconds (because it is longer than "small hit B"), it is a small hit game in which the ball easily passes through the fall route.

In addition, "small hit C" is the most disadvantageous small for the player because the period in which the first attacker (first variable winning device) 65 is released in one opening operation is as short as 0.6 seconds. It will be a winning game. In the fifth embodiment, it takes about 0.5 seconds for the ball launched by the right-handed game to win the small hit variable winning device 2650 and reach the distribution flow path distributed by the flow path solenoid 2650h. It is configured so that the symbol determination period of the special symbol at the time of winning a small hit is 0.5 seconds.

Therefore, the small hit game is started by stopping the right-handed game immediately after the third symbol indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 167 (a)). At this point, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a ball fired before stopping the right-handed game wins the small hit variable winning device 2650.

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 172. FIG. 172 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 172, the RAM 203 of the fifth embodiment is different from the RAM 203 of the fourth embodiment in that the small hit winning counter 203da, the fall passage counter 203db, and the passage flag 203dc are added. is doing. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The small hit winning counter 203da is a counter for measuring the number of balls won in the small hit variable winning device 2650 during the small hit game, and passes through the balls in the small hit entrance passing process (see S171 in FIG. 174). When it is determined that the timing when the sensor (ball detection switch 2650c1) is on is during the opening period of the small hit winning opening 2650a (S3302: Yes in FIG. 174), the value is added by 1 and after the addition. The winning number command corresponding to the information indicating the value of is set (S3305 in FIG. 174). Then, when it is determined in the small hit control process 5 (see S2271 in FIG. 176) that it is the end timing of the small hit game (S2511: yes in FIG. 176), the value of the counter is cleared.

Although detailed description will be described later, in the fifth embodiment, the latent state continues on the voice lamp control device 113 side based on the winning number command set corresponding to the value of the small hit winning counter 203da. The number of balls won in the variable winning device for small hits 2650 is accumulated during the set period. As a result, the number of winning balls in one latent state game (RUSH game) can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, as described above, the player has the game property of selecting whether or not the ball is to be won by the variable winning device for small hits 2650 during the small hit game. Depending on the selection content of the player, the cumulative value of the number of balls won by the variable winning device for small hits 2650 may differ greatly even if the number of small hit games is the same. Therefore, it is possible to provide a detailed game result by displaying the number of balls won in the variable winning device for small hits 2650 instead of the number of times the small hit game is executed.

In addition, both the number of balls won in the above-mentioned variable winning device for small hits 2650 and the number of times the small hit game is executed are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or a prize is won during one small hit game. The average value of the number of balls may be displayed, or the number of winnings may be displayed as a winning history for each small hit type of the executed small hit game.

The fall passage counter 203db is a counter for measuring the number of balls that have passed through the fall gate 2650e3 during the small hit game, and the fall switch 2650e3 detects the balls in the fall gate passing process (see S172 in FIG. 175). (S3402: Yes in FIG. 175), the value is added by 1 (S3403 in FIG. 175), and the pass number command is set with the information corresponding to the added value (S3404 in FIG. 175). Then, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit game (S2511: yes in FIG. 176), the value of the counter is cleared.

In the present embodiment, when the state update restriction flag 203ca is set to on, that is, when the advantageous latent probability state is set, the number of balls passing through the fall route is always counted. .. As a result, when the "invincible mode" is set as the latent probability mode, the high probability state of the special symbol shifts to the low probability state (fall route) when the advantageous latent probability state is not set. The number of balls played can be notified to the player (see the cumulative display mode 819 in FIG. 169).

The pass flag 203dc indicates that the fall switch 2650e3 has detected the ball when the fall switch 2650e3 has detected the ball effectively (when the state update limit flag 203ca is set to off). This flag is set to ON to indicate that the fall switch 2650e3 has detected a sphere.

This pass flag 203dc is used when it is determined in the fall gate passage process (see S172 in FIG. 175) that the ball has passed through the fall gate 2650e3 and the state update restriction flag 203ca is set to off (S3405 in FIG. 175). : No) Set to on. Then, when the passing flag 203dc is set to ON, the process of determining whether or not a new ball has passed the falling gate 2650e3 in the falling gate passing process (see S172 in FIG. 175) is skipped. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the process for dropping the high-probability state of the special symbol is executed a plurality of times during one small hit game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 173, the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 173 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 173, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment has a winning number counter 223da and a passing number counter 223db with respect to the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment described above. And are different in that they are added, and they are the same except for that. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The winning number counter 223da is a counter for measuring the number of balls won in the small hit variable winning device 2650 during the small hit game, and is the main control device 110 in the ball passing related processing (see S4582 in FIG. 179). When it is determined that the winning number command has been received from (S8101: Yes in FIG. 179), the value is added by 1, and the information corresponding to the added value is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Set a number command (see S8106 in FIG. 179).

Then, when the gaming state shifts from the latent state to the normal state, the value of the counter is cleared. That is, the winning number counter 223da is a ball that has won the small hit variable winning device 2650 in a plurality of small hit games executed until the latent state is set once the latent state is set. It is configured so that the numbers can be accumulated and measured.

The pass count counter 223db is a counter for measuring the number of balls that have passed through the fall gate 2650e3, and is determined to have received the pass count command from the main control device 110 in the ball pass-related processing (see S4582 in FIG. 179). In this case (S8107: Yes in FIG. 179), the value is added by 1 when the current latent state is the advantageous latent state (see S8110 in FIG. 179).

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the fifth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 174 to 175. The control process of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment is a small hit control process 5 (see FIG. 55) instead of the small hit control process (see FIG. 55) for the control process of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the small hit entrance passage process (see FIG. 174) and the fall gate passage process (see FIG. 175) are executed. Other than that, the same processing is executed. The same processing is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 174, the small hit entrance passage process (S171) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit entrance passing process (S171).

In the small hit entrance passage process (S171), first, it is determined whether or not the ball passage sensor is on (S3301). If it is determined that the ball passage sensor is not on (S3301: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball passing sensor is on (S3301: Yes), it is determined whether the small hit winning opening is in the opening period (S3302). If it is determined that the winning opening for small hits is being opened (S3302: Yes), a command for passing through the small hit entrance is set (S3303). The small hit entrance passage command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is directed to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 201. Will be sent. 1 is added to the value of the small hit winning counter 203da (S3304). Next, in the process of S3304, a winning number command is set based on the value of the small hit winning counter 203da after addition (S3305), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3302, if it is determined that the winning opening for small hits is not open (S3302: No), an error command is set (S3306), and the flow path solenoid is set to off (S3307). , End this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 175, the fall gate passing process (S172) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fall gate passing process (S172).

In the fall gate passing process (S172), first, it is determined whether or not the passing flag 203dc is on (S3401). If it is determined that the pass flag 203dc is on (S3401: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the passage flag 203dc is not on (S3401: No), it is determined whether or not there is passage in the fall gate (S3402). If it is determined that there is no passage through the fall gate (S3402: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a passage in the fall gate (S3402: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the fall passage counter 203db (S3403), and the number of passages is based on the value of the fall passage counter 203db after the addition. Set the command (S3404). Next, it is determined whether or not the state update restriction flag 203ca is on (S3405). If it is determined that the state update restriction flag 203ca is on (S3405: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the state update restriction flag is not on (S3405: No), it is determined whether or not the fall gate passage is in the valid period (S3406). When it is determined that the fall gate passage is in the valid period (S3406: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is set to off (S3407) and the passage flag 203dc is set to on (S3408). Next, a fall command is set (S3409), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3406, if it is determined that the period is not during the fall gate passage valid period (S3406: No), an error command is set (S3410), and this process is terminated.

Next, the small hit control process 5 (S2271) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 176. FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit control process 5 (S2271). When the small hit control process 5 (S2271) determines that it is the timing of the end of the small hit in the process of S2511 with respect to the small hit control process (S2205) in the first embodiment described above (S2511: No. ) The difference is that the values of the small hit winning counter 203da and the fall passing counter 203db are cleared (S2571), and the passing flag 203dc is set to off (S2572). Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 177 to 179, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. The control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment is a state command process (see FIG. 62) with respect to the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first to fourth embodiments described above. The difference is that the state command process 5 (see FIG. 177) is executed instead of the hit-related process 5 (see FIG. 178), the hit-related process 5 (see FIG. 178) is executed instead of the hit-related process (see FIG. 63), and the ball passage-related process (see FIG. 179) is executed. Other than that, the same processing is executed. The same processing is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the state command process 5 (S4921) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 177. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the contents of the state command process 5 (S4921). The state command process 5 (S4921) performs a process (S4471) for clearing the winning number counter 223da and the passing number counter 223db instead of the processing of S4454 for the state command process 4 (S4281) in the fourth embodiment described above. It differs in that it is added. Since other processes are the same as the state command process 4 (S4281) in the fourth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the hit-related process 5 (S4292) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 178. FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit-related process 5 (S4292). The hit-related process 5 (S4292) differs from the hit-related process (S4216) in the first embodiment described above in that a process related to ball passage is added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the hit-related process 5 (S4292), if it is determined that the prize ball command has not been received from the main control device 110 in the process of S4505 (S4505: No), it is determined whether or not the ball passage-related command has been received. (S4581). If it is determined that the ball passage-related command has been received (S4581: Yes), the ball passage-related process (S4582) is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball passage related command has not been received (S4581: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 179, a ball passage-related process (S4582), which is one process in the hit-related process 5 (S4922) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ball passage-related processing (S4582).

In the ball passage-related processing (S4582), first, it is determined whether or not the winning number command has been received from the main control device 110 this time (S8101). When it is determined that the winning number command has been received (S8101: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter 223da (S8102), and the latent mode stored in the latent mode storage area 223cc is read out. Execute (S8103). Next, it is determined whether the latent mode read in the process of S8103 is the invincible mode (S8104). When it is determined that the mode is not invincible (S8104: No), a suggestion effect suggesting the end of the latent state is set (S8105), a winning number command for display is set (S8106), and this process is terminated. .. On the other hand, in the process of S8104, when it is determined that the read latent mode is the invincible mode (S8104: Yes), the process of S8105 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S8106.

On the other hand, in the process of S8101 when it is determined that the winning number command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S8101: No), it is determined whether or not the passing number command has been received (S8107). When it is determined that the pass count command has been received (S8107: Yes), the value stored in the state setting area 223j is read out (S8108). Next, in the process of S8108, it is determined whether or not the read value is a value indicating the time saving latency (S8109). When it is determined that the read value is a value indicating the time saving latency (S8109: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the passing number counter 223db (S8110). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8109 that the read value is not a value indicating the time saving latency (S8109: No), the process of S8110 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S8111.

Next, the latent mode stored in the latent mode storage area 223 cab is read out (S8111). Next, it is determined whether the latent mode read in the process of S8111 is an invincible mode (S8112). When it is determined that the mode is not invincible (S8112: No), a suggestion effect suggesting the end of the latent state is set (S8113), a display pass count command is set (S8114), and this process is terminated. .. On the other hand, in the process of S8112, if it is determined that the read latent mode is the invincible mode (S8112: Yes), the process of S8113 is skipped, the process of S8114 is executed, and the present process is terminated.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the operation content (opening operation pattern) of the small hit game to be executed differs depending on the type (small hit type) when the small hit is won. Depending on the opening operation pattern to be executed, the rate at which the ball winning the small hit variable winning device 2650 passes through the fall gate 2650e3 during the small hit game is configured to be different.

By configuring in this way, the content of the small hit game to be executed is predicted in order to prevent the high probability state of the special symbol from falling and to perform the game aiming at the acquisition of the privilege (prize ball) by the small hit game. It is possible to let the player select a game while letting the player select a game.

In addition, as in the fourth embodiment described above, in the latent state set during the period when one special symbol is executing the jackpot fluctuation, a small hit is won in the other special symbol fluctuation (lottery). Even if the ball passes through the fall gate 2650e3, the high-probability state of the special symbol does not shift to the low-probability state.

As a result, in the state where the latent probability state is set, the advantageous latent probability state in which the high probability state of the special symbol does not fall (difficult) and the high probability state of the special symbol are more likely to fall than the advantageous latent probability state. It is possible to set the unfavorable probability state.

In each of the above embodiments, the process of updating the value of the time reduction counter 203f (process of subtracting the number of time reductions) is the timing at which the variation of the special symbol is started (for example, the first special symbol variation start process (see S208 in FIG. 33)). ), So that the first special symbol change (lottery) and the second special symbol change (lottery) can be executed at the same time in a gaming machine for a predetermined number of times. , It is configured to execute a time-saving game (a game in which a high probability state of a normal symbol is set), but for example, when setting 100 to the value of the time-saving counter 203f (when setting 100 times of time-saving). ), There is a problem that the period from the start of the 100th special symbol change to the start of the 101st special symbol change becomes a non-time saving state (low probability state of a normal symbol).

During the period when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the lottery (variation) that is advantageous to the player can be executed even in the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol different from the special symbol. The period from the start of the 100th special symbol change to the start of the 101st special symbol change, that is, the period from the start of the number of special symbol changes exceeding the predetermined time reduction number. There is a problem that the player is uncomfortable due to the setting of the non-time saving state.

However, if the process of updating the value of the time reduction counter 203f (the process of subtracting the number of time reductions) is configured to be updated at the timing when the variation display of the special symbol ends (the timing when the symbol confirmation period ends), In a gaming machine that can simultaneously execute the first special symbol change (lottery) and the second special symbol change (lottery), the time saving state sets the special symbol change (lottery) more than a predetermined number of times. There was a problem that it was executed in the state where it was done.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the time saving end condition is applied to the special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) corresponding to the special symbol lottery (100th time saving) executed when the value of the time saving counter 203f becomes 0. (1st time reduction end condition) is set, and the time reduction end condition (2nd time reduction end condition) is also set for the other special symbol (for example, the 2nd special symbol), and the set two time reduction end conditions are set. Of these, the time saving state may be terminated based on the time saving ending condition that was established earlier.

Specifically, when a predetermined period (for example, 100 times of time reduction) is set as the period for which the time reduction state is set, the special symbol change corresponding to the final change of the time reduction state (for example, the 100th time reduction) ends. The first time-saving end condition that is satisfied as a result, and the second time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the condition for starting a new special symbol change (for example, the 101st special symbol change) that is newly executed after a predetermined period is satisfied are satisfied. And, if the first time reduction end condition is satisfied first, that is, by the time the 101st special symbol change is started, the 100th special symbol change period (or symbol confirmation period) has ended. In that case, the time saving state is terminated at that point.

On the other hand, when the second time reduction end condition is satisfied before the first time reduction end condition is satisfied, that is, before the 100th special symbol change period (or symbol determination period) ends (special). If the condition for starting the 101st special symbol change is satisfied (during the symbol change), the time saving state may be terminated before the 101st special symbol lottery is executed.

With this configuration, the maximum period can be achieved while preventing the special symbol fluctuation (lottery) from being executed more than a predetermined number of times in the state where the time saving state is set as the game state. It can be set as a time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to set a state advantageous to the player as long as possible as a normal symbol lottery (variation).

Further, in each of the above embodiments, the probability variation counter 203aa for measuring the period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set and the time reduction counter 203f for measuring the period in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set are provided. However, the value of each counter is subtracted and interrupted, but in each of the above embodiments, the time saving counter is replaced with the process of interrupting the subtraction of the probability variation counter 203aa (the process of interrupting (skipping) the measurement). A process of interrupting the subtraction of 203f may be applied, or vice versa.

In each of the above embodiments, the hold ball count command is issued each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 hold ball count counter 203d is updated (that is, when it increases or decreases) in the main control device 110. Although the case of transmitting from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the hold number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d increases in the main control device 110. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to reduce the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. As a result, the number of times the main control device 110 sends the hold number command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced, respectively. The control load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In each of the above embodiments, the winning of the first ball opening 64 and the passage of the through gate 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls in the variable display based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 is set by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is divided into four areas by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the light emitting member notifies the number of reserved balls. It may be configured as.

Further, as shown in each of the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbol as the identification information is scrolled vertically on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The design may be moved and displayed along a predetermined route such as a vertical direction or an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol, for example, one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the symbol or in various ways separately from the symbol. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the third symbol display for showing the player the lottery result of each symbol is executed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. For example, among the third symbols, different display means may be provided for the display means for displaying the main symbol to be emphasized and displayed to the player and the display means for displaying the subordinate symbols. Further, as the configuration of the display means, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 is executed in the game state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player, and the left side area of the game board 13 is executed in the normal game state. It is configured so that the left-handed game aiming at is executed, but the target area of the game board 13 may be different depending on the game state, and the left-handed game is executed during the time saving state, and the normal state is in progress. May perform a right-handed game. Further, the game may be configured to be playable in different game states while aiming at the same area.

In each of the above-described embodiments, as the operation means that can be operated by the player, the frame buttons 22 and 23 that determine that the operation means has been operated by the player's pressing operation are used, but other than that. The configuration may be used, and an operating means configured in a lever shape capable of determining that the player has been operated by tilting it to the left or right or back and forth, or that the player has been operated by contact or proximity. A touch sensor type operating means capable of discriminating, a wireless operating means capable of discriminating that the operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used. Further, each of the movable valve 750, the storage device (first storage device 770, the second storage device 771), the second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and the third frame button (release button) 22c. A part or all of the operation control may be executed on the voice lamp control device 113 side instead of the main control device 110.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the voice lamp control device 113 performs a process for setting a display mode in the effect executed by using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the game (lottery) itself is a voice lamp. It is configured to be executed by the main control device 110 different from the control device 113, but is not limited to this, and the process for executing the game (lottery) and the result of the game (lottery) are displayed as an effect. The processing for this may be configured to be executed by the same control device. With this configuration, it is possible to execute a plurality of different processes with one control device.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a big hit is made, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the big hit until multiple (for example, two or three times) big hits occur. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, two types of special symbols, a first special symbol and a second special symbol, are used as a plurality of special symbol types, but the types of special symbols are not limited to this, and three or more. The special symbol type may be used, or only one special symbol type may be used. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, a game property in which a lottery (variation) is performed according to a predetermined rule for a plurality of special symbols and a game property in which a lottery (variation) is individually performed independently are described. However, the playability described in each embodiment may be interchanged or combined.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variablely displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of spheres are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined amount. With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is a gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Characteristic A group> (Small hits are possible during specific special map fluctuations)
The first determination means capable of executing the first determination, the first display means for displaying the determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means. The dynamic display period setting means for dynamically displaying the first identification information, the dynamic display period setting means for setting the dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the first identification information, and the second determination can be executed. The second determination means, the second display means for displaying the second identification information for showing the determination result by the second determination means, and the first for showing a specific first determination result to the first display means. 1 When the identification information is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and when the second identification information for showing a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the second privilege game is displayed. In a gaming machine having the privileged game executing means for executing the above, the first gaming state that makes it easier to execute the second determination than the first determination, and the first determination rather than the second determination are executed. The game state setting means has a game state setting means capable of setting a second game state for facilitation, and the game state setting means dynamically displays the first identification information when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine A1 characterized in that the first gaming state can be set during the target display period.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (probability changing state) that is advantageous to the player during the period from the end of the privileged game to the winning of the next big hit according to the lottery result (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766 (Ab. 2012). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, which is advantageous to the player, is changed by the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set, that is, it is executed during the advantageous gaming state. If the next win is won immediately by the lottery, the period for which the advantageous gaming state is set is shortened, and if the lottery executed during the advantageous gaming state does not immediately win the next hit, the advantageous gaming state is set. Will be set for a longer period. As described above, there is a problem that the period in which the advantageous gaming state to be provided to the player is set differs depending on the result of the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set. Further, if the gaming machine has a game property of giving a privilege to the player during the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, there is a problem that the privilege given to the player is significantly different. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine with further improved interest in gaming.

According to the gaming machine A1, the first gaming state in which the second determination is easily executed can be set during the period in which the first determination is dynamically displayed, so that the length of the period in which the first gaming state is set is set. Can be set in advance. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine A1, the second determination means is configured to determine the specific second determination result with a higher probability than the probability that the first determination means determines the specific first determination result. A gaming machine A2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are played. That is, the second privilege game executed based on the determination result of the second determination by the second determination means is executed rather than the first privilege game executed based on the determination result of the first determination by the first determination means. Therefore, the first gaming state can be set to a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to have the player play the game in the hope that the first game state is set, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine A1 or A2, a first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second entry means different from the first entry means, the first entry means, and the second entry means. A third ball entry means different from the means, a first state in which the game ball can be guided to the second ball entry means, and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the second ball entry means than the first state. The first determination means has a variable means that can be changed into two states, and the first determination means is based on the fact that a game ball enters the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means. The second determination means is configured to be able to execute the second determination based on the game ball entering the third ball entry means, and the second determination means is configured to be able to execute the second determination. The gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the variable means is controlled so as to be more easily variable to the first state than the first gaming state.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A1 or A2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is possible to make it more difficult to execute the first determination in the first gaming state than in the second gaming state. Therefore, in the state where the first game state is set, it is possible to facilitate the game of inserting the ball into the third ball entry means, and it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. ..

In the gaming machine A3, after the first privilege game is executed, the probability of being determined as the specific first determination result by the first determination can be set to a higher probability than usual. Having the setting means, the gaming state setting means is displayed with the first identification information for showing the specific first determination result when the high probability is set by the high probability setting means. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the first gaming state is set based on the start of the dynamic display of the first identification information.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the high probability is set by the high probability setting means, the dynamic display of the first identification information that is displayed by the first identification information for showing the specific first determination result by the first determination. Since the first gaming state is set based on the start, the process until the first gaming state is set can be set step by step. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make it easier for the player to continuously play the game.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the second privilege game is characterized in that the privilege that can be given to the player is set to be smaller than that of the first privilege game. Machine A5.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are played. That is, in the second privilege game, the privilege that can be given to the player is set to be less than that in the first privilege game, so that the player is given an excessive privilege during the period in which the first game state is set. There is an effect that it can be suppressed from being given.

<Characteristic B group> (Game content and special 1 and special 2 are set at once)
The first determination means capable of executing the first determination, the first display means for displaying the determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means. The first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the above, the first dynamic display period determining means for determining the period during which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, and the second determination. The second identification information is dynamically displayed on the second determination means capable of executing the above, the second display means for displaying the determination result by the second determination means, and the second display means. The second dynamic display means to be displayed, the second dynamic display period determining means for determining the period during which the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means, and the first display means are specified. When the first identification information for showing the first determination result of the above is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and the second identification information for showing the specific second determination result to the second display means. Is displayed, the first identification information for showing the specific first determination result is displayed in the gaming machine having the privilege game execution means for executing the second privilege game. A period determination means for determining a dynamic display period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and a dynamic display of the second identification information executed during the dynamic display period determined by the period determination means. The gaming machine B1 is characterized by having an effect determining means for determining an effect corresponding to the above, and an effect executing means for executing the effect determined by the effect determining means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (probability changing state) that is advantageous to the player during the period from the end of the privileged game to the winning of the next big hit according to the lottery result (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766 (Ab. 2012). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, which is advantageous to the player, is changed by the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set, that is, it is executed during the advantageous gaming state. If the next win is won immediately by the lottery, the period for which the advantageous gaming state is set is shortened, and if the lottery executed during the advantageous gaming state does not immediately win the next hit, the advantageous gaming state is set. Will be set for a longer period. As described above, there is a problem that the period in which the advantageous gaming state to be provided to the player is set differs depending on the result of the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set. Further, if the gaming machine has a game property of giving a privilege to the player during the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, there is a problem that the privilege given to the player is significantly different. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine with further improved interest in gaming.

According to the gaming machine B1, since the effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the second identification information executed during the dynamic display period determined by the period determination means is determined by the effect determination means, the first identification information Since it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the second identification information in association with the dynamic display period, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting the future game based on the effect to be executed. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine B1, the effect determining means determines the effect based on the dynamic display period determined by the period determining means and the game content of the first privilege game. Characterized gaming machine B2.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1, by grasping the effect executed by the effect executing means, the dynamic display period of the first identification information being executed and the game of the first privilege game are performed. It is possible to predict the content and. Therefore, since the player can pay attention to the production, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine B1 or B2, a first gaming state in which the second determination is easier to be executed than in the first determination, and a second gaming state in which the first determination is easier to be executed than in the second determination. The gaming state setting means has a configurable gaming state setting means, and the gaming state setting means dynamically displays the first identification information to be displayed by the first identification information for showing the specific first determination result. The gaming machine B3, characterized in that the first gaming state is executed during the dynamic display period.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines B1 or B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the first game state is set during the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the determination result at which the first privilege game is executed, the period until the first privilege game is executed is set. It can be used to perform a game aiming at the second privilege game. Further, by grasping the effect executed by the effect execution means, it is possible to predict the period in which the first game state is set, so that the game can be enthusiastically performed during the first game state. effective.

In the gaming machine B2 or B3, as the first privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, the normal first privilege game and the small first privilege game in which the privilege given to the player is less than the normal first privilege game. The first dynamic display period determining means can determine a first period and a second period longer than the first period. The effect determining means includes a case where the small first privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means and the second period is determined by the period determining means, and the normal first by the privilege game executing means. 1 The gaming machine B4, characterized in that the privileged game is executed and the production of the same aspect is determined in the case where the first period is determined by the period determining means.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B2 or B3, when the effect determining means has a different combination of the two elements for determining the effect content, the same embodiment is used by the effect determining means. Since the effect is determined, it is possible to make the player predict a plurality of patterns of the future game situation by grasping the content of the effect executed by the effect execution means. Then, the accuracy of the prediction can be gradually improved depending on the progress of the first gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that the enjoyment of prediction for the player can be further enhanced and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine B4, the effect determining means determines a specific effect when the normal first privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means and the second period is determined by the period determining means. A gaming machine B5 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, by executing the specific effect, it is possible to notify the player that the most advantageous game content has been set, so that there is an effect that the player can be given a sense of superiority.

<Characteristic C group> (rush notification)
The first determination means capable of executing the first determination, the first display means on which the first identification information for showing the determination result by the first determination means is displayed, and the first identification information on the first display means. The first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the above, the first dynamic display period determining means for determining the period during which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, and the second determination. The second identification information is dynamically displayed on the second determination means capable of executing the above, the second display means for displaying the determination result by the second determination means, and the second display means. The second dynamic display means to be displayed, the second dynamic display period determining means for determining the period during which the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means, and the first display means are specified. When the first identification information for showing the first determination result of the above is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and the second identification information for showing the specific second determination result to the second display means. When is displayed, the first gaming state in which the second determination is more likely to be executed than the first determination in the gaming machine having the privileged game executing means for executing the second privilege game, and the first game state. When the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means capable of setting the second gaming state that makes it easier to execute the first determination than the second determination, and the gaming state setting means, the second game state is set. It has a notification timing determining means for determining the notification timing for notifying the player of the notification mode for indicating to the player that the first gaming state has been set based on the situation in the dynamic display of the identification information. The gaming machine C1 characterized by.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Furthermore, according to the lottery result, an advantageous game state (probability change state) that is advantageous to the player is set during the period from the end of the privilege game to the next big hit, and the player is notified that the game state has changed. A gaming machine that performs the effect of performing the effect has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). By the way, since the above-mentioned gaming machine is configured to execute an effect of notifying the player based on the setting of the advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player, for example, the advantageous gaming state is set. Despite this, even if a new lottery cannot be executed, the problem is that the player is informed that the game state is set, which makes the player uncomfortable. was there. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine with further improved interest in gaming.

According to the gaming machine C1, the notification timing for notifying that the first gaming state in which the second determination is easily executed is set can be determined based on the dynamic display status of the second identification information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from being uncomfortable with the notification timing for notifying that the first game state has been set.

In the gaming machine C1, the second dynamic display means can dynamically display the second identification information while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. The gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state based on the result of the first determination by the first determination means.

According to the gaming machine C2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1. That is, when the first gaming state set based on the determination result of the first determination means executed separately from the second determination means is set, the second identification information is notified based on the situation in the dynamic display. The timing is decided. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game by combining the first identification information and the second identification information that can be dynamically displayed at the same time.

The gaming machine C2 has a dynamic display determining means for determining whether or not the second identification information is dynamically displayed at the time when the first gaming state is set, and the notification timing determining means is the moving. When it is determined by the target display determination means that the second identification information is not dynamically displayed, the notification timing is determined based on the time when the first gaming state is set. Amusement machine C3.

According to the gaming machine C3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C2. That is, if the second determination can be executed immediately after the first gaming state is set, it is immediately notified that the first gaming state has been set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game in the first game state for a longer time.

In the gaming machine C2 or C3, when the notification timing determining means determines that the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display determining means, the dynamic display of the second identification information ends. The gaming machine C4, characterized in that the notification timing is determined based on the timing of the notification.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C2 or C3, the following effects are played. That is, even if the first gaming state is set, during the period when the second determination cannot be executed, it is not notified that the first gaming state has been set, and the second determination can be executed. In this case, it is notified that the first gaming state has been set. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the second determination cannot be executed even though it is notified that the first game state has been set, and it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. It has the effect of being able to do it.

The gaming machine C4 has a remaining period determining means for determining the period from the timing at which the dynamic display of the second identification information ends to the ending of the first gaming state, and is based on the determination result by the remaining period determining means. The gaming machine C5 is characterized by having a notification determination means for determining whether or not to determine the notification timing by the notification timing determination means.

According to the gaming machine C5, it is determined whether or not to determine the notification timing based on the period during which the second determination can be executed in the first gaming state. Therefore, for example, the second determination is made in the first gaming state. When the executable period becomes extremely short, it is possible to prevent the player from being notified that the first gaming state has been set. Therefore, even though the player is notified that the first gaming state has been set, it is possible to prevent the first gaming state from ending in a short period of time and causing discomfort to the player. It has the effect of being able to do it.

<Characteristic D group> (Large hit discard, small hit interruption due to simultaneous fluctuation)
The first determination means capable of executing the first determination, the first display means for displaying the determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means. The first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the above, the second determination means capable of executing the second determination, and the second identification information for showing the determination result by the second determination means are displayed. The second display means, the second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information on the second display means for a predetermined period, and the first display means for showing the specific first determination result to the first display means. When the identification information is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and when the second identification information for showing the specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the second privilege game is performed. In a gaming machine having a privilege game execution means to be executed and a second privilege game type setting means for setting the content of the second privilege game from a plurality of privilege contents, the second dynamic display means is the first. 1 The second identification information can be dynamically displayed in a state where the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the specific second identification information can be dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means. When the second identification information indicating that it is a determination result is stopped and displayed, the dynamic display by the first dynamic display means is performed based on the privilege content set by the second privilege game type setting means. D1 is a gaming machine D1 having a stop control means for executing stop control.

Conventionally, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines have a game property (so-called simultaneous fluctuation type) in which a plurality of lottery is executed at the same time. In a gaming machine having such playability, if the lottery result of one lottery is a win, a privileged game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and another lottery game being executed is forced out of the game. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-319221) has been proposed. By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine forcibly stops and displays other lottery due to the stop display of the lottery result in which the privilege game is executed regardless of the type of the privilege game. There was a problem of giving discomfort to the person. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine with further improved interest in gaming.

According to the gaming machine D1, the stop control content for the first dynamic display can be set according to the content of the second privilege game to be executed, so that the situation of causing discomfort to the player is suppressed. It has the effect of being able to.

In the gaming machine D1, the stop control means is a forced stop control that stops and displays the dynamic display by the first dynamic display means with the first identification information indicating a determination result different from the specific first determination result. The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that it is capable of temporarily stopping the measurement of the period dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means until a predetermined restart condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are played. That is, it is possible to set whether to forcibly stop or temporarily stop the dynamic display by the first dynamic display means according to the content of the second privilege game to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessive privilege, and the privilege game to which a small privilege is given is executed, so that the privilege game to which a large privilege is given is discarded. It has the effect of being able to suppress this.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the second privilege game type setting means can set the first privilege type and the second privilege type that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege type, and is said to be stopped. The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that the control means executes the forced stop control when the second special type is set by the second privilege game type setting means.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines D1 or D2, the following effects are played. That is, when the second privilege type that is advantageous to the player is set, the dynamic display can be forcibly stopped by the first dynamic display means, so that an excessive privilege is given to the player. It has the effect of being able to suppress this.

In the gaming machine D3, when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result, the dynamic display executed by the first dynamic display means ends, and the specific first determination is performed. Until the first identification information for showing the result is displayed on the first display means, the second privilege game type setting means has an invalid means for invalidating the setting of the second privilege type. A gaming machine D4 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D3, the following effects are played. That is, when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific first determination result, the setting of the second privilege type is invalidated by the invalidation means during the dynamic display. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first privilege game and the second privilege game in which the second privilege type is set from being continuously executed, and the player is given an excessive privilege. It has the effect of being able to be suppressed.

In the gaming machine D3 or D4, the second privilege game type setting means sets the first privilege type and the second privilege type based on the determination result of the second determination means. The gaming machine D5, characterized in that the first privilege type is easier to set than the second privilege type.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D3 or D4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the first privilege type is easier to set than the second privilege type, even if the second privilege game is executed a lot, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessive privilege. There is.

<Other Thoughts 1> (The latent state can be set before and after the jackpot game)
The first determination means capable of executing the first determination, the first display means for displaying the determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means. A dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the above, a second determination means capable of executing the second determination, and a second display means for displaying the second identification information for showing the determination result by the second determination means. When the first identification information for showing a specific first determination result is displayed on the first display means, the first privilege game is executed, and the specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means. When the second identification information for indicating is displayed, the second determination is more likely to be executed in the gaming machine having the privilege game execution means for executing the second privilege game than the first determination. The game state setting means has a game state setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state that makes it easier for the first determination to be executed than the second determination, and the game state setting means is a predetermined first. When the condition is satisfied, the first gaming state is set during the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and when the predetermined second condition is satisfied, the first privilege game is completed. The gaming machine E1 characterized in that the first gaming state is set later.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (probability changing state) that is advantageous to the player during the period from the end of the privileged game to the winning of the next big hit according to the lottery result (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766 (Ab. 2012). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, which is advantageous to the player, is changed by the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set, that is, it is executed during the advantageous gaming state. If the next win is won immediately by the lottery, the period for which the advantageous gaming state is set is shortened, and if the lottery executed during the advantageous gaming state does not immediately win the next hit, the advantageous gaming state is set. Will be set for a longer period. As described above, there is a problem that the period in which the advantageous gaming state to be provided to the player is set differs depending on the result of the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set. Further, if the gaming machine has a game property of giving a privilege to the player during the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, there is a problem that the privilege given to the player is significantly different. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine with further improved interest in gaming.

According to the gaming machine E1, the timing at which the first gaming state is set can be divided into before and after the first privileged gaming, so that it is possible to provide a player with a surprising game. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic G group> (Small hit RUSH during the symbol confirmation period)
The first determination means capable of executing the first determination, the first display means for displaying the determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means. The first stop display means for displaying the stop display, the stop display period setting means for setting the stop display period for displaying the stop display of the first identification information by the first stop display means, and the second determination capable of executing the second determination. The means, the second display means for displaying the second identification information for showing the determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for showing the specific first determination result to the first display means. Is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and when the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the second privilege game is executed. In a gaming machine having a privileged game executing means, a first gaming state that makes it easier to execute the second determination than the first determination, and a first determination that makes it easier to execute the first determination than the second determination. The game state setting means has a game state setting means capable of setting two game states, and the game state setting means is said to have a stop display period during which the first identification information is stopped and displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine G1 characterized in that the first gaming state can be set.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (probability changing state) that is advantageous to the player during the period from the end of the privileged game to the winning of the next big hit according to the lottery result (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766 (Ab. 2012). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, which is advantageous to the player, is changed by the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set, that is, it is executed during the advantageous gaming state. If the next win is won immediately by the lottery, the period for which the advantageous gaming state is set is shortened, and if the lottery executed during the advantageous gaming state does not immediately win the next hit, the advantageous gaming state is set. Was set for a long period of time. That is, there is a problem that the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set differs depending on the result of the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set. Further, if the gaming machine has a game property of giving a privilege to the player during the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, there is a problem that the privilege given to the player is significantly different. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine with further improved interest in gaming.

According to the gaming machine G1, since the stop display period can be set in advance as the period in which the first gaming state is set, there is an effect that the period in which the first gaming state is executed can be appropriately managed. .. Further, since the first game state is set during the period in which the identification information for indicating the determination result of the first determination is stopped and displayed, the player is informed in advance of the game content after the first game state is completed. It can be grasped. With this configuration, for example, when the first gaming state is set in a state where a specific determination result is displayed as the determination result of the first determination, after the first gaming state is completed, It is possible to know in advance that the first privilege game will be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine G1 is characterized in that the stop display period setting means sets stop display periods of different lengths based on the determination result of the first determination means.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G1, the stop display period is set based on the determination result of the first determination means, so that the first privilege game is based on the determination result of the first determination means. The presence or absence of execution and the length of the stop display period are determined. Therefore, the player can be more closely watched by the determination result of the first determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine G2, when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result, the stop display period setting means has a longer stop display than when the determination result is other than the specific first determination result. The gaming machine G3 characterized in that the period can be easily set.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G2, when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific first determination result, the stop display period is longer than the case other than the specific first determination result. Is easy to set, so that the first gaming state in which a longer period is set can be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machines G2 or G3, the stop display period setting means can set stop display periods of different lengths when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result. The gaming machine G4 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G2 or G3, the length of the stop display period can be made different even in the case of a specific first determination result. Therefore, even in the case of a specific first determination result, since the period in which the first gaming state is set is different, the player is enthusiastically played so that the longer first gaming state is set. It has the effect of being able to make it.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the second determination means determines the specific second determination result with a higher probability than the probability that the first determination means determines the specific first determination result. The gaming machine G5, which is characterized in that it is configured in.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the following effects are played. That is, the second privilege game executed based on the determination result of the second determination by the second determination means is executed rather than the first privilege game executed based on the determination result of the first determination by the first determination means. Therefore, the first gaming state can be set to a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to have the player play the game in the hope that the first game state is set, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic H group> (Small hit RUSH by winning a big hit when the end of working hours fluctuates)
A first determination means capable of executing the first determination, a first display means displaying the first identification information for showing the determination result by the first determination means, and a second determination means capable of executing the second determination. And the second display means for displaying the second identification information for showing the determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for showing the specific first determination result to the first display means. The privilege of executing the first privilege game when displayed, and executing the second privilege game when the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means. In a gaming machine having a game executing means, a first gaming state that makes it easier to execute the second determination than the first determination, and a second that makes it easier to execute the first determination than the second determination. It has a gaming state setting means capable of setting a gaming state, and the gaming state setting means can execute the second determination when both the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition are satisfied. The gaming machine H1 characterized in that the first gaming state can be set during the first period.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (probability changing state) that is advantageous to the player during the period from the end of the privileged game to the winning of the next big hit according to the lottery result (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766 (Ab. 2012). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, whether or not an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set is set only by one lottery result. Therefore, the process until the advantageous gaming state is set is given to the player. There was a problem that it was not possible to play a game while entertaining. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine with further improved interest in gaming.

According to the gaming machine H1, when both the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition are satisfied, the first gaming state can be set for the first period, so that the second determination is made during the first gaming state. Can be reliably executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the first gaming state is terminated without executing the second determination even though the first gaming state is set, which gives the player a feeling of dissatisfaction. Can provide no games.

The gaming machine H1 has a first determination number measuring means capable of measuring the number of times of the first determination executed by the first determination means, and the first determination measured by the first determination number measuring means. The gaming machine H2 is characterized in that the first predetermined condition is satisfied when the number of times reaches a predetermined number of times.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H1, when the number of times of the first determination reaches a predetermined number, the first predetermined condition is satisfied, so that the first determination by the first determination means is executed. As a result, the game content can be reliably advanced toward the establishment of the first predetermined condition. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the state in which the first predetermined condition is not satisfied when the game is played for a long time, and it is possible to suppress the player from being uncomfortable.

The gaming machine H3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine H1 or H2, when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result, the second predetermined condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1 or H2, when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific first determination result, the second predetermined condition is satisfied, so that the player can understand. It has the effect of being able to provide easy games.

In the gaming machine H2 or H3, the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state even when the first predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition is satisfied, and the gaming state setting means When the first gaming state is set based on the satisfaction of the first predetermined condition, the first gaming state is set during the second period in which it is difficult to execute the second determination. The gaming machine H4 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H2 or H3, when only the first predetermined condition is satisfied, the first gaming state is set only in the second period in which it is difficult to execute the second determination. As a result, the first gaming state set when only the first predetermined condition is satisfied can be set to a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game so that both the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition are satisfied.

In the gaming machine H4, when the first gaming state is set based on the satisfaction of the second predetermined condition, the gaming state setting means is shorter than the first period and the first. The gaming machine H5, characterized in that the first gaming state is set during a third period longer than two periods.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H4, when only the second predetermined condition is satisfied, the first gaming state is set during the third period, so that the first predetermined condition is higher than the first predetermined condition. There is an effect that the game can be enthusiastically played in order to satisfy the second predetermined condition first.

<Characteristic I group> (The expected degree of small hit RUSH rush is variable by the number of time reductions)
A first determination means capable of executing the first determination, a first display means displaying the first identification information for showing the determination result by the first determination means, and a second determination means capable of executing the second determination. And the second display means for displaying the second identification information for showing the determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for showing the specific first determination result to the first display means. The privilege of executing the first privilege game when displayed, and executing the second privilege game when the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means. It is possible to set a game execution means, a first game state in which the second determination is easier to be executed than the first determination, and a second game state in which the first determination is easier to be executed than the second determination. In a gaming machine having the above-mentioned gaming state setting means, the gaming state setting means can set a third gaming state in which the first gaming state is more likely to be set than the second gaming state for a predetermined period. There is a third gaming state period setting means capable of setting a first period and a second period longer than the first period as a period in which the third gaming state is set, and the third gaming state is provided. The gaming machine I1 is characterized in that when the first period is set by the period setting means, it is easier to set the first gaming state than when the second period is set.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine capable of setting an advantageous gaming state (latent state) that is advantageous to the player by performing a game in which a plurality of gaming states are gradually shifted according to the lottery result (for example,). Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-058267). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, since the ease of setting the advantageous gaming state in the gaming state (quasi-advantageous gaming state) in which the advantageous gaming state is easily set is single, the aim is to set the advantageous gaming state. There was a problem that the content of the game played was monotonous. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine with further improved interest in gaming.

According to the gaming machine I1, the expectation that the first gaming state is set in the state where the third gaming state is set by differently setting the period for setting the third gaming state in which the first gaming state is easily set. Can be different. Therefore, since the player can be interested in the setting contents of the third game state, the player can enthusiastically play the game even in the game process until the first game state is set. It has the effect of being able to do it.

The gaming machine I1 has a progress determining means for determining the passage of the predetermined period set by the third gaming state period setting means, and the gaming state setting means has elapsed of the predetermined period by the progress determining means. The gaming machine I2 is characterized in that the first gaming state is set based on the establishment of the first setting condition that is satisfied when the above is determined.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine I1, the first gaming state is set when the period in which the third gaming state is set elapses, so that an easy-to-understand game can be provided. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2, when the gaming state setting means is in a state where the third gaming state is set and the first determination result by the first determination means is the specific first determination result. The gaming machine I3 is characterized in that the first gaming state is set based on the establishment of the second setting condition that is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1 or I2, even when a third gaming state in which the first setting condition is difficult to be satisfied, that is, a long-term third gaming state is set. During the third gaming state, the first gaming state can be set based on the determination result of the first determining means. Therefore, it is possible to aim for different transition conditions in order to set the first gaming state according to the period of the third gaming state to be set, and therefore, the motivation to play depends on the length of the period of the third gaming state to be set. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

In the gaming machines I2 and I3, the third gaming state period setting means can set a third period longer than the second period, and the progress determination means determines the progress of the third period. In this case, the gaming machine I4 is characterized by having a condition limiting means that does not satisfy the first setting condition.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1 or I2, when the passage of the third period is determined, the first setting condition is not satisfied by the condition limiting means, so that the first gaming state is set. You can definitely limit what you do. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the provision of an excessively advantageous state to the player.

In any of the gaming machines I2 to I4, the first gaming state period setting means for setting the period in which the first gaming state is set is provided, and the first gaming state period setting means is provided by the progress determination means. A gaming machine characterized in that when it is determined that the first period has elapsed, the period in which the first gaming state is set is set longer than when it is determined that the second period has elapsed. I5.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines I2 to I4, it is determined that the second period has elapsed for a longer period than the determination that the second period has elapsed. The game state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can pay attention to the determination result of the progress determination means.

<Characteristic J group> (Surely small hit RUSH for a predetermined period)
A first determination means capable of executing the first determination, a first display means displaying the first identification information for showing the determination result by the first determination means, and a second determination capable of executing the second determination. The means, the second display means for displaying the second identification information for showing the determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for showing the specific first determination result to the first display means. Is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and when the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the second privilege game is executed. In a gaming machine having the privileged game executing means, the first gaming state that makes it easier to execute the second determination than the first determination, and the first determination that makes it easier to execute the first determination than the second determination. 2 The game state can be set by the game state setting means, the advantageous period setting means for setting the advantageous period in which the first game state can be continuously set by the game state setting means, and the advantageous period setting means. A first termination condition that is satisfied when the set advantageous period has elapsed, or an termination means that terminates the first gaming state when a second termination condition different from the first termination condition is satisfied. A gaming machine J1 having an end limiting means for limiting the establishment of the second end condition when a predetermined continuation condition is satisfied.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine capable of setting an advantageous gaming state (latent state) that is advantageous to the player by performing a game in which a plurality of gaming states are gradually shifted according to the lottery result (for example,). Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-058267). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set changes based on the lottery result executed during the advantageous gaming state, so that the advantageous gaming state is provided to the player for a predetermined period. There is a problem that the advantageous gaming state is terminated in a short period of time even though the advantageous gaming state is set with difficulty, and the motivation for playing is reduced. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine with further improved interest in gaming.

According to the gaming machine J1, when a predetermined continuation condition is satisfied, the establishment of the second termination condition can be restricted by the termination limiting means. Therefore, it is possible to continuously set the first gaming state during the advantageous period set by the advantageous period setting means, and there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In the gaming machine J1, the gaming state setting means can set an advantageous first gaming state in which the predetermined continuation condition can be satisfied and a disadvantageous first gaming state in which the predetermined continuation condition cannot be satisfied. A gaming machine J2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J1, the advantageous first gaming state and the disadvantageous first gaming state can be set by the gaming state setting means, which is more advantageous than the gaming state setting means. There is an effect that the game can be enthusiastically performed so that the first game state is set.

The gaming machine J1 or J2 is characterized in that the predetermined continuation condition is satisfied when the result of the first determination of the first determination means is the specific first determination result. J3.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1 or J2, when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific first determination result, a predetermined continuation condition is satisfied, so that the first determination means is satisfied. There is an effect that the player can be enthusiastically played the game so that the determination result of the above is the specific first determination result.

The gaming machine J4 is characterized in that the gaming machine J2 or J3 has a notifying means for notifying that the advantageous first gaming state is set.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J2 or J3, the notification means notifies that the advantageous first gaming state is set, so that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand game. There is an effect.

In any of the gaming machines J2 to J4, there is a discriminating means for determining that the condition for satisfying the second end condition is satisfied during the period in which the advantageous first gaming state is set, and the discriminating means of the said discriminating means. The gaming machine J5 is characterized by having a second notifying means for notifying that the condition for satisfying the second ending condition is satisfied based on the determination result.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines J2 to J4, the second notification means that the condition for satisfying the second end condition is satisfied during the period in which the advantageous first gaming state is set. Therefore, if it is assumed that the first gaming state set this time is not the advantageous first gaming state but the disadvantageous first gaming state, whether or not the first gaming state has ended is determined. It can be discriminated by the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can experience the superiority of the advantageous first gaming state set this time.

<Characteristic K group> (Provide a period during which the number of time reductions is not subtracted during the time reduction state)
The first determination means capable of executing the first determination, the first display means on which the first identification information for showing the determination result by the first determination means is displayed, and the first identification information on the first display means. The first determination is made when the first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the above first period and the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result are displayed on the first display means. A gaming state setting means capable of setting an advantageous gaming state for a predetermined period, a period measuring means for measuring the period of the advantageous gaming state set by the gaming state setting means, and the predetermined period measuring means. An ending means for terminating the advantageous gaming state when the period is measured, and a measurement limiting means for limiting the measurement of the period of the advantageous gaming state by the period measuring means when a predetermined limiting condition is satisfied. The gaming machine K1 characterized by having the above.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player during the period from the end of the privileged game to the winning of the next big hit according to the lottery result (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766 (Ab. 2012). By the way, since the above-mentioned gaming machine is configured to set the period until the number of lottery reaches a predetermined number as the period in which the advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is set, the advantageous gaming state is set. There was a problem that the period could be easily predicted. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine with further improved interest in gaming.

According to the gaming machine K1, since the measurement for a predetermined period in which the advantageous gaming state is set can be restricted by the measurement limiting means, the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set can be extended. Therefore, it is possible to provide a player with an unexpected game, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine K1, the second determination means capable of executing the second determination, the second display means for displaying the second identification information for showing the determination result by the second determination means, and the second display means thereof. When the second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information for a predetermined second period and the first identification information for showing a specific first determination result are displayed on the first display means. , When the second identification information for executing the first privilege game and indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the privilege game execution means for executing the second privilege game and the privilege game execution means. The second identification information can be dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. The gaming machine K2 is characterized in that, when the determination result of the second determination means is the specific second determination result, the predetermined restriction condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1, the second determination means can be dynamically displayed while the first identification information is dynamically displayed. When the determination result of is a specific second determination result, a predetermined restriction condition is satisfied. Thereby, the first determination by the first determination means can be executed in a state where the measurement of the period of the advantageous gaming state is restricted. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine K2, the measurement limiting means is in the advantageous gaming state by the period measuring means while the dynamic display corresponding to the specific second determination result is executed by the second dynamic display means. A gaming machine K3 characterized in that it limits the measurement of a period.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1, the period of the advantageous gaming state is measured while the dynamic display corresponding to the specific second determination result is executed by the second dynamic display means. Is restricted. Therefore, the first determination by the first determination means can be executed in a state where the measurement of the period of the advantageous gaming state is restricted. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

One of the gaming machines K1 to K3 is characterized by having a notification means for notifying that the measurement limiting means limits the measurement of the period of the advantageous gaming state by the period measuring means. Game machine K4.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the notification means notifies that the measurement of the period is restricted by the measurement limiting means, so that the game can be easily understood by the player. It has the effect of being able to provide.

<Characteristic L group> (Small hit RUSH with different end conditions)
A first determination means capable of executing the first determination, a first display means displaying the first identification information for showing the determination result by the first determination means, and a second determination means capable of executing the second determination. And the second display means for displaying the second identification information for showing the determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for showing the specific first determination result to the first display means. The privilege of executing the first privilege game when displayed, and executing the second privilege game when the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means. In a gaming machine having a game executing means, a first gaming state that makes it easier to execute the second determination than the first determination, and a second that makes it easier to execute the first determination than the second determination. The game state setting means has a game state setting means capable of setting a game state, and the game state setting means satisfies a predetermined first condition or a second condition different from the first condition. The first game state is set in the above, and the first game state is set based on the condition of the second condition, rather than the first game state is set based on the condition of the first condition. The gaming machine L1 is characterized in that the case where the gaming state is set makes it easier for the first gaming state to continue.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine capable of setting an advantageous gaming state (latent state) that is advantageous to the player by performing a game in which a plurality of gaming states are gradually shifted according to the lottery result (for example,). Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-058267). By the way, since the above-mentioned gaming machine has a single end condition of the advantageous gaming state, the ease of continuing the set advantageous gaming state cannot be different, and the player in the advantageous gaming state cannot be different. There is a problem that the game to be provided becomes monotonous and the motivation to play is reduced. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine with further improved interest in gaming.

According to the gaming machine L1, the first gaming state can be set because the first gaming state that is easy to continuously set and the first gaming state that is difficult to continuously set can be set by the gaming state setting means. Even after the game is played, it is possible to play the game while expecting that the first game state will continue for a long period of time, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine L1, the gaming state setting means sets a gaming state different from the first gaming state when a predetermined end condition is satisfied in the state where the first gaming state is set. The case of setting the first gaming state based on the satisfaction of the second condition is better than the case of setting the first gaming state based on the satisfaction of the first condition. A gaming machine L2 characterized in that the conditions are difficult to be satisfied.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L1, the first game state is set based on the second condition being satisfied, rather than the first gaming state being set based on the first condition being satisfied. When the gaming state is set, it is possible to make it more difficult to end the first gaming state. Therefore, since it is possible to set a first game state that is easy to end and a first game state that is difficult to end for the player, the first game state that is difficult to end even after the first game state is set. It is possible to play the game while hoping that the game state is set, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine L2 has an end condition setting means capable of setting a first end condition and a second end condition different from the first end condition as the predetermined end condition, and the second condition is satisfied. The gaming machine L3 is characterized in that when the first gaming state is set based on the above, the first ending condition is not satisfied.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L2, when the first gaming state is set based on the satisfaction of the second condition, the first ending condition is not satisfied, so that it is difficult to end. The first gaming state can be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game in order to satisfy the second condition.

In the gaming machine L3, the ending condition setting means sets the second ending condition when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result. L4.

According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L3, a second end condition is set when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific first determination result. As a result, when the first gaming state is terminated based on the satisfaction of the second termination condition, the privileged game can be provided. Therefore, even if the first game state ends, the player can be given a privilege, so that there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

The gaming machine L5 is characterized in that the gaming machine L3 or L4 has a notifying means for notifying that the first gaming state has been set based on the satisfaction of the second condition.

According to the gaming machine L5, since the notification means notifies that the first end condition is not satisfied, there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

<Characteristic M group> (Set the fall invalid period with high accuracy)
A first determination means capable of executing the first determination, a first display means for displaying the first identification information for showing the determination result by the first determination means, and a first determination specific to the first display means. The privilege game execution means for executing the first privilege game when the first identification information for showing the result is displayed, and the first determination means executed when a predetermined setting condition is satisfied. In a gaming machine having a gaming state setting means capable of setting an advantageous gaming state in which the result of the first determination is more likely to be the specific first determination result than the normal gaming state, the advantageous gaming state is achieved by the gaming state setting means. When the predetermined transition condition is satisfied in the state in which is set, the gaming state transition means for shifting the gaming state from the advantageous gaming state to the normal gaming state and the establishment of the predetermined transition condition are restricted. A gaming machine M1 characterized by having a transition condition limiting means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Furthermore, according to the lottery result, the advantageous gaming state (probability change state) that is advantageous to the player is set during the period from the end of the award game to the winning of the next big hit, and in addition, a predetermined lottery (probability change state) is set. A gaming machine has been proposed that terminates an advantageous gaming state when a player wins a fall lottery. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-152). By the way, since the above-mentioned gaming machine is configured so that the falling lottery is executed based on the execution of the winning / failing lottery of the game, there is a sense of danger that the advantageous gaming state is always terminated for the player. There was a problem that it was not possible to play the game with peace of mind. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine in which a player can play a game with peace of mind and the interest of the game is improved.

According to the gaming machine M1, the transition from the advantageous gaming state to the normal gaming state can be restricted by the transition condition limiting means, so that the gaming state shifts from the advantageous gaming state to the normal gaming state. It is possible to set a game period that does not occur. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a period for the player to play the game with peace of mind.

In the gaming machine M1, the first determination means executes the first determination when a predetermined first determination condition is satisfied, and when the predetermined first determination condition is satisfied, the first determination condition is satisfied. 1 It has a special determination means capable of executing a special determination different from the determination, and when the determination result by the special determination means is a specific special determination result, the predetermined transition condition is satisfied. The featured gaming machine M2.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M1, a special determination is executed when the first determination condition is satisfied, and a predetermined transition condition is determined when the determination result is a specific special determination result. Is established. Therefore, since the determination by the first determination means and the determination by the special determination means can be set in association with each other, there is an effect that an easy-to-understand game can be provided.

In the gaming machine M1, when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific second determination result different from the specific first determination result, the second privilege game different from the first privilege game is executed. A second privilege game execution means and a variable ball entry means in which the game ball is variably operated to an open state in which the game ball can enter the inside when the second privilege game is executed by the second privilege game execution means. , A variable control means for controlling the variable operation of the variable ball entry means, a specific area through which the game ball can pass is provided inside the variable ball entry means, and the game ball can pass through the specific area. The gaming machine M3, characterized in that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied when the machine passes through.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine M1, a predetermined transition condition is satisfied when the gaming ball passes through a specific area. Therefore, since the transition condition can be satisfied at a timing different from the determination timing of the first determination means, it is possible to provide the player with a surprising game. Further, since it is possible to determine whether or not the transition condition is satisfied based on the game result of whether or not the player fires the game ball, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate can be increased.

In the gaming machine M3, the variable control means has a first variable control in which a ball entering the variable ball entry means easily passes through the specific region, and a first variable control means in which the ball is less likely to pass through the specific region than the first variable control. 2 Variable control and a gaming machine M4 characterized by being configurable.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M3, the variable control means provides a first variable control in which a ball entering the variable ball entry means easily passes through a specific region and a second variable control in which it is difficult to pass. Since it is possible to set and, it is possible to provide a player with a surprising game. Further, since it is possible to determine whether or not the transition condition is satisfied based on the game result of whether or not the player fires the game ball, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate can be increased.

The gaming machine M4 is characterized in that the gaming machine M4 has a notification means for notifying that the second variable control is set by the variable control means.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine M4, it is notified that the second variable control is set by the notification means, so that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. be.

<Characteristic N group> (Selection of small hit games)
A first determination means capable of executing the first determination, a first display means for displaying the first identification information for showing the determination result by the first determination means, and a first determination specific to the first display means. When the first identification information for showing the result is displayed, the privilege game executing means for executing the first privilege game and the determination result of the first determination means are different from the specific first determination result. In the case of the second determination result of the above, the second privilege game is executed by the second privilege game execution means for executing the second privilege game different from the first privilege game and the second privilege game execution means. In this case, it has a variable entry means in which the game ball is variably operated to an open state in which the game ball can enter the inside, and a variable control means for controlling the variable operation of the variable entry means. A specific area through which a game ball can pass is provided inside the variable ball entry means, and a game state setting means capable of setting a disadvantageous game state that is disadvantageous to the player when the game ball passes through the specific area is provided. The gaming machine N1 characterized by being.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There has been proposed a gaming machine capable of setting an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to a player when an advantageous privileged game is executed and a gaming ball passes through a specific area during the privileged game (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-152). In the above-mentioned gaming machine, since the advantageous gaming state is set when the gaming ball passes through the specific area, it is intended to pay attention to whether or not the gaming ball passes through the specific area. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine with further improved interest in gaming.

According to the gaming machine N1, when the gaming ball passes through a specific area, a disadvantageous gaming state is set, so that there is an effect that a novel game property can be provided to the player.

In the gaming machine N1, the variable control means has a first variable control in which a ball entering the variable ball entry means easily passes through the specific region, and a first variable control means in which the ball is less likely to pass through the specific region than the first variable control. 2 Variable control and a gaming machine N2 characterized in that it can be set.

According to the game machine N2, in addition to the effect of the game machine N1, the first variable control in which the ball entering the variable ball entry means easily passes through the specific region by the variable control means, and the first variable control thereof Since either of the second variable control that is difficult to pass through the specific area is set, the launched game ball can pass through the specific area when the game ball is launched according to the variable control content to be executed. Gender can be different. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the enjoyment of the player deciding whether or not to launch the game ball.

In the gaming machine N2, the second privilege game executed by the second privilege game executing means has a notification means capable of notifying that the second variable control is set by the variable control means. A gaming machine N3 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine N2, the notification means notifies that the second variable control is set, so that when the player decides whether or not to launch the gaming ball. Information that can be used as a reference can be provided. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the enjoyment of the player deciding whether or not to launch the game ball.

In any one of the gaming machine N1 to the gaming machine N3, the invalid means has a detection means for detecting that the game ball has passed through the specific area and an invalid means for invalidating the detection result by the detection means. The gaming machine N4 is characterized in that the detection result by the detection means is invalidated based on the determination result of the first determination means.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines N1 to N3, the detection result by the detecting means can be invalidated by the invalidating means, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine N4, the measuring means for measuring the number of game balls detected by the detecting means during the period in which the detection result by the detecting means is invalidated by the invalid means, and the measurement result of the measuring means. The gaming machine N5, characterized by having a measurement result notification means for notifying based information.

According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N4, the measurement result notification means notifies the information based on the measurement result of the measuring means during the period in which the detection result by the detecting means is invalidated, so that the information is invalid. The player can grasp the number detected by the detection means during the period. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily feel the superiority.

<Characteristic O group> (End the time reduction based on the condition that was satisfied earlier among multiple conditions)
The first determination means capable of executing the first determination, the first display means for displaying the determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means. The privilege of executing the first privilege game when the first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying and the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result are stopped and displayed on the first display means. A game execution means, a first game state in which the first determination is easily executed, a second game state in which the first determination is more difficult to be executed than the first game state, and a game state setting means that can be set. The possessed gaming machine has an ending means for terminating the first gaming state when a predetermined first ending condition is satisfied or when a second ending condition different from the first ending condition is satisfied. The ending means is characterized in that the first gaming state is terminated based on the previously established termination condition among the first termination condition and the second termination condition. O1.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, a gaming machine capable of changing the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-12907). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the subtraction of the period in which the advantageous gaming state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player is set is the timing at which the special symbol changes, so that the advantageous gaming state should be set to the maximum. There was a problem that the player could not do it and the player was uncomfortable. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine with further improved interest in gaming.

According to the gaming machine O1, a first ending condition and a second ending condition are provided as conditions for ending the first gaming state, and when any of the ending conditions is terminated, the first gaming state is terminated. , There is an effect that the first gaming state can be surely ended.

In the gaming machine O1, the second determination means capable of executing the second determination, the second display means for displaying the second identification information for showing the determination result by the second determination means, and the second display means thereof. The second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information for a predetermined second period, and the privilege game execution means for showing the second display means a specific second determination result. When the second identification information is displayed, the second privilege game is executed, and the second movement is performed while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. The second identification information can be dynamically displayed by the target display means, and when the first determination means is executed, the first termination condition is satisfied and the second determination means is executed. The gaming machine O2 is characterized in that the second termination condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O1, the first termination condition is satisfied based on the first determination by the first determination means, and the second termination condition is established based on the second determination by the second determination means. This is a gaming machine capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information by the second dynamic display means while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. However, there is an effect that the first gaming state can be appropriately terminated.

In the gaming machine O2, the first execution number measuring means for measuring the number of executions of the first determination means, the second execution number measuring means for measuring the execution number of the second determination means, and the first execution number measuring means. The total number of times the first determination means is executed and the total number of times the first determination means is executed as the first period in which the first gaming state is continuously set. , The first period setting means for setting a predetermined number of times including the number of executions of the second determination means, and the dynamic display corresponding to the case where the number of executions of the first determination means becomes the predetermined number of times are being executed. The second determination means is executed by the second determination means in a state of having an execution determination means for determining that the slingshot is being executed and the state determination means determining that the dynamic display is being executed. When this is done, the gaming machine O3 is characterized in that the second termination condition is satisfied before the second determination is executed.

According to the game O3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O2, the second ending condition can be satisfied even during the dynamic display in which the first ending condition can be satisfied, so that the first gaming state can be appropriately satisfied. Has the effect of being able to terminate.

In the gaming machine O3, the first termination condition is that the number of executions of the first determination means is the number of executions of the first determination means after the dynamic display corresponding to the case where the number of executions of the first determination means becomes the predetermined number of times is completed. The gaming machine O4 is characterized in that it is established at any time until the first determination corresponding to the case where the number of times exceeds a predetermined number is executed.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O3, the first determination is made after the dynamic display corresponding to the case where the first determination means is executed a predetermined number of times is completed. Since the first determination corresponding to the case where the number of times the means is executed becomes larger than the predetermined number of times is executed is established, the predetermined first period can be set longer. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from being uncomfortable.

In the gaming machine O4, the third determination means capable of executing the third determination, the third display means for displaying the third identification information for showing the determination result by the third determination means, and the third display means thereof. When the third dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the third identification information and the third identification information for indicating a specific third determination result on the third display means are stopped and displayed, the third privilege. It has a third privilege game execution means for executing a game, and the third determination means sets the second game state when the first game state is set by the game state setting means. The gaming machine O5 is characterized in that it is easier to execute than in the case of the above.

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine O4, the first gaming state is set because it has a third determination means that makes it easier to execute when the first gaming state is set. By lengthening the period, the period during which the third determination means can be easily executed can be lengthened. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from being uncomfortable.

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine γ1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the display of the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine γ2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed in the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine γ3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
S306 1st determination means S307 1st dynamic display means S308 1st execution number measurement means S607 termination means S905 2nd determination means S906 2nd dynamic display means S907 2nd execution number measurement means S2204 privilege game execution means S2404 1st period Setting means S2804 Part of the game state setting means

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed . Furthermore, there is shall be reported that easily draw is performed after the award game execution game state is set.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-217766

However, there was a demand for further improvement in the interest of games.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 displays a first determination means capable of executing the first determination and a first identification information for showing a determination result by the first determination means. 1 Display means, a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information on the first display means, and a period during which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. A first dynamic display period determining means for determining, a second determining means capable of executing a second determination, and a second display means for displaying a second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determining means. , A second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information on the second display means, and a second period for dynamically displaying the second identification information by the second dynamic display means. and dynamic display period determining means, wherein when the first identification information for indicating the first determination result given was displayed on the first display unit, perform the first award game, the second display means when the second identification information indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on, it has a benefits game execution means for executing a second award game, a second judgment than the first determination A game state setting means capable of setting a first game state in which is easier to execute and a second game state in which the first determination is easier to be executed than the second determination, and the game state setting means. 1 When the gaming state is set, the notification timing for notifying the player to indicate to the player that the first gaming state has been set is determined based on the situation in the dynamic display of the second identification information. It has a means for determining the notification timing to be performed .

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the first determination means capable of executing the first determination, the first display means for displaying the first identification information for showing the determination result by the first determination means, and the first display means. The first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information on the first display means, and the first action for determining the period during which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. The target display period determination means, the second determination means capable of executing the second determination, the second display means for displaying the second identification information for showing the determination result by the second determination means, and the second display thereof. The second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information to the means, and the second dynamic display period determination for determining the period during which the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means. means and, if the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result to the first display means is displayed, execute the first award game, second specific to said second display means It has a privilege game execution means for executing the second privilege game when the second identification information for showing the determination result is displayed , and makes it easier to execute the second determination than the first determination. The first game state is set by a game state setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state that makes it easier for the first determination to be executed than the second determination, and the game state setting means. In this case, the notification timing determining means for determining the notification timing for notifying the player that the first game state has been set based on the situation in the dynamic display of the second identification information. And have .

Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the effect displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the ending of the jackpot game in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content during the probability change in the first embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the second special symbol is non-variable after the start of the hit fluctuation of the first special symbol in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents when the second special symbol is non-variable, and (b) is the first embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of a small hit by the 2nd special symbol in RUSH in a form. (A) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the second special symbol is changing after the start of the hit change of the first special symbol in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents when the second special symbol is changing. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content when the 2nd special symbol stopped the fluctuation during the hit variation of the 1st special symbol in a form. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a state in which the result of the variation display of the first special symbol is a jackpot A during RUSH in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a state in which the RUSH in the first embodiment is shown. It is a figure which showed an example of the state that the result of the variation display of the 1st special symbol became a jackpot C or a jackpot D. (A) is a diagram showing the card forgetting warning screen in the first embodiment, and (b) to (d) are timing charts showing the timing of displaying the card forgetting warning screen in the first embodiment. be. It is a schematic diagram which schematically showed the game flow of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the ROM of the main control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit random number table, and (c) is a schematic diagram. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the random number table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the big hit type selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of the variation pattern selection table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of a normal table schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving / probability variation table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the latent probability table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern table schematically. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the stop display mode selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the additional effect selection table. It is a block diagram of the electric structure of the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) to (c) are explanatory views explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surfaces B to D. (A) to (c) are explanatory views explaining the back surface E. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a drawing list schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol change start processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation execution process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation stop processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol change start processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 deviation variation process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in a main control unit. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation execution process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation stop processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 disengagement stop process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the through-gate passage processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit operation setting process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prize processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the stop type command reception process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the state command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the hit-related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot related processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the small hit-related processing which is executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the remaining number update process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the temporary stop-related processing executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the fluctuation resumption processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process for special figure 1 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process for special figure 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the various counter update processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. (A) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. .. It is a flowchart which showed the ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the rush inrush command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the additional effect command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. (A) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in the display control device. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the jackpot C is won in the probable change state in the second embodiment. FIG. 1 is a relationship diagram between the game content of the special figure 1 game and the grant privilege after the probability change state in the second embodiment is set. (A) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the second special symbol is changing when the hit symbol of the first special symbol in the second embodiment is stopped, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents when the second special symbol is stopped. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of the 2nd special symbol stop while the hit symbol stop of the 1st special symbol in a form. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the structure of the ROM of the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the jackpot type selection 2 table schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection 2 table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the loss type selection table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of 2 tables for time saving and probability change schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol change stop process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol determination period setting process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the fixed time executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol motion stop processing 2 executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol determination period setting process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 disengagement stop process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the remaining number update process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the temporary stop-related process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the resumption process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the symbol determination-related processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the various counter update process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 1 is a relationship diagram between the game content of the special figure 1 game and the grant privilege after the probability change state in the third embodiment is set. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the end of the jackpot in the third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the first variation after the jackpot. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the third variation after the jackpot in the third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the fourth variation after the jackpot in the third embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the third variation after the jackpot when the third variation after the jackpot in the third embodiment is a jackpot, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the third variation after the jackpot, and (b) is between 1 to 3 fluctuations after the jackpot. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content of the 2nd change after the big hit when the special figure 1 small hit is won. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the structure of the ROM of the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number 3 table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit random number 3 table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the big hit type selection 3 table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection 3 table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection 3 table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability variation 3 table, and (c) is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the probability variation A table schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probabilistic B table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probabilistic C table, and (c) is a probabilistic D table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of 3 tables for latent accuracy schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the third embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the probability change effect selection table schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the deviation processing of special figure 1 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows 1st special symbol change stop process 3 executed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a special figure 1 disengagement stop process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the prize information-related processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot related process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the big hit end processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process for probability variation executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the game flow of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the special figure 1 jackpot is won during the probability change state in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is the flow when the time is shortened during the probability change state. It is a timing chart shown. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the RUSH rush due to the arrival of the reduced number of times in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is the RUSH in the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation in the fourth embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content to notify. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents when the fall lottery is won during the latent state in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a special figure during the latent state in the fourth embodiment. It is a figure which showed the display screen at the time of winning a big hit in 2. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content in super RUSH in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the ROM of the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 4 table in the 4th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a fall lottery table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a latent mode selection table, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a fall lottery table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the notification selection table schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows 1st special symbol change stop processing 4 executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol change stop processing 4 executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the state command process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the latent mode setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the fall effect setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the small hit-related process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the fall notification processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 4 for special figure 1 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 4 for special figure 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the variable winning device for small hits. It is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device for small hits. It is an operation diagram which saw the variable winning device for small hits from the back side. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the special figure 1 jackpot is won during the probability change state in the fifth embodiment. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the game in the case of short-time digestion in the probable change state in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display content at the time of a small hit in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content during the small hit game. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents when the ball passes through the fall gate during the small hit game in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content when the ball passes through the fall gate during the small hit game. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content when it did not pass. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the end of the small hit, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content in the latent state (invincible mode). It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection 5 table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the operation scenario storage area. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit entrance passage processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fall gate passing process executed by MPU in the main control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the state command process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the hit | related process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the ball passing-related processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 87, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to perform a bullet game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 12) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as the opening / closing axis of the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses 16a is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 12) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach effect. Or it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the time when the prize ball is being paid out and the time when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending unit 40 is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening thereof is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 61, 62, and a general prize. It is configured by assembling a port 63, a first ball entry port 64, a second ball entry port 640, a variable winning device 65, an out port 66, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, etc., and the peripheral portion thereof is an inner frame 12 ( It is attached to the back side of (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of wood made by laminating thin plate materials, and is formed so that the player cannot see various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first entry opening 64, the second entry opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged in a game board. It is fixed from the front side of 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board 13, so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired) which is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails. This is the area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 12) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is attenuated and bounced back toward the center.

A first symbol display device 37 (37A, 37A,) provided with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display along the outer peripheral surface of the outer rail 62 on the upper right side of the front view of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 2). 37B) is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 (37A, 37B) displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 12), and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Will be. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 (37A, 37B) indicates whether the ball has entered the first ball entry port 64 (upper first ball entry port 64b1, lower first ball entry port 64b2). It is configured to be used properly according to whether or not the ball has entered the second entry port 640. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 2, but in the present embodiment, the upper first ball entry port 64b1 and the lower first ball entry port 64b2 are provided as a lottery opportunity for the first special symbol. In the following description, when both the upper first ball entry port 64b1 and the lower first ball entry port 64b2 are shown, the term of the first ball entry port 64 will be simply used for explanation.

Specifically, when the ball enters the first entry port 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated, while when the ball enters the second entry port 640, the ball enters the second entry port 640. The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic state, the time saving state, or the normal state by the lighting state, and indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the lighting state. Indicates whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable change jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, a missed symbol, or a small hit symbol by the lighting state, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state. , The 7-segment display device displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and the error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a ball is entered in either the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 15R time reduction jackpot, and 2R time reduction jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to (sets) a probability variation state in which the maximum number of rounds is a high probability state of a special symbol and a high probability state of a normal symbol after a jackpot of 15 rounds. There, "2R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a probability variation state in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 2 rounds. Further, in the "15R time saving jackpot", after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, the time saving state in which the special symbol is in the low probability state and the normal symbol is in the high probability state is changed for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 50 times). ) It is a jackpot to be set, and "2R time saving jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is set to a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 50 times) after the jackpot of 2 rounds. ..

Further, the "high probability state of the special symbol" is a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, in other words, a state of the game in which the transition to the special gaming state is easy. The "high probability state of the normal symbol" is a state in which the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is increased, in other words, a state of the game in which the electric accessory 64a is easily released.

In addition, in the gaming state (probability change state, time saving state) in which the "high probability state of the normal symbol" is set, not only the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) increases, but also the lower first entrance ball opening 64b2 As the time for opening the electric accessory 64a associated with the above, a longer time is set as compared with the gaming state (latent state, normal state) in which the "low probability state of the normal symbol" is set. When the electric accessory 64a is in the open state (open state), the ball is moved to the lower first entry port 64b2 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 64a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy to win a prize. Therefore, during the probable change state or the time saving state, the ball can easily win a prize in the lower first entry slot 64b2, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

It should be noted that, in the probable change state or the time saving state, the opening time of the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entry port 64b2 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, once. The change may be made so that the number of times that the electric accessory 64a is opened by hitting is increased from the normal state. In addition, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, and the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entry port 64b2 is opened for the time and one hit. At least one of the number of times the 64a is opened may be changed. In addition, the time during which the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entry port 64b2 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 64a is opened at one time are not changed during the probability change state or the time saving state. It may be changed so that only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased as compared with the normal state.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are triggered by the entry of a ball into either the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 (starting winning). A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as "display device") that displays a variable display of the third symbol (decorative symbol) while synchronizing with the variable display, and a sphere to the through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs that variablely display a normal symbol (second symbol) with a passage as a trigger is provided.

Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from the opening opened in the center of the center frame 86.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having a size of 9 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 12), for example, the upper, middle, and lower three. Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 12), whereas the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the decorative third symbol is dynamically displayed so as to correspond to the dynamic display of the first symbol (special symbol) displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and the third symbol is dynamically displayed. By configuring the display mode to notify the player, the display mode during the dynamic display period is unified with respect to the dynamic display of the first symbol (special symbol) whose operation is controlled by the main control device 110. For example, even if the processing load of the main control device 110 is reduced by repeatedly turning on and off in 0.1 second increments), the movement of the third symbol set by the voice lamp control device 113 By variably setting the target display mode based on, for example, the lottery result of the first symbol (special symbol), it is possible to suggest to the player that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit (first). The effect mode using the three symbols) can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device lights the "○" symbol and the "×" symbol as normal symbols (second symbol (not shown)) alternately for a predetermined time each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67. It is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entry port 64b2 is provided. It is configured to be in the operating state (operated to the open state) for a predetermined time.

The time required to display the fluctuation of the second symbol is shorter in the high probability state (probability change state, time saving state) of the normal symbol than in the low probability state (normal state, latent state) of the normal symbol as the game state. Is set to be. As a result, during the high-probability state of the normal symbol, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than in the low-probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entrance ball opening 64b2.

Therefore, during the probabilistic change state and the time saving state, it is possible to set the game state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the lower first entry slot 64b2. In this embodiment, the dynamic display mode of the third symbol and the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 are set depending on whether the probabilistic state is set as the gaming state or the time saving state is set. The same display mode is set as the background mode displayed on the screen, and it is configured to make it difficult for the player to grasp the current game state. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of guessing the current game situation.

Further, in the present embodiment, the dynamic display mode of the third symbol and the background mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 are the same in a plurality of gaming states in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. It is configured to set the display mode of. Therefore, when the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is unified, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping what the current gaming state is depending on the operating status of the electric accessory 64a. be able to.

It should be noted that, in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the hit probability is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 64a per hit are increased. 1 When the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the ball entry port 64b2, the time required for the variation display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is set shorter than in the normal state in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state. Further, the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 64a per hit may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board in the area on the right side (right area) of the variable display device unit 80. The through gate 67 is configured so that a part of the balls launched on the game board can pass through the balls flowing down the game board. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a hit, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery result is not correct. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol hold lamps are provided for the maximum number of hold lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be two or more. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Next, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment will be briefly described. In the first embodiment, a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol), a probabilistic state (a high probability state of a special symbol and a high probability state of a normal symbol), and a time saving state (special). Four gaming states are provided: a low-probability state of the symbol and a high-probability state of the normal symbol) and a latent state (a high-probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol). Then, the latent state is configured to be the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

That is, when the latent state is set, the variable time for showing the lottery of the second special symbol, which is more likely to be a lottery result more favorable to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol, is set in another game state. By stipulating that it be shorter than when it is done, the lottery that is advantageous to the player can be executed most efficiently.

In the first embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol. The first specific winning opening 65a of the winning device 65 is opened for a predetermined period (1.5 seconds × 1 time, 0.2 seconds × 6 times, or 0.06 seconds × 8 times). For this reason, in the lottery of the second special symbol, even if the jackpot is not won, there are many chances to get the ball into the first specific winning opening 65a and win the prize ball. It is more advantageous than the lottery. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplification of the explanation, the result of the out-of-lot lottery in which the first specific winning opening 65a is opened will be referred to as a "small hit".

In the lottery of the second special symbol, in addition to the big hit, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened even if it becomes a small hit, so that the prize ball is in a latent state where the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is short. Can continue to increase. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that it will be in a latent state. In a general gaming machine, the probabilistic state is the most advantageous gaming state, but in the present embodiment, the latent probabilistic state is more advantageous than the probabilistic state, so that a novel game property can be provided.

Further, in the first embodiment, the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous). A variable method is adopted). As a result, even if the variable display of one special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the other special symbol can be executed without waiting for the end of the variable display, so that the lottery of the special symbol can be executed more efficiently. can. In addition, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are fluctuating at the same time, if one of them stops fluctuating with a stop symbol of a big hit or a small hit, the other fluctuating display shows the remaining fluctuation time or lottery. Regardless of the result, the stop symbol is displayed as a stop. As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem that the other variable display is fixedly displayed as a hit or a small hit during the execution of the big hit or the small hit, and the big hit or the small hit is started in duplicate.

Here, with reference to FIG. 2, various configurations provided in the game area in the first embodiment and the flow of the ball launched toward the game area will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 of the present embodiment is configured to divide the game area into a left side area and a right side area by a variable display device unit 80 arranged in the center of the game area. ..

In the present embodiment, the launched ball does not pass through the foul ball prevention valve 68 until the operation handle 51 is rotated 20 degrees (clockwise) from the initial position (state in which the player is not rotating). The ball is fired with a degree of firing intensity. Therefore, the launched ball finally flows back in the launch path formed between the outer rail 62 and the inner rail 61 and becomes a foul ball. The foul ball that flows backward and flows down passes through the start position of the launch flow path (the lower left end of the outer rail 62 shown in FIG. 2) and communicates with the upper plate 17 (see FIG. 1). (Not shown) flows down and is recirculated to the upper plate 17. With this configuration, even if a foul ball is generated when the player operates the operation handle 51 to launch the ball with a desired firing intensity, the foul ball remains in the firing path and the game is played. It is possible to suppress the hindrance to.

Next, when the operation amount (rotation amount) of the operation handle 51 is in the range of 20 to 80 degrees from the initial position (the state in which the player is not rotating), the ball is launched with a firing intensity sufficient to flow down the left side region described above. In the range of 81 degrees to 120 degrees (81 degrees to 120 degrees, which is the maximum rotation amount of the operation handle 51), the ball is launched with a firing intensity sufficient to flow down the right side region described above.

That is, the present embodiment is configured so that the area where the ball flows down can be changed based on the operation amount of the operation handle 51, that is, based on the operation of the player. Further, although details will be described later, in the first embodiment, when a gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set as the gaming state, the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is set so that the ball flows down the left side region. Instead of playing a game that is adjusted (hereinafter referred to as a left-handed game), a game that is performed by adjusting the operation amount of the operation handle 51 so that the ball flows down the right area (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed game) is performed. It is configured as follows. With this configuration, the player may maintain the operation handle 51 rotated to the upper limit (rotated 120 degrees) while the gaming state advantageous to the player is set. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the player play an appropriate game.

Next, the left side region of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. Details will be described later, but in the first embodiment, the game state is a normal state (special symbol low probability state: normal symbol low probability state), a time saving state (special symbol low probability state: normal symbol high probability state), and a probabilistic state. It is configured to be set to either (special symbol high probability state: normal symbol high probability state) or latent state (special symbol high probability state: normal symbol low probability state). In addition, the big hit game state executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is won in the big hit and the small hit game state executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is won in the small hit are set. It is configured.

Among them, when the normal state, the time saving state, and the probable change state are set as the game state, the variable display device unit 80 is used to perform a left-handed game in which the ball is made to flow down to the left side area of the game board 13. A right-handed game in which the player is guided to the game method using the display screen of the provided third symbol display device 81, and when the latent state is set, the ball is made to flow down to the left area of the game board 13. Is configured to guide the player to the game method using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 so as to perform the above. Further, during the big hit game state or the small hit game state, the player's game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) is guided according to the game state before the winning.

As a guidance method for each game method (left-handed game, right-handed game), for example, a game method suitable for the current game state may be configured to be displayed at all times, or only when the game method is switched after switching. It may be configured to display the game method. Further, when a game method (left-handed game in this embodiment) that is easily set for a long period of time is regarded as a normal game among the left-handed game and the right-handed game, and a game method other than the normal game (right-handed game) is performed. The game method may be constantly guided and displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the guide display may not be performed when the left-handed game is to be performed.

When there are two types of game methods to be selected by the player as in the present embodiment, the other game method can be guided by not displaying the display mode for guiding one game method. That is, it is possible to guide a plurality of game methods depending on whether or not one display mode is displayed. In this embodiment, the display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is used to guide the player to the game method, but the present embodiment is not limited to this. As described above, by not displaying a specific display mode, a configuration for notifying the player of the game method may be used, or a configuration for notifying the player using voice or a lamp may be used.

A through gate 67 and a general winning opening 63 are arranged in the left side region of the game board 13. Further, at a lower position of the variable display device unit 80, an upper first ball entry port 64b1 is provided so that a ball flowing down the left side region can enter the ball. A lower first ball entry port 64b2 to which an electric accessory 64a is attached is provided at a position below the upper first ball entry port 64b1. In this electric accessory 64a, when the ball is won in the normal symbol (second symbol) lottery executed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the ball enters the lower first entrance slot 64b2. It is configured to variably move from a closed state (first state) where the ball is difficult (impossible) to an open state (second state) where the ball can easily (possibly) enter the lower first entry port 64b2. ing.

As described above, in the first embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) can be executed (the change of the special figure 1 is not executed, and the big hit game and the small hit game are executed. When a ball enters the upper first entry port 64b1 or the lower first entry opening 64b2 in a state where the ball has not been entered), the lottery shown in FIG. 1 is executed. That is, the entry of a ball into the upper first entry port 64b1 or the lower first entry opening 64b2 is an opportunity for executing the lottery of the first special symbol.

In addition, in a state in which the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) cannot be newly executed (a state in which the change in special figure 1 has already been executed, or a big hit game or a small hit game has been executed). When a ball enters the upper first entry port 64b1 or the lower first entry opening 64b2, it has a storage means for storing the right of the ball to enter, up to a predetermined number (4). ing.

Therefore, even while the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) is being executed, the player can be made to continue playing the game, so that the operation of the game can be improved. In this embodiment, only the storage means for storing the right of the ball to enter and the first special symbol are provided.

80% of the balls flowing down the left side area by the left-handed game pass through the through gate 67, and about 8% of the launched balls (8 balls out of 100 balls) enter the upper first entrance 64b1. A spherical flow path is formed by a plurality of structures such as nails and windmills so as to make a sphere. Further, when the electric accessory 64a is in the closed state, about 0% of the balls enter the lower first entry port 64b2, and when the electric accessory 64a is in the open state, the lower first entry port 64a. The ball flow path is formed so that the number of balls entering 64b2 is about 25%. That is, it is difficult for a ball to enter in the order of the lower first entry port 64b2 (electric accessory 64a open state), the upper first entry port 64b1, and the lower first entry port 64b2 (electric accessory 64a closed state). It is configured to be.

As described above, the upper first entry slot 64b1 and the lower first entry opening 64b2 are configured to give the player a privilege of paying out a prize ball in addition to the privilege of executing the lottery of the first special symbol. It is configured to pay out four prize balls to the player every time one ball is inserted. In this embodiment, the same number (4) prize balls are given regardless of whether the ball enters the upper first entry port 64b1 or the lower first entry opening 64b2. However, the prize balls may be set to different numbers for each of them.

On the other hand, in the right area of the game board 13, a second ball entry port 640 and a first variable winning device 65 are provided. The second entry port 640 is configured so that the lottery of the second special symbol is executed when the ball enters, and a plurality of balls are entered so that about 50% of the balls flowing down the right area enter. A spherical flow path is formed by nails. Here, the ball that did not enter the second entry port 640 flows down toward the first variable winning device 65 provided below the right side region.

Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in the present embodiment, in the state where the normal state is set as the gaming state, the time (variable time) from the execution of the lottery of the second special symbol to the display of the lottery result is long. In the state where the fluctuation time of the time (10 minutes) is set and the latent state is set, the short fluctuation time (1 second) is set.

That is, when the normal state is set as the game state, the right-handed game is performed rather than the ball being inserted into the first entrance 64 in order to perform the left-handed game and execute the lottery of the first special symbol. It is easier to put the ball into the second entrance 640 in order to execute the lottery of the second special symbol, but since the fluctuation time for a long time (10 minutes) is set, the game efficiency is improved. It gets very bad. Therefore, in the normal state, the player plays a left-handed game and executes a lottery for the first special symbol.

In addition, since the second entry port 640 is set with one prize ball, a right-handed game is performed in a state where the normal state is set, and a ball fired in a right-handed game at a rate of about 50%. Even if the ball is inserted into the second entry port 640, the number of balls does not increase.

Further, when the time saving state or the probabilistic change state is set as the gaming state, the normal symbol becomes a high probability state, and the electric accessory 64a is easily released. However, since the through gate 67, which triggers the lottery of the normal symbol for opening the electric accessory 64a, is provided only in the left side region, the lower first entry port 64b2 makes it easier for the ball to enter than in the normal state. It is configured to allow the player to perform a left-handed game in order to allow the ball to enter the ball.

On the other hand, in the state where the latent state is set as the game state, the normal symbol becomes a low probability state and the electric accessory 64a becomes difficult to open, and as described above, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is short. Since the fluctuation time of (1 second) is set, it is an appropriate game to perform a right-handed game and execute a lottery of the second special symbol. Here, in the first embodiment, only the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to win a small hit (winning probability of about 1/2). When a small hit is won, the first variable winning device 65 is opened for a predetermined period (for example, 1.5 seconds) as a small hit game, and 10 for one ball that has entered the first variable winning device 65. It is configured so that individual prize balls are awarded.

That is, when the latent state is set as the game state, the player continuously executes the right-handed game to draw a second special symbol aiming at winning a small hit, and a small hit game. Can be executed continuously.

As shown in FIG. 2, a second variable winning device 650 is arranged at the lowermost part of the game area. The second variable winning device 650 operates so that the rotary door 650f operates toward the front side when a big hit is won by a special symbol lottery, and the ball is in an open state in which a ball can win a prize in the second specific winning opening 650a. Is to be done. The second variable winning device 650 is configured so that a ball that has flowed down the left side region by a left-handed game and a ball that has flowed down the right side area by a right-handed game can be evenly entered. Therefore, when the jackpot game in which the second variable winning device 650 is opened is executed, the gaming method before the jackpot game is executed may be continuously executed, and the gaming method may be performed for the player. Can be suppressed from being complicatedly changed.

When a ball enters the above-mentioned first entry port 64 (upper first entry opening 64b1 and lower first entry opening 64b2), a first entry opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13. ) Is turned on, a big hit lottery is performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 12) due to the turning on of the first ball entrance switch, and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A. Is done.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the second entrance 640, the second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, which is caused by the on of the second entrance switch. A big hit lottery is made by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 12), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, the first entry port 64 is a winning opening in which four balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, and the second entry opening 640 is a winning opening in which one ball is paid out when a ball enters. It is one of the winning openings paid out as a prize ball. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the upper first entry port 64b1 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the first entry port 64. Was made the same (both 4) and different from the number of prize balls (1) paid out when the ball entered the 2nd entry port 640, but the ball entered the upper 1st entry opening 64b1. The number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the lower first entry port 64b2 may be different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the lower first entry port 64b2.

In this case, for example, the number of prize balls in the upper first entry port 64b1 is set to four, and the number of prize balls in the lower first entry opening 64b2 is set to two, so that a normal state in which it is difficult for a ball to enter is set. In this case, the privilege for the ball entering the upper first entry port 64b1 is increased, and the ball is more likely to enter when a specific game state (probability change state, time saving state) is set. Even if a ball frequently enters the 1 entry slot 64b2, the player may not be allowed to acquire an excessive prize ball, and the number of prize balls in the upper 1st entry slot 64b1 is 4 and the lower 1st. The number of prize balls in the entry port 64b2 may be set to 5, and when a specific game state (probability change state, time saving state) is set, a large privilege may be given to the player.

Further, the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the second entry port 640 (for example, both are 5). It may be configured as (pieces).

An electric accessory 64a is attached to the lower first ball entry port 64b2. The electric accessory 64a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 64a is in a closed state (regulated state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the lower first entry port 64b2. There is. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display (normal symbol lottery) of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory The 64a is in the open state (allowable state), and the ball can easily enter the lower first entry port 64b2.

As described above, in the probabilistic state and the time-saving state, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than in the normal state, and the time required to display the variation of the second symbol is shorter, so that the variation display of the second symbol is performed. In, the symbol "○" is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 64a is in the open state (allowable state) increases. Further, during the probable change state or the time saving state, the time for opening the electric accessory 64a is also longer than that in the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball can easily enter the lower first entry port 64b2 in the probable change state or the time saving state as compared with the normal state.

As described above, the lower first entry port 64b2, that is, the entry port to which the electric accessory 64a is attached, is in a state where the ball can easily enter according to the set gaming state (first state). It is possible to set a state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter (second state). That is, from the viewpoint of the ease of entering the ball, the first state is an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the second state is a disadvantageous gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player (more disadvantageous than the first state). It becomes.

Here, when the ball enters the first entry port 64 (when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed) and when the ball enters the second entry opening 640 (the lottery of the second special symbol). The probability of winning a jackpot is the same, and if a low probability state of a special symbol is set, a lottery that wins a jackpot is executed with a predetermined low probability (for example, 1/280). When the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the lottery that becomes a big hit is executed with a predetermined high probability (for example, 1/30) that is easier to win than the low probability state. However, the type of jackpot selected (set) in the case of a jackpot is set to be different between the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment sets the method of launching the ball (game method) to the player as "left-handed (left-handed game)" and "right" according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. It can be changed to "hit (right-handed game)". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the ball is hit for the player, so that the game can be enjoyed.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win (win) in any of the winning openings (entrance openings) 63, 64b1, 64b 2, 65a, 640, 650a is shown through the out opening 66. You will be guided to a ball discharge channel that does not. The out port 66 is arranged below the lower first ball entry port 64b2. In the first embodiment, the game area has one out port 66, but other configurations may be used, and two or more out ports 66 may be provided.

By providing a plurality of out ports 66 in this way, it is necessary to form a ball flow path for finally consolidating the balls launched in the game area to one place (the place where the out ports 66 are arranged). Since it is eliminated, the degree of freedom in arranging various devices constituting the game area can be increased. Specifically, for example, it is preferable to provide an out port dedicated to the ball flowing down the left side region and an out port dedicated to the ball flowing down the right side region. Further, when a plurality of out ports are provided, it is preferable to provide a notification means for notifying the player that the ball entry port is an out port. As a result, a situation occurs in which no privilege is given even though the ball enters the ball entry port (actually the out port) provided in the game area, which suppresses the player from being uncomfortable. be able to.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the board boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is provided with a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 to pay out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 12). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 12). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol (decorative symbol dynamically displayed corresponding to the dynamic display of the first symbol) is composed of nine types of main symbols with numbers "1" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of numbers "1" to "9" on the rear symbols that imitate various animals. Specifically, for example, the number "1" is attached to the rear design imitating an elephant, and the number "2" is attached to the rear design imitating a lion. By making the display mode in which the third symbol is combined with the rear symbol and the number in association with each other in this way, the display mode of the rear symbol is displayed to the player even during the dynamic display of the third symbol (the rear symbol is displayed. The type of the 3rd symbol can be roughly grasped by the color, outline, size, etc.), and when the 3rd symbol is stopped and displayed, the number attached to the rear symbol can be identified to ensure the type of the 3rd symbol. Can be grasped.

In the first embodiment, the combination of the rear symbol and the number forming the third symbol is not changed, but the combination of the rear symbol, the display mode, and the number may be changed. good. With this configuration, it is possible to display a lottery result different from the lottery result (type of the third symbol) predicted by the player while the third symbol is dynamically displayed, and the player can be displayed. On the other hand, it is possible to provide a game that does not get tired. Further, by setting the combination pattern of the rear symbol and the number as the third symbol to be regularly changed according to, for example, the lottery result of the special symbol or the set gaming state, the third symbol can be used. It is possible to improve the prediction accuracy of the game content based on the display mode (combination of the rear symbol and the number) that is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of making the prediction.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed, and the variable display is completed. It is configured to generate a jackpot later. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned. Further, in the present embodiment, a small hit is won as a lottery result of a special symbol, and when the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, the main symbol is a specific combination (for example, "341"). Is stopped and displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, the lottery result is made easy for the player to understand by making the combination of the main symbols to be stopped and displayed different according to the lottery result of the special symbol, but the present invention is limited to this. Without this, for example, the same main symbol may be stopped and displayed depending on whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit or a small hit.

As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, and about 3/4 of the upper side is the main display area Dm for variable display of the third symbol, and the rest. Approximately 1/4 of the lower side is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

In the main display area Dm, three symbol rows L1, L2, and L3, which are upper, middle, and lower, are displayed. In each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in each symbol row L1 to L3, and each symbol row L1 to L3 is periodically scrolled in the left-right direction (usually from right to left) to display a variable display. Is done. In particular, in the upper symbol row L1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row L2 and the lower symbol row L3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the three columns of left, middle, and right for each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. The vertical line on the left side of the main display area Dm, the vertical line in the middle stage, and the vertical line on the right side are set as effective lines V1 to V3, respectively. In addition, the downward-sloping diagonal line and the upward-sloping diagonal line in the main display area Dm are set as effective lines V4 and V5, respectively. In each game, the third symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) on the effective lines V1 to V5 in the order of the upper symbol row L1 → the lower symbol row L3 → the middle symbol row L2. This stop display state is held for at least 1 second. In this way, by displaying the stopped 3rd symbol for a certain period (1 second or more), whether or not the player is a combination of the 3rd symbols corresponding to the jackpot (the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot). It is possible to prevent overlooking (whether or not there is). Further, if a combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, the same combination of main symbols) is aligned on the effective lines V1 to V5 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot moving image (opening effect) is displayed as a jackpot.

In addition, if the combination of the third symbols displayed as stopped is a combination corresponding to the disconnection and there is a reserved ball, after the stop display (confirmed display) for 1 second, the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is displayed. Is started. If there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved balls corresponding to the oldest incoming balls in time.

On the other hand, if the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the deviation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) for 1 second in the state where the reserved ball does not exist, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. .. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters either the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed (confirmed display), a demo effect (customer waiting demo screen) indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. ..

It is rare that the player does not enter the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 even though the player has continuously fired the ball for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). In most cases, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) because the player has quit the game, and the pachinko machine 10 has not played the game at all. to cause. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the stop display of the third symbol, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on the presence or absence of the display of the demonstration effect. On the other hand, if a new ball enters the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 640 before the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the new ball enters the ball. The variable display of the third symbol is executed.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm. The sub-display area Ds is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) whose fluctuation has not been executed among the balls entered in the first entry port 64. In the present embodiment, the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 while the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol is performed by the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37). In this case, the number of balls entered is held up to 4 times, and the number of held balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. The number of reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is currently suspended. In this embodiment, only the variable display of the first special symbol can be held, and the variable display of the second special symbol is not stored on hold. Therefore, in the sub-display area Ds, only the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed.

In the display screen shown using FIG. 4A, the sub-display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm, and the third symbol is dynamically displayed (variable display) in the main display area Dm. The effect (variable effect) including the above is executed, and the advance notice effect, the display of the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like are executed in the sub-display area Ds. It is not necessary to form each area shown in 1. For example, when the player is watching the effect for suggesting whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the display area of the sub display area Ds is used. It may be configured to perform a powerful effect by reducing (erasing) and enlarging the display area of the main display area Dm. On the other hand, when the effect of changing the display mode of the reserved symbol or the game guidance explaining the future game contents is emphasized and executed in the sub display area Ds, the display area of the main display area Dm is reduced and the sub By enlarging the display area of the display area Ds, it may be configured to perform an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

Further, depending on the set gaming state and the effect mode being executed, an area for displaying the number of reserved symbols in the main display area Dm and an area for executing the advance notice effect may be formed, or a sub-area may be formed. The display area Ds may be provided with an area for executing the variable display of the third symbol.

Next, an example of the display content actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 4 (b). On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols and sub-symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. Further, on the right side and the left side of the display area Dm, three parts of the main symbol and three parts of the sub symbol are displayed. These show the lottery result of the first special symbol in the normal state. Further, in the upper central portion of the main display area Dm, a small area Dm1 for displaying the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed. In this small area Dm1, variation display of three third symbols having a simple aspect composed of only the numbers "1" to "9" is executed. Even in this small area Dm1, the big hit is started by stopping and displaying the three third symbols composed of the same numbers. It should be noted that the display of the third symbol showing the lottery result of the second special symbol in a simpler manner than the third symbol showing the lottery result of the first special symbol is basically displayed in the normal state and the probable change state. This is because the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, and the lottery for the second special symbol is rarely executed.

Therefore, the game result is displayed more clearly by configuring the variable display of the first special symbol, which is mainly executed, to be displayed in a larger display area. In the following description, the variable display of the special symbol mainly executed in each game state (in the normal state and the probabilistic state, the variable display of the first special symbol is applicable) is referred to as a main variation, and in each game state. The variable display of the special symbol that is rarely executed when the regular game method is performed (in the normal state or the probabilistic state, the variable display of the second special symbol is applicable) is called a sub-variation.

Further, as will be described in detail later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the state where the probability variation state is set, it is a long period (up to 10 minutes). The variable display (dynamic display) is executed, and the gaming state is configured to shift from the probable change state to the latent state at the timing when the variable display is started. Then, during the period in which the latent state is set (the period from the execution of the variable display that becomes the jackpot to the end of the variable display and the start of the jackpot game), the second special symbol is drawn. It is configured to execute a game aiming at a small hit. Therefore, when the latent state is set as the gaming state, the variation display of the second special symbol becomes the main variation, and the variation display of the first special symbol becomes the sub-variation.

In the small area Ds1 in the sub-display area Ds, the same number of reserved symbols imitating the face of a bird are displayed as the number of reserved balls of the first symbol. At the start of the variation display based on the holding ball corresponding to each of the reserved symbols, the effect of entering the inside of the house displayed on the right side in the small area Ds1 is executed. As a result, the player can easily understand that the variable display corresponding to the reserved ball has started. Further, in the small area Ds1, a notice effect is sometimes performed such that the reserved symbol performs a special operation or another character appears.

In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of held balls is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times. It may be set to the following or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the ball entering the second ball entry port 640 may be configured to be holdable. Further, instead of displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1, the reserved ball number is different by a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 5, the flow of the variable display effect of the third symbol in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 5 is a timing chart schematically showing the game state of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment and the content of the variation display effect executed in response to the variation status of each special symbol. Here, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be briefly described. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a variable display (dynamic display) for showing the lottery result of the first special symbol and a variable display (dynamic display) for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol. ) And can be executed at the same time (in parallel).

Then, when the probability variation state (high probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol) is set and the variation display corresponding to the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed, the high probability state of the normal symbol is executed. Is configured to shift to a low-probability state, and the gaming state shifts from a probabilistic state to a latent state. While this latent state is set, the variable display (dynamic display) period for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol is set short, so that many lottery of the second special symbol can be executed. It will be a period that can be done (Special Figure 2 Fluctuation Advantageous Period).

In the present embodiment, since the small hit is configured to be won with a probability of about 1/2 in the lottery of the second special symbol, the small hit is set during the period when the latent state is set as the game state. The small hit game that is executed when the player wins the game is frequently executed, and the game state is advantageous to the player who can win many prize balls (special figure 2 advantageous state).

As described above, the period in which the latent probability state is set in the present embodiment (special figure 2 variable advantageous period) is during the variable display period (dynamic display period) of the first special symbol won by the jackpot in the probable change state. Since (special figure 1 big hit is changing), the big hit game is executed when the special figure 2 advantageous state ends. In this way, since a plurality of states (special figure 2 advantageous state, jackpot game state) that are advantageous to the player are continuously set, the player is continuously given various benefits. Can be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a small hit is won by one special symbol (special figure 2) and the small hit game is executed, the fluctuation of the other special symbol (special figure 1) is interrupted (variation display period). The measurement is interrupted), and when the small hit game is completed, the measurement of the interrupted fluctuation display period is restarted. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the special figure 2 variable advantage period from being subtracted during the small hit game, and therefore, regardless of the number of small hit games executed during the special figure 2 variable advantageous period. It is possible to provide the player with a certain special figure 2 variable advantageous period.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result of one special symbol (special figure 1), the other special symbol (special figure 2) that is changing is stopped and displayed. It is configured to be forcibly stopped with. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a small hit game is executed during a big hit game.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control content for the change of the other special symbol is different depending on the lottery result of one special symbol. Specifically, if the lottery result of one special symbol is a big hit (a lottery result that can give the player the first privilege), the change of the other special symbol means that the lottery result is out of order. If it is stopped and displayed in the display mode shown and the lottery result of one special symbol is a small hit (a lottery result that can give the player a second privilege different from the first privilege), the other special symbol changes. Is stopped until the grant of the second privilege is completed (until the small hit game is completed), and is restarted after the grant of the second privilege is completed. In addition, if the lottery result of one special symbol is out of order, the change of the other special symbol is executed as it is.

With this configuration, the lottery content (lottery result, period until the lottery result is displayed) of the other special symbol can be changed based on the lottery result of one special symbol, and the player's It is possible to provide various playability.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a lottery result that can give a privilege to the player, the control content for the change of the other special symbol is changed according to the content of the privilege. Therefore, for example, in the case of a lottery result that gives the player the most advantageous privilege (big hit game), the lottery result corresponding to the change of the other special symbol being executed is the lottery result that gives the privilege. Even so, the fluctuation is forcibly stopped so that the lottery result is out of order, the player is suppressed from being given excessive benefits, and the lottery result (small hit) with less benefits given than the big hit game. In the case of, in order to prevent the privilege based on the lottery of the other special symbol from being given during the small hit game without changing the lottery result corresponding to the change of the other special symbol being executed, the variable display is performed. It is possible to interrupt only the measurement of the period.

Therefore, in a state where a plurality of special symbols (Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2) are fluctuating at the same time, the player is given the least advantageous privilege, and thus the most advantageous privilege to be given later is given. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the player is not able to do so, and it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player feels uncomfortable.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the latent state is set as the gaming state, a short-term (0.5 second) variable display period is set as the variable display period of the second special symbol (special figure 2). It is configured so that small hit games can be performed frequently. Then, the condition for setting the latent state as the gaming state is the condition where the latent state is set, and the condition for ending the latent state is the condition for winning the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol while the probability changing state is set. Is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot, and the jackpot game is executed. Therefore, the jackpot game is executed after the end of the first advantageous period, which is advantageous to the player who frequently executes the small hit game. The second game period will be set. Therefore, since the first advantageous period and the second advantageous period that are advantageous to the player can be continuously set, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game so that the first advantageous period is set.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 5 to 9, the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in each gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, when the jackpot gaming state is set as the gaming state, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 displays, for example, a round of the jackpot game currently being executed as the content of the jackpot game. A mode for displaying the number of rounds to indicate the number, a mode for displaying the amount of acquired balls to indicate the number of acquired balls, and a type for suggesting the type of the jackpot game being executed (the number of rounds, the game state set after the jackpot game is completed). The number of jackpots won in the period in which the non-normal state (probability change state, latent state, time saving state) is continuously set without setting the normal state as the suggestion display mode and the game state (so-called continuous chan number). ) Etc. are displayed. The jackpot game display mode is displayed.

Then, at the timing when the jackpot game ends (see FIG. 5A), when the jackpot type this time is the jackpot type (for example, jackpot A) in which the probability change state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot game ends, the figure. As shown in 6 (a), an effect mode (chance zone mode) aiming at setting a latent probability state advantageous to the player is displayed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 6A, the display contents of the end screen (ending screen) of the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 6A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the end screen (ending screen) of the jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 6A, on the ending screen of the jackpot game, a comment "Entering the chance zone !!" indicating that the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. Then, in the main display area Dm, the character 811 displayed during the period in which the probability change state or the latent probability state is set is displayed. This character 811 is configured so as not to appear (not displayed) during the period in which the normal state is set, and the player is in the period in which the character 811 is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is designed to be in a game state that is advantageous to the player (a game state that is more advantageous than the normal state).

With this configuration, the player can grasp the outline of the currently set gaming state by grasping whether or not the character 811 is displayed on the display screen, so that the game is easy to understand. Can be provided.

In addition, the comment "Aim for RUSH !!" is displayed to aim at setting the latent state in the main display area Dm. Further, in the guidance display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, the character "left-handed" is displayed as a guidance display mode for causing the player to perform a left-handed game. As a result, it is possible to easily make the player know that the left side game aiming at the left side area is performed when the probability change state is set. In the present embodiment, the second variable winning device 650, which is opened during the jackpot game, has both a ball fired by the left-handed game (a ball flowing down the left side region) and a ball fired by the right-handed game. , Characters (“left-handed”, “right-handed”) displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 during the jackpot game, which are arranged at positions where prizes can be won (downstream position of the game area (see FIG. 2)), that is, , The game method to be guided during the jackpot game is configured to be variable according to the game state before the jackpot game is executed.

Specifically, when the game state when the jackpot is won is determined and it is determined that the game state is the game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state) in which the left-handed game is guided, it is displayed as a guidance display during the jackpot. When "left-handed" is displayed and it is determined that the right-handed game is in the guided game state (latent state), "right-handed" is displayed as the guidance display during the jackpot. As a result, when the jackpot game is executed, it is possible to save the time and effort for the player to change the game method.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the special figure 1 display area Dm1 for displaying the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol and the special figure 2 display area for displaying the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol are displayed. Dm2 is formed, and according to the example shown in FIG. 6A, "777" is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 as a display mode corresponding to the jackpot game currently being executed (during the ending screen display). It is displayed. In the special figure 2 display area Dm2, "-" is displayed as a non-variable display mode indicating that the second special symbol is not variablely displayed.

In the present embodiment, if the special symbol has never been variablely displayed after the power is turned on, the above-mentioned non-variable display mode is displayed. By displaying this non-variable display mode, it is possible for the player to predict the past game history (variation history of the special symbol).

Although the present embodiment is configured to display the non-variable display mode described above, the present embodiment is not limited to this, and is configured to display a predetermined display mode (initial display mode) indicating deviation. It is also good, or when it is determined that the elapsed period since the last variable display was executed exceeds a predetermined period (for example, 30 minutes), the display displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 and the special figure 2 display area Dm2. The mode may be configured to be variably displayed in the initial display mode or the non-variable display mode.

Returning to FIG. 5, the explanation will be continued. In the state in which the probability variation state is set as the game state (see FIG. 5B), the game state is such that the lottery of the first special symbol can be easily executed by the left-handed game. That is, in the probabilistic state, since the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the electric accessory 64a is easily opened, and the ball is easily entered into the lower first entry port 64b2.

The contents of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in this probabilistic state will be described with reference to FIG. 6 (b). FIG. 6B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the display screen in the probable change state. As shown in FIG. 6B, the comment "in the chance zone" indicating that the current gaming state is in the probable changing state is displayed so as to scroll horizontally (from right to left) in the sub-display area Ds. Scroll.

Then, in the main display area Dm, an effect that the character 811 moves (runs) in the horizontal direction (from left to right) is displayed. Then, "left-handed" is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3, and a changing display indicating that the first special symbol is changing is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. Even at this point, the second special symbol is not newly changed from the state shown in FIG. 6 (a) (because the ball is not entered into the second entrance 640 by the right-handed game). , The non-variable display mode "-" is continuously displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a plurality of operation display patterns of the character 811 are stored in the probabilistic state, and the lottery result (hit / fail determination result) of the first special symbol in the probabilistic state is stored. The operation display pattern of the character 811 is set differently according to the situation. This makes it possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol will win the jackpot in the probable change state.

After the display screen shown in FIG. 6 (b) is displayed, when the variable display for showing that the lottery result of the first special symbol has won the big hit is executed, the display shown in FIG. 7 (a) is executed. The screen is displayed. FIG. 7A is a schematic diagram showing the display contents displayed when the variable display in which the jackpot is won is started in the probable change state. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the gaming state shifts from the probabilistic state to the latent state at the timing when the variation display indicating that the first special symbol has won the jackpot is started during the probable change state. It is configured as follows.

Therefore, in order to shift the gaming state to a state advantageous for the player (latent state) at the timing when the change of the first special symbol starts, the change of the first special symbol in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 of the display screen. While the variable display mode indicating that the display is being executed is displayed, the display mode of the effect symbol 813 (display mode of "333") for indicating that the game state has changed to the player is stopped. Will be done. As a result, the player can be made to think that the gaming state has changed from the probabilistic state to the latent state because the effect symbol 813 is stopped and displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, since the display mode similar to the display mode of the third symbol is used as the effect symbol display mode, the stop-displayed effect symbol display mode is a display for showing the lottery result of the special symbol. It can be thought of as an aspect.

This embodiment is configured so that a large number of small hit games can be executed by frequently executing the variable display of the second special symbol during the period in which the latent probability state is set. Therefore, at least during the period in which the latent probability state is set, "right-handed" for indicating the right-handed game to the player is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3. Then, the comment "RUSH rush !! Right-handed" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds to indicate that the latent state is set as the game state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect symbol displayed in the main display area Dm is stopped and displayed without changing the effect mode of the special figure 1 display area Dm1 at the start of the change of the first special symbol won by the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that the game state has changed according to the lottery result of the effect symbol.

Then, while the right-handed game is continuously executed in the latent state (during the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol), when the small hit is won by the lottery of the second special symbol, it is shown in FIG. 7 (b). As you can see, the effect mode for showing that the small hit was won is displayed. Here, the display contents when the latent probability state is set will be described with reference to FIG. 7 (b). FIG. 7B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the display screen in the latent state.

According to FIG. 7B, if a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol while the latent state is set (in RUSH), the first special symbol is in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. A variation display mode for suggesting that is in fluctuation (big hit fluctuation) is displayed, and a display mode "341" indicating that a small hit has been won is displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2. ..

Then, the treasure box 812 displayed as the effect mode in RUSH is opened, and "V" for indicating a small hit is displayed as the effect symbol 813 for indicating the game result from the inside. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the small hit is won by the second special symbol during the latent state (RUSH) and the small hit game is executed.

In this embodiment, the first variable winning device 65, which is rotated when a small hit is won, is provided in the right side region, and the game can be played by the same game method (right-handed) as in the latent state. It is configured as follows. With this configuration, even if the small hit game is frequently executed during the latent state, the player only has to continue the right-handed game, so that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand game. can.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the probability variation state, the latent probability state is set from the start of the jackpot fluctuation, and the latent probability state is set. Is set so that the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be efficiently performed.

Therefore, at the same time as the latent state is set, the player is notified of the period during which the latent state is set (based on the setting of the latent state) (FIG. 7 (a)). ))reference.

However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be changed at the same time, the first special symbol is also the second in the state where the probabilistic state is set. Both special symbols may fluctuate.

In such a case, even if the display mode indicating that the latent state (RUSH) is set at the timing when the latent state is set is displayed (see FIG. 7A), the second is currently changing. Until the special symbol stops fluctuating, the lottery for the second special symbol cannot be executed in the latent state, and there is a problem that the small hit game is not executed forever even in the RUSH state. There was a risk.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the condition for transition to the latent probability state is satisfied (when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol during the probability change state), the change status of the second special symbol (whether or not there is a change, (Fluctuating remaining period) is determined, and the timing for notifying that the RUSH state has been set is different based on the determination result.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 5 and 8, when the transition condition to the latent probability state is satisfied (when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol during the probability change state), the second special symbol ( The contents of the production when the special figure 2) is fluctuating will be explained. As shown in FIG. 5, if the second special symbol is changing at the time when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started in the state where the probability change state is set (see (c) of FIG. 5), the probability change A "super chance zone" with a higher expectation that the RUSH state is set is displayed rather than a "chance zone" for indicating the state.

Here, the display contents of the display screen in the "super chance zone" will be described with reference to FIG. 8A. FIG. 8A is a diagram when the change in which the jackpot is won in the first special symbol is executed during the second special symbol change in the probabilistic state. In other words, this "super chance zone" is a state in which the latent state is set as the game state, but the variation display of the second special symbol executed before the latent state is set is displayed. It is a display mode which shows the state which is not finished.

When the "super chance zone" is set, a comment indicating that the sub-display area Ds is "in the super chance zone" is displayed. Then, in the main display area Dm, the character 811 is displayed in a mode in which the character 811 is moving at a higher speed than in FIG. 6B, and the character 811 moving at a high speed is configured to easily find the treasure box 812.

Then, a "variable display mode" for indicating that the first special symbol is changing is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, and a latent state is set in the special figure 2 display area Dm2. The "variation display mode" that has been changing since the previous time is displayed.

Returning to FIG. 5, the explanation will be continued. The display screen of the "super chance zone" shown in FIG. 8A is displayed until the timing at which the special figure 2 fluctuation executed over the timing of shifting the gaming state from the probable change state to the latent probable state ends. When the special figure 2 fluctuation is completed (see FIG. 5 (d)), the “RUSH” rush screen for notifying the player that the “RUSH” has been rushed is displayed (see FIG. 8 (b)).

Here, with reference to FIG. 8B, the contents of the screen that has entered the “RUSH” via the “super chance zone” will be described. FIG. 8B is a schematic diagram schematically showing a screen that has entered the “RUSH” via the “super chance zone”. As shown in FIG. 8B, in the main display area Dm, the effect symbol 813 is displayed from the treasure box 812, and a display mode for notifying the player that the player has entered "RUSH" is displayed. Then, "right-handed" that guides the game method during the rush game is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3. At this point, the special figure 1 display area Dm1 displays a variation display mode for suggesting that the first special symbol is changing (big hit fluctuation), and the special figure 2 display area Dm2 shows an deviation. The display mode "346" is stopped and displayed.

Returning to FIG. 5, the explanation will be continued. During the rush game (during RUSH), that is, during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, a game in which a lottery of the second special symbol in which a variation pattern with a short variation time is set by performing a right-handed game is frequently performed. Is executed. Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in the present embodiment, in a state where one special symbol wins a big hit (including during a big hit change), the other special symbol can be won by lottery. It is configured so that there is no such thing. Therefore, in the lottery of the second special symbol during the rush game, the lottery result is either a small hit or a miss. Then, in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is configured to win a small hit with a high probability (about 1/2).

Therefore, during the rush game, the game of winning the small hit with a probability of 1/2 and acquiring the prize ball by the small hit game will continue until the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol is completed. That is, even if the lottery of the second special symbol is frequently executed during the rush game, the jackpot is not won by the lottery of the second special symbol, so the jackpot fluctuation period of the first special symbol is fully used. Rush games can be provided.

Then, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is completed (see FIG. 5 (f)), a screen corresponding to the jackpot type won this time is displayed (see FIGS. 9 (a) and 9 (b)). Here, the display screen at the end of the rush game (when the big hit fluctuation is stopped in Special Figure 1) will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 (a) and 9 (b).

9 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the display contents when a big hit (big hit A (see FIG. 16 (a))) which is advantageous for the player is set, and is a diagram schematically showing FIG. 9 (b). Is a diagram schematically showing the display contents when a jackpot (big hit D (see FIG. 16A)), which is disadvantageous to the player, is won.

As shown in FIG. 9 (a), at the timing when the third symbol (“777”) for indicating that the jackpot A (see FIG. 16 (a)) was won is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. In the special figure 2 display area Dm2, the third symbol of "346" indicating the deviation is forcibly stopped and displayed. Then, the effect symbol 813 (“super V”) indicating that the jackpot advantageous to the player has been won is displayed from the treasure box 812, and the comment “Congratulations” is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. In this case, the character "right-handed", which is the same game method as in the latent state, is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3.

On the other hand, in FIG. 9 (b), at the timing when the third symbol (“666”) for indicating that the jackpot D (see FIG. 16 (a)) was won is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. In the special figure 2 display area Dm2, the third symbol of "346" indicating the deviation is forcibly stopped and displayed. Then, a production symbol 813 (“end?”) Showing that the player has won a big hit that is disadvantageous to the player is displayed from the treasure box 812, and a comment “Please return to left-handed” is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. Will be done. In this case, in order to indicate to the player that the rush game has ended, the character "left-handed", which is the same game method as in the normal state, is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3.

In addition, in FIG. 9B, the display screen when the jackpot D (see FIG. 16A) is won is shown, but when the jackpot C (see FIG. 16A) is won, that is, the jackpot D. The same jackpot game is executed, but if the game state set after the jackpot ends wins a jackpot that is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot D, the same display screen is displayed and revived at the end of the jackpot game. As a production, it is configured to execute a production that causes a right-handed game to be performed. As a result, it is possible to provide a player with an unexpected effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 10, a card forgotten warning screen to be displayed to the player will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is necessary to insert a card (valuable medium) into a card unit installed along with the pachinko machine 10 in order to borrow a ball used for a game. In such a pachinko machine 10, when a player wins many prize balls by a game, he / she forgets to insert the card into the card unit and forgets to take the card at the end of the game. I had something to do.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the card forgetting warning screen (see FIG. 10A) is configured to be displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time of a big hit game in which a prize ball can be won). This can prevent the player from forgetting to take the card. Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to set a jackpot that makes it easy to win a prize ball and a jackpot that is difficult to win a prize as a jackpot game, and further, it is possible to set a game state in which a small hit game can be frequently executed in a short period of time. The timing for displaying the card forgotten warning screen can be set according to the game result (cumulative number of prize balls in a predetermined period).

Here, with reference to FIG. 10A, the display contents of the card forgotten warning screen will be described. FIG. 10A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the card forgetting warning screen. In this way, the operation when removing the card from the card unit is displayed using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10, and the comment "Please be careful not to forget to remove the card" is displayed. ..

Next, the display timing of the card forgotten warning screen will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 (b) to 10 (d). FIG. 10 (b) shows the case where the first jackpot is "big hit A (see FIG. 16 (a))", that is, the jackpot that can give a lot of prize balls to the player in one jackpot game is won. It is a timing chart showing the display timing of the card display (card forgotten warning display), and in FIGS. 10 (c) and 10 (d), the first big hit is "big hit A (see FIG. 16 (a))". That is, it is a timing chart showing the display timing of the card display (card forgetting caution display) when a big hit that can give a lot of prize balls to a player in one big hit game is won.

As shown in FIG. 10B, if the first jackpot (the jackpot won when the normal state is set as the gaming state) is jackpot A, a sufficient number of prize balls is given during the jackpot. Since it will be granted, the card display will be executed during the ending period (ED) of the jackpot.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10 (c) and 10 (d), when the first big hit is the big hit C, a sufficient number of prize balls cannot be given to the big hit, and the player cannot give a sufficient number of prize balls. Since there is a possibility of borrowing a ball using a card, the card display is not displayed on the end screen of the first big hit (big hit C).

In such a state, in the present embodiment, the period from the first big hit to the setting of the normal state again is set as the advantageous continuation period, and the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period is accumulated, and the accumulated result is It is configured to execute the card display on the condition that the predetermined amount (for example, 250 shots) is reached as the card display execution condition.

That is, if small hit games occur continuously after the end of big hit C and the number of prize balls during the advantageous continuation period exceeds a predetermined amount, the card is displayed on the ending screen of the small hit game. (See FIG. 10 (c)), when the number of prize balls during the advantageous continuation period exceeds a predetermined amount due to repeated execution of the jackpot C, the card is displayed on the ending screen of the jackpot game. (See FIG. 10 (d)).

<Regarding the transition of the gaming state in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 11, the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a method of shifting from one gaming state to another gaming state for four types of gaming states set in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment.

First, a method of shifting the gaming state when staying in the normal state will be described. As described above, in the normal state, the lottery frequency of the special symbol tends to be higher when the game is played by left-handed than when the game is played by right-handed, so that left-handed is more advantageous for the player. This is because when a left-handed player is hit, it becomes easier to enter the upper first ball entry port 64b1. As described above, in the lottery of the first special symbol executed based on the ball entering the first ball entry port 64, the small hit is not drawn, so the ball is held endlessly unless it becomes a big hit. It will be in a disadvantageous state that continues to decrease. In this normal state, there is a possibility of shifting to another gaming state only when a big hit occurs. As the jackpot types that can be won in the lottery of the first special symbol, four types of jackpots A to D are provided. Details of these jackpot types will be described later with reference to FIG. 16 (a).

As shown on the left side of FIG. 11, when the jackpots A and C are determined at a total rate of 65% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state ST1, after the jackpot ends, the center of FIG. 11 It shifts to the probability change state ST2 shown in. Further, when the jackpot D is determined at a rate of 10% when the jackpot is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state ST1, the time saving state ST3 shown on the right side of FIG. 11 is entered after the jackpot ends. .. On the other hand, when the jackpot B is determined at a rate of 25% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the normal state is set again as the game state after the jackpot ends (the normal state is looped). do).

In the normal state, it is normal to play a game aiming at the upper first entrance 64b1 by hitting left, but the player intentionally hits right and the ball enters the second entrance 640. As a result of a part of the ball hitting to the left entering the second entrance 640, there is a possibility that a big hit will be obtained in the second special symbol lottery. In this embodiment, there are three types of jackpots (big hits EG) as the jackpot types set when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol, and the jackpot of the second special symbol is won in the normal state. When the jackpots E and F are determined at a total rate of 65%, the probability change state ST2 is entered after the jackpot ends, and when the jackpot G is determined at a rate of 35%, the normal state is the game state after the jackpot ends. Is set again (loops the normal state).

In this way, if a big hit is achieved by the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state, there is a possibility that the time saving state will be more advantageous than the normal state at a rate of 10% (big hit D). If a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state, the possibility of shifting to the time saving state becomes zero. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the demerit when the irregular game method of executing the lottery of the second special symbol is performed by right-handing in the normal state, it is possible to suppress the irregular game. Further, in the lottery of the second special symbol executed in the normal state, since the fluctuation pattern having the fluctuation time for a long time (10 minutes) is set, the game efficiency is the case where the left-handed game is performed. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the demerit when the irregular game method of executing the lottery of the second special symbol is performed by right-handing in the normal state.

Next, a method of shifting the gaming state when staying in the probabilistic state will be described. As mentioned above, in the probabilistic state, the lottery frequency of the special symbol tends to be higher when the game is played with the left-handed than when the game is played with the right-handed as in the normal state, so the left-handed is more advantageous for the player. Will be. In the probabilistic state, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is higher than in the normal state, so that it is advantageous compared to the normal state, but disadvantageous compared to the latent state. When the probability change state ST2 is set, the process shifts to the latent state SP1 when the jackpot of the first special symbol is won (the change in the jackpot of the special figure 1 starts).

In the probabilistic state, the game is aimed at the lower first ball opening 64b2 provided below the upper first ball opening 64b1 while aiming at the upper first ball opening 64b1 by hitting left as in the normal state. Will do. That is, since the high probability state of the normal symbol is set during the probability change state, the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entry port 64b2 can be easily opened. Therefore, it becomes a gaming state in which the lottery of the first special symbol is easier to be executed than in the normal state.

In the probabilistic state configured in this way, a left-handed game is usually performed to execute a lottery for the first special symbol, but a ball enters the second entrance 640 and the second special symbol is used. There is a possibility that it will be a big hit by lottery. In this case, when the jackpots E and F are determined at a total rate of 65% when the jackpot of the second special symbol is won, the probability change state ST2 is set again after the jackpot ends and is determined at a rate of 35%. When the jackpot G is reached, the time saving state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot ends.

That is, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed in the probabilistic state, it is possible to shift to the latent probable state which is most advantageous to the player, while the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. If this is the case, the possibility of shifting to the latent state becomes zero. Therefore, it is possible to increase the demerit when the irregular game method of executing the lottery of the second special symbol is performed by right-handing in the probabilistic state, and it is possible to suppress the irregular game.

Next, a method of shifting the gaming state when staying in the latent state will be described. As described above, in the latent probability state, unlike the normal state and the probability change state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shortened, so that the lottery of the second special symbol can be efficiently performed by playing the game by hitting right. .. Therefore, right-handed is more advantageous for the player than left-handed.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is won in the state where the probability change state is set (first transition condition), and when the jackpot C is won in the state where the probability change state and the time saving state are set. It has two transition conditions (second transition condition), and when the first transition condition is satisfied, the latent state is set before the jackpot game is started, that is, during the jackpot fluctuation of the special symbol. When the setting is made and the second transition condition is satisfied, the latent state is set after the jackpot game is completed.

With this configuration, the timing at which the game state (latent state) that is most advantageous to the player is set can be set before or after the jackpot game, so that the player can play a variety of games. Can provide sex.

Further, when the first transition condition is satisfied, the period in which the latent probability state is set becomes the jackpot fluctuation period of the first special symbol, so that the period in which the latent probability state is set can be determined in advance. Therefore, it is possible to easily create an effect to be executed during the latent state in advance (at the time of setting the latent state) according to the period in which the latent state is set.

In addition, if the jackpot C is won by the lottery of the first special symbol in the state where the probability variation state is set, the latent probability state can be set before or after the jackpot game, so that the player can be set. It is possible to provide unexpected playability.

Next, with reference to FIG. 12, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used for main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interruption process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is provided with a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37A, 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and a lower side of an opening / closing plate 65f of a variable winning device 65. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing to the right side as a shaft and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 issues various commands to these via the input / output port 205. Send a control signal.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a slide position detection sensor S, a sensor group including a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 420, 530, 630.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. Notify the display control device 114 by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are combined. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 13 to 21, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment will be described. First, the details of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 12) provided in the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

In the main control device 110, main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device (not shown). To execute. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 13) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 13, a counter or the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform a jackpot lottery, setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and drawing the display result of the second symbol display device. used.

For the setting of the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot (and small hit) lottery and the jackpot type (big hit symbol) are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for the above, the fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting the fluctuation pattern, and the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1 are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Further, the small hit type counter C5 is used for selecting the small hit type. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 52). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although the details will be described later, in the RAM 203, each counter for the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the second entry port 640, in which the counter values for the entry to the first entry port 64 are stored, are stored. A second special symbol execution area 203b in which the value is stored is provided. In the present embodiment, the first ball entry port 64 is provided with up to four reserved balls. Therefore, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 during the period when the special symbol can be drawn, such as when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner or when the special symbol is not in the jackpot game, each counter value is changed. It is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, and when a ball enters the second entry port 640, each counter value is stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b. After that, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is moved to the execution area provided in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, and the first special symbol is variablely displayed (dynamic). Various settings and control processes for displaying) are executed. Further, each counter value stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b is used as it is for various settings and control processing for displaying the second special symbol in a variable manner.

On the other hand, during the period when the lottery of the first special symbol is impossible, such as during the variable display of the first special symbol or during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the ball wins the first entrance 64. When the number of reserved balls in the first ball entry port 64 is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment), each counter value is acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Will be done. Further, when the number of reserved balls for the first ball entry port 64 is the upper limit value (4 pieces in this embodiment) or more, each counter value or the like is not acquired and the prize ball (4 pieces in this embodiment) is not acquired. Only the prize ball) is treated as an invalid ball paid out to the player. In addition, the ball entered the second entrance 640 during the period when the lottery of the second special symbol is impossible, such as during the variable display of the second special symbol or during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In this case, only the prize balls (two prize balls in this embodiment) are treated as invalid balls to be paid out to the player without acquiring each counter value or the like.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of reserved balls is set to 4 with respect to the first ball entry port 64, but the number is not limited to this, and may be less than 4 (for example, 3). It may be more than 4 (for example, 8). Further, a configuration in which an upper limit value is not provided may be used. Further, in the present embodiment, the ball entering the second ball opening 640 (variation display based on the lottery of the second special symbol) is not held, but the holding storage is possible as in the case of the first ball opening 64. It may be configured.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 479) and reaches the maximum value (for example, 479 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 479) and then 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 479, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 479. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 52).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. It is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing. The value of the random number that becomes the big hit of the special symbol is defined in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 15A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the first random number counter C1. When the value matches the value of the random number that is the big hit specified in the first random number table 202a, it is determined to be the big hit of the special symbol. Further, the value of the random number that becomes the small hit of the special symbol is defined in the small hit random number table 202b (see FIG. 15B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

Here, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 15A. The first hit random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a hit in each game state is set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15A, when the game state is a low probability state (normal state, time saving state) of the special symbol, in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. , It is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is any of "7, 8", and if it is any of "7, 8", it is determined to be a big hit.

Further, when the game state is a high probability state (probability change state, latent state) of the special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is It is determined whether it is within the range of "0 to 5", and if it is within the range of "0 to 5", it is determined to be a big hit. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, out of the random number counters having a total number of 480, two values are defined as values for discriminating as a jackpot in the low probability state of the special symbol, so that the low probability state of the special symbol is specified. The jackpot probability at the time is 1/240. On the other hand, the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbol is 1/80.

Next, the small hit random number table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 15 (b). The small hit random number table 202b is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a small hit is set in a special symbol lottery. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15B, the lottery for the first special symbol does not specify a random number value as a small hit. That is, the lottery for the first special symbol does not result in a small hit. On the other hand, in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is within the range of "212 to 432" regardless of the gaming state, and the range of "212 to 432" is determined. If it is inside, it is determined that it is a small hit.

Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b is a random number that is a small hit, the first symbol. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the display device 37 is the one at the time of a small hit of the special symbol.

On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first random number. 1 The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one at the time of a big hit of a special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 479. As described above, in the low probability state of the special symbol, there are two values of the random number counter C1 per first, which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number values "7, 8" are the first hits as described above. It is stored in the random number table 202a. In this way, while the total number of random numbers is 480, the total number of random numbers that become big hits is 2, so the probability of becoming a big hit of a special symbol is "1/240". On the other hand, in the high probability state of the special symbol, there are four values of the first random number counter C1 which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number values "0 to 5" are the first random number table as described above. It is stored in 202a. In this way, while the total number of random numbers is 480, the total number of random numbers that become big hits is 6, so the probability of becoming a big hit of a special symbol is "1/80".

Further, as described above, there are 221 values of the first random number counter C1 which is a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, and the random number values "212 to 432" are stored in the small hit random number table 202b. ing. Since the total number of random numbers that are small hits is 221 while the total number of random numbers is 480, the probability of being a small hit of a special symbol is "221/480" (about 46%).

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. The value of the first type counter C2 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a big hit, the big hit type is selected based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16A). It becomes. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG. 16 (a).

The small hit type counter C5 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, the small hit type (small hit A) is based on the value of the small hit type counter and the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16B). ~ C) will be selected. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG. 16 (b).

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines the variation pattern of 1 from the set variation pattern selection table. A fluctuation time (dynamic display period) is set in this fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is also a counter for determining the fluctuation time. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time the main process (see FIG. 52) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202f (see FIGS. 17 to 19) storing a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided inside.

The variation pattern selection table 202f defines a plurality of data tables for selecting variation patterns (see FIGS. 17 to 19). A plurality of variation pattern selection tables according to the gaming state are set in the variation pattern selection table 202f, and a variation pattern selection table is set for each of the variation pattern selection tables according to the winning / failing determination result. Details of each variation pattern selection table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 17 to 19.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 232, reaches the maximum value (that is, 232), and then returns to 0. Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start port (through gate) 67. At that time, it is acquired and stored in the second symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that is a hit of the normal symbol is defined in the second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 15C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and is the value of the second hit random number counter C4. However, when it matches the value of the random number that is the hit specified in the second hit random number table 202c, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol (second symbol). The details of the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 15 (c).

FIG. 15C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number table 202c. In this second hit random number table 202c, there are 11 random number values that can be hit by the normal symbol in the low probability state (in the normal state, in the latent state) of the normal symbol as the game state, and the range is "0 to 10". ". Since the total number of random numbers that can be hit by the second random number counter C4 is 233, the total number of random numbers that can be hit is 11, so the probability of hitting a normal symbol is "11/233".

On the other hand, in the high probability state (probability change state, time saving state) of the normal symbol, there are 232 random value values that can be hit by the normal symbol, and the range is "0 to 231". Since the total number of random numbers that can be hit by the second random number counter C4 is 233, the total number of hit random numbers is 232, so the probability of hitting a normal symbol is "232/233". As described above, in the present embodiment, the random value that is the hit of the normal symbol is configured to have a difference of about 20 times between the low probability state of the normal symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol. There is. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entry port 64b2 when the normal symbol hits are also higher than the low probability state of the normal symbol. The probability state is configured to be more advantageous (it is easier for the ball to enter the lower first entry port 64b2).

When the sphere passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed for 3 seconds in the second symbol display device. Then, in the low probability state of the normal symbol, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is within the range of "0 to 10", it is determined to be a hit, and the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed. Later, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the lower first ball entry port 64b2 is opened only "1 second x 2 times". On the other hand, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 231", it is determined to be a hit, and the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed. Later, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the lower first ball entry port 64b2 is opened only "1 second x 2 times". In this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the normal electric accessory, and the number of times of opening may be appropriately changed as long as the playability is not impaired.

The normal figure variation type counter CS2 is configured as a loop counter in which 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 198, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198), the counter returns to 0. When the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol variation pattern table 202g (see FIG. 20) for selecting the variation pattern of the normal symbol based on the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2. ) Is specified in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. The details of the normal map fluctuation pattern table 202g will be described later with reference to FIG. 20.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 198), and is updated once for each timer interruption process (see FIG. 31). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 52).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device.

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 20. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the present embodiment. In the ROM 202, in addition to the first hit random number table 202a, the small hit random number table 202b, and the second hit random number table 202c already described above, the big hit type selection table 202d, the small hit type selection table 202e, and the variation pattern selection At least a table 202f and a normal map variation pattern table 202g are provided.

First, the details of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 16A. The jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16A) is a data table in which determination values for determining the jackpot type are stored for each type of special symbol, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is , It is specified in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning prize is compared with the big hit type selection table 202d, and the first hit. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the type counter C2 is selected.

As shown in FIG. 16A, "big hit A" is associated with the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 24". Is stipulated. This "big hit A" has 15 rounds, and a big hit game for opening the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is set. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 25 counter values are "big hit A", so if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit A" is determined. The ratio is 25% (25/100).

When "Big hit A" is selected, the probability change state is set at the end of the big hit (the probability change flag 203g is set to ON) regardless of the game state when the big hit is won, and the number of time reductions of 10,000 times is set. It is set (a value of 10000 is set in the time saving counter 203f). That is, after the end of "big hit A", the probability change state is set until the next big hit is won.

"Big hit A" is one of the big hit types with the largest number of rounds, so it is advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. Further, since the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the hit probability of the normal symbol are set to be higher than those in the normal state, the gaming state is such that the game can be played more advantageous than the normal state. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the latent state is configured so as to be easier to give a privilege advantageous to the player than the probable change state, and among a plurality of gaming states, the latent state is next to the latent state. It becomes a favorable game state.

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "25 to 49", "big hit B" is associated and defined. This "big hit B" is a game in which the same big hit game as the above-mentioned "big hit A" is executed, the number of rounds is 15, and the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is opened. The game is set. After the end of the "big hit B", the probability variation flag 203g is set to off, and the time saving counter 203f is configured to have a different value depending on the gaming state at the time of winning.

When the game state at the time of winning the big hit is the normal state, the value of "0" is set in the time saving counter 203f, and when the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit is the time saving state or the probable change state, the time saving counter 203f is set. A value of "100" is set. In other words, if the "big hit B" is won while the normal state is set, the normal state is set after the big hit ends, whereas if the "big hit B" is won during the time saving state, the normal state is set. , The time saving state (100 times) is set after the big hit ends. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 25 counter values are "big hit B", so if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit B" is determined. The ratio is 25% (25/100).

"Big hit B" is one of the big hit types with the largest number of rounds like "Big hit A", so it is advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained, but the high probability state of the special symbol is not set after the big hit is over. , It is a big hit type that is more disadvantageous than "Big hit A".

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 89", "big hit C" is associated and defined. This "big hit C" has two rounds, and a big hit game for opening the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is opened even in the small hit game executed when the small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. It is configured so that it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the case where the "big hit C" is won and the case where the "small hit" is won.

With such a configuration, when the hit game in which the first attacker is opened is executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the big hit game is executed or the small hit game is executed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the player is configured to be in a latent state (RUSH state) in which the small hit game can be frequently executed during the big hit fluctuation period of the first special symbol. 1 The game is played while expecting that the hit game in which the attacker is released is a small hit game. That is, it is possible to provide a novel game property by providing a game period in which the player does not normally execute the jackpot game most desired by the player.

After the end of the "big hit C", the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON, and the time saving counter 203f is configured to have a different value depending on the gaming state at the time of winning. When the game state at the time of winning the big hit is the normal state, the value of "10000" is set in the time saving counter 203f, and when the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit is the time saving state or the probable change state, the time saving counter 203f is set. A value of "0" is set. That is, when the "big hit C" is won in the state where the normal state is set, the probable change state is set after the end of the big hit, whereas the "big hit C" is won during the probable change state or the time saving state. If so, the latent state is set after the jackpot ends.

In this way, in the game state when the jackpot is won, even if the jackpot is of the same type, the game state set after the jackpot ends is configured to be different, so that the player simply aims to win the jackpot. Not only that, it is possible to pay attention to the set game state, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the latent probability state is set as the gaming state, the gaming state is configured to be the most advantageous to the player, and the probability changing state is set as a condition for setting this latent probability state. There are two setting conditions: the first setting condition where the jackpot fluctuation of the special symbol is started when is set, and the second setting condition where the jackpot C is won when the probability variation state and the time saving state are set. is doing. That is, it is configured so that the degree of expectation (probability) in which the latent state is set differs depending on the game state when the jackpot is won. By configuring in this way, it is possible to gradually increase the expectation of the player to set a game state that is advantageous to the player according to the progress of the game (according to the set game state). It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the counter value that becomes "big hit C" is 40, so if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit C" is determined. The ratio is 40% (40/100). "Big hit C" is one of the big hit types with a smaller number of rounds and a shorter opening operation period than the above-mentioned "Big hit A" and "Big hit B", so it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. However, depending on the game state at the time of winning the big hit, it is set after the big hit because it is the only type of big hit that can set the latent state that is most advantageous to the player as the game state set after the big hit ends. In terms of the game state, it is a jackpot type that is more advantageous than "big hit A" and "big hit B".

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "90 to 99", "big hit D" is associated and defined. This "big hit D" has two rounds, and a big hit game (same as "big hit C") for opening the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set.

After the end of the "big hit D", the probability change flag 203g is set to off, and the value of "0" is set to the time saving counter 203f. That is, when the "big hit C" is won, the normal state is set after the big hit ends. Since this "big hit D" has the same big hit game content as the above-mentioned "big hit C", the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is configured to operate in the same open operation as the small hit game. ing.

After the end of "Big hit D", since the normal state is set as described above, the fluctuation display (big hit fluctuation) that won "Big hit D" in the state where the probability change state is set is displayed. When executed, the jackpot game is executed after the small hit game is frequently performed during the jackpot fluctuation, and then the normal state is set.

That is, in the latent state (RUSH state) when the "big hit D" is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the normal state after the "big hit D" in which the same opening operation as the small hit game is set is completed. Is set, it is possible to make the player think that the latent state in which the jackpot game is executed has ended.

Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the counter value that becomes "big hit D" is 10, so if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit D" is determined. The ratio is 10% (10/100). "Big hit D" is one of the big hit types with a smaller number of rounds and a shorter opening operation period than the above-mentioned "Big hit A" and "Big hit B", so it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. Will be. Further, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the normal state is set after the jackpot ends, which is disadvantageous in terms of the gaming state set after the jackpot. That is, it is the most disadvantageous jackpot type.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment has four jackpot types (“big hit A” to “big hit D”) as jackpot types of the first special symbol (special figure 1). There is. Among them, in two jackpot types (“big hit A” and “big hit B”), a jackpot game is executed in which the second attacker (second variable winning device 650), which is opened only during the jackpot game, is targeted for opening. In the other two jackpot types (“big hit C” and “big hit D”), the jackpot game that targets the first attacker (first variable winning device 65), which is the same as the small hit game, is executed.

That is, in the first embodiment, as a big hit of a special symbol, a main big hit game (“big hit A”, “big hit B”) for the purpose of getting a player to win a prize ball, and a variable game state. ("Big hit C", a sub-big hit game for the purpose of making it difficult for a player to know whether or not a big hit has been won (making it difficult to determine whether a small hit game is a big hit game). "Big hit D") and is configured to be feasible.

Further, in the present embodiment, since it is not a big hit game but a game in which a player can get a prize ball by a small hit game, it is difficult to obtain a large amount of prize balls during the big hit game. Even so (even if a jackpot game in which only a small amount of prize balls can be obtained is executed depending on the jackpot type), a jackpot game aimed at changing the game state while suppressing discomfort to the player is performed. Can be set.

On the other hand, as the type of jackpot by the lottery of the second special symbol, "big hit E" is defined in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 4". This "big hit E" has 15 rounds, and a big hit game for opening the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is set. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, five counter values are "big hit E", so if a big hit is achieved in the second special symbol lottery, "big hit E" is determined. The ratio is 5% (5/100).

When "Big hit E" is selected, the probability change state is set at the end of the big hit (the probability change flag 203g is set to ON) regardless of the game state when the big hit is won, and the number of time reductions of 10,000 times is set. It is set (a value of 10000 is set in the time saving counter 203f). That is, after the end of "big hit E", the probability change state is set until the next big hit is won.

"Big hit E" is one of the big hit types with the largest number of rounds, so it is advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. Further, since the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the hit probability of the normal symbol are set to be higher than those in the normal state, the gaming state is such that the game can be played more advantageous than the normal state. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the latent state is configured so as to be easier to give a privilege advantageous to the player than the probable change state, and among a plurality of gaming states, the latent state is next to the latent state. It becomes a favorable game state.

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "5 to 64", "big hit F" is associated and defined. This "big hit F" has two rounds, and a big hit game for opening the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the counter value that becomes "big hit F" is 60, so if a big hit is obtained in the second special symbol lottery, "big hit F" is determined. The ratio is 60% (60/100).

When "Big hit F" is selected, the probability change state is set at the end of the big hit (the probability change flag 203g is set to ON) regardless of the game state when the big hit is won, and the number of time reductions of 10,000 times is set. It is set (a value of 10000 is set in the time saving counter 203f). That is, after the end of "big hit F", the probability change state is set until the next big hit is won.

Since "big hit F" is one of the big hit types with the smallest number of rounds, it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. Further, since the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the hit probability of the normal symbol are set to be higher than those in the normal state, the gaming state is such that the game can be played more advantageous than the normal state. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the latent state is configured so as to be easier to give a privilege advantageous to the player than the probable change state, and among a plurality of gaming states, the latent state is next to the latent state. It becomes a favorable game state.

A "big hit G" is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "65-99". This "big hit G" has two rounds, and a big hit game for opening the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the counter value that becomes the "big hit G" is 35, so if a big hit is achieved in the second special symbol lottery, the "big hit G" is determined. The ratio is 35% (35/100).

When "Big hit G" is selected, the normal state is set at the end of the big hit (the probability variation flag 203g is set to off) regardless of the game state when the big hit is won, and the number of time reductions of 0 times is set. It is set (a value of 0 is set in the time saving counter 203f).

Since "big hit G" is one of the big hit types with the smallest number of rounds, it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. Further, since the game state set after the big hit is the normal state, it is disadvantageous in terms of the game state set after the big hit. That is, it is the most disadvantageous jackpot type.

As described above, in the first embodiment, the case where the big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the case where the big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2). The points that the probability change flag 203g is set to ON after the big hit is 65% (65/100) are the same, but the ratio that 15 rounds are set as the big hit game (50% in Special Figure 1). , Special figure 2 is 5%), Ratio at which the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is selected as the opening target (Special figure 1 is 50%, Special figure 2 is 5%), Game state at the time of big hit winning The rate at which a value of 10000 is set in the time saving counter 203f after the end of the jackpot when is in the time saving state or the probabilistic state (that is, the high probability state of the normal symbol) (special figure 1 is 25%, special figure 2 is 65%). Is configured to be different.

In this way, by making the contents of the big hit game and the game state after the big hit different according to the type of the special symbol won by the big hit, it is possible to provide various game characteristics to the player, and the game can be played. It is possible to improve the interest.

In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned contents are configured to be different depending on the type of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only a part of the above-mentioned contents may be configured to be different. It is good, and other than the above-mentioned contents, for example, by setting the number of rounds of the jackpot game that can be set only for the jackpot type corresponding to the special figure 1 (for example, 7 rounds), the set number of rounds may be different. , The ratio of setting the probability variation flag 203g to ON may be different.

Further, on condition that the ball has passed through a specific area (for example, an area where the ball winning in the second variable winning device 650 can pass) during the big hit game, the probability change flag 203g is set to ON after the big hit is completed. In the gaming machine configured in the above, the probability that the ball passes through the specific area may be different between the jackpot type corresponding to the special figure 1 and the jackpot type corresponding to the special figure 2. Further, the data table for selecting the variation pattern for showing the lottery result in each game state set after the big hit may be configured to be different depending on the big hit type.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16A, in the present embodiment, both the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) and the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) can win a prize in one round game. Although the upper limit value is set to "10", the upper limit value may be different between the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) and the second attacker (second variable winning device 650). In addition, the upper limit of the opening operation in the round game may be different depending on the winning jackpot type (or the type of the special symbol won in the jackpot).

Next, the details of the small hit type selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 16 (b). The small hit type selection table 202e is a data table referred to for determining the type of small hit when a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2). In the small hit type selection table 202e, the corresponding small hit type is defined for each range of values of the small hit type counter C5.

As shown in FIG. 16B, "small hit A" is defined in association with the range in which the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "0 to 93". This "small hit A" is a small hit type in which the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set to the open state only once for 1.5 seconds during the small hit game.

Of the 100 random values that the small hit type counter C5 can take, 94 are random values that become "small hit A", so if a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, "small hit A" Is determined at 94% (94/100).

Further, in the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "94 to 98", "small hit B" is defined in association with it. This "small hit B" is a small hit type that sets an open state for 0.2 seconds x 6 times during a small hit game. Of the 100 random values that the small hit type counter C5 can take, 5 are random values that become "small hit B", so if a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, "small hit B" Is determined at 5% (5/100).

Further, the value "99" of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with "small hit C". This "small hit C" is a small hit type that sets an open state of 0.06 seconds x 8 times during a small hit game. Of the 100 random values that the small hit type counter C5 can take, one random value is "small hit C", so if a small hit is obtained by a special symbol lottery, it will be "small hit C". The ratio is 1% (1/100).

Next, the details of the variation pattern selection table 202f will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 19. As described above, in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f, a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the fluctuation display is defined from the value (random value value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

As shown in FIG. 17, the variation pattern selection table 202f is a normal table 202f1 for determining a variation pattern (variation time) in a normal state, and a time reduction / probability variation for determining a variation pattern in a time reduction state and a probability variation state. At least a table 202f2 and a latent table 202f3 for determining a variation pattern in the latent state are included. The specific contents of these tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19. In each of the tables shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the fluctuation time is expressed in milliseconds, but in the following description, the fluctuation time is expressed in seconds for easy understanding.

First, the normal table 202f1 will be described with reference to FIG. The normal table 202f1 is a table that is referred to when the gaming state is in the normal state. FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal table 202f1. As shown in FIG. 18, the normal table 202f1 has a random number value (variation type) for determining the type (variation time) of the fluctuation pattern for each type of the special symbol and the stop type (win / fail determination result) of the special symbol. Counter value (counter value of CS1) is specified.

Specifically, as a fluctuation pattern determined when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, a normal reach (20 seconds) is associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 50". Super reach A (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "51 to 100", super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "101 to 150", and super reach is associated with the range of "151 to 198". C (30 seconds) is associated.

On the other hand, when the first special symbol is lost in the lottery and the normal table 202f1 is referred to, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (value set in the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d). The correspondence between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the selected variation pattern changes according to the above. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 18, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is within the range of 0 or 1, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is long in the range of "0 to 70". The deviation pattern (12 seconds) is associated with the deviation pattern, and the deviation normal reach (20 seconds) is associated with the range of "71 to 150". Further, as the value of the variation type counter CS1, the out-of-range super reach A (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "151-170", and the out-of-range super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "171-198". Has been done.

On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 2 or 3, the fluctuation pattern of short deviation (8 seconds) corresponds to the range of "0 to 70" as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. As the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation pattern of long deviation (12 seconds) is associated with the range of "71 to 130", and the deviation pattern of normal reach (20 seconds) is associated with the range of "131 to 170". ing. Further, as the value of the variation type counter CS1, the out-of-range super reach A (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "171 to 185", and the out-of-range super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "185 to 198". Has been done.

The process of selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol with reference to the normal table 202f1 (see S505 of FIG. 35) is from the process of subtracting the reserved ball of the first special symbol (see S303 of FIG. 33). Is also executed later. Therefore, the normal table 202f1 is not referred to when there are four reserved balls.

As described above, when the number of reserved balls is small (0 or 1), it becomes easier to select a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time as compared with the case where the number of reserved balls is large (2 or 3). With this configuration, when the number of reserved balls is small, it is possible to secure time for storing the reserved balls and make the variable display less likely to be interrupted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from getting tired of the game. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is large, it becomes difficult to accumulate the reserved balls because the fluctuation time is shortened. Can be prevented (suppressed) from entering the ball. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel that he / she has lost.

On the other hand, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed and the normal table 202f1 is referred to, 600 seconds (10 minutes) is set as the fluctuation time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the long variation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value in the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the variation type counter CS1. When the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, the small hit long variation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value in the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the variation type counter CS1. When the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of order, the out-of-order long variation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value in the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the variation type counter CS1. As a result, when the right-handed hit is performed in the normal state and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the fluctuation time of 600 seconds is set each time, so that the game efficiency is significantly worse than the left-handed hit. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which a right-handed hit is normally performed.

Next, the details of the time saving / probability variation table 202f2 will be described with reference to FIG. 19A. The time saving / probability change table 202f2 is a table referred to when a variation pattern is selected when a high probability state (that is, a time saving state or a probability change state) of a normal symbol is set as a game state.

As shown in FIG. 19 (a), the time reduction / probability variation table 202f2 is used to determine the type (variation time) of the fluctuation pattern for each type of the special symbol and the stop type (win / fail determination result) of the special symbol. A random value (counter value of variable type counter value CS1) is specified. The time saving / probability variation table 202f2 is different from the normal table 202f1 described above with reference to FIG. 18 so that different fluctuation patterns are not selected according to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. is doing.

That is, when the normal state is set as the game state, it is difficult to always secure the reserved ball of the first special symbol because the game is performed aiming at the upper first entrance ball opening 64b1 while performing the left-handed game. There is a possibility that there will be a period in which the lottery for the first special symbol is not executed (the first special symbol has not changed). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 18, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is small, the normal table 202f1 is configured so that the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time can be easily selected. As a result, in the normal state, the state in which the variation display of the first special symbol is not executed continues for a long time, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired of the game.

On the other hand, the time-saving / probability-changing table 202f2 shown in FIG. 19A is in a time-saving state or a probability-changing state in which a left-handed game is performed and a game in which a ball is inserted into the lower first entry port 64b2 is performed. The data table to be referenced. During this time-saving state and the probable change state, the electric accessory 64a is frequently released, so that the game state is such that the reserved ball of the first special symbol can be easily stored.

In this way, when the gaming state in which the reserved balls of the first special symbol can be easily stored is set, it varies when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is small as in the above-mentioned normal table 202f1. If a configuration is added that makes it easier to select a variation pattern with a long time, the first special symbol (special symbol 1) variation that is executed when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is reduced by taking a break from the game. The fluctuation time of the game becomes long, and it becomes difficult to play the game efficiently during the time saving state and the probable change state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the variable pattern table (time saving / Probability variation table 202f2) so that the fluctuation pattern selected by the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol does not differ (the fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time is not selected when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is small). ) It is configured. As a result, it is possible to efficiently execute the game in the time-saving state and the probable change state.

Further, as will be described in detail later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won in a state where the probability change state is set, the probability change state is changed to the latent state at the timing when the jackpot fluctuation starts. It is configured to move to. Specifically, when the first special symbol (special figure 1) is drawn in a state where the probability change state is set and the lottery result (win / fail judgment result) is a big hit, the time saving / probability change table 202f2 is displayed. With reference, when the hit special fluctuation (600 seconds) is selected, the gaming state becomes the latent state while the hit special fluctuation (600 seconds) is being executed, and when the hit special fluctuation ends, the special figure 1 The special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with a combination indicating that the lottery result is a big hit, and the big hit game is started.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to be capable of executing lottery and variation display at the same time, while the latent state is set (special variation per special figure 1). (While is being executed), the lottery of the second special symbol can be performed. In addition, in the present embodiment, the variation display period (variation time) for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol is defined as a short period (1 second) only in the latent state, and only the second special symbol. It is configured to win a small hit. With this configuration, the player is allowed to frequently draw the second special symbol while the latent state is set (while the special variation of the special figure 1 is being executed). Can win many prize balls.

As described above in FIG. 19A, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot of the special figure 1 is won in the state where the probability variation state is set, 60 seconds to 600 depending on the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. It is configured so that the fluctuation time of seconds is set, and this fluctuation time directly becomes the duration of the latent state. Therefore, as a lottery result of the special symbol, the player can pay attention not only to the result of whether or not the jackpot is won (win / fail judgment result) but also to the selected fluctuation pattern (variation time). It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

On the other hand, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed and the time saving / probability variation table 202f2 is referred to, 60 seconds (1 minute) is set as the variation time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, a long variation (60 seconds) is associated with the value in the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the variation type counter CS1. 2 When the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, the small hit long fluctuation (60 seconds) is associated with the value in the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the variation type counter CS1, and the second When the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the out-of-order long variation (60 seconds) is associated with the value in the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the variation type counter CS1. As a result, when a right-handed hit is performed in a time-saving state or a probable change state and a lottery for the second special symbol is executed, a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is set each time, so that the game efficiency is extremely higher than that of a left-handed hit. Getting worse. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which a right-handed player is hit in a time-saving state or a probable change state.

Next, the details of the latency table 202f3 will be described with reference to FIG. 19 (b). The latent probability table 202f3 is a table referred to when selecting a variation pattern when a latent probability state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is set as a gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 19 (b), the latent probability table 202f3 is a disorder for determining the type (variation time) of the fluctuation pattern for each type of the special symbol and the stop type (win / fail determination result) of the special symbol. Numerical values (counter value of fluctuation type counter value CS1) are specified. It should be noted that the latent probability table 202f3 is configured so that different fluctuation patterns are not selected according to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, similarly to the time saving / probability variation table 202f2 described above.

The latent probability table 202f3 is used when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol (special figure 2) during the period during which the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 1 is executed during the probability change state, or during the time saving state or the probability change state. When winning a jackpot, which is a jackpot type of "big hit C", and selecting a variation pattern of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) to be executed after the jackpot game is completed. Referenced.

The latent probability table 202f3 is selected when a big hit is obtained in the first special symbol lottery with respect to the contents specified in the time saving / probability variation table 202f2 described above with reference to FIG. 19 (a). The difference is that the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 specified for each fluctuation pattern is different and the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern selected in the lottery of the second special symbol is different. Everything else is the same. Detailed description of the same element will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 19B, as the fluctuation pattern determined when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 39" and the normal fluctuation (60). Seconds) are associated, super fluctuations (180 seconds) are associated with the range of "40 to 119", and special fluctuations (600 seconds) are associated with the range of "120 to 198".

On the other hand, when the lottery of the first special symbol is missed and the latent probability table 202f3 is referred to, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (value set in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d). ) And the out-of-middle fluctuation (30 seconds) are associated with each other regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

When the lottery of the second special symbol is executed and the latent probability table 202f3 is referred to, 1 second is set as the fluctuation time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the hit short variation (1 second) is associated with the value in the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the variation type counter CS1. 2 When the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, the small hit short variation (1 second) is associated with the value in the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the variation type counter CS1, and the second When the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the out-of-order short variation (1 second) is associated with the value in the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the variation type counter CS1. As a result, a large number of lottery (variation) of the second special symbol can be executed in the latent state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the details of the normal map fluctuation pattern table 202g will be described. As described above, the normal symbol variation pattern table 202g is a table referred to for selecting a normal symbol variation pattern when a lottery for ordinary symbols is executed. As shown in FIG. 20, in the normal map fluctuation pattern table 202g, the range of the value of the normal map fluctuation type counter CS2 and the fluctuation pattern (variation time) are displayed for each game state at the time when the lottery of the normal symbols is executed. Is specified in association with.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 20, when the gaming state is a normal state, a latent state, that is, a low probability state of a normal symbol, the entire range of possible values of the normal figure variation type counter CS2 ( A fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is associated with 0 to 198). Further, even when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is associated with the entire range (0 to 198) of possible values of the normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2.

On the other hand, when the gaming state is a time saving state or a probabilistic state, that is, a high probability state of a normal symbol, the value of the normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 fluctuates within the range of "0 to 198" for a fluctuation time of 3 seconds. Patterns are associated.

In the first embodiment, a plurality of variations of the fluctuation pattern are provided only in the latent state, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even in the normal state or the probabilistic state, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol may have a variation, and when the lottery of the normal symbol is executed in the latent state, the fluctuation time is 2 of 1 second or 3 seconds. Any of the types may be set, and the fluctuation time is not limited to two types, and a larger fluctuation time may be selectably configured. The more variation there is in the fluctuation time, the more difficult it is for the player to predict the fluctuation time, so that it is possible to make the player make a continuous right-handed strike more reliably during the latent state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set based on the game state and the value of the acquired normal symbol fluctuation type counter CS2, but in addition to that, it is based on the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol. You may use a configuration in which the fluctuation time is changed, a configuration in which the fluctuation time is changed based on the number of lottery of special symbols, or a configuration in which the fluctuation time of a normal symbol is set by a method in which the above-mentioned various configurations are combined. Specifically, 1 second is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol from the transition of the gaming state to the latent state until the lottery of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), and thereafter (for example, 50 times). , 51 times to 100 times) may be configured so that 3 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol.

In this way, the number of special symbol fluctuations (first special symbol, second special symbol) since the end of the previous jackpot is measured, and the variation time corresponding to the measurement result is selected and executed. , It is possible to make the player play the game with a sense of expectation so that a more advantageous fluctuation time (for example, a short fluctuation time) is executed more during the period when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. can.

In addition, while the lottery for the even number of special symbols is being executed after the game state shifts to the latent state, 1 second is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and other than that (odd number), It may be configured so that 3 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of a normal symbol. In this way, by configuring to change the fluctuation time of the normal symbol based on the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to predict the fluctuation time, so that it is more reliable during the latent state. It is possible to make a continuous right-handed hit. In this case, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is longer (longer than the case where the lottery of the special symbol is executed) when the lottery of the special symbol is not executed, or the special symbol is configured to be longer. It may be configured so that the smaller the number of lottery pending and stored, the longer the fluctuation time of the normal symbol.

Further, when setting the fluctuation time of the normal symbol based on the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol, it is preferable to configure so that the longer the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is, the easier it is to select. With this configuration, the pachinko machine 10 is adjusted so that the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is hard to be accumulated, and the pachinko machine 10 is adjusted so that the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is easy to be accumulated. It is possible to make the number of ordinary symbol lottery uniform.

Next, the details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing a configuration of RAM 203 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 21, the RAM 203 includes a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol execution area 203b, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d, and a normal symbol holding ball. Number counter 203e, time reduction counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, special figure 1 big hit flag 203h, special figure 1 big hit flag 203i, winning state storage area 203j, small hit flag 203k, special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m, special figure 2 fluctuation Time counter 203n, big hit medium flag 203o, small hit medium flag 203p, special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203r, special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s, normal figure short fluctuation flag 203t, winning counter 203u, special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v, It also has at least a memory area 203z.

The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area (first special symbol execution area) and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these is held. Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the small hit type counter C5, and the variable type counter CS1 is stored in the area.

More specifically, the value of each counter is acquired at the timing when the ball enters the first entry port 64 (starting prize), and the acquired data is obtained in four holding areas (holding first area ~. Among the vacant areas of the reserved 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is the execution area. It is shifted (moved) to, and a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is performed based on each value of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) having a smaller area number. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data shift is performed only for the holding area (holding second area to holding fourth area) in which the winning data is stored.

The second special symbol execution area 203b stores a determination value (counter value) for executing a special symbol lottery, similarly to the first special symbol execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. In the second special symbol execution area 203b, each counter value acquired at the timing when the start winning to the second entry port 640 is detected is stored.

Similar to the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area (ordinary symbol holding ball execution area) and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). ) And. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, at the timing when the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is the four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area). ) Is stored in order from the smallest area number (1st to 4th) in the vacant area. That is, similarly to the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the winning order is maintained and the data corresponding to the winning is stored. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty, so that it is stored in another hold area as in the case of the 1st special symbol hold ball storage area 203a. A shift process is performed in which the winning data is packed into a holding area that is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d displays the variation of the special symbol (first symbol display device 37,) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first entry port 64 (starting prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the third symbol display device 81 (variation display performed by the symbol display device 81) up to four times. The initial value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. Is added by 1 (see S1704 in FIG. 47). On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S303 in FIG. 33).

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of reserved balls N1 of the variation display in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S304 in FIG. 33, FIG. 47). See S1705). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 displays the variation held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of reserved balls itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is reserved in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number of balls deviates from the number of balls, the deviation can be corrected by the next received hold ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e sets the number of reserved balls (waiting number) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 up to four times. It is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is set to zero, and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases as the ball passes through the through gate 67. Each time, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 (see S1904 in FIG. 49). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S1805 in FIG. 48).

When the sphere passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e (the number of holding times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. , The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (see S1905 in FIG. 49). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the 2 through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S1903: FIG. 49: See No).

The time saving counter 203f is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the time saving state. At this time reduction counter 203f, a value corresponding to the winning jackpot type is set after the jackpot ends. Then, the time reduction counter 203f is subtracted by 1 in the game state update process executed immediately after setting the start of the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (see S308 in FIG. 36). When the lottery of the normal symbol is performed, if the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 or more, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time reduction state, and the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol is executed with reference to the table for high probability time. .. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the normal state, and the hit / fail determination of the normal symbol is executed with reference to the table for low probability time.

The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the high probability state of the special symbol is set, and when it is set to ON, it indicates that the special symbol is in the high probability state. That is, when the probability variation flag 203g is set to on, the game state is a probability variation state (special symbol: high probability state, normal symbol: high probability state) or a latent probability state (special symbol: high probability state, It means that one of (normal symbol: low probability state) is set.

This probability variation flag 203g is set to ON at the end of the jackpot when the winning jackpot type is a jackpot for setting the probability variation state or the latent probability state after the jackpot ends (S2402: Yes in FIG. 54). 54 S2403). Then, when the symbol indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit is stopped and displayed, it is set to off (see S806 in FIG. 38).

In this embodiment, as described above, the high-probability state of the special symbol is set based on the jackpot winning of the special symbol, and the high-probability state of the special symbol is continued until the next jackpot is won. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the special symbol after the high probability state of the special symbol (special symbol high probability state) is set as the special symbol high probability end condition for terminating the high probability state of the special symbol. When the number of fluctuations (number of fluctuations in the special figure) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), the probability variation flag 203g may be set to off. In this case, in order to set the timing to turn off the probability change flag 203g, a storage means for storing the number of special figure fluctuations as the special figure high probability end condition in advance and a storage means after the special figure high probability state is set are set. End determination to determine whether the number of special figure fluctuations measured by the measuring means and the special figure fluctuation number measured by the measuring means satisfy the special figure fluctuation number (special figure high probability end condition) stored in the storage means. Means and means may be provided.

Further, a plurality of special figure high-accuracy end conditions are prepared, for example, the special figure 1 high-accuracy end condition and the variation of the second special symbol that can be satisfied based only on the number of changes of the first special symbol in the special figure high-accuracy state. Various special figure 2 high probability end conditions that can be established based only on the number of times, and lottery end conditions that can be established when the lottery result of the special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (for example, a lottery result of winning a small hit). The special figure high probability end condition may be facilitated, and the probability change flag 203 g may be set to off when any of the special figure high probability end conditions is satisfied.

The special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired based on entering the first ball entry port 64 matches the jackpot determination value at the start of fluctuation. It is a flag set to (see S407 in FIG. 34). This special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to off when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (S806 in FIG. 38).

When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol ends while the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is on, the process of forcibly stopping the second special symbol with the off symbol is executed (see S804 in FIG. 38). .. As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem in which one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit while the other is being executed.

The special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired based on the entry into the second entry port 640 matches the jackpot determination value at the start of fluctuation. It is a flag set to (see S1007 in FIG. 40). The special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to off when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (S1506 in FIG. 45).

When the fluctuation time of the variation display of the second special symbol ends while the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is on, the process of forcibly stopping the first special symbol with the symbol is executed (see S1004 in FIG. 40). .. As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem in which one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit while the other is being executed.

The winning state storage area 203j is a storage area for storing information indicating the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Specifically, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state (if the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 and the probability variation flag 203g is off), the normal state is set in the winning state storage area 203j. "00H" is stored as information indicating. On the other hand, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a probability change state (if the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 or more and the probability change flag 203g is on), the probability change state is shown in the winning state storage area 203j. "01H" is stored as information. Further, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the latent state (if the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 and the probability change flag 203g is on), the latent state is set in the winning state storage area 203j. "02H" is stored as the information to be shown.

The information stored in the winning state storage area 203j is retained until the end of the jackpot, and is referred to when setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends (see S2404 in FIG. 54).

The small hit flag 203k is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on the entry into the second entry port 640 matches the small hit determination value at the start of fluctuation. This is a flag to be set (see S1102 in FIG. 41). This small hit flag 203k is set to off when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the small hit (see S1605 in FIG. 46). When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol ends with the small hit flag 203k turned on, the fluctuation of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (the counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the special symbol is subtracted). The process of stopping) is executed (see S1603 in FIG. 46). As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a problem that a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol and the big hit is started during the small hit while the small hit of the second special symbol is being executed. can.

The special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m and the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n are counters for measuring the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, and are the first special symbol and the second special symbol. When the fluctuation pattern of the symbol is selected, the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern is set. Whether or not the fluctuation time of each special symbol has ended is determined by the timing results of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m and the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n.

The jackpot flag 203o is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot is being hit. If the jackpot middle flag 203o is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot, and if it is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot. This jackpot middle flag 203o is set to on when the start of the jackpot is set. On the other hand, it is set to off in the jackpot end processing executed at the end of the jackpot.

The small hit middle flag 203p is a flag indicating whether or not the small hit is in progress. If the small hit medium flag 203p is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a small hit, and if it is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is not in a small hit. This small hit medium flag 203p is set to on when the start of the small hit is set (see S1406 in FIG. 221). On the other hand, it is set to off at the end of the small hit (see S2512 in FIG. 232).

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to win a small hit only for the second special symbol, and when the small hit is won (when the small hit medium flag 203p is set to ON), the second special symbol is won. 1 It is configured to interrupt the variable display of special symbols. That is, among the multiple types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), one special symbol (second special symbol) is selected by lottery to win a small hit, and the small hit medium flag 203p is set to ON. In this state, the variation display of the other special symbol (first special symbol) does not end, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the small hit game and play the game. Further, during the small hit game, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from ending and the big hit game from starting.

The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is a flag indicating that the fluctuation of the first special symbol is the period from the stop display (confirmed display) of the jackpot stop symbol to the start of the jackpot. When this special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to on, the execution of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is avoided even when a new ball is entered into the second entry port 640. (See S901: Yes in FIG. 39). This special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to on when the second special symbol is forcibly stopped by a missed symbol (see S802 in FIG. 38), and the process for executing the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is avoided. If this is the case, it is set to off (S902 in FIG. 39).

The normal symbol short fluctuation flag 203t is a flag for indicating that the fluctuation of the normal symbol (second symbol) was a short fluctuation (variation for 3 seconds), and is set to on to indicate the normal symbol (second symbol). It shows that the short change of the symbol) has been executed. The normal symbol short fluctuation flag 203t determines that the timing for setting the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the normal symbol fluctuation processing (see S106 in FIG. 48) is in the time reduction state (time reduction) (S1811: Yes in FIG. 48). ), It is set to on when the fluctuation time (short fluctuation) of 3 seconds is set (S1814 in FIG. 48), and it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) has elapsed (S1816 in FIG. 48: Yes), it is referred to when it is determined that the lottery result of the current normal symbol (second symbol) is a hit (S1818: Yes in FIG. 48) (S1819 in FIG. 48).

Here, when it is determined that the normal figure short fluctuation flag 203t is set to ON (S1819: Yes in FIG. 48), it is determined whether the current state is in the time saving state (time saving in progress) (S1821 in FIG. 48). ), When it is determined that the working hours are being reduced (S1821: Yes in FIG. 48), an opening operation (long opening) advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a (FIG. 48 S1822). It should be noted that the normal symbol variation flag 203t is set to off after being determined to be set to on in the normal symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 48) (S1820 in FIG. 48).

In this way, when the game state at the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol (second symbol) (when the fluctuation time is set) and when the electric accessory 64a opening operation is set after the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) has elapsed. Since the opening operation (long opening) that is advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a only when both the gaming state and the time saving state are set, a plurality of gaming states (normal state) are set. By changing the normal symbol (lottery) that is executed across the time saving state, it is possible to surely prevent the electric accessory 64a from opening for a long time, which is an advantageous privilege for the player (long of the electric accessory 64a). It is possible to prevent the player from being excessively provided with the opening).

The winning counter 203u is a counter that counts the number of balls that have won (winned) into the first specific winning opening 65a in the round of the small hit game. When the value of the winning counter 203u becomes 10, which is the upper limit value, it is determined that the end condition of the round is satisfied, and the round is ended (see S2706 in FIG. 57). In each round of big hits, even if the value of the winning counter 203u is less than 10, the round is ended when the round period set for the round is reached. The value of the winning counter 203u is incremented by 1 each time a ball is detected in the first specific winning opening 65a during the round validity period of the small hit. Also, the value is reset to 0 at the end of each round.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, the above-mentioned winning counter 203u is not limited to the small hit game, but also counts the number of balls that have won the second specific winning opening 650a in each round during the big hit game. It is also used for.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the period for opening the first specific winning opening 65a is set to 1.5 seconds as the game content of the small hit game, and the end condition of the round established by the number of winnings is set to 10. is doing. That is, the valid period (1.5 seconds) of the round game elapses by the time 10 balls are won in the first specific winning opening 65a during the small hit game (until the round end condition for the number of winnings is satisfied). It will be. Therefore, since the period of the small hit game can be fixed, the effect straddling the small hit game (the period from the start of the change of one special symbol to the end of the change of the other special symbol via the small hit game). It is possible to predetermine the production period of a series of productions to be performed. Therefore, the fluctuation timing of the special symbol and the execution timing of the effect can be easily synchronized, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is a flag indicating a period for stopping the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time of the special figure 1, and when it is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time is stopped. When the state set to on is set to off, the update (subtraction) of the stopped fluctuation time is restarted.

This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to be turned on when the change of the second special symbol (special figure 2) whose lottery result is a small hit is stopped (S1602 in FIG. 46), and the special symbol change processing (FIG. 32) (see S202 in FIG. 32). As a result of reference, when it is set to ON, the process of updating the display of the first symbol display device corresponding to the special figure 1 is executed in the same manner as during the change (S203 in FIG. 32). That is, while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time is stopped, but the fluctuation display is continuously executed in the first symbol display device. Become. As a result, it is possible to notify that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is not forcibly stopped by setting the temporary stop flag 203v of the special figure 1 to ON. Then, when it is determined that the first special symbol variation is being executed (see FIG. 37), it is set to on (S701: Yes in FIG. 37), it is set to off (S703 in FIG. 37).

In addition, in this embodiment, since only the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to be able to win the small hit, the special symbol whose variation display is temporarily stopped based on the winning of the small hit is the first special. Only symbols are available, but if the lottery for the first special symbol is configured so that a small hit can be won, even if the special figure 2 temporary stop flag is provided to temporarily stop the variation display of the second special symbol. good.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a big hit, it is based on the fact that one special symbol is stopped in the combination indicating the big hit (based on the execution of the big hit game). ), The process of forcibly stopping the variable display of the other special symbol, and if the lottery result of one special symbol is a small hit, one special symbol is stopped by the combination indicating the small hit. Based on this, the variable display of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (stopped until the small hit game is completed).

That is, it is configured so that the variable display of the other special symbol can be processed in various modes according to the lottery result of one special symbol. With this configuration, the lottery result of one special symbol becomes the most advantageous game result (for example, big hit) for the player, and while the variable display for showing the game result is being executed, the other The special symbol (the lottery result is a small hit) is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to prevent the big hit from being erased by the small hit.

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is provided with various flags, counters, and the like. Based on the various tables provided in the ROM 202 and the flags, counters, and the like provided in the RAM 203, the basic functions of the pachinko machine 10 and the novel state transition shown in FIG. 11 can be realized.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23, details of the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 22A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 22A, the ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a, a stop display mode selection table 222b, and an additional effect selection table 222c.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, the voice lamp control device 113 is based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110, and the rough variation content (variation time, variation type (reach, deviation, etc.) indicated by the variation pattern command) is shown. ), It is used to determine the content of the detailed variable display to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This makes it possible to determine a wider variety of variation modes. Here, one of a plurality of types of variation mode is determined by lottery with respect to the rough variation content instructed by the main control device 110.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 19A, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol in the state where the probability variation state is set, the fluctuation time is 60 seconds per normal fluctuation and fluctuation. A fluctuation pattern command corresponding to either a super fluctuation when the time is 180 seconds or a special fluctuation when the fluctuation time is 600 seconds is output from the main control device 110, and the fluctuation pattern command (variation time) received by the voice lamp control device 113. The variable effect corresponding to the information indicating) will be set.

Here, as a fluctuation effect corresponding to the special variation (600 seconds), the first 60 seconds is the first stage effect mode (for example, the effect of defeating the first enemy), and the second period is 60 seconds to 180 seconds. A variable effect is set to execute the stage effect mode (for example, the effect of defeating the second enemy) and execute the third stage effect mode (effect of defeating the third enemy) in a period of 180 seconds to 600 seconds. As a variation effect corresponding to the variation (180 seconds), the first stage effect mode (for example, the effect of defeating the first enemy) is executed for the first 60 seconds, and the second stage effect mode is executed for a period of 60 seconds to 180 seconds. A variable effect that executes (for example, an effect of being defeated by a second enemy) is set, and as a variable effect corresponding to the normal variation (60 seconds), the first 60 seconds is the first stage effect mode (for example, the first enemy). A variable effect is set to execute the effect).

In this way, by setting the effect mode so as to divide the variation effect to be executed corresponding to the stage of the variation time that can be set as the lottery result of the special symbol, the variation pattern set this time for the player. It is possible to entertain the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while predicting which type the is, and it is possible to enhance the effect.

In addition, in the case of executing the above-mentioned variable effect, the remaining time display mode for allowing the player to grasp the remaining time for the effect period set as each stage (for example, the timing at which the effect mode can shift to the next stage). It may be configured to display the effect mode) in which the remaining time until is displayed as a countdown. As a result, the player can be made to know in advance at least the period during which the variable effect is continuously executed (the period during which the latent state is continuously set), so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. can.

In addition, multiple types of enemies that appear during the variable effect are provided, and the degree of expectation that the variable effect will shift to the next stage according to the type of enemy that appears (the rate at which the effect mode that wins the enemy is selected) and , It is preferable to configure it so that it is possible to suggest the content of the jackpot game executed after the end of the current fluctuation display and the game state set after the end of the jackpot game.

In addition, in this case, for example, when enemy A is displayed as the enemy type, if the fluctuation pattern set this time is a hit super fluctuation (180 seconds), the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player is If it indicates that it is selected and the fluctuation pattern is a hit special fluctuation (600 seconds), it may be configured to indicate that a jackpot type other than the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player is selected. With this configuration, it is possible to determine the effect mode (type of enemy) of the variable effect by combining a plurality of elements that determine whether or not to give a privilege advantageous to the player. The effect can be further enhanced.

In the stop display mode selection table 222b, the latent state is set as the game state, and the period during which the small hit game can be frequently executed (hereinafter referred to as the rush period) is set by the lottery of the second special symbol. It is a data table referred to when selecting the stop display mode (see FIGS. 7A and 8B) of the effect symbol for notifying a person. The stop display mode selection table 222b is configured to select different stop display modes according to the jackpot type won in the lottery of the first special symbol and the length of the rush period to be executed.

Here, the contents of the stop display mode selection table 222b will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 23 (a). FIG. 23A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the stop display mode selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 23A, the stop display mode selection table 222b predicts the degree of advantage of each jackpot type (number of rounds, gaming state set after the jackpot game) and the length of the rush period. It is stipulated that the stop display mode of the effect symbol is set so as to be possible.

Specifically, among the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the jackpot type "big hit A", which is the most advantageous to the player, is won, and the remaining time storage area 223p (the length of the rush period) is set. When the information stored in the area for storing the indicated information) is "0 to 60 seconds", that is, the rush period is within 60 seconds, the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 39". , The stop display mode "111" is defined, the stop display mode "111" is defined in the range of "40 to 79", and the stop display mode "666" is defined in the range of "80 to 99". ..

In addition, the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (the area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) that won the "big hit A" is "61 seconds to 300 seconds", that is, the rush period is 61. If it is within ~ 300 seconds, the stop display mode "111" is defined in the range of "0 to 39" for the value of the acquired effect counter 223h, and the stop display mode "333" is defined in the range of "40 to 79". Is specified, the stop display mode "333" is specified in the range of "80 to 99", and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) is specified. When "301 seconds to", that is, when the rush period is 301 seconds or more, the stop display mode "777" is defined in the range where the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is "0 to 39", and "40 to 79". The stop display mode "777" is defined in the range of "80 to 99", and the stop display mode "VVV" is defined in the range of "80 to 99".

Then, among the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the jackpot type "big hit B", which is disadvantageous to the player, is won, and the remaining time storage area 223p (information indicating the length of the rush period is stored). When the information stored in the area) is "0 to 60 seconds", that is, the rush period is within 60 seconds, the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 39", and the stop display mode is "222" is defined, the stop display mode "444" is defined in the range of "40 to 79", and the stop display mode "666" is defined in the range of "80 to 99".

Further, the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (the area for storing the information indicating the length of the rush period) that won the "big hit B" is "61 seconds to 300 seconds", that is, the rush period is 61. If it is within ~ 300 seconds, the stop display mode "444" is defined in the range of "0 to 39" for the value of the acquired effect counter 223h, and the stop display mode "666" is defined in the range of "40 to 79". Is specified, the stop display mode "111" is specified in the range of "80 to 99", and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) is specified. When "301 seconds to", that is, when the rush period is 301 seconds or more, the stop display mode "111" is defined in the range where the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is "0 to 39", and "40 to 79". The stop display mode "333" is defined in the range of "80 to 99", and the stop display mode "333" is defined in the range of "80 to 99".

Finally, among the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the second most advantageous jackpot type "big hit C" or the most unfavorable jackpot type "big hit D" is won and the rest. When the information stored in the time storage area 223p (the area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) is "0 to 60 seconds", that is, when the rush period is within 60 seconds, the acquired effect counter 223h The stop display mode "444" is defined in the range of "0 to 39", the stop display mode "666" is defined in the range of "40 to 79", and the stop display mode "666" is defined in the range of "80 to 99". The stop display mode "444" is specified.

In addition, the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (the area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) that is won in "Big hit C" and "Big hit D" is "61 seconds to 300 seconds", that is, When the rush period is within 61 to 300 seconds, the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is defined in the range of "0 to 39", the stop display mode "666" is defined, and the value is in the range of "40 to 79". The stop display mode "111" is defined, and the stop display mode "111" is defined in the range of "80 to 99", and is stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period). When the information provided is "301 seconds to", that is, the rush period is 301 seconds or more, the stop display mode "333" is defined in the range where the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is "0 to 39". , The stop display mode "777" is defined in the range of "40 to 99".

As described above, in the present embodiment, the length of the rush period and after the end of the rush period are determined by the stop display mode of the effect symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing when the rush period is started. It is configured to suggest the content of the jackpot to be executed (big hit type) to the player. As a result, it is possible to make the player predict the future game content by grasping the stop display mode of the effect symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is stipulated that the stop display mode of the effect symbol has a predetermined rule, and specifically, the stop display mode of the effect symbol is "even symbol", "odd symbol", and the like. It is stipulated that the benefits given to the player increase in the order of "777" and "VVV" (the rush period becomes longer, and the jackpot type becomes more advantageous). By giving a predetermined rule to the stop display mode of the effect symbol in this way, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

Further, since the jackpot type and the length of the rush period are combined to select the stop display mode of the effect symbol, for example, the stop display mode "111" of the effect symbol is most advantageous to the player. Only when the jackpot type "big hit A" is set, it is stipulated that it is selected even if the rush period is within 60 seconds, so if "111" is displayed, the player In contrast to the novel gameplay that wants the rush period to end in 60 seconds, that is, the playability that normally wants a longer rush period, the jackpot type and the length of the rush period are combined. By displaying the stop display mode, it is possible to add a game property that is opposite to the normal game result (short rush period).

In addition, when "VVV" is displayed as the stop display mode of the effect symbol, it means that the player has selected the most advantageous one for both the jackpot type and the length of the rush period. On the other hand, you can play the game with confidence.

In the present embodiment, the timing for selecting the stop display mode of the effect symbol by referring to the stop display mode selection table 222b according to the game state (timing for stopping and displaying the effect symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81) is set. It is configured to be different. Specifically, whether or not the second special symbol is changing at the time when the latent probability state is set (when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol starts in the state where the probability change state is set). If it is determined that the second special symbol has not changed, that is, if the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed immediately after the latent probability state is set, the jackpot change of the first special symbol occurs. It is configured to stop and display the effect symbol based on the start.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special symbol is fluctuating at the time when the latent probability state is set (when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started while the probability variation state is set), That is, unless the variable display of the second special symbol currently being executed is completed, if the lottery of the second special symbol cannot be executed in the state where the latent state is set, the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is displayed. It is configured to stop and display the effect symbol based on the timing when is finished.

With this configuration, the effect symbol can be stopped and displayed, and the second special symbol lottery can be executed with the latent state set immediately after the rush period starts, which makes the player feel uncomfortable. It is possible to play a game in a latent state without giving it.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is said that the second special symbol is changed at the time when the latent probability state is set (when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started in the state where the probability change state is set). In the case of determination, the length of the rush period from the timing when the variation display of the second special symbol being executed ends is determined, and if the determination result is within a predetermined time, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed. It is configured not to execute (the effect indicating that the rush period has started). As a result, the rush period ends if the small hit game is executed even though the effect symbol is stopped and displayed to notify that the rush period has started (the rush game has started). Can be suppressed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, since the start of the rush period (rush game) is configured to be displayed by a production symbol similar to the third symbol, it is as if the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol is displayed. It is possible to make it seem as if the rush game was executed based on the fact that the symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, even if the length of the rush period is within a predetermined time and the effect symbol is not stopped and displayed, it is possible to suppress giving a great sense of discomfort to the player.

In the present embodiment, as described above, as the timing for stopping and displaying the effect symbol, the second special being executed at the timing when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started or the timing when the latent state is set. Although the timing at which the variation display of the symbol is stopped is used, the effect symbol may be configured to be stopped and displayed at a timing other than this, and is stored in, for example, the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. If the winning information command indicating the winning information is analyzed and it is determined in advance that the jackpot fluctuation will be executed in the next fluctuation, immediately before the jackpot fluctuation is executed (the third symbol in the pre-variation of the jackpot fluctuation). May be configured to stop and display the effect symbol at the timing when is stopped and displayed). With this configuration, the lottery for the second special symbol can be executed immediately after the latent state is set.

In this way, when using a configuration in which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed before the jackpot fluctuation is executed and the notification that the rush game is started is used, the second input is performed from the timing when the effect symbol is stopped and displayed. When a game aiming at the ball mouth 640 (right-handed game) is performed, it is preferable to configure so that the lottery of the second special symbol is not executed before the next jackpot fluctuation is started. As a result, as a result of performing a right-handed game based on the fact that the effect symbol is stopped and displayed, the second is before the latent probability state is set (before the jackpot fluctuation is started), that is, during the probability change state. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a lottery of special symbols is executed and the period during which the rush game is executed is shortened.

The additional effect selection table 222c is used when selecting an effect mode (additional effect mode) for resuming the variable display of the first special symbol that has been temporarily stopped due to winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery. The data table to be referred to is configured so that a different additional effect mode (treasure box (see FIG. 7B)) is selected according to the residual fluctuation time of the first special symbol after resumption. Here, the contents specified in the additional effect selection table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. 23 (b).

FIG. 23B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the additional effect selection table 222c. As shown in FIG. 23B, in the additional effect selection table 222c, different additional effect types are selected based on the period information stored in the residual variation time information storage area 223o and the additional effect counter 223i. The data content is defined as such, and the player predicts the remaining variation time (remaining period of the rush period) of the first special symbol by executing the additional effect mode corresponding to the selected additional effect type. It is configured to get.

Specifically, when the remaining fluctuation time (period information stored in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o) is the period A (less than 5 seconds), the value of the acquired additional effect counter 223i is "0 to 99". "None" is specified in the range of "100 to 198", and "Additional effect A" is specified in the range of "100 to 198". Further, when the remaining fluctuation time (period information stored in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o) is the period B (5 seconds to 60 seconds), the value of the acquired additional effect counter 223i is "0 to 99". The additional effect type "additional effect A" is defined in the range of "100 to 198", and the "additional effect B" is defined in the range of "100 to 198". When the remaining fluctuation time (period information stored in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o) is the period C (60 seconds or more), the value of the acquired additional effect counter 223i is in the range of "0 to 99". The additional effect type "additional effect B" is defined, and "additional effect C" is specified in the range of "100 to 198".

Here, when the "additional effect A" is set, the display mode of the treasure box 812 (see FIG. 7B) displayed during the rush period is changed to a tattered display mode. By grasping the tattered display mode, the player can predict that the rush period is short. Further, when "additional effect B" is set, the treasure box 812 (see FIG. 7B) in the normal display mode is displayed, and when "additional effect C" is set, the treasure box 812 in the normal display mode is displayed. A gorgeous display mode is set. If "None" is selected, the effect of not displaying the treasure chest 812 is set during the remaining rush period.

In the additional effect selection table 222c (FIG. 23 (b)) shown in the present embodiment, an example in which the remaining fluctuation time of the rush period and the additional effect type are completely associated with each other is shown, but the present invention is limited to this. With a small probability, for example, "additional effect C" is set when the period B is set, and "additional effect A" or "none" is set when the period C is set. Is also good. As a result, it is possible to perform an unexpected effect on the player.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the combined game information in which the rush period and the jackpot type are combined is played in the stop display mode of the effect symbol displayed at the timing when the rush game is started in the latent state. It is configured to provide the player with game information indicating the remaining period of the rush period by providing additional effects during the rush period. As a result, the player can comprehensively discriminate between the stop display mode of the effect symbol executed as the compound game information and the effect mode of the additional effect, so that more detailed game contents can be predicted.

Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 22 (b). FIG. 22B is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d, a special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e, and a special figure 1 stop. Type selection flag 223f, special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g, effect counter 223h, additional effect counter 223i, state setting area 223j, remaining time reduction number area 223k, special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m, special figure. 2 Fluctuation time counter 223n, remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o, remaining time storage area 223p, card notification flag 223q, card notification possible flag 223s, rush display flag 223t, prize ball counter 223u, power supply. At least the disconnection flag 223y and the other memory area 223z are provided.

The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until the processing for the command is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read / written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 60) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination process performs the command determination process. , The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The winning information storage area 223b has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas stores prize information. In the pachinko machine 10, when the starting prize for the first ball opening 64 is detected in the main control device 110, the first winning random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter C2 acquired in response to the starting winning. From each value of the small hit type counter C5 and the variable type counter CS1, various information (win / fail, big hit type in case of big hit, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the starting prize is drawn is obtained. It is predicted (estimated) by the main control device 110, and various predicted information is notified from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts various information (win / fail, big hit type in case of big hit, fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, and the winning information. Is stored in the winning information storage area 223b. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 areas (1st to 4th areas). Will be done. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is a variation effect (variation display) of the first special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is reserved by the main control device 110. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol up to four times for each type of special symbol.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c sets the number of reserved balls as a special symbol. It is designed to be managed for each type of.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added by entering the ball into the first ball entry port 64, or in the main control device 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command. , Stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (see S4212 in FIG. 60). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the first special symbol of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203d.

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the hold ball number indicated by the command in the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223c, and holds the first special symbol after the storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the ball number counter 223c, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, it holds the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the ball number symbol is displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is changed while synchronizing with the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 may also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. can. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

The special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d and the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e receive the fluctuation pattern command of the first special symbol and the fluctuation pattern command of the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110, respectively. It is turned on (see S4206 and S4209 in FIG. 60) and turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S5102 and S5108 in FIG. 69). When the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d and the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e are turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

When the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g receive the stop type command of the first special symbol and the stop type command of the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110. (See S4301 in FIG. 61), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S5112 in FIG. 69). When the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is turned on, the stop type is changed based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type). It is determined.

The effect counter 223h is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The effect counter 223h is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198. For example, each time the main process (see FIG. 59) is executed, the value is incremented by 1 and updated. Will be done.

The additional effect counter 223i is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The additional effect counter 223i is composed of a 1-byte loop counter updated in the range of 0 to 198. For example, the value is incremented by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 59) is executed. Will be updated.

The state setting area 223j is a storage area in which information corresponding to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is stored. In this state setting area 223j, every time a state command output from the main control device 110 is received, information corresponding to the state of the pachinko machine 10 indicated by the state command is stored (see S4405 in FIG. 62). .. More specifically, the state setting area 223j is allocated with a 2-bit storage area, and whether or not it is a high-probability state of a special symbol or whether or not it is a high-probability state of a normal symbol in order from the high-order bit. A value indicating whether or not is stored. For example, if the value of the state setting area 223j is "11B", it means that it is a probabilistic state (high probability state of special symbol and high probability state of normal symbol), and if it is "10B", it means latent. It means that it is a probable state (a high-probability state of a special symbol and a low-probability state of a normal symbol). On the other hand, if it is "00H", it means that it is a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol and a low probability state of a normal symbol).

By updating the state setting area 223j in response to the state command output from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 can accurately grasp the state of the pachinko machine 10.

The remaining time reduction area 223k is a storage area for storing the remaining number of times in the high probability state of the normal symbol. The remaining time reduction number area 223k is updated to the number of times notified by the remaining time reduction number command output every time the value of the time reduction counter 203f is updated in the main control device 110 (see S4802 in FIG. 66). As a result, the value stored in the remaining time reduction number area 223k can be updated in synchronization with the value of the time reduction counter 203f of the main control device 110, so that the remaining time reduction number grasped by the voice lamp control device 113 can be determined. It can be matched with the actual number of time reductions updated by the main controller 110.

The special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m and the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n indicate the corresponding fluctuation time when each fluctuation display is set (executed) in the fluctuation display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 69). Each time a value is set and various counter update processes (see S4111 in FIG. 72) are executed, each value is decremented by 1 (see S5402 and S5404 in FIG. 72). The period from the reception of the special figure 1 temporary stop command to the reception of the special figure 1 restart command is when various counter update processes (see S4111 in FIG. 72) are executed. Also, the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is configured so as not to be subtracted by 1.

Then, when calculating the remaining fluctuation time in the temporary stop-related processing (see S4220 in FIG. 67) that is executed when it is determined that the temporary stop-related command has been received in the command determination processing (see S4112 in FIG. 60). It is referenced (see S4903 in FIG. 67).

The remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o is a storage area for storing information indicating the remaining period of the rush period, that is, the remaining time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol. Remaining period information (period A to period C) for indicating the remaining fluctuation time of the temporarily stopped first special symbol variation display is set in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o, and the temporarily stopped first special symbol is set. The remaining period information stored when setting the additional effect when resuming the variable display of the symbol is referred to.

The card notification flag 223q is a flag for indicating whether or not the card forgetting warning screen (see FIG. 10A) is displayed (notified), and is turned on when the card forgetting warning screen is displayed. Set.

The card notification possible flag 223s is a flag for indicating whether or not the card forgetting warning screen (see FIG. 10A) can be displayed (notified), and the card forgetting warning screen can be displayed. It is set to on when the above conditions are met.

The rush displayed flag 223t is a flag for indicating whether or not the rush game has started in the state where the latent state is set, and is a rush entry screen (FIG. 7) indicating that the rush game has started. (A), see FIG. 8 (b)) is set to on.

The prize ball number counter 223u is a counter for continuously measuring the number of prize balls after the jackpot game is started, and is a prize ball during a period in which a game state advantageous to the player is continuously set. The numbers are configured to be cumulative. Specifically, in the hit-related processing (S4216 in FIG. 63), when it is determined that the prize ball command has been received (S4505: Yes in FIG. 63), the value corresponding to the received prize ball command is added (S). S4506 in FIG. 63).

As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to acquire a large amount of prize balls not only in the big hit game but also in the small hit game, the pachinko machine 10 is small according to the value of the prize ball counter 223u. It is configured so that the card forgotten warning display can be executed after the end of the winning game or after the end of the big hit game in which a small number of rounds is set.

The power cutoff flag 223y is a flag used for determining whether or not there is a momentary power failure. The power cutoff flag 223y is set to be turned on before the power cutoff process is executed after receiving the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S4117 in FIG. 59). After that, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all the information in the RAM 223 disappears after a certain period of time (100 milliseconds). Therefore, when the power cutoff flag 223y is on (see 4008: Yes in FIG. 58) in the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 58), it is constant after the power cutoff flag 223y is set to on. This is the case where the voice lamp control device 113 is started up before the lapse of time (100 milliseconds), that is, when there is a momentary power failure. In this case, all the information in the RAM 223 has not disappeared, and unnecessary information (or information that has become incomplete due to the disappearance of only a part of the information) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. In some cases, the information in the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared (see S4009 in FIG. 58). As a result, the processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so that each processing of the voice lamp control device 113 can be operated normally.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and the number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches it, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset is applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by 1. When the MPU 231 executes the instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory generally has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data that is continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, high-speed reading is possible for the data on the second and subsequent pages, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-consecutive data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 described later of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the second program storage area 234a1. As described above, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and is, for example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) are generated when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to read and write data to and from the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b has one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) containing the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in one bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. The process of transferring one page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a in the NOR type ROM 234d, specifically, the first program stored in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be executed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) worth of instructions) are stored from the instructions. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and also specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (command code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (command code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after the address "0000H" is specified, and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The program storage area of the work RAM 233 for each fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is programmed so that the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 73) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM configured by a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 30) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. By expanding the image drawn in the buffer and outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 74 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes an image drawing process for the next frame, and also executes a process of displaying the image previously developed by drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 draws and displays an image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, since the image controller 237 does not receive the drawing instruction of the next image at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started during the drawing of the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The image is drawn using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, in general, the NAND flash memory facilitates a large capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of drawing an image is used. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 by the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display a third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is held without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to the 235e and the error message image area 235f, at least the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and the third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area for storing the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the game is started by the player while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the upper first entry port 64b1 or the lower first. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a variable image at power-on, which displays the result of a lottery performed by the main control device 110 by a variable effect when a ball entering the ball entry port 64b2 is detected.

When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 73).

Here, a variation image when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. 25. In FIG. 25, immediately after the power is turned on by the display control device 114, the power is turned on by the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234. It is explanatory drawing explaining time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the main image area 235a at power-on, and the main image at power-on shown in FIG. 25 (a). The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is the instruction command for starting the variation, is received, the display control device 114 displays FIG. 25 (b). On the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, the image of the "x" symbol that fluctuates when the power is turned on is displayed alternately and repeatedly during the fluctuation period. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the image shown in FIG. 25 (b) is displayed for a certain period after the variation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", it is shown in FIG. 25 (c). The displayed image is displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation effect is stopped.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball is detected in the upper first ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first ball entry port 64b2. If this is the case, the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 25 (b) and 25 (c) are drawn. Is instructed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 so as to be alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If a ball is detected in the upper first ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first ball entry port 64b2 while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is set to the third. It can be immediately displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 24, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 26, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images will be described. FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a range of four types of rear images and a rear image stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image, and FIG. 26 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing “ FIG. 26B shows the back side A corresponding to the "city stage", and the back sides B to D corresponding to the "forest stage", the "river stage", and the "sky stage", respectively. .. Further, FIG. 27 is shown with respect to the back surface E corresponding to the “island stage”.

As shown in FIG. 26, as the rear image corresponding to each of the rear surfaces A to D, an image horizontally longer than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared on the back surfaces A to D (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured so that the back image is continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a'are composed of an image corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The rear image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

When the change of the back type is decided based on the back type selection table (not shown) and the stage is changed to "city stage", "forest stage", "river stage", or "empty stage", MPU231 First, the area between the position a and the position a'of the corresponding rear image is set as the initial position of the display area, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image of the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and further displayed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a'. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the positions a and c so as to flow toward the left with a smooth connection.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27, the rear image on the back surface E has a third symbol in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) → ... In FIG. 27 with the passage of time. It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, on the back surface E, the image of the mountain towering over the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed in a fixed position. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color tone of the sky image spreading on the mountain changes with the passage of time.

When the stage is changed to the "island stage", the rear image shown in FIG. 27 (a) is displayed as the initial rear image of the rear surface E. In the rear image shown in FIG. 27 (a), an orange sky indicating a morning glow is displayed. Then, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to bright blue, and after a predetermined time elapses, the back image shown in FIG. 27B is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 27 (b), a bright blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black with the lapse of time, and after a lapse of a predetermined time, the back image shown in FIG. 27 (c) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 27 (c), a black sky indicating the night is displayed. After that, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually begins to turn white from black and then changes to orange. Then, after the lapse of a predetermined time, the back image shown in FIG. 27 (a) is returned, and the back images of FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (c) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 again.

Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 26A, the back surface A corresponding to the city stage, which is the initial stage, is the back surface of the resident video RAM 235 in which all the image data corresponding to the entire range of the back surface A, that is, the position a to the position d is displayed. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is played without changing the stage while the initial stage "city stage" is displayed, so the image data on the back A corresponding to the frequently displayed "city stage" is displayed. By making all of them resident in the rear image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, the back surface B corresponding to the "forest stage", the back surface C corresponding to the "river stage", and the back surface D corresponding to the "empty stage" are a part of the back surface as shown in FIG. 26 (b). That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b is stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Further, the back surface E corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 27 (a), and the image data corresponding to the back image between FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (b) excluding FIG. 27 (b) is obtained after the power is turned on. It is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and is resident in the start-up process.

Here, in order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to make the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all the rear images, but if this is done, the resident video RAM 235 will be resident. As a result, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image first displayed when the stage is changed is the range from the position a to the position a'(or the range of FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (b)). ), And the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. 27 (a) and 27 (b)) is transferred to the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Since the character ROM 234 is configured to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, when the stage change is decided by the lottery at the start of the fluctuation, the back surface of the resident video RAM 235. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial positions of the back surfaces B to D can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the scroll display or the color tone changes with the passage of time. It can be displayed while making it. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a part of the range of images is stored in the back surfaces B to D, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 and suppress an increase in cost.

Further, on the rear surfaces B to D, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is directed from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. While scrolling, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b'to the image at the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b'to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b'to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Similarly, on the back surface E, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the images of FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (b) are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. 27 (a), so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 27 (b) to 27 (c) and 27 (c) to (a) can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. The range of ~ (b) is set. As a result, while displaying the images of FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (b), the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 27 (b) to (c) and 27 (c) to (a) are normally used. Since it can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the images of FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (b) are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Using the image data corresponding to the rear image, the images of FIGS. 27 (b) to (c) and 27 (c) to (a) are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time. be able to.

In the backs B to E, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 24) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

Further, in the rear surfaces B to D, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to the images between the positions b'and b. Image data to be stored is duplicated. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b'on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image controller 237 is controlled. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so that the image between the positions a and c flows toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 24, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, is resident. As a result, when performing variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37 after the ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 640, the third symbol display device In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variation effect is not immediately started.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9", the main symbol consisting of the rear symbol such as a wooden box, the rear symbol and the character such as the furoshiki, the helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the above is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. Will be. As a result, when the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy", "old man", and "girl" are displayed according to various productions, and the data corresponding to these are displayed in the character design area 235e. By being resident, when the display control device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but is resident. By reading the image data resident in advance in the character symbol area 235e of the video RAM 235, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. Notify the display control device 114 by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 has an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the process of displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used to draw the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a storage image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a rear image change flag 233w, a rear image discrimination flag 233x, a demo display flag 233y, and a definite display flag 233z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and an opening effect. , Display data tables corresponding to round production, ending production, and demo production are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A or jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

The opening production is a production for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state and the large opening that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round production will start from now on. It is a production to inform the player of the number of rounds to be played. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special gaming state.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the game is not performed on the pachinko machine 10.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be enlarged and displayed, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing a superposition process with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is specified for each address. It should be noted that one or a plurality of information regarding the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are obtained with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type is the back A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of "city stage", "forest stage", "river stage", "sky stage", and "island stage"). Information is described that specifies whether to display either one or to display a rear image different from the rear images A to E. Further, as the back surface type, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to E, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to E is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back surfaces A to E as a drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to E, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In this embodiment, a case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not the display should be performed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the rear image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating that) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. The offset information is specified instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the lapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the third symbol can be the variation symbol in the previous variation effect or the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110. By managing by the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, it is possible to easily specify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variablely displayed at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 29). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 30) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, it is resident among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to start the transfer at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 29). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data for which the transfer should be started does not exist at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, the transfer target image data for which the transfer should be started does not exist corresponding to the address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 29).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 29, in the example of FIG. 29). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table is the display data table. If a transfer data table corresponding to the above exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 30) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 29, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Bull data is specified in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c determines whether or not to display the power-on images (main image at power-on and variable image at power-on) shown in FIGS. 25 (a) to 25 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , MPU 231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 73) (see S6005 in FIG. 73). Then, at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 85 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 75 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 75 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 75 (b)) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. See S6309 in 75 (b)). On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 85 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 85 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 30), which will be described later, is generated, which describes the content of the image drawing instruction for the user. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 30) described later that describes drawing instructions is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Null data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to the later drawing list (see FIG. 30) that describes the instruction content for image drawing to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 moves the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 75 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S7205 in FIG. 84) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list to be described later. (See FIG. 30) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 30, a back image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Design 2, ..., Error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as a pattern). In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and the image controller 237 includes various types. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. Processing is performed, synthesis processing with other sprites is performed according to the α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to the color information, and filtering processing is performed by the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processing on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 has a drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and other contents of an image to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image, warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) are set to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can be used according to the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., Hold ball number symbol 1, hold ball number symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 performs the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list contains this transfer data information, the image controller 237 prepares an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 75 (b). ) Is executed, the time counting counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7207 in FIG. 82). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes to be performed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 74) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 231. Will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "Off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 86). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 86). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as "drawing target buffer") that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 87).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and together with the drive signal, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when the value is "1", it is set to "0". It is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see S6306 in FIG. 75 (b)) is executed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The rear image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the rear image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of the rear image is changed, and if it is off, it means that the change is not performed. The rear image change flag 233w is set to on when the rear image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 81 (a)). Further, the rear image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 86), and is set to off when the rear image change process is executed (see S7710 in FIG. 86). As a result, it is possible to display the rear image corresponding to the rear image change command and the effect mode change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

The rear image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set rear image type. This flag is composed of, for example, 1 byte, and each back type is associated with each bit. If any bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current back type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the rear surface A is set. When the rear image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to on for the rear image discrimination flag 233x (FIG. 81 (a). ) S7002). At this time, all other bits are set to off. With this back image discrimination flag 233x, the currently set back type can be easily specified.

The demo display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not the demo is being produced. If the demo display flag 233y is on, it means that the demo is being produced, and if it is off, it means that the demo is not being produced. This demo display flag 233y is set to on when the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (see S7221 in FIG. 82), and the demo display data table is set. It is set to off when other display data tables other than are set for the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 77 (a), S6705 in FIG. 78 (a), S6805 in FIG. 78 (b). , See S6905 in FIG. 79). With this demo display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demo is currently being produced.

The confirmation display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the confirmation display effect is being executed. Here, the definite display effect indicates an effect in which the stop symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the fluctuation pattern. If the definite display flag 233z is on, it means that the definite display effect is in progress, and if it is off, it means that the definite display effect is not in progress. The confirmation display flag 233z is set to on when the confirmation display data table is set to the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (S7214 in FIG. 82), and is other than the confirmation display data table. Set off when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 77 (a), S6705 in FIG. 78 (a), S6805 in FIG. 78 (b), FIG. See S6905 in 79). With this definite display flag 233z, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the definite display effect is currently in progress.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 31 to 57. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). When it reaches 479,99,232,99, respectively, it clears to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C4, and C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, the special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, the start winning process associated with winning the first ball opening 64 (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 32 to 47.

After the start winning process (S105) is executed, a process for displaying on the second symbol display device (not shown) and a process for passing the ball at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 are performed normally. The symbol variation process is executed (S106). The details of the normal symbol variation processing (S106) will be described later with reference to FIG. 48. After the normal symbol variation process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. The launch control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and launches the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

First, with reference to FIG. 32, the contents of the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation processing (S104). When the special symbol variation process (S104) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current is a big hit or a small hit (S201), and if it is determined that the current is a big hit or a small hit (S201: Yes). Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S202). In the process of S202, it is determined whether the subtraction of the variable time of the other special figure during the change is interrupted by the stop display of one special figure with the symbol indicating the hit. If it is determined in the process of S202 that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S202: Yes), the display of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the temporarily stopped special figure is updated. (S203), that is, the process of continuing the variable display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed for the special figure in which the subtraction of the variable time is interrupted, and this process is terminated. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the special figure fluctuation has not been forcibly stopped.

On the other hand, in the processing of S201, when it is determined that the current is a big hit or a small hit (S201: No), is the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m larger than 0 (that is, the special figure 1 changes)? (S204), and if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is not larger than 0 (0) (S204: No), the first special symbol fluctuation start processing is performed. (S208) is executed, and then the process proceeds to S209, which executes the variation processing related to the special figure 2. The details of the first special symbol change start processing (S208) will be described later with reference to FIG. 33.

In the process of S204, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203 m is larger than 0 (S204: Yes), the first special symbol variation execution process (S205) is executed. The first special symbol variation in-execution process (S205) executes the process in the special figure 1 variation, and a detailed description thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 37.

After finishing the first special symbol variation executing process (S205), it is next determined whether the variation time ends (whether the variation time counter 203m is 0 in the special figure 1 variation time counter 203m) (S206), and the variation time is determined. If it is determined that the end timing is reached (S206: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S207) is executed, and then the process proceeds to S209. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S206 that it is not the end timing of the fluctuation time (S206: No), the processing of S207 is skipped and the process proceeds to S209.

In the processes of S209 to S213, the same processes as those of S204 to S207 executed for the special figure 1 are executed. When the processing of S209 is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n is larger than 0 (that is, whether the special figure 2 is changing) (S209), and the special figure 2 change. If it is determined that the value of the time counter 203n is not larger than 0 (0) (S209: No), the second special symbol variation start process (S210) is executed, and then this process ends. The details of the second special symbol change start processing (S210) will be described later with reference to FIG. 39.

On the other hand, in the process of S209, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n is larger than 0 (S209: Yes), the second special symbol variation executing process (S211) is executed. The second special symbol variation in-execution process (S211) executes the process in the special figure 2 variation, and will be described later with reference to FIG. 44.

After finishing the second special symbol variation executing process (S211), it is next determined whether the variation time end timing (special figure 2 variation time counter 203n is 0) (S212), and the variation time is determined. If it is determined that the end timing is reached (S212: Yes), the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S213) is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S212, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the fluctuation time (S212: No), the process of S213 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the first special symbol variation start processing (S208), which is one of the special symbol variation processing (S104 in FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change start processing (S208).

In the first special symbol change start processing (S208), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is acquired (S301), and the value of the acquired first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d (N1). ) Is greater than 0 (S302). In the process of S302, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is used. After subtracting 1 (S303), a hold ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the hold ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d after the subtraction is set (S304). ..

The reserved ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the first special symbol hold ball number counter of the RAM 223. Store in 223c. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the first special symbol of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203d.

When the processing of S304 is completed, the data of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is then shifted to the previous data (S305). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3.

When the process of S305 is completed, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is then executed (S306). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 34, but the value of the first random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. This is a process for executing a jackpot determination as to whether or not a jackpot is a jackpot based on the set gaming state.

When the processing of S306 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing is next executed (see FIG. 35). Although the details will be described later, this first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) is a variation type counter stored in the execution area of the first special symbol winning / failing determination result and the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. This is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern based on the value of CS1.

When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) is completed, the game state update process is then executed (S308). The details of this game state update process (S308 in FIG. 36) will be described later, but the state of the pachinko machine 10 by updating the state of the probability change flag 203 g and the value of the time saving counter 203f, which indicate the state of the pachinko machine 10. It is a process for updating. When the process of S308 is completed, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S302 that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S302: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, regarding the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), which is one process of the first special symbol change start process (S204 in FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. explain. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, whether or not the jackpot is won in the other special symbol lottery during the period during which the fluctuation display (big hit fluctuation) in which the jackpot is won in one of the special symbols is executed. It is configured so that no discrimination is made.

In other words, in a state where it is confirmed that the jackpot game will be executed after a predetermined period (after the fluctuation time has elapsed) by one special symbol lottery, the jackpot will be won by the other special symbol lottery, and multiple times in a short period of time. It is configured to prevent the jackpot from being won and giving excessive benefits.

In this way, the process of acquiring various counter values is performed in the same manner as in the normal special symbol lottery, the determination based on the various counter values acquired in the process is skipped, and the outlier symbol is set. It is possible to respond quickly to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery.

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), first, each counter value stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired (S401). Next, it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S402). That is, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in a high probability state (probability change state, latent probability state). When it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is on (that is, the probability variation state of the special symbol) (S402: Yes), the random number value that becomes the jackpot specified in the first random number table 202a for high probability time. And whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer matches, and the determination result (lottery result) is acquired (S403). On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S402 that the probability variation flag 203g is off (that is, it is a low probability state of the special symbol) (S402: No), the first random number table 202a for the low probability time is displayed. It is determined whether or not the specified random number value that becomes a big hit and the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer match, and the lottery result is acquired (S404).

Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot flag is on (S405). If it is determined that it is not on (that is, it is off) (S405: No), it is determined whether the lottery result acquired in S403 or S404 is a big hit (S406), and if the lottery result is a big hit (S406). S406: Yes), the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON for the first special symbol (S407), and the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to the jackpot (S408). Then, based on the acquired value of the hit type counter, the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S409), and the value corresponding to the current gaming state is set in the winning state storage area. It is stored in 203j (S410), 1 is set in the time saving counter 203f (S411), and this processing is terminated.

Here, by setting the value of the time reduction counter 203f to 1 in the processing of S411, the first special symbol jackpot determination processing (see S306 in FIG. 34) in the first special symbol fluctuation start processing (see S208 in FIG. 33). In the game state update process (S308) executed later than the above, the high probability state of the normal symbol can be shifted to the low probability state. As a result, when a jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol, it is possible to set a low probability state of the normal symbol at the timing when the jackpot fluctuation starts. Therefore, by winning the jackpot of the first special symbol in the state where the probability change state is set, the probability change state can be shifted to the latent state.

also. By performing the process of setting the value of the time reduction counter 203f to 1 in the process of S411, the process of shifting the high-probability state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state and the fluctuation of the special symbol on condition that the jackpot is won. Both the process of shifting the high-probability state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state and the process of shifting the high-probability state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state on condition that the number of times reaches a predetermined number of times can be executed by using the game state update process (S308). As a result, even when a plurality of conditions for terminating the high-probability state of the normal symbol are provided, it is possible to prevent the processing of the main control device 110 from becoming complicated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S405, when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203h is on (S405: Yes), or in the processing of S406, when it is determined that the lottery result is out of order (S406: No), the out-of-order symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S412), and then this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S208 in FIG. 33), will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 35), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 34), the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot, that is, the first. 1 It is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is set (S501). Here, the determination as to whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is on. The special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to be turned on in the process of S407 in the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34).

When it is determined in the process of S501 that the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S501: Yes), the first obtained in the process of S401 in the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34). Based on the value of the hit type counter C2, the jackpot type is determined from the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16A) (S502), and the process proceeds to S503.

On the other hand, in the process of S501, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of order (that is, the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is off) (S501: No), the process of S502 is skipped. Then, the process proceeds to S503.

In the process of S503, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a (S503). Next, the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 17 to 19) according to the gaming state is read out (S504), and the process proceeds to S505. The gaming state is determined based on the state of the probability change flag 203g and the value of the time reduction counter 203f. In the process of S505, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S505), and then the special figure 1 variation pattern command is set based on the selected variation pattern (S505). S506).

When the processing of S506 is completed, the special figure 1 stop type command indicating the stop symbol is set (S507), then the change start of the first special symbol is set by the first symbol display device 37 (S508), and the processing of S505 is completed. A value indicating the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in 1 is set in the fluctuation time counter 203m in Special Figure 1, and the present process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, a game state update process (S308), which is one process of the first special symbol change start process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this game state update process (S308). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the state of the probability change flag 203g, which is a condition for setting the gaming state, and the value of the time saving counter 203f, only the value of the time saving counter 203f is updated at the start of the change of the special symbol. In the game state update process (see FIG. 36), which is one of the first special symbol change start processes (see FIG. 33), the process of updating the value of the time saving counter 203f is configured to be executed.

The probability variation flag 203g, which will be described in detail later, is set to off when the jackpot fluctuation ends and the special symbol indicating the jackpot is stopped and displayed (when the jackpot game is executed). It is configured as follows.

That is, one of the two conditional elements (the state of the probability change flag 203g and the value of the time reduction counter 203f) referred to when setting the game state is updated at the start of the change of the special symbol, and the other conditional elements. By making it possible to update when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, it is possible to easily diversify the gaming state set by combining the two conditional elements. In addition, since it is possible to set a specific gaming state (for example, latent state) only during the period from the start to the end of the change of the special symbol, it is advantageous for the player only during the predetermined period. It is possible to set the game state.

When the game state update process (see FIG. 36) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203f is larger than 0 (S601). If it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 0 (S601: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203f is larger than 0 (S601: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S602), and the remaining time saving number command indicating the value of the time saving counter 203f is set. (S603). Next, it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 0 (S604), if it is determined to be 0 (S604: Yes), and then it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S605). ). Here, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S605: No), it is a probability variation state (that is, a latent probability state) to which the time saving game is not given, so that the latent probability state is indicated. A status command is set (S606), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S605, when it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is not set to ON (S605: No), since it is a normal state, a state command indicating the normal state is set (S607), and this process is performed. To finish.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S604 that the value of the time reduction counter 203f is not 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is.

In this embodiment, the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set until the next big hit of the special symbol is won (until the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination indicating the big hit). In addition to this, for example, a probability change counter is provided in place of the probability change flag 203 g, and the value of the probability change counter is subtracted each time a change of a special symbol is executed, and the value of the probability change counter becomes 0. In some cases, it may be configured to shift the high-probability state of the special symbol to the low-probability state.

When such a configuration is used, the game state update process (S308) shown with reference to FIG. 36 is set as the game state update process at the start of the special figure change, and separately at the timing when the change display of the special symbol ends. By providing the game state update process when the special symbol fluctuation is stopped to update the value of the probability change counter, the process of determining whether to end the high probability state of the special symbol and whether to end the high probability state of the normal symbol It is possible to execute the process of determining whether or not at a different timing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the content of the first special symbol variation executing process (S205) executed in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. I will explain. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol change execution processing (S205). In the first special symbol variation executing process (S205), when the subtraction of the variation time of the special figure 1 is interrupted, the process of restarting the subtraction and the process of subtracting the variation time are executed.

When the first special symbol change execution processing (S205) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S701). Here, a case where this process is executed with the temporary stop flag 203v of Special Figure 1 set to ON will be briefly described. As described above, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to on when the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a hit (small hit) while the special figure 1 is changing. Then, when the temporary stop flag 203v of Special Figure 1 is set to ON, the jackpot middle flag 203o is set to ON in the process, so that the timer interrupt executed every 2 milliseconds by the main controller 110 is performed. When the process loops and the next special symbol variation process (FIG. 32) is executed (after 2 milliseconds when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON), the process of S201 is a big hit. Therefore, the first special symbol variation executing process (S205) is not executed. Then, when the big hit game (or small hit game) is completed and it is determined in the process of S201 that the game is not during the big hit (or during the small hit), the first special symbol variation executing process (S205) is executed. It will be. With this configuration, the big hit (or small hit) game is in the state where the first special symbol change executing process (S205) is executed while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON. It is configured so that it is the timing to restart the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation, which has been completed and the subtraction of the fluctuation time has been suspended.

Returning to FIG. 37, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S701, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S701: Yes), then the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command is set (S702), and the special figure 1 provisional stop flag 203v is set. The stop flag 203v is set to off (S703), and the process proceeds to S704. On the other hand, in the processing of S701, if it is determined that the temporary stop flag 203v in FIG. 1 is not set to on (set to off) (S701: No), the processing of S702 and S703 is skipped and S704 is performed. Move to the processing of.

In the process of S704, the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203 m is decremented by 1 and updated (S704), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S705), and the present process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207), which is one of the special symbol variation processing (S104 in FIG. 32), will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207).

In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON for the first special symbol (special figure 1) (S801). When it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to on for the first special symbol (S801: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to on (S802), and the special figure is set. 2 A special figure 2 indicating that the fluctuation stop flag 203s is turned on is set (S803). Next, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed with a detached symbol (S804).

When the processing of S804 is completed, the jackpot scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S805), and the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h and the probability variation flag 203g are reset (S806). Next, the jackpot middle flag 203o is set to ON (S807), and the process proceeds to S808.

On the other hand, in the process of S801, if the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to off for the first special symbol (S801: No), the process of S802 to S807 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S808.

In the process of S808, a special figure 1 confirmation command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the first special symbol is confirmed and stopped is set (S808). After that, a process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is variablely displayed by the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S809), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the first special symbol stop process (S207), the process (S802 to S809) of stopping the variation display with the symbol showing the determination result of the first lottery game is executed. Further, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a big hit (S801: Yes), the process of forcibly stopping the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner (S803, S804) is executed.

In the first embodiment, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed by the jackpot symbol, the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is forcibly stopped and displayed by the off symbol. It is not limited to. For example, at the time when the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol may be interrupted (temporarily stopped). Then, after the jackpot of the first special symbol is completed, the variable display of the second special symbol may be restarted. As a result, it is possible to produce a natural aspect as compared with the case where the forced stop is caused by the detachment. Further, in the present embodiment, the jackpot scenario is set in the process of S806 based on the game state stored in the winning state storage area 203j in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34). For example, a jackpot scenario is set in the process of S706 based on the game state stored in the winning state storage area 203j in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) using the opening period of the jackpot game. You may try to do it.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the contents of the second special symbol change start process (S210) executed in the special symbol change process (FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol change start processing (S210). In the second special symbol change start processing (S210), a process for starting the change of the special figure 2 is executed. It should be noted that, in response to the above-mentioned processing related to the change of the first special symbol with reference to FIGS. 39 to 46, the object of the change is simply changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol. The detailed description of the element will be omitted.

In the second special symbol change start processing (S209), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 change stop flag 203s is set to ON (S901). When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to on (S901: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to off (S902), and this process is terminated. As described above, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is a flag that is set to be turned on while displaying the stop of the second special symbol with the stop symbol corresponding to the deviation when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol ends. .. That is, if the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is on, it means that the jackpot is started, so that the fluctuation start of the second special symbol should not be set. Therefore, when the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is turned on in the processing of S901, the main processing is terminated as it is without executing each processing of S902 to S907 for setting the fluctuation start.

On the other hand, in the process of S901, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to off (that is, not set to on) (S901: No), the second special symbol execution area 203b Data (various counter values) are acquired (S903). Next, based on the data acquired in the process of S903, it is determined whether or not there is the acquired data (S904). That is, when it is determined that there is no data in the second special symbol execution area (S904: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S903, when it is determined that there is data (S904: Yes), the second special symbol jackpot determination process for executing the jackpot determination of the second special symbol based on each stored counter value is performed. Execute (S905). The details of the second special symbol jackpot determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 40.

After the processing of S905 is completed, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process for selecting the variation pattern is executed based on the lottery result of the second special symbol and the data acquired in the process of S903 (S906). .. The details of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906) will be described later with reference to FIG. 42. After the process of S906 is completed, the above-mentioned game state update process (see FIG. 36) is executed (S907), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, regarding the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905), which is one process of the second special symbol change start process (S210 in FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. explain. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905).

In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905), the same process as the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) is executed, so that the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) is performed. The differences between the above will be mainly explained.

When the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905) is executed, each counter value stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b is acquired (S1001). Then, the processing of S1002 to S1004 for acquiring the lottery result of whether or not it is a big hit is executed based on each acquired counter value and the state of the probability variation flag 203g. Each of these processes differs from the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) except that the counter value used for the lottery (determination) is acquired from the second special symbol execution area 203b. Control is executed.

When the processing of S1003 or S1004 is completed, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S1005). When it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is not set to ON (S1005: No), it is determined whether or not the acquired lottery result is a jackpot (S1006), and when it is determined to be a jackpot. (S1006: Yes) executes the processes of S1007 to S1010 for setting the lottery result of the second special symbol as a big hit, and ends this process. In each of these processes S1007 to S1010, the same process as each process of S407 to S410 for setting the lottery result of the first special symbol to the jackpot is executed in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34), respectively. Will be done.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to ON in the processing of S1005 (S1005: Yes), or if the lottery result of the second special symbol acquired in the processing of S1006 is not a jackpot. If it is determined (S1006: No), the special figure 2 deviation variation process for setting the small hit of the second special symbol or the stop symbol corresponding to the deviation is executed (S1011), and this process is terminated. The details of the special figure 2 deviation variation processing (S1011) will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this special drawing 2 deviation processing (S1011).

In the special figure 2 deviation variation processing (S1011), first, it is determined whether the lottery result acquired in the processing of S1003 or S1004 of FIG. 40 is a small hit of the second special symbol (S1101), and the lottery result is a small hit. (S1101: Yes), the small hit flag 203k is set to ON (S1102), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to the small hit (S1103). Then, the small hit symbol indicating the small hit type corresponding to the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is set as the stop symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S1104), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1101 that the lottery result is out of order (S1101: No), the out-of-order symbol of the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1105), and then. This process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906), which is one of the second special symbol variation start processes (S210 in FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Will be explained. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906).

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906 in FIG. 42), first, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area 203b (S1201). Next, in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905 in FIG. 40), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the jackpot of the second special symbol is set. (S1202). Here, the determination as to whether or not the jackpot is a big hit is determined by whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is turned on for the second special symbol. The special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to be turned on in the process of S1007 in the above-mentioned second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 40).

In the process of S1202, when it is determined that the jackpot of the second special symbol is set (S1202: Yes), the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 17 and 19) corresponding to the current gaming state is read out. (S1203). Then, based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S1001 in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 40) described above, the jackpot from the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16A). The type is determined (S1204).

When the processing of S1204 is completed, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S1205), and then the special figure 2 variation pattern command is set based on the selected variation pattern. (S1206). Then, the process proceeds to S1208.

On the other hand, in the process of S1202, when it is determined that the jackpot of the second special symbol is not set (S1202: No), the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (S1207) is executed, and the process proceeds to S1208. Transition.

In the process of S1208, a special figure 2 stop type command indicating a stop symbol is set (S1208). Next, the first symbol display device 37 sets the variation start of the second special symbol (S1209), and the value indicating the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the processing of S1205 is set in the special figure 2 variation time counter 203n (S1209). S1210), this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, this special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (S1207) will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 deviation pattern selection process (S1207).

In the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (S1207 in FIG. 43), first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit (S1301). Here, it is determined whether the small hit flag 203k is set to ON (S1301). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203k is on (S1301: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area (S1302). Then, the small hit type is selected based on the acquired value of the small hit type counter C5 and the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16B) (S1303).

Next, the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 17 to 19) corresponding to the current gaming state is read (S1304), and the variation pattern of small hits corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is read from the read variation pattern selection table. Is selected (S1305). After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command indicating the selected small hit fluctuation pattern is set (S1306), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1301, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a small hit (that is, it is out of order) (S1301: No), the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the current gaming state (FIG. 17 and FIG. 19) are read (S1307), and an outlier variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S1308). After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is set (S1309) based on the selected deviation pattern, and the present process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the second special symbol variation executing process (S211), which is one of the processes in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Explain the contents. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol change execution processing (S211). In the second special symbol variation executing process (S211), when the subtraction of the variation time of the special figure 2 is interrupted, the process of restarting the subtraction and the process of subtracting the variation time are executed.

When the second special symbol change execution processing (S211) is executed, first, the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n is subtracted by 1 and updated (S1401), and the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. Is updated (S1402), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the contents of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S213). The second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S213) executes the processing for stopping the fluctuation of the special figure 2.

When the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S213) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S1501), and the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to ON. (S1501: Yes), a special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating the stop of the special figure 1 fluctuation is set (S1503). Next, when the processing of S1503 is completed, the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed with a detached symbol (S1504). Next, a jackpot scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S1505), and the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i, the probability variation flag 203g, and the time saving counter 203f are reset (S1506). Next, the jackpot middle flag 203o is set to ON (S1507), and the process proceeds to S1509.

In the process of S1509, a special figure 2 confirmation command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the second special symbol is confirmed and stopped is set (S1509). After that, a process of stopping the variable display of the second special symbol that is variablely displayed by the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1510), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1501, when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is not set to ON (S1501: No), the special figure 2 disengagement stop process is executed (S1508), and the above-mentioned S1509 and S1510 are executed. Is executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the special figure 2 out-of-order stop process (S1508), which is one process of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S213 in FIG. 45), will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the special drawing 2 disengagement stop process (S1508). In this special figure 2 loss stop process (S1508), when the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is other than a big hit (small hit, miss), the special figure 2 indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a small hit, the process for temporarily stopping the change of the special figure 1 being executed is executed.

In the special figure 2 disengagement stop process (S1508), first, it is determined whether the small hit flag 203k is set to ON (S1601). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203k is set to ON (S1601: Yes), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S1602). Next, a special figure 1 temporary stop command indicating that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is turned on is set (S1603).

When the processing of S1603 is completed, a small hit scenario based on the selected small hit type is set (S1604). After that, the small hit flag 203k is set to off (S1605), and the small hit medium flag 203p is set to on (S1606).

When the processing of S1606 is completed, a special figure 2 confirmation command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the second special symbol is set (S1607). After that, the second special symbol, which is variablely displayed by the first symbol display device 37, is stopped to change at the small hit symbol (S1608), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1601 that the small hit flag 203k is off (that is, the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of order) (S1601: No), the second special symbol is fixedly stopped. A special figure 2 confirmation command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to do so is set (S1609). After that, the second special symbol that is variablely displayed by the first symbol display device 37 is deviated and stops variable at the symbol (S1610), and this process is terminated.

As described above, since the control of the variation display between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is independently and can be executed in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are varied at the same time. It can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to execute a lottery game with more special symbols within a predetermined time, and it is possible to increase the probability that the player will be given a big hit within the predetermined time. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

In this embodiment, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the other special symbol may be configured to be variablely displayed in a state where the temporary stop or the measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted. In such a case, the temporarily stopped special symbol is stopped in a display mode or a notification mode in which the player can know that the temporary stop is in progress, so that the player loses the lottery game that was in the middle of the variable display. You can know that you haven't done so, and you can play big hit games with confidence.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, a start winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105 in FIG. 47) determines whether or not a game ball has entered (winned) in the first entry opening (first starting opening) 64, and if it has entered (winning), it is suspended. This is a process of storing each of the acquired counter values in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a up to the upper limit number (up to four in the first ball entry port 64). Further, when each counter value acquired based on the reserved ball is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, it is based on each counter value stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. , A process of predicting a hit / fail judgment result, a selected fluctuation pattern, or the like is executed in advance. Hereinafter, the start winning process (S105) will be described.

In the start winning process (S105), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the first entry port 64 (starting winning), which is the first starting opening (S1701). Here, the determination is made using the detection result of the first ball entry switch (not shown) that detects the ball entry into the first ball entry port 64. When it is determined that the ball has entered the first ball entry port 64 (there was a start prize) (S1701: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S1702). ). It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703). It is determined whether this is less than four, which is the upper limit of the number of reserved balls for the first ball entry port 64 (that is, whether the number of reserved balls is stored up to the upper limit). If it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (S1704). A hold ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the number of hold balls is set (S1705). Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 which are various counter values is read (acquired) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 is read. Each is reserved (stored) in the storage area of the corresponding number of reserved balls (S1706).

Next, based on each stored counter value, the hit / fail determination result of the first special symbol, the determined hit type, and the fluctuation pattern are predicted (S1707). Then, a winning information command including the predicted winning / failing determination result of the first special symbol, the winning type, and the fluctuation pattern is set (S1708), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins a prize in the first start opening (first entry opening) 64 and is newly reserved and stored, the winning / failing determination result is based on the reserved storage information. Is determined before the start of fluctuation and notified to the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, the display mode of the reserved sphere can be changed (for example, the color of the reserved sphere can be changed to a different color from the usual one) based on the hold-stored hit / fail determination result, or before the fluctuation starts. It is possible to display a notice symbol or the like and perform an effect of suggesting a winning / failing determination result to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and the variation display and variation time of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83, the lower first ball entry port 64b2. This is a process for controlling the opening operation, opening time, and the like of the electric accessory 64a accompanying the above.

In this normal symbol variation processing (S106 in FIG. 48), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S1801). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entry port 64b2 is performed while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. Includes what is being done. As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S1801: Yes), a new normal symbol change (lottery) cannot be started (executed), so that it is as it is. This process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S1801: No), then whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (normal symbol is changing). When it is determined (S1802) and it is determined that the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is not changing (normal symbol changing) (S1802: No), that is, even if the normal symbol is currently hit, the normal symbol changes. If it is determined that there is no such state, that is, it is possible to start (execute) a new normal symbol change (lottery), the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203e (hold of change display in the normal symbol). The number of times M) is acquired (S1803).

Next, when it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S1804), and it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0. (S1804: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S1804: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S1805). The data stored in the symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S1806).

In the process of S1806, the data stored in the normal symbol hold first to fourth areas of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, normal symbol hold 1st area → execution area, normal symbol hold 2nd area → normal symbol hold 1st area, normal symbol hold 3rd area → normal symbol hold 2nd area, normal symbol hold 4th area → Shift the data in each area, such as the 3rd area for holding normal symbols. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S1807).

Then, based on the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S1807 and the random number table 202c per ordinary symbol (second), the lottery result of whether or not the ordinary symbol is a hit is acquired (S1808). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c. As described above, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 10", it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit, and the normal symbol is hit. When the high probability state is set, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 231", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "232", it is determined to be a hit. It is determined that the design is out of the ordinary pattern.

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S1808 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S1809), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (S1809: Yes), it is a hit. (S1810), and the process proceeds to S1811. In the process of S1810, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "○" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

On the other hand, in the process of S1809, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S1809: No), the display mode at the time of out of alignment is set (S1812), and the process proceeds to S1811. In the process of S1812, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S1811.

When the processing of S1810 or S1812 is completed, in the processing of S1811, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol (S1811), and the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol. When it is determined that the condition is (S1811: Yes), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device is set to 3 seconds (S1813), and then the normal symbol short fluctuation flag 203t is set to ON. (S1814), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol (it is the low probability state of the normal symbol) (S1811: No), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device. Is set to 10 seconds (S1815), and this process is terminated.

The short fluctuation flag 203t of the normal symbol set to be turned on in the process of S1814 is a configuration for temporarily storing the gaming state at the timing when the lottery of the normal symbol is executed, and the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped. It is displayed and referred to when setting the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a. Thereby, the opening operation content of the electric accessory 64a can be changed according to which gaming state the normal symbol change (lottery) start timing and the opening operation timing of the electric accessory 64a are.

In the present embodiment, the game state at the start (execution) timing of the fluctuation (lottery) of the normal symbol is configured to be temporarily stored by using a dedicated flag, but other configurations may be used. For example, when it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol is a hit in the game state storage means that can always store the currently set game state, the game state when the lottery of the normal symbol is executed is determined. It may be configured to provide a storage area for temporary storage. Furthermore, a means for always storing the period in which the normal state is set is provided, and the period stored in the means (the period in which the normal state is set) is compared with the timing when the lottery of the normal symbol is performed. By doing so, it may be configured so that the gaming state at the timing when the lottery of ordinary symbols is performed can be determined. That is, the configuration may be such that a storage means capable of storing the currently set gaming state and a storage means capable of storing at least the gaming state set at a predetermined timing in the past are provided.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1802 that the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S1802: Yes), the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S1816). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S1810 or the process of S1812 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device 83.

If it is determined in the process of S1813 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S1816: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1816, if it is determined that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S1816: Yes), then the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S1817). In the processing of S1817, the lottery of ordinary symbols is a hit, and if the display mode is set by the processing of S1810, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighting display) in the second symbol display device. ) Is set to be done. On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is out of order and the display mode is set by the process of S1812, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device. Is set. The period during which the second symbol is stopped and displayed is longer than the period during which one part of the blinking display (alternate display of "○" and "×") indicating that the second symbol is changing is turned on. It is configured to be (confirmed display). As a result, it is possible to easily make the player know that the second symbol has been stopped and displayed.

When the stop display is set by the process of S1817, and then the second symbol display update process (S2208 of FIG. 52) of the main process (see FIG. 52) is executed, the variable display in the second symbol display device is executed. Is completed, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S1810 or the process of S1812.

After finishing the processing of S1817, next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, the lottery result of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation processing (S106) (this lottery result). However, it is determined whether or not it is a hit of a normal symbol (S1818). If it is determined that the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S1818: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S1818: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the short fluctuation flag 203t of the normal figure is set to ON (S1819).

In the process of S1819, when it is determined that the normal figure short fluctuation flag 203t is not set on (set to off), that is, the gaming state at the timing when the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol this time is started is When it is determined that the state is normal (S1819: No), the opening time of the electric accessory 64a is set to 0.2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S1821), and the process proceeds to S1820. do.

On the other hand, in the process of S1819, when it is determined that the normal figure short fluctuation flag 203t is set to ON, that is, it is determined that the gaming state at the timing when the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol this time is started is the time saving state. If so (S1816: Yes), the normal figure short fluctuation flag 203t is set to off (S1820), and then it is determined whether the current gaming state is the time saving state (time saving) (S1821).

In the process of S1821, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the time saving state (S1821: No), the gaming state at the timing when the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol this time is started is the normal state, and the current gaming state (S1821: No). Since the timing for setting the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a) is in the normal state, the opening period of the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entry port 64b2 is set to 0.2 seconds, and the number of times of opening is set. It is set to once (S1824), and the process proceeds to S1823.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the shortened working hours (S1821: Yes), the timing at which the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol this time is started, and the current gaming state (opening operation of the electric accessory 64a). (Timing to set) is both in a short time state, so the opening period of the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entry port 64b2 is set to 2 seconds, and the number of times of opening is set to 2 (electric accessory). The long opening operation of 64a is set) (S1822), and the process proceeds to S1823.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the lottery (variation) of the ordinary symbol is executed, the timing at which the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a executed based on the winning of the ordinary symbol is set, and the timing are set. Only when both of them are in the time saving state, the opening operation (long opening) which is advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a.

With this configuration, it is possible to strictly set the conditions for setting the opening operation that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, for example, a lottery of ordinary symbols is performed in a state where the normal state is set as the game state (for example). Even if the time reduction state is set before the fluctuation time (10 seconds) of the normal symbol is set after the execution of the fluctuation) is executed and the winning is won, the long opening is set as the operation of the electric accessory 64a. There is no such thing. Similarly, in the change of the normal symbol (lottery) executed in the state where the time saving state is set, the normal state is set as the game state until the change of the normal symbol is stopped. Even in this case, the long opening of the electric accessory 64a is not set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively advantageous privilege (long opening of the electric accessory 64a).

Further, since it is possible to prevent the electric accessory 64a from being long-opened in a state where the normal state is set as the game state, it is easy to execute a lottery of a special symbol (second special symbol) advantageous to the player. The period can be limited to the time saving state. In this embodiment, the game state is determined between the timing when the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol is started and the timing when the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a is set, and the game state is set at each timing. The above-mentioned configuration is used as the configuration for setting the opening operation content of the electric accessory 64a based on the above, but other configurations may be used.

For example, the opening operation that is disadvantageous to the player only when both the timing at which the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol is started and the timing at which the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a is set are in the normal state (S1824 in FIG. 48). (Opening operation set in S1822) may be set (short opening is set), and long opening (opening operation set in S1822 in FIG. 48) may be set in other states. With this configuration, a privilege (long opening) that is advantageous to the player is provided even for normal symbol fluctuations that are executed during the period before and after the time saving state, which is the gaming state that is advantageous to the player, is set. Therefore, it is possible to make the time saving state more advantageous to the player.

In this way, while the time saving state is set as the game state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is very short, "10 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case where the normal state is set, and further. Since the opening period of the lower first entry port 64b2 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 2 seconds x 2 times", it is easy for the ball to enter the lower first entry port 64b2. Become. In this embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed, the time saving state is configured to end, so that the normal state is reached during the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the small hit game is executed, the time reduction state is continuously set unless the time reduction end condition is satisfied, so that the small hit state is executed while the time reduction state is set. During the winning game, the first variable winning device 65 is opened and the electric accessory 64a is opened for a long time in the small hit game, and a plurality of winning openings (first specific winning opening 65a, lower first winning opening) are opened. It will be a specific period during which it will be easier for the ball to enter 64b2).

By using such a configuration, for example, instead of the configuration of the game board 13 shown in FIG. 2, an electric accessory 64a and a lower first ball entry port 64b2 are arranged above the first variable winning device 65. , It is preferable to configure the ball to enter two winning openings (V winning device 65a, lower first entry opening 64b2) during the small hit game, whereby the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the small hit game. Can be increased, and it becomes possible to give more advantageous benefits to the player.

Returning to FIG. 48, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S1820, the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entry port 64b2 is set (S1823), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64a is set by the process of S1823, and then the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S2206) of the main process (see FIG. 52) is executed, the opening / closing of the electric accessory is performed. The control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S1824 or the process of S1822 are completed.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67, and the game ball has passed. If there is, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through-gate passing process (S107 in FIG. 49), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S1901). Here, the passage of the game ball at the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S1901: Yes), the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203e (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S1902). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S1903).

Whether the game ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S1901: No), or even if the game ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol reserved ball count counter If the value (M) of 203e is not less than 4 (S1903: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the game ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S1901: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than 4 (S1903: Yes), it is normal. The value (M) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is added by 1 (S1904).

When the processing of S1904 is completed, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) described above is set to the empty holding area (holding first) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. It is stored in the first area (S1905) of the area (4th area on hold), and this process is terminated. In the process of S1905, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is referred to, and if the value is 1, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the lottery based on the second special symbol is set to be more advantageous to the player than the lottery based on the first special symbol. Therefore, the state in which the ball can enter the lower first entry slot 64b2 provided by winning the lottery result of the normal symbol (second symbol) is an advantageous gaming state as compared with the normal gaming state. ..

By indicating the timing at which such a gaming state is provided based on the preliminary determination result of the normal drawing, the player can play the game without overlooking the gaming state which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. In addition, when the effect is performed using the pre-judgment result of the normal figure, not only the effect based on the result of the hit / miss judgment of the normal figure but also the electric accessory 64a when the normal figure is judged to be a hit is opened. It is good to perform a production that suggests the timing. By doing so, in the normal game state, the game is performed aiming at the game area on the left side of the game board 13, and the lower first entry slot 64b2 (the entry slot to which the electric accessory 64a is attached) is the game board 13. Even if it is arranged on the right side of the game, it is possible to switch to a game aiming at the right side of the game board 13 (so-called right-handed) before the electric accessory 64a opens, which is a normal game state. However, there is an effect that the possibility that the ball enters the lower first entry port 64b2 can be increased.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S2001), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111, and the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this start-up process.

This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 51), first, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed (S2101). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S2102). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S2103).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch (see FIG. 12) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S2104), and if it is turned on (S2104: Yes), the process shifts to S2110. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch (see FIG. 12) is not turned on (S2104: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2105), and if it is not stored (S2105). S2105: No) Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the processing is also shifted to S2110 in this case as well.

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2105: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S2106), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S2107: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and even in such a case, the process is transferred to S2110. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S2110, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S2110). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S2111, S2112) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch (FIG. 12). Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (FIG. 12) is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM 203 initialization process (S2111, S2112) is executed.

Further, the initialization process (S2111, S2112) of the RAM 203 is also executed when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (S2111, S2112), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S2111), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S2112). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S2113.

On the other hand, the RAM erase switch (FIG. 12) is not turned on (S2104: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S2105: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. If there is (S2107: Yes), the power cutoff occurrence information is cleared while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S2108). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff is transmitted (S2109), and the process proceeds to S2110. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the voice lamp control device 113 (S2113). After that, the state of the probability change flag 203g and each value of the time saving counter 203f are read (S2114), and a state command is set based on the read counter value (S2115). When the processing of S2115 is completed, the interrupt is permitted (S2116), and the process proceeds to the main processing described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the counter update process and the power cutoff process are roughly classified.

In the main processing, first, in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 is input to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side. ) Is executed (S2201).

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S2202). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S2203) and executed. The jackpot control process is executed (S2204). The jackpot control process (S2204) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 53, but a process of setting the operation of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 in the jackpot game is executed.

After the big hit game process (S2204) is executed, the small hit control process (S2205) is executed. This small hit control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 55. After that, the electric accessory opening / closing process is executed (S2206). In this electric accessory opening / closing process (S2206), the opening / closing process of the electric accessory 64a is executed. After that, the display control process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S2207).

Next, the display control process of the second symbol (for example, the symbol of “◯” or “×”) by the second symbol display device is executed (S2208). Briefly, on condition that the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device is used. The variable display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is carried out. Then, the lottery of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is carried out by the value of the second random number counter C4, and when the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is in the winning state, the electric accessory 64a is released for a predetermined time.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2209), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S2209: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S2210). If a predetermined time (4 ms) has already passed (S2210: Yes), the process is shifted to S2201 and each process after S2201 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if a predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S2210: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S2211).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S2211). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479, 232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S2202 (S2212).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S2201 to S2208 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and is displayed variable. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the process of S2209, if the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2209: Yes), the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing shown in FIG. 50 has been executed, the processing at the time of power cutoff after S2213 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S2213), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S2214). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S2215), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S2216), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S2209 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S2201 to S2208, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S2211 and S2212 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power cutoff occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cutoff state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S2201. That is, the process can be started from the process of S2201 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S2201). By setting a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S2201. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S2204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S2204). This jackpot control process (S2204) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 52), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and the first specific prize is won. This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a.

In the jackpot control process (S2204), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot scenario is set (S2301). If it is determined that the jackpot scenario has not been set (S2301: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2301 that the jackpot scenario is set (S2301: Yes), the jackpot scenario is updated (S2302), and it is determined whether it is the timing to start the opening of the jackpot scenario (S2303). .. More specifically, in the processing of S2302, 1 is added to the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown), and in the processing of S2303, the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown) starts the opening of the jackpot scenario. Determine if the value corresponds to.

In the process of S2303, if it is determined that it is the timing of the opening start (big hit start) of the jackpot scenario (S2303: Yes), the jackpot opening command is set (S2304), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the opening start timing of the jackpot scenario (S2303: No), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2305).

In the process of S2305, if it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2305: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process for setting the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 650a during the jackpot is executed (S2305: Yes). S2306), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2305 that it is not the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2305: No), then it is determined whether the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied (S2305: No). S2307). Here, in the present embodiment, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are won in total while the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is open, or the first. When the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a has elapsed for a predetermined time (30 seconds), it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied (S2307: Yes), the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a currently open in the process of S2308 is set to be closed. This process ends. The above-mentioned discrimination process from S2305 to S2307 is repeatedly executed for the number of rounds of the jackpot set in the jackpot scenario.

On the other hand, in the process of S2307, when it is determined that the round end condition of the currently executed round is not satisfied (S2307: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S2309), and the ending effect is produced. If it is the start timing of (S2309: Yes), the ending command for big hit is set (S2310), and this process is terminated. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot.

On the other hand, in the process of S2309, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S2309: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (S2311). Here, the end timing of the jackpot indicates a case where the execution period of the ending effect has elapsed. If it is determined in the process of S2311 that it is the end timing of the jackpot (S2311: Yes), the jackpot end process for setting the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is executed (S2312), and this process is terminated. The details of this jackpot end processing (S2312) will be described later with reference to FIG. 54. On the other hand, if it is not the end timing of the jackpot (S2311: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the jackpot end process (S2312), which is one of the jackpot control processes (S2204 in FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. As described above, this jackpot end process (S2312) is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end processing (S2312).

In the jackpot end process (S2312), first, the game state at the time of winning is specified based on the state storage area 203j at the time of winning (S2401). Next, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a probability variation jackpot (a jackpot type in which the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON after the jackpot game ends) (S2402). Here, in the process of S2402, the determination is performed based on the jackpot type set this time. In the process of S2402, if it is determined that the current jackpot is a probability variation jackpot (S2402: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S2403), and the process proceeds to S2404. On the other hand, in the process of S2402, if it is determined that the current jackpot is not a probabilistic jackpot (S2402: No), the process of S2403 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S2404. As a result, a low probability state of the special symbol is set as the game state after the big hit.

Next, the value corresponding to the game state at the time of winning read by the process of S2401 and the jackpot type is set in the time saving counter 203f (S2404). Specifically, when "big hit A" is set as the big hit type, "10000" is set to the value of the time reduction counter 203f in order to continue the high probability state of the normal symbol until the next big hit, and "big hit B". Is set, "100" is set in the value of the time reduction counter 203f in order to continue the high probability state of the normal symbol until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 100 times.

After finishing the processing of S2404, the jackpot middle flag 203o is set to off, and the winning state storage area 203j is cleared (S2405). After that, a state command corresponding to the set game state is set (S2406), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, the jackpot type of the jackpot won this time and the gaming state at the time of winning are determined, and two conditional elements for setting the gaming state after the jackpot game ends. It is configured to set the contents of (probability change flag 203g, time reduction counter 203f). Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay close attention to both the jackpot type of the winning jackpot and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot.

Next, with reference to FIG. 55, a small hit control process (S2205), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the contents of this small hit control process (S2205).

In the small hit control process (S2205), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit scenario is set (S2501). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the process of S1604 of the special figure 2 out-of-order stop process (see FIG. 46) is executed and the small hit scenario is set. If the small hit scenario is not set in the process of S2501 (S2501: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if the small hit scenario is set in the process of S2501 (S2501: Yes), the small hit scenario is updated (S2502), and it is determined whether it is the timing to start the opening of the small hit scenario (S2503). More specifically, in the processing of S2502, 1 is added to the counter value of the small hit scenario counter (not shown), and in the processing of S2503, the counter value of the small hit scenario counter (not shown) is the small hit scenario. Determine if the value corresponds to the opening start of.

In the process of S2503, if it is determined that it is the timing to start the opening of the small hit scenario (S2503: Yes), the opening command for the small hit is set (S2504), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing of the opening start of the small hit scenario (S2503: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing of the round start of the small hit scenario (S2505).

If it is determined in the process of S2505 that it is the timing to start the round of the small hit scenario (S2505: Yes), the small hit operation setting process is executed (S2506), and this process ends. The details of the small hit operation setting process (S2506) will be described later with reference to FIG. 56. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing of the round start of the small hit scenario (S2505: No), then it is determined whether the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied (S2507). Here, in the present embodiment, when a predetermined number (for example, 5) of balls are won in total while the specific winning opening 65a is open, or when the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a elapses for a predetermined time. If so, it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied.

If it is determined in the process of S2507 that the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied (S2507: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed in the process of S2508, and this process is performed. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round end condition of the specific winning opening 65a is not satisfied (S2507: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to start the ending effect (S2509).

If it is determined in the process of S2509 that it is the timing to start the ending effect (S2509: Yes), the ending command for small hits is set (S2510), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot.

On the other hand, in the process of S2509, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S2509: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the small hit (S2511). Here, the end timing of the small hit indicates the case where the execution period of the ending effect has elapsed.

If it is determined in the process of S2511 that it is the end timing of the small hit (S2511: Yes), the small hit medium flag 203p is set to off (S2512), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is not the end timing of the small hit (S2511: No), the second winning process is executed (S2513), and this process is terminated. The details of this second winning process (S2513) will be described later with reference to FIG. 57.

Next, with reference to FIG. 56, a small hit operation setting process (S2506), which is one process in the small hit control process (S2506 in FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the contents of this small hit operation setting process (S2506).

In the small hit operation setting process (S2506), first, the opening scenario in which the opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the small hit to be started is set is read (S2601). The opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a is set by the data read in the process of S2601 (S2602), and this process is terminated.

In this way, since each operation of the variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game ends in the middle. Problems can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the details of the second winning process (S2513), which is one of the small hit control processes (S2506 in FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the second winning process (S2513). This second winning process (S2513) is executed in the small hit control process (see FIG. 55), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to the winning of the specific winning opening 65a.

In this second prize processing (S2513), first, it is determined whether or not the present is the round valid period (S2701). Here, the round valid period is a period in which the round game is set, that is, a period from the setting of the specific winning opening 65a to the end of the interval period (5 seconds). In the process of S2701, if the round is not valid (S2701: No), the winning counter 203u is reset (S2702), and this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S2701, if it is determined that the current round is valid (S2701: Yes), then it is determined whether or not a prize has been detected in the specific winning opening 65a (S2703), and the specific winning opening 65a is reached. If no winning is detected (S2703: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if the winning of the specific winning opening 65a is detected in the process of S2703 (S2703: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning counter 203u to update (S2704). Then, it is determined whether the value of the winning counter 203u is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (5 in the present embodiment) (S2705), and if the value of the winning counter 203u is equal to or lower than the upper limit value (5 in the present embodiment) ( S2705: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the value of the winning counter 203u is the upper limit value (5 in this embodiment) or more (S2705: Yes), the closing of the specific winning opening 65a (opening / closing plate 65f1 attached to the special winning opening 65f1) is set (S2706). Next, the small hit scenario is updated to the end of the round (S2707), and this process ends.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 58 to 72, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power cutoff processing flag is turned on, the power cutoff process of S4117 (see FIG. 59) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "momentary power failure") in this start-up process. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 59, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff occurrence information from the main control device 110 (see S4114 in FIG. 59), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S4117. The power cutoff processing flag is turned on before the power cutoff process is executed, and the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off after the power cutoff process is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power cutoff process of S4117 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power cutoff process in progress flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S4002: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S4117 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power cutoff process of S4116 was completed after the momentary power failure occurred, or it was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the data is transferred to S4008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S4002: Yes), the start-up processing this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and the voice lamp control device 113 is being executed during the power-off processing of S4117. MPU221 was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power cutoff process is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S4004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, it is confirmed whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S4006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data corruption. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4117 is executed (see S4116 in FIG. 59). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S4117 is executed, the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S4117 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), after clearing the work area of the RAM in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S4009) and setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010), the state The status setting area is updated based on the command (S4011). Next, interrupt permission is set (S4012), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the processing of S4008 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, so that the processing of S4004 to S4006 is performed via the processing of S4008. This is the case when the process is reached or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset (without receiving the power cutoff command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S4010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010).

It should be noted that the reason for skipping the clearing process of S4009 is that when the processing of S4008 is reached from S4004 via the processing of S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S4004. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S4101 was executed (S4101), 1 millisecond. If the above time has not passed (S4101: No), the process of S4102 to S4110 is not performed and the process proceeds to the process of S4111. In the process of S4101, it is the process related to the display (effect) that S4102-S4110 determines whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed, whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S4111 and the variation display setting process of S4112 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S4111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception omission of the command transmitted from the main controller 110, and by executing the processing of S4111 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process. Based on this, the settings related to the variable display effect can be made without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S4103 to S4113 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S4101: Yes). S4102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S4108 described later (S4103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4104). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not at the time of turning on the power, the process shifts to the process of S4105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S4105, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is a display control device as a command. It is transmitted to 114.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process to set to perform the production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

After the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S4108), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S4109, the liquid crystal display effect execution management process is executed (S4110). After that, the process proceeds to S4111. In the liquid crystal display execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S4108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal display effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

After the processing of S4110, various counter update processings are executed (S4111), and the process proceeds to the processing of S4112. Details of the various counter update processes will be described later with reference to FIG. 72.

After that, the command determination process (S4112) that performs the process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S4113. The details of this command determination process (S4112) will be described later with reference to FIG. 60.

In the process of S4113, in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is displayed by the display control device 114. Executes the variable display setting process, which is the process set to send to. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 69.

When the processing of S4113 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4114). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S4113 (S4114: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S4116), and the power-off process is executed (S4117). After the power cutoff process is executed, the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off (S4118), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. It also erases the memory of information on the occurrence of power failure.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4114 (S4114: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4115), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4115: No), the process returns to the process of S4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4115: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S4112). This command determination process (S4112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. .. Hereinafter, the details of the command determination process (S4112) will be described.

In the command determination process (S4112), first, from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, the first command received from the main control device 110 among the unprocessed commands is read and analyzed, and a special figure is drawn from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4201). If it is determined that either the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4201: Yes), the stop type command reception process is executed (S4202), and this process is terminated. The details of this stop type command reception process (S4202) will be described later with reference to FIG. 61.

On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the special figure 1 stop type command nor the special figure 2 stop type command has been received in the processing of S4201 (S4201: No), whether or not the state command has been received from the main control device 110. (S4203). If it is determined that the status command has been received (S4203: Yes), the status command process is executed (S4204), and this process is terminated. The details of this state command processing (S4204) will be described later with reference to FIG. 62, but the gaming state (normal state, probable change state, latent probability) of the pachinko machine 10 based on the state command output from the main control device 110. The process of setting the state) to the state setting area 223j is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S4203, when it is determined that the state command has not been received (S4203: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation pattern command has been received (S4205). Here, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is a command for notifying the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol.

In the process of S4205, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4205: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4206) and received. Special Figure 1 The variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command (S4207), and this process is terminated. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that can be identified as the variation pattern type of the first special symbol, and is stored in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 69) described later. , When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the first special symbol and the display mode of the variation display effect of the first special symbol (setting the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol). If you do).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has not been received (S4205: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation pattern command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4208). The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is a command for notifying the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol.

When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has been received in the processing of S4208 (S4208: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4209) and the received special figure 2 is received. FIG. 2 The variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command (S4210), and this process is terminated. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that can be identified as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and is stored in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 69) described later. , When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the second special symbol and the display mode of the variation display effect of the second special symbol (setting the variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol). If you do).

In the process of S4208, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S4208: No), it is determined whether or not the reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4211). When it is determined that the hold ball number command has been received (S4211: Yes), the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 included in the received hold ball number command (that is, the first). The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is updated according to the extracted counter value (the number of reserved balls in the variable display of the special symbol) ( S4212), this process is terminated. Since the present embodiment does not have a configuration for holding and storing the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the reserved ball number counter 223c of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is set in the processing of S4212. Only the update process is executed.

Here, since the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64, every time there is a starting winning, the process of S4212 , The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 can be matched with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. Therefore, even if the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the start is started. If the hold ball number command is notified based on the winning, the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected, and the first special symbol hold ball number of the main control device 110 is corrected. It can be adjusted to the value of the counter 203d.

Further, in the process of S4211 when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received (S4211: No), it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4213). When it is determined that the winning information command has been received in the processing of S4213 (S4213: Yes), the information of the received winning information command (whether or not the special symbol lottery is successful, the winning type, and the variation pattern) is the corresponding winning information. It is set in the storage area 223b (S4214), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4213, when it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S4211: No), it is determined whether or not the winning related command has been received from the main control device (S4216). If it is determined that the hit-related command has been received in the process of S4215 (S4216: Yes), the hit-related process is executed (S4216), and this process is terminated. The details of the hit-related process (S4216) will be described later with reference to FIG. 63, but as a result of the lottery of the special symbol, the production corresponding to the big hit game or the small hit game executed when the big hit or the small hit is won. This is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute the display.

On the other hand, in the process of S4215, when it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S4215: No), it is determined whether or not the remaining time reduction command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4217). If it is determined in the process of S4217 that the command for the number of remaining time reductions has been received (S4217: Yes), the remaining number of times update process (S4218) is executed. The details of this remaining number update process (S4218) will be described with reference to FIG. 66, but for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 based on the remaining time reduction command output from the main control device 110. The process of setting the contents of the effect display is executed.

In the process of S4217, when it is determined that the command for the number of remaining time reductions has not been received (S4217: No), it is determined whether or not the temporary stop related command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4219). If it is determined in the process of S4219 that a temporary stop-related command has been received (S4219: Yes), the temporary stop-related process is executed (S4220), and this process ends. The details of the temporary stop-related processing (S4220) will be described later with reference to FIG. 67, but the processing for determining the remaining time of the special figure fluctuation time when the special figure 1 temporary stop command or the special figure 2 temporary stop command is received. And, when the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command or the special figure 2 fluctuation restart command is received, the process of setting the effect (additional effect) to be executed by the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S4219, if it is determined that the temporary stop related command has not been received (S4219: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S4221), and this process is terminated. In the processing of S4221, if the other command is a command used in the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is performed. Is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114.

As described above, in the command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 60) executed by the voice lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment, the process of determining whether a state command has been received (see S4203 in FIG. 60) is performed. , It is configured before the process of determining whether the variation pattern command of each special symbol has been received (see S4205 and S4208 in FIG. 60).

With this configuration, when the fluctuation pattern command and the status command are output from the main controller 110 at the same time, that is, in the first special symbol variation start processing of the main controller 110 (see S208 in FIG. 33). Then, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 33) is executed, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is set, and in the game state update process (see S308 in FIG. 33) executed thereafter, the game is played. Even when a state command indicating that the state has changed is set, the game state currently set on the voice lamp control device 113 side can be determined before the special figure 1 variation pattern command.

Therefore, when the jackpot in Special Figure 1 is won with the probability variation state set and the latency state is set during the jackpot fluctuation, the voice lamp control device 113 side is said to have set the latency state. A variation effect (see FIG. 7A) corresponding to a variation pattern command that causes a jackpot variation in the determined state can be easily set.

In addition, unlike the configuration of the present embodiment, when the processing according to the fluctuation pattern command is executed before the discrimination processing of the state command, the probability change is different from the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the jackpot fluctuation described above. Only the information indicating that the jackpot has been won by the first special symbol lottery in the state is received first, and the variable display according to the received content is set. Therefore, it becomes difficult to execute the fluctuation display indicating that the latent probability state is set at the same time as the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started. Since the fluctuation display indicating that the latent state is set is delayed in this way, the timing of notifying the player to perform the right-handed game is delayed, which makes the player uncomfortable. The problem of giving is raised.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, on the main control device 110 side, the process of changing the game state after the jackpot hit / fail determination (see S306 in FIG. 33) and the variation pattern setting (S307 in FIG. 33). (Game state update process (S308 in FIG. 33)) is executed, whereas the voice lamp control device 113 first executes a process for determining the current game state (S4204 in FIG. 60), and then executes the process. It is configured to set the fluctuation display corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Therefore, even though the latent state is set, it is possible to reliably prevent the variable display corresponding to the previous gaming state from being set and executed.

Further, it is necessary to specify the output order of various commands on the main control device 110 side by configuring the voice lamp control device 113 side to specify the reception order of various commands output from the main control device 110. Can be reduced. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

Next, the stop type command reception process (S4202) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing this stop type command reception process (S4202). This stop type command reception process (S4202) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. Hereinafter, the details of the stop type command reception process (S4202) will be described.

In the stop type command reception process (S4202), first, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received in response to the received command, the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f is set to ON, and the special figure 2 is set. When the stop type command is received, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON (S4301). Next, the stop type (big hit A to big hit G, small hit A to small hit C, missed, missed reach, etc.) is extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command (S4302). End the process.

The stop type extracted in S4302 is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command is the second special symbol. It is identifiable that it is a stop type. As a result, even if the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) start to change at the same time, it is possible to manage the stop types respectively, and to execute an appropriate change display. Can be done.

Next, the state command process (S4204) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this state command processing (S4204). This state command process (S4204) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. Hereinafter, the details of the state command processing (S4204) will be described.

In this state command process (S4204), when the process of setting the current game state to the state setting area 223j is executed based on the state command output from the main control unit 110, and the game state shifts to the latent state. In addition, the process for setting the effect for notifying the player that the latent state is set (chance zone effect (see FIG. 6B)) and the game state have shifted to the normal state. In this case, processing for clearing various flags and counters used to display the card forgotten warning screen (see FIG. 10A) is executed.

In the state command processing (S4204), first, the gaming state before receiving the state command is determined from the value of the state setting area 223j provided in the RAM 223 (S4401). That is, it is determined in which game state the state command was received. Next, it is determined whether the gaming state before receiving the state command is the latent state (S4402). When it is determined that the gaming state before receiving the state command is not the latent state (S4402: No), it is determined whether the received command is a state command indicating the transition to the latent state (S4403). In the process of S4403, when the received command is a state command indicating the transition to the latent state (S4403: Yes), the latent notification effect for notifying the entry of the latent state is set (S4404). Then, the value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the received state command is stored in the state setting area 223j (S4405), and the process proceeds to S4406.

On the other hand, in the processing of 4402, when it is determined that the gaming state before receiving the state command is the latent state (S4402: Yes), or in the processing of S4403, the received command shifts to the latent state. If it is not the status command shown (S4403: No), the process proceeds to S4406.

Next, it is determined whether the received command is a state command indicating the transition to the normal state (S4406). If it is determined that the received command is not a state command indicating the transition to the normal state (S4406: No), the processing of S4407 to S4410 is skipped, the processing of S4411 described later is executed, and this processing is terminated. .. On the other hand, when it is determined that the received command is a state command indicating the transition to the normal state (S4406: Yes), it is determined whether the card notification completed flag 223q is set to ON (S4407). When it is determined that the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4407: Yes), the value of the prize ball counter 223u is cleared to 0 (S4408), the card notification flag 223q, and the card notification possible flag. 223s, the rush displayed flag 223t is set to off (S4409). Next, the contents of the remaining variable time information storage area 223o and the remaining time storage area 223p are cleared (S4410), and the values corresponding to the game states notified by the other state commands are stored in the state setting area 223j (S4411). This process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S4407, if it is determined that the card notification flag 223q is set to off (S4407: No), the processing of S4408 and S4409 is skipped, the processing of S4410 and S4411 is executed, and the present invention is performed. End the process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 63, a hit-related process (S4216), which is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit-related process (S4216). In this hit-related process, a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to a big hit game or a small hit game, which is executed when a big hit or a small hit is won as a result of a special symbol lottery. This is to be performed, and processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 when a big hit or a small hit is won is executed.

In addition, when a prize ball number command for indicating the number of prize balls acquired during a winning game (big hit game, small hit game) is received, the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number command is accumulated and accumulated. Based on the result, a process for displaying the card forgotten warning screen (see FIG. 10A) is executed.

In the hit-related process (S4216), first, it is determined whether the command received by the command determination process (see FIG. 60) has received the jackpot-related command (S4501). If it is determined that the received command is a jackpot-related command (S4501: Yes), the jackpot-related process is executed (S4502), and this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 64, the jackpot-related process (S4502), which is one of the hit-related processes (S4216 in FIG. 63) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot related process (S4502). In the jackpot-related processing, processing is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won, and when the jackpot is won, the main control device is used. Processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from 110 is executed.

In the jackpot-related process (S4502), first, it is determined whether or not the hit-related command received by the hit-related process (S4216) has received the jackpot start command (S4601). When the jackpot start command is received (S4601: Yes), the jackpot start command for display is set (S4602), and this process is terminated. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S4601, when it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S4601: No), it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S4603). When the round number command is received (S4603: Yes), the display round number command is set based on the round number (S4604), and this process is terminated. In the present embodiment, since the information indicating the number of rounds is transmitted from the main control unit 110 as the number of rounds command, the number of rounds command for display is set based on the received number of rounds command. In order to reduce the amount of command data transmitted from the control unit 110, the voice lamp control unit is configured to transmit information indicating that a new round has started from the main control unit 110 as a round update command. When a round update command is received in the RAM 223 of 113, a round number accumulation counter for accumulating the number of received round update commands is provided, and the current round is performed on the voice lamp control device 113 side based on the value of the round number accumulation counter. It may be configured to calculate the number and set the display round number command.

On the other hand, in the process of S4603, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S4603: No), it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S4605). If it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S4605: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ending command has been received (S4605: Yes), the display ending command is set (S4606), and it is determined whether the card notified flag 223q is set to ON (S4607). When it is determined that the card notification completed flag 223q is set to ON (S4607: Yes), a display ending command that does not include the card notification is set (S4608). That is, a process for preventing the display mode of FIG. 10A from being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4607, when it is determined that the card notified flag 223q is not set to on (that is, it is off) (S4607: No), the jackpot type this time is jackpot A or jackpot B. (S4609). When it is determined that the jackpot type this time is jackpot A or jackpot B (S4609: Yes), a display ending command including card notification is set (S4610), and the card notification completed flag 223q is set to ON. (S4611). That is, a process for displaying the display mode of FIG. 10A on the third symbol display device 81 is executed, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot type this time is not jackpot A or jackpot B (S4609: No), it is determined whether the card notification enable flag 223s is set to ON (S4612). When it is determined that the card notification possible flag 223s is set to on (S4612: Yes), the card notification possible flag 223s is set to off (S4613), the above-mentioned processing of S461 to S4611 is executed, and the present invention is performed. End the process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4612 that the card notification enable flag 223s is not set to ON (S4612: No), the process of S4608 described above is executed, and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the jackpot-related processing (S4502 in FIG. 64), as various display modes to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game, the game information (opening, opening, In addition to the process of setting the display contents of the ending and the number of rounds), the process of displaying or not displaying the card forgotten warning screen (see FIG. 10A) is configured to be executed.

This card forgetting warning screen is a card (borrowing a ball) to the player when the player wins a predetermined amount (for example, 250 shots) of prize balls in a winning game (big hit game, small hit game). This is a notification mode for calling attention not to forget the valuable medium used at the time. In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned card is used when the number of prize balls acquired in the period from the normal state to the jackpot and the transition to the normal state again (continuation advantageous period) satisfies the condition that the predetermined amount can be reached. It is configured to display the forgetfulness alert screen.

Specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. 64, the jackpot (big hit A,) that can easily obtain a prize ball exceeding a predetermined amount (for example, 250 shots) in the jackpot (first hit) won in the normal state. If the jackpot B) is won, the card notification that displays the card forgotten warning screen is executed at the end of the jackpot game, and if the other jackpots (big hit C, jackpot D) are won, the card notification is executed. It is configured not to.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a player who has not won a predetermined amount of prize balls from displaying a card forgotten warning screen, and can continue to borrow balls while playing a game. It is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable.

Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the big hit game, a game state (latent state) in which the small hit game can be easily executed can be set. Therefore, the player can repeat the small hit game by repeating the small hit game. A predetermined amount (for example, 250 shots) of prize balls may be obtained. Therefore, the number of prize balls acquired by the player during the advantageous continuation period (the number of prize balls paid out during the advantageous period) is accumulated, and if the cumulative result exceeds a predetermined amount (250 shots), the execution is performed at that time. The card forgetting warning screen is displayed on the ending screen of the big hit game or the small hit game. As a result, it is possible to display the card forgotten warning screen for the player at an appropriate timing.

Further, in the present embodiment, the card forgetting warning screen is notified only once during one advantageous continuation period. As a result, the card forgetting warning screen is frequently displayed, and it is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable. The method of displaying the card forgotten warning screen is not limited to the content of the present embodiment. For example, a measuring means for measuring the advantageous continuation period is provided, and the elapsed period since the previous card forgetting warning screen is displayed. If the number exceeds a predetermined period (for example, 10 minutes), the card forgotten warning screen may be displayed again. In this case, since the card forgotten warning screen is displayed once (because the display conditions for displaying the card forgetting warning screen are already satisfied), during the special symbol change period (for example, during the advantageous continuation period). When a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds or more is selected), it is preferable to display the card forgetting warning screen.

With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the current game situation by using the fixed concept of the player that the card forgetting warning screen is displayed after the big hit game is completed. Further, as a method of achieving the same effect, the big hit game may display the card forgetting warning screen by using the opening period of the small hit game.

Returning to FIG. 63, the description will be continued. In the process of S4501, when it is determined that the received command is not a jackpot-related command (S4501), it is determined whether the received command has received the small hit-related command (S4503). If it is determined that the received command is a small hit related command (S4503: Yes), the small hit related process (S4504) is executed, and this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 65, a small hit-related process (S4504), which is one process in the hit-related process (S4216 in FIG. 63) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit related process (S4504). In the small hit-related processing, processing is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the small hit game executed when the small hit is won, and when the small hit is won. , Processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 is executed.

In the small hit-related process (S4504), first, it is determined whether or not the hit-related command received by the hit-related process (S4216) has received the small hit start command (S4701). When the small hit start command is received (S4701: Yes), the small hit start command for display is set (S4702), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4701 when it is determined that the received command is not the small hit start command (S4701: No), it is determined whether the ending command has been received (S4703). If it is determined that the received command is not the ending command (S4703: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the received command is the ending command (S4703: Yes), the display ending command is set (S4704), and it is determined whether the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4705). .. If it is determined that the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4705: Yes), a display ending command that does not include card notification is set (S4706), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4705, when it is determined that the card notification completed flag 223q is not set to ON (S4705: Yes), it is determined whether the card notification enable flag 223s is set to ON (S4707). When it is determined that the card notification possible flag 223s is set to on (S4707: Yes), the card notification possible flag 223s is set to off (S4708), and the display ending command including the card notification is set (S4707: Yes). S4709), the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4710), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4707, the card notification enable flag 223s is not set to ON (S4707: No), the process of S4706 described above is executed, and the present process is terminated.

As described above, in this embodiment, even in a small hit game that does not meet the display conditions for displaying the card forgetting warning screen in one game, after winning the big hit in the normal state, If the cumulative value of the number of prize balls acquired during the game period (advantageous continuation period) until the normal state is set again satisfies the display condition (for example, the number of acquired prize balls reaches 250), a small hit It is configured to display the card forgotten warning screen even after the game is over. As a result, it is possible to display the card forgotten warning screen for the player at an appropriate timing.

Returning to FIG. 63, the description will be continued. In the process of S4503, when it is determined that the received command is not a small hit related command (S4503: No), it is determined whether or not the prize ball command has been received (S4505). If it is determined that the received command is not a prize ball command (S4505: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is a prize ball command (S4505: Yes), the value corresponding to the received command is added to the value of the prize ball counter 223u (S4506), and then the card. It is determined whether the notified flag 223q is set to ON (S4507). When it is determined that the card notification flag 223q is not set to ON (S4507: No), it is determined whether the value of the prize ball number counter 223u added in the processing of S4506 is 250 or more (S4508). When it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter 223u after addition is 250 or more (S4508), the card notification possible flag is set to ON (S4509), and the display prize ball number command is set (S4510). , End this process. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S4507 that the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4507: Yes), or in the processing of S4508, the prize ball number counter 223u after addition is less than 250. If it is determined (S4508: No), the process of S4509 described above is skipped, the process of S4510 is executed, and the present process is terminated.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is determined that the normal state is set by the state command processing (see S4204 in FIG. 62), and the value of the prize ball counter 223u is cleared. The number of prize balls corresponding to the prize ball number command received during the period up to (advantageous continuation period) is configured to be accumulated by the prize ball number counter 223u. Then, at the end of the winning game (big hit game, small hit game), the card forgetting warning screen is displayed according to the value of the prize ball counter 223u (at the ending screen display timing).

As a result, for example, when the jackpot (first hit) that triggers the setting of the advantageous continuation period is jackpot C (a jackpot in which it is difficult to obtain a predetermined amount (250 shots) of prize balls in one jackpot game). Can display a card forgotten warning screen when a small hit game is won during the advantageous continuation period, or when a big hit C is won again.

Next, the remaining number of times update process (S4218) will be described with reference to FIG. 66. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the contents of the remaining number update process (S4218). This remaining number update process (S4218) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the remaining time reduction command is executed from the main control device 110. Is received, a process of updating the contents set in the remaining time reduction frequency area 223k, the remaining variable time information storage area 223o, and the remaining time storage area 223p is executed.

In the remaining number update process (S4218), first, it is determined whether or not the remaining time reduction command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4801). If it is determined that the command for the number of remaining hours has not been received (S4801: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S4801, when it is determined that the remaining time reduction command has been received (S4801: Yes), the display time reduction command corresponding to the received command is set (S4802), and this processing is terminated.

Next, the contents of the temporary stop-related processing (S4220) will be described with reference to FIG. 67. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the contents of the temporary stop-related process (S4220). In this temporary stop-related process (S4220), a process of determining the remaining time of the special figure fluctuation time when the special figure 1 temporary stop command is received, and a third symbol display device when the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command is received. The process of setting the effect (additional effect) to be executed in 81 is executed.

When the temporary stop-related process (S4220) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 temporary stop command has been received (S4901), and if it is determined that the command has not been received (S4901: No), the variable restart process is performed. (S4902) is executed. The details of the fluctuation resumption processing (S4902) will be described later with reference to FIG. 68. On the other hand, in the process of S4901 when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop command has been received (S4901: Yes), the remaining fluctuation time of the currently set fluctuation pattern is calculated (S4903). Then, it is determined whether the residual variation time calculated by the process of S4903 is less than 2 seconds (S4904), and if it is determined to be less than 2 seconds (S4904: Yes), the residual variation is in the residual variation time information storage area 223o. A period A indicating that the time is short is set (S4905), and the process proceeds to S4902.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4904, when it is determined that the residual fluctuation time is not less than 2 seconds (2 seconds or more) (S4904: No), then the residual fluctuation period is 2 seconds or more and more than 15 seconds. If it is determined whether the time is short (S4906), and if it is 2 seconds or more and less than 15 seconds (S4906: Yes), the period B indicating that the residual fluctuation time information storage area 223o is the normal residual fluctuation time. Is set (S4907), and the process proceeds to S4902.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S4906 that the remaining variation time is not less than 15 seconds (exceeding 15 seconds) (S4906: No), it indicates that the residual variation time is long in the residual variation time information storage area 223o. The period C is set (S4908), and the process proceeds to S4902. In this way, the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation period) executed when the special map fluctuation resumes is calculated at the timing when the special map fluctuation is interrupted (the subtraction of the special map fluctuation time is interrupted), and the period corresponds to that period. By setting the information to be performed, it is possible to execute an effect (additional effect) suitable for the remaining variation time without delay at the timing of restarting the special figure variation.

In the present embodiment, if the period information (period A to period C) set in the residual fluctuation time information storage area 223o corresponding to the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation period) executed when the special figure fluctuation resumes is different. However, the selection of each period information is not limited to this, and for example, the shorter the remaining time, the easier it is to select the period A, and the longer the remaining time, the easier it is to select the period C. The ratio may be configured to be different according to the remaining time, or the remaining period may be divided at predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) intervals, and the periods A to C may be distributed in order for each division. It may be configured.

With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the relationship between the additional effect executed based on the period information set in the residual variation time information storage area 223o and the residual variation time. It can provide the enjoyment of predicting the fluctuation time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the contents of the fluctuation resumption processing (S4902) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fluctuation restart process (S4902). This variation resumption process (S4902) executes a process of setting an additional effect to be executed when the special figure 1 variation resumption command is received.

When the variation restart process (S4902) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation restart command has been received (S5001), and if it is determined that the command has not been received (S5001: No), this process is terminated. .. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5001 that the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command has been received (S5001: Yes), then the remaining fluctuation time information stored in the residual fluctuation time information storage area 223o is read out (S5002). ), The additional effect type is determined from the additional effect selection table 222c based on the read-out residual fluctuation time information and the additional effect counter 223i (S5003). Next, a display additional effect command corresponding to the read additional effect type is set (S5004), the information set in the residual variation time information storage area o is cleared (S5005), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the special figure change is interrupted, the special figure change is restarted after the normal effect (the effect display executed when the special figure change is started) is completed. A shaking effect that swings and displays the third symbol is executed during the period until the pattern is changed, and when the special figure change is restarted, an additional effect corresponding to the special figure change period (remaining change period) after the restart is executed. However, other configurations may be used.

For example, an effect period determining means for determining a normal effect period in which a normal effect is executed is provided, and when it is determined by the effect period determination means that the normal effect period has ended, an additional effect is executed. May be good. With such a configuration, since the normal effect and the additional effect can be continuously executed, it is possible to provide an effect display more suitable for the player. Further, in this case, an error may occur between the end timing of the additional effect period in which the additional effect is executed and the special figure fluctuation period after the restart, but the additional effect is continuously executed during the error period. Alternatively, a shaking effect for displaying the third symbol in a swinging manner may be executed. Further, an error period discriminating means for discriminating the length of the error period is provided, and when the error period discriminating means determines that the error period is a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) or more, the additional effect is executed again. It may be configured as follows.

Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the variation display setting process (S4113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S4113). This variation display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 69) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. As described above, the variation display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 69) is performed on the first or special figure 2 variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Based on this, a variable pattern command for display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set, and a process of transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, based on the extracted stop types (big hit A to big hit G), a process of setting a display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

In the variation display setting process (S4112), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5101). When it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is off (S5101: No), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110. Therefore, the process of S5105 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S5101: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is set to off (S5102). Next, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the latent state (S5103). When it is determined that the current gaming state is the latent state (S5103: Yes), the variation display setting process for special figure 1 (S5104) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 70, the details of the variation display setting process (S5104) for the special figure 1, which is one process in the variation display setting process (S4113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. do. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation display setting process (S5104) for the special figure 1. In this special figure 1 variation display setting (S5104), when the current gaming state is the latent state, the first special symbol is displayed based on the special figure 1 variation pattern command received from the main control device 110. A process of setting a latent fluctuation pattern command and transmitting it to the display control device 114 is executed.

In the variation display setting process for special figure 1 (S5104), first, the variation time corresponding to the extracted variation pattern is read (S5201), and the value corresponding to the variation time read out in the process of S5201 is sub-special figure 1. The fluctuation time counter is set to 223 m (S5202). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is larger than 0 (S5203). When it is determined that the value of the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is 0 (S5203: No), the display rush inrush command is set (S5204), and the rush displayed flag 223t is set to ON (S5205). ). On the other hand, in the process of S5203, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation counter in FIG. 2 is larger than 0 (S5203: Yes), the process of S5204 and S5205 described above is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S5206. Next, based on the extracted variation pattern, a latent variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol is set (S5206), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 69, the description will be continued. When it was determined in the process of S5103 that the current gaming state is not the latent state (S5103: No), it was extracted from the special figure 1 variation pattern command in the process of S4205 of the command determination process (see FIG. 60). The variation pattern in the variation display effect of the first special symbol is acquired from the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223, and the variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol is generated (S5105). The display variation pattern command of the first special symbol is configured to be able to identify whether it is a display variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol or a variation pattern command of the second special symbol. Specifically, if the upper 2 bits of the upper byte of the display variation pattern command having a 2-byte configuration is "10", it indicates that it corresponds to the first special symbol, and if it is "01", it indicates that it corresponds to the second special symbol. It is configured to indicate that it corresponds to.

The variable pattern command for display of the first special symbol set in the process of S5104 or S5105 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process of the main process (see FIG. 59) (see FIG. 59). It is transmitted to the display control device 114 by S4102). By receiving the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the display control device 114 corresponds to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the first special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbol is performed.

With the setting of the variable pattern command for display of the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set variable pattern command for display is consumed (that is, the variable corresponding to the reserved ball of the first special symbol). The data corresponding to the first special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted in accordance with the setting of the display) (S5106).

Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5107). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is not on (that is, off) (S5107: No), the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110. Therefore, the process of S5111 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S5107: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to off (S5108). Next, the process of the variable display setting process for special figure 2 (S5109) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 71, the variation display setting process (S5109) for the special figure 2, which is one of the processes in the variation display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 69), will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 variation display setting process (S5109).

In the variation display setting process for special figure 2 (S5109), first, in the process of S4210 of the command determination process (see FIG. 60), the variation time corresponding to the extracted variation pattern is read out (S5301), and the read variation is performed. The value corresponding to the time is set in the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n (S5302). Next, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the latent state (S5303). When it is determined that the state is latent (S5303: Yes), it is determined whether the rush displayed flag 223t is on (S5304). When it is determined that the rush displayed flag 223t is not on (S5304: No), the remaining time stored in the remaining time storage area 223p is read out (S5305). Next, it is determined whether the remaining time read in the process of S5305 is less than 1 second (S5306). If it is determined that the remaining time is less than 1 second (S5306: Yes), the process of S5307 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5308.

On the other hand, in the process of S5306, when it is determined that the remaining time read out is 1 second or more (S5306: No), the display rush rush command is set (S5307), and the rush displayed flag 223t is set to ON. (S5308). Next, based on the extracted variation pattern, the latent probability variation pattern command for displaying the second special symbol is set (S5309), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5303, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the latent state (S5303: No), or in the process of S5304, when it is determined that the rush displayed flag 223t is set to ON. (S5304: Yes), the process of S5305 to S5308 described above is skipped, the process of S5309 is executed, and the present process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the state where the latent state is set in the state setting area 223j, when the variable display of the first special symbol is set, that is, during the jackpot fluctuation period, the latent state is set. When it is determined whether the second special symbol (special figure 2) is changing and it is determined that the special figure 2 is not changing when the fluctuation display corresponding to the first special symbol change is set. Is configured to set a rush rush command as an effect mode of variable display. That is, it is configured to display a screen (see FIG. 7A) for notifying the player that the rush has entered the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing when the target special figure 1 change is executed. is doing.

On the other hand, when setting the fluctuation display corresponding to the first special symbol fluctuation in which the jackpot fluctuation period is in a latent state, it is determined whether the second special symbol (special figure 2) is changing, and the special symbol is used. When it is determined that 2 is in a fluctuating state, as an effect mode of the fluctuating display, a screen showing that the state is in a latent state (see FIG. 6B) without setting the display rush inrush command is displayed. It is configured to be displayed.

As a result, if a right-handed game is performed when a screen (see FIG. 7 (a)) for setting a display rush rush command and notifying the player that the rush has been rushed is displayed, the game is immediately performed. It is possible to execute the lottery of the second special symbol in the latent state, and it is possible to provide the player with a comfortable game.

In addition, when setting the fluctuation display corresponding to the first special symbol fluctuation that is in the latent state during the jackpot fluctuation period, it is determined whether the second special symbol (special figure 2) is changing, and the special figure 2 If it is determined that is in the process of change, the change in the special figure 2 during the change may be forcibly terminated so that a new change in the special figure 2 can be executed.

It should be noted that the setting timing of the display rush rush command when the game state shifts to the latent state during the fluctuation of Special Figure 2 is not limited to the content of the present embodiment, and the player is provided with a game that does not feel uncomfortable. It suffices if the configuration is such that For example, when it is determined that the fluctuation of the special figure 2 that is changing has ended at the timing when the latent state is set, the display rush inrush command may be set, or the change may be made at the timing when the latent state is set. It may be configured to discriminate the remaining time until the end of the special figure 2 fluctuation in the figure 2 and set the display rush rush command when the discriminant result becomes a predetermined time (1 second). In this case, the predetermined time to be set is required from the time when the player operates the operation handle 51 to the time when the right-handed game is started until the ball launched by the right-handed game enters the second entrance 640. The time may be shorter than the period, and may be appropriately set according to the configuration of the game board 13.

Returning to FIG. 69, the explanation will be continued. The variable pattern command for display of the second special symbol set in the process of S5109 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed by the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 59). It is transmitted to the control device 114. By receiving the display variation pattern command of the second special symbol, the display control device 114 corresponds to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the second special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbol is performed. Then, in the winning information storage area 223b, the data corresponding to the second special symbol is shifted (S5110).

Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON (S5111). If it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is not set to on (that is, it is off) (S5111: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is on (S5111: Yes), the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f is on. Sets the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f to off, and sets the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g to off when the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is on (S5112).

In the process of S4201 of the command determination process (see FIG. 60), the stop type extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command is set (S5113), and this process is terminated. When the extracted stop type is the stop type of the first special symbol, a display special figure 1 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set based on the stop type. If the extracted stop type is the stop type of the second special symbol, a display special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set based on the stop type. .. The special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command notified from the main control device 110 notifies the big hit type when a big hit occurs, and notifies even when the determination result is wrong. Will be done. When the determination result is out of order, the out-of-order symbol is set without referring to the stop type.

Next, with reference to FIG. 72, various counter update processes (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the various counter update processes (S4111). The various counter update processes (S4111 in FIG. 72) are one of the main processes (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and are the values of the various counters provided in the RAM 223. This is the process to execute the update.

In the various counter update processes (S4111), first, it is determined whether the value of the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is larger than 0 (S5401). When it is determined that the value of the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is larger than 0 (S5401: Yes), the value of the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is subtracted by 1 (S5402). On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5401 that the value of the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is not larger than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S5401: No), the processing of S5402 is skipped and S5403 is skipped. Move to the processing of. Next, it is determined whether the value of the sub-special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is larger than 0 (S5403). When it is determined that the value of the sub-special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is larger than 0 (S5403: Yes), the value of the sub-special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is subtracted by 1 (S5404).

Next, the value of the sub-special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m and the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n are read out (S5405), and the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is read from the value of the sub-special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m. The remaining time is calculated by subtracting the value of (S5406). The remaining time calculated in the process of S5406 is stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (S5407), the values of other various counters are subtracted by 1 (S5408), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5403, when it is determined that the value of the sub-special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is not larger than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S5403: No), the above-mentioned S5404 to S5407 are skipped. , S5408 process is executed, and this process is terminated.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 73 to 87, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 73, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is set in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs initially processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM has a high speed. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls on the third symbol display device 81. To start.

Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. 74. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it can sufficiently store not only image data but also a control program and the like, while controlling. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to the predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S6001 in FIG. 73) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is completed and the boot process is terminated.

By executing the boot process (S6001) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM configured by a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, in the display control device 114. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 74, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S6102. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. It may execute the process set in 231a. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S6101. And S6102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. 1 It may be stored in the program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231, which is possible after the boot process, earlier.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 73. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct to execute the display process. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes a start address and a final address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, transfer destination information (here, resident video RAM 235), and a transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of this register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6003, then the power-on variable image A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S6004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 85 (a)) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S7502 in FIG. 85 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75 (b)), the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) (not shown) is simply drawn. The command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 75 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 75 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, since the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. By using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, so that the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, there was a ball entry (starting prize) into the first entry slot 64 or the second entry slot 640, and the start instruction of the variable effect was given. When the main control device 110 passes through the voice lamp control device 113, that is, when the display fluctuation pattern command is received, the fluctuation image at power-on is immediately displayed during the fluctuation effect period, and a simple fluctuation is performed. You can produce. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, and it takes time to transfer the flash memory. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery is possible. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S6005, the interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 75 (a). FIG. 75A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the command interrupt process is executed by the MPU 231.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 75 (b). FIG. 75B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, since the image controller 237 does not receive the drawing instruction of the next image at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started during the drawing of the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V-interruption process, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. A command determination process (S6302) is executed so that the display device 81 can display the image, and then a display setting process (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. If the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81.

In the display setting process (S6303), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), which are determined by the task process (S6304), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 29 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list (S6306). The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 87.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, non-front / rear out reach, complete out) is set. The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed to shift to the process of S6304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S6302), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 76, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402), and then the command. For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). Then, if there is a variable pattern command for display (S6404: Yes), the variable pattern command process is executed (S6405), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. 77 (a). FIG. 77A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing (S6405). This fluctuation pattern command processing (S6405) executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed in the main control device 110 at a distance of several seconds or more, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly for display. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer. Initialize 233f to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S6505), the fluctuation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S6505, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501. , The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S6502e. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 from the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is timed by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6503, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 76. In the processing of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a stop type command for display (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 77 (b). FIG. 77B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (either big hit A to G, small hit A to C, reach off, or complete off) indicated by the display stop type command. (S6601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is used. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on 81 is finally set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is set. Set it on (S6603) and return to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S6603, and the specified stop symbol is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S6601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is completely out of order. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete deviation is set by the process of S6602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit of the special symbol" is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually has a "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is off". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", and may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 is completely disengaged. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408), and the display is performed. If there is an opening command for (S6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the opening command processing (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. 78 (a). FIG. 78 (a) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. This opening command process executes the process corresponding to the opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the opening command processing, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). After that, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and the time data is set in the timekeeping counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6410), and the display is performed. If there is a round number command (S6410: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 78 (b). FIG. 78B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes the process corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is displayed. Set to the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6805), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6410, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S6412), and the display is performed. If there is an ending command for (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the ending command processing (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. 79. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command process executes the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6903). S6904). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6905), the ending command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display rush inrush command among the unprocessed commands (S6414), and the display is performed. If there is a rush rush command (S6414: Yes), the rush rush command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, the details of the rush inrush command process (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 80 (a). FIG. 80A is a flowchart showing the rush inrush command process. This rush rush command process executes a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rush rush command processing, first, a rush rush display data table corresponding to the display mode of the rush rush effect indicated by the display rush rush command is determined, and the determined rush rush display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. Then, it is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6931). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6932).

Next, based on the rush inrush display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6931, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6934). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6935), the rush inrush command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display rush rush command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an additional effect command among the unprocessed commands (S6416), and the additional effect is added. If there is a command (S6416: Yes), the additional effect command process is executed (S6417), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the additional effect command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 80 (b). FIG. 80B is a flowchart showing additional effect command processing. This additional effect command process executes the process corresponding to the additional effect command for display received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the additional effect command processing, first, an additional effect display data table corresponding to the display mode of the additional effect indicated by the additional effect command for display is determined, and the determined additional effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. , Set to the display data table buffer 233d (S6951). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6952).

Next, based on the additional effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6951, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6954). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6955), the additional effect command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6416, if it is determined that there is no additional display effect command (S6416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6418), and the rear surface is determined. If there is an image change command (S6418: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S6419), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S6419) will be described with reference to FIG. 81. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rear image change command process, first, the rear image change flag 233w for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S7503) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the on state is set to on (S7001). ). Then, among the bits of the rear image discrimination flag 233x provided for each rear image type (rear surface A, B), the bit corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is set to ON, and other bits are set. The bit corresponding to the rear image type of is set to off (S7002), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag 233w set by the process of S7001 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is changed from the rear image discrimination flag 233x set by the process of S7002. Identify.

Further, in the task processing, when it is specified to display either the back surface A or B according to the back surface type of the rear image specified in the display data table, the rear image discrimination flag 233x set by S7002 is used. The type of back image to be displayed at that time is specified, and the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored ( (Whether it is a resident video RAM 235 or a normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7002, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted and the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 76. In the processing of S6418, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S6418: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6420), and there is an error command. If (S6420: Yes), error command processing is executed (S6421), and the process returns to S6401 processing.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S6421) will be described with reference to FIG. 81 (b). FIG. 81B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S7102), and the error command is used. Ends the process and returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S7102 is determined and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the error discrimination flag corresponding to all the error types indicated by each error command is set to ON in the process in S7102. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 76. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S6416 (S6420: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S6422), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

In the processing of S6401 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes). ), The processing of S6402 to S6422 is executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6422 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S6401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75B) is also processed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment processing, only the commands required to display the power-on image, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are used from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extract and execute the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 77 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 77 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and for other commands, Performs the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 77 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S6501. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, the process of writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S6303), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 82, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7201: No). ), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, the processes of S7202 to S7204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S7202), S7203 to S7204 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S7203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S7203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S7204).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error discrimination flag is referred to and all the error discrimination set to ON is performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S7301).

In the task processing (S6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 82. After the warning image setting process (S7204) or in the process of S7203, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is turned off (S7203: No), the process proceeds to the process of S7205.

In S7205, the pointer update process is executed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 84. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so that the respective values are sequentially started from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the process of S7401, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S7403), and if it is a demo display data table (S7403: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7405), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demo effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S7403: No). S7406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawing contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image specified in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7402: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the process returns to FIG. 82 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task process (S6304), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents expanded in the process of S7206 together with the warning image expanded earlier, and each sprite is specified. , Display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and other parameters required for drawing are determined.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed display flag is on. (S7209).

As a result, if the definite display flag is off (S7209: No), the definite display effect has not been performed yet, and it is time to perform the definite display effect. Therefore, first, the definite display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S7210), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the definite display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S7214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final symbol display effect of the stopped symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing content can be set as such. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the confirmed display data table. Further, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S6304), from the start of the fluctuation until the predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S7215, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7209, if the definite display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S7216). If the demo display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the timekeeping counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that a certain period of time has elapsed from the end of the final display effect. Later, a process for displaying the demo effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents are cleared by writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing contents can be set to.

In the process of S7216, if the demo display flag is on (S7216: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75 (b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, one of the variation images at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the stop type command for display for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table that specifies that the image of the above is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 85A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 85 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, off as a result of the processing of S7501 (S7501: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 86.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 85 (b). FIG. 85B is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S7601), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S7601: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S7602). In the process of S7602, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S7602 that the transfer process has not been completed (S7602: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S7603. Further, as a result of the processing of S7601, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S7603.

In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S7603), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S7603: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 describes the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S7603 (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S7605), and this process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 75 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 75 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) (see S7501: No in FIG. 85 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 86, a normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the display setting process (S6303) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702), and if it is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is stored from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source final address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S7703) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to S7705.

Further, in the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S7702: No), the processes of S7703 and S7704 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S7706).

In the process of S7706, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S7706 that the transfer process has not been completed (S7706: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S7707. Further, as a result of the processing of S7705, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S7705: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S7707.

In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707), and if the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag 233w is on (S7709). If the rear image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag 233w is set to off (S7710), it is provided for each rear image type. Among the rear image discrimination flags 233x, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag 233x in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S7711). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag 233x in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (transfer destination). The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The discrimination in the processing of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the stored state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the stored state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is a normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

If, as a result of the processing of S7713, the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7713 (S7713: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S7714). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 includes the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the given address. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the processing of S7714, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and this normal transfer setting processing is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that became the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S6306), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined by the task process (S6304) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and a drawing list (FIG. 29) is generated from the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305) (S7801). That is, in the processing of S7801, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304). Then, the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to obtain the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address is read out from the character ROM 234 in order and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. Then, in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the image expanded in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed in parallel at the same time. be able to.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j after the processing of S7802 (S7803). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when the value is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 75 (b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

In the first embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, regardless of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, in the state where the variation display of 1 is executed, the other variation display may be configured to be infeasible. Then, if there is a reserved ball, the start winning prize may be changed in order from the oldest reserved ball. With this configuration, control can be simplified and the processing load can be reduced.

As described above, in the first embodiment, the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol) and the probabilistic state (high probability state of the special symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol). Four gaming states are provided: a time-saving state (low probability state of special symbol and high probability state of normal symbol) and latent state (high probability state of special symbol and normal state of normal symbol). There is. Then, the latent state is configured to be the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

That is, when the latent state is set, the variable time for showing the lottery of the second special symbol, which is more likely to be a lottery result more favorable to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol, is set in another game state. By stipulating that it be shorter than when it is done, the lottery that is advantageous to the player can be executed most efficiently. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel playability in which the player is expected to set the latent state.

Specifically, in the lottery of the second special symbol, in addition to the big hit, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened even if the prize is small, so that the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is short. In the state, the prize balls can be continuously increased. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that it will be in a latent state. In a general gaming machine, the probabilistic state is the most advantageous gaming state, but in the present embodiment, the latent probabilistic state is more advantageous than the probabilistic state, so that a novel game property can be provided.

Further, in the first embodiment, the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous). A variable method is adopted). As a result, even if the variable display of one special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the other special symbol can be executed without waiting for the end of the variable display, so that the lottery of the special symbol can be executed more efficiently. can. In addition, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are fluctuating at the same time, if one of them stops fluctuating with a stop symbol of a big hit or a small hit, the other fluctuating display shows the remaining fluctuation time or lottery. Regardless of the result, the stop symbol is displayed as a stop. As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem that the other variable display is fixedly displayed as a hit or a small hit during the execution of the big hit or the small hit, and the big hit or the small hit is started in duplicate.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set, the variable display corresponding to the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed. , The high-probability state of the normal symbol shifts to the low-probability state, and the gaming state shifts from the probabilistic state to the latent state. While this latent state is set, the variable display (dynamic display) period for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol is set short, so that many lottery of the second special symbol can be executed. It will be a period that can be done (Special Figure 2 Fluctuation Advantageous Period).

In the present embodiment, since the small hit is configured to be won with a probability of about 1/2 in the lottery of the second special symbol, the small hit is set during the period when the latent state is set as the game state. The small hit game that is executed when the player wins the game is frequently executed, and the game state is advantageous to the player who can win many prize balls (special figure 2 advantageous state).

As described above, the period in which the latent probability state is set in the present embodiment (special figure 2 variable advantageous period) is during the variable display period (dynamic display period) of the first special symbol won by the jackpot in the probable change state. Since (special figure 1 big hit is changing), the big hit game is executed when the special figure 2 advantageous state ends. In this way, since a plurality of states (special figure 2 advantageous state, jackpot game state) that are advantageous to the player are continuously set, the player is continuously given various benefits. Can be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a small hit is won by one special symbol (special figure 2) and the small hit game is executed, the fluctuation of the other special symbol (special figure 1) is interrupted (variation display period). The measurement is interrupted), and when the small hit game is completed, the measurement of the interrupted fluctuation display period is restarted. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the special figure 2 variable advantage period from being subtracted during the small hit game, and therefore, regardless of the number of small hit games executed during the special figure 2 variable advantageous period. It is possible to provide the player with a certain special figure 2 variable advantageous period.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result of one special symbol (special figure 1), the other special symbol (special figure 2) that is changing is stopped and displayed. It is configured to be forcibly stopped with. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a small hit game is executed during a big hit game.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control content for the change of the other special symbol is different depending on the lottery result of one special symbol. Specifically, if the lottery result of one special symbol is a big hit (a lottery result that can give the player the first privilege), the change of the other special symbol means that the lottery result is out of order. If it is stopped and displayed in the display mode shown and the lottery result of one special symbol is a small hit (a lottery result that can give the player a second privilege different from the first privilege), the other special symbol changes. Is stopped until the grant of the second privilege is completed (until the small hit game is completed), and is restarted after the grant of the second privilege is completed. In addition, if the lottery result of one special symbol is out of order, the change of the other special symbol is executed as it is.

With this configuration, the lottery content (lottery result, period until the lottery result is displayed) of the other special symbol can be changed based on the lottery result of one special symbol, and the player's It is possible to provide various playability.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a lottery result that can give a privilege to the player, the control content for the change of the other special symbol is changed according to the content of the privilege. Therefore, for example, in the case of a lottery result that gives the player the most advantageous privilege (big hit game), the lottery result corresponding to the change of the other special symbol being executed is the lottery result that gives the privilege. Even so, the fluctuation is forcibly stopped so that the lottery result is out of order, the player is suppressed from being given excessive benefits, and the lottery result (small hit) with less benefits given than the big hit game. In the case of, in order to prevent the privilege based on the lottery of the other special symbol from being given during the small hit game without changing the lottery result corresponding to the change of the other special symbol being executed, the variable display is performed. It is possible to interrupt only the measurement of the period.

Therefore, in a state where a plurality of special symbols (Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2) are fluctuating at the same time, the player is given the least advantageous privilege, and thus the most advantageous privilege to be given later is given. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the player is not able to do so, and it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player feels uncomfortable.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the latent state is set as the gaming state, a short-term (0.5 second) variable display period is set as the variable display period of the second special symbol (special figure 2). It is configured so that small hit games can be performed frequently. Then, the condition for setting the latent state as the gaming state is the condition where the latent state is set, and the condition for ending the latent state is the condition for winning the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol while the probability changing state is set. Is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot, and the jackpot game is executed. Therefore, the jackpot game is executed after the end of the first advantageous period, which is advantageous to the player who frequently executes the small hit game. The second game period will be set. Therefore, since the first advantageous period and the second advantageous period that are advantageous to the player can be continuously set, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game so that the first advantageous period is set.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the probability variation state, the latent probability state is set from the start of the jackpot fluctuation, and the latent probability state is set. Is set so that the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be efficiently performed.

Therefore, at the same time as the latent state is set, the player is notified of the period during which the latent state is set (based on the setting of the latent state) (FIG. 7 (a)). ))reference.

However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be changed at the same time, the first special symbol is also the second in the state where the probabilistic state is set. Both special symbols may fluctuate.

In such a case, even if the display mode indicating that the latent state (RUSH) is set at the timing when the latent state is set is displayed (see FIG. 7A), the second is currently changing. Until the special symbol stops fluctuating, the lottery for the second special symbol cannot be executed in the latent state, and there is a problem that the small hit game is not executed forever even in the RUSH state. There was a risk.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the condition for transition to the latent probability state is satisfied (when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol during the probability change state), the change status of the second special symbol (whether or not there is a change, (Fluctuating remaining period) is determined, and the timing for notifying that the RUSH state has been set is different based on the determination result.

Specifically, when the condition for transition to the latent state is satisfied, the RUSH state is set when it is determined that the new second special symbol change is feasible. It is configured. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the change of the new second special symbol is not started and the small hit game is not executed even though the notification that the RUSH state has been set is notified.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the condition for transition to the latent state is satisfied, the period from the state in which the new change of the second special symbol can be executed to the end of the latent state is determined. If the determined period is less than the predetermined period, the RUSH state is not notified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the big hit game from being started without the small hit game being executed even though the notification that the RUSH state has been set is notified.

In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the probabilistic state, the high probability state of the normal symbol is changed to the low probability state at the time when the jackpot fluctuation starts, so that the game state is set. If the probability state is set and the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the high probability state of the normal symbol does not shift to the low probability state at the start of the jackpot fluctuation. , It is configured to continue the probabilistic state even during the jackpot fluctuation. With this configuration, it is possible to provide different playability depending on the type of special symbol.

Not limited to the configuration of this embodiment, even if a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery in the probabilistic state, the high probability state of the normal symbol is changed to the low probability state at the time when the jackpot fluctuation starts. It may be configured to set the latent probability state as the game state by shifting to, or only when a specific jackpot type is set among a plurality of jackpot types, it is normal at the time when the jackpot fluctuation starts. It may be configured to set the latent state as the game state by shifting the high probability state of the symbol to the low probability state.

Furthermore, the number of jackpots won during the advantageous continuation period is measured, and when the measurement result reaches a predetermined number of times, the high-probability state of the normal symbol is shifted to the low-probability state at the time when the jackpot fluctuation starts. It may be configured to set the latent probability state as the game state.

In the present embodiment, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the probable change state, the latent state is set at the time when the big hit change starts and the period until the big hit change ends. However, the jackpot fluctuation corresponding to the predicted winning information is completed based on the prediction that the jackpot will be won in the start winning process (see FIG. 47). It may be configured to set the latent state for the period (multiple fluctuation periods) until the operation.

In the present embodiment, when the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is selected in the state where the latent probability state is set, the fluctuation pattern table is always constant regardless of the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol during the latent probability state setting. (See FIG. 19B) is used, but the configuration is not limited to this, and for example, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the latent probability state is set reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times). It is also possible to provide a discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the discriminating means have been performed, and to make the data table for selecting the variation pattern different based on the discriminating result of the discriminating means.

Specifically, when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol has not reached a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), the fluctuation of the second special symbol is performed by referring to the data table in which the average fluctuation time is about 2 seconds. When the number of times reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), it is preferable to refer to a data table in which the average fluctuation time is about 1 second. As a result, more small hit games can be provided to the player when a fluctuation pattern in which a long fluctuation time is set is selected as the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, the latent probability state is set during the jackpot fluctuation in the probability change state, but in addition to this, the lottery result of the special symbol is a specific deviation or a small hit. The latent probability state may be set during the fluctuation display in the case, or the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol is out of a specific range or becomes a small hit reaches a predetermined number of times during the probability change state. If this is the case, the latent state may be set.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 111. In the above-mentioned first embodiment, when the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is set, the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1). In addition, the gaming state during the jackpot fluctuation is set as the latent probability state, and the small hit game is easily executed when the latent probability state is set. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the first embodiment described above, the gaming state can be changed during the symbol determination period (the period during which the first symbol is stopped and displayed) for displaying the lottery result of the special symbol. It is configured to let you. That is, when a big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the state where the probability variation state is set, the start timing of the symbol confirmation period (the first symbol indicating the big hit) in which the lottery result is displayed is displayed. Is configured to set the latent state as the game state at the timing when is stopped and displayed).

Further, the second embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that a different symbol determination period is set based on the lottery result of the special symbol. With this configuration, the length of the period in which the latent state that is advantageous to the player is set can be made different according to the length of the set symbol determination period. Further, as compared with the configuration in which the latent state is set corresponding to the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the period during which the special symbol is fluctuating) as in the first embodiment described above, the symbol confirmation period (special) of the special symbol is obtained. Since the configuration in which the latent probability state is set corresponding to the period in which the symbol is stopped) is used, it is possible to simplify the display mode corresponding to the special symbol in the state in which the latent probability state is set. , The control of the pachinko machine 10 can be simplified.

Further, in the first embodiment described above, once the probabilistic state is set, the probabilistic state is maintained until the next big hit is won, but in the second embodiment, the special symbol jackpot is used. Even if the player is not elected, the probability change state is terminated when the predetermined end condition (the number of special symbol fluctuations after the probability change state is set reaches the predetermined number of times (50 times)) is satisfied. It differs in that it is configured in. With such a configuration, it is possible to enthusiastically play a game for a player for shifting to a latent state during a period in which a probable change state is set.

Here, the flow of the game in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 88. FIG. 88 is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of the game when a specific jackpot (big hit C) is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in a state where the probability variation state is set. .. As shown in FIG. 88, in the second embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the state where the probability variation state is set, the jackpot game starts from the timing when the jackpot fluctuation stops (see FIG. 88 (c)). The latent state is set in the period until it is executed (symbol confirmation period).

Then, in the state where the latent probability state is set, the game for drawing the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed as in the first embodiment described above. Further, if the small hit of the special figure 2 is won during the symbol confirmation period of the special figure 1, the measurement (subtraction) of the symbol confirmation period of the special figure 1 is interrupted during the period in which the small hit game is executed. ing. In addition, in the second embodiment, even if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order or a small hit, a different symbol determination period is set according to the lottery result. As a result, the player desires that a long period be set as the symbol determination period as the lottery result (lottery result of winning the jackpot) of the special figure 1 corresponding to the period in which the latent state is set. In the state where the latent state is set, it is desired that a short period is set as the symbol determination period in order to execute more lottery of the special figure 2.

That is, in the second embodiment in which the symbol confirmation period is different according to the lottery result, a long symbol confirmation period is desired and a short symbol confirmation period is desired according to the game state and the type of special symbol. Can be provided to the player. Further, in the second embodiment, different symbol determination periods are set for the same fluctuation pattern in which the same fluctuation display can be executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from predicting the symbol confirmation period in advance due to the variable display content of the special symbol, and which symbol confirmation period is set for this special symbol lottery. It is possible to make it difficult to understand until the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed. In addition, since it has the above-mentioned configuration, it has a variation effect (an effect mode executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81) that is executed corresponding to one variation time (variation pattern). Since it is configured to set multiple types of symbol confirmation periods, the time required for one special symbol lottery (after the special symbol lottery is performed, the next special symbol lottery can be performed. Even when the time until) is set in a complicated manner, it is possible to unify the variable production.

In the example described with reference to FIG. 88, the flow of the game when the jackpot of Special FIG. 1 is won when the probability variation state is set, that is, when the number of remaining time reductions is 47 times is shown. It is configured so that the latent state is set from the time when the jackpot fluctuation stops. In addition to this, when the jackpot of Special Figure 1 is won at the timing when the probability change state ends (the value of the probability change counter 203aa becomes 0) (for example, the 50th special figure lottery after the probability change state is set). Is configured so that the latent state is set from the timing when the jackpot fluctuation starts.

With this configuration, in the state where the probability variation state is set, the advantageous period of different length is set based on the timing of winning the jackpot of the special figure 1. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while requesting that the player win the jackpot at the timing when a long advantageous period is set, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, the gaming state set for the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) executed when the probability change state is set will be described with reference to FIG. 89. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing the relationship between the content of the special figure 1 game and the given score after the probability change state is set.

As shown in FIG. 89, in the second embodiment, the game state is variably set based on the lottery result of the special symbol lottery executed in the state where the probability variation state is set and the number of lottery (number of special figure fluctuations). It is configured to do. Specifically, in the second embodiment, the probability change state is continuously set until the number of lottery (variation number) of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (50 times) without winning the jackpot. If the jackpot is won while the number of lottery (number of fluctuations) of the special symbol is 1 to 49, the symbol showing the probability change state and the jackpot is stopped and displayed during the jackpot fluctuation. The latent state is set during the confirmation period. As a result, the player is given a latent state game (RUSH game) during the symbol determination period and a jackpot game after the latent state ends as a privilege.

Next, when the number of lottery (number of fluctuations) of the special symbol is the 50th jackpot, the latent state is set during the jackpot fluctuation and during the symbol determination period. As a result, the player is given a privilege of the latent state game (RUSH game) from the jackpot fluctuation to the end of the symbol confirmation period and the jackpot game after the end of the latent state. That is, in the second embodiment, in the state where the probability change state is set, the transition condition (big hit winning) to the latent state is set in the state where the specific condition (specific lottery number (50th)) is satisfied. When it is satisfied, the player is configured to be given a privilege which is more advantageous than the case where the transition condition to the latent state is satisfied when the specific condition is not satisfied.

Then, when the number of lottery of the special symbol exceeds 50 times, the predetermined probability variation number is reached, and the normal state is set as the game state. If a jackpot is won during this normal state, the normal state continues during the fluctuation of the special symbol and during the symbol confirmation period, and the jackpot game is executed.

On the other hand, if the number of lottery (number of fluctuations) of the special symbol is out of the range from the 1st to the 49th after the probability variation state is set, the probability variation state is changed during the change of the special symbol and during the symbol confirmation period. If it continues and it is off at the 50th time, the latent state is set during the change of the special symbol and during the symbol confirmation period, so the latent state from the special symbol change to the end of the symbol confirmation period. The game (RUSH game) becomes feasible.

Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in the second embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit with respect to the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the probable change state and the symbol confirmation period, it is not a big hit (missing). , Small hit), it is configured so that a long time is easier to select. For example, when the lottery result of a special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation time is "60 seconds to 180 seconds". The fluctuation time of "" is selected, and the symbol confirmation period of "5 seconds to 150 seconds" is selected as the symbol confirmation period. The fluctuation time of "5 seconds to 150 seconds" is selected as the fluctuation time, and the symbol confirmation period of "0.2 seconds to 1.5 seconds" is selected as the symbol confirmation period.

With this configuration, the lottery result of the special symbol and the latent state game (RUSH game) can be played for a maximum of 330 seconds (when a big hit is won with the 50th special figure change number) according to the number of lottery, and the minimum. It can be provided to the player with a range of 5 seconds (when the jackpot is won in the 1st to 49th special figure fluctuations). Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting how long the latent state of this time will continue.

Further, in the present embodiment, regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol, when the number of times of special symbol lottery (number of fluctuations) after the probability change state is set becomes the 50th time, the special symbol is being changed and the special symbol is changing. , Since the latent state is set during the symbol confirmation period, even if the jackpot is not won during the probable change state, the latent state game (RUSH game) is played against the player. Can be provided. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to experience the latent state game (RUSH game) than the configuration of the first embodiment in which the latent state game (RUSH game) is provided only when the jackpot is won. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player gets tired of the game because he / she cannot experience the latent state game (RUSH game) even though he / she has played the game for a long time.

Further, in the present embodiment, the latent state is set when the latent state is set based on the winning of the jackpot during the probable change state, and the latent state is set longer than the latent state is set without winning the jackpot. It is configured to be easy. As a result, the longer the period during which the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed, the easier it is to execute the jackpot game after the latent state game (RUSH game) is completed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player in the latent state game (RUSH game) play the game while expecting the jackpot game to be executed.

In addition, unlike the configuration of the present embodiment described above, in a part of the case where the latent state is set without winning the big hit, it is equivalent to the case where the latent state is set based on the winning of the big hit. Or, set the fluctuation time and the symbol confirmation period corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol other than the big hit (missing, small hit) so that the latent state game (RUSH game) of a longer length is executed. Is also good. As a result, it is possible to provide a player with a situation in which it may be advantageous not to win a big hit in a special symbol lottery, and it is possible to provide a surprising game.

In the present embodiment, as described above, it is easy to set a long latent state when a big hit is won during the probable change state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the latent probability is not limited to this, and the big hit is not won during the probable change state. When the state is set, it may be configured so that a long latent state is set. In this case, for example, the probability of change (the number of lottery of special symbols whose probability change state is continuously set (number of fluctuations)) is 50, and the probability of big hit in the probability change state, that is, the high probability state of the special symbol is 1/20. It is preferable to set to, so that a long latent state is set when the result of the lottery of the special symbol is missed 50 times in a row (about 7%).

Next, among the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the display contents different from the above-described first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 90. In the second embodiment, unlike the first embodiment described above, the latent probability state is set during the symbol determination period. Therefore, a special figure 1 for the effect content displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The display mode of the display area Dm1 or the special figure 2 display area Dm2 is different from the above-described first embodiment. FIG. 90A is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display contents in the latent state. As shown in FIG. 90 (a), in the second embodiment, since the latent state is set during the period when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), the latent state is set. The display of the effect mode (super chance zone display) indicating the state in which the change of the second special symbol is executed across the timing is displayed, and the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. It differs from the display screen of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 8A) in that it is executed during the period when the second symbol for showing is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). Since the other display elements are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the example shown in FIG. 90 (a), the display mode (“777”) of the third symbol for indicating that the first special symbol (special figure 1) has won the big hit is stopped and displayed. It shows that the latent probability state is set based on the fact that the jackpot is won in the first special symbol during the probability change state. In the example shown in FIG. 90 (a), since the special figure 1 display area Dm1 in which the third symbol is displayed in a display mode that can be visually recognized by the player is formed, the player can use the special figure 1 display area. By grasping the display mode of the third symbol displayed on Dm1 and the effect mode indicating that the latent state displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 has been set, the flow of the game in the future will be related. The game can be performed in a state in which information (information on whether or not the jackpot game is executed after the latent state game is completed) is acquired in advance.

Further, in the second embodiment, when the latent probability state is set based on the jackpot winning of the first special symbol, the fall lottery (special symbol) is performed when the special symbol is drawn during the latent probability state. The lottery for shifting the high-probability state to the low-probability state) is not performed. Therefore, by identifying the display mode of the third symbol displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, it is possible to grasp whether or not the current latent state is an advantageous latent state that is advantageous to the player. You can play the game with confidence.

In the second embodiment, the configuration in which the third symbol is displayed so that the player can easily identify the lottery result of the special symbol is used, but the lottery result of the special symbol is not limited to this. In order to make it difficult for the player to identify, the display area may be reduced, or the display area other than the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (for example, a light emitting body attached to the game board 13 or a light emitting body other than the third symbol display device 81) may be provided. A configuration such as a liquid crystal display device) may be used for display. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand what triggered the latent state to be set, so that the jackpot game is executed after the latent state game (RUSH game) is completed. It is possible to play the game while predicting whether or not the fall lottery is being executed during the latent state game (RUSH game).

Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the third symbol is displayed from the time when the third symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 until the final display period (symbol confirmation period) elapses. It is configured to stop completely without changing it, but it is not limited to this as long as it notifies the player that the special symbol is currently in the final display period (symbol finalization period), for example. During the final display period, the variable display of the third symbol is stopped, but the display mode (color) of the third symbol may be gradually changed, or the third symbol may be configured to be indistinguishable by the player. The design may be configured to swing.

In addition, for the player, a new lottery (variation) of the special symbol is made because the right of the special symbol lottery to be newly executed has not been acquired, whether the player is currently in the confirmed display period (design confirmation period). ) May not be executed, it may be configured to set a display mode for allowing the player to identify, for example, "confirmed display" or "waiting" in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. The command of "" may be displayed, or the display mode (color, design) of the third symbol may be changed between "confirmed display" and "waiting". With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent erroneous recognition that a new lottery is not started even in the state of having the reserved memory during the definite display period.

Next, with reference to FIG. 90 (b), the display contents at the time of entering the latent state game (RUSH game) in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 90B is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display content displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the latent state game (RUSH game) is entered. As shown in FIG. 90 (b), in the present embodiment, since the latent state is set during the period when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), the latent state game (RUSH game) is performed. The effect mode indicating rushing is executed during the period in which the second symbol for showing the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. In that respect, it differs from the display screen of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 8B). Since the other display elements are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 96. In the second embodiment, the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are changed from the first embodiment described above, and the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed. It differs in that it is done. Other points are the same as those in the first embodiment, the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 91 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 91, in the ROM 202 of the second embodiment, the big hit type selection table 202aa is replaced with the big hit type selection table 202d, and the small hit type selection table 202a is replaced with the small hit type selection table 202ab. Is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the variation pattern selection table 202ac is provided in place of the variation pattern selection table 202f, and the deviation type selection table 202ad is provided.

The jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa is different from the jackpot type selection table 202d of the first embodiment described above in that the type of the jackpot type is changed, and various counters (time reduction counter 203f, probability variation counter 203aa) set after the jackpot ends. , The fixed time counters 203ad and 203ae) are different from each other in that the value of the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type is changed. Here, the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 92.

FIG. 92 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 92, the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa is defined by the same jackpot operation content as the jackpot type defined in the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16A) of the first embodiment described above. For each jackpot type, the values of the time reduction counter 203f, the probability variation counter 203aa, the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad, and the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae are specified.

Specifically, when the jackpot type (big hit A1 to jackpot A3) in which the same jackpot operation content as that of the jackpot A in the jackpot type selection table 202d of the first embodiment described above is executed is selected (winning the jackpot). When the game state is the normal state or the latent state, the value of "100" is set in the time saving counter 203f, and the value of "50" is set in the time saving state and the probable change state. Therefore, it is specified that the value of "50" is set in the probability variation counter 203aa.

Furthermore, as the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol, it is stipulated that the jackpot A1 is set to "5 seconds", the jackpot A2 is set to "60 seconds", and the jackpot A3 is set to "150 seconds". The jackpot A1 is defined in the range where the value of the counter C2 (0 to 99) is "0 to 19", the jackpot A2 is defined in the range of "20 to 23", and the jackpot A3 is defined in the range "24". That is, in the second embodiment, the jackpot operation corresponding to the jackpot A (big hits A1 to A3) is executed in 25% of the cases where the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and 80% (20 / 20 /) of them. It is stipulated that 25) is the jackpot D, 16% (4/25) is the jackpot A2, and 4% (1/25) is the jackpot A3.

That is, in the present embodiment, even if the jackpot in which the most advantageous jackpot game is executed for the player is won, the symbol confirmation period is short as the period (symbol confirmation period) for stopping and displaying the lottery result to the player. If selected, the period during which the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed will be shortened. Therefore, in the lottery of special symbols, it is possible to make the player pay attention not only to whether or not a big hit is won, but also to the length of the symbol determination period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the second embodiment, a configuration is used in which the symbol determination period is associated with the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a lottery for selecting the jackpot operation content (big hit type) and a lottery. The lottery for selecting the symbol fixing period and the lottery may be configured to be executed independently. In this case, since a plurality of symbol determination periods can be combined for a plurality of jackpot types, it is possible to provide game playability that is difficult for the player to predict.

Next, similarly to the above-mentioned jackpots A1 to A3, jackpots B1 to B3, jackpots C1 to C3, and jackpots D1 to D3 are defined, respectively.

Specifically, when the jackpot type (big hit B1 to jackpot B3) in which the same jackpot operation content as that of the jackpot B in the jackpot type selection table 202d of the first embodiment described above is executed is selected (winning the jackpot). When the game state is the normal state or the latent state, the value of "0" is set in the time saving counter 203f, and the value of "100" is set in the time saving state and the probable change state. Therefore, it is specified that the value of "0" is set in the probability variation counter 203aa.

Furthermore, it is stipulated that the jackpot B1 is set to "5 seconds", the jackpot B2 is set to "60 seconds", and the jackpot B3 is set to "150 seconds" as the symbol determination period of the special symbol. The jackpot B1 is defined in the range of the value of the counter C2 (0 to 99) in the range of "25 to 29", the jackpot A2 is defined in the range of "20 to 23", and the jackpot A3 is defined in the range of "24". That is, in A2 of the second embodiment, the jackpot operation corresponding to the jackpot A (big hits A1 to A3) is executed in 25% of the cases where the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and 80% of them ( It is stipulated that 20/25) is the jackpot D, 16% (4/25) is the jackpot A2, and 4% (1/25) is the jackpot A3.

Next, the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab will be described with reference to FIG. 93 (a). FIG. 93A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 93 (a), the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab has each small hit type (small) with respect to the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16 (b)) of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the hit A to the small hit C) are further subdivided and defined. Other than that, it is the same as the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16B). The detailed description of the same element will be omitted.

Specifically, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is in the range of "0 to 9" as the small hit type in which the small hit operation (opening operation) corresponding to the small hit A of the first embodiment described above is executed. , "Small hit A1" with a symbol confirmation time of "0.2 seconds" is in the range of "10 to 89", and "Small hit A2" with a symbol confirmation time of "0.5 seconds" is "90 to 93". "Small hit A3" with a symbol confirmation time of "1.5 seconds" is specified in the range of ".

Then, as the small hit type in which the small hit operation (opening operation) corresponding to the small hit B of the first embodiment described above is executed, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is determined in the range of "94 to 95". "Small hit B1" with a time of "0.2 seconds" is in the range of "96 to 97", and "Small hit B2" with a symbol confirmation time of "0.5 seconds" is in the value of "98". A "small hit B3" with a fixed time of "1.5 seconds" is specified. Further, as the small hit type in which the small hit operation (opening operation) corresponding to the small hit C of the first embodiment described above is executed, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is set to "99" and the symbol determination time is "1. A small hit operation (opening operation) of "5 seconds" is specified.

Next, the contents of the deviation type selection table 202ad will be described with reference to FIG. 93 (b). This out-of-order type selection table 202ad is referred to for selecting the out-of-order type when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, and is different in correspondence with the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5. The fixed time is specified.

In the present embodiment, the same counter value (value of the small hit type counter C5) is used depending on whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit or a miss because the lottery result of the special symbol cannot be duplicated. ) To select the type. As a result, the number of counters included in the main control device 110 can be reduced. The configuration is not limited to the above-mentioned configuration, and different counters may be used depending on whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit or a miss.

FIG. 93B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the deviation type selection table 202ad. As shown in FIG. 93 (b), the symbol type (off type) having a symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds to 1.5 seconds corresponding to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a small hit. It is specified corresponding to the value of the type counter C5.

As described above, in the second embodiment, it is possible to set the lottery results of big hit, small hit, and miss as the lottery result of the special symbol, and further, it is possible to set a different symbol confirmation time for each lottery result. It is configured in. Thereby, even if the lottery results of the special symbols are the same, different symbol confirmation times can be set.

Here, for example, when the lottery result of a special symbol is a big hit and the latent probability state is set during the symbol confirmation period, a long time (for example, 150 seconds) is selected as the symbol confirmation time. , Since the period in which the latent state is set can be lengthened, it can be advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the longer the symbol confirmation time is selected, the smaller the number of games per unit time (the number of special symbol lottery), which is disadvantageous to the player.

Further, of the second special symbol (special diagram 2) when the latent state is set during the period in which the special symbol indicating that the lottery result of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) is a big hit is stopped and displayed. In the latent state game (RUSH game) in which the lottery is executed, when the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a small hit or a miss, a long symbol confirmation time is selected, and a predetermined latent state is selected. Since the number of special figure 2 lottery that can be executed during the period (the symbol confirmation period of special figure 1) is reduced, it is disadvantageous to the player.

In this way, since the degree of advantage of the set symbol determination period can be changed according to the lottery result of the special symbol, it is possible to provide the player with a novel playability.

In the present embodiment, by changing the symbol determination period of the special symbol, the period in which the latent state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is set is changed, and the game is executed during the latent state. By varying the number of special symbol lottery, the degree of advantage provided to the player is different, but other configurations may be used, for example, a big hit in a special symbol lottery. Only when the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol indicating that the player has won is longer than the predetermined period, the player may be configured to be given a privilege to display a preferable image, or the music played during the jackpot game may be given. The selection operation may be configured to be feasible during the symbol determination period.

Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the contents of the time saving / probability variation 2 table 202ac2 will be described. FIG. 94 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving / probability variation 2 table 202ac2 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 94, the time reduction / probability variation 2 table 202ac2 has a variation pattern corresponding to the special figure 1 with respect to the time reduction / probability variation table 202f2 (see FIG. 19A) of the first embodiment described above. They differ in that they have different lengths. Other than that, it is the same as the time saving / probability variation table 202f2 (see FIG. 19A). The detailed description of the same element will be omitted.

That is, in the present embodiment, the latent probability state is set during the stop display period (symbol confirmation period) of the special symbol when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery (lottery of special figure 1) during the probability change state. Therefore, the variation display period of the special figure 1 in the probabilistic state is configured to be shorter than that of the first embodiment.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 95. FIG. 95 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 95, in the second embodiment, the probability variation counter 203aa is provided in place of the probability variation flag 203g, the special figure 1 symbol determination flag 203ab, and the special figure 2 The difference is that the symbol 203ac, the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad, and the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae are added. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

The probability variation counter 203aa is a counter for continuing the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed in the high probability state (latent state, probability variation state) of the special symbol, and is a period during which the special symbol lottery is executed with high probability. It is for showing.

The probability variation counter 203aa is a value specified according to the winning jackpot type at the timing when the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON in the jackpot end processing (see S2312 in FIG. 54) of the first embodiment described above. 92) is set, the value is referred to in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98) (S451 in FIG. 98), and the jackpot lottery according to the value set in the probability variation counter 203aa is performed. It is executed (see S403 and S404 in FIG. 98). It is also referred to when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the same manner (see S953 in FIG. 102).

Then, the value is decremented by 1 at the timing when the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol (Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2) has elapsed, and is reset to 0 at the timing when the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol won by the jackpot has elapsed. ..

The special figure 1 symbol confirmation flag 203ab is a flag for indicating that the first special symbol (special figure 1) is stopped and displayed, and when it is set to on, the stop display of the special figure 1 is displayed. It indicates that it is during the period (during the symbol confirmation period). This special symbol 1 symbol confirmation flag 203ab is set to on (see S2802 in FIG. 100) in the first special symbol determination period setting process (see S852 in FIG. 100), and the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (see FIG. 99). See S257). Then, when it is determined that the symbol determination period has elapsed (S853: Yes in FIG. 99), it is set to off.

The special figure 2 symbol confirmation flag 203ac is a flag for indicating that the second special symbol (special figure 2) is stopped and displayed, and when it is set to on, the stop display of the special figure 2 is displayed. It indicates that it is during the period (during the symbol confirmation period). This special figure 2 symbol fixing flag 203ac sets the type of the target special symbol from the first special symbol (special figure 1) to the second special symbol (special figure) with respect to the above-mentioned special figure 1 symbol fixing flag 203ab. The only difference is that it has been changed to 2), and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad and the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ac are counters for measuring the symbol fixing period of the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special figure 2). , When the first special symbol (special diagram 1) or the second special symbol (special diagram 2) 1 is stopped and displayed, a value indicating the current symbol determination period is set in the corresponding counter. Then, in the process during the fixed time (see S860 in FIG. 101) that is periodically executed, the values of the counters are subtracted, and the values of the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad and the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ac become 0. In this case, the process of ending the symbol determination period of the special symbol is executed.

In the second embodiment, different symbol determination periods are set according to the type for showing the lottery result of the special symbol (see FIGS. 92 and 93). Then, the latent state is set as the game state during this symbol determination period.

Next, the information stored in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 96, in the RAM 223 of the second embodiment, in addition to the electrical configuration of the first embodiment described above, the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa, the special figure 2 confirmation counter 223ab, and the remaining confirmation time information storage area The difference is that 223ac and the confirmation flag 223ad are added.

The special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa is a counter for measuring a period (symbol confirmation period) for stopping and displaying the first special symbol, and is a symbol confirmation period of the first special symbol (special figure 1) from the main control device 110. When a confirmation command including information for indicating the above is received, the value corresponding to the symbol confirmation period of the special figure 1 is set.

The value set in the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa is periodically subtracted by various counter update processes 2 (see FIG. 111) executed every 1 millisecond. In the second embodiment, the latent state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is configured to be set during the symbol determination period of the special symbol (first special symbol). 1 By managing the value of the confirmation counter 223aa, it is possible to set the remaining period information indicating the remaining period in which the latent probability state is continuously set.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the small hit of the second special symbol is won during the symbol confirmation period of the special figure 1 (during the latent state game), the value of the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa during the small hit game. Is configured to interrupt the process of subtracting. Therefore, since the symbol determination period of the special figure 1 is not subtracted while the small hit game is being executed, the lottery of the second special symbol can be appropriately executed during the symbol determination period.

In addition to the configuration of the second embodiment described above, a process of accumulating the period during which the subtraction process of the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa is suspended may be provided. Specifically, a small hit game counter is provided to measure the period during which the small hit game is being executed, and the small hit game counter is used to continuously set the small hit game during the latent state. It may be configured to calculate the cumulative period of It may be configured to calculate the cumulative period during the small hit game in the latent state continuously set by using the medium counter.

In this way, by calculating the cumulative interruption information accumulating the period during which the subtraction process of the symbol determination period of Special Figure 1 is interrupted, the result of the current latent state game (RUSH game) is notified to the player. Can be done. Further, as a detailed game result of the latent state game (RUSH game), the cumulative number of acquired balls acquired during the latent state game (RUSH game), the cumulative number of small hits won, and the above-mentioned interruption accumulation Based on the information and the game result indicating whether or not there are more benefits acquired than the design value (or more than the past history), and whether or not the number of balls acquired is large for the number of small hits won. It may be configured to notify the player of the game result shown and the game result indicating whether or not the interruption cumulative information is long with respect to the number of winning small hits. Further, it may be configured to simply notify the cumulative number of acquired balls, the cumulative number of small hits, and the cumulative interruption information.

The special figure 2 confirmation counter 223ab is a counter for measuring a period (symbol confirmation period) for stopping and displaying the second special symbol, and is a symbol confirmation period of the second special symbol (special figure 2) from the main control device 110. When a confirmation command including information for indicating the above is received, the value corresponding to the symbol confirmation period of the special figure 2 is set. The specific contents are the same as those of the above-mentioned special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa, except that the measurement target is changed to the symbol confirmation period of special figure 1 and the symbol confirmation period of special figure 2 is set. The explanation is omitted.

The remaining fixed time information storage area 223ac determines the remaining time (remaining fixed time) of the symbol fixed period at the time when the subtraction process of the symbol fixed period of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is interrupted (temporary stop of special figure 1). It is a data area for storing the remaining fixed time information to be shown. In the second embodiment, an effect mode for restarting the subtraction process of the symbol confirmation period is set based on the remaining confirmation time information stored in the remaining confirmation time information storage area 223ac. As a result, it is possible to predict the period until the latent state ends by grasping the effect mode executed when the small hit game ends and the subtraction process of the symbol determination period is restarted.

When it is determined that the temporary stop related command has been received in the command determination process 2 (see S4162 in FIG. 106) of the voice lamp control device 113 in the remaining fixed time information storage area 223ac (S4219: Yes in FIG. 106). The remaining fixed time information (period A to period C) set in the temporary stop-related process 2 (see S4253 in FIG. 108) to be executed is stored (see S4956, S4958, and S4959 in FIG. 108). Then, it is read when setting the effect mode for resuming the subtraction process of the symbol determination period in the restart process (see S4952 in FIG. 109) executed in the temporary stop-related process 2 (see S4253 in FIG. 108). It is issued (see S5002 and S5052 in FIG. 109) and is referred to when determining an additional effect type (see S5003 and S5053 in FIG. 109).

Since the information for indicating the remaining period of the latent state game is notified when various notification conditions are satisfied in this way, the remaining period of the symbol determination period, that is, the latent state game is It is possible to acquire information indicating the remaining period that can be executed by grasping the production mode of various effects executed during the latent state. Therefore, the player can be made to pay close attention to the effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the second embodiment, the remaining period of the symbol determination period, that is, the remaining period during which the latent state game can be executed is divided into predetermined ranges, and the remaining period information for indicating the divided ranges is provided by the player. By configuring to notify the player, the player is configured to roughly grasp the remaining period of the latent state game and to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting the specific remaining period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the player may be configured to notify the player of the specific remaining period in seconds.

The confirmation flag 223ad is a flag for indicating that the special symbol is in the stop display period (symbol confirmation period), and is set to ON when the special symbol is in the stop display period (symbol confirmation period). The flag. The confirmation flag 223ad is configured to be set to ON even if any of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) is in the symbol confirmation period. There is.

The confirmation flag 223ad is executed when it is determined that the symbol confirmation related command has been received in the command determination process 2 (see S4152 in FIG. 106) of the voice lamp control device 113 (S4254: Yes in FIG. 106). It is set to on in related processing (see S4255 in FIG. 110) (see S5077 in FIG. 110). Then, when it is determined in the temporary stop-related process 2 (see S4253 in FIG. 108) that the special figure 1 temporary stop command has been received (see S4951 in FIG. 108), the fluctuation state of the special figure 1 is during the symbol determination period. It is referred to to determine whether or not it is (see S4953 in FIG. 108). Further, when it is determined that the special figure 1 restart command has been received in the restart process (S4952 in FIG. 109) executed in the temporary stop-related process 2 (see S4253 in FIG. 108), it is also determined (S5001: Yes in FIG. 109). , It is referred to in order to determine whether or not the fluctuation state of the special figure 1 is in the symbol fixing period (see S5051 in FIG. 109).

As described above, in the second embodiment, at the time when the small hit is won by the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) (when the small hit game is executed) or at the time when the small hit game is completed. It is determined whether the fluctuation state of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is in the fluctuation display period or the symbol confirmation period, and based on the determination result, the special figure 1 is temporarily stopped (variation display period, It is configured to set the processing when the subtraction of the symbol fixing period is interrupted) and the effect mode when restarting the special figure 1 (restarting the subtraction of the variable display period and the symbol fixing period).

With this configuration, processing is appropriately executed regardless of the fluctuation state of the first special symbol (special figure 1) at the timing when the small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2). can do.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the second embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 to 105. The control process of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment replaces the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 32) with respect to the control process of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment described above. (See FIG. 97), instead of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34), the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see FIG. 98), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 38). The second special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see FIG. 102) and the second special symbol variation stop process instead of the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (see FIG. 99) and the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 40). The second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (see FIG. 103) is replaced with (see FIG. 45), and the special figure 2 disengagement stop process 2 (see FIG. 105) is executed instead of the special figure 2 disengagement stop process (see FIG. 46). The difference is that the first special symbol fixing period setting process (see FIG. 100) and the second special symbol fixing period setting process (see FIG. 104) are newly added. Other than that, the same processing is executed. The same processing is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, among the contents of the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the second embodiment, the points that are significantly different from the first embodiment described above will be briefly described. In the first embodiment described above, the latent state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is configured to be set during the variable display period of one of the special symbols (special figure 1). More specifically, in the state where the probabilistic state is set, the latent state is set during the variable display period of the special symbol won by the jackpot, and the latent state game (RUSH game) is played until the variable display period ends. It was configured to execute and execute the jackpot game immediately after the variable display period ended. As a result, it is possible for the player to continuously perform two different privilege games (a game in which a small hit occurs frequently in a latent state and a big hit game), and the player can play many games in a short period of time. It was possible to give the privilege of.

Further, since the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed in the state before the jackpot game is executed, the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed with peace of mind. In other words, even if the game result on the first half side is not good, by setting the big hit game, which generally gives the player a larger privilege than the small hit game, on the second half side of two consecutive privilege games. , It was possible to enthusiastically acquire benefits in the game (big hit game) executed on the latter half side.

In addition, since the latent state game (RUSH game) is configured to be performed during the execution of the jackpot fluctuation, it is possible to set in advance the period during which the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed. can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed for an unexpectedly long time and the privilege is excessively given to the player.

In addition, the period during which the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed varies according to the fluctuation pattern selected when the jackpot is won. In other words, since it is configured to determine whether or not the jackpot game is executed and the length of the game period of the latent state game (RUSH game) by one lottery of the special symbol, the latent state game ( The processing load of the main control device 110 can be reduced as compared with the case where the processing using the dedicated selection table is executed in order to preset the length of the game period of the RUSH game).

However, in the configuration of the first embodiment described above, since the gaming period of the latent state game (RUSH game) is determined only by the fluctuation pattern (variable time) of the special symbol, the latent state game In order to prepare a plurality of game periods of (RUSH game), it is necessary to prepare a plurality of fluctuation patterns (variation times) in advance, which may put pressure on the data area for storing the fluctuation patterns.

Therefore, in the second embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the first embodiment described above, the period during which the special symbol is stopped and displayed (symbol confirmation period) is also the period during which the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed. In addition, the length of the symbol determination period is different depending on the symbol type based on the lottery result of the special symbol.

With this configuration, the game period of the latent state game (RUSH game) can be set by adding (combining) the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the symbol confirmation period, so that the latent state can be set. It is possible to set a plurality of patterns for the game period of the game (RUSH game) with a small amount of data.

Further, even in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) during the latent state game (RUSH game), a different symbol confirmation period is set according to the lottery result, so that it is set. Depending on the symbol determination period, the number of lottery of the special figure 2 executed during the predetermined latent state game (RUSH game) period (variable display time of the special figure 1) can be made different.

That is, in the lottery of the first special symbol that sets the game period of the latent state game (RUSH game), it is desired that a longer symbol confirmation period is set, and the latent state game (RUSH game). In the second special symbol lottery that is repeatedly executed during the game, it is a game that requires a shorter symbol determination period to be set, and the novelty is that different lottery results are desired depending on the special symbol type that is the target of the lottery. It is possible to provide a player with a certain playability.

Further, in the second embodiment, a process for shifting the high-probability state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state (subtraction process of the time reduction counter 203f) is executed at the start of the change of the special symbol, and the high-probability state of the special symbol is executed. Is configured to be executed at the end of the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol (subtraction process of the probability variation counter 203aa) for shifting to the low probability state, and the high probability state of the special symbol is set. When the number of fluctuations (lottery) of the special symbol reaches the predetermined number of times (50 times), the high probability state of the special symbol is shifted to the low probability state, and the special symbol is set in the high probability state. When the number of fluctuations (number of lottery) of the symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (50 times), the high-probability state of the normal symbol can be changed to the low-probability state.

That is, when the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set and the number of fluctuations (lottery count) of the special symbol reaches 50 times, the fluctuation (50th variation). ) Is started, the gaming state shifts to the latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), and the timing when the fluctuation (50th fluctuation) ends (end of symbol confirmation period). At times), the gaming state can be changed to the normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol).

With this configuration, even if the jackpot is not won, the latent state can be set only for a predetermined specific period (50th fluctuation period (including the symbol confirmation period)). , It is possible to make it easier for the player to experience the latent state game (RUSH game).

First, with reference to FIG. 97, the special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S154) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation processing 2 (S154). The special symbol variation stop process 2 (S154) adds the processes of S251 and S252 to the special symbol variation process (S154) in the above-described first embodiment, and adds the processes of S251 and S252 to the first special symbol variation stop process (S207). The difference is that the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S263) is executed instead of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257) and the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S213).

In the special symbol variation processing 2 (S154), when it is determined that the value of the special diagram 1 variation time counter 203m is 0 in the processing of S204 (S204: No), the special symbol 1 symbol determination in progress flag 203ab is turned on. It is determined whether it is set (S251). When it is determined that the special figure 1 symbol determination in progress flag 203ab is set to ON (S251: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257) is executed, and the process proceeds to S209. The details of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S257) will be described later with reference to FIG. 99. On the other hand, in the process of S251, when it is determined that the special figure 1 symbol determination in progress flag 203ab is set to off (S251: No), the first special symbol change start process (S208) is executed, and S209 Move to processing.

When it is determined in the above-mentioned processing of S206 that the value of the fluctuation time counter 203m in FIG. 1 is not 0 (greater than 0) (S206: No), or when the processing of S208 and S257 is executed, the special feature is next. FIG. 2 It is determined whether the value of the fluctuation time counter 203n is larger than 0 (S209). When it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n is not larger than 0 (0) (S209: No), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 symbol fixing flag 203ac is set to ON. (S252).

In the processing of S252, when it is determined that the special figure 2 symbol fixing flag 203ac is not set to ON (S252; No), that is, by the processing of S209 and S252, the present is the second special symbol (special drawing 2). If it is determined that neither the variation display nor the symbol confirmation period is in effect, the second special symbol variation start process is executed in order to newly start the variation of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) (S210), and then the book. End the process. Since the processing content of the second special symbol change start processing (S210) is the same as that of the first embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, in the process of S252, when it is determined that the special figure 2 symbol fixing flag 203ac is set to ON (S252: Yes), that is, the present is during the symbol fixing period of the second special symbol (special figure 2). If it is determined that the above is the case, the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S263) is executed, and this process is terminated. The details of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S263) will be described later with reference to FIG. 103.

Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S356) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S356). In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S356), the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is larger than 0 in place of the process of S402 with respect to the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) in the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the process (S451) for determining whether or not the product is executed is executed.

That is, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, when the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the high probability state of the special symbol is continued until the jackpot of the special symbol is won. The probability variation flag 203g was used to indicate that it is in a high probability state, but in the second embodiment, as a condition for ending the high probability state of the special symbol, the jackpot winning of the special symbol (first end condition) is used. In addition, it has a second end condition that is satisfied when the number of fluctuations (number of lottery) of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times). Therefore, the probability variation counter 203aa is used to measure the number of fluctuations (number of lottery) of the special symbol during the period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set. This probability variation counter 203aa is for measuring the number of fluctuations (number of lottery) of the special symbol until the above-mentioned second end condition is satisfied, and the value is updated based on the execution of the special symbol lottery. It is configured to be.

Even if the configuration is other than the present embodiment, it may be any configuration as long as it can determine whether or not the above-mentioned second end condition is satisfied. For example, the probability variation flag 203 g used in the first embodiment and the second embodiment are used. The probability variation counter 203aa used in the embodiment may be used, or a variation count counter for always measuring the variation count (lottery count) of the special symbol regardless of the gaming state is provided, and the setting status of the probability variation flag 203g and the setting status of the probability variation flag 203g are provided. It may be configured to determine the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the probabilistic state based on the number of updates of the fluctuation count counter.

Further, in the second embodiment, the number of changes of the special symbol, that is, the number of changes of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the number of changes of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are added to the total number of times. The end condition (second end condition) for ending the probabilistic state is set, but it is not limited to this, and only the number of changes (number of lottery) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is measured. FIG. 1 A fluctuation count counter and a special figure 2 fluctuation counter that measures only the fluctuation count (lottery count) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are provided, and the fluctuation count (lottery count) of each special symbol is provided. It may be configured to set each end condition (end condition for ending the probability change state).

Further, in the second embodiment, as the end condition for ending the high probability state (for example, the probabilistic state) of the special symbol, in addition to the first end condition based on the jackpot winning of the special symbol, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol The second end condition is set based on (number of lottery times), but other end conditions may be set. For example, the lottery result of the special symbol is a specific lottery result other than the big hit (for example, a small hit). A third end condition that is satisfied when the number of times the game has reached a predetermined number of times may be set, and further, the third end condition is determined by the lottery result of the first special symbol, the lottery result of the second special symbol, and the lottery result. May be set for each.

In addition, a timekeeping counter is provided to measure the time when the high probability state of the special symbol is set, and the fourth end condition that is satisfied when the timekeeping counter clocks the predetermined time and the high probability state of the special symbol are set. A fifth end condition that can be established based on the lottery result of the ordinary symbol executed in the state of being executed and the number of lottery may be provided.

Further, when any of the plurality of termination conditions described above is satisfied, the timing for shifting the high-probability state of the special symbol to the low-probability state is set to a timing other than the timing used in the second embodiment. It is also good, for example, immediately before starting the lottery of the special symbol, immediately after the lottery of the special symbol is executed, the timing of starting the fluctuation of the special symbol, or the predetermined time after the fluctuation of the special symbol is started (for example,). The timing when 5 seconds have passed, the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol has stopped, the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 second) has elapsed since the special symbol was stopped and displayed, and the stop display period of the special symbol (design confirmed). It may be configured to shift at any timing of the end timing of the period).

By providing a plurality of end conditions for ending the high-probability state of the special symbol and a timing for ending the high-probability state of the special symbol when the end condition is satisfied, it is special for the player. Since it is possible to make it difficult to understand how long the high-probability state of the symbol will continue and at what timing (at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, at the stop of fluctuation, at the end of the symbol confirmation period), the player is nervous. It is possible to play a game while giving a feeling.

Since the other processes of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S356) are the same as those of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257), which is one of the processes in the special symbol variation process 2 (S154) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. Will be explained. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S257). The first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S257) is a process (S851 to S858) executed during the symbol determination period of the special symbol with respect to the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S207) in the above-described first embodiment. , S860) is different from the point that the content of the reset process when the first special symbol (special figure 1) won by the jackpot is stopped and displayed is different. Since other processes are the same as the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S207), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, returning to FIG. 97, the conditions under which the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257 in FIG. 99) is executed will be described. In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S257 in FIG. 99), a process of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol, a process of setting a period for stopping and displaying the special symbol (symbol confirmation period), and a process of setting the set symbol confirmation. The process of measuring the period and various execution processes corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol after the symbol determination period has elapsed are configured to be executed.

Therefore, in the process of S206 of FIG. 97, that is, the timing of stopping the change of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the process of determining whether or not it is the timing to end the change of the first special symbol (special figure 1). (The value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is 0) (S206: Yes in FIG. 97), and the processing of S251, that is, the present is the first special symbol (special figure 1). When it is determined that the stop display of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is being performed (the special figure 1 symbol confirmation flag 203ab is set to on) in the process of determining whether or not the stop display is in progress. (S251: Yes in FIG. 97) is executed.

Returning to FIG. 99, the explanation will be continued. In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S257), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 finalizing flag 203ab is set to ON (S851). Here, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 has elapsed and the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257) is executed in order to stop and display the special figure 1, that is, in the process of S206 of FIG. 97. When the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S257) is executed because the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter is determined to be 0, the special figure 1 confirmation flag 203ab is not set to ON. , It is determined in the process of S851 that the special figure 1 symbol fixing flag 203ab is not set to on (set to off) (S8511: No), and the first special symbol fixing period setting process is executed (S852). ).

In the first special symbol confirmation period setting process (S852), the process is executed to set the period (symbol confirmation period) for stopping and displaying the special symbol. Here, with reference to FIG. 100, the first special symbol determination period setting process, which is one of the processes in the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. (S852) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol determination period setting process (S852). In the first special symbol confirmation period setting process (S852), the process of setting the confirmation time (symbol confirmation period) and setting the command to be transmitted to the first symbol display device 37, and the first special symbol (special symbol) of this time. When the lottery result of 1) is a big hit, the process for shifting the high-probability state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state is executed.

In the second embodiment, as a condition for shifting the high-probability state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state (time-saving end condition), when the jackpot of the special symbol is won (first time-saving end condition), the normal symbol is used. When the number of changes in the special symbol (number of lottery) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) in the state where the high probability state of is continuously set (second time reduction end condition), two time reduction ends. If the condition is satisfied and the above-mentioned first time reduction end condition is satisfied, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set at the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed (the start timing of the symbol confirmation period), and the second When the two-time reduction end condition is satisfied, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol is started (the timing when the lottery of the special symbol is executed). ..

In this way, multiple conditions (time-saving end conditions) that trigger the transition of the high-probability state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state are provided, and the transition timing to the low-probability state is different depending on the established time-saving end condition. By configuring to, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set at what timing for the player playing the game in the game state (time saving state, probability change state) in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. Since it is possible to make it difficult to predict whether or not the game will shift to the game state (normal state, latent state), it is possible to always pay attention to the game content and provide a game that does not get tired.

In the second embodiment, the state of the normal symbol is changed according to the above-mentioned contents, but other configurations may be used, for example, immediately before starting the lottery of the special symbol or the special symbol. Immediately after the lottery is executed, the timing to start the fluctuation of the special symbol, the timing to elapse a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, the timing to stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, etc. , It is configured to shift at any timing of the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 second) has elapsed from the stop display of the special symbol or the end timing of the stop display period (symbol confirmation period) of the special symbol. May be.

In the first special symbol confirmation period setting process (S852), first, a value indicating the confirmation time (symbol confirmation time) corresponding to the stopped symbol is set in the special figure 1 confirmation time counter 203ad (S2801). In the second embodiment, the fixed time corresponds to each type selected in various tables (big hit type selection 2 table 202aa, small hit type selection 2 table 202ab, loss type selection table ad) used in the special symbol lottery. Since (symbol confirmation period) is specified, a value indicating the confirmation time (symbol confirmation period) corresponding to the type stopped and displayed this time is set in the special figure 1 confirmation time counter 203ad. Specifically, for example, if the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot and the jackpot type selected using the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa (see FIG. 92) is the jackpot A3, it is confirmed. Since 150 seconds is specified as the time (design confirmation period), a value indicating 150 seconds is set in the special figure 1 confirmation time counter 203ad.

Next, the special figure 1 symbol determination flag 203ab is set to on (S2802), and it is determined whether the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to on (S2803). When it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON (S2803: Yes), that is, it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol for which the confirmation time (symbol confirmation time) is set is a jackpot. If so, the value of the time saving counter 203f is reset in order to shift the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state (S2804). On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is not set to ON (S2803: No), the processing of S2804 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2805. As a result, only when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the low probability state of the normal symbol can be set at the timing of stopping and displaying the special symbol.

In addition, for example, when the jackpot of the special symbol is won (first time reduction end condition), the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (number of lottery) is a predetermined number of times (the number of lottery) in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is continuously set. For example, when the time (50 times) is reached (second time reduction end condition) and when the two time reduction end conditions are satisfied based on the same special symbol lottery, it is determined whether or not the first time reduction end condition is satisfied. Since the process of determining whether or not the second time-saving end condition is satisfied is prioritized over the process of performing, the special symbol jackpot is won when setting the symbol determination period of the special symbol. Even in this case, the processing of S2804 will be skipped.

After executing the process of S2803 or S2804, it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is larger than 0 in the process of S2805 (S2805). When it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203aa is larger than 0 (S2805: Yes), a state command indicating the latent probability state is set (S2806), and the process proceeds to S2808. On the other hand, in the process of S2805, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is 0 (S2805: No), a state command indicating a normal state is set (S2807), and the process proceeds to the process of S2808. After executing the process of S2806 or S2807, the special figure 1 confirmation command is set (S2808). Next, the fluctuation of the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S2809), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 99, the explanation will be continued. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S851 that the special figure 1 symbol fixing flag 203ab is set to ON (S851: Yes), that is, the present is during the symbol fixing period of the first special symbol (special figure 1). If it is determined that there is, the process of S852 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S853. In the special symbol variation process 2 (see S154 in FIG. 97), it is determined that the special figure 1 confirming flag 203ab is set to ON (S251: Yes in FIG. 97), and the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (see S154 in FIG. 97). When (see S257 in FIG. 99) is executed, it is determined that the special figure 1 symbol determination in progress flag 203ab is set to ON in the process of S851.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad is 0 (S853). That is, it is determined whether or not the present is the timing when the symbol determination period of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) has elapsed. Here, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 confirmation time counter 203ad is not 0 (1 or more), that is, it is determined that the present is in the symbol confirmation period of the first special symbol (special figure 1). In the case (S853: No), the process during the fixed time (S860) is executed, and the present process is terminated. This fixed time processing (S860) executes a process of updating the elapsed time of the symbol fixed period, or updates the elapsed time of the symbol fixed period that has been temporarily stopped based on the execution of the small hit game. The process for resuming the process is executed, and the detailed contents thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 101.

On the other hand, in the process of S853, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad is 0 (S853: Yes), that is, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the fixed time (design fixed period). , Special figure 1 symbol fixing flag 203ab is set to off (S854). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is larger than 0 (S855). When it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is larger than 0 (S855: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is subtracted by 1 (S856). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is 0 (S855: Yes), the processing of S856 is skipped and the process proceeds to S857. In the process of S857, a state command corresponding to the values of the time saving counter 203f and the probability variation counter 203aa is set (S857).

By executing the process of S856 described above, in the present embodiment, after the stop display period of the special symbol has elapsed (after the symbol determination period has elapsed), the process of subtracting the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is executed and subtracted. When the value of the subsequent probability variation counter 203aa becomes 0, the high probability state of the special symbol is configured to shift to the low probability state. As a result, the probability variation end condition (condition for shifting the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state) that is satisfied when the number of fluctuations (lottery number) of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times) is satisfied. In this case, the low probability state of the special symbol is set after the stop display period of the special symbol has elapsed, so that the special symbol is high during the variable display period of the target special symbol and during the symbol confirmation period. It can be a stochastic state. Therefore, for example, even if the above-mentioned probability change end condition is satisfied due to the change (lottery) of the first special symbol, the probability state of the special symbol is high during the change display period of the first special symbol and the symbol confirmation period. The second special symbol change (lottery) can be executed in the state where is set.

To specifically explain the content of the state command set in the process of S857 described above, when the value of the time saving counter 203f is larger than 0 (when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set), the probability variation counter When the value of 203aa is larger than 0, a state command indicating that the gaming state is in the probabilistic state is set, and when the value of the probabilistic counter 203aa is 0, it indicates that the gaming state is in the time saving state. The status command is set. Further, when the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 (when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set) and the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is larger than 0, the gaming state is the latent state. When the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is 0, the state command indicating that the gaming state is the normal state is set.

Further, in the process of S857, when the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is larger than 0 (1 or more), the value of the probability variation counter 203aa, that is, the residual probability variation count command is set as information indicating the residual probability variation count. The state command and the residual probability variation number command set in the process of S857 are output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (see S2201 of FIG. 52) of the main process (see FIG. 52) of the main control device 110. Will be done. The voice lamp control device 113 receives various commands output from the main control device 110, and executes a process corresponding to the command received in the command determination process 2 (see S4162 in FIG. 106). As a result, the current gaming situation can be appropriately determined on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

As described above, in the second embodiment, when the first time saving end condition (condition that is satisfied when a big hit is won) is satisfied, the high probability state of the normal symbol is low-probability at the stop display timing of the special symbol. If the second time reduction end condition (condition that is satisfied according to the number of changes in the special symbol (number of lottery)) is satisfied after shifting to the state, the high probability state of the normal symbol is lowered at the start timing of the change of the special symbol. When the probability state is entered and the probability change end condition (the first probability change end condition that is satisfied when a big hit is won, the second probability change end condition that is satisfied according to the number of changes of the special symbol (lottery number)) is satisfied. Is configured to shift the high-probability state of the special symbol to the low-probability state at the end timing of the stop display period (symbol confirmation period) of the special symbol.

With this configuration, the period in which the latent state that is advantageous to the player as the game state is set can be different depending on the time-saving end condition that is established. As a result of the lottery of special symbols, it is possible not only to expect a big hit or not, but also to expect that the length of the period in which an advantageous gaming state is set becomes longer.

Next, the special figure 1 fixed period end command is set (S858), and the same processing as the processing of S801 to S805 in the above-described first embodiment is executed. Next, the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h and the probability variation counter 203aa are reset (S859), the jackpot middle flag 203o is set to ON (S807), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 101, a process during a fixed time (S257 in FIG. 99), which is one process in the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257 in FIG. 99) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. S860) will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the contents of the processing (S860) during the fixed time.

In the process during the fixed time (S860), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S2901). This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to be turned on when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol and the lottery result is stopped and displayed (see S1602 in FIG. 46). Then, during the period during which the small hit game is being executed, the first special symbol variation stop process 2 is not executed in the process of S201 of the special symbol variation process 2 (see S154 of FIG. 97). That is, in the process of S2901 of the process during the fixed time (see S860 of FIG. 101), it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON only after the small hit game is completed. Only when the variation processing 2 (see S154 in FIG. 97) is executed.

Therefore, if it is determined in the processing of S2901 that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S2901: Yes), the special figure 1 restart command is set (S2902), and the special figure 1 temporary stop flag is set. Set 203v to off (S2903) and shift to S2904. That is, in the process of S2901 when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S2901: Yes), the small hit game is executed because the small hit game is finished. The process of S2902 and S2903 is executed in order to restart the update process of the symbol determination period that has been temporarily stopped.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2901 that the temporary stop flag 203v in FIG. 1 is not set to on (set to off) (S2901: No), the processing of S2902 and S2903 is skipped and S2904 is performed. Move to the processing of.

In the process of S2904, the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad is decremented by 1 and updated (S2904), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S2905), and the present process is terminated.

Next, the second special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S953) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 102. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S953). In the second special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S953), the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is changed to the process of S1002 with respect to the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905 in FIG. 40) in the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the process (S1051) for determining whether the value is larger than 0 is executed. Since other processes are the same as the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S903), detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, the content of the process executed in S1051 described above is the same as the content executed in S451 of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98) described above, and thus the details thereof. The explanation is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 103, regarding the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S263), which is one of the processes in the special symbol variation process (S154) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. explain. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S263). The second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S263) adds the processes of S1551 to S1563 to the second special symbol variation stop process (see S213 in FIG. 45) in the first embodiment described above, and S1506. The difference is that the process of S1560 is provided instead of the process of S1509 and the process of S1509 and S1510 is deleted. Since other processes are the same as the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S213 in FIG. 45), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S263), the symbol determination period elapses after the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, similarly to the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (see S257 in FIG. 99) described above. The process up to this is executed, and the difference is that the control target is changed from the first special symbol (special figure 1) to the second special symbol (special figure 2). Of the various processes executed in the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S263), the control target is simply the various processes of the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (see S257 in FIG. 99) described above. The detailed description will be omitted for the processing in which the symbol types are different.

In the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S263), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol 2 symbol confirming flag 203ac is set to ON (S1551). If it is determined that the special figure 2 symbol fixing flag 203ac is set to ON (S1551: Yes), the processing of S1552 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1553. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1551 that the special figure 2 symbol fixing flag 203ab is set to off (S1551: No), the second special symbol fixing period setting process (S1552) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 104, the second special symbol which is one of the processes in the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (see S263 in FIG. 103) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. The fixed period setting process (S1552) will be described. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol determination period setting process (S1552). In the second special symbol confirmation period setting process (S1552), the symbol type targeted for the process executed in the above-mentioned first special symbol determination period setting process (see S852 in FIG. 100) is set to the first special symbol. To the second special symbol, the command to be set is the special symbol 2 confirmation command corresponding to the second special symbol, and the symbol type to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the second special symbol. Only the differences are made, and the other processing contents are the same. Therefore, the content of the first special symbol determination period setting process (see S852 in FIG. 100) described above will be referred to, and a detailed description of this process will be omitted.

Returning to FIG. 103, the description will be continued. After executing the process of S1551 or S1552, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae is 0 (S1553), and the value of the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae is not 0 (that is,). When it is determined (S1553: No), the value of the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae is updated (S1562), and the display of the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S1563). ), End this process.

The process of S1563 updates the display of the second special symbol that has already been stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, the symbol is lit and displayed (including a display that blinks at a high speed to the extent that the player recognizes that the symbol is lit) in order to indicate that the special symbol is stopped by the first symbol display device 37. Therefore, in the process of S1563, an instruction for lighting the second special symbol is output to the first symbol display device 37.

In the case of using the configuration in which the special symbol is continuously lit during the symbol determination period as in the present embodiment, for example, the second special symbol determination period setting process (see S1552 in FIG. 104). In the process of S3009, an instruction for stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol (stop display) is output, and at the same time, information indicating a period for stopping and displaying (design confirmation period) is also output, and a predetermined period (symbol confirmation) is output. During the period), the second special symbol may be configured to be lit and displayed in advance. With this configuration, it is not necessary to execute the process for updating the display content of the first symbol display device 37 each time in the process executed in a short cycle, so that the processing load of the main control device 110 Can be reduced.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae is 0 (S1553: Yes), the special figure 2 symbol fixing flag 203ac is set to off (S1554). Next, when it is determined whether the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to on (S1555) and when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to off (S1555: No), the probability variation counter 203aa It is determined whether or not the value of is greater than 0 (S1556).

When it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is larger than 0 (S1556: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is subtracted by 1 (S1557), and the process proceeds to the processing of the SW effective time counter 223h1558. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1555 that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON (S1555: Yes), or when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is 0 in the processing of S1556. (S1556: No) skips the process of S1557 and shifts to the process of S1558.

In the process of S1558, a state command corresponding to the values of the time reduction counter 203f and the probability change counter 203aa is set (S1558), then the special figure 2 confirmation period end command is set (S1559), and then the first embodiment described above is performed. The same process of S1501 to S1505 is executed. Here, in the process of S1501, when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is not set to on (set to off) (S1501: No), the special figure 2 disengagement stop process 2 (S1561) is determined. ) Is executed to end this process.

Further, when the processing of S1505 is completed, next, the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to off, the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is reset (S1560), and the same processing of S1507 as that of the first embodiment described above is executed. Then, this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 105, the special figure 2 disengagement stop process 2 (S) which is one of the processes in the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S263) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment ( S1561) will be described. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 disengagement stop process 2 (S1561). The special figure 2 disengagement stop process 2 (S1561) in the second embodiment is different from the special figure 2 disengagement stop process (S1508) in the first embodiment in that the processes S1607 to S1610 are not executed. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 106 to 111, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. The control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment is a command determination process 2 instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 59) for the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment described above. (See FIG. 106), the various counter update processes 2 (see FIG. 111) are executed instead of the various counter update processes (see FIG. 71), and the other processes are the same. Specifically, the processing executed when various commands output by changing the control content executed by the main control device 110 from the first embodiment and the various additions from the second embodiment are performed. A process to update the value of the counter has been added.

First, the command determination process 2 (S4162) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 106. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 2 (S4162). The command determination process 2 (S4162) differs from the command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 60) in the above-described first embodiment in that the processes of S4251 to S4255 are added. Since other processes are the same as the command determination process (S4112) in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the command determination process 2 (S4162) is executed, first, the same processes as S4201 to S4216, which are the same as the command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 60) in the first embodiment described above, are executed. Then, in the process of S4215, when it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S4215: No), then it is determined whether or not the remaining number-related command has been received (S4251). ).

Here, as the command related to the remaining number of times, the remaining time reduction command (set by the process of S603 in FIG. 36) indicating the remaining number of times (the number of remaining fluctuations of the special symbol) in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is continuously set is set. There is a residual probability variation number command (command set by the process of S857 in FIG. 99) indicating the remaining number of times (the number of remaining fluctuations of the special symbol) in which the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set. If it is determined that the command related to the remaining number of times has been received (S4251: Yes), the remaining number of times update process 2 (S4252) is executed, and this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 107, the remaining number update process 2 (S4252), which is one process in the command determination process 2 (S4162) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described. .. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the contents of the remaining number update process 2 (S4252). The remaining number update process 2 (S4252) differs from the remaining number update process (S4218) in the first embodiment described above in that the processes S4851 to S4852 are added. Specifically, it differs in that a process for transmitting a command for displaying the residual probability variation number to the display control device 114 is added.

In the remaining number update process 2 (S4252), first, it is determined whether or not the remaining time reduction command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4801). When it is determined that the remaining time reduction command has been received (S4801: Yes), the display remaining time reduction command corresponding to the command is set (S4802). On the other hand, if it is determined that the command for the number of remaining time reductions has not been received (S4801: No), the process of S4802 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S4851. Next, it is determined whether or not the residual probability variation number command has been received (S4851). When it is determined that the residual probability variation count command has been received (S4851: Yes), the display residual probability variation count command corresponding to the command is set (S4852), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the residual probability variation number command has not been received (S4851: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Returning to FIG. 106, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4251 that the remaining number-related command has not been received (S4251: No), it is determined whether or not the temporary stop-related command has been received (S4219). Here, the temporary stop-related command includes the special figure 1 temporary stop command (see S1603 in FIG. 46) that is set when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v for temporarily stopping the first special symbol is set to ON. And the variable display of the first special symbol that has been temporarily stopped, or the special figure 1 restart command (see S2902 in FIG. 101) that is set when the stop display is restarted. If it is determined that the temporary stop-related command has been received (S4219: Yes), the temporary stop-related process 2 (S4253) is executed, and this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 108, a temporary stop-related process 2 (S4253), which is one process in the command determination process 2 (S4162) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described. .. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the contents of the temporary stop-related process 2 (S4253). The temporary stop-related process 2 (S4253) is different from the temporary stop-related process (S4203) in the first embodiment described above in that a process for calculating the remaining fixed time is added.

In this temporary stop-related process 2 (S4253), when the variation display of the first special symbol or the elapsed time of the stop display is temporarily interrupted (temporary stop), the temporarily stopped first special symbol is displayed. Processing is performed for the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variable display mode or the effect mode corresponding to the stop display mode. In the temporary stop-related process 2 (S4253), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 temporary stop command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4951). If it is determined that the temporary stop command has not been received (S4951: No), the restart process (S4952) is executed and the present process is terminated. The details of the restart process (S4952) will be described later with reference to FIG. 109. On the other hand, in the process of S4951, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop command has been received (S4951: Yes), that is, the variation display of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is performed with the execution of the small hit game, or If it is determined that it is the timing to temporarily stop the stop display, then it is determined whether the confirmation flag 223ad is set to ON (S4953). Here, when it is determined that the confirmation flag 203ab is set to ON (S4953: Yes), the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (during the symbol confirmation period), so that the set symbol confirmation time is set. The remaining time of (the symbol confirmation time of the first special symbol) is calculated (S4954), and the process proceeds to S4955.

In the process of S4954, the value of the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa, that is, the value indicating the remaining time of the symbol confirmation time of the first special symbol is read to calculate the remaining time of the set symbol confirmation time. Next, it is determined whether the remaining time of the symbol determination time calculated in the process of S4954 is less than 2 seconds (S4955). If it is determined that the remaining time is less than 2 seconds (S4955: Yes), a period A indicating that the remaining fixed time is short is set in the remaining fixed time information storage area 223ac (S4956), and the process of S4952 is executed. Then, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4955, when it is determined that the remaining time is not less than 2 seconds (2 seconds or more) (S4955: No), then the remaining time is 2 seconds or more and less than 60 seconds. (S4957). In the process of S4957, when it is determined that the remaining time is 2 seconds or more and less than 60 seconds (S4957: Yes), it is determined that the remaining fixed time information storage area 223ac has a normal remaining fixed time. The indicated period B is set (S4958), the process of S4952 is executed, and the present process is terminated.

When it is determined in the process of S4957 that the remaining time is not less than 60 seconds (60 seconds or more) (S4957: No), it indicates that the remaining confirmation time is long in the remaining confirmation time information storage area 223ac. The period C is set (S4959), the process of S4952 is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4953, when it is determined that the confirmation flag 223ad is set to off (S4953: No), that is, when it is determined that the present is in the variable display period of the first special symbol, The process for calculating the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol (see S4903 to S4908) executed in the temporary stop-related process of the first embodiment described above (see S4220 in FIG. 67) is executed, and the process of S4952 is executed. Move to. Since the process for calculating the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol (see S4903 to S4908) is the same as that of the first embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 109, a restart process (S4952), which is a process in the temporary stop-related process 2 (S4253) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the contents of the restart process (S4952).

In the second embodiment, in addition to the variable display of the first special symbol (during the variable display period), the second special symbol can be changed (lottery) even during the stop display (during the symbol confirmation period). Since it is configured, when the small hit game is executed based on the lottery result of the second special symbol, the stop display of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped (subtraction of the symbol confirmation period is temporarily suspended). It is configured as follows. Further, at the timing when the small hit game is completed, the stop display of the first special symbol is restarted (the subtraction of the symbol confirmation period is restarted). Therefore, in the second embodiment, the situation of the first special symbol when the variable display or the stop display of the first special symbol is restarted is determined, and the effect mode after the restart is set based on the determination result. It is configured to do.

In the restart process (S4952), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 restart command has been received (S5001). If it is determined that the special figure 1 restart command has not been received (S5001: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 restart command has been received (S5001: Yes), it is determined whether or not the confirmation flag 223ad is set to ON (S5051). When it is determined that the confirmation flag 223ad is set to ON (S5051: Yes), that is, when the timing of receiving the special figure 1 restart command is during the stop display of the first special symbol, the remaining confirmation Based on the reading of the remaining fixed time information stored in the time information storage area 223ac (S5052), the read remaining fixed time information and the additional effect counter 223i, the additional effect type is determined from the additional effect selection 2 table 222aa (). S5053), an additional display effect command corresponding to the additional effect type determined in the process of S5053 is set (S5054), and the information set in the remaining fixed time information storage area 223ac is cleared (S5055). Then, the finalizing flag 223ad is set to off (S5056), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5051, when it is determined that the confirmation flag 223ad is set to off (S5051: No), that is, the timing at which the special figure 1 restart command is received is in the variation display of the first special symbol. In some cases, the same process of S5002 to S5005 as the variable resumption process of the first embodiment described above (S4902 in FIG. 68) is executed, and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 106, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4219 that the temporary stop-related command has not been received (S4219: No), it is determined whether or not the symbol determination-related command has been received (S4254). If it is determined that the symbol confirmation-related command has been received (S4254: Yes), the symbol confirmation-related process (S4255) is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the symbol confirmation related command has not been received (S4254: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S4221), and this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 110, a symbol determination-related process (S4255), which is one process in the command determination process 2 (S4162) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the contents of the symbol determination related process (S4255).

In the symbol confirmation-related processing (S4255), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 confirmation command has been received from the main control device 110 (S5071). When it is determined that the special figure 1 confirmation command has been received (S5071: Yes), the display special figure 1 confirmation command corresponding to the received command is set (S5072). Next, the value corresponding to the received command is set in the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa (S5073), and the process proceeds to S5074. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5071 that the special figure 1 confirmation command has not been received (S5071: No), the processes of S5072 and S5073 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S5074.

In the process of S5074, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 confirmation command has been received (S5074). When it is determined that the special figure 2 confirmation command has been received (S5074: Yes), the special figure 2 confirmation command for display corresponding to the received command is set (S5075), and the value corresponding to the received command is specified. 2 Set to the confirmation counter 223ab (S5076), set the confirmation flag 223ad to ON (S5077), and end this process. On the other hand, in the process of S5074, if it is determined that the special figure 2 confirmation command has not been received (S5074: No), the process of S5075 and S5076 is skipped as it is, the process of S5077 is executed, and this process is terminated. do.

Next, various counter update processes 2 (S4161) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 111. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the contents of various counter update processes 2 (S4161).

In the various counter update processes 2 (S4161), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa is larger than 0 (S5451). When it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa is larger than 0 (S5451: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa is subtracted by 1 (S5452). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa is 0 (S5451: No), the processing of S5452 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S5453. In the process of S5453, it is determined whether or not the value of the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is larger than 0 (S5453). When it is determined that the value of the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is larger than 0 (S5453: Yes), the value of the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is subtracted by 1 (S5454), and the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa And the value of the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is read out (S5455). Next, the value of the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is subtracted from the value of the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa read in the process of S5455 to calculate the remaining time (S5456). Next, the processes of S5407 and S5408 are executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5453, when it is determined that the value of the sub-special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is 0 (S5453: No), the processes of S5454 to S5456 and S5407 are skipped, and the process of S5408 is executed. , End this process.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 135. The second embodiment described above is configured so that the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) fluctuate at the same time as in the first embodiment described above (so-called). , Simultaneous fluctuation type), so that a large number of small hit games (RUSH games) can be executed by executing the lottery (variation) of Special Figure 2 during the period when the latent state is set as the game state. Was configured in.

Further, as a condition for setting the latent probability state (a condition for enabling the RUSH game to be executed), the first probability change end that is established when the jackpot is won in the lottery of Special Figure 1 in the state where the probability change state is set. A condition and a second probability change end condition that is satisfied when the number of changes (lottery number) of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (50 times) are set, and if the first probability change end condition is satisfied, a big hit is won. When the period (symbol confirmation period) in which the special symbol (special diagram 1) indicating that the special symbol has been stopped is displayed is in the latent state and the second probability change end condition is satisfied, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be in a latent state during the period (variable display period) and the symbol confirmation period.

In addition, the length of the symbol confirmation period is different depending on the lottery result of the special symbol, and the symbol confirmation period is set longer when the jackpot is won than when the jackpot is not won. It was configured as follows.

In addition, if a big hit is won in the lottery of one special symbol (special figure 1), an invalid lottery that does not win the big hit in the lottery of the other symbol (special figure 2) is executed. It was configured so that the value related to the condition for changing the game state was not updated by this invalid lottery. Specifically, during the period when the jackpot is won in the lottery of special figure 1 (during the variable display period of the special symbol winning the jackpot and during the symbol confirmation period), the lottery of special figure 2 is executed. Even if this is done, the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is configured so as not to be updated (subtracted).

In the second embodiment configured in this way, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the special figure 1 in the state where the probability variation state is set, the period during which the jackpot game for the jackpot winning is executed (variable display). Until the period (period, symbol confirmation period) ends, the value of the probability change counter 203aa will not be updated (subtracted) no matter how many times the fluctuation (lottery) of special figure 2 is executed, so special figure 2 can be relieved. Was able to carry out the fluctuations of.

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the types of probability change end conditions are increased as compared with the above-mentioned second embodiment, and the period in which the latent probability state is set is longer than that of the above-mentioned second embodiment. is doing. Specifically, as the probability change end condition, the probability change end condition (third probability change end condition) is satisfied when a small hit is won in the special figure 1 in the state where the probability change state is set, and the third probability change end condition is satisfied. When the probability change end condition is satisfied, the game state is configured to shift from the probability change state to the latent state when the small hit game is started.

Further, the period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set (value of the probability variation counter 203aa) and the period in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set (value of the time reduction counter 203f) are made the same (for example, "4". ”), When the probability change state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set and the jackpot is not won, the game state shifts from the probability change state to the normal state. It is configured in.

That is, in the third embodiment, while the probabilistic state (high probability state for both special symbol and normal symbol) is set, a small hit is won by the lottery of special figure 1, and the normal symbol is moved to the low probability state. By shifting, the period from the start timing of the small hit game to the setting of the low probability state of the special symbol can be set as the latent state.

With this configuration, it is possible to change the period during which the latent state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is continuously set according to the timing of winning a small hit in the lottery of Special Figure 1. .. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more interested in the lottery result of the special symbol, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not get tired of.

Further, in the third embodiment, when a big hit is won in the final variation in which the probability variation state ends, a variation pattern having a long variation time is easily selected. As a result, even if the final fluctuation of the probabilistic state is reached without winning a small hit, the latent probable state can be set for a long time, so that the player can play the game with expectations until the end. Can be made.

Here, with reference to FIG. 112, the types of benefits given based on the game content of the special figure 1 in the probable change state in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 112 is a schematic diagram summarizing the relationship between the game content and the grant privilege of the special figure 1 game after the probability change state is set. As shown in FIG. 112, in the present embodiment, the probability change state is set in a predetermined period (4 fluctuations of the special symbol) after the end of the jackpot, and the number of fluctuations during the probability change state (after the jackpot). The content of the privilege given to the player is made different according to the number of changes in the special figure) and the lottery result of the special figure.

Specifically, in the first and second special figure 1 fluctuations (special figure 1 lottery) after the probability change state is set, if the lottery result (lottery result of special figure 1) is a big hit, there are many players. In addition to the jackpot game in which the prize ball can be obtained, the period during which the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating that the special figure 1 is a jackpot (symbol confirmation period). ) Is set. In addition, when the lottery result (lottery result of special figure 1) is a small hit, the small hit game is executed based on the lottery result of special figure 1 as the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed. After that, it is stipulated that the period (symbol confirmation period) until the number of special symbol changes after the big hit reaches 4 times is set.

That is, when a small hit is won in the first special figure 1 lottery after the end of the big hit, the timing at which the small hit game is started (the timing at which the first special symbol change is stopped and the small hit game is executed). ) To the end of the fourth special figure change after the end of the jackpot, the latent state game (RUSH game) is set. Therefore, as the period in which the latent state (RUSH state) is set, the longest period can be set, which is the "ultra-long". In addition, if the lottery result (lottery result of special figure 1) is out of the first and second special figure 1 fluctuation (special figure 1 lottery) after the probability change state is set, no privilege is given to the player. Is not given.

In the third special figure 1 fluctuation (special figure 1 lottery) after the probability change state is set, the latent probability state is set under the same conditions as the first and second times after the probability change state is set as described above. It is composed. Here, if the small hit is won, in addition to the small hit game, the period until the end of the fourth special figure change is set as the latent state, so after the above-mentioned probability change state is set. Compared to the case where a small hit is won in the 1st and 2nd special figure 1 fluctuation (special figure 1 lottery), the period in which the latent state is set is shorter.

Further, in the third embodiment, as the number of special figure 1 fluctuations (special figure 1 lottery) after the probabilistic change state is set increases during the probabilistic change state, the fluctuation having a longer fluctuation time when the jackpot is won. It is configured so that the pattern can be easily selected. Therefore, it is easier to lengthen the period in which the latent probability state is set as compared with the case where the jackpot is won in the first and second special figure 1 fluctuations (special figure 1 lottery) after the above-mentioned probability change state is set. be able to.

Next, in the fourth special figure change (special figure lottery) after the probability change state is set, that is, in the special figure final change in the probability change state, the special figure change is started regardless of the result of the special figure lottery. The period from to the end (until after the symbol confirmation period has elapsed) is set as the latent state. In the third embodiment, it is easy to set a long fluctuation time when a big hit is won in the final fluctuation of the special map in the probabilistic state (the fourth special map fluctuation after the probabilistic change state is set). The length of the period in which the latent state is set is "long".

Then, if the jackpot is not won due to the final change of the special figure in the probable change state, the normal state is set after the symbol confirmation period elapses, and the fifth and subsequent special figure lottery is executed.

<Regarding the production display content in the third embodiment>
In the third embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 112, the period in which the latent state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is set differs depending on the transition condition (probability change end condition) that is satisfied. In the probable change state, the possibility that the latent state is set and the suggestion effect (bingo game) for suggesting the timing when the latent state is set to the player are executed. It is composed.

Therefore, with reference to FIGS. 113 to 115, the display contents of the suggestion effect (bingo game) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment will be described. Among the elements displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the same elements as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 113 (a), the display contents of the end screen (ending screen) of the jackpot game in which the probability change state is set will be described. FIG. 113A is a schematic diagram schematically showing a display screen at the end of a big hit. As shown in FIG. 113A, in the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the main display area Dm has the same special figure 1 display area Dm1 and special figure 2 display area as the second embodiment described above. Dm2 and a guide display area Dm3 are formed, and in addition, a special figure 1 hold number display area Dm4 showing the number of reserved balls in special figure 1 and a special figure 2 hold number display area Dm5 showing the number of hold balls in special figure 2. , Are formed.

FIG. 113A shows the end screen of the jackpot game executed based on the special figure 1 jackpot, and shows that the lottery result of the special figure 1 is a jackpot in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. The stop display mode “777” of the third symbol is displayed, and “−” indicating that the special figure 2 variation is not executed is displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2. Further, in the guidance display area Dm3, the character "left-handed" is displayed to indicate that the jackpot game was performed in the left-handed game.

In the third embodiment, the game content (right-handed or left-handed) displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 during the jackpot game is the same as the game content at the time of winning the jackpot, as in the second embodiment described above. It is configured to be. That is, the state shown in FIG. 113 (a) is a big hit won during the left-handed game.

Further, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, a bingo card 820 used in a probabilistic state set after the end of the jackpot game is displayed. Here, the suggestion effect (bingo game) executed in the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, Bingo is used as a suggestion effect to suggest to the player whether or not the latent probability state is set or whether or not the jackpot is won during the period when the probability change state is set. The game is configured to run.

In this bingo game, a bingo card 820 (see FIG. 113 (a)) in which arbitrary numbers are arranged for nine squares (vertical 3 x horizontal 3) is displayed on the jackpot end screen (ending screen). , Numbers are announced based on the lottery of Special Figure 1 executed in the state where the probability change state is set, and the number is announced to the player based on the announced number and the arrangement of the numbers described on the Bingo card 820. An effect suggesting a game result (lottery result of special figure 1) is executed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 113 (b) to 115, display contents (effect contents) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during execution of the bingo game will be described. When the bingo game is started (when the special figure 1 fluctuation in the probability change state is started), the display shown in FIG. 113 (b) is executed. FIG. 113 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents displayed when the special figure 1 variation (first time) is executed after the end of the big hit.

As shown in FIG. 113 (b), when the special figure 1 change (first time) is executed, a display mode indicating that the special figure 1 is changing is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. .. Then, "3" is displayed in the special figure 1 reserved number display area Dm4, and it is subtracted (updated) from the value ("4") shown in FIG. 113 (a) due to the fluctuation of the special figure 1. Shows.

Further, in the lower left area of the main display area Dm, the number "1" is displayed as the lottery result 821 of the bingo game based on the lottery result of this time (special figure 1 fluctuation (first time)), and the lower right area. Displays the remaining number display 822 indicating the remaining number "last 3" of the bingo game. Here, for example, an example of the effect in the case where the special figure 1 fluctuation (fourth time) in the probable change state is a big hit will be described with reference to FIG. 114.

FIG. 114 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the bingo game during the fluctuation of the special figure 1 fluctuation (third time) when the special figure 1 fluctuation (fourth time) in the probability change state is a big hit. , FIG. 114 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents during the change of the special figure 1 change (fourth time). In the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 112, in the final variation of the probabilistic state (special figure 1 variation (fourth time)), the latent state is set at the timing when the variation display of the special figure 1 is started. During the latent state, the latent state game (RUSH game) in which the lottery of the special figure 2 is executed by the right-handed game is executed.

Therefore, in order to have the player immediately perform a right-handed game immediately after the final change of the probability change state is executed (after the symbol confirmation period of the special figure 1 change (third time) has elapsed), the latent state is changed. The effect result (displaying two rows of bingo) for notifying that it is set is before the special figure 1 change (4th time) in which the latent state is set (during the special figure 1 change (3rd time)). It is configured to be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to set the latent probability state in a state in which the player fully understands that the latent probability state is set.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, in the third embodiment, if the big hit or the small hit is not won in the lottery of the special figure 1 in the final change of the probable change state (when it is out of order), it is short. The fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time (1 second) is selected, and the effect result (bingo two-row alignment display) for notifying that the latent state is set in the bingo game is not displayed. .. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the notification to the player that the latent state is actually set for a short time, and to execute the failure effect of the bingo game. Further, when the latent state for a short period of time is set, the guide display area Dm3 does not display that the player is to perform the right-handed game, so that the annoyance to the game can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 114 (a), the description will be continued. In FIG. 114 (a), the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 fluctuation (third time) is performed, and the lottery result “1” of the special figure 1 fluctuation (first time) and the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation (second time) are performed. "8" is displayed on the left side of the main display area Dm as the past history 823, and "5" is displayed as the lottery result 821 this time. Then, in the Bingo card 820, the squares corresponding to "1", "8", and "5" displayed in this bingo game are changed to "cross marks", and two rows of lines are formed and displayed. ..

Further, "double bingo" is displayed as a situation display mode 821 indicating the current situation, and a comment of "super lucky" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. In this way, by notifying the player that the bingo game was successful during the change before the special figure 1 change (4th time) that actually wins the jackpot, the player can be directed. It is possible to provide a period of successful satisfaction and to notify in advance that it is necessary to perform a right-handed game from the next fluctuation.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a comment notifying that the right-handed game is performed from the next fluctuation (a comment notifying that the right-handed game condition is satisfied (the condition for setting the latent state is satisfied)). "It's about to be a right-handed game" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds, but the player is notified in advance of the timing when the latent state is set, that is, the timing when the right-handed game is performed. For example, the remaining period until the end of the special figure 1 fluctuation (third time) (the remaining period obtained by adding the remaining fluctuation display period of the special figure 1 fluctuation (third time) and the symbol fixing period) is calculated. A calculation means may be provided, and information based on the calculation result of the calculation means (information for indicating the residual fluctuation period of the special figure 1 variation (third time)) may be notified to the player.

In the third embodiment, when the ball is entered into the second entry port 640 in a state where the probability variation state is set as the gaming state (when the start condition of FIG. 2 is satisfied), the ball is entered into the second entry opening 640. It is configured so that a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time (0.5 seconds to 1 second) is set regardless of the lottery result. As a result, if the right-handed game is performed in the state where the probability change state is set and the fluctuation (lottery) of the special figure 2 is executed, the probability change state is set for the period during which the latent probability state can be set. Since the left-handed game is extremely short compared to the case where the left-handed game is performed in the state and the fluctuation (lottery) is executed in the special figure 2, the right-handed game in the probable change state can be regarded as a disadvantageous game for the player. .. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an act of intentionally performing an irregular game different from the displayed content in the probabilistic state in which "left-handed" is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 of the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the ball is entered into the second entry port 640 in a state where the probability change state is set as the gaming state (when the start condition of FIG. 2 is satisfied). ) Is configured to set a variation pattern with a short variation time (0.5 seconds to 1 second) regardless of the lottery result, but the variation is not limited to this, and the variation in Special Figure 2 during the probability variation state is not limited to this. The time may be configured as a fluctuation time (for example, 120 seconds) extremely longer than the fluctuation time in FIG. 1.

With this configuration, for example, when the right-handed game is performed in a state where the probability change state is set while ignoring the progress content of the suggestion effect (bingo game) executed by the third symbol display device 81. In addition, since the special figure 2 fluctuation for a long time (for example, 120 seconds) is executed, even if the latent state is set after that (for example, the fluctuation of the special figure 1 fluctuation (fourth time) in which the jackpot is won). Even if the display is started), since the special figure 2 change is being executed, a new latent state game (a game that executes the special figure 2 change while the latent state is set) is newly performed. It can be difficult to execute.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the latent probability state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is set based on the fluctuation period of the special symbol (special figure 1) and the symbol determination period, the latent probability state is set. The longer the period from when is set (the predetermined special figure 1 fluctuation starts) to the end of the executing special figure 2 fluctuation, the longer the period during which the special figure 2 fluctuation in the latent state can be executed (latent probability). The state game period) becomes shorter. Further, when a sufficient time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the setting of the latent probability state in order to surely prevent the special figure 2 fluctuation from being executed in the state where the probability change state is set. Similarly, when the right-handed game is started from, the latent state game period is shortened. Therefore, in order to grasp the timing of executing the right-handed game, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed to the player. You can watch the contents displayed on the screen.

Then, when the right-handed game is performed during the latent state and the special figure 2 variation is executed, the effect display during the RUSH game (latent state game) shown in FIG. 114 (b) is displayed by the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed on the display screen of. FIG. 114 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when the fourth special figure change is a big hit after the end of the big hit (after setting the probability change state). In the present embodiment, as in the second embodiment described above, when the latent state is set, the latent state game (RUSH game) in which the variation (lottery) of the special figure 2 is executed by the right-handed game is performed. That is, in the latent state, the right-handed game is an advantageous game, and the left-handed game is a disadvantageous game.

In the display screen shown in FIG. 114 (b), in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, the guidance display area Dm3 is “right-handed”, and the special figure 1 display area Dm1 is changed to the special figure 1 (4). The display mode indicating that the change of the special figure 2) is in progress, and the display mode indicating that the special figure 2 change is being executed are displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2, and the special figure 1 reserved number display area Dm4 displays the display mode. Is displayed with "0" indicating that there is no reserved number of special figure 1, and "0" indicating that there is no reserved number of special figure 2 is displayed in the special figure 2 reserved ball number display area Dm5.

During the period when this RUSH game is being executed, the character 811 imitating a rabbit runs from the left to the right and opens the treasure chest 812 found on the way (the same effect as the first embodiment). Is displayed in the main display area Dm, and in the sub display area Ds, the character "RUSH in progress" indicating that the latent state game (RUSH game) is in progress is displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the current latent state game (RUSH game) is in progress.

In FIGS. 113 to 114 described above, when the second probability change end condition that is satisfied based on the number of changes of the special symbol is satisfied as the probability change end condition for ending the probability change state, that is, the final change of the probability change state (4). An example of the display screen when the latent state is set by the special figure change) was explained. In the third embodiment, as a probability change end condition (a condition for shifting a high probability state of a normal symbol to a low probability state) for ending the probability change state (shifting the probability change state to the latent probability state), the first Probability change end condition (probability change end condition established based on big hit winning), second probability change end condition (probability change end condition established based on the number of changes of special symbol), third probability change end condition (established based on small hit winning) It has a probability change end condition), and is configured to shift the gaming state from the probability change state to the latent state when any of the end conditions is satisfied.

Next, with reference to FIG. 115 (a), the display displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the first probability variation end condition is satisfied before the above-mentioned second probability variation end condition is satisfied. Explain the contents. FIG. 115A is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display contents executed during the third special figure change in the case where the third special figure change is a big hit after the big hit (after the probability change state is set). It is a figure.

In the third embodiment, when the first probability change end condition (winning the jackpot of the special symbol) is satisfied, the special symbol for indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot is stopped and displayed. It is configured so that the latent state is set during the period until the stop display ends (the symbol confirmation period). Therefore, since the probability variation state is continuously set during the variation display period of the special figure 1 (during the variation of the special figure), in the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 115 (a), the special figure 1 display area Dm1 is special. A display mode indicating that FIG. 1 is in variable display is displayed, and "left-handed" is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3. Then, "4" is displayed on the lottery result 821, and the bingo card 820 is displayed in a display mode indicating that a line has been established.

Further, although detailed description is omitted, in the third embodiment, when the above-mentioned first probability variation end condition is satisfied and the latent probability state is set during the symbol determination period of the special symbol, it becomes a target. It is configured so that different numbers can be displayed multiple times as the lottery result 821 of the bingo game during the variable display period of the special symbol, and the information for showing the final result of this bingo game is notified to the player step by step. It is configured to do.

That is, in the example shown in FIG. 115 (a), the special figure 1 shows a state in which a single row of lines is established during the variable display. For example, the type of the jackpot won this time is a long symbol confirmed. In the case of a jackpot type (for example, jackpot C) in which a period (for example, 300 seconds) is set, a different number as the lottery result 821 of the bingo game during the remaining period until the variable display of the special figure 1 ends. (For example, "5") is newly displayed, and the effect that the result of the bingo game is "establishment of two rows of lines" is executed.

In this way, the result of the bingo game (the number of established lines) is configured to be variable a plurality of times during the variable display of the special symbol. As a result, the content of the privilege (RUSH game, jackpot game) given to the player at the end of this special symbol change can be grasped with the passage of the change display period of the special symbol. 3 The effect content displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 81 can be continuously watched.

In addition, if the type of jackpot won this time is a jackpot type (for example, jackpot A) in which a short symbol confirmation period (for example, 5 seconds) is set, the result of the bingo game (number of established lines) does not change. A number (for example, "3") may be displayed, and the result of the bingo game may be configured to be "a row of lines established".

By configuring in this way, while unifying the number of lottery results 821 displayed by the bingo game (the number of numbers displayed in the past history 823), the result of the bingo game (number of established lines) and the special symbol It is possible to associate the content of the privilege (amount of privilege) given after the end of the variable display of. Therefore, since the player can pay attention to the content and the result of the bingo game, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the third embodiment, the number of lottery results 821 displayed during the bingo game (the number displayed in the past history 823) is unified regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol, and the result of the bingo game. We have shown an effect that makes the player excited about whether or not (the number of established lines) will increase, but it is not limited to this, for example, the content of the privilege (amount of privilege) given after the variable display of the special symbol ends. , The number of lottery results 821 displayed during the bingo game (the number of numbers displayed in the past history 823) may be associated with each other. As a result, it is possible to give a privilege that is advantageous to the player when a large number is displayed as the lottery result 821 during the bingo game, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 115 (b), the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the third probability variation end condition is satisfied will be described. FIG. 115B schematically shows an example of the display content executed during the second special figure change when the second special figure change is a small hit after the big hit (after setting the probability change state). It is a schematic diagram.

The third embodiment is configured so that the timing at which the latent probability state is set differs depending on the type of the probability change end condition that has been established. Specifically, when the first probability change end condition is satisfied, the period (target symbol) from the time when the stop display of the corresponding special symbol is started to the end of the stop display (until the jackpot game is started). When the symbol confirmation period) is set as the latent state and the second probability change end condition is satisfied, from the time when the variation display of the corresponding special symbol is started to the end of the stop display of the corresponding special symbol. The period (variation display period of the target symbol and the symbol confirmation period) is set as the latent state. That is, regardless of which of the above-mentioned first probability change end condition and second probability change end condition is satisfied, the latent probability state is set within the period of the special symbol 1 change.

On the other hand, when the third probability change end condition is satisfied, a small hit is won in any of the multiple (4 times) special figure 1 fluctuations that can be executed within the period in which the probability change state is set. In addition, the latent state is set in the period from the time when the stop display of the special symbol indicating that the lottery result is a small hit is started to the end of the stop display of the special symbol which is the final change of the probability change state. .. That is, if a small hit is won in the special figure lottery (first special figure lottery) executed immediately after the probability change state is set, the special symbol indicating the result (small hit) of the first special lottery is stopped. After being displayed, after the 2nd to 4th special symbol lottery period (variable display period and symbol confirmation period), until the stop display of the special symbol indicating the result of the 4th special symbol lottery is completed (multiple times). The latent state will be set during the special figure fluctuation period).

As shown in FIG. 115 (b), when the third probability change end condition is satisfied, "ALL" for all numbers is displayed in the lottery result 821, and 8 lines (all lines) are satisfied. The Bingo card 820 is displayed in the display mode indicating. Then, "341" indicating that a small hit has been won is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, and "right" is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 to indicate that the latent state game (RUSH game) has started. Hitting "is displayed.

Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in the third embodiment, whether or not the first probability change end condition or the second probability change end condition is satisfied is a special figure variation (special figure lottery) in which each probability change end condition is satisfied. ) Is determined before the execution (preliminary determination), whereas the third probability change end condition is configured not to perform the preliminary determination.

By configuring in this way, the progress content of the suggestion effect (bingo game) displayed over the fluctuations of multiple special symbols executed during the period in which the probability change state is set is the end of the first probability change. Since it can be set according to the condition or whether or not the second probability change end condition is satisfied, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect that does not give a sense of discomfort to the player, and when the third end condition is satisfied. Since the suggestive effect shown in FIG. 115 (b) is executed, it is possible to provide an unexpected effect.

In the third embodiment, the presence or absence of the first probability change end condition and the second probability change end condition is determined in advance, and the presence or absence of the third probability change end condition is not determined in advance. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, only the second probability variation end condition that is satisfied based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol may be configured to be preliminarily determined.

Further, as the above-mentioned pre-determination, at the end of the jackpot (during the ending period of the jackpot game), the pre-determination is performed for the special figure 1 stored on hold, and the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 stored on hold. It is configured to determine whether or not the information corresponding to the lottery result is included, and to change the combination of numbers displayed on the Bingo card 820 based on the determination result.

With this configuration, there is no sense of discomfort with respect to the number of special figure fluctuations executed before winning the jackpot and the amount of benefits given to the player by winning the jackpot (Bingo). The game) can be run. In addition, by allowing the player to grasp the numbers displayed on the Bingo card 820, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting the future game results in advance.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 116 to 121, the electrical configuration of the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are changed from the second embodiment described above, and the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed. It differs in that it is done. Other points are the same as those in the second embodiment, the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 116 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 116, the first random number 3 table 202ba is replaced with the first random number table 202a, the small hit random number 3 table 202bb is replaced with the small hit random number table 202b, and the small hit random number 3 table 202bb is replaced with the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa. The above-mentioned first is that the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bc is replaced with the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab, the small hit type selection 3 table 202b is replaced with the variation pattern selection 2 table 202ac, and the variation pattern selection 3 table 202be is provided. 2 It is different from the embodiment.

The first random number 3 table 202ba is a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol with respect to the first random number table 202a (similar to the first embodiment and see FIG. 15A) of the second embodiment described above. The difference is that the range of the value of the first random number counter C1 determined to be the above and the range of the value of the first random number counter C1 determined to be a big hit in the high probability state of the special symbol are changed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 117 (a), the contents specified in the first random number 3 table 202ba will be described. FIG. 117A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number 3 table 202ba. As shown in FIG. 117 (a), when the game state is a low probability state (normal state, time saving state) of the special symbol, the first obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is determined whether the value of the hit random number counter C1 is any of "0 to 9", and if it is any of "0 to 9", it is determined to be a big hit.

Further, when the game state is a high probability state (probability change state, latent state) of the special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is It is determined whether it is within the range of "0 to 99", and if it is within the range of "0 to 99", it is determined to be a big hit. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, out of the random number counters having a total number of 480, 10 values are defined as values for discriminating as a jackpot in the low probability state of the special symbol. The jackpot probability in the low probability state is 1/48. On the other hand, the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbol is 1 / 4.8.

The small hit random number 3 table 202bb is the first special symbol (special figure 1) with respect to the small hit random number table 202b of the second embodiment described above (similar to the first embodiment and see FIG. 15B). The difference is that the lottery has also been changed to win a small hit. Here, with reference to FIG. 117 (b), the contents specified in the small hit random number 3 table 202bb will be described. FIG. 117 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit random number 3 table 202bb. As shown in FIG. 117 (b), in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), it is determined whether the value of the acquired random number counter C1 per first is any of "10 to 14". If it is any of "10 to 14", it is determined that it is a small hit.

In the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the same contents as the above-mentioned small hit random number table 202b (see FIG. 15 (b)) are defined, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. That is, the third embodiment is different from the above-mentioned second embodiment in that it is configured so that a small hit can be won even in the lottery of the first special symbol. Then, in the third embodiment, when a small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in a state where the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set, it is normal. It is configured to execute a process of shifting the high-probability state of the symbol to the low-probability state, that is, a process of shifting the gaming state from the probabilistic state to the latent probabilistic state.

With this configuration, it is possible to increase the opportunity to shift the game state to the latent state during the probabilistic state, so that the player who is executing the game during the probable change state is enthusiastically playing the game. Can be done.

As shown in FIG. 117 (b), in the third embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the special symbol (1/48 (see FIG. 117 (a))). , The probability of winning a small hit of the first special symbol (1/32 (see FIG. 117 ((b)))) is higher. As a result, the latent probability state is set based on the small hit winning with a higher probability than the case where the latent probability state is set based on winning the big hit in the special figure 1 during the probability changing state. , Both the latent state game (RUSH game) and the jackpot game are executed for the player who is executing the game in the probabilistic state, but the game aiming at the jackpot winning which is difficult to win and the latent state Only the game (RUSH game) is executed, and both the game aiming at the small hit winning, which is easier to win than the big hit winning, can be performed.

In the third embodiment, the probability of winning the small hit of the special figure 1 is configured to be higher than the probability of winning the big hit of the special figure 1 in the high probability state of the special symbol, but the present invention is limited to this. It may be configured to be lower than the jackpot winning probability of the special figure 1 in the high probability state. For example, the probability of winning the small hit of the special figure 1 may be set to a low probability of 1/480. good. With this configuration, in the state where the probability change state is set, if the small hit is won before the big hit, the big hit game is not executed and the latent state game (RUSH game) is performed. Since it can be executed, it is possible to provide a player with a surprising game.

The jackpot type selection 3 table 202bc is different from the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa of the second embodiment described above in that the type of the jackpot type is changed, and various counters (time reduction counter 203f, probability variation counter) set after the jackpot is completed. The difference is that the contents of the fixed time counters 203ad and 203ae) are changed and the value of the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type is changed. Here, the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bc in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 118.

FIG. 118A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bc in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 118 (a), the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bc is the jackpot operation content of each jackpot type defined in the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16 (a)) of the first embodiment described above. The jackpot operation contents that differ only in the number of rounds executed for each jackpot are specified, and for each jackpot type, the time reduction counter 203f, the probability variation counter 203aa, the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad, and the special figure 2 fixed time are specified. The value of the counter 203ae is specified.

Specifically, in the jackpot A whose symbol type is set corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 (0 to 99) is "0 to 49". It is defined in the range, and the jackpot operation content in which the round game for opening the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is executed for two rounds (2R) and the value of "4" in the time saving counter 203f are set. It is specified that the value of "4" is set in the probability variation counter 203aa and the value indicating "5 seconds" is set in the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad.

In the jackpot B whose symbol type is set corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 (0 to 99) is defined in the range of "50 to 96". The jackpot operation content in which the round game for opening the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is executed for two rounds (2R), the value of "4" in the time saving counter 203f, and the value of "4" in the probability variation counter 203aa are ". It is specified that the value of "4" is set to the value indicating "100 seconds" in the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad.

The jackpot C whose symbol type is set corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1) is defined by the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 (0 to 99) in the range of "96 to 99". The jackpot operation content in which the round game for opening the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is executed for two rounds (2R), the value of "4" in the time saving counter 203f, and the value of "4" in the probability variation counter 203aa are ". It is specified that the value of "4" is set to the value indicating "300 seconds" in the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad.

Further, the jackpot D whose symbol type is set corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2) is defined in the range where the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 (0 to 99) is "0 to 64". The jackpot operation content in which the round game for opening the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is executed for two rounds (2R) and the value of "4" in the time saving counter 203f are the probability variation counter 203aa. The value of "4" is specified in the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad so that a value indicating "0.5 seconds" is set.

The jackpot E whose symbol type is set corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2) is defined by the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 (0 to 99) in the range of "65 to 99". The jackpot operation content in which the round game for opening the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is executed for two rounds (2R), the value of "4" in the time saving counter 203f, and the value of "4" in the probability variation counter 203aa are ". It is specified that the value of "4" is set to the value indicating "1 second" in the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad.

As described above, in the third embodiment, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set higher than that in the second embodiment described above, making it easier to win the jackpot, and a privilege given to the player in the jackpot game ( It is configured so that the number of prize balls) is reduced. With this configuration, the amount of benefits given to the player (prize ball) depending on the result of whether or not the latent state is set and the length of the period in which the latent state is continuously set. Since the number) can be greatly varied, it is possible to provide a player with a novel playability.

The small hit type selection 3 table 202bd is the content of the small hit type set when the special figure 1 is won with respect to the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16B) described above. It differs in that it is specified by adding. Here, the small hit type selection 3 table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 118 (b).

FIG. 118B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection 3 table 202b in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 118 (b), the small hit type selection 3 table 202b has a symbol type “Special Figure 1” with respect to the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16 (b)) of the first embodiment described above. It differs from the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16 (b)) in that the small hit D is added as the small hit type corresponding to the above, and other than that, the small hit type selection table 202e (FIG. 16 (b)). The detailed description of the same element will be omitted.

In the small hit type selection 3 table 202b, when a small hit is won in the first special symbol (special figure 1), the first attacker (first variable prize) is used regardless of the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5. A small hit game in which the opening operation of opening the device 65) for 0.02 seconds is executed once is specified. That is, when a small hit is won in the lottery of Special Figure 1, a small hit game is executed in which it is difficult for the player to obtain a prize ball in the small hit game.

That is, in the third embodiment, the small hit winning of the special figure 1 is not the purpose of giving a privilege (prize ball) to the player by the small hit game, but is an opportunity to set the latent state as the game state. It is an object. As a result, if the small hit in Special Figure 1 is won in the state where the probability change state is set, the right-handed game is executed immediately after the effect of notifying that fact (see FIG. 115 (b)) is executed. Even if it does, the small hit game has already ended (because it takes longer for the ball launched by the right-handed game to reach the right area than the small hit game period), so the latent state is smooth. A game (RUSH game) can be executed.

Further, when the small hit of the special figure 1 is won in the normal state, the small hit game can be executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort. In this embodiment, since the opening time of the first variable winning device 65 by the small hit game is set as short as 0.02 seconds, if the small hit of Special Figure 1 is won in the normal state, the player wins. Even if the game method is changed from the left-handed game to the right-handed game (when the special symbol indicating the small hit winning is stopped and displayed), the ball is changed to the first variable winning device 65 during the small hit game. Since it is difficult to win a prize, when the small hit of the special figure 1 is won in the normal state, the effect and guidance to emphasize that the small hit is won on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is configured so that the display of "right-handed" that guides the right-handed game is not executed in the display area Dm3.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from performing annoying game operations. It should be noted that a notification means may be provided to notify that the small hit of Special Figure 1 has been won in the normal state, or right-handed display even when the small hit game based on the special figure 1 small hit winning in the normal state is in progress. May be configured to execute.

The variation pattern selection 3 table 202be replaces the time saving / probability variation table 202f2 referred to when the probability variation state is set with respect to the variation pattern selection table 202f of the first embodiment described above, and the variation pattern selection 3 table 202be1 is used. Is different in that the latent probability 3 table 203be2 is provided in place of the latent probability table 202f3 that is referred to when the latent probability state is set.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection 3 table 202be will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 to 121. FIG. 119 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the variation pattern selection 3 table 202be. As shown in FIG. 119 (a), in the third embodiment, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the same normal table 202f1 as the first embodiment described above is referred to, and the probability change state is changed. If it is set, the probability variation 3 table 202be1 is referred to, and if the latency state is set, the latency 3 table 202be2 is referred to.

In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 118 (a), the value of the time reduction counter 203f and the value of the probability variation counter 203aa are configured to be the same after the end of the jackpot, so that the probability variation Since the gaming state (that is, the time saving state) in which the value of the counter 203aa becomes 0 and the value of the time saving counter 203f becomes a value larger than 0 is not set, it is referred to when the time saving state is set. It does not have a variation pattern selection table.

Next, the contents of the probability variation 3 table 202be1 will be described with reference to FIG. 119 (b). FIG. 119 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability variation 3 table 202be1. As described above with reference to FIG. 118 (a), the third embodiment is configured so that the probabilistic state is always set for the special symbol 4 fluctuations when the jackpot is won. Then, in the state where the probability variation state is set, the variation pattern (variation pattern) is referred to according to the number of special symbol fluctuations (number of special symbol fluctuations) after the end of the jackpot and the lottery result of the special symbol. Fluctuation time) is configured to be selected.

With this configuration, the latent state is determined according to the timing (number of times the special figure changes) when the condition for setting the latent state as the game state (big hit winning or small hit winning in Special Figure 1) is established. It is possible to make the period (special figure fluctuation time) to be set different. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention not only to the lottery result of the special symbol but also to the number of fluctuations in the special symbol, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Specifically, when the symbol type of the special symbol is special diagram 1 and the lottery result is "big hit", when the number of special symbol fluctuations after the end of the big hit is "1 to 2 times". , "Probability change A table 202bea (probability change A)" is referred to, "probability change B table 202be (probability change B)" is referred to in the case of "3 times", and "probability change C" is referred to in the case of "4 times". It is specified that "Table 202 bec (probability variation C)" is referred to. If the lottery result is "small hit, miss", and if the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the big hit is "1 to 3 times", refer to "Probability change A table 202bea (probability change A)". In the case of "4 times", it is stipulated that "probability change C table 202 bec (probability change C)" is referred to.

Further, when the symbol type of the special symbol is special diagram 2, the "probability variation D table 202bed (probability variation D)" is referred to regardless of the lottery result and the number of special symbol fluctuations after the end of the big hit. It is stipulated in.

Next, the contents specified in the various probability variation tables (probability variation A table 202be to probability variation D table 202bed) referred to in the probability variation 3 table 202be1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 (c) to 120. .. FIG. 119 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the probability variation A table 202bea, and FIG. 120 (a) schematically shows the contents specified in the probability variation B table 202bea. FIG. 120 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the probability variation C table 202be, and FIG. 120 (c) is a schematic diagram illustrating the contents specified in the probability variation D table 202bed. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents schematically.

As shown in FIG. 119 (c), in the probability variation A table 202bea, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0" as the variation pattern determined when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1). The jackpot variation 1 (1 second) is associated with the range of "~ 99", the jackpot variation 2 (2 seconds) is associated with the range of "100 to 197", and the jackpot variation 3 (300 seconds) is associated with the value of "198". ) Is associated. In addition, when a small hit or a loss is won in the lottery of Special Figure 1, the small hit variation 1 (1 second) or the loss variation 1 (1 second) is associated regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. Has been done.

As shown in FIG. 120 (a), in the probability variation B table 202be, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0" as the variation pattern determined when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1). The jackpot variation 1 (1 second) is associated with the range of "~ 99", the jackpot variation 2 (2 seconds) is associated with the range of "100 to 149", and the jackpot variation 3 (1 second) is associated with the range of "150 to 198". 300 seconds) is associated.

As shown in FIG. 120 (b), in the probability variation C table 202be, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0" as the variation pattern determined when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1). The value of "1" is associated with the jackpot fluctuation 1 (1 second), the value of "1" is associated with the jackpot fluctuation 2 (2 seconds), and the jackpot fluctuation 3 (300 seconds) is associated with the range of "2 to 198". It is associated. In addition, when a small hit is won in the lottery of Special Figure 1, the small hit fluctuation 2 (240 seconds) is associated regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and when the lottery is won, the fluctuation type counter is associated. The deviation variation 1 (1 second) is associated with the value of CS1 regardless of the value.

As shown in FIG. 120 (c), in the probability variation D table 202bed, as a variation pattern determined when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. The big hit fluctuation 1 (1 second) is associated, and if the small hit is won, the small hit fluctuation 4 (0.5 seconds) is associated regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. , The deviation variation 4 (0.5 seconds) is associated with the variation type counter CS1 regardless of the value.

Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the contents specified in the latent probability 3 table 202be2 will be described. FIG. 121 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the latent probability 3 table 202be2. As shown in FIG. 121, in the third embodiment, a fluctuation pattern in which a long fluctuation time is set when the lottery of the special figure 1 is executed is selected in a state where the latency state is set. It is configured to be.

Here, in the third embodiment, in the state where the probability change state is set, the latent probability state is set when a small hit is won in the special figure 1 lottery, so that the latent probability is set. In order for the fluctuation pattern to be selected with reference to the table 202be2, it is necessary to win a small hit by the lottery of the special figure 1 during the probability change state.

As described above, in the third embodiment, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is selected by referring to different tables according to the number of special symbol fluctuations in the state where the probability variation state is set. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay close attention to both the lottery result of the special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (the number of fluctuations after the probability variation state is set) that is the result of the lottery.

Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 122 shows the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown schematically. As shown in FIG. 122, the RAM 203 of the third embodiment adds a special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba and a special figure 1 small hit medium flag 203bb to the RAM 203 of the second embodiment described above. It differs in that. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is a flag for indicating that a small hit has been won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and is set to on to draw the special figure 1. It shows that you won a small hit. This special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is set to be on for a period from when the small hit is won in the lottery of special figure 1 until the small hit game is executed.

The special figure 1 small hit medium flag 203bb is a flag for indicating that the small hit game is executed based on the small hit winning of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and is set to ON. , It is shown that the small hit game based on the small hit winning of the special figure 1 is executed. In the third embodiment, when the small hit game based on the small hit winning of the special figure 1 is started in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the high probability state of the normal symbol is changed to the low probability state. It is configured to execute the process of migrating to.

The special figure 1 small hit medium flag 203bb is determined when it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is set to ON in the special figure 1 disengagement stop process (see S871 in FIG. 128) (S3201 in FIG. 128). : Yes), set to on (S3207 in FIG. 128), and when it is determined in the small hit control process 3 (see S2255 in FIG. 129) that it is the timing to start the small hit (see S2503 in FIG. 129), refer to. (S2551 in FIG. 129).

Next, when it is determined in the process of S2551 of FIG. 129 that it is set to ON (S2551: Yes in FIG. 129), that is, the small hit game this time is won in the lottery of Special Figure 1. When it is determined that the small hit is executed based on the above, the value of the time saving counter 203f is set to 0. Then, when it is determined by the small hit control process 3 (see S2255 in FIG. 129) that it is the end timing of the small hit (S2511: Yes in FIG. 129), it is set to off.

Next, with reference to FIG. 123 (a), the contents of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 123 (a) shows the voice lamp control device according to the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of ROM 222 of 113 schematically. As shown in FIG. 123 (a), the ROM 222 of the third embodiment replaces the additional effect selection table 222c with respect to the ROM 222 of the second embodiment (first embodiment) described above, and is a probability variation effect selection table 222ba. It is different in that it is provided. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the probability variation effect selection table 222ba will be described with reference to FIG. 124. FIG. 124 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the probability variation effect selection table 222ba. This probability variation effect selection table 222ba is a data table for selecting the final aspect of the suggestion effect (bingo game) described with reference to FIGS. 113 (b) to 115 (a), and is a big hit. The final mode is defined based on the number of fluctuations (the number of fluctuations in the special figure after the end of the jackpot) and the types of jackpots that can be won.

Specifically, when the number of jackpot winning fluctuations is "2", that is, when the jackpot is won again in the second special symbol change after the jackpot ends, the winning jackpot types are "big hit A" and "big hit B". If it is, the effect mode in which one row (line) is established in Bingo is set, and if it is "Big hit C", the effect mode in which three rows (lines) are established in Bingo is set.

If the number of jackpot winning fluctuations is "3", that is, if the jackpot is won in the third special symbol change after the jackpot ends, if the winning jackpot types are "big hit A" and "big hit B". , It is stipulated that an effect mode in which two rows (lines) are established in Bingo is set, and in the case of "big hit C", an effect mode in which three rows (lines) are established in Bingo is set.

Finally, if the number of jackpot winning fluctuations is "4", that is, if the jackpot is won in the fourth special symbol change (the final fluctuation of the special symbol in which the probability change state is set) after the jackpot ends, the winning jackpot type If is "Big hit A", a production mode in which two rows (lines) are established in Bingo is set, and if "Big hit B", a production mode in which three rows (lines) are established in Bingo is set, and "Big hit C". If so, it is stipulated that the production mode in which all rows (lines) are established in Bingo is set.

Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in the third embodiment, when the jackpot is won by the first special symbol change after the jackpot ends, the display screen at the end of the jackpot (normally, a bingo card). On the screen on which 820 is displayed (see FIG. 113), a special display screen for informing that the latent state is set after the end of the big hit is displayed.

On this special display screen, an image congratulating the player is displayed in the main display area Dm, and "right-handed" for guiding the right-handed game is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3. As a result, at the end of the big hit game, it is possible to perform a game (right-handed game) suitable for the game state (latent state) after the big hit game ends, so that the period in which the latent state is set is fully set. It can be utilized to execute a lottery game of the second special symbol (special figure 2).

In the third embodiment, the display screen at the end of the big hit is configured to display the special display screen when the big hit is won by the first special symbol change after the end of the big hit. The timing of displaying the special display screen may be any timing as long as it is during the jackpot game, it may be the timing when the jackpot game is started, or it may be the timing when a predetermined round game in the jackpot game is executed. In this case, when the jackpot is won in the normal state, it corresponds to the special symbol change executed next among the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b by the time the round game of the jackpot game is started. A pre-determination means for preliminarily determining whether or not the winning information (winning information corresponding to the first special symbol change after the end of the jackpot) includes information indicating that the jackpot is won is provided, and the pre-determination by the pre-determination means is provided. As a result, when the information indicating that the jackpot is won is included, "right-handed" is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 and the right-handed game is performed in order to perform the jackpot game in the right-handed game. When the effect mode for making the display is configured to be executed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 and the information indicating that the jackpot is won is not included, the guidance display area Dm3 is set to "left". It is good to configure it to display "hit".

With this configuration, when a big hit is won in a normal state (a game state in which a left-handed game is performed), the big hit game is determined by the display mode of the guidance display area Dm3 that guides the game method during the big hit game. It is possible to predict the content of the game after the end. Since the same configuration of the game board 13 as in the first embodiment is used in the present embodiment, the left-handed game is performed when the jackpot game for opening the second variable winning device 650 is executed. It is configured so that the ratio of the ball winning the second variable winning device 650 does not change between the case and the case where the right-handed game is performed. Therefore, even if a configuration is used in which the game method (right-handed, left-handed) during the jackpot game is changed based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b, it is disadvantageous to the player during the jackpot game. Does not provide a situation.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the ending command has been received in the jackpot-related process 3 (see S4552 in FIG. 132) (S4605: Yes in FIG. 132), the jackpot end process (see S4651 in FIG. 133) is executed. By determining whether or not there is winning information for winning a jackpot in the winning information (winning information in Special Figure 1) stored in the winning information storage area 223b (see S5605 in FIG. 133), the jackpot game is in progress. The newly generated winning information is also targeted for discrimination, and is configured so that more winning information can be discriminated. However, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b (winning information in Special Figure 1) A timing other than this embodiment may be set as a timing for determining whether or not there is winning information for winning a jackpot. For example, a timing at which a jackpot game is started or a specific number of rounds (for example, 2 rounds) may be set. The timing at which the game is reached or the timing at which a specific round game (the first round game) is completed may be set as the timing for executing the determination.

Next, with reference to FIG. 123 (b), the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 123 (b) shows the voice lamp control device of the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of RAM 223 of 113 schematically. As shown in FIG. 123 (b), the RAM 223 of the third embodiment is provided with the residual probability variation number area 223ba, the look-ahead per-read flag 223bb, and the residual variation number counter 223bc with respect to the ROM 222 of the second embodiment described above. It differs in that. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The remaining probability variation number area 223ba is a storage area for storing the variation number in which new winning information can be set as a special symbol variation that can be executed during the probability variation state. In this residual probability variation number area 223ba, a value obtained by subtracting the number of winning information already stored in the winning information storage area 223b in the jackpot end processing (see S4651 in FIG. 133) is set (S5604 in FIG. 133). .. Then, in the prize information related processing (see S4271 in FIG. 131), the set value is referred to (see S5504 in FIG. 131), and when the set value is larger than 0, that is, during the probability change state. When the winning information corresponding to the executeable special symbol change can be newly received (S5504; Yes in FIG. 131), the look-ahead process (the information hits the winning information) is executed as the special symbol change executed during the probabilistic change state. (Process for determining whether or not it is included) is executed (S5505 in FIG. 131), and then the set value is subtracted by 1 (S5507 in FIG. 131).

In this way, the probability change state is set by using the residual probability change number area 223ba to determine whether or not it is possible to set new winning information as a special symbol variation that can be executed during the probability change state. It is possible to determine whether or not the newly received winning information in the state corresponds to the special symbol change executed during the probability change state. Therefore, since the probabilistic effect executed in the probabilistic state can be set only based on the winning information corresponding to the special symbol variation executed in the probabilistic state, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The look-ahead hit flag 223bb is a flag for indicating that there is winning information that has been won in the big hit of the special symbol, and by being set to on, the big hit is the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b. It indicates that there is prize information indicating that the player has won.

This look-ahead hit flag 223bb determines that in the jackpot end processing (see S4651 in FIG. 133), there is winning information indicating that the jackpot has been won in the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b. If this is the case (S5605: Yes in FIG. 133), it is set to ON (S5606 in FIG. 133). Further, in the prize information-related processing (see S4271 in FIG. 131), it is determined that the prize information received this time corresponds to the special symbol change executed during the probability change state (S5504: Yes in FIG. 131). It is also set to ON (see S5506 in FIG. 131) even when it is determined that the winning information includes winning information indicating that the jackpot is won (S5505: Yes in FIG. 131).

Then, it is referred to in the probability variation variation display setting process (see S5151 in FIG. 135), and when the look-ahead hit flag 223bb is not set to ON (S5702: No in FIG. 135) and when it is set to ON (S5702: No in FIG. 135). The process is executed so that a different effect mode can be set in S5702: Yes) in FIG. 135.

The remaining fluctuation number counter 223bc is for counting the number of remaining special figure fluctuations until the jackpot is won, and is stored in the winning information storage area 223b in the jackpot end processing (see S4651 in FIG. 133). When the winning information includes the winning information for winning the jackpot (S5605: Yes in FIG. 133), the value corresponding to the number of times the special symbol changes until the special symbol corresponding to the winning information for winning the jackpot changes. Is set (see S5607 in FIG. 133). Then, when it is determined in the variation display setting process 3 (see S4173 in FIG. 134) that the variation display in the probability variation state is set (see S5103 in FIG. 134), the probability variation variation display setting process (see S5151 in FIG. 135) is executed. In (see), when it is determined that the special symbol for which the variation display is set this time is the pre-variation of the special symbol corresponding to the winning information for winning the jackpot (the next time is the jackpot variation) (S5703: Yes in FIG. 135). ), The effect mode using the probability variation effect selection table 222ba is set.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 125 to 129, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. The control process of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment is different from the control process of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment described above, in place of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see FIG. 98). 1 Special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (see S376 in FIG. 125), first special symbol fluctuation stop process 3 (see S277 in FIG. 127) instead of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (see FIG. 99), small hit control The difference is that the small hit control process 3 (see FIG. 129) is executed instead of the process (see FIG. 55). Other than that, the same processing is executed. In addition, in the above-mentioned second embodiment, since the same processing as that of the first embodiment is executed, the part where the detailed description is omitted will be described with reference to the figure used for the description of the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, the parts where the same processing as that of the second embodiment described above is executed are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 125, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (S376) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (S376). Since the third embodiment is configured to win a small hit by the lottery of the special figure 1, the first special symbol big hit determination process 3 (S376) is the first special in the above-mentioned second embodiment. The difference is that the content of the process to be executed when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is not a big hit is different from the symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98). is doing. Other than that, they are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (S376) is executed, the same process as the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see FIG. 98) is executed, and in the process of S406, this fluctuation is a jackpot. If it is determined that this is not the case (S406: No), the special figure 1 deviation processing (S471) is executed, and this processing is terminated. This special figure 1 deviation variation processing (S471) is executed when it is determined that the lottery result of special figure 1 is other than a big hit, and it is determined whether or not a small hit is won, and the determination is made. It executes the process corresponding to the result.

Next, with reference to FIG. 126, the special figure 1 deviation processing (S471), which is one of the processes in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (S376) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment. ) Will be explained. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 deviation processing (S471). This special figure 1 deviation variation processing (S471) executes a process for displaying a small hit symbol or an deviation symbol on the first symbol display device 37, and targets the second special symbol (special diagram 2). The difference is that the target special symbol is changed from the special figure 2 to the special figure 1 with respect to the processing content of the special figure 2 deviation change processing (S1011 of FIG. 41) to be executed.

In the special figure 1 deviation variation processing (S471), first, it is determined whether or not the execution data acquired from the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is a small hit (S3101). When it is determined that the execution data is a small hit (S3101: Yes), the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is set to ON (S3102), and the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to the small hit (S3103). ). Next, the small hit symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S3104), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S3101, when it is determined that the execution data is not a small hit (out of order) (S3101: No), the out-of-order symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set. (S3105), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 127, the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 3 (S277) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 3 (S277). In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 3 (S277), when the lottery result of the first special symbol is not a big hit with respect to the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S257 in FIG. 99) in the second embodiment described above. That is, in the process of S801, when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is off (S801: No), the special figure 1 disengagement stop process (S871) is executed. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 128, it is executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment. The special figure 1 deviating stop process (S871), which is one of the processes in the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 3 (S277), will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 disengagement stop process (S871). In the special figure 1 out-of-order stop process (S871), when the lottery result of the special figure 1 is a small hit, a process for starting the small hit game is executed.

In the special figure 1 disengagement stop process (see S871 in FIG. 128), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is set to ON (S3201). When it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is set to on (S3201: Yes), the change of the special figure 2 during the change is stopped and displayed by the lottery result indicating the forcible deviation. Special figure 2 The fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to ON (S3202).

Then, a special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is turned on is set (S3203), and the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed as a deviated symbol (S3204). Next, a small hit scenario based on the selected small hit type is set (S3205), the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is set to off (S3206), and the special figure 1 small hit medium flag 203bb is turned on. Set (S3207) and end this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S3201, when it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is not set to on (that is, the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of order) (S3201: No), the book is as it is. End the process.

With this configuration, when a small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the change in special figure 2 that is changing can be forcibly stopped, so that the small hit game can be performed. It is possible to facilitate the execution of the new special figure 2 fluctuation during the latent state set at the start timing. In the third embodiment, when the small hit of the special figure 1 is won, the process of forcibly stopping the change of the special figure 2 being executed in the display mode indicating that the lottery result is out of order is used. Not limited to this, for example, it is configured to interrupt the measurement of the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation so that the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation during the execution is not progressed during the period in which the small hit game is being executed. You may.

Next, with reference to FIG. 129, it is executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment. The small hit control process 3 (S2255) will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit control process 3 (S2255). The small hit control process 3 (S2255) differs from the small hit control process (S2205) in the first embodiment described above in that the processes S2551 and S2552 are added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the small hit control process 3 (S2255), when it is determined in the process of S2503 that it is the timing to start the small hit (S2503: Yes), that is, the small hit scenario updated by the process of S2502 starts the small hit. If the content indicates, an opening command is set (S2504), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 small hit medium flag 203bb is set to ON (S2551). When it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit medium flag 203bb is set to ON (S2551: Yes), the time saving counter 203f is set to 0 (S2552), and this processing is terminated.

The third embodiment is configured so that both the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) can win a small hit, of which the small hit of special figure 1 can be won. The value of the time saving counter 203f is set (cleared) to 0 only when the winning is won.

That is, as a condition for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol (the state where the value of the time reduction counter 203f is larger than 0), the small hit winning of the special figure 1 (the start of the small hit game based on the small hit winning of the special figure 1). Is set. With this configuration, it is possible to terminate the high-probability state of a normal symbol under conditions other than the case where the special symbol is changed for a predetermined number of times. Therefore, in the state where the probabilistic state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set, the latent probabilistic state (high probability state of any special symbol) is advantageous to the player at any timing (any special symbol lottery). Since it is possible to shift to a high-probability state of a special symbol and a low-probability state of a normal symbol, it is possible to make the player always enthusiastically play the game.

Further, in the third embodiment, the period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set is configured to be until the lottery (variation) of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (4 times). Therefore, the shorter the period from the setting of the probability change state to the winning of the small hit in the lottery of the special figure 1, the more the number of lottery of the special symbol that can be executed during the probability change state can be increased. Therefore, the player can be made to play the game more enthusiastically.

In addition, in the third embodiment, when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special diagram 2), the high probability state of the normal symbol is not terminated. As a result, even if the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of Special Figure 2 is set higher than the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of Special Figure 1, in the state where the probability variation state is set, Special Figure 2 It is possible to suppress a situation in which a right-handed game is performed in order to execute the lottery.

On the other hand, in the process of S2551, if it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit medium flag 203bb is not set to ON (S2551: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

As described above, in the third embodiment, when a big hit is won by lottery of a special symbol, the probability change state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is always after the end of the big hit game. Is configured to be set for a predetermined period (4 special symbol fluctuations), and various transition conditions (latent state transition state) that shift the high-probability latent state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state during the probabilistic state. Is configured to set the latent probability state, which is a game state advantageous to the player.

Then, in the third embodiment, as the latent probability transition condition, the first latent probability transition condition that is satisfied when a big hit is won during the probability change state, and a predetermined period (special symbol variation 4) in which the probability change state is set. When the second latent probability transition condition that is established when the final change of (times) is executed and the small hit is won in the lottery of the specific special symbol (first special symbol (special figure 1)) in the probability change state. It has a third latent transition condition that is satisfied. In this way, by configuring the latent state to be set under various conditions, it is possible to provide the player with a playability that does not get tired of.

Further, the plurality of latent probability transition conditions described above are configured so that the period in which the latent probability state is set after being satisfied is different, and when the first latent probability transition condition is satisfied, the jackpot is shown. If the latent state is set during the symbol confirmation period when the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the second latent transition condition is satisfied, the latent symbol is latent during the fluctuation period of the target special symbol fluctuation and during the symbol confirmation period. When the probability state is set and the third latent probability transition condition is satisfied, the probability change state is started from the timing when the target small hit game is executed (the timing when the first variable winning device 65 is opened as the small hit game). It is configured to be set until the timing when the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol corresponding to the final fluctuation of is completed.

With this configuration, in order to perform a game to set the latent state during the probable change state, it is not just aiming at the latent state, but also a game for the opportunity to set the latent state. Since the person can be watched, the game can be played more enthusiastically.

Further, in the third embodiment, the symbol determination period of the special symbol is configured to be different according to the lottery result of the special symbol. Further, the variation display period (variation time) for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is configured to be different according to the number of times the special symbol is changed after the probability variation state is set.

Specifically, the lottery result of the special symbol that satisfies the first latent probability transition condition, that is, when the big hit is won in the special symbol lottery, the symbol confirmation period is 5 seconds to 300 seconds depending on the lottery result. It is configured to be set within the range of. With this configuration, even if the player determines that the first latent probability transition condition is satisfied (even if the special symbol indicating the jackpot is stopped and displayed), the symbol determination period set after that is set. Since it is not possible to easily determine the length of the game, it is possible to play the game while expecting that a long period is set as the period in which the latent state is continuously set.

In addition, when the above-mentioned second latent transition condition is satisfied, the latent state is set by the lottery result of the special symbol variation (final variation in the probabilistic state) corresponding to the establishment of the second latent transition condition. The length of the period to be set is greatly different. For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of the final fluctuation in the probabilistic state, the length of the period set as the latent state is set. It is configured so that it is less than or equal to the fluctuation time (including the same) of the special figure 2 fluctuation executed during the latent state. With this configuration, if the final fluctuation of the probabilistic state is out of the range, the latent probability state is temporarily set internally, but the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed during the latent probability state, and it is small. It is possible to set a disadvantageous latent state that is disadvantageous to a player who makes it impossible (difficult) to acquire a winning game.

When the above-mentioned disadvantageous latent state is set, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 does not execute the effect mode for notifying that the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed. It is preferable not to notify the player that the latent state is set.

In the present embodiment, as described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of the final fluctuation of the probability change state, the disadvantageous latent probability state is set. For example, the lottery result of the special symbol is set. In some cases where is out of order, a long symbol determination period (for example, 100 seconds that can be set when the lottery result is a big hit) is set, or the lottery result of a special symbol is out of order. As the fluctuation pattern (variation time) selected for, 300 seconds, which can be set when the lottery result is a big hit, may be set to be configurable.

With this configuration, even if a big hit or a small hit is not won during the probabilistic state, it is possible to set a latent probable state that is advantageous to the player, so expectation is given until the end of the probable change state. You can play games while playing. In addition, by making the set symbol confirmation period and fluctuation pattern the same as the period (time) that can be set when the jackpot is won, it is expected that the jackpot game will be executed after the latent state ends. be able to.

In the above-mentioned example, when the latent state game (RUSH game) is performed by setting the length of the symbol determination period to the same length as when the jackpot is won, the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed. It is preferable to stop and display the special symbol (third symbol) in a display mode that is difficult for the player to grasp. As a result, the lottery result of the special symbol this time is determined at the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the motivation to play during the latent state game.

Further, in the third embodiment, the length of the period in which the latent probability state is set differs depending on the timing when the first latent probability transition condition is satisfied. Specifically, it is configured so that the latent probability state becomes longer and easier to be set as the number of special symbol fluctuations in the probability change state increases. As a result, as the number of special symbol fluctuations in the probabilistic state increases, that is, as the number of special symbol fluctuations that can be executed during the probabilistic change state decreases, it becomes easier to set a latent state that is advantageous to the player. It is possible to make the player want to win the jackpot as soon as possible (to establish the first latent probability transition condition), or to win the jackpot just before the end of the probability change state, which improves the interest of the game. Can be made to. In addition, when a big hit is won in the final change of the probability change state, that is, when both the first latent probability transition condition and the second latent probability transition condition are satisfied in one special symbol change (lottery). Since the latent state is set from the period when the jackpot fluctuation starts, it is possible to provide the latent state for a longer period.

In the present embodiment, the longer the establishment of the first latent transition condition is delayed, the easier it is to set the latent state for a long period of time. However, in addition to this, a specific number of fluctuations (for example, for example). It may be configured so that the longest latent state period is set when the number of fluctuations is an even number or when the jackpot is won in the third), or the first latent transition condition is satisfied as soon as possible. It may be configured so that the latent state can be easily set for a long period of time.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 130 to 135, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described. The control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment is the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 105) with respect to the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above. The difference is that the command judgment process 3 (see FIG. 105) and the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 134) are executed instead of the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 68), and the other processes are the same. To. The same processing is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the command determination process 3 (S4172) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 130. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 3 (S4172). The command determination process 3 (S4172) is different from the command determination process 2 (S4162) in the second embodiment described above in that the process of S4271 is executed instead of the process of S4214. Since other processes are the same as the command determination process (S4162) in the second embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, a winning information-related process (S4271), which is one process in the command determination process 3 (S4172) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment, will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning information-related processing (S4271).

In the winning information-related processing (S4271), first, the information indicating the gaming state stored in the state setting area 223j is read out (S5501). Next, in the process of S5501, it is determined whether or not the read gaming state (that is, the current gaming state) is in the probable change (S5502). When it is determined that the read game state is in the probable change (S5502: Yes), the value of the residual probability change number area 223ba is read out (S5503). Next, in the process of S5503, it is determined whether the value of the read residual probability variation number area 223ba is larger than 0 (S5504). When it is determined that the value of the residual probability variation number area 223ba is larger than 0 (S5504: Yes), it is determined whether or not there is information in the winning information received this time (S5505). When it is determined that there is hit information in the winning information (S5505: Yes), the look-ahead hit flag 223bb is set to ON (S5506). On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no hit information in the winning information (S5505: No), the processing of S5506 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5507.

Next, the value of the residual probability variation number area 223ba is subtracted by 1 (S5507), the information of the received winning information command is stored in the corresponding winning information storage area 223b (S5508), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5502, when it is determined that the read game state is not in the probable change (S5502: No), or in the process of S5504, when it is determined that the value of the residual probability variation number area 223ba is 0. (S5504: No), a display winning command corresponding to the received winning information is set (S5509), the above-mentioned processing of S5508 is executed, and this processing is terminated.

Next, the jackpot-related process 3 (S4552) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 132. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot related process 3 (S4552). The jackpot-related process 3 (S4552) differs from the jackpot-related process (S4502) in the first embodiment described above in that a jackpot end process (S4651) is added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the jackpot end processing (S4651), which is one of the jackpot-related processes 3 (S4552) executed by the MPU221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment, will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end processing (S4651).

In the jackpot end processing (S4651), first, all the information stored in the winning information storage area 223b is read out (S5601). Next, it is determined whether or not there is winning information (S5602). If it is determined that there is no winning information (S5602: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is winning information (S5602: Yes), the number of winning information determined in the process of S5602 is subtracted from the probability variation setting number (n = 4) (S5603). Next, in the process of S5603, the subtracted value is set in the residual probability variation number area 223ba (S5604).

Next, it is determined whether or not the read information has hit information (S5605). If it is determined that the read information has winning information (S5605: Yes), is the winning information included in the winning information corresponding to the next variation (that is, the first variation executed after the jackpot game ends)? Is determined (S5606). In the process of S5606, when it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the next fluctuation contains the winning information (S5606: Yes), the player is notified that the latent state is set immediately after the big hit is completed. A special effect mode for this is set (S5607), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the next fluctuation does not include the winning information (S5605: No), the look-ahead hit flag 223bb is set to ON (S5608), and the winning information including the winning information changes. The number of special figure fluctuations up to this point is set in the remaining fluctuation number counter 223bc (S5609), the ending command for display including the bingo game display mode is set (S5611), and this process is terminated.

Further, in the process of S5605, when it is determined that there is no information in the read state (S5605: No), the probability variation setting number (n = 4) is set in the residual fluctuation number counter 223bc (S5610), and the above-mentioned S5611 Process is executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 134, the variation display setting process 3 (S4173) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 3 (S4173). The variation display setting process 3 (S4173) differs from the variation display setting process (S4113) in the first embodiment described above in that a probability variation variation display setting process (S5151) is added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 135, the probability variation variation display setting process (S5151), which is one process in the variation display setting process 3 (S4173) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. explain. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the contents of the probability variation variation display setting process (S5151). In the probabilistic variation display setting process (S5151), when the current gaming state is the probabilistic variation state, the variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol is based on the special figure 1 variation pattern command received from the main control unit 110. Is set, and the process of transmitting to the display control device 114 is executed.

In the probability variation variation display setting process (S5151), first, it is determined whether or not the current variation is a small hit (S5701). When it is determined that the fluctuation this time is a small hit (S5701: Yes), an effect mode such that it becomes all bingo, that is, an effect mode as shown in FIG. 114 (b) is set (S5709), and S5710. Move to processing. On the other hand, in the process of S5701 when it is determined that the current fluctuation is not a small hit (S5701: No), it is determined whether the look-ahead hit flag 223bb is set to ON (S5702). When it is determined that the look-ahead flag 223bb is set to ON (S5702: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the remaining fluctuation number counter 223bc is 1 (S5703). When it is determined that the value of the remaining fluctuation number counter 223bc is 1 (S5703: Yes), the winning information corresponding to the next fluctuation is read from the winning information storage area 223b (S5704).

Next, based on the winning information read in the process of S5704 and the number of fluctuations, the effect mode is set from the probability variation effect selection table 222ba (S5705). Next, the look-ahead flag 223bb is set to off (S5706), the residual probability variation number area 223ba and the residual variation number counter 223bc are reset (S5707), and the process proceeds to S5710. On the other hand, in the processing of S5702, when it is determined that the look-ahead hit flag 223bb is not set to ON (S5702: No), or in the processing of S5703, when it is determined that the value of the remaining fluctuation number counter 223bc is not 1. (S5703: No), an effect mode in which Bingo cannot be established is set (S5708), the value of the remaining fluctuation number counter 223 bc is subtracted by 1 (S5711), and the process proceeds to S5710.

Next, the extracted variation pattern command and the display variation pattern command corresponding to the effect mode set in any of S5705, S5708, and S5709 are set (S5710), and this process is terminated.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 160. Each of the above-described embodiments is configured so that the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) fluctuate at the same time (so-called simultaneous fluctuation type), and the game state is latent. A large number of small hit games (RUSH games) are executed by executing the lottery (variation) of the special figure 2 during the period when the state (high probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) is set. It was configured to be possible.

Then, the latent probability state once set is the first latent probability end condition established based on the start of the jackpot game, or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. It was configured to end when any of the second latent probability end conditions that are satisfied based on the above is satisfied.

In the above-described first to third embodiments configured in this way, for example, when the first latent probability end condition is satisfied, the latent probability gaming state (as the first advantageous game that is advantageous to the player) ( Since the RUSH game) is executed until just before the big hit game, which is the second advantageous game, is started, it is possible for the player to continuously execute a plurality of different advantageous games, and the player can play the game. Was able to give a feeling of satisfaction.

However, in each of the above-described embodiments, after the probabilistic state (high probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol) is set, the latent probability state (high probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) is set. The probability change end condition to be shifted to is configured so that multiple types can be set, but since only the above two types are used for the probability probability end condition to end the latent probability state, the player is latent. There was a problem that the duration of the probability state could be easily predicted.

In response to such a problem, in the fourth embodiment, every time a special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) is executed, a lottery is performed to shift (fall) the high-probability state of the special symbol to the low-probability state. (Hereinafter referred to as a fall lottery) is configured to be executed, and a low probability state of a special symbol is set when the fall lottery is won.

With this configuration, it is possible to solve the problem that the player can easily predict the period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set, which is an advantageous game that is advantageous to the player. It is possible to play the game while expecting that the latent state game (RUSH game) will continue for a long time.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, during the period (special figure variation display period) in which the variation display (special figure variation display) for displaying that the jackpot is won in one special symbol is executed, the other Even if the lottery of the special symbol is executed, the lottery result of the fall lottery is invalidated.

As a result, if the latent state is set by satisfying the first probability change end condition (probability change end condition that is established based on the jackpot winning), the latent state game (RUSH) executed during the latent state is set. In the game), since the fall lottery can be invalidated, the latent probability state game (RUSH game) can be made into an advantageous latent state game (super RUSH game) that can be executed for a long period of time.

On the other hand, if the latent state is set by satisfying the second probability change end condition (the probability change end condition that is satisfied based on the number of changes of the special symbol), the fall lottery is executed during the latent state. Therefore, since there is a risk that the latent state will end early based on winning the fall lottery, the period during which the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed is the above-mentioned advantageous latent probability. It can be a normal latent state game that tends to be shorter than a state game.

Here, with reference to FIG. 136, the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 during the probable change state in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 136 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a transition method of four types of gaming states set in the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, the transition content of the gaming state when the fall lottery is won is added to the method of transitioning the gaming state in the pachinko machine 10 used in the first embodiment described above, and each transition. The difference is that the elements until the condition (predetermined condition) is satisfied and the transition ratio that shifts at the time of winning the jackpot are changed, and other than that, they are the same. Detailed description of the same element will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 136, in the fourth embodiment, the fall lottery for shifting the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state is executed, and the fall lottery is performed during the probability change state. If you win, you will move to the time saving state, and if you win the fall lottery during the latent state, you will move to the normal state.

With this configuration, in order to set the latent probability state, which is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, the probability variation state (high probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol) is set. In the state, the condition for shifting the high-probability state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state (for example, time-saving number of times digestion) is higher than the condition for shifting the high-probability state of the special symbol to the low-probability state (winning of the fall lottery). It needs to be established first.

Therefore, whether or not the latent state is set is determined according to the timing at which the transition condition of each symbol (special symbol, normal symbol) is satisfied, so that the player can pay attention to the game content and the game. It is possible to improve the interest of. Further, although details will be described later, in the fourth embodiment, the game method to be executed is the same (left-handed game) in the probability change state and the time saving state, and the effect content displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is configured to be the same. Therefore, even if the fall lottery is won before the transition condition of the normal symbol (the condition of shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state) is satisfied, it is difficult for the player to grasp that fact. be able to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 137, the flow in which the latent probability state is set and the flow of the game in the latent probability state will be described. FIG. 137 (a) is a timing chart schematically showing the flow when the special figure 1 jackpot is won (when the first probability change end condition is satisfied) during the probability change state, and FIG. 137 (b) is a timing chart. It is a timing chart schematically showing the flow when the number of time reductions becomes 0 during the probability change state (when the second probability change end condition is satisfied).

As shown in FIG. 137 (a), in the fourth embodiment, in the state where the high probability state (probability variation state or latent probability state) of the special symbol is set, the high probability state of the special symbol is changed to the low probability state. The lottery (falling lottery) for shifting to is configured to be performed every time the lottery (variation) of the special symbol is executed, and when the jackpot is won during the probability change state (first probability change end condition). Is set to), it is configured to be set as a fall lottery invalid period in which the fall lottery is not executed.

On the other hand, when the latent probability state is set based on the satisfaction of the second probability change end condition, the fall lottery is valid even during the latent probability state game (RUSH game) as shown in FIG. 137 (b). Since it is executed, the latent state is shifted to the normal state based on the fact that the fall lottery is won before the special figure 1 change is completed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the first probability change end condition is satisfied, the latent probability state game (RUSH game) which is more advantageous than the case where the second probability change end condition is satisfied can be executed.

<Regarding the production display content in the fourth embodiment>
In the fourth embodiment, in addition to the effect content executed in the first embodiment described above as the effect content executed during the probability change state, the player is suggested (notified) the opportunity to set the latent probability state. The difference is that a production for suggesting (notifying) that the fall lottery has been won during the latent state game (RUSH game) has been added.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 138 to 140, the contents of the effect added by the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 138 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the effect for suggesting that the latent probability state game (RUSH game) is set by satisfying the second probability change end condition (reaching the number of time reductions). FIG. 138 (b) schematically shows the content of the effect for suggesting that the latent probability state game (RUSH game) is set by satisfying the first probability change end condition (big hit winning). It is a schematic diagram.

As shown in FIGS. 138 (a) and 138 (b), in the present embodiment, the player has an opportunity to set the latent state according to the display mode of the effect symbol 813 displayed when the treasure box 812 is opened. When the display mode of "444" is displayed as the effect symbol 813, it is notified that the second probability change end condition (reaching the number of time reductions) has been satisfied, and " When the display mode of "Super RUSH" is displayed, it is configured to notify that the first probability change end condition (big hit winning) has been satisfied.

In the fourth embodiment, the player is notified of the trigger for setting the latent probability state by the display mode of the effect symbol 813 displayed as the effect result during the probability change state. A configuration other than the above may be used. For example, a plurality of display modes having different selection ratios may be provided according to the type of probability variation end condition established as the display mode of the displayed effect symbol 813. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting which probabilistic end condition is satisfied.

Here, with reference to FIG. 139 (a), the display contents when the fall lottery is won during the latent state game (RUSH game) will be described. FIG. 139 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents when the fall lottery is won during the latent state game (RUSH game). In the fourth embodiment, the fall lottery is executed every time the special figure lottery start condition for executing the special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) is satisfied, and the special figure lottery start condition is satisfied. It is configured to execute the fall lottery during the period from the time when the big hit lottery is executed, that is, before the big hit lottery is executed.

Therefore, when the fall lottery is won, as shown in FIG. 139 (a), the latent state game (RUSH game) is displayed while the special symbol (special figure 1) corresponding to the fall lottery is variablely displayed. Is notified to indicate that the game has ended, and it is suppressed that a new special figure 2 change is executed after the fall lottery is won (after the game state shifts from the latent state to the normal state). In addition, the display mode of the guidance display area Dm3 is variably displayed from "right-handed" to "left-handed" while the special symbol (special figure 1) corresponding to the winning of the fall lottery is variablely displayed. After the fall lottery is won (after the gaming state shifts from the latent state to the normal state), it is suppressed that the new special figure 2 fluctuation is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 139 (b), the content of the effect executed when the jackpot is won during the latent state game (RUSH game) will be described. FIG. 139 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the effect content executed when a big hit is won during the latent state game (RUSH game).

Next, with reference to FIG. 140, the contents of the effect during the advantageous latent state game (super RUSH game), which is advantageous to the player among the latent state games (RUSH game), will be described. As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when the latent probability state is set based on the satisfaction of the first probability change end condition, the fall lottery is invalidated during the setting period of the latent probability state. The treasure box 812 is configured so that the lottery invalid period is set, and the fact that the game is in the advantageous latent state game (super RUSH game) is displayed in the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The number of displays is increased, and the comment "in super RUSH" indicating that the sub-display area Ds is in the advantageous latent state game is displayed.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 to 146. First, with reference to FIG. 141, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like use the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform a jackpot lottery, setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, drawing the display result of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. The difference is that the fall lottery counter C6, which is used when determining the lottery result of the fall lottery, is added to each of the above-described embodiments.

The fall lottery counter C6 is a loop counter whose value is updated in the range of "0 to 239", and is, for example, updated at 2 millisecond intervals, which is an execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31). Some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 52), and the updated values are stored in a counter buffer (fall lottery counter buffer) set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203.

The value of the fall lottery counter C6 is referred to in the fall lottery executed when the high probability state of the special symbol is set (when the probability variation flag 203g is set to on), and is acquired. When it is determined that the value of the fall lottery counter C6 is a determination value predetermined in the fall lottery table 202ca, the high probability state of the special symbol shifts to the low probability state (falls).

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 142. FIG. 142 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 142, the ROM 202 of the fourth embodiment is provided with the jackpot type selection 4 table 202ca instead of the jackpot type selection table 202d for the ROM 202 of the first embodiment described above, and a fall lottery. The difference is that the table 202ca is provided. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection 4 table 202ca will be described with reference to FIG. 143. FIG. 143 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the jackpot type selection 4 table 202ca. As shown in FIG. 143, in the fourth embodiment, when the jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed, the operation content (operation scenario) for always opening the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is It differs from the above-mentioned first embodiment in that it is set. Further, as the number of rounds of the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won, the operation content (operation scenario) is set so that the jackpot game of at least 5 rounds or more is executed, which is the same as the first embodiment described above. Is different.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, the operation content executed during the small hit game is to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether the special symbol has won the big hit or the small hit. A jackpot game in which the same movement content as the (motion scenario) (a concept including a difference that is difficult for the player to discriminate) is executed, and a latent state is set, which is a game state in which the player has an advantage. While it was difficult to understand the timing and the timing of the end, in the fourth embodiment, the player can easily determine whether the jackpot is won or the small hit is won (in the jackpot game). By making the movement content different from the movement content of the small hit game, the player can easily distinguish it).

In this way, by making the player easily determine whether the big hit game is executed or the small hit game is executed, the number of small hit games executed during the latent state game (RUSH game) can be easily determined. Can be grasped by.

Next, the fall lottery table 202cc will be described with reference to FIG. 146 (a). FIG. 146 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the fall lottery table 202cc. The fall lottery table 202cc is a data table in which the determination value of the above-mentioned fall lottery counter C6 is stored. The value of the fall lottery counter C6 acquired when the ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 (at the time of the start winning) is any of the values specified in the fall lottery table 202cc. When it matches the judgment value of, it is set to shift to the low probability state of the special symbol (to fall).

More specifically, four determination values of "43,107,195,222" are defined as determination values for determining a fall in a high probability state of a special symbol. Here, the fall lottery counter C6 is a loop counter whose value is updated in the range of "0 to 239". Of the 240 possible values of the fall lottery counter C6, there are four judgment values that are determined to fall, so the probability of falling (shifting to the low probability state of the special symbol) in the probabilistic state of the special symbol. Is 1/60 (4/240).

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the probability of winning a big hit in a high probability state of a special symbol is set to be 6/480 (see FIG. 15A), and a small hit is won in the lottery of the special figure 2. The probability of this is 221/480 (see FIG. 15B). That is, the probability of winning the fall lottery is slightly higher than the probability of winning the jackpot. That is, in the fourth embodiment, in the state where the latent probability state is set, it is configured so that it is easy to win in the order of small hit, fall, and big hit.

The winning rates of the big hit, the small hit, and the fall in the high probability state of the special symbol are not limited to those shown in the present embodiment, and the ease of winning may be different. For example, the fall probability (probability of winning the fall lottery) is set to be lower than the jackpot probability, and the jackpot game and the small hit game are repeatedly enjoyed until the fall is won in the latent state. Alternatively, the small hit probability and the fall probability are set to be almost the same (for example, the small hit probability 1/3, the fall probability 1/4), and a special symbol lottery is performed during the latent state. It may be a playability that makes the player excited every time it is played. Also, even if the fall probability is set high (for example, 1/2) and the special symbol lottery can be executed with the latent probability set only when the fall is not made in the first fall lottery. good.

In the fall lottery table 202cc in the present embodiment, only the determination value for determining whether or not the special symbol has fallen in the high probability state is specified, and the determination value for the low probability state of the special symbol is specified. It has not been. This is because it is a waste of processing to determine whether or not to shift to the low-probability state of the special symbol when the special symbol is already in the low-probability state.

In the fourth embodiment, the fall lottery table 202cc and the regularly updated fall lottery counter C6 are compared to shift from the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol (fall). ) Whether or not is determined. That is, the timing of transition from the latent state (high probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) to the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) can be randomized. .. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the timing at which the latent state ends during the latent state game (RUSH game) performed during the period in which the latent state is set.

In the present embodiment, a lottery (determination) is made as to whether or not to shift (fall) from the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol, but it is a lottery (determination) to shift to another state. ) May. For example, whether or not to shift from the high-probability state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state of the normal symbol may be determined by a lottery (special symbol lottery) executed for each change of the special symbol. As a result, it is possible to randomly determine how long the high-probability state of the normal symbol lasts, so that the probabilistic state (high-probability state of the special symbol, high-probability state of the normal symbol) is changed to the latent state (high-probability state of the special symbol). , It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing of shifting to the low probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, during the period in which the probabilistic state is set, the game can always be played while expecting that the latent probable state is set. Further, for example, it may be configured so that whether or not to shift from the low probability state of the special symbol to the high probability state of the special symbol can be drawn.

Next, with reference to FIG. 144, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 144 shows the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown schematically. As shown in FIG. 144, the RAM 203 of the fourth embodiment is different from the RAM 203 of the first embodiment described above in that the state update restriction flag 203ca is provided. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The state update restriction flag 203ca is a flag for indicating that the update of various parameters corresponding to various conditions for shifting the game state is restricted, and is various when it is set to ON. It indicates that the parameter update is restricted. In the fourth embodiment, when the state update limit flag 203ca is set to ON, the process of updating the value of the time saving counter 203f is skipped.

This state update restriction flag 203ca is when it is determined in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (see S386 in FIG. 147) that the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) (S406 in FIG. 147). : Yes), or when it is determined in the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (see S975 in FIG. 150) that the jackpot is won by the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) (S1006: Yes in FIG. 150). ) Is set to on (S487 in FIG. 147, S1077 in FIG. 150).

Further, when it is referred to in the game state update process 4 (see S388 in FIG. 149) (see S651 in FIG. 149) and it is determined that it is set to ON (S6511: Yes in FIG. 149), the time saving counter 203f The process of updating (subtracting) the value, that is, the process of updating the parameter (number of time reductions) corresponding to the condition for shifting the gaming state is skipped. Then, when it is determined in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 (see S287 in FIG. 148) that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to on (S801: Yes in FIG. 148), it is set to off. (See S871 in FIG. 148). Similarly, when it is determined in the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 (see S293 in FIG. 151) that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S1501: Yes in FIG. 151), it is also turned off. Set.

That is, in the fourth embodiment, when a jackpot is won by any of a plurality of special symbols (special figure 1 and special figure 2), the state update restriction flag 203ca is set to on, and the special symbol won by the jackpot is set. It is configured so that the game state is not changed during the period when the fluctuation display of is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 145 (a), the contents of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 145 (a) shows the voice lamp control device according to the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of ROM 222 of MPU 221 of 113 schematically. As shown in FIG. 145 (a), the ROM 222 of the fourth embodiment is different from the ROM 222 of the first embodiment described above in that the latent mode selection table 222ca and the fall notification selection table 222cc are provided. is doing. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The latent mode selection table 222ca is a data table referred to when selecting an effect mode (latent mode) of an effect (latent effect) for notifying the player that the latent state has been set. .. In this latent mode selection table 222ca, a plurality of production modes (a trigger for setting a latent probability state (a trigger for winning a big hit, a trigger for reaching the number of time reductions (time reduction omission)) and a mode setting effect counter 223ca to be described later are associated with each other. The effect mode) is defined, and it is possible to suggest to the player an opportunity to set the latent probability state depending on the effect mode of the selected latent probability effect.

Next, the detailed contents defined in the latent mode selection table 222ca will be described with reference to FIG. 146 (b). FIG. 146 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the latent mode selection table 222ca. As shown in FIG. 146 (b), when the information included in the state command received from the main control device 110 is the jackpot latent state, the value of the mode setting effect counter 223ca acquired. "Invincible mode" is defined in the range of "0 to 49", "normal mode B" is defined in the range of "50 to 89", and "normal mode A" is defined in the range of "90 to 99". ing.

When the information included in the state command received from the main control device 110 indicates that the latent state of this time is the time-saving latent probability state, the value of the acquired mode setting effect counter 223ca is "0 to 49". "Normal mode A" is defined in the range, "normal mode B" is defined in the range of "50 to 89", and "normal mode B" is defined in the range of "90 to 99".

The fall notification selection table 222cc is a data table for selecting a notification mode for notifying (suggesting) the player that the fall lottery has been won, and the time saving state (high probability state of the normal symbol) continues. The notification mode is selected based on the value of the remaining time reduction area 223k indicating the remaining period set and the value of the fall notification effect counter 223cf.

The fourth embodiment is executed by the game method (left-handed game) and the third symbol display device 81 depending on whether the probabilistic state is set as the game state or the time saving state is set. It is configured so that the various display modes are the same. With this configuration, the player cannot easily determine whether the current state is a probable change state or a time saving state. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, since the fall lottery is executed, the time is shortened at random timing in the state where the probabilistic state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set. The state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is configured to be set.

Then, when the high probability state of the normal symbol shifts to the low probability state while the probability change state is set, the gaming state shifts from the probability change state to the latent state, which is advantageous to the player. While the probability state game (RUSH game) is executed, when the high probability state of the normal symbol shifts to the low probability state in the state where the time reduction state is set, the game state changes from the time reduction state to the normal state. Move to the state.

Here, the specific contents of the fall notification selection table 222cc will be described with reference to FIG. 146 (c). FIG. 146 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fall notification selection table 222cc. As shown in FIG. 146 (c), the fall notification selection table 222cc is associated with the number of remaining time reductions (information on the remaining time reduction number area 223k) at the time of winning the fall and the value of the fall notification effect counter 223cf. The notification mode is specified.

Specifically, when the fall winning timing is 0 for the remaining time reduction number (when the information stored in the remaining time reduction number area 223k indicates 0 remaining time reduction number), that is, the high probability of the normal symbol. When the fall lottery is won due to the fluctuation that the state ends, "confirmed notification" is defined regardless of the value of the acquired fall notification effect counter 223cf. Then, when the fall winning timing is 1 to 49 in the number of remaining time reductions, that is, when the period in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set has passed more than half, the acquired fall notification effect counter 223cf "Suggestion notification" is defined in the range of "0 to 49" or "90 to 99", and "confirmed notification" is defined in the range of "50 to 89". When the number of remaining time reductions is 50 to 98, that is, when the period in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set remains more than half, the value of the acquired fall notification effect counter 223cf is "0 to 89". "Suggestion notification" is specified in the range of "90 to 99", and "confirmed notification" is specified in the range of "90 to 99".

Here, when "confirmed notification" is selected as the notification mode, the player has fallen to a notification mode in which the player can easily grasp that the fall lottery has been won, for example, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. A notification mode is set such as displaying to that effect (for example, displaying "sorry") or notifying that the fall lottery has been won by voice or the emission color of the decorative member.

Further, when "suggestion notification" is selected as the notification mode, a notification mode (for example, display of "pinch") for notifying the player that there is a possibility of winning the fall lottery is set. .. Although detailed description is omitted, this "suggestion notification" is configured to be set when the notification condition is satisfied even when the fall lottery is not won. With this configuration, the "suggestion notification" is executed regardless of whether the fall lottery is actually won or not.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the remaining period (remaining time reduction) in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is continuously set as the mode of the notification (suggestion) effect of whether or not the fall lottery has been won. It is configured to be set based on the period), and it is configured so that the longer the remaining time is, the more difficult it is to set the "confirmed notification". Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player knows that he / she has won the fall lottery with a long remaining working hours and the motivation for playing during the short working hours is reduced.

Further, the setting frequency of "suggestion notification" set when the fall lottery is not won may be configured to be variable based on the length of the remaining short period. For example, the longer the remaining time is, the more the fall is made. It is preferable to configure it so that "suggestion notification" can be easily set when the lottery has not been won. This makes it possible to change the possibility of actually winning the fall lottery when the "suggestion notification" is executed, based on the length of the remaining short period, so that the "suggestion notification" is executed. It is possible to make the player predict whether or not the fall lottery will be won while discriminating between the frequency (number of times) to be played and the number of times the remaining working hours are shortened, and to improve the interest of the game. can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 145 (b), the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 145 (b) shows the voice lamp control device of the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of RAM 223 of MPU 221 of 113 schematically. As shown in FIG. 145 (b), the RAM 223 of the fourth embodiment has the mode setting effect counter 223ca, the latent mode storage area 223cc, and the number of small hits with respect to the RAM 223 of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that a counter 223cc, a fall flag 223cd, a time saving notification flag 223ce, and a fall notification effect counter 223cf are provided. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The mode setting effect counter 223ca is a counter used when selecting the latent mode using the latent mode selection table 222ca. It is updated repeatedly in the range of 0 to 99. Although not shown, it is updated by 1 each time the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed.

The latent mode storage area 223cc is a storage area for storing the currently set latent mode, and the latent mode determined in the latent mode setting process (see S4451 in FIG. 154) is stored (set). (See S5804 in FIG. 154). Then, it is referred to in the variation display setting process 4 for special figure 1 (see S5171 in FIG. 159) (see S5251 in FIG. 159), and the variation pattern command for display is set (see S5252 in FIG. 159). Similarly, it is referred to in the variation display setting process 4 for special figure 2 (see S5175 in FIG. 160) (S5351 in FIG. 160), and the variation pattern command for display is set (S5352 in FIG. 160). The information (latent mode information) stored (set) in the latent mode storage area 223cc is when it is determined by the state command process 4 (see S4281 in FIG. 153) that the gaming state has shifted to the normal state. (See S4454 in FIG. 153).

The small hit count counter 223cc is a counter for measuring the number of small hits won during the latent state, and the small hit start command is issued in the small hit related process 4 (see S4574 in FIG. 156) during the latent state. Upon reception, the value is incremented by 1 (see S4752 in FIG. 156). Then, it is referred to when determining the number of small hits won during the latent state (S4753 in FIG. 156). In the present embodiment, the small hit count display 825 is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 based on the value of the small hit count counter 223 cc, and the small hit is displayed during the period when the latent state is set. When the number of winnings reaches a predetermined number of times (a multiple of 10), the remaining time in the latent state is displayed.

The fall flag 223cd is a flag for indicating that the fall lottery has been won during the probability change state, and is set to ON to indicate that the fall lottery has been won.

The time saving notification flag 223ce wins the fall lottery during the probabilistic state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol), and goes to the time saving state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol). It is a flag for indicating that a fall notification effect (an effect executed when a definite notification is selected in the fall notification selection table 222cc) for notifying the player of the transition has been executed. By setting it to ON, the fall notification effect is set.

The fall notification effect counter 223cf is a counter used when selecting the notification mode of the fall lottery using the fall notification selection table 222cc. It is updated repeatedly in the range of 0 to 99. Although not shown, it is updated by 1 each time the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 147 to 151. The control process of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment is different from the control process of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment described above, in place of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34). Special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (see FIG. 147), first special symbol fluctuation stop process 4 (see FIG. 148) instead of the first special symbol change stop process (see FIG. 38), game state update process (see FIG. 36). Instead of the game state update process 4 (see FIG. 149), the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 40) is replaced by the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (see FIG. 150), and the second special symbol change stop process. The difference is that the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 (see FIG. 151) is executed instead of (see FIG. 45). Other than that, the same processing is executed. The same processing is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 147. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386). The first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386) shifts from the probability variation state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol with respect to the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) in the first embodiment described above (S306). The difference is that a process for executing a lottery for whether or not to make the player fall is added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386), first, the data of the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired (S401). Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is on (S481). When it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is on (S481: Yes), since the jackpot of the second special symbol is being executed, the process proceeds to S412.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is off (S481: No), it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203g is on, that is, whether or not the probability variation is in progress (S482). When it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is off, that is, the probability change is not in progress (S482: No), the process proceeds to S404.

On the other hand, in the process of S482, when it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is on, that is, when it is determined that the probability change is in progress (S482: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the fall lottery table 202m. (S483). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the fall lottery counter C5 matches any determination value (random value) defined in the fall lottery table 202m (that is, a value corresponding to the fall) (S484). ), If it is determined that the value does not correspond to the fall (S484: No), the process proceeds to S403.

On the other hand, in the process of S484, when it is determined that the value of the fall lottery counter C5 matches any of the determination values (random value) specified in the fall lottery table 202m (value corresponding to the fall) ( S484: Yes), by setting the probability variation flag 203g to off, the probabilistic variation state of the special symbol is shifted (falls) to the low probability state of the special symbol (S485). Then, a fall command is set to notify the voice lamp control device 113 that the special symbol has transitioned (falls) from the probabilistic state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol (S486), and the process proceeds to S404. Transition. Further, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the data in the execution area this time is a big hit in the processing of S406 (S406: Yes), after the processing of S407 to S411 is executed, the state update restriction flag 203ca is executed. Is set to on (S487), and this process ends.

By executing the special symbol change start process 4 (S386), a lottery for whether or not to shift (fall) to the low probability state of the special symbol and a lottery for whether or not the special symbol is a big hit are easily executed. be able to. In this embodiment, as the order of processing in the probabilistic state of the special symbol, a lottery (falling lottery) is first executed to determine whether or not to shift to the low probability state of the special symbol, and then the special symbol is a big hit. It was configured to execute a lottery as to whether or not it would be, but the processing order is not limited to this. The big hit lottery may be executed first, and then the fall lottery may be performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 148, the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 (S287) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 (S287). The first special symbol change stop process 4 (S287) adds a process (S871) for setting the state update restriction flag 203ca to off to the first special symbol change stop process (S207) in the first embodiment described above. It differs in that it does. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the game state update process 4 (S388) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 149. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the contents of the game state update process 4 (S388). The game state update process 4 (S388) adds a process (S651) for determining whether or not the state update limit flag 203ca is on to the game state update process (S308) in the first embodiment described above. It's different. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the game state update process 4 (S388), first, it is determined whether or not the state update limit flag 203ca is on (S651). If it is determined that the state update restriction flag 203ca is on (S6511: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S651 that the state update restriction flag 203ca is not on (S6511: No), the process proceeds to the process of S601.

Next, the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S975) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 150. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S975). The second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S975) shifts from the probability variation state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol with respect to the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905) in the first embodiment described above. The difference is that a process for executing a lottery for whether or not to make the player fall is added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, with reference to FIG. 147, in contrast to the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386), a process in which the object of change is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol is performed. Since it is only executed, the detailed explanation is omitted.

Next, the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 (S293) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 151. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 (S293). The second special symbol change stop process 4 (S293) adds a process (S1571) for setting the state update restriction flag 203ca to off to the first special symbol change stop process (S213) in the first embodiment described above. It differs in that it does. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 152 to 160, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. The control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment is a command determination process 4 instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 60) for the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment described above. (See FIG. 152), the variable display setting process 4 (see FIG. 157) is executed instead of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 69), and the other processes are the same. The same processing is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the command determination process 4 (S4182) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 152. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 4 (S4182). The command determination process 4 (S4182) differs from the command determination process (S4112) in the first embodiment described above in that the state command process 4 (S4281) is executed instead of the state command process (S4204). Since other processes are the same as the command determination process (S4112) in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 153, the state command process 4 (S4281), which is one of the command determination processes 4 (S4182) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the contents of the state command process 4 (S4281). The state command process 4 (S4281) determines that the latent mode setting process (S4451) is added to the state command process (S4112) in the first embodiment described above, and whether or not a command related to a fall has been received. The difference is that processing is added. Since other processes are the same as the state command process (S4112) in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the state command process 4 (S4281), if it is determined that the command received this time is a state command indicating the transition to the latent state (S4403: Yes), the latent mode setting process (S4451) is executed. The details of the latent mode setting process (S4451) will be described later with reference to FIG. 154. Next, the value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the state command is stored in the state setting area (S4405), and the process proceeds to S4452. On the other hand, in the process of S4403, when it is determined that the command received from the main control device 110 this time is not a state command indicating the transition to the latent state (S4403: No), a fall command is issued from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not the command has been received (S4452). If it is determined that the fall command has been received (S4452: Yes), the fall effect setting process is executed (S4453). The details of the fall effect setting process (S4453) will be described later with reference to FIG. 155. On the other hand, in the process of S4452, if it is determined that the fall command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S4452: No), the process of S4453 is skipped and the process of S4406 is executed. Next, after executing the processes of S4406 to S4411, the latent mode storage area bc, the small hit count counter 223 cc, the fall flag 223 cd, and the time saving notified flag 223ce are cleared (S4454), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 154, the latent mode setting process (S4451), which is one process in the state command process 4 (S4281) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment, will be described. .. FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the contents of the latent mode setting process (S4451).

In the latent mode setting process (S4451), first, the type of the state command received from the main control unit 110 this time is read out (S5801). Next, the latent mode is determined using the latent mode selection table 222ca (see FIG. 146 (b)) based on the received state command and the value of the mode setting effect counter 223ca (S5802). Next, in the process of S5802, the display latent mode command corresponding to the determined latent mode is set (S5803), and the determined latent mode is set in the latent mode storage area 223cc (S5804). Next, the latent probability notification effect for notifying the entry of the latent probability state is set (S5805), the value corresponding to the game state notified by the state command is stored in the state setting area 223j (S5806), and this process is terminated. do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 155, a fall effect setting process (S4453), which is one process in the state command process 4 (S4281) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fall effect setting process (S4453).

In the fall effect setting process (S4453), first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the latent state (S5901). When it is determined that the current gaming state is the latent state (S5901: Yes), the latent probability notification effect for notifying the end of the latent state is set (S5902), and the state command received from the main control device 110 is set. The value corresponding to the game state notified by is stored in the state setting area 223j (S5903), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5901 when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the latent state (S5901: No), then the remaining time reduction number is 99 or more, that is, the remaining time reduction area 223k. It is determined whether or not the value stored in is 99 or more (S5904). When it is determined that the number of remaining time reductions is 99 or more (S5904: Yes), the time reduction notification effect for notifying the entry of the time reduction state is set (S5905), and the time reduction notification flag 223ce is set to ON (S5908). .. On the other hand, in the process of S5904, when it is determined that the number of remaining time reductions is not 99 or more (S5904: No), the process of S5905 and S5906 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5908. Next, the fall flag 223cd is set to ON (S5907), the value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the state command received from the main control device 110 is stored in the state setting area 223j (S5908), and this processing is terminated. do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 156, the small hit related process 4 (S4574) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit related process 4 (S4574). The small hit-related process 4 (S4574) differs from the small hit-related process (S4504) in the first embodiment described above in that a process for displaying the remaining time information is added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the small hit-related process 4 (S4574), first, when it is determined that the small hit start command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4701: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is in the latent state. (S4751). When it is determined that the current gaming state is the latent state (S4751: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the small hit count counter 223cc (S4752). Next, it is determined whether the value of the small hit count counter 223cc is a multiple of 10 (S4753). When it is determined that the value of the small hit count counter 223cc is a multiple of 10 (S4753: Yes), the information stored in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o is read out (S4754). A display time information command indicating the remaining time information is set (S4755), then a display small hit start command is set (S4702), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S4751 when it is determined that the player is not in the latent state (S4751: No), or in the processing of S4753, when it is determined that the value of the small hit count counter 223cc is not a multiple of 10 (S4751: No). S4753: No), S4702 processing is executed, and this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 157, the variation display setting process 4 (S4183) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 4 (S4183). The variation display setting process 4 (S4183) replaces the variation display setting process (S5104) for the special figure 1 with respect to the variation display setting process (S4113) in the first embodiment described above, and is a variation display setting process for the special figure 1. 4 (S5171), the variation display setting process 4 (S5175) for the special figure 2 is executed instead of the variation display setting process (S5109) for the special figure 2, and the fall notification process (S5173) is added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the variation display setting process 4 (S4183), first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d in FIG. 1 is ON (S5101). When it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S5101: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is set to off (S5102). Next, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the latent state (S5103). When it is determined that the current gaming state is the latent state (S5103: Yes), the variation display setting process 4 (S5711) for special figure 1 is executed, and the first special symbol in the prize information storage area 223b is executed. The corresponding data is shifted (S5106). The details of the variation display setting process 4 (S5711) for the special figure 1 will be described later with reference to FIG. 159.

On the other hand, in the process of S5103, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the latent state (S5103: No), it is determined whether or not the fall flag 223cd is on (S5172). If it is determined that the fall flag 223cd is on (S5172: Yes), the fall notification process (S5173) is executed. The details of the fall notification process (S5173) will be described later with reference to FIG. 158. Next, based on the extracted variation pattern, the variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol is set (S5105), and the process proceeds to the process of S5106 described above. Next, the process executed for the special figure 1 of S5171 to S5173 is executed by changing the target to the special figure 2.

Here, with reference to FIG. 158, a fall notification process (S5173), which is a process in the variable display setting process 4 (S4183) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fall notification process (S5173).

In the fall notification process (S5173), first, it is determined whether or not the time saving notification flag 223ce is on (S8001). When it is determined that the time reduction notified flag 223ce is on (S8001: Yes), a latent variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol is set based on the extracted variation pattern (S8009), and this processing is performed. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time reduction notification flag 223ce is off (S8001: No), the information of the remaining time reduction frequency area 223k is read out (S8002). Next, the fall notification mode is determined using the fall notification selection table 222cc based on the number of remaining time reductions read in the processing of S8002 and the value of the fall notification effect counter 223ca (S8003). Next, in the process of S8003, it is determined whether the determined notification mode is the definite notification mode (S8004). When it is determined that the mode is the definite notification mode (S8004: Yes), the time saving notification flag is set to off (S8005), and the fall flag 223cd is set to off (S8006). Next, a time saving notification effect for notifying the entry of the time saving state is set (S8007), the above-mentioned processing of S8009 is executed, and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S8004 that the determined notification mode is not the definite notification mode (S8004: No), a display fall notification command corresponding to the fall notification mode determined in the processing of S8003 is set (S8004: No). S8008), the process of S8009 described above is executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 159, the variation display setting process 4 (for special figure 1), which is one of the processes in the variation display setting process 4 (S4183) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment ( S5171) will be described. FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation display setting process 4 (S5711) for the special figure 1. The variation display setting process 4 (S5711) for the special figure 1 replaces the process of S5206 with the variation display setting process (S5104) for the special figure 1 in the above-described first embodiment in the latent mode storage area 223cc. The stored latent mode is read out (S5251), and the process of setting the latent variable pattern command for displaying the first special symbol (S5252) is executed based on the extracted variation pattern and the latent mode. It differs in that. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 160, the variation display setting process 4 (for special figure 2), which is one of the processes in the variation display setting process 4 (S4183) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment ( S5175) will be described. FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation display setting process 4 (S5175) for the special figure 2. The variation display setting process 4 (S5109) for the special figure 2 replaces the process of S5206 with the variation display setting process (S5109) for the special figure 2 in the above-described first embodiment in the latent mode storage area 223cc. The stored latent mode is read out (S5351), and the process of setting the latent variable pattern command for displaying the first special symbol (S5352) is executed based on the extracted variation pattern and the latent mode. It differs in that. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, the fourth embodiment has a configuration in which a fall lottery is performed for each of the above-mentioned first embodiments to shift the high-probability state of the special symbol to the low-probability state based on the lottery result. Therefore, in the state where the probabilistic state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set, at what timing the time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) It can be difficult for the player to predict whether or not the transition will occur.

In addition, if the player wins the fall lottery during the probability change state and shifts to the time saving state, the player will enter the latent probability state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), which is a game state advantageous to the player. Since it becomes difficult to shift (it is harder to shift than the probability change state), once the probability change state is set, the latent probability state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is set. You can also play the game while being thrilled not to win the fall lottery before.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the same game method (left-handed game) is performed in the case where the probability change state is set and the case where the time saving state is set, the current game method is performed. It is possible to make it more difficult to grasp whether the game state is a probable change state or a time saving state.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, if the fall lottery is won immediately after the probability change state is set (for example, the first special symbol change), the player is notified that the probability change state is set. There is another possibility that the latent state will be set because it is configured to execute the effect mode (time saving notification effect) that makes it appear as if the time saving state was set from the beginning (after the end of the big hit). It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable that the probability change state higher than that of the game state has ended in a short period of time.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, a production that suggests to the player the possibility of winning the fall lottery during the probable change state (suggestion notification) and a production that notifies the player that the fall lottery has been won (confirmed notification). ) And, are made feasible, and the selection ratio between the suggestion notification and the definite notification is configured to be different based on the number of residual fluctuations of the special symbol that can be continuously set in the probabilistic state. Specifically, the larger the number of residual fluctuations in the probabilistic state, the more difficult it is to execute the definite notification. As a result, it is possible to recognize that the transition from the probabilistic change state to the time saving state is performed in the state where the remaining number of fluctuations remains large, and it is possible to suppress the player's motivation to play. In addition, the effect of notifying the suggestion is configured to be executed even when the fall lottery has not been won.

In this embodiment, the above-mentioned suggestion notification or definite notification is configured to cause the player to determine whether the current gaming state is a probabilistic state or a time-saving state. Other configurations may be used, for example, a fluctuation pattern of a special symbol (variation time) that can be selected only during the probabilistic change state, or a special symbol fluctuation pattern (variation time) that can be selected only during the time saving state. It may be configured so that the player predicts the current gaming state by the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol to be provided and executed. In this case, the contents of the fluctuation pattern dedicated to the probabilistic change state and the fluctuation pattern dedicated to the time saving state do not differ greatly, but it is preferable to provide the fluctuation pattern with an error of about 1 second, for example. As a result, the current gaming state can be notified to the player by an error of the variation display time of a slight sense of incongruity, so that the variation display of the special symbol to be executed can be strongly consciously watched. Further, in this case, one second of the error may be used, for example, in the period until the fluctuation of the third symbol is started on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, whereby the fluctuation start timing of the third symbol may be used. However, the current gaming state can be notified to the player due to a slight sense of incongruity that the game is slower or faster than usual, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the fourth embodiment, the lottery result of the fall lottery due to the other special symbol change (lottery) is invalidated during the period when the jackpot change is executed in one special symbol. .. As a result, for example, due to the establishment of the first latent probability transition condition that is established based on the jackpot winning of Special Figure 1, the second special without winning the fall lottery during the period when the latent probability state is set. It will be possible to continue receiving the lottery for the design (Special Figure 2). Therefore, it is possible to set a latent state that is more advantageous (easily continued for a long time) than the latent state set by the establishment of other latent transition conditions.

In the fourth embodiment, when the special symbol change (lottery) is executed, the fall lottery is also executed. That is, it is configured to execute the fall lottery when the execution condition of the special symbol change (lottery) is satisfied. The ball has entered the ball opening 64, the second entry opening 640, and the general winning opening 63), the ball has passed through the through gate 67, and the execution conditions for normal symbol fluctuation (lottery) have been satisfied. , The special symbol, or the normal symbol stop display timing, or the elapsed timing of the symbol confirmation period may be the trigger for executing the fall lottery, and when the execution condition of the special symbol change (lottery) is satisfied, the fall lottery is performed. It may be configured to determine whether or not to execute and execute the fall lottery based on the determination result. This makes it difficult for the player to understand when the fall lottery is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from easily detecting the timing of winning the fall lottery.

In the fourth embodiment, each time a fall lottery is executed, the presence or absence of a fall is determined with the same probability, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is easy to fall in a fall lottery (winning). It may be configured to provide a high-probability state (easy) and a low-probability state (difficult to win). In this case, for example, based on the jackpot type, a high probability variation state and a low probability variation state are provided as probability variation states set after the jackpot is completed, and in the high probability variation state, a low probability state of the fall lottery is set and the probability variation is low. In the state, a high probability state of the fall lottery may be set. Further, the state of the fall lottery (high probability state, low probability state) may be changed based on the number of special symbol fluctuations (lottery) executed after the probability change state is set. For example, the probability change state may be changed. The predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 10 times) after the state is set is configured so that the high probability state of the fall lottery that is easy to win the fall lottery is set, and then the low probability state of the fall lottery is set. May be.

With such a configuration, it is possible to set a period in which the player is likely to fall from the probable change state and a period in which the player is difficult to fall, so that it is possible to provide the player with a sharp playability. Further, in the present embodiment, when the fall lottery is won, the process of shifting the high-probability state of the special symbol to the low-probability state is executed. A process of shifting the high-probability state to the low-probability state may be executed. Further, in the fourth embodiment, when the fall lottery is won, the high probability state of the special symbol is shifted to the low probability state. For example, the high probability state of the special symbol is changed to the medium probability state (the jackpot probability is high). It may be configured to shift to a state (lower than the probability state and higher than the low probability state), and may not shift to the medium probability state unless the fall lottery is won.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the contents of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 161 to 179. In the fourth embodiment described above, the fall lottery for shifting the high-probability state of the special symbol to the low-probability state (to make it fall) is executed. With this configuration, the period during which the high-probability state of the special symbol continues can be different depending on the lottery result of the fall lottery, so that the player can have the high-probability state of the special symbol for a long period of time. It was possible to play the game while expecting it to continue.

However, in the configuration of the fourth embodiment described above, since the fall lottery is executed every time the special symbol lottery (variation) is executed, the player decides whether or not the fall lottery is executed by his / her own intention. It was not possible to make a selection, which could lead to a decrease in motivation for playing. Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, a winning device (variable winning for small hits) in which a ball can be won during a small hit game executed when the lottery result of a special symbol becomes a predetermined lottery result (small hit). Device) 2650 is provided, and when it is detected that a ball has passed in the area (flow path) through which the ball won in the small hit variable winning device 2650 can pass, the high probability state of the special symbol is changed to the low probability state. The fall gate 2650e3 (see FIG. 164) is configured to be provided.

With this configuration, as in each of the above-described embodiments, the latent state in which the small hit game is frequently executed based on the special figure 2 lottery (high probability state of special symbol, low probability of normal symbol). In the state), it is possible to select whether or not the high probability state of the special symbol falls depending on whether or not the player fires during the small hit game.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the operation content (opening operation pattern) of the small hit game to be executed is configured to be different depending on the type (small hit type) when the small hit is won. Depending on the opening operation pattern to be performed, the rate at which the ball winning the small hit variable winning device 2650 passes through the fall gate 2650e3 during the small hit game is configured to be different.

By configuring in this way, the content of the small hit game to be executed is predicted in order to prevent the high probability state of the special symbol from falling and to perform the game aiming at the acquisition of the privilege (prize ball) by the small hit game. It is possible to let the player select a game while letting the player select a game.

In addition, as in the fourth embodiment described above, in the latent state set during the period when one special symbol is executing the jackpot fluctuation, a small hit is won in the other special symbol fluctuation (lottery). Even if the ball passes through the fall gate 2650e3, the high-probability state of the special symbol does not shift to the low-probability state.

As a result, in the state where the latent probability state is set, the advantageous latent probability state in which the high probability state of the special symbol does not fall (difficult) and the high probability state of the special symbol are more likely to fall than the advantageous latent probability state. It is possible to set the unfavorable probability state.

<Regarding the configuration of the game board in the fifth embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 161 to 164. In the fifth embodiment, the configuration of the right side region of the game board 13 is different from the configuration of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 2), and the configuration is replaced with the first variable winning device 65. The point that the variable winning device for small hits 2650 is provided and the point that the winning device (variable winning device for small hits 2650) that is opened during the small hit game is provided on the upstream side of the second entrance 640. Is different.

Here, the configuration of the game board 13 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 161. A variable winning device for small hits 2650 is provided in the right area of the game board 13. This variable winning device for small hits 2650 has a plurality of flow paths through which the winning sphere flows (a flow path for causing the high probability state of the special symbol to fall into the low probability state, and a high probability state of the special symbol in the low probability state). (A flow path that does not fall to) is provided, and the variable winning device for small hits 2650 is configured so that the winning ball flows down a different flow path according to the timing at which the ball wins.

The internal structure of the variable winning device for small hits 2650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 162 to 164. Next, the structure of the variable winning device for small hits 2650 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 162. FIG. 162 is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning device for small hits 2650.

As shown in FIG. 162, the small hit variable winning device 2650 is combined with the opening forming member 2650b arranged so as to project toward the front side of the game board 13 and the back side of the opening forming member 2650b, and is combined with the small hit. The base member 2650c for screwing the variable winning device 2650 to the game board 13 and the LED are lit from the back side of the base member 2650c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 arranged on the back side of the base member 2650c. An LED board 2650d in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged, a back cover body 2650e that sandwiches the LED board 2650d with a base member 2650c, and a small hit winning opening (small hit) formed in the opening forming member 2650b. Winning port) An opening / closing unit 2650f having an opening / closing door 2650f1 for opening / closing 2650a, a flow path cover body 2650g that is combined on the back side of the back cover body 2650e to form a flow path, and a back cover body 2650e and a flow path. A switching member 2650h that protrudes into the flow path formed by the cover body 2650g and switches the flow path of the game ball, a link member 2650i that is locked to the switching member 2650h, and a flow path cover body 2650g are arranged on the back surface side. The back cover body 2650j, the flow path solenoid 2650k fixed to the back side of the back cover body 2650j to operate the link member 2650i, and the flow path solenoid 2650k are covered from the back side and attached to the back cover body 2650j with screws. It is composed of a fixing cover body 2650 m for fixing.

FIG. 163 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device for small hits 2650. FIG. 163 (c) is a top view of the variable winning device for small hits 2650, and FIG. 163 (b) is a sectional view taken along line Lb-Lb of the variable winning device for small hits 2650. As shown in FIG. 163 (b), the small hit variable winning device 2650 is formed with a small hit winning opening (small hit winning opening) 2650a, which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The small hit winning opening (small hit winning opening) 2650a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, and a game ball passing through the opening is guided to the left in FIG. 163 (b). The bottom surface is formed so as to be inclined to the lower left. At the left end of the bottom surface, a detection port 2650a1 composed of a magnetic sensor (ball detection switch) 2650c1 for detecting a winning of a game ball is arranged. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 2650a1 is guided to the distribution flow path formed on the back surface side of the back cover body 2650e shown in FIG. 163 (b).

As shown in FIG. 163 (b), the opening of the small hit winning opening (small hit winning opening) 2650a can be opened by the opening / closing door 2650f1 having a shutter mechanism that can appear and disappear from the game board 13 side. It is variable to an open state and a closed state where it is impossible to enter the ball (difficult to enter the ball). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening / closing door 2650f1 so that the ball can roll over the upper part of the opening / closing door. Further, in the open state, the opening / closing door 2650f1 is configured to be retracted from the inside of the small hit winning opening (small hit winning opening) 2650a by being retracted to the inside of the base member 2650c (inside the game board 13). ing.

With this configuration, when the opening of the small hit variable winning device 2650 is closed, the ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 2650f1 of the small hit variable winning device 2650 to enter the second ball. It is configured to be guided to the mouth 640 side, and during the right-handed game (during the latent state), the ball can be entered into the second entrance 640 while the right-handed game is being performed. This makes it possible to reduce the time and effort required to change the game method to a left-handed game during a latent state in which a small hit game is frequently executed. Therefore, the game can be played more easily.

Further, in the open state, the surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball flows down can be configured as the opening of the small hit variable winning device 2650, so that more game balls can be efficiently used as the small hit winning opening (small). Winning prize opening) It is possible to win a prize within 2650a. Therefore, the ball can be reliably won by the variable winning device for small hits 2650 during the small hit game, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

FIG. 163 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line La-La shown in FIG. 163 (b). As shown in FIG. 163 (a), the magnetic sensor 2650c1 having the detection port 2650a1 is fixed to the base member 2650c so that the detection port 2650a1 is tilted toward the distribution flow path side of the back cover body 2650e.

Next, with reference to FIG. 164, a configuration will be described in which the sphere guided to the distribution flow path of the back cover body 2650e is distributed to the normal discharge flow path 2650e1 and the special discharge flow path 2650e2, which will be described later.

FIG. 164A is a rear view of the back cover body 2650e showing a state in which the switching member 2650h is operated so that the ball is distributed to the special exhaust flow path 2650e2. As shown in FIG. 164 (a), the switching member 2650h has a locking hole 2650h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 2650i is inserted and a guide piece 2650h2 for guiding the ball, and is provided in the flow path cover body 2650g. It is rotatably supported from the back side. Here, the flow path cover body 2650 g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 2650 h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 2650 h is rotated into the distribution flow path from the back surface side of the flow path cover body 2650 g. It is configured so that it can be placed as possible.

As shown in FIG. 164 (a), the sphere guided into the distribution flow path from the detection port 2650a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 2650h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge flow path 2650e2. .. The special discharge flow path 2650e2 flows down the fall route through which the inflowing ball passes through the fall gate (fall switch) 2650e3 and the second normal discharge flow path 2650e5 branched from the special discharge flow path 2650e2, and flows down the second normal discharge flow path 2650e5. 2 Normal switch) A fall switch 2650e3 or a second normal switch 2650e6 that is configured to have a second normal route that passes through 2650e6 and can detect the passage of a ball that has flowed into the special discharge flow path 2650e2. After being detected, it is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball.

Here, the details will be described later, but in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, when the above-mentioned fall switch 2650e3 detects a ball during the small hit game, that is, when the ball passes through the fall route, a special symbol is provided. The high-probability state of is configured to shift (fall) to the low-probability state. That is, the fall gate (fall switch) 2650e3 is configured as a trigger for shifting the special symbol from the high probability state to the low probability state. Further, the switching member 2650h is a flow path (special discharge flow path 2650e2) that can pass through the fall gate (fall switch) 2650e3 as a flow path of the ball that has won the small hit variable winning device 2650 during the small hit. It is for setting any flow path (normal discharge flow path 2650e1) that cannot (difficultly) pass through the gate (fall switch) 2650e3, and by setting the flow path solenoid 2650k to ON. The ball that has won the small hit variable winning device 2650 is configured to switch the flow path so as to flow down the special discharge flow path 2650e2 (see FIG. 164 (a)).

In the pachinko machine 10 used in the present embodiment, the flow path solenoid 2650k is set to off during normal game play, and the ball winning the small hit variable winning device 2650 has a special discharge flow path 2650e2. It is configured to flow down. Therefore, when an illegal state such as the opening / closing door 2650f1 of the variable winning device for small hits 2650 is opened to win a ball even though the small hit game is not being executed, the illegally won ball is a fall switch. It is configured to pass through 2650e3.

In this way, the state in which the flow path solenoid 2650k is set to off is set to a state in which the pachinko machine 10 is maintained for a long period of time, and further, the flow path configuration (variable winning device for small hits 2650) that is disadvantageous to the player By adopting a flow path configuration in which the winning ball can pass through the fall switch 2650e3), the power consumption of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed, and a penalty can be imposed on the game in which the illegal game is performed.

In this way, since it is determined whether or not the high probability state of the special symbol ends depending on the flow route in which the ball that has won the small hit variable winning device 2650 flows down during the small hit game, the game is also played during the small hit game. It is possible to improve the interest of the person. It should be noted that the small hit winning opening (small hit winning opening) 2650a of the small hit variable winning device 2650 passes through the entrance of the special discharge flow path 2650e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 2650h2 of the switching member 2650h). The required time consists of at least 1 second.

Further, at the end of the normal discharge flow path 2650e1, a discharge confirmation switch (normal switch) 2650e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a sphere is provided. As a result, it can be determined from the total number of ball detections of the normal switch 2650e4, the second fall switch 2650e6, and the fall switch 2650e3 whether or not all the winning balls have been ejected in the small hit variable winning device 2650. That is, the number of balls detected by the ball winning switch 2650c1 (the number of balls won in the variable winning device for small hits 2650) and various switches (normal switch 2650e4, second falling switch 2650e6, falling switch) provided in the three discharge areas. By comparing the number of balls detected by each of the 2650e3) (the number of balls ejected from the variable winning device for small hits 2650), it is determined whether or not the balls remain in the variable winning device for small hits 2650. can do.

The end timing of the small hit game (the end condition of the small hit game (when a predetermined number (10 pieces) of prizes are given to the small hit variable winning device 2650, or the opening scenario of the small hit variable winning device 2650) If all the game balls that have entered the variable winning device for small hits 2650 have not been ejected at the timing when the small hit ending period that is executed after) is established), the variable for small hits It is preferable to determine that the abnormality is inside the winning device 2650, notify the abnormality to the outside, or stop the game so that the big hit game or the normal game is not started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from progressing in a state where an abnormality has occurred in a part of the pachinko machine 10 and a secondary abnormality from occurring.

In this way, the ball that has won the small hit winning opening (small hit winning opening) 2650a of the small hit variable winning device 2650 is detected by the ball winning switch 2650c1, and based on this, the prize ball (book) is given to the player as a privilege. In the embodiment, 10 prize balls are paid out for one ball prize, and whether the ball passes through the fall switch 2650e3 by using the detected ball (passed through the ball prize switch 2650c1). By configuring it so that it can be sorted, it is possible to determine whether or not the high probability state of the special symbol ends during the small hit game. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated area for shifting the high-probability state of the special symbol to the low-probability state separately from the variable winning device for small hits 2650, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

Next, the flow of the game in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 165 and 166. First, with reference to FIG. 165, the flow of the game when the jackpot of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is won in the state where the probabilistic state is set as the game state will be described. FIG. 165 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the special figure 1 jackpot is won during the probability change state.

As shown in FIG. 165, in the fifth embodiment, if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the special figure 1 in a state where the probability variation state is set as in the above-mentioned fourth embodiment, the jackpot is latent during the jackpot fluctuation. The state is configured to be set (see FIG. 165 (a)). Then, during the period when the latent probability state is set (during special figure 1 big hit fluctuation), the small hit game is performed by performing a right-handed game in order to execute the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2). It is configured to execute a latent state game (RUSH game) that is frequently executed.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result after winning the jackpot in the lottery of the special symbol during the jackpot fluctuation period of one special symbol (for example, special figure 1). The period up to) is configured so that the jackpot will not be won in the lottery of the other special symbol (for example, special figure 2). As a result, during the jackpot fluctuation period of one special symbol (for example, special figure 1), the jackpot is won by lottery of the other special symbol (for example, special figure 2), and based on the jackpot winning of the other special symbol. By starting the jackpot game, it is possible to prevent the period in which the latent probability state is set from being shortened. That is, in the fifth embodiment, the latent state game (RUSH game) is surely performed during the latent state setting period (for example, the jackpot fluctuation time of the special figure 1) set in advance when the latent state is set. ) Can be executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in a state where the high probability state of the special symbol is set, during the jackpot fluctuation period of one special symbol (for example, special symbol 1) (after winning the jackpot by lottery of the special symbol). , The period until the big hit game is executed based on the lottery result), even if the ball passes through the fall switch 2650e3 in the variable winning device for small hits 2650, the high probability state of the special symbol becomes the low probability state. It is configured to be a period during which there is no transition (fall invalid period).

Therefore, if the latent probability state is set during the special figure 1 fluctuation that is won by the jackpot, the special figure 1 fluctuation period becomes the fall invalid period, so that the high probability state of the special symbol ends. It is possible to execute a latent state game (RUSH game) without worrying about it. Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in the present embodiment, the latent state is set based on the jackpot winning in Special Figure 1 (the latent state is set based on the establishment of the first latent transition condition). It is configured to determine whether or not to execute an invincible effect (see FIG. 169) that notifies the player of what has been done.

By configuring to execute this invincible effect (see FIG. 169), it is possible to easily make the player know that the fall invalid period is set in the currently set latent state, so that the player can be informed. It is possible to play a latent state game (RUSH game) with peace of mind. Further, in the fifth embodiment, even in the latent state in which the fall invalid period is set, the above-mentioned invincible effect may not be executed. With this configuration, in the latent state game in which the invincible effect (see FIG. 169) is not executed, the fall invalid period may actually be set, so that the ball is made small during the small hit game. When the winning variable winning device 2650 is won, the rate of falling can be reduced.

Then, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation elapses (see FIG. 165 (b)), the high-probability state of the special symbol shifts to the low-probability state. If the small hit game is not executed at this timing, the big hit game is started. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 165, when the small hit game is executed at the timing when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation has elapsed, the start of the big hit game is postponed until the small hit game is completed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with a game that is difficult to understand because the big hit game is started during the execution of the small hit game.

The same gaming state (normal state) as during the jackpot game is set for the interruption period from the lapse of the fluctuation time of the special hit 1 jackpot fluctuation shown in FIG. 165 to the start of the jackpot game. In the fifth embodiment, if the small hit game is executed at the timing when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation has elapsed, the start of the big hit game is suspended (postponed) until the small hit game is completed. ), But it is sufficient to control so that the small hit game and the big hit game are not executed at the same time. For example, the small hit game is executed at the timing when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation has elapsed. If so, it may be configured to forcibly end the running small hit game.

Further, although detailed description is omitted, in this embodiment as well as in each of the above-described embodiments, a small hit is won with one special symbol (special figure 2), and the small hit game is executed. During the period, the measurement of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol (special figure 1) is interrupted.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the latent probability state (advantageous latent probability state) set based on the jackpot winning of Special Figure 1 is set as the fall invalid period, so that a special symbol is given to the player. It is possible to entertain the latent state game (RUSH game) without worrying about the end of the high probability state of. Further, the small hit game started during the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed to the end.

Next, with reference to FIG. 166, the flow of the game when the predetermined number of time reductions is exhausted in the state where the probability change state is set as the game state will be described. FIG. 166 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when all the time reduction times are exhausted during the probability change state.

As shown in FIG. 166, in the fifth embodiment, since the subtraction of the time reduction number is performed at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, the value of the counter (time reduction counter 203f) for continuously setting the time reduction state is set. When it becomes 0, the latent probability state is set from the execution special figure 1 fluctuation (see FIG. 166 (a)). As shown in FIG. 166, the latent state set by digesting a predetermined number of time reductions is configured so that the fall lottery during the latent state period is effectively determined. Therefore, in the small hit game executed during the latent state game (RUSH), there is a possibility that the high probability state of the special symbol will be terminated by the ball that has been won by the variable winning device (variable winning device for small hit 2650). There is a disadvantageous probability state.

<Regarding the content of the production performed in the fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 167 to 169, the characteristic effect contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fifth embodiment will be described. It should be noted that the mode of the effect executed during the probability change state in order to suggest whether or not the latent probability state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is set is the effect described in each of the above-described embodiments. Since it is the same as the embodiment, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 167 (a), the effect content displayed when a small hit is won in a state where the latent probability state is set will be described. FIG. 167 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents when a small hit is won in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 167 (a), the special figure 1 display area Dm1 displays a display mode indicating that the first special symbol (special figure 1) is variablely displayed, and the special figure 2 display area Dm2 displays a display mode. Displays a display mode (“341”) indicating that the second special symbol (special figure 2) has won a small hit. Then, in the guidance display area Dm3, "right-handed" for guiding the game method in the latent state is displayed.

Then, in the main display area Dm, the character 811 is displayed in a display mode for notifying that the small hit has been won, and the character "GET" is displayed. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "The small hit game will start" indicating that the small hit game is started is displayed.

When the small hit game is started, the display screen of FIG. 167 (b) is displayed. FIG. 167 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display contents during the small hit game. According to the figure shown in FIG. 167 (b), the display mode shown in FIG. 167 (a) described above, that is, the display showing that the special figure 1 is variablely displayed, is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. Although the aspect is displayed, in reality, the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is interrupted during the small hit game. In addition, unlike the display mode shown in FIG. 167 (b), the state in which the special figure 1 is appropriately variable-displayed (the state in which the variable time is subtracted) and the variable display in the special figure 1 are interrupted. It may be configured so that the display mode displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 is different from that in the state (the state in which the fluctuation time is not subtracted).

Then, in the main display area Dm, the effect mode in which the character 811 runs from the left direction to the right direction and the treasure box 812 appears from the traveling direction is displayed. In the present embodiment, the effect of opening the treasure box 812 displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is executed during the small hit game, and the effect of this time is determined by the display mode of the effect symbol 813 appearing from the treasure box 812. It is configured to notify the player of the result of the winning game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 168 (a) and 168 (b), display contents for showing the game result of the small hit game in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 168 (a) shows the display content when the ball is won by the variable winning device for small hit 2650 during the small hit game, the fall switch 2650e3 detects the ball, and the high probability state of the special symbol ends. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example, and FIG. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example.

In FIG. 168 (a), the effect symbol 813 indicating the “cross mark” is displayed from the treasure box 812, and the character 811 shifts from the high-probability state of the special symbol to the low-probability state during the small hit game. It is displayed in the failure display mode shown. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment indicating that the latent state game (RUSH game) ends and the game method returns to the left-handed game is displayed. That is, the game state is latent by shifting the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state during the latent state (high probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) in which the RUSH game is performed. In order to shift from the state to the normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), a comment for executing the left-handed game is displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

On the other hand, in FIG. 168 (b), an effect symbol 813 indicating “V” is displayed from the treasure box 812, and a display mode for notifying the player that the RUSH game is continuously executed (that is, left). The character 811 is displayed in the display mode) running from to the right.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect corresponding to the game result during the small hit game executed during the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed by the third symbol display device 81. The player can easily grasp the progress of the latent state game (RUSH game) only by grasping the effect content executed by the third symbol display device 81.

In the present embodiment, the ball winning the small hit variable winning device 2650 during the small hit game is the probability change switch 2650e3 according to the type of the small hit game executed during the latent state game (RUSH game). The ratio (possibility) of flowing down the special discharge flow path 2650e2 provided with the above is different.

Therefore, for example, on the display screen at the time of winning the small hit shown using FIG. 167 (a), the player selects whether or not to make the variable winning device for small hit 2650 win the ball in the small hit game this time. It is configured to display comments (for example, "RUSH ends if you are unlucky with a small hit", "Stop launching if you are uneasy"), and the character displayed when you win a small hit. The display mode of 811 may be configured to be variable depending on whether or not the small hit type won this time is a small hit that makes it easy to end the latent state game (RUSH game).

With this configuration, the player can select whether or not to make the small hit variable winning device 2650 win the ball during the small hit game. Further, in the fifth embodiment in which the latent probability state is set only for a predetermined period (special figure 1 fluctuation time), the number of small hit games that can be executed during the latent probability state is limited, so that the player On the other hand, it is possible to play a game while thinking about whether to acquire a privilege (prize ball) during a small hit game or to avoid the end of a latent state game (RUSH game), which is a novel game. Can provide sex.

Further, even if it is configured to notify the player of the type of the small hit game being executed by the display mode of the treasure box 812 displayed on the display screen during the small hit game shown with reference to FIG. 167 (b). Well, for example, the smaller the type of small hit that is being executed is the type of small hit that makes it easier to end the latent state game (RUSH game), the better it is configured so that the old and tattered treasure chest 812 is displayed. It is preferable to display comments according to the display mode of the treasure box 812. Further, the display mode displayed during the small hit game is more specific than the content suggesting the small hit type (RUSH game continuation expectation degree) won this time to the player when the small hit is won. It is advisable to configure the player to be notified of such (highly reliable) content.

With this configuration, for the player who has selected whether or not to make the small hit variable winning device 2650 win the ball in this small hit game based on the display screen displayed at the time of winning the small hit. Since it is possible to show a more specific RUSH continuation expectation degree, it is possible for the player to predict whether or not the selected game content is correct.

In this case, in particular, it was emphasized that the RUSH game was a small hit type in which it was difficult for the player who chose not to win the ball in the variable winning device for small hits 2650 to finish the RUSH game even if the ball was won. It is good to configure it so that it can be notified. Specifically, the small hit type determining means for determining the type of the small hit game this time, and whether or not the ball has won the small hit variable winning device 2650 within a predetermined period from the start of the small hit game. (Or a means for determining that the right-handed game has been executed after the small hit winning) is provided, and the determination result by the small hit type determination means is the small hit type in which the RUSH game is difficult to end. In this case, if it is determined that the ball has not won the small hit variable winning device 2650 within a predetermined period from the start of the small hit game, it is better to fire the ball in this small hit game. It is advisable to provide a display means to display a fanning comment (for example, "I should have fired a ball", "Weakling") indicating that it was acquired.

As a result, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the ball was not won by the variable winning device for small hits 2650, so that the player can be positively notified of the loss during the small hits game. It is possible to urge the variable winning device 2650 to win a ball. In other words, when the RUSH game is completed by having the variable winning device for small hits 2650 win a ball, the game shows that the selection was unsuccessful based on the game result, even if the fanning by the production was not executed. Although the player can be aware of it, the player who chooses not to win the ball in the small hit variable winning device 2650 cannot be aware of whether or not the selection result of this time is advantageous, so the selection result is selected by the display means. By displaying the evaluation of, the player can easily grasp whether or not this selection is successful.

Further, a display mode for notifying the player who has selected not to win the ball in the variable winning device for small hits 2650 that the small hit type this time is the small hit type in which the RUSH game is likely to end. (For example, "Stop firing and get a great answer", "I feel good") may be displayed, and even if the small hit type this time is a small hit type where the RUSH game is easy to end, this time. In the small hit game, you may display a fan comment (for example, "I should have fired the ball", "Weakling") indicating that you could get the privilege by firing the ball.

Next, with reference to FIG. 169, the display content of the effect of notifying that the fall invalid period is set in the latent probability state (advantageous latent probability state) will be described. FIG. 169 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display content displayed at the end of the small hit in the advantageous latent probability state. As shown in FIG. 169, when the currently set latent state is the advantageous latent state in which the fall invalid period is set, the same latent mode setting process as in the above-described fourth embodiment (FIG. 154). When the invincible mode is set as the current latent mode in (see S4451), the effect mode (“invincible mode”) indicating that the latent state currently set for the player is the advantageous latent state. Is displayed.

When the character 811 enters the invincible mode, the display mode of the character 811 becomes a display mode dedicated to the invincible mode (a display mode in which an aura is wrapped around the display mode). Then, "lucky point x 0" is displayed as the cumulative display mode 819 of the number of balls that have passed through the fall gate 2650e3 during the invincible mode. This cumulative display mode 819 corresponds to a command indicating the number of balls detected by the fall switch 2650e3 output from the main control device 110 (a command indicating the number of falls if the fall invalid period is not set). The numbers are displayed. As a result, it is possible to easily inform the player of the situation in which the invincible mode has worked in favor of the player.

Although not shown in the figure of FIG. 169, the small hit number display 825 displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 may be displayed in the above-described fourth embodiment, and the small hit number display 825 may be displayed. And the cumulative display mode 819 may be displayed together. In addition, the non-game number measuring means for measuring the number of small hit games in which the player did not make the ball win in the small hit variable winning device 2650 and the number of times measured by the non-game number measuring means are displayed on the display means. It may be configured to do so.

With this configuration, for example, for all the small hit games executed during the latent state game (RUSH game), the number of small hit games in which the player has executed the game and the player can play the game. Since it is possible to easily grasp the number of small hit games that have not been executed, it can be used as a reference for future RUSH games.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the fifth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 170 to 173. First, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 170. FIG. 170 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 170, the ROM 202 of the fifth embodiment is provided with the small hit type selection table 202da instead of the small hit type selection table 202e for the ROM 202 of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the operation scenario storage area 202db is added. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the small hit type selection 5 table 202da will be described with reference to FIG. 171. FIG. 171 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the small hit type selection 5 table 202da. The fifth embodiment is configured to win a small hit only for the second special symbol (special figure 2), and when the small hit is won in the lottery of the special figure 2, the small hit type selection 5 table The small hit type is selected with reference to 202da.

In the small hit type selection 5 table 202da, the corresponding small hit type is defined for each range of the value of the small hit type counter C5, and as shown in FIG. 171 (a), the value of the small hit type counter C5. However, in the range of "0 to 14", "small hit A" is defined in association with each other. This "small hit A" is a small hit type in which the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set to the open state for 1.5 seconds after the opening period of 1.5 seconds has elapsed during the small hit game. After the opening state of 1.5 seconds has elapsed, an ending period of 0.5 seconds is set, but since this ending period is the same for all small hit types, FIG. 171 (a) shows. Omit.

Further, in the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "15 to 59", "small hit B" is defined in association with it. This "small hit B" is performed after the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set to the open state (first open setting) for 0.1 seconds after the opening period of 0.5 seconds has elapsed during the small hit game. It is a small hit type that sets the open state for 1.4 seconds (second open setting) after an interval period of 1 second. After the second opening setting, an ending period of 0.5 seconds is set, but since this ending period is the same for all small hit types, it is omitted in FIG. 171 (a).

In the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "60 to 79", "small hit C" is defined in association with it. This "small hit C" is obtained after the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set to the open state (first open setting) for 0.5 seconds after the opening period of 0.1 seconds has elapsed during the small hit game. It is a small hit type that sets an open state for 0.1 seconds (second open setting) after an interval period of 1 second. After the second opening setting, an ending period of 0.5 seconds is set, but since this ending period is the same for all small hit types, it is omitted in FIG. 171 (a).

In the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "80 to 99", "small hit D" is defined in association with each other. This "small hit D" is performed after the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set to the open state (first open setting) for 0.5 seconds after the opening period of 0.1 seconds has elapsed during the small hit game. , It is a small hit type that sets the open state for 1 second (second open setting) after an interval period of 0.3 seconds. After the second opening setting, an ending period of 0.5 seconds is set, but since this ending period is the same for all small hit types, it is omitted in FIG. 171 (a).

The operation scenario storage area 202db is a data area in which the operation scenario of the flow path solenoid 2650h during the small hit game is stored in advance, and the flow path solenoid 2650h performs the same operation regardless of the type of small hit to be executed. One motion scenario is set to execute.

Here, the contents of the operation scenario stored in the operation scenario storage area 202db will be described with reference to FIG. 171 (b). FIG. 171 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the operation scenario defined in the operation scenario storage area 202db. As shown in FIG. 171 (b), the operation scenario storage area 202db defines an operation scenario set according to the start timing of the small hit game.

Specifically, it is stipulated that the flow path solenoid 2650h is set to off until 1.4 seconds have passed from the start timing of the small hit, and from 1.4 seconds after the start of the small hit to the end of the small hit. It is specified that the flow path solenoid 2650h is set to ON during the period of. The operation scenario in which the operation content of the flow path solenoid 2650h is defined is a scenario in which a value is incremented by 1 each time the main processing of the main control device 110 executed every 4 milliseconds is executed. It is managed by a counter (not shown).

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the small hit type selected and the flow path solenoid determine whether or not the ball winning the small hit variable winning device 2650 flows down the special discharge flow path 2650e2. It is configured to be variably set according to the operation scenario of 2650h. Further, the ball flowing down the special discharge flow path 2650e2 is branched into a ball passing through the fall gate 2650e3 and a ball not passing through (second normal switch 2650e6) by the internal structure of the variable winning device for small hits 2650. It is configured in.

Specifically, in the small hit game in which "small hit A" is set as the small hit type, the opening period (1.5 seconds) is the period in which the flow path solenoid 2650h is set to off (1 from the start of the small hit). Since it is set longer than (4 seconds), the ball does not pass through the fall route, and the small hit game that is most advantageous to the player who is set to have a long opening period is executed.

In the small hit game in which "small hit B" to "small hit D" are set as the small hit types, the first opening period is the timing at which the winning ball can pass through the fall route. Further, "small hit C" and "small hit D" have a short opening period of 0.1 seconds (shorter than "small hit B"), and. Since the first opening period is as long as 0.5 seconds (because it is longer than "small hit B"), it is a small hit game in which the ball easily passes through the fall route.

In addition, "small hit C" is the most disadvantageous small for the player because the period in which the first attacker (first variable winning device) 65 is released in one opening operation is as short as 0.6 seconds. It will be a winning game. In the fifth embodiment, it takes about 0.5 seconds for the ball launched by the right-handed game to win the small hit variable winning device 2650 and reach the distribution flow path distributed by the flow path solenoid 2650h. It is configured so that the symbol determination period of the special symbol at the time of winning a small hit is 0.5 seconds.

Therefore, the small hit game is started by stopping the right-handed game immediately after the third symbol indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 167 (a)). At this point, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a ball fired before stopping the right-handed game wins the small hit variable winning device 2650.

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 172. FIG. 172 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 172, the RAM 203 of the fifth embodiment is different from the RAM 203 of the fourth embodiment in that the small hit winning counter 203da, the fall passage counter 203db, and the passage flag 203dc are added. is doing. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The small hit winning counter 203da is a counter for measuring the number of balls won in the small hit variable winning device 2650 during the small hit game, and passes through the balls in the small hit entrance passing process (see S171 in FIG. 174). When it is determined that the timing when the sensor (ball detection switch 2650c1) is on is during the opening period of the small hit winning opening 2650a (S3302: Yes in FIG. 174), the value is added by 1 and after the addition. The winning number command corresponding to the information indicating the value of is set (S3305 in FIG. 174). Then, when it is determined in the small hit control process 5 (see S2271 in FIG. 176) that it is the end timing of the small hit game (S2511: yes in FIG. 176), the value of the counter is cleared.

Although detailed description will be described later, in the fifth embodiment, the latent state continues on the voice lamp control device 113 side based on the winning number command set corresponding to the value of the small hit winning counter 203da. The number of balls won in the variable winning device for small hits 2650 is accumulated during the set period. As a result, the number of winning balls in one latent state game (RUSH game) can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, as described above, the player has the game property of selecting whether or not the ball is to be won by the variable winning device for small hits 2650 during the small hit game. Depending on the selection content of the player, the cumulative value of the number of balls won by the variable winning device for small hits 2650 may differ greatly even if the number of small hit games is the same. Therefore, it is possible to provide a detailed game result by displaying the number of balls won in the variable winning device for small hits 2650 instead of the number of times the small hit game is executed.

In addition, both the number of balls won in the above-mentioned variable winning device for small hits 2650 and the number of times the small hit game is executed are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or a prize is won during one small hit game. The average value of the number of balls may be displayed, or the number of winnings may be displayed as a winning history for each small hit type of the executed small hit game.

The fall passage counter 203db is a counter for measuring the number of balls that have passed through the fall gate 2650e3 during the small hit game, and the fall switch 2650e3 detects the balls in the fall gate passing process (see S172 in FIG. 175). (S3402: Yes in FIG. 175), the value is added by 1 (S3403 in FIG. 175), and the pass number command is set with the information corresponding to the added value (S3404 in FIG. 175). Then, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit game (S2511: yes in FIG. 176), the value of the counter is cleared.

In the present embodiment, when the state update restriction flag 203ca is set to on, that is, when the advantageous latent probability state is set, the number of balls passing through the fall route is always counted. .. As a result, when the "invincible mode" is set as the latent probability mode, the high probability state of the special symbol shifts to the low probability state (fall route) when the advantageous latent probability state is not set. The number of balls played can be notified to the player (see the cumulative display mode 819 in FIG. 169).

The pass flag 203dc indicates that the fall switch 2650e3 has detected the ball when the fall switch 2650e3 has detected the ball effectively (when the state update limit flag 203ca is set to off). This flag is set to ON to indicate that the fall switch 2650e3 has detected a sphere.

This pass flag 203dc is used when it is determined in the fall gate passage process (see S172 in FIG. 175) that the ball has passed through the fall gate 2650e3 and the state update restriction flag 203ca is set to off (S3405 in FIG. 175). : No) Set to on. Then, when the passing flag 203dc is set to ON, the process of determining whether or not a new ball has passed the falling gate 2650e3 in the falling gate passing process (see S172 in FIG. 175) is skipped. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the process for dropping the high-probability state of the special symbol is executed a plurality of times during one small hit game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 173, the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 173 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 173, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment has a winning number counter 223da and a passing number counter 223db with respect to the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment described above. And are different in that they are added, and they are the same except for that. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The winning number counter 223da is a counter for measuring the number of balls won in the small hit variable winning device 2650 during the small hit game, and is the main control device 110 in the ball passing related processing (see S4582 in FIG. 179). When it is determined that the winning number command has been received from (S8101: Yes in FIG. 179), the value is added by 1, and the information corresponding to the added value is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Set a number command (see S8106 in FIG. 179).

Then, when the gaming state shifts from the latent state to the normal state, the value of the counter is cleared. That is, the winning number counter 223da is a ball that has won the small hit variable winning device 2650 in a plurality of small hit games executed until the latent state is set once the latent state is set. It is configured so that the numbers can be accumulated and measured.

The pass count counter 223db is a counter for measuring the number of balls that have passed through the fall gate 2650e3, and is determined to have received the pass count command from the main control device 110 in the ball pass-related processing (see S4582 in FIG. 179). In this case (S8107: Yes in FIG. 179), the value is added by 1 when the current latent state is the advantageous latent state (see S8110 in FIG. 179).

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the fifth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 174 to 175. The control process of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment is a small hit control process 5 (see FIG. 55) instead of the small hit control process (see FIG. 55) for the control process of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the small hit entrance passage process (see FIG. 174) and the fall gate passage process (see FIG. 175) are executed. Other than that, the same processing is executed. The same processing is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 174, the small hit entrance passage process (S171) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit entrance passing process (S171).

In the small hit entrance passage process (S171), first, it is determined whether or not the ball passage sensor is on (S3301). If it is determined that the ball passage sensor is not on (S3301: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball passing sensor is on (S3301: Yes), it is determined whether the small hit winning opening is in the opening period (S3302). If it is determined that the winning opening for small hits is being opened (S3302: Yes), a command for passing through the small hit entrance is set (S3303). The small hit entrance passage command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is directed to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 201. Will be sent. 1 is added to the value of the small hit winning counter 203da (S3304). Next, in the process of S3304, a winning number command is set based on the value of the small hit winning counter 203da after addition (S3305), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3302, if it is determined that the winning opening for small hits is not open (S3302: No), an error command is set (S3306), and the flow path solenoid is set to off (S3307). , End this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 175, the fall gate passing process (S172) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fall gate passing process (S172).

In the fall gate passing process (S172), first, it is determined whether or not the passing flag 203dc is on (S3401). If it is determined that the pass flag 203dc is on (S3401: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the passage flag 203dc is not on (S3401: No), it is determined whether or not there is passage in the fall gate (S3402). If it is determined that there is no passage through the fall gate (S3402: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a passage in the fall gate (S3402: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the fall passage counter 203db (S3403), and the number of passages is based on the value of the fall passage counter 203db after the addition. Set the command (S3404). Next, it is determined whether or not the state update restriction flag 203ca is on (S3405). If it is determined that the state update restriction flag 203ca is on (S3405: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the state update restriction flag is not on (S3405: No), it is determined whether or not the fall gate passage is in the valid period (S3406). When it is determined that the fall gate passage is in the valid period (S3406: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is set to off (S3407) and the passage flag 203dc is set to on (S3408). Next, a fall command is set (S3409), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3406, if it is determined that the period is not during the fall gate passage valid period (S3406: No), an error command is set (S3410), and this process is terminated.

Next, the small hit control process 5 (S2271) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 176. FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit control process 5 (S2271). When the small hit control process 5 (S2271) determines that it is the timing of the end of the small hit in the process of S2511 with respect to the small hit control process (S2205) in the first embodiment described above (S2511: No. ) The difference is that the values of the small hit winning counter 203da and the fall passing counter 203db are cleared (S2571), and the passing flag 203dc is set to off (S2572). Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 177 to 179, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. The control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment is a state command process (see FIG. 62) with respect to the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first to fourth embodiments described above. The difference is that the state command process 5 (see FIG. 177) is executed instead of the hit-related process 5 (see FIG. 178), the hit-related process 5 (see FIG. 178) is executed instead of the hit-related process (see FIG. 63), and the ball passage-related process (see FIG. 179) is executed. Other than that, the same processing is executed. The same processing is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the state command process 5 (S4921) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 177. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the contents of the state command process 5 (S4921). The state command process 5 (S4921) performs a process (S4471) for clearing the winning number counter 223da and the passing number counter 223db instead of the processing of S4454 for the state command process 4 (S4281) in the fourth embodiment described above. It differs in that it is added. Since other processes are the same as the state command process 4 (S4281) in the fourth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the hit-related process 5 (S4292) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 178. FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit-related process 5 (S4292). The hit-related process 5 (S4292) differs from the hit-related process (S4216) in the first embodiment described above in that a process related to ball passage is added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the hit-related process 5 (S4292), if it is determined that the prize ball command has not been received from the main control device 110 in the process of S4505 (S4505: No), it is determined whether or not the ball passage-related command has been received. (S4581). If it is determined that the ball passage-related command has been received (S4581: Yes), the ball passage-related process (S4582) is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball passage related command has not been received (S4581: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 179, a ball passage-related process (S4582), which is one process in the hit-related process 5 (S4922) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ball passage-related processing (S4582).

In the ball passage-related processing (S4582), first, it is determined whether or not the winning number command has been received from the main control device 110 this time (S8101). When it is determined that the winning number command has been received (S8101: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter 223da (S8102), and the latent mode stored in the latent mode storage area 223cc is read out. Execute (S8103). Next, it is determined whether the latent mode read in the process of S8103 is the invincible mode (S8104). When it is determined that the mode is not invincible (S8104: No), a suggestion effect suggesting the end of the latent state is set (S8105), a winning number command for display is set (S8106), and this process is terminated. .. On the other hand, in the process of S8104, when it is determined that the read latent mode is the invincible mode (S8104: Yes), the process of S8105 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S8106.

On the other hand, in the process of S8101 when it is determined that the winning number command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S8101: No), it is determined whether or not the passing number command has been received (S8107). When it is determined that the pass count command has been received (S8107: Yes), the value stored in the state setting area 223j is read out (S8108). Next, in the process of S8108, it is determined whether or not the read value is a value indicating the time saving latency (S8109). When it is determined that the read value is a value indicating the time saving latency (S8109: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the passing number counter 223db (S8110). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8109 that the read value is not a value indicating the time saving latency (S8109: No), the process of S8110 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S8111.

Next, the latent mode stored in the latent mode storage area 223 cab is read out (S8111). Next, it is determined whether the latent mode read in the process of S8111 is an invincible mode (S8112). When it is determined that the mode is not invincible (S8112: No), a suggestion effect suggesting the end of the latent state is set (S8113), a display pass count command is set (S8114), and this process is terminated. .. On the other hand, in the process of S8112, if it is determined that the read latent mode is the invincible mode (S8112: Yes), the process of S8113 is skipped, the process of S8114 is executed, and the present process is terminated.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the operation content (opening operation pattern) of the small hit game to be executed differs depending on the type (small hit type) when the small hit is won. Depending on the opening operation pattern to be executed, the rate at which the ball winning the small hit variable winning device 2650 passes through the fall gate 2650e3 during the small hit game is configured to be different.

By configuring in this way, the content of the small hit game to be executed is predicted in order to prevent the high probability state of the special symbol from falling and to perform the game aiming at the acquisition of the privilege (prize ball) by the small hit game. It is possible to let the player select a game while letting the player select a game.

In addition, as in the fourth embodiment described above, in the latent state set during the period when one special symbol is executing the jackpot fluctuation, a small hit is won in the other special symbol fluctuation (lottery). Even if the ball passes through the fall gate 2650e3, the high-probability state of the special symbol does not shift to the low-probability state.

As a result, in the state where the latent probability state is set, the advantageous latent probability state in which the high probability state of the special symbol does not fall (difficult) and the high probability state of the special symbol are more likely to fall than the advantageous latent probability state. It is possible to set the unfavorable probability state.

In each of the above embodiments, the process of updating the value of the time reduction counter 203f (process of subtracting the number of time reductions) is the timing at which the variation of the special symbol is started (for example, the first special symbol variation start process (see S208 in FIG. 33)). ), So that the first special symbol change (lottery) and the second special symbol change (lottery) can be executed at the same time in a gaming machine for a predetermined number of times. , It is configured to execute a time-saving game (a game in which a high probability state of a normal symbol is set), but for example, when setting 100 to the value of the time-saving counter 203f (when setting 100 times of time-saving). ), There is a problem that the period from the start of the 100th special symbol change to the start of the 101st special symbol change becomes a non-time saving state (low probability state of a normal symbol).

During the period when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the lottery (variation) that is advantageous to the player can be executed even in the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol different from the special symbol. The period from the start of the 100th special symbol change to the start of the 101st special symbol change, that is, the period from the start of the number of special symbol changes exceeding the predetermined time reduction number. There is a problem that the player is uncomfortable due to the setting of the non-time saving state.

However, if the process of updating the value of the time reduction counter 203f (the process of subtracting the number of time reductions) is configured to be updated at the timing when the variation display of the special symbol ends (the timing when the symbol confirmation period ends), In a gaming machine that can simultaneously execute the first special symbol change (lottery) and the second special symbol change (lottery), the time saving state sets the special symbol change (lottery) more than a predetermined number of times. There was a problem that it was executed in the state where it was done.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the time saving end condition is applied to the special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) corresponding to the special symbol lottery (100th time saving) executed when the value of the time saving counter 203f becomes 0. (1st time reduction end condition) is set, and the time reduction end condition (2nd time reduction end condition) is also set for the other special symbol (for example, the 2nd special symbol), and the set two time reduction end conditions are set. Of these, the time saving state may be terminated based on the time saving ending condition that was established earlier.

Specifically, when a predetermined period (for example, 100 times of time reduction) is set as the period for which the time reduction state is set, the special symbol change corresponding to the final change of the time reduction state (for example, the 100th time reduction) ends. The first time-saving end condition that is satisfied as a result, and the second time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the condition for starting a new special symbol change (for example, the 101st special symbol change) that is newly executed after a predetermined period is satisfied are satisfied. And, if the first time reduction end condition is satisfied first, that is, by the time the 101st special symbol change is started, the 100th special symbol change period (or symbol confirmation period) has ended. In that case, the time saving state is terminated at that point.

On the other hand, when the second time reduction end condition is satisfied before the first time reduction end condition is satisfied, that is, before the 100th special symbol change period (or symbol determination period) ends (special). If the condition for starting the 101st special symbol change is satisfied (during the symbol change), the time saving state may be terminated before the 101st special symbol lottery is executed.

With this configuration, the maximum period can be achieved while preventing the special symbol fluctuation (lottery) from being executed more than a predetermined number of times in the state where the time saving state is set as the game state. It can be set as a time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to set a state advantageous to the player as long as possible as a normal symbol lottery (variation).

Further, in each of the above embodiments, the probability variation counter 203aa for measuring the period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set and the time reduction counter 203f for measuring the period in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set are provided. However, the value of each counter is subtracted and interrupted, but in each of the above embodiments, the time saving counter is replaced with the process of interrupting the subtraction of the probability variation counter 203aa (the process of interrupting (skipping) the measurement). A process of interrupting the subtraction of 203f may be applied, or vice versa.

In each of the above embodiments, the hold ball count command is issued each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 hold ball count counter 203d is updated (that is, when it increases or decreases) in the main control device 110. Although the case of transmitting from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the hold number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d increases in the main control device 110. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to reduce the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. As a result, the number of times the main control device 110 sends the hold number command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced, respectively. The control load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In each of the above embodiments, the winning of the first ball opening 64 and the passage of the through gate 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls in the variable display based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 is set by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is divided into four areas by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the light emitting member notifies the number of reserved balls. It may be configured as.

Further, as shown in each of the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbol as the identification information is scrolled vertically on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The design may be moved and displayed along a predetermined route such as a vertical direction or an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol, for example, one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the symbol or in various ways separately from the symbol. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the third symbol display for showing the player the lottery result of each symbol is executed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. For example, among the third symbols, different display means may be provided for the display means for displaying the main symbol to be emphasized and displayed to the player and the display means for displaying the subordinate symbols. Further, as the configuration of the display means, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 is executed in the game state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player, and the left side area of the game board 13 is executed in the normal game state. It is configured so that the left-handed game aiming at is executed, but the target area of the game board 13 may be different depending on the game state, and the left-handed game is executed during the time saving state, and the normal state is in progress. May perform a right-handed game. Further, the game may be configured to be playable in different game states while aiming at the same area.

In each of the above-described embodiments, as the operation means that can be operated by the player, the frame buttons 22 and 23 that determine that the operation means has been operated by the player's pressing operation are used, but other than that. The configuration may be used, and an operating means configured in a lever shape capable of determining that the player has been operated by tilting it to the left or right or back and forth, or that the player has been operated by contact or proximity. A touch sensor type operating means capable of discriminating, a wireless operating means capable of discriminating that the operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used. Further, each of the movable valve 750, the storage device (first storage device 770, the second storage device 771), the second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and the third frame button (release button) 22c. A part or all of the operation control may be executed on the voice lamp control device 113 side instead of the main control device 110.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the voice lamp control device 113 performs a process for setting a display mode in the effect executed by using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the game (lottery) itself is a voice lamp. It is configured to be executed by the main control device 110 different from the control device 113, but is not limited to this, and the process for executing the game (lottery) and the result of the game (lottery) are displayed as an effect. The processing for this may be configured to be executed by the same control device. With this configuration, it is possible to execute a plurality of different processes with one control device.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a big hit is made, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the big hit until multiple (for example, two or three times) big hits occur. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, two types of special symbols, a first special symbol and a second special symbol, are used as a plurality of special symbol types, but the types of special symbols are not limited to this, and three or more. The special symbol type may be used, or only one special symbol type may be used. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, a game property in which a lottery (variation) is performed according to a predetermined rule for a plurality of special symbols and a game property in which a lottery (variation) is individually performed independently are described. However, the playability described in each embodiment may be interchanged or combined.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variablely displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of spheres are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined amount. With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is a gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Characteristic A group> (Small hits are possible during specific special map fluctuations)
The first determination means capable of executing the first determination, the first display means for displaying the determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means. The dynamic display period setting means for dynamically displaying the first identification information, the dynamic display period setting means for setting the dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the first identification information, and the second determination can be executed. The second determination means, the second display means for displaying the second identification information for showing the determination result by the second determination means, and the first for showing a specific first determination result to the first display means. 1 When the identification information is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and when the second identification information for showing a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the second privilege game is displayed. In a gaming machine having the privileged game executing means for executing the above, the first gaming state that makes it easier to execute the second determination than the first determination, and the first determination rather than the second determination are executed. The game state setting means has a game state setting means capable of setting a second game state for facilitation, and the game state setting means dynamically displays the first identification information when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine A1 characterized in that the first gaming state can be set during the target display period.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (probability changing state) that is advantageous to the player during the period from the end of the privileged game to the winning of the next big hit according to the lottery result (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766 (Ab. 2012). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, which is advantageous to the player, is changed by the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set, that is, it is executed during the advantageous gaming state. If the next win is won immediately by the lottery, the period for which the advantageous gaming state is set is shortened, and if the lottery executed during the advantageous gaming state does not immediately win the next hit, the advantageous gaming state is set. Will be set for a longer period. As described above, there is a problem that the period in which the advantageous gaming state to be provided to the player is set differs depending on the result of the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set. Further, if the gaming machine has a game property of giving a privilege to the player during the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, there is a problem that the privilege given to the player is significantly different. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine with further improved interest in gaming.

According to the gaming machine A1, the first gaming state in which the second determination is easily executed can be set during the period in which the first determination is dynamically displayed, so that the length of the period in which the first gaming state is set is set. Can be set in advance. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine A1, the second determination means is configured to determine the specific second determination result with a higher probability than the probability that the first determination means determines the specific first determination result. A gaming machine A2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are played. That is, the second privilege game executed based on the determination result of the second determination by the second determination means is executed rather than the first privilege game executed based on the determination result of the first determination by the first determination means. Therefore, the first gaming state can be set to a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to have the player play the game in the hope that the first game state is set, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine A1 or A2, a first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second entry means different from the first entry means, the first entry means, and the second entry means. A third ball entry means different from the means, a first state in which the game ball can be guided to the second ball entry means, and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the second ball entry means than the first state. The first determination means has a variable means that can be changed into two states, and the first determination means is based on the fact that a game ball enters the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means. The second determination means is configured to be able to execute the second determination based on the game ball entering the third ball entry means, and the second determination means is configured to be able to execute the second determination. The gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the variable means is controlled so as to be more easily variable to the first state than the first gaming state.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A1 or A2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is possible to make it more difficult to execute the first determination in the first gaming state than in the second gaming state. Therefore, in the state where the first game state is set, it is possible to facilitate the game of inserting the ball into the third ball entry means, and it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. ..

In the gaming machine A3, after the first privilege game is executed, the probability of being determined as the specific first determination result by the first determination can be set to a higher probability than usual. Having the setting means, the gaming state setting means is displayed with the first identification information for showing the specific first determination result when the high probability is set by the high probability setting means. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the first gaming state is set based on the start of the dynamic display of the first identification information.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the high probability is set by the high probability setting means, the dynamic display of the first identification information that is displayed by the first identification information for showing the specific first determination result by the first determination. Since the first gaming state is set based on the start, the process until the first gaming state is set can be set step by step. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make it easier for the player to continuously play the game.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the second privilege game is characterized in that the privilege that can be given to the player is set to be smaller than that of the first privilege game. Machine A5.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are played. That is, in the second privilege game, the privilege that can be given to the player is set to be less than that in the first privilege game, so that the player is given an excessive privilege during the period in which the first game state is set. There is an effect that it can be suppressed from being given.

<Characteristic B group> (Game content and special 1 and special 2 are set at once)
The first determination means capable of executing the first determination, the first display means for displaying the determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means. The first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the above, the first dynamic display period determining means for determining the period during which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, and the second determination. The second identification information is dynamically displayed on the second determination means capable of executing the above, the second display means for displaying the determination result by the second determination means, and the second display means. The second dynamic display means to be displayed, the second dynamic display period determining means for determining the period during which the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means, and the first display means are specified. When the first identification information for showing the first determination result of the above is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and the second identification information for showing the specific second determination result to the second display means. Is displayed, the first identification information for showing the specific first determination result is displayed in the gaming machine having the privilege game execution means for executing the second privilege game. A period determination means for determining a dynamic display period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and a dynamic display of the second identification information executed during the dynamic display period determined by the period determination means. The gaming machine B1 is characterized by having an effect determining means for determining an effect corresponding to the above, and an effect executing means for executing the effect determined by the effect determining means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (probability changing state) that is advantageous to the player during the period from the end of the privileged game to the winning of the next big hit according to the lottery result (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766 (Ab. 2012). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, which is advantageous to the player, is changed by the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set, that is, it is executed during the advantageous gaming state. If the next win is won immediately by the lottery, the period for which the advantageous gaming state is set is shortened, and if the lottery executed during the advantageous gaming state does not immediately win the next hit, the advantageous gaming state is set. Will be set for a longer period. As described above, there is a problem that the period in which the advantageous gaming state to be provided to the player is set differs depending on the result of the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set. Further, if the gaming machine has a game property of giving a privilege to the player during the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, there is a problem that the privilege given to the player is significantly different. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine with further improved interest in gaming.

According to the gaming machine B1, since the effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the second identification information executed during the dynamic display period determined by the period determination means is determined by the effect determination means, the first identification information Since it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the second identification information in association with the dynamic display period, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting the future game based on the effect to be executed. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine B1, the effect determining means determines the effect based on the dynamic display period determined by the period determining means and the game content of the first privilege game. Characterized gaming machine B2.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1, by grasping the effect executed by the effect executing means, the dynamic display period of the first identification information being executed and the game of the first privilege game are performed. It is possible to predict the content and. Therefore, since the player can pay attention to the production, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine B1 or B2, a first gaming state in which the second determination is easier to be executed than in the first determination, and a second gaming state in which the first determination is easier to be executed than in the second determination. The gaming state setting means has a configurable gaming state setting means, and the gaming state setting means dynamically displays the first identification information to be displayed by the first identification information for showing the specific first determination result. The gaming machine B3, characterized in that the first gaming state is executed during the dynamic display period.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines B1 or B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the first game state is set during the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the determination result at which the first privilege game is executed, the period until the first privilege game is executed is set. It can be used to perform a game aiming at the second privilege game. Further, by grasping the effect executed by the effect execution means, it is possible to predict the period in which the first game state is set, so that the game can be enthusiastically performed during the first game state. effective.

In the gaming machine B2 or B3, as the first privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, the normal first privilege game and the small first privilege game in which the privilege given to the player is less than the normal first privilege game. The first dynamic display period determining means can determine a first period and a second period longer than the first period. The effect determining means includes a case where the small first privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means and the second period is determined by the period determining means, and the normal first by the privilege game executing means. 1 The gaming machine B4, characterized in that the privileged game is executed and the production of the same aspect is determined in the case where the first period is determined by the period determining means.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B2 or B3, when the effect determining means has a different combination of the two elements for determining the effect content, the same embodiment is used by the effect determining means. Since the effect is determined, it is possible to make the player predict a plurality of patterns of the future game situation by grasping the content of the effect executed by the effect execution means. Then, the accuracy of the prediction can be gradually improved depending on the progress of the first gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that the enjoyment of prediction for the player can be further enhanced and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine B4, the effect determining means determines a specific effect when the normal first privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means and the second period is determined by the period determining means. A gaming machine B5 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, by executing the specific effect, it is possible to notify the player that the most advantageous game content has been set, so that there is an effect that the player can be given a sense of superiority.

<Characteristic C group> (rush notification)
The first determination means capable of executing the first determination, the first display means on which the first identification information for showing the determination result by the first determination means is displayed, and the first identification information on the first display means. The first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the above, the first dynamic display period determining means for determining the period during which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, and the second determination. The second identification information is dynamically displayed on the second determination means capable of executing the above, the second display means for displaying the determination result by the second determination means, and the second display means. The second dynamic display means to be displayed, the second dynamic display period determining means for determining the period during which the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means, and the first display means are specified. When the first identification information for showing the first determination result of the above is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and the second identification information for showing the specific second determination result to the second display means. When is displayed, the first gaming state in which the second determination is more likely to be executed than the first determination in the gaming machine having the privileged game executing means for executing the second privilege game, and the first game state. When the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means capable of setting the second gaming state that makes it easier to execute the first determination than the second determination, and the gaming state setting means, the second game state is set. It has a notification timing determining means for determining the notification timing for notifying the player of the notification mode for indicating to the player that the first gaming state has been set based on the situation in the dynamic display of the identification information. The gaming machine C1 characterized by.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Furthermore, according to the lottery result, an advantageous game state (probability change state) that is advantageous to the player is set during the period from the end of the privilege game to the next big hit, and the player is notified that the game state has changed. A gaming machine that performs the effect of performing the effect has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). By the way, since the above-mentioned gaming machine is configured to execute an effect of notifying the player based on the setting of the advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player, for example, the advantageous gaming state is set. Despite this, even if a new lottery cannot be executed, the problem is that the player is informed that the game state is set, which makes the player uncomfortable. was there. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine with further improved interest in gaming.

According to the gaming machine C1, the notification timing for notifying that the first gaming state in which the second determination is easily executed is set can be determined based on the dynamic display status of the second identification information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from being uncomfortable with the notification timing for notifying that the first game state has been set.

In the gaming machine C1, the second dynamic display means can dynamically display the second identification information while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. The gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state based on the result of the first determination by the first determination means.

According to the gaming machine C2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1. That is, when the first gaming state set based on the determination result of the first determination means executed separately from the second determination means is set, the second identification information is notified based on the situation in the dynamic display. The timing is decided. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game by combining the first identification information and the second identification information that can be dynamically displayed at the same time.

The gaming machine C2 has a dynamic display determining means for determining whether or not the second identification information is dynamically displayed at the time when the first gaming state is set, and the notification timing determining means is the moving. When it is determined by the target display determination means that the second identification information is not dynamically displayed, the notification timing is determined based on the time when the first gaming state is set. Amusement machine C3.

According to the gaming machine C3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C2. That is, if the second determination can be executed immediately after the first gaming state is set, it is immediately notified that the first gaming state has been set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game in the first game state for a longer time.

In the gaming machine C2 or C3, when the notification timing determining means determines that the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display determining means, the dynamic display of the second identification information ends. The gaming machine C4, characterized in that the notification timing is determined based on the timing of the notification.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C2 or C3, the following effects are played. That is, even if the first gaming state is set, during the period when the second determination cannot be executed, it is not notified that the first gaming state has been set, and the second determination can be executed. In this case, it is notified that the first gaming state has been set. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the second determination cannot be executed even though it is notified that the first game state has been set, and it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. It has the effect of being able to do it.

The gaming machine C4 has a remaining period determining means for determining the period from the timing at which the dynamic display of the second identification information ends to the ending of the first gaming state, and is based on the determination result by the remaining period determining means. The gaming machine C5 is characterized by having a notification determination means for determining whether or not to determine the notification timing by the notification timing determination means.

According to the gaming machine C5, it is determined whether or not to determine the notification timing based on the period during which the second determination can be executed in the first gaming state. Therefore, for example, the second determination is made in the first gaming state. When the executable period becomes extremely short, it is possible to prevent the player from being notified that the first gaming state has been set. Therefore, even though the player is notified that the first gaming state has been set, it is possible to prevent the first gaming state from ending in a short period of time and causing discomfort to the player. It has the effect of being able to do it.

<Characteristic D group> (Large hit discard, small hit interruption due to simultaneous fluctuation)
The first determination means capable of executing the first determination, the first display means for displaying the determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means. The first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the above, the second determination means capable of executing the second determination, and the second identification information for showing the determination result by the second determination means are displayed. The second display means, the second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information on the second display means for a predetermined period, and the first display means for showing the specific first determination result to the first display means. When the identification information is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and when the second identification information for showing the specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the second privilege game is performed. In a gaming machine having a privilege game execution means to be executed and a second privilege game type setting means for setting the content of the second privilege game from a plurality of privilege contents, the second dynamic display means is the first. 1 The second identification information can be dynamically displayed in a state where the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the specific second identification information can be dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means. When the second identification information indicating that it is a determination result is stopped and displayed, the dynamic display by the first dynamic display means is performed based on the privilege content set by the second privilege game type setting means. D1 is a gaming machine D1 having a stop control means for executing stop control.

Conventionally, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines have a game property (so-called simultaneous fluctuation type) in which a plurality of lottery is executed at the same time. In a gaming machine having such playability, if the lottery result of one lottery is a win, a privileged game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and another lottery game being executed is forced out of the game. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-319221) has been proposed. By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine forcibly stops and displays other lottery due to the stop display of the lottery result in which the privilege game is executed regardless of the type of the privilege game. There was a problem of giving discomfort to the person. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine with further improved interest in gaming.

According to the gaming machine D1, the stop control content for the first dynamic display can be set according to the content of the second privilege game to be executed, so that the situation of causing discomfort to the player is suppressed. It has the effect of being able to.

In the gaming machine D1, the stop control means is a forced stop control that stops and displays the dynamic display by the first dynamic display means with the first identification information indicating a determination result different from the specific first determination result. The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that it is capable of temporarily stopping the measurement of the period dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means until a predetermined restart condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are played. That is, it is possible to set whether to forcibly stop or temporarily stop the dynamic display by the first dynamic display means according to the content of the second privilege game to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessive privilege, and the privilege game to which a small privilege is given is executed, so that the privilege game to which a large privilege is given is discarded. It has the effect of being able to suppress this.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the second privilege game type setting means can set the first privilege type and the second privilege type that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege type, and is said to be stopped. The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that the control means executes the forced stop control when the second special type is set by the second privilege game type setting means.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines D1 or D2, the following effects are played. That is, when the second privilege type that is advantageous to the player is set, the dynamic display can be forcibly stopped by the first dynamic display means, so that an excessive privilege is given to the player. It has the effect of being able to suppress this.

In the gaming machine D3, when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result, the dynamic display executed by the first dynamic display means ends, and the specific first determination is performed. Until the first identification information for showing the result is displayed on the first display means, the second privilege game type setting means has an invalid means for invalidating the setting of the second privilege type. A gaming machine D4 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D3, the following effects are played. That is, when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific first determination result, the setting of the second privilege type is invalidated by the invalidation means during the dynamic display. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first privilege game and the second privilege game in which the second privilege type is set from being continuously executed, and the player is given an excessive privilege. It has the effect of being able to be suppressed.

In the gaming machine D3 or D4, the second privilege game type setting means sets the first privilege type and the second privilege type based on the determination result of the second determination means. The gaming machine D5, characterized in that the first privilege type is easier to set than the second privilege type.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D3 or D4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the first privilege type is easier to set than the second privilege type, even if the second privilege game is executed a lot, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessive privilege. There is.

<Other Thoughts 1> (The latent state can be set before and after the jackpot game)
The first determination means capable of executing the first determination, the first display means for displaying the determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means. A dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the above, a second determination means capable of executing the second determination, and a second display means for displaying the second identification information for showing the determination result by the second determination means. When the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result is displayed on the first display means, the first privilege game is executed, and the specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means. When the second identification information for indicating is displayed, the second determination is more likely to be executed in the gaming machine having the privilege game execution means for executing the second privilege game than the first determination. The game state setting means has a game state setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state that makes it easier for the first determination to be executed than the second determination, and the game state setting means is a predetermined first. When the condition is satisfied, the first gaming state is set during the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and when the predetermined second condition is satisfied, the first privilege game is completed. The gaming machine E1 characterized in that the first gaming state is set later.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (probability changing state) that is advantageous to the player during the period from the end of the privileged game to the winning of the next big hit according to the lottery result (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766 (Ab. 2012). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, which is advantageous to the player, is changed by the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set, that is, it is executed during the advantageous gaming state. If the next win is won immediately by the lottery, the period for which the advantageous gaming state is set is shortened, and if the lottery executed during the advantageous gaming state does not immediately win the next hit, the advantageous gaming state is set. Will be set for a longer period. As described above, there is a problem that the period in which the advantageous gaming state to be provided to the player is set differs depending on the result of the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set. Further, if the gaming machine has a game property of giving a privilege to the player during the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, there is a problem that the privilege given to the player is significantly different. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine with further improved interest in gaming.

According to the gaming machine E1, the timing at which the first gaming state is set can be divided into before and after the first privileged gaming, so that it is possible to provide a player with a surprising game. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic G group> (Small hit RUSH during the symbol confirmation period)
The first determination means capable of executing the first determination, the first display means for displaying the determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means. The first stop display means for displaying the stop display, the stop display period setting means for setting the stop display period for displaying the stop display of the first identification information by the first stop display means, and the second determination capable of executing the second determination. The means, the second display means for displaying the second identification information for showing the determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for showing the specific first determination result to the first display means. Is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and when the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the second privilege game is executed. In a gaming machine having a privileged game executing means, a first gaming state that makes it easier to execute the second determination than the first determination, and a first determination that makes it easier to execute the first determination than the second determination. The game state setting means has a game state setting means capable of setting two game states, and the game state setting means is said to have a stop display period during which the first identification information is stopped and displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine G1 characterized in that the first gaming state can be set.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (probability changing state) that is advantageous to the player during the period from the end of the privileged game to the winning of the next big hit according to the lottery result (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766 (Ab. 2012). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, which is advantageous to the player, is changed by the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set, that is, it is executed during the advantageous gaming state. If the next win is won immediately by the lottery, the period for which the advantageous gaming state is set is shortened, and if the lottery executed during the advantageous gaming state does not immediately win the next hit, the advantageous gaming state is set. Was set for a long period of time. That is, there is a problem that the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set differs depending on the result of the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set. Further, if the gaming machine has a game property of giving a privilege to the player during the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, there is a problem that the privilege given to the player is significantly different. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine with further improved interest in gaming.

According to the gaming machine G1, since the stop display period can be set in advance as the period in which the first gaming state is set, there is an effect that the period in which the first gaming state is executed can be appropriately managed. .. Further, since the first game state is set during the period in which the identification information for indicating the determination result of the first determination is stopped and displayed, the player is informed in advance of the game content after the first game state is completed. It can be grasped. With this configuration, for example, when the first gaming state is set in a state where a specific determination result is displayed as the determination result of the first determination, after the first gaming state is completed, It is possible to know in advance that the first privilege game will be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine G1 is characterized in that the stop display period setting means sets stop display periods of different lengths based on the determination result of the first determination means.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G1, the stop display period is set based on the determination result of the first determination means, so that the first privilege game is based on the determination result of the first determination means. The presence or absence of execution and the length of the stop display period are determined. Therefore, the player can be more closely watched by the determination result of the first determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine G2, when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result, the stop display period setting means has a longer stop display than when the determination result is other than the specific first determination result. The gaming machine G3 characterized in that the period can be easily set.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G2, when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific first determination result, the stop display period is longer than the case other than the specific first determination result. Is easy to set, so that the first gaming state in which a longer period is set can be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machines G2 or G3, the stop display period setting means can set stop display periods of different lengths when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result. The gaming machine G4 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G2 or G3, the length of the stop display period can be made different even in the case of a specific first determination result. Therefore, even in the case of a specific first determination result, since the period in which the first gaming state is set is different, the player is enthusiastically played so that the longer first gaming state is set. It has the effect of being able to make it.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the second determination means determines the specific second determination result with a higher probability than the probability that the first determination means determines the specific first determination result. The gaming machine G5, which is characterized in that it is configured in.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the following effects are played. That is, the second privilege game executed based on the determination result of the second determination by the second determination means is executed rather than the first privilege game executed based on the determination result of the first determination by the first determination means. Therefore, the first gaming state can be set to a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to have the player play the game in the hope that the first game state is set, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic H group> (Small hit RUSH by winning a big hit when the end of working hours fluctuates)
A first determination means capable of executing the first determination, a first display means displaying the first identification information for showing the determination result by the first determination means, and a second determination means capable of executing the second determination. And the second display means for displaying the second identification information for showing the determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for showing the specific first determination result to the first display means. The privilege of executing the first privilege game when displayed, and executing the second privilege game when the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means. In a gaming machine having a game executing means, a first gaming state that makes it easier to execute the second determination than the first determination, and a second that makes it easier to execute the first determination than the second determination. It has a gaming state setting means capable of setting a gaming state, and the gaming state setting means can execute the second determination when both the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition are satisfied. The gaming machine H1 characterized in that the first gaming state can be set during the first period.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (probability changing state) that is advantageous to the player during the period from the end of the privileged game to the winning of the next big hit according to the lottery result (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766 (Ab. 2012). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, whether or not an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set is set only by one lottery result. Therefore, the process until the advantageous gaming state is set is given to the player. There was a problem that it was not possible to play a game while entertaining. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine with further improved interest in gaming.

According to the gaming machine H1, when both the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition are satisfied, the first gaming state can be set for the first period, so that the second determination is made during the first gaming state. Can be reliably executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the first gaming state is terminated without executing the second determination even though the first gaming state is set, which gives the player a feeling of dissatisfaction. Can provide no games.

The gaming machine H1 has a first determination number measuring means capable of measuring the number of times of the first determination executed by the first determination means, and the first determination measured by the first determination number measuring means. The gaming machine H2 is characterized in that the first predetermined condition is satisfied when the number of times reaches a predetermined number of times.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H1, when the number of times of the first determination reaches a predetermined number, the first predetermined condition is satisfied, so that the first determination by the first determination means is executed. As a result, the game content can be reliably advanced toward the establishment of the first predetermined condition. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the state in which the first predetermined condition is not satisfied when the game is played for a long time, and it is possible to suppress the player from being uncomfortable.

The gaming machine H3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine H1 or H2, when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result, the second predetermined condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1 or H2, when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific first determination result, the second predetermined condition is satisfied, so that the player can understand. It has the effect of being able to provide easy games.

In the gaming machine H2 or H3, the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state even when the first predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition is satisfied, and the gaming state setting means When the first gaming state is set based on the satisfaction of the first predetermined condition, the first gaming state is set during the second period in which it is difficult to execute the second determination. The gaming machine H4 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H2 or H3, when only the first predetermined condition is satisfied, the first gaming state is set only in the second period in which it is difficult to execute the second determination. As a result, the first gaming state set when only the first predetermined condition is satisfied can be set to a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game so that both the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition are satisfied.

In the gaming machine H4, when the first gaming state is set based on the satisfaction of the second predetermined condition, the gaming state setting means is shorter than the first period and the first. The gaming machine H5, characterized in that the first gaming state is set during a third period longer than two periods.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H4, when only the second predetermined condition is satisfied, the first gaming state is set during the third period, so that the first predetermined condition is higher than the first predetermined condition. There is an effect that the game can be enthusiastically played in order to satisfy the second predetermined condition first.

<Characteristic I group> (The expected degree of small hit RUSH rush is variable by the number of time reductions)
A first determination means capable of executing the first determination, a first display means displaying the first identification information for showing the determination result by the first determination means, and a second determination means capable of executing the second determination. And the second display means for displaying the second identification information for showing the determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for showing the specific first determination result to the first display means. The privilege of executing the first privilege game when displayed, and executing the second privilege game when the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means. It is possible to set a game execution means, a first game state in which the second determination is easier to be executed than the first determination, and a second game state in which the first determination is easier to be executed than the second determination. In a gaming machine having the above-mentioned gaming state setting means, the gaming state setting means can set a third gaming state in which the first gaming state is more likely to be set than the second gaming state for a predetermined period. There is a third gaming state period setting means capable of setting a first period and a second period longer than the first period as a period in which the third gaming state is set, and the third gaming state is provided. The gaming machine I1 is characterized in that when the first period is set by the period setting means, it is easier to set the first gaming state than when the second period is set.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine capable of setting an advantageous gaming state (latent state) that is advantageous to the player by performing a game in which a plurality of gaming states are gradually shifted according to the lottery result (for example,). Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-058267). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, since the ease of setting the advantageous gaming state in the gaming state (quasi-advantageous gaming state) in which the advantageous gaming state is easily set is single, the aim is to set the advantageous gaming state. There was a problem that the content of the game played was monotonous. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine with further improved interest in gaming.

According to the gaming machine I1, the expectation that the first gaming state is set in the state where the third gaming state is set by differently setting the period for setting the third gaming state in which the first gaming state is easily set. Can be different. Therefore, since the player can be interested in the setting contents of the third game state, the player can enthusiastically play the game even in the game process until the first game state is set. It has the effect of being able to do it.

The gaming machine I1 has a progress determining means for determining the passage of the predetermined period set by the third gaming state period setting means, and the gaming state setting means has elapsed of the predetermined period by the progress determining means. The gaming machine I2 is characterized in that the first gaming state is set based on the establishment of the first setting condition that is satisfied when the above is determined.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine I1, the first gaming state is set when the period in which the third gaming state is set elapses, so that an easy-to-understand game can be provided. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2, when the gaming state setting means is in a state where the third gaming state is set and the first determination result by the first determination means is the specific first determination result. The gaming machine I3 is characterized in that the first gaming state is set based on the establishment of the second setting condition that is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1 or I2, even when a third gaming state in which the first setting condition is difficult to be satisfied, that is, a long-term third gaming state is set. During the third gaming state, the first gaming state can be set based on the determination result of the first determining means. Therefore, it is possible to aim for different transition conditions in order to set the first gaming state according to the period of the third gaming state to be set, and therefore, the motivation to play depends on the length of the period of the third gaming state to be set. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

In the gaming machines I2 and I3, the third gaming state period setting means can set a third period longer than the second period, and the progress determination means determines the progress of the third period. In this case, the gaming machine I4 is characterized by having a condition limiting means that does not satisfy the first setting condition.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1 or I2, when the passage of the third period is determined, the first setting condition is not satisfied by the condition limiting means, so that the first gaming state is set. You can definitely limit what you do. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the provision of an excessively advantageous state to the player.

In any of the gaming machines I2 to I4, the first gaming state period setting means for setting the period in which the first gaming state is set is provided, and the first gaming state period setting means is provided by the progress determination means. A gaming machine characterized in that when it is determined that the first period has elapsed, the period in which the first gaming state is set is set longer than when it is determined that the second period has elapsed. I5.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines I2 to I4, it is determined that the second period has elapsed for a longer period than the determination that the second period has elapsed. The game state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can pay attention to the determination result of the progress determination means.

<Characteristic J group> (Surely small hit RUSH for a predetermined period)
A first determination means capable of executing the first determination, a first display means displaying the first identification information for showing the determination result by the first determination means, and a second determination capable of executing the second determination. The means, the second display means for displaying the second identification information for showing the determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for showing the specific first determination result to the first display means. Is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and when the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the second privilege game is executed. In a gaming machine having the privileged game executing means, the first gaming state that makes it easier to execute the second determination than the first determination, and the first determination that makes it easier to execute the first determination than the second determination. 2 The game state can be set by the game state setting means, the advantageous period setting means for setting the advantageous period in which the first game state can be continuously set by the game state setting means, and the advantageous period setting means. A first termination condition that is satisfied when the set advantageous period has elapsed, or an termination means that terminates the first gaming state when a second termination condition different from the first termination condition is satisfied. A gaming machine J1 having an end limiting means for limiting the establishment of the second end condition when a predetermined continuation condition is satisfied.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine capable of setting an advantageous gaming state (latent state) that is advantageous to the player by performing a game in which a plurality of gaming states are gradually shifted according to the lottery result (for example,). Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-058267). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set changes based on the lottery result executed during the advantageous gaming state, so that the advantageous gaming state is provided to the player for a predetermined period. There is a problem that the advantageous gaming state is terminated in a short period of time even though the advantageous gaming state is set with difficulty, and the motivation for playing is reduced. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine with further improved interest in gaming.

According to the gaming machine J1, when a predetermined continuation condition is satisfied, the establishment of the second termination condition can be restricted by the termination limiting means. Therefore, it is possible to continuously set the first gaming state during the advantageous period set by the advantageous period setting means, and there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In the gaming machine J1, the gaming state setting means can set an advantageous first gaming state in which the predetermined continuation condition can be satisfied and a disadvantageous first gaming state in which the predetermined continuation condition cannot be satisfied. A gaming machine J2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J1, the advantageous first gaming state and the disadvantageous first gaming state can be set by the gaming state setting means, which is more advantageous than the gaming state setting means. There is an effect that the game can be enthusiastically performed so that the first game state is set.

The gaming machine J1 or J2 is characterized in that the predetermined continuation condition is satisfied when the result of the first determination of the first determination means is the specific first determination result. J3.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1 or J2, when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific first determination result, a predetermined continuation condition is satisfied, so that the first determination means is satisfied. There is an effect that the player can be enthusiastically played the game so that the determination result of the above is the specific first determination result.

The gaming machine J4 is characterized in that the gaming machine J2 or J3 has a notifying means for notifying that the advantageous first gaming state is set.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J2 or J3, the notification means notifies that the advantageous first gaming state is set, so that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand game. There is an effect.

In any of the gaming machines J2 to J4, there is a discriminating means for determining that the condition for satisfying the second end condition is satisfied during the period in which the advantageous first gaming state is set, and the discriminating means of the said discriminating means. The gaming machine J5 is characterized by having a second notifying means for notifying that the condition for satisfying the second ending condition is satisfied based on the determination result.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines J2 to J4, the second notification means that the condition for satisfying the second end condition is satisfied during the period in which the advantageous first gaming state is set. Therefore, if it is assumed that the first gaming state set this time is not the advantageous first gaming state but the disadvantageous first gaming state, whether or not the first gaming state has ended is determined. It can be discriminated by the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can experience the superiority of the advantageous first gaming state set this time.

<Characteristic K group> (Provide a period during which the number of time reductions is not subtracted during the time reduction state)
The first determination means capable of executing the first determination, the first display means on which the first identification information for showing the determination result by the first determination means is displayed, and the first identification information on the first display means. The first determination is made when the first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the above first period and the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result are displayed on the first display means. A gaming state setting means capable of setting an advantageous gaming state for a predetermined period, a period measuring means for measuring the period of the advantageous gaming state set by the gaming state setting means, and the predetermined period measuring means. An ending means for terminating the advantageous gaming state when the period is measured, and a measurement limiting means for limiting the measurement of the period of the advantageous gaming state by the period measuring means when a predetermined limiting condition is satisfied. The gaming machine K1 characterized by having the above.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player during the period from the end of the privileged game to the winning of the next big hit according to the lottery result (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766 (Ab. 2012). By the way, since the above-mentioned gaming machine is configured to set the period until the number of lottery reaches a predetermined number as the period in which the advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is set, the advantageous gaming state is set. There was a problem that the period could be easily predicted. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine with further improved interest in gaming.

According to the gaming machine K1, since the measurement for a predetermined period in which the advantageous gaming state is set can be restricted by the measurement limiting means, the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set can be extended. Therefore, it is possible to provide a player with an unexpected game, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine K1, the second determination means capable of executing the second determination, the second display means for displaying the second identification information for showing the determination result by the second determination means, and the second display means thereof. When the second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information for a predetermined second period and the first identification information for showing a specific first determination result are displayed on the first display means. , When the second identification information for executing the first privilege game and indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the privilege game execution means for executing the second privilege game and the privilege game execution means. The second identification information can be dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. The gaming machine K2 is characterized in that, when the determination result of the second determination means is the specific second determination result, the predetermined restriction condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1, the second determination means can be dynamically displayed while the first identification information is dynamically displayed. When the determination result of is a specific second determination result, a predetermined restriction condition is satisfied. Thereby, the first determination by the first determination means can be executed in a state where the measurement of the period of the advantageous gaming state is restricted. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine K2, the measurement limiting means is in the advantageous gaming state by the period measuring means while the dynamic display corresponding to the specific second determination result is executed by the second dynamic display means. A gaming machine K3 characterized in that it limits the measurement of a period.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1, the period of the advantageous gaming state is measured while the dynamic display corresponding to the specific second determination result is executed by the second dynamic display means. Is restricted. Therefore, the first determination by the first determination means can be executed in a state where the measurement of the period of the advantageous gaming state is restricted. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

One of the gaming machines K1 to K3 is characterized by having a notification means for notifying that the measurement limiting means limits the measurement of the period of the advantageous gaming state by the period measuring means. Game machine K4.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the notification means notifies that the measurement of the period is restricted by the measurement limiting means, so that the game can be easily understood by the player. It has the effect of being able to provide.

<Characteristic L group> (Small hit RUSH with different end conditions)
A first determination means capable of executing the first determination, a first display means displaying the first identification information for showing the determination result by the first determination means, and a second determination means capable of executing the second determination. And the second display means for displaying the second identification information for showing the determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for showing the specific first determination result to the first display means. The privilege of executing the first privilege game when displayed, and executing the second privilege game when the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means. In a gaming machine having a game executing means, a first gaming state that makes it easier to execute the second determination than the first determination, and a second that makes it easier to execute the first determination than the second determination. The game state setting means has a game state setting means capable of setting a game state, and the game state setting means satisfies a predetermined first condition or a second condition different from the first condition. The first game state is set in the above, and the first game state is set based on the condition of the second condition, rather than the first game state is set based on the condition of the first condition. The gaming machine L1 is characterized in that the case where the gaming state is set makes it easier for the first gaming state to continue.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine capable of setting an advantageous gaming state (latent state) that is advantageous to the player by performing a game in which a plurality of gaming states are gradually shifted according to the lottery result (for example,). Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-058267). By the way, since the above-mentioned gaming machine has a single end condition of the advantageous gaming state, the ease of continuing the set advantageous gaming state cannot be different, and the player in the advantageous gaming state cannot be different. There is a problem that the game to be provided becomes monotonous and the motivation to play is reduced. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine with further improved interest in gaming.

According to the gaming machine L1, the first gaming state can be set because the first gaming state that is easy to continuously set and the first gaming state that is difficult to continuously set can be set by the gaming state setting means. Even after the game is played, it is possible to play the game while expecting that the first game state will continue for a long period of time, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine L1, the gaming state setting means sets a gaming state different from the first gaming state when a predetermined end condition is satisfied in the state where the first gaming state is set. The case of setting the first gaming state based on the satisfaction of the second condition is better than the case of setting the first gaming state based on the satisfaction of the first condition. A gaming machine L2 characterized in that the conditions are difficult to be satisfied.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L1, the first game state is set based on the second condition being satisfied, rather than the first gaming state being set based on the first condition being satisfied. When the gaming state is set, it is possible to make it more difficult to end the first gaming state. Therefore, since it is possible to set a first game state that is easy to end and a first game state that is difficult to end for the player, the first game state that is difficult to end even after the first game state is set. It is possible to play the game while hoping that the game state is set, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine L2 has an end condition setting means capable of setting a first end condition and a second end condition different from the first end condition as the predetermined end condition, and the second condition is satisfied. The gaming machine L3 is characterized in that when the first gaming state is set based on the above, the first ending condition is not satisfied.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L2, when the first gaming state is set based on the satisfaction of the second condition, the first ending condition is not satisfied, so that it is difficult to end. The first gaming state can be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game in order to satisfy the second condition.

In the gaming machine L3, the ending condition setting means sets the second ending condition when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result. L4.

According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L3, a second end condition is set when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific first determination result. As a result, when the first gaming state is terminated based on the satisfaction of the second termination condition, the privileged game can be provided. Therefore, even if the first game state ends, the player can be given a privilege, so that there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

The gaming machine L5 is characterized in that the gaming machine L3 or L4 has a notifying means for notifying that the first gaming state has been set based on the satisfaction of the second condition.

According to the gaming machine L5, since the notification means notifies that the first end condition is not satisfied, there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

<Characteristic M group> (Set the fall invalid period with high accuracy)
A first determination means capable of executing the first determination, a first display means for displaying the first identification information for showing the determination result by the first determination means, and a first determination specific to the first display means. The privilege game execution means for executing the first privilege game when the first identification information for showing the result is displayed, and the first determination means executed when a predetermined setting condition is satisfied. In a gaming machine having a gaming state setting means capable of setting an advantageous gaming state in which the result of the first determination is more likely to be the specific first determination result than the normal gaming state, the advantageous gaming state is achieved by the gaming state setting means. When the predetermined transition condition is satisfied in the state in which is set, the gaming state transition means for shifting the gaming state from the advantageous gaming state to the normal gaming state and the establishment of the predetermined transition condition are restricted. A gaming machine M1 characterized by having a transition condition limiting means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, according to the lottery result, a predetermined lottery (probability change state) is set to be advantageous to the player during the period from the end of the privileged game to the next big hit. A gaming machine has been proposed that terminates an advantageous gaming state when a player wins a fall lottery. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-152). By the way, since the above-mentioned gaming machine is configured so that the falling lottery is executed based on the execution of the winning / failing lottery of the game, there is a sense of danger that the advantageous gaming state is always terminated for the player. There was a problem that it was not possible to play the game with peace of mind. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine in which a player can play a game with peace of mind and the interest of the game is improved.

According to the gaming machine M1, the transition from the advantageous gaming state to the normal gaming state can be restricted by the transition condition limiting means, so that the gaming state shifts from the advantageous gaming state to the normal gaming state. It is possible to set a game period that does not occur. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a period for the player to play the game with peace of mind.

In the gaming machine M1, the first determination means executes the first determination when a predetermined first determination condition is satisfied, and when the predetermined first determination condition is satisfied, the first determination condition is satisfied. 1 It has a special determination means capable of executing a special determination different from the determination, and when the determination result by the special determination means is a specific special determination result, the predetermined transition condition is satisfied. The featured gaming machine M2.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M1, a special determination is executed when the first determination condition is satisfied, and a predetermined transition condition is determined when the determination result is a specific special determination result. Is established. Therefore, since the determination by the first determination means and the determination by the special determination means can be set in association with each other, there is an effect that an easy-to-understand game can be provided.

In the gaming machine M1, when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific second determination result different from the specific first determination result, the second privilege game different from the first privilege game is executed. A second privilege game execution means and a variable ball entry means in which the game ball is variably operated to an open state in which the game ball can enter the inside when the second privilege game is executed by the second privilege game execution means. , A variable control means for controlling the variable operation of the variable ball entry means, a specific area through which the game ball can pass is provided inside the variable ball entry means, and the game ball can pass through the specific area. The gaming machine M3, characterized in that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied when the machine passes through.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine M1, a predetermined transition condition is satisfied when the gaming ball passes through a specific area. Therefore, since the transition condition can be satisfied at a timing different from the determination timing of the first determination means, it is possible to provide the player with a surprising game. Further, since it is possible to determine whether or not the transition condition is satisfied based on the game result of whether or not the player fires the game ball, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate can be increased.

In the gaming machine M3, the variable control means has a first variable control in which a ball entering the variable ball entry means easily passes through the specific region, and a first variable control means in which the ball is less likely to pass through the specific region than the first variable control. 2 Variable control and a gaming machine M4 characterized by being configurable.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M3, the variable control means provides a first variable control in which a ball entering the variable ball entry means easily passes through a specific region and a second variable control in which it is difficult to pass. Since it is possible to set and, it is possible to provide a player with a surprising game. Further, since it is possible to determine whether or not the transition condition is satisfied based on the game result of whether or not the player fires the game ball, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate can be increased.

The gaming machine M4 is characterized in that the gaming machine M4 has a notification means for notifying that the second variable control is set by the variable control means.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine M4, it is notified that the second variable control is set by the notification means, so that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. be.

<Characteristic N group> (Selection of small hit games)
A first determination means capable of executing the first determination, a first display means for displaying the first identification information for showing the determination result by the first determination means, and a first determination specific to the first display means. When the first identification information for showing the result is displayed, the privilege game executing means for executing the first privilege game and the determination result of the first determination means are different from the specific first determination result. In the case of the second determination result of the above, the second privilege game is executed by the second privilege game execution means for executing the second privilege game different from the first privilege game and the second privilege game execution means. In this case, it has a variable entry means in which the game ball is variably operated to an open state in which the game ball can enter the inside, and a variable control means for controlling the variable operation of the variable entry means. A specific area through which a game ball can pass is provided inside the variable ball entry means, and a game state setting means capable of setting a disadvantageous game state that is disadvantageous to the player when the game ball passes through the specific area is provided. The gaming machine N1 characterized by being.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There has been proposed a gaming machine capable of setting an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to a player when an advantageous privileged game is executed and a gaming ball passes through a specific area during the privileged game (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-152). In the above-mentioned gaming machine, since the advantageous gaming state is set when the gaming ball passes through the specific area, it is intended to pay attention to whether or not the gaming ball passes through the specific area. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine with further improved interest in gaming.

According to the gaming machine N1, when the gaming ball passes through a specific area, a disadvantageous gaming state is set, so that there is an effect that a novel game property can be provided to the player.

In the gaming machine N1, the variable control means has a first variable control in which a ball entering the variable ball entry means easily passes through the specific region, and a first variable control means in which the ball is less likely to pass through the specific region than the first variable control. 2 Variable control and a gaming machine N2 characterized in that it can be set.

According to the game machine N2, in addition to the effect of the game machine N1, the first variable control in which the ball entering the variable ball entry means easily passes through the specific region by the variable control means, and the first variable control thereof Since either of the second variable control that is difficult to pass through the specific area is set, the launched game ball can pass through the specific area when the game ball is launched according to the variable control content to be executed. Gender can be different. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the enjoyment of the player deciding whether or not to launch the game ball.

In the gaming machine N2, the second privilege game executed by the second privilege game executing means has a notification means capable of notifying that the second variable control is set by the variable control means. A gaming machine N3 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine N2, the notification means notifies that the second variable control is set, so that when the player decides whether or not to launch the gaming ball. Information that can be used as a reference can be provided. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the enjoyment of the player deciding whether or not to launch the game ball.

In any one of the gaming machine N1 to the gaming machine N3, the invalid means has a detection means for detecting that the game ball has passed through the specific area and an invalid means for invalidating the detection result by the detection means. The gaming machine N4 is characterized in that the detection result by the detection means is invalidated based on the determination result of the first determination means.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines N1 to N3, the detection result by the detecting means can be invalidated by the invalidating means, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine N4, the measuring means for measuring the number of game balls detected by the detecting means during the period in which the detection result by the detecting means is invalidated by the invalid means, and the measurement result of the measuring means. The gaming machine N5, characterized by having a measurement result notification means for notifying based information.

According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N4, the measurement result notification means notifies the information based on the measurement result of the measuring means during the period in which the detection result by the detecting means is invalidated, so that the information is invalid. The player can grasp the number detected by the detection means during the period. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily feel the superiority.

<Characteristic O group> (End the time reduction based on the condition that was satisfied earlier among multiple conditions)
The first determination means capable of executing the first determination, the first display means for displaying the determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means. The privilege of executing the first privilege game when the first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying and the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result are stopped and displayed on the first display means. A game execution means, a first game state in which the first determination is easily executed, a second game state in which the first determination is more difficult to be executed than the first game state, and a game state setting means that can be set. The possessed gaming machine has an ending means for terminating the first gaming state when a predetermined first ending condition is satisfied or when a second ending condition different from the first ending condition is satisfied. The ending means is characterized in that the first gaming state is terminated based on the previously established termination condition among the first termination condition and the second termination condition. O1.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, a gaming machine capable of changing the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-12907). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the subtraction of the period in which the advantageous gaming state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player is set is the timing at which the special symbol changes, so that the advantageous gaming state should be set to the maximum. There was a problem that the player could not do it and the player was uncomfortable. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine with further improved interest in gaming.

According to the gaming machine O1, a first ending condition and a second ending condition are provided as conditions for ending the first gaming state, and when any of the ending conditions is terminated, the first gaming state is terminated. , There is an effect that the first gaming state can be surely ended.

In the gaming machine O1, the second determination means capable of executing the second determination, the second display means for displaying the second identification information for showing the determination result by the second determination means, and the second display means thereof. The second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information for a predetermined second period, and the privilege game execution means for showing the second display means a specific second determination result. When the second identification information is displayed, the second privilege game is executed, and the second movement is performed while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. The second identification information can be dynamically displayed by the target display means, and when the first determination means is executed, the first termination condition is satisfied and the second determination means is executed. The gaming machine O2 is characterized in that the second termination condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O1, the first termination condition is satisfied based on the first determination by the first determination means, and the second termination condition is established based on the second determination by the second determination means. This is a gaming machine capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information by the second dynamic display means while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. However, there is an effect that the first gaming state can be appropriately terminated.

In the gaming machine O2, the first execution number measuring means for measuring the number of executions of the first determination means, the second execution number measuring means for measuring the execution number of the second determination means, and the first execution number measuring means. The total number of times the first determination means is executed and the total number of times the first determination means is executed as the first period in which the first gaming state is continuously set. , The first period setting means for setting a predetermined number of times including the number of executions of the second determination means, and the dynamic display corresponding to the case where the number of executions of the first determination means becomes the predetermined number of times are being executed. The second determination means is executed by the second determination means in a state of having an execution determination means for determining that the slingshot is being executed and the state determination means determining that the dynamic display is being executed. When this is done, the gaming machine O3 is characterized in that the second termination condition is satisfied before the second determination is executed.

According to the game O3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O2, the second ending condition can be satisfied even during the dynamic display in which the first ending condition can be satisfied, so that the first gaming state can be appropriately satisfied. Has the effect of being able to terminate.

In the gaming machine O3, the first termination condition is that the number of executions of the first determination means is the number of executions of the first determination means after the dynamic display corresponding to the case where the number of executions of the first determination means becomes the predetermined number of times is completed. The gaming machine O4 is characterized in that it is established at any time until the first determination corresponding to the case where the number of times exceeds a predetermined number is executed.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O3, the first determination is made after the dynamic display corresponding to the case where the first determination means is executed a predetermined number of times is completed. Since the first determination corresponding to the case where the number of times the means is executed becomes larger than the predetermined number of times is executed is established, the predetermined first period can be set longer. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from being uncomfortable.

In the gaming machine O4, the third determination means capable of executing the third determination, the third display means for displaying the third identification information for showing the determination result by the third determination means, and the third display means thereof. When the third dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the third identification information and the third identification information for indicating a specific third determination result on the third display means are stopped and displayed, the third privilege. It has a third privilege game execution means for executing a game, and the third determination means sets the second game state when the first game state is set by the game state setting means. The gaming machine O5 is characterized in that it is easier to execute than in the case of the above.

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine O4, the first gaming state is set because it has a third determination means that makes it easier to execute when the first gaming state is set. By lengthening the period, the period during which the third determination means can be easily executed can be lengthened. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from being uncomfortable.

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine γ1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the display of the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine γ2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed in the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine γ3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. Some advantageous games are executed (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).
However, there was a demand for further improvement in the interest of games.
The present technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 displays a first determination means capable of executing the first determination and a first identification information for showing the determination result by the first determination means. 1 Display means, a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information on the first display means, and the first identification information for showing a specific first determination result on the first display means. Is stopped and displayed, the privilege game execution means for executing the first privilege game, the first game state in which the first determination is easily executed, and the first determination are more difficult to execute than the first game state. It has a second gaming state and a game state setting means that can be set, and when a predetermined first ending condition is satisfied, or when a second ending condition different from the first ending condition is satisfied, The ending means has an ending means for terminating the first gaming state, and the ending means is the first gaming state based on the previously established ending condition of the first ending condition and the second ending condition. Is to terminate.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 displays a second determination means capable of executing the second determination and a second identification information for showing the determination result by the second determination means in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1. The second display means is provided, and the second display means has a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information for a predetermined second period, and the privilege game execution means is the first. The second privilege game is executed when the second identification information for showing a specific second determination result is displayed on the display means, and the first identification information is executed by the first dynamic display means. Is dynamically displayed, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means, and the first determination means is executed to execute the first end. The second end condition is satisfied when the condition is satisfied and the second determination means is executed.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in which the first execution number measuring means for measuring the number of executions of the first determination means and the second execution number of the second determination means are measured. The totaling means for summing the two execution number measuring means, the measurement result of the first execution number measuring means, and the measurement result of the second execution number measuring means, and the first gaming state are continuously set. As the first period, the first period setting means for setting a predetermined number of times obtained by adding the number of executions of the first determination means and the number of executions of the second determination means, and the number of executions of the first determination means are the predetermined times. It has an execution determination means for determining whether the dynamic display is being executed corresponding to the number of times, and the state determination means determines that the dynamic display is being executed. When the second determination is executed by the second determination means in the state, the second end condition is satisfied before the second determination is executed.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, and the first end condition is that the dynamic display corresponding to the case where the number of times the first determination means is executed becomes the predetermined number of times is completed. After that, it is established at any time until the first determination corresponding to the case where the number of executions of the first determination means becomes larger than the predetermined number of executions is executed.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 5 displays a third determination means capable of executing the third determination and a third identification information for showing the determination result by the third determination means in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4. The third display means, the third dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the third identification information on the third display means, and the third display means for showing a specific third determination result to the third display means. 3 The third privilege game execution means for executing the third privilege game when the identification information is stopped and displayed, and the third determination means sets the first game state by the game state setting means. When this is done, it is easier to execute the third determination than when the second gaming state is set.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, a first determination means capable of executing the first determination and a first display means for displaying the first identification information for showing the determination result by the first determination means. , The first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information on the first display means, and the first identification information for showing the specific first determination result on the first display means are stopped and displayed. In this case, the privilege game execution means for executing the first privilege game, the first game state in which the first determination is easily executed, and the second game state in which the first determination is more difficult to execute than the first game state. And a game state setting means that can be set, and when a predetermined first end condition is satisfied, or when a second end condition different from the first end condition is satisfied, the first game The ending means has an ending means for terminating the state, and the terminating means terminates the first gaming state based on the previously established ending condition among the first ending condition and the second ending condition. Is.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1. That is, the second determination means capable of executing the second determination, the second display means on which the second identification information for showing the determination result by the second determination means is displayed, and the second display means. The second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for a predetermined second period, and the privilege game execution means for showing the second display means a specific second determination result. When the identification information is displayed, the second privilege game is executed, and the second dynamic display means is performed while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. The second identification information can be dynamically displayed, the first termination condition is satisfied by executing the first determination means, and the second determination means is executed. The second termination condition is satisfied.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2. That is, the measurement results of the first execution count measuring means for measuring the execution count of the first determination means, the second execution count measuring means for measuring the execution count of the second determination means, and the first execution count measuring means. And the measurement result of the second execution number measuring means, the summing means, and the execution number of the first determination means and the first as the first period in which the first gaming state is continuously set. (2) The first period setting means for setting a predetermined number of times including the number of executions of the determination means and the dynamic display corresponding to the case where the number of executions of the first determination means becomes the predetermined number of times are being executed. When the second determination means is executed by the second determination means in a state where the state determination means determines that the dynamic display is being executed. In addition, the second end condition is satisfied before the second determination is executed.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3. That is, the first end condition is that the number of executions of the first determination means is more than the predetermined number of times after the dynamic display corresponding to the case where the number of executions of the first determination means becomes the predetermined number of times is completed. It is established at any time until the first determination corresponding to the case where the number increases.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 4. That is, the third determination means capable of executing the third determination, the third display means on which the third identification information for showing the determination result by the third determination means is displayed, and the third display means. When the third dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information and the third identification information for showing the specific third determination result are stopped and displayed on the third display means, the third privilege game is executed. The third privilege game execution means is provided, and the third determination means is set when the first game state is set by the game state setting means, and the second game state is set. This makes it easier to execute the third determination.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
S306 First determination means
S 308 Game state setting means
S504 1st dynamic display period setting means
S508 1st dynamic display means S905 2nd determination means
S1205 Second dynamic display period setting means
S1209 Second dynamic display means
S5203 Notification timing determination means

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the present invention has a first display in which a first determination means capable of executing the first determination and a first identification information for showing a determination result by the first determination means are displayed. The means, the first dynamic display means for causing the first display means to dynamically display the first identification information, and the period during which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means are determined. A first dynamic display period determination means, a second determination means capable of executing a second determination, a second display means for displaying a second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means, and a second display means thereof. A second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information on the second display means, and a second dynamic for determining a period during which the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means. When the display period determining means and the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result are displayed on the first display means, the first privilege game is executed and the second display means is specified. It has a privilege game execution means for executing the second privilege game when the second identification information for showing the second determination result is displayed, and the second determination is executed rather than the first determination. The game state setting means is provided with a game state setting means capable of setting a first game state for facilitating and a second game state for making the first determination easier to execute than the second determination, and the game state setting means is the first. predetermined shift condition after setting the gaming state can be set to the second game state on the basis that has been established, the gaming machine, when the first game condition is set by the game state setting means Oite, the second identification information of the dynamic data of the first game status based on the status of the display is notified by identifiable notification manner to the player that has been set timing is configured to be determined, said first When the transition condition is satisfied without executing the second determination during one gaming state, the notification in the notification mode is not executed, and when the first gaming state is set, the notification is set. Regardless of the result of the second determination executed, the specific notification regarding the subsequent game can be executed .

According to the gaming machine of the present invention , the first determination means capable of executing the first determination, the first display means for displaying the first identification information for showing the determination result by the first determination means, and the first display means thereof. 1 A first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information on the display means, and a first dynamic display for determining a period during which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. The period determination means, the second determination means capable of executing the second determination, the second display means for displaying the second identification information for showing the determination result by the second determination means, and the second display means thereof. A second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information, and a second dynamic display period determining means for determining a period during which the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means. , When the first identification information for showing a specific first determination result is displayed on the first display means, the first privilege game is executed, and the specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means. A first game having a privilege game execution means for executing a second privilege game when the second identification information for indicating is displayed, and making the second determination easier to execute than the first determination. The game state setting means is provided with a game state setting means capable of setting a state and a second game state that makes it easier for the first determination to be executed than the second determination, and the game state setting means sets the first game state. after a settable the second game state based on the predetermined shift condition is satisfied, the gaming machine, in no event where the first game condition is set by the game state setting means, said first 2 dynamic data the first game state based on the status of the display is notified by identifiable notification manner to the player that has been set timing of the identification information is configured to be determined, in the first game condition If the transition condition is satisfied without executing the second determination, the notification in the notification mode is not executed, and when the first gaming state is set, the execution is performed. 2 Regardless of the result of the determination, the specific notification regarding the subsequent game can be executed .

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
S306 first determination means S308 gaming state setting means S504 first dynamic display period determining unit S508 first dynamic display unit S905 the second judging unit S1205 second dynamic display period determining unit S1209 second dynamic display hand stage

Claims (5)

A first determination means capable of executing the first determination,
The first display means for displaying the first identification information for showing the determination result by the first determination means, and the first display means.
A first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information on the first display means,
When the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result is stopped and displayed on the first display means, the privilege game execution means for executing the first privilege game and the privilege game execution means.
In a gaming machine having a first gaming state in which the first determination is easy to be executed, a second gaming state in which the first determination is more difficult to be executed than the first gaming state, and a game state setting means that can be set. ,
It has an ending means for terminating the first gaming state when a predetermined first ending condition is satisfied or when a second ending condition different from the first ending condition is satisfied.
The ending means is a gaming machine characterized in that the first gaming state is terminated based on the termination condition previously established among the first termination condition and the second termination condition. A second determination means capable of executing the second determination,
A second display means for displaying the second identification information for showing the determination result by the second determination means, and
The second display means has a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information for a predetermined second period.
The privilege game execution means executes the second privilege game when the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means.
While the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means.
Claim 1 is characterized in that the first termination condition is satisfied by executing the first determination means, and the second termination condition is satisfied by executing the second determination means. The described gaming machine. The first execution number measuring means for measuring the execution number of the first determination means, and
The second execution number measuring means for measuring the execution number of the second determination means, and
A totaling means for summing the measurement result of the first execution number measuring means and the measurement result of the second execution number measuring means.
As a first period in which the first gaming state is continuously set, a first period setting means for setting a predetermined number of times obtained by adding the number of executions of the first determination means and the number of executions of the second determination means. ,
It has an execution determination means for determining that the dynamic display is being executed corresponding to the case where the number of executions of the first determination means becomes the predetermined number of times.
When the second determination is executed by the second determination means in a state where the state determination means determines that the dynamic display is being executed, the second determination is not executed. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the second termination condition is satisfied before. The first termination condition is that the number of executions of the first determination means is larger than the predetermined number of times after the dynamic display corresponding to the case where the number of executions of the first determination means becomes the predetermined number of times is completed. The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the gaming machine is established at any time until the first determination corresponding to the above case is executed. A third determination means capable of executing the third determination,
A third display means for displaying the third identification information for showing the determination result by the third determination means, and
A third dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the third identification information on the third display means,
The third display means has a third privilege game execution means for executing the third privilege game when the third identification information for indicating a specific third determination result is stopped and displayed.
The third determination means makes it easier to execute the third determination when the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means than when the second gaming state is set. The gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by the above.

Images